Copyright: Copyright © 1997 by Micrografx, Inc.
Citation: Copyright © 1997 by Micrografx, Inc.


BITMAPS.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


What Is a Bitmap Image?

A bitmap is an image made of tiny dots called pixels. Some examples of bitmap images include the wallpaper used in Windows, drawings created in paint programs, many Web (Internet) graphics, and scanned photographs.

By comparison, objects created in Designer are vector-based, relying on lines and mathematical calculations to create drawings. Vector objects are more precise, usually create smaller file sizes, and are generally better for computer-based drawing because they always appear in print and on screen at the highest possible resolution.

Bitmap images are best for "real life" images such as photographs. Unlike vector drawings, a bitmap image's resolution can change when you resize the image. For example, enlarging a bitmap image makes the pixels larger and more pronounced. By contrast, the resolution does not change if you enlarge the vector drawing.

Enlarged Bitmap Image	Enlarged Vector Drawing
You can combine bitmap images with your Designer drawings to create exceptional illustrations.

Types of Bitmap Image Files

Bitmap images are stored in a variety of file formats. Designer imports and exports the following bitmap formats: BMP, DIB, GIF, JPG, PCD, PCX, RAS, TGA, and TIF. To learn more about importing, see Importing and Exporting Files.

Bitmap Image Information

After importing a bitmap image, you can get information about it using Image Information [image] on the Image ribbon. The Image Information dialog box shows the bitmap format, the image's cropped width and height, the image's total width and height, and the file size of the image.

Note

If you save a file containing a bitmap image in a file format that does not support bitmap images, then the bitmap image is dropped from the saved file. For example, bitmap images are dropped from files saved in GEM format (a vector-based format).


To get information about a bitmap image


Using Bitmap Images in Your Drawings

Importing a Bitmap Image

Exporting a Bitmap Image

Converting an Object to a Bitmap Image

Manipulating Bitmap Images

Reshaping a Bitmap Image

Editing a Bitmap Image

Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Cropping a Bitmap Image

Slicing a Bitmap Image

Why Trace Bitmap Images?

Basics of Tracing

Applying Image Effects


To get information about a bitmap image

1	Select the bitmap image.

2	Click Image [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Image Information [image]. The Image Information dialog box opens.

Tips

The Image Information dialog box shows you the format and the size of the selected bitmap.

The number of colors in the selected bitmap is shown in the Colors list box on the Image ribbon.


What Is a Bitmap Image


Using Bitmap Images in Your Drawings

Bitmap images can add variety and visual appeal to your drawings. Here are some examples of what you can do with bitmap images.

Add scanned photographs to a report or presentation.

Use a bitmap image as a background for your illustration.

Create a library of bitmap images to use in your drawings.

Trace a bitmap image and then edit the tracing like a vector-based object.

Add text, borders, or a drop shadow to enhance the bitmap image.

Convert a vector-based object or drawing to a bitmap image for a Web (Internet) page.

Tip

You can print a bitmap image on a printer, but not on a pen plotter.


What is a Bitmap Image?

Manipulating Bitmap Images

Importing a Bitmap Image

Exporting a Bitmap Image

Converting an Object to a Bitmap Image


Importing a Bitmap Image

You can import the following bitmap formats into a Designer document: BMP, DIB, GIF, JPG, PCD, PCX, RAS, TGA, and TIF.

After importing a bitmap image, you can manipulate and edit the image. For example, you can resize, add text and objects, and reshape the image. To import a bitmap image, use the Import command on the File menu.

An imported bitmap image appears in the center of your document. To reposition it, select the image and drag it to the desired location.

For more information about importing, see Importing and Exporting Files.


To import a file


Exporting a Bitmap Image

Importing and Exporting Files

Importing a File


Exporting a Bitmap Image

The Export command on the File menu lets you export your drawings to files as bitmap images. The export bitmap formats supported by Designer are: BMP, DIB, GIF, JPG, PCD, PCX, RAS, TGA, and TIF.

Bitmap Image Export Options

The Setup button on the Export dialog box lets you set the exported file's configuration settings. The options available are specific to the bitmap format you are exporting. For example, if you are exporting a document in JPEG File Interchange format (jpg), you can select a compression level for the file, because the JPEG format supports file compression.

The configuration settings that you specify for an export format become the new default configuration settings for that format.

Anti-Aliasing

Anti-Aliasing is a technique for reducing the jagged-appearing boundary along the edges of different-colored shapes within a bitmap image. This process blends the boundaries between adjacent colors so that they appear smoother. As a general rule, printed images look better when anti-aliased, but many images designed just for display on the computer screen, such as images for the Web (Internet) or toolbar buttons, look better when aliased.

If you want an exported image anti-aliased, select the Anti-Alias Export Bitmaps option on the Export dialog box. If you want the exported image to be aliased, deselect this option. You can specify the default setting for this option using the General tab of the Options dialog box.

Interlacing

Interlacing is a technique for storing information so that some parts of the information are interspersed between other parts. For graphic images, interlacing causes the image to appear first with poor resolution and then improve in resolution until the entire image is displayed. Interlacing is widely used with Web graphics, because it lets a viewer see what an image looks like before the entire image is downloaded by a browser.

Designer supports interlacing for several graphic formats, including GIF. If you want to interlace an image when you export it in one of these formats, click the Setup button on the Export dialog box. Then choose Interlaced on the Export Configuration dialog box. Deselect this option if you do not want to interlace the image.

For more information about exporting, see Importing and Exporting Files.


To export a file

To export an object as a bitmap image


Importing a Bitmap Image

Importing and Exporting Files

Exporting a File

General Options


To export an object as a bitmap image

1	Select the object to export. If no objects are selected, all objects on all layers of the current page are exported.

2	On the File menu, click Export. The Export dialog box opens.

3	Choose a drive and folder for the exported file’s destination, if necessary.

4	Type a name for the file.

5	Choose the bitmap file format you want to export in the Save as Type list box. Designer automatically adds the proper extension to the filename.

6	Click Setup if you want to change export settings for that file format.

7	Click Export. Designer exports the file in the chosen format.

Note

If you skip step 6, Designer uses the settings previously used when exporting this file type. The available export settings vary depending on the file type you want to export.


Exporting a Bitmap Image


Converting an Object to a Bitmap Image

You can convert objects, including text, to bitmap images using the Convert to Image command on the Change menu.

In converting an object to a bitmap image, you can specify the new bitmap image’s resolution and color depth. The resolution determines the number of pixels per inch in the image. The color depth determines the maximum number of colors in the image.

The higher the resolution and the greater the color depth, the larger the file size of a bitmap image.

Bitmap images that are converted from objects are always square or rectangular. For example, if you convert an ellipse to a bitmap image, the resulting image is rectangular. The portion of the bitmap image that is not part of the original object is set to white. For an ellipse, this is the portion of the bitmap image that is outside the ellipse.

If you want the portions of the bitmap image that are not part of the original object to be transparent, select the Transparent check box when you convert the image. If you want the bitmap image to be anti-aliased, select the Anti-Alias check box.


To convert an object to a bitmap image


Manipulating Bitmap Images

Reshaping a Bitmap Image

Editing a Bitmap Image

Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Cropping a Bitmap Image

Slicing a Bitmap Image


To convert an object to a bitmap image

1	Select the object you want to convert.

2	On the Change menu, click Convert to Image. The Convert to Image dialog box opens.

3	Type the desired value in the Resolution spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

4	Choose the color depth you want using the Colors list box.

5	Select the Anit-Alias check box if you want the image to be anti-aliased.

6	Select the Transparent check box to make the area outside the object transparent.

or

Clear the Transparent check box to make the area outside the object white.

Tips

The Size, Width, and Height information is based on your Resolution and Color settings.

If you are creating a bitmap image for display purposes only, use a resolution of 72 or 96 pixels per inch. If you are creating a bitmap image for printing, use a higher resolution, probably one equal to the resolution of your printer.


Converting an Object to a Bitmap Image


Manipulating Bitmap Images

You can move, resize, rotate, skew, flip, duplicate, delete, and reorder (move it to the front, for example) a bitmap image. Using the bitmap editing features of Designer, you can also reshape, crop, and trace a bitmap image; make selected colors in the bitmap image transparent; and color a bitmap image you have imported as a monochrome image.

Use Picture Publisher, the image editor included with Designer, when you want to edit a bitmap image extensively, For example, you can use Picture Publisher to add or remove colors, paint your own images, and add special effects to an image. To learn more about Picture Publisher, run the application and open the online Help for Picture Publisher.

Tips

You cannot edit bitmap images like vector drawings. However, you can trace a bitmap to produce a Designer object that you can edit.

For information on adding the colors of a bitmap image to the Color Palette, see Adding Object or Bitmap Colors to the Color Palette.


Reshaping a Bitmap Image

Editing a Bitmap Image

Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Cropping a Bitmap Image

Slicing a Bitmap Image


Reshaping a Bitmap Image

The image reshaping feature of Designer lets you reshape a bitmap image by dragging the corner points of the image. As you drag a corner point, the edges connected to the point move to follow the point.

Reshaping a bitmap image lets you create warp-like effects for images.

Before Reshaping	After Reshaping


To reshape a bitmap image


Manipulating Bitmap Images

Editing a Bitmap Image

Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Cropping a Bitmap Image

Slicing a Bitmap Image


To reshape a bitmap image

1	Select the bitmap image to reshape.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Image option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear at the image's four corners.

4	Click an anchor point to select it. It turns solid.

5	Drag the anchor point to a new location. The image’s shape changes.

6	When you finish reshaping the bitmap image, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tips

When you drag an anchor point, Designer shows a preview of the new shape of the image. Watch this preview and release the mouse button when you see the shape you want.

To select multiple anchor points, hold SHIFT and click the additional points that you want to drag.

To deselect an anchor point, hold SHIFT and click the point.

If you start to drag an anchor point and then change your mind, press ESC to cancel the reshaping.


Reshaping a Bitmap Image


Editing a Bitmap Image

The image editing features of Designer let you manipulate the appearance of an image by making specified colors transparent and coloring an image you have imported as a monochrome image. If you want to make more extensive edits to a bitmap image, you can use Picture Publisher.

Making portions of a bitmap image transparent lets objects and text show through that part of the image. Without transparency, objects behind a bitmap image would be obscured by the image. You can also use transparency to "hide" areas of a bitmap image, making it appear to be irregularly shaped. This allows a bitmap image containing a circular shape to show only the circular shape, for example, not the rectangular shape of the image (bitmap images are always rectangular in shape).

A bitmap image that is pasted as an OLE object (that is, it is embedded or linked) cannot be edited in Designer.

Specifying Dropout Colors

A dropout color is a color in a bitmap image that you want to be transparent. For example, if a bitmap image contains a red circle on a blue background, defining that blue color as a dropout color makes the background transparent.

Once a color is specified as a transparent color, all instances of that color in the bitmap image, regardless of location, are transparent.

You can specify which colors in a bitmap image are transparent using Drop Color [image] on the Image ribbon. Restore Colors [image] lets you restore colors you have previously dropped out. This allows you to experiment with dropping out colors, because you can always restore the colors if you dislike the effects.

Coloring Monochrome Images

You can change the foreground and background colors of a monochrome bitmap image with Foreground [image] and Background [image] on the Image ribbon.

The Foreground button changes the color of the bitmap image itself. The Background button changes the color of the surrounding area. To make the background transparent, set the background color to no fill.

Note

Designer does not support transparency for CMYK images. If you execute an image option requiring transparency on a CMYK image, the image is converted to a 24-bit RGB image before transparency is applied.

Tip

To import a bitmap image as monochrome, click Setup on the Import dialog box and then choose Monochrome on the Import Configuration dialog box. The image is imported with a black foreground color and a white background color.


To drop out a bitmap color

To restore a bitmap's dropout colors

To color a monochrome bitmap image

To edit a bitmap image in Picture Publisher


Manipulating Bitmap Images

Reshaping a Bitmap Image

Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Cropping a Bitmap Image

Slicing a Bitmap Image


To drop out a bitmap color

1	Select the bitmap image.

2	Click Image [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Drop Color [image]. The pointer changes to the dropout pointer.

4	Point to an area in the bitmap containing the color you want to drop out.

5	Click the right mouse button. The color to which you pointed is changed to transparent.

Tips

If you have a bitmap image in which you want to drop out some but not all areas of a particular color, use Picture Publisher to change those areas to an otherwise unused color. When you then drop out that color, you drop out only the areas you want.

To restore a bitmap image to its original colors, click Restore Colors [image].


Editing a Bitmap Image


To restore a bitmap's dropout colors

1	Select the bitmap image.

2	Click Image [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Restore Colors [image]. Any dropout colors are restored.


To color a monochrome bitmap image

1	Select the monochrome bitmap image.

2	Click Image [image] in the Toolbox.

3	To change the foreground color, click Foreground [image] and choose the desired color from the color palette.

or

To change the background color, click Background [image] and choose the desired color from the color palette. To make the background transparent, click X (no fill) in the palette.

Tip

To determine if a bitmap image is a monochrome image, select the image and click Image Information [image].


Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Using the image editing features of Designer, you can trace, crop, reshape, drop out colors, and apply image effects to bitmap images. For more extensive editing of a bitmap image, use Picture Publisher.

If you want to edit a bitmap image that is an OLE object (as indicated in Designer's status bar), you cannot edit it with Designer's cropping or tracing tools. When you double-click the OLE object, the program that supplied the object automatically opens to edit the object.


To edit a bitmap image in Picture Publisher


Manipulating Bitmap Images

Reshaping a Bitmap Image

Editing a Bitmap Image

Cropping a Bitmap Image

Slicing a Bitmap Image


To edit a bitmap image in Picture Publisher

1	Select the bitmap image.

2	Click Image [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Edit Image [image]. Picture Publisher opens with the selected bitmap image ready to be edited.

4	Make the changes you want to the bitmap.

5	Close Picture Publisher by pressing ESC.

6	Picture Publisher closes, leaving you in Designer. The bitmap image retains the editing changes you made.


Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Editing a Bitmap Image


Cropping a Bitmap Image

Cropping a bitmap image lets you reduce the visible part of an image to just what you want displayed. The cropped parts of the image are hidden, but not deleted. Because the cropped parts are retained, you can uncrop them later. Only the visible part of a cropped image prints.

Cropping is an editing technique that can improve your final drawing. For example, you can eliminate distracting areas of an image to help focus on the center of interest. You also can crop to eliminate errors or to fit a image into a layout.

Cropping an image in Designer involves two steps: creating a rectangular mask large enough to show the desired area, and moving the image so that the correct area shows through the mask.

Before Cropping	After Cropping
Tip

In Designer 3.1 and before, you moved the mask instead of the image.


To crop a bitmap image


Manipulating Bitmap Images

Reshaping a Bitmap Image

Editing a Bitmap Image

Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Slicing a Bitmap Image


To crop a bitmap image

1	Select the bitmap image you want to crop.

2	Click Image [image] in the toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Crop [image]. The image is highlighted and handles appear around the crop mask.

4	Resize the crop mask until it is the size you want.

5	Move the pointer onto the image. Press and hold the mouse button, and position the image under the crop mask.

6	Release the mouse button when you finish.

7	Repeat steps 4 through 6 to adjust the crop, if necessary.

8	Double-click or press ESC when you finish.

Tip

To uncrop a bitmap image, select it and click Remove Crop [image].


Cropping a Bitmap Image


Slicing a Bitmap Image

Slicing a bitmap image lets you cut an image into separate images.

You draw a line through the image to indicate where you want the image sliced. This lets you position the slice location precisely, because you can reshape and move the line until you have it exactly where you want the slice to occur.

Before Slicing	After Slicing with Sliced Images Moved Apart
After a bitmap image is sliced, you can select the separate images and move them where you want them.

For information on slicing objects, see Slicing Objects.


To slice a bitmap image


Manipulating Bitmap Images

Reshaping a Bitmap Image

Editing a Bitmap Image

Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Cropping a Bitmap Image


To slice a bitmap image

1	Draw a line through the bitmap image. The ends of the line must extend beyond the image. You can draw any type of line through the image, including arcs, Bezier curves, and freehand lines.

2	Select both the bitmap image and the line marking the slice location.

3	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Slice. The bitmap image is sliced along the line.

Tips

You may want to save the original bitmap image before you apply this command.

You can slice multiple bitmap images by drawing the line through all of the images you want to slice.

By drawing the line appropriately, you can slice a bitmap image into multiple images.


Slicing a Bitmap Image


Why Trace Bitmap Images?

Tracing a bitmap image creates a vector copy that closely resembles the original image. When using a simple bitmap image, it is often easier and less space-consuming to trace it and then edit the vector tracing.

Vector drawings use less disk space and memory than bitmaps. Since Designer documents containing bitmaps can be quite large, converting bitmap images to vector drawings saves disk space.

Objects produced by tracing bitmaps sometimes have an undesirably large number of anchor points. By reducing the number of anchor points in a traced object, you can often improve the object’s appearance. Reducing the number of anchor points can also improve an object's printing speed. For information on reducing the number of anchor points in a traced object, see Reducing Points.

You can create interesting visual effects by tracing. For example, with a little experimentation, you can create stylized graphics or drawings that look like etchings.

Note

Tracing a complex bitmap image, especially a multicolor image, can take several minutes. While tracing is occurring, the status bar shows the trace indicator. Tracing is implemented as a threaded action, so you can continue to work while a bitmap image is being traced. Press ESC to stop the tracing before it is completed.


Basics of Tracing

Tips for Tracing

Setting Tracing Options

Setting the Trace Quality

Setting the Line Type_for_Tracing

Setting the Number of Colors and Noise for Tracing

Methods of Tracing

Reducing Points


Basics of Tracing

Designer traces an image by searching it for color or grayscale variations. When the color difference is great enough, Designer draws a line between the different colors.

When Designer finishes tracing, the original bitmap image is behind the tracing and the object produced by the tracing is selected.

Bitmap Image to Trace	Object Produced by Tracing
This tracing is used to construct an image of a duck splashing in water in the "Duck Lake Resorts" tutorial. For more information, see Tracing Bitmaps.


Why Trace Bitmap Images?

Tips for Tracing

Setting Tracing Options

Setting the Trace Quality

Setting the Line Type_for_Tracing

Setting the Number of Colors and Noise for Tracing

Methods of Tracing


Tips for Tracing

Keep the following in mind when tracing bitmap images.

Bitmap images with few colors generally trace best. Use Picture Publisher to reduce the number of colors in an image before you trace it.

Grayscale images trace better than color images. Monochrome images usually trace best of all.

Don't trace bitmap text. Add text to a drawing with Designer's Text tool. Scanned text and text added with an image editor are of lower quality.

Simple, uncomplicated images trace better than complicated ones.

Dark objects on light backgrounds are best. If you have a dark background, use Picture Publisher to lighten it before tracing.

Tips

Remember, you can press ESC at any time to stop the tracing.

For details on reducing the number of points in traced images, see Reducing Points.


Why Trace Bitmap Images?

Basics of Tracing

Reducing Points


Setting Tracing Options

Tracing options let you determine the method and degree of detail Designer uses to trace bitmap images. Tracing options remain in effect until you change them.

The bitmap image tracing options are:

Trace quality (Fine, Average, or Coarse)

Line type (Lines or Curves)

Maximum number of colors in the tracing result

Noise setting for the tracing


Setting the Trace Quality

Setting the Line Type_for_Tracing

Setting the Number of Colors and Noise for Tracing

Methods of Tracing


Setting the Trace Quality

Use Trace Quality [image] on the Ribbon toolbar to adjust how accurately and smoothly Designer traces a bitmap image.

Choose Fine for the highest quality trace. Fine tracings can use a lot of memory and be difficult to edit because they create a large number of anchor points.

Average setting is the default. In most situations, average tracing is the best choice.

Coarse produces the least accurate tracing because it uses the fewest reshape points. Coarse tracings use the least memory and are the easiest to edit.


To set the trace quality for a bitmap tracing


Setting Tracing Options

Setting the Line Type_for_Tracing

Setting the Number of Colors and Noise for Tracing

Methods of Tracing


To set the trace quality for a bitmap tracing

1	Select the bitmap image to trace.

2	Click Image [image] in the toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Trace Quality [image]. A menu appears.

4	Click Fine, Average, or Coarse.


Setting the Trace Quality


Setting the Line Type for Tracing

Use Line Type [image] on the Ribbon toolbar to choose whether Designer uses lines or curves to create the tracing.

Choose Lines to create tracings with straight line segments (no curves). Use this setting when the image has few curves.

Choose Curves to create tracings with curves. It is slightly more accurate than using lines.


To set the line type for a bitmap tracing


Setting Tracing Options

Setting the Trace Quality

Setting the Number of Colors and Noise for Tracing

Methods of Tracing


To set the line type a bitmap tracing
To set the line type for a bitmap tracing

1	Select the bitmap image to trace.

2	Click Image [image] in the toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Line Type [image]. A menu appears.

4	Click Lines or Curves.


Setting the Line Type for Tracing


Setting the Number of Colors and Noise for Tracing

You can restrict the number of colors in the result of a trace. Click the Colors box on the Image ribbon, and then enter the maximum number of colors you want in the resulting object.

The Noise control on the Image ribbon helps eliminate stray pixels introduced by a poor-quality image. You can enter a value ranging from 1 through 100. Larger numbers exclude larger groups of stray pixels.


Setting Tracing Options

Setting the Trace Quality

Setting the Line Type_for_Tracing

Methods of Tracing


Tracing Methods
Methods of Tracing

You can trace an entire bitmap image, or only a portion of it. Use the following methods while the Trace button [image] is selected to choose which part of the image you want to trace.

Tracing an Entire Bitmap Image

Press and hold SHIFT and click the bitmap image.

Tracing a Rectangular Area of a Bitmap Image

Select the bitmap image and drag a rectangle over an area of the image. The area in the rectangle is traced.

Tracing an Object in a Bitmap Image

Well-defined areas in an image are called objects. For example, in an image containing a beach ball in the ocean, the beach ball is an object. The more an object contrasts with its surrounding area, the more successful the tracing will be.

To trace an object, select the image and click inside the object to trace it.

Stopping Tracing

Press ESC to stop tracing before it is completed.


To trace a bitmap image

To trace a portion of a bitmap image


Setting Tracing Options

Setting the Trace Quality

Setting the Line Type_for_Tracing

Setting the Number of Colors and Noise for Tracing


To trace a bitmap
To trace a bitmap image

1	Select the bitmap image to trace.

2	Click Image [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Trace [image]. A blue hatch border appears around the bitmap image.

4	Hold SHIFT and click the bitmap image. Designer traces the entire image.

5	After the tracing is complete, click outside of the border, point to the image and drag the tracing off of the image, if necessary.

Note

Tracing a complex bitmap image, especially a multicolor image, can take several minutes.


Methods of Tracing


To trace a portion of a bitmap image

1	Select the bitmap image to trace.

2	Click Image [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Trace [image]. A blue hatch border appears around the image.

4	Drag a bounding box around the area you want to trace.

5	Release the mouse button. Designer traces the area in the bounding box.

6	After the tracing is complete, click outside of the border, point to the image and drag the tracing off of the image, if necessary.


Applying Image Effects

Using the EffectsBrowser, you can apply more than 50 different visual effects to bitmap images. For example, you can add artistic effects, adjust color saturation and contrast, blur images in various ways, despeckle, and apply textures such as embossing, engraving, and splattering.

To apply an image effect, select a bitmap image and click Image Effects on the Object menu. The EffectsBrowser dialog box opens, which lets you select an effect, specify the options you want, and preview the results.

If you do not like an effect you have selected for your image, you can undo it by resetting the EffectsBrowser. After you have applied the effect and closed the EffectsBrowser dialog box, you can undo the effect by clicking Undo on the Edit menu.

For more information on the EffectsBrowser, see Using Special Effects and Using the EffectsBrowser. For examples of each image effect, see Examples of Effects.


Using Special Effects

Using the EffectsBrowser

Examples of Effects

Manipulating Bitmap Images

Editing a Bitmap Image

Editing OLE and Non-OLE Bitmap Images

Cropping a Bitmap Image


BLENDING.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Blending Effects

Blending lets you create series of transformations that blend one object and color into another. Each transformation is changed slightly to look more like the second object. For example, if you blend a five-point star and a seven-point star, the transformations produce an effect in which one star appears to fade into the other.

You can specify the number of transformations, or steps, between the objects. The more steps you use, the closer (and smoother) the transforming objects are. You can use as many as 1000 steps.

If the objects have different interior fill patterns (for example, a hatch and a gradient), Designer places the pattern of the front object in all the transformations.

Tips

Blending results are usually better with uncomplicated objects.

Large numbers of steps can slow redraw time.

Designer cannot blend grouped objects, extruded objects, bitmap images, OLE objects, Windows metafiles, or text objects. You can convert text and extruded objects to curves, and then blend them. For information on converting text to curves, see Converting Text to Curves.


To blend two objects

To change the origins of a blend

To reverse the blend direction


Dynamic Blending

Working with Blend Nodes

Changing the Origins of a Blend

Changing the Direction of a Blend

Changing the Order of a Blend


To blend two objects

1	Select the two objects you want to blend.

2	On the Change menu, click Blend. The Blend Objects dialog box opens.

3	Choose the settings you want.

4	Click Apply. The objects are blended.

Tips

You may have to try several step settings, reverse the direction, or change the origins to get the effect you want.

To create a blend consisting of individual objects, deselect Dynamic before you click Apply.

To copy blend settings, first select the blend object with the blend settings that you want to copy. The Blend dialog box shows the settings for that blend. Then select the objects to which you want to apply those blend settings, and click Apply.


Blending Effects

Dynamic Blending


Dynamic Blending

Designer's blend objects consist of a series of steps dynamically maintained between the objects being blended. The objects on which the blend calculations are based are called nodes.

Because the blend is dynamic, changing a node of the blend object causes the blend to recalculate automatically. For example, if you move or reshape a node, the blend object changes accordingly.

The following actions cause a blend to recalculate dynamically:

Moving, scaling, flipping, rotating, or skewing a node.

Reshaping a node.

Warping a node.

Changing the interior fill of a node.

Note

Deselecting Dynamic on the Blend dialog box, or converting a blend object to curves, changes it from a dynamic blend object into an object group.


To move a blend node


Blending Effects

Working with Blend Nodes

Changing the Origins of a Blend

Changing the Direction of a Blend

Changing the Order of a Blend


To move a blend node

1	Select the blend node you want to move. Selection handles appear around the node.

2	Drag the node to move it.

3	When you release the mouse button, the blend recalculates.

Tip

You can also scale, flip, rotate, skew, reshape, or warp a node to change the blend effect.


Dynamic Blending


Working with Blend Nodes

The use of nodes to define blend objects gives you enormous flexibility in creating blend effects.

Converting Steps to Nodes

You can convert any of the transformation steps in a blend to a node. This creates additional nodes that you can use to manipulate the blend. For example, you can convert a blend's center step to a node, and then drag it to stretch the blend from its center.

Adding New Objects as Nodes

You can blend an existing node and a new object, thereby adding the new object to the blend as a node. You can then use this new node as you would any of the original nodes. For example, you can create a long chain of nodes by blending the end node with a new object.

Removing Nodes

You can remove nodes from blend objects.

Blending Nodes within a Blend

You can blend nodes within a blend to create effects such as a circular blend.

Blending Blend Objects

By blending the nodes of different blend objects, you can connect the blends and create elaborate blend structures.


To convert a blend step to a node

To add an object as a node

To remove a node

To blend two nodes


Blending Effects

Dynamic Blending

Changing the Origins of a Blend

Changing the Direction of a Blend

Changing the Order of a Blend


To convert a blend step to a node

1	Select the blend object. You can select the blend object by drawing a bounding box around it or by clicking one of the blend steps.

2	On the Change menu, click Blend. The Blend Objects dialog box opens.

3	Click Convert Step to Node. A blue edit border appears around the blend.

4	Click the step that you want to convert to a node. The edit border disappears, and the step is selected.

5	You can now use the new node to change the blend effect. For example, you can drag it to stretch the blend.


Working with Blend Nodes

Dynamic Blending


To add an object as a node

1	Select the object you want to add as a node.

2	Hold down SHIFT, and click a node of the existing blend object. Selection handles appear around both the object and the node.

3	On the Change menu, click Blend. The Blend Objects dialog box opens.

4	Click Apply. The new object is blended to the selected node.

5	You can now use the new node to change the blend effect. For example, you can select it and click a color in the Color Palette to change the blend colors.

Tip

To blend an object to a transformation step, first convert the step to a node. Then blend it to the object as explained above.


To remove a node

1	Select the blend object containing the node you want to delete. You can select the blend object by drawing a bounding box around it, or by clicking one of the blend steps.

2	On the Change menu, click Blend. The Blend Objects dialog box opens.

3	Click Remove Node. A blue edit border appears around the blend.

4	Click the node you want to remove. The node is deleted, and the blend recalculates.

Note

You can remove a node only from a blend object that contains three or more nodes. If a blend object contains only two nodes, the Remove Node button is unavailable.

Tip

To delete a transformation step, first convert the step to a node. Then delete it as explained above.


To blend two nodes

1	Select the first node you want to blend.

2	Hold down SHIFT, and click the node to which you want to blend the first node. Selection handles appear around both nodes.

The second node can be within the same blend object, or in another blend object.

3	On the Change menu, click Blend. The Blend Objects dialog box opens.

4	Click Apply. The two nodes are blended.

Tip

To blend two transformation steps, first convert the steps to nodes. Then blend them as explained above.


Changing the Origins of a Blend

Blends are calculated based upon the origin points of the objects being blended. By changing the origin points of these objects, you can change the blend effect, as illustrated below (the origin points are indicated by the black squares).


To change the origins of a blend

To reverse the blend direction


Blending Effects

Dynamic Blending

Working with Blend Nodes

Changing the Direction of a Blend

Changing the Order of a Blend


To change the origins of a blend

1	Select the two objects you want to blend.

2	On the Change menu, click Blend. The Blend Objects dialog box opens.

3	Click Choose Origin. Square anchor points appear on the two objects. The anchor points currently being used as origins for each object are solid.

4	On the back object, click an anchor point to select that position as the origin for the back object.

5	On the front object, click the anchor point in the position you want to correspond to the point you clicked on the back object.

6	Choose the other settings you want.

7	Click Apply. The objects are blended, based on the origins.

Tips

If you change the origin points of an existing blend, the blend recalculates automatically.

If the existing anchor points on an object do not give you the origin you want, you can add additional anchor points to the object using Point Reshaping. For information on adding anchor points, see Adding and Deleting Anchor Points.


Changing the Origins of a Blend

Blending Effects

Dynamic Blending

Adding and Deleting Anchor Points


Changing the Direction of a Blend

Objects are drawn either clockwise or counterclockwise from an origin point. For example, closed objects are drawn counterclockwise. When Designer blends objects, it matches corresponding points on the objects, so the order in which the points were drawn determines the appearance of the blend. You can change the blend effect by reversing the way Designer compares points.

Counterclockwise Blend	Clockwise Blend


To  reverse the blend direction

To change the origins of a blend


Blending Effects

Dynamic Blending

Working with Blend Nodes

Changing the Origins of a Blend

Changing the Order of a Blend


To reverse the blend direction

1	Select the two objects you want to blend.

2	On the Change menu, click Blend. The Blend Objects dialog box opens.

3	Select Reverse Direction.

4	Choose the other settings you want.

5	Click Apply. The objects are blended.

Tip

You may have to try several different settings to find the ones that give the effect you want.


Changing the Direction of a Blend

Blending Effects

Dynamic Blending


Changing the Order of a Blend

Objects blend from the back object to the front object, so by changing the order of the objects before you apply the blend, you can change the blend effect. For information on changing the order of objects, see Changing the Order of Objects.

Circle in Front	Square in Front
For blends with multiple nodes, the order of the blends is determined by the order in which the nodes are added to the blend. In the example below, the four corner circles are nodes. The nodes are ordered from top to bottom, with the bottom circle being the front node (the last node added).


Blending Effects

Dynamic Blending

Working with Blend Nodes

Changing the Origins of a Blend

Changing the Direction of a Blend


COLOR.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Palettes Included with Designer

Designer includes predefined color palettes, plus the flexibility to design and assemble your own color palettes that best match how you work.

A default palette, called the Master Palette, is automatically installed when you install Designer. The Master Palette cannot be modified or deleted. If you attempt to modify the Master Palette, a dialog box opens, and you are offered the following choices:

To cancel the palette action, click Cancel.

To create a new palette containing the Master Palette colors, type a new palette name, select Copy the Colors in the Master Palette to the New Palette, and click OK.

To create a new, empty palette, type a new palette name, select Create the New Palette without Colors, and click OK.

After creating a new palette, you can make the desired changes to the new palette, including adding and deleting colors.

Designer also includes the PANTONE® spot and process colors which are available on the Spot tab of the Color Picker dialog box. For more information, see Color Matching Systems.

The Palette Manager lets you perform actions such as choosing the current palette and renaming or deleting a palette. For information on managing your palettes, see Managing Palettes.


Storing Color Palette Information

Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Color Matching Systems

Using the Color Palette

Managing Palettes


Storing Color Palette Information

Designer, beginning with version 4.0, stores colors in the color model (HLS, RGB, or CMYK) in which they were originally created, whereas earlier versions stored all colors in the RGB model.

The capability to store colors in the originating model is especially important for graphic designers who typically create colors with the CMYK model, because it ensures precise matching between color definition and storage. After defining a color in one model, you can easily change its definition to another model. For information on converting colors to another model, see Converting Color Model Values.

For information on importing and exporting palette files, see Importing and Exporting Palette Files.


Palettes Included with Designer

Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Color Matching Systems

Converting Color Model Values

Importing and Exporting Palette Files


Using the Color Picker

Designer offers state-of-the-art color mixing capabilities and the flexibility to let you easily choose and use any color from the full spectrum.

You use a color model to choose a color, or you can select a color from a predefined spot color matching system. A color model is a tool for defining, selecting, and changing colors using a specific set of color characteristics. With a model, you can define and use every color your computer can display.

Designer lets you define colors using the HLS, RGB, and CMYK color models. All three color models describe the same colors, but in different ways. The color model you use depends upon your personal preference.

You use the Color Picker dialog box to choose colors. The Color Picker dialog box has tabs for each of the color models and for the spot color matching system.

For each color model, you can pick colors using the mouse or by specifying numeric values.

To pick a color using the mouse, drag the square in the color controls. To understand how the color controls work, visualize the full range of each color model as a three-dimensional cube. The large color control shows two of these dimensions, while the slider shows the third dimension. In the case of the CMYK model, which has four components, a second slider shows the fourth (black) component.

To determine which of the components in the color model the large color control represents, use the list box at the top of the tab. For example, in the RGB model, selecting Red - Green means that the large color control shows the red and green components, and the slider shows the blue component. To show the red and blue components in the large color control, select Red - Blue (the green component now appears in the slider).

To pick a color using numeric values, type the desired value in each color component spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value. For example, in the RGB model, entering 255 for R (red), 128 for G (green), and 179 for B (blue) creates pink. The same pink can be created by entering 0 for C (cyan), 50 for M (magenta), 30 for Y (yellow), and 0 for B (black) in the CMYK model.

After picking a color in one model, click the tab of any other model to see the values for the color in that model.

Naming a Color

You can assign names to the colors you create using the New Color box. Names can include numbers and spaces.


To open the Color Picker dialog box

To pick a palette color using the mouse

To pick a palette color numerically

To replace a palette color

To change the way Designer normalizes CMYK percentages

To select spot colors


Color Picker Resolution and Grid Settings

Using a Color Model

Choosing HLS Colors

Choosing RGB Colors

Choosing CMYK Colors

CMYK Black Component

Color Matching Systems


To open the Color Picker dialog box

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Select the color palette you want to modify. You cannot modify the Master Palette, so you must select a palette other than the Master Palette.

If the only palette in the list is the Master Palette, then you will be given the chance to create a new palette before the Color Picker dialog box opens.

3	Click the Edit Color [image] button. The Color Picker dialog box opens.

Tip

You can also open the Color Picker by clicking the control button [image] on the title bar of the Color Palette, and then clicking Add Color or Edit Color.


Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Color Picker Resolution and Grid Settings

Choosing HLS Colors

Choosing RGB Colors

Choosing CMYK Colors

CMYK Black Component

Color Matching Systems


Color Picker Resolution and Grid Settings

Resolution

If the update of the color controls on the Color Picker is too slow on your computer, you can change the resolution to speed it up. Move the Resolution slider toward the plus sign to increase the resolution, toward the minus sign to decrease the resolution. Decreasing the resolution speeds up the color display.

Grid

The Grid setting adjusts the increment used by the arrows of the spin boxes. The Grid slider adjusts the increment from 1 to 10. For example, moving the Grid slider all the way to the plus sign sets the increment to 10, so each click of an arrow changes the color value by 10 units. Move the slider all the way to the minus sign if you want the grid increment to be 1.


Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Choosing HLS Colors

Choosing RGB Colors

Choosing CMYK Colors

CMYK Black Component


Using a Color Model

A color model is a tool for defining, selecting, and changing colors using a specific set of color characteristics. With Designer, you can choose and mix colors using the HLS, RGB, and CMYK color models. All three models describe the same colors, but in different ways.

The HLS model defines each color by setting its hue, lightness, and saturation attributes. This color model uses characteristics that reflect the human perception of color. For more information on the HLS model, see Choosing HLS Colors.

The RGB model defines each color by the amount of red, green, and blue in it. This model is additive because it creates colors by adding the red, green, and blue colors together in different amounts. For more information on the RGB model, see Choosing RGB Colors.

The CMYK model defines each color by the percentage of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black in it. The CMYK model is based upon the light absorbing quality of the inks used in the 4-color printing process. The CMYK model is subtractive, because the color produced by a printed page is the result of the colors absorbed by the inks on the page. For more information on the CMYK model, see Choosing CMYK Colors.

The color model you use depends upon your personal preferences and how you intend to use the resulting drawing. For example, if you are producing a drawing that will eventually be printed using a 4-color press, then you will probably want to create the colors using the CMYK model.

Tip

If you are new to color models, start with the HLS model.


To pick a palette color using the mouse

To pick a palette color numerically

To replace a palette color

To change the way Designer normalizes CMYK percentages


Using the Color Picker

Choosing HLS Colors

Choosing RGB Colors

Choosing CMYK Colors

CMYK Black Component


To pick a palette color using the mouse

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Select the color palette you want to modify. You cannot modify the Master Palette, so you must select a palette other than the Master Palette.

If the only palette in the list is the Master Palette, then you will be given the chance to create a new palette before the Color Picker dialog box opens.

3	Click the Edit Color [image] button. The Color Picker dialog box opens.

4	Click the tab of the color model you want to use.

5	Click the arrow beside the list box at the top of the tab to choose the components for the large color control (for example, Hue - Lightness for the HLS model).

6	Drag the square in the large color control to choose settings for the two components represented by that control.

7	Drag the square in the slider to choose the setting for the third component. If you are using the CMYK model, choose the black component by dragging the square in the bottom slider.

8	To name the color, click the New Color box, and type the name.

9	Click Add to add the new color to the palette.

10	Repeat steps 4 through 9 to add more colors to the palette.

Tips

Watch the New Color box to determine whether you have the color you want. Continue to adjust the settings until you have the desired color.

You can also select color components by clicking within the color controls.

After picking a color in one model, click the tab of any other model to see the values for the color in that model.

You can also open the Color Picker by clicking the control button [image] on the title bar of the Color Palette, and then clicking Add Color or Edit Color.


Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Choosing HLS Colors

Choosing RGB Colors

Choosing CMYK Colors

CMYK Black Component


To pick a palette color numerically

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Select the color palette you want to modify. You cannot modify the Master Palette, so you must select a palette other than the Master Palette.

If the only palette in the list is the Master Palette, then you will be given the chance to create a new palette before the Color Picker dialog box opens.

3	Click the Edit Color [image] button. The Color Picker dialog box opens.

4	Click the tab of the color model you want to use.

5	Type the desired value in each component spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

6	To name the color, click the New Color box, and type the name.

7	Click Add to add the new color to the current palette.

8	Repeat steps 4 through 7 to add more colors to the palette.

Tips

Watch the New Color box to determine whether you have the color you want. Continue to adjust the settings until you have the desired color.

To adjust the increment for the arrows of the spin boxes, move the Grid slider.

After picking a color in one model, click the tab of any other model to see the values for the color in that model.

You can also open the Color Picker by clicking the control button [image] on the title bar of the Color Palette, and then clicking Add Color or Edit Color.


To replace a palette color

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Select the color palette you want to modify. You cannot modify the Master Palette, so you must select a palette other than the Master Palette.

If the only palette in the list is the Master Palette, then you will be given the chance to create a new palette before the Color Picker dialog box opens.

3	Click the color you want to replace in the Colors palette. The color is selected.

4	Click the Edit Color [image] button. The Color Picker dialog box opens.

5	Click the tab of the color model you want to use.

6	Pick the new color using the spin boxes or the mouse.

7	To name the color, click the New Color box, and type the name.

8	Click Replace to replace the original color.

Tips

Watch the New Color box to determine whether you have the color you want. Continue to adjust the settings until you have the desired color.

You can also open the Color Picker by clicking the control button [image] on the title bar of the Color Palette, and then clicking Add Color or Edit Color.


Choosing HLS Colors

Click the HLS tab on the Color Picker dialog box to use the HLS color model. The HLS model defines each color by setting its hue, lightness, and saturation attributes.

Hue is the wavelength of a color, lightness is the amount of black or white in a color, and saturation is the pureness of a color.

The Hue values range from 1 to 360 degrees (equivalent to settings on a color wheel, where 0 is the same as 360). The Hue setting selects a starting color value. The Lightness value adds a percentage of white or black to the hue and shows the percentage of lightness in the color. Increasing lightness adds white; decreasing lightness adds black. The Saturation value decreases or increases the percentage of color in a selected hue. Increasing saturation adds color; decreasing saturation adds gray.

The Hue values for the primary colors are red (0), yellow (60), green (120), cyan (180), blue (240), and magenta (300).

For example:

A hue of 0, a lightness of 50, and a saturation of 100 result in bright red.

A hue of 60, a lightness of 50, and a saturation of 100 result in bright yellow.

A hue of 180, a lightness of 50, and a saturation of 100 result in bright cyan.

Gray Scale

To create grays using the HLS model, set the saturation value to zero. For example, a hue of 240, a lightness of 50, and a saturation of 0 create a middle gray.

Note

To make it easy to select grays using the mouse, set the dimensions of the large color control to Hue - Lightness using the list box at the top of the tab. Then set the saturation value to zero.


To pick a palette color using the mouse

To pick a palette color numerically

To replace a palette color


Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Choosing RGB Colors

Choosing CMYK Colors

CMYK Black Component


Choosing RGB Colors

Click the RGB tab on the Color Picker dialog box to use the RGB color model. The RGB model defines each color by the amount of red, green, and blue it contains. Red, green, and blue are the additive primary colors. You define a color by specifying a value from 0 to 255 for each RGB component.

When each RGB component is set to 255 (the maximum values), the result is white. When each RGB component is set to zero, the result is black.

The additive primary colors (red, green, and blue) are produced by setting one of the components to 255 and the other two components to zero. The additive secondary colors (cyan, magenta, and yellow) are produced by setting one of the components to zero and the other two components to 255.

For example:

A red value of 255, a green value of 0, and a blue value of 0 result in bright red.

A red value of 255, a green value of 255, and a blue value of 0 result in bright yellow.

A red value of 0, a green value of 255, and a blue value of 255 result in bright cyan.

Gray Scale

To create grays using the RGB model, mix red, green, and blue in equal amounts. For example, a red value of 125, a green value of 125, and a blue value of 125 create a middle gray.


Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Choosing HLS Colors

Choosing CMYK Colors

CMYK Black Component


Choosing CMYK Colors

Click the CMYK tab on the Color Picker dialog box to use the CMYK color model. The CMYK model defines each color by the percentage of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black it contains. (The letter K is used to represent black because B represents blue in color models.) You define a color by specifying a value from 0 to 100 for each CYMK component.

As with the other color models, you can choose a component combination from the list box (Cyan-Magenta, Cyan-Yellow, or Yellow-Magenta) for the large color control. The third component is controlled by the slider directly below the large color control. The fourth component, black, is controlled by the bottom slider.

The numeric values for C, M, and Y represent percentages of the subtractive primary colors cyan (light blue), magenta, and yellow, which are complements of red, green, and blue. When these three colors are combined (100% of each), the theoretical result is black, but impurities in printing inks result in a muddy brown. Therefore, black is added to the mixture to produce a true black. When none of the colors is present (0% of each), the result is white.

As a general rule, adding black in the CMYK model makes dark colors look more intense. For more information on the black component of the CMYK model, see CMYK Black Component.

The subtractive primary colors (cyan, magenta, and yellow) are produced by setting one of the CMY components to 100 and the other three components to zero. The subtractive secondary colors (red, green, and blue) are produced by setting two of the CMY components to 100 and the other two components to 0.

For example:

A cyan value of 0, a magenta value of 100, and a yellow value of 100 result in bright red.

A cyan value of 0, a magenta value of 0, and a yellow value of 100 result in bright yellow.

A cyan value of 100, a magenta value of 0, and a yellow value of 0 result in bright cyan.

Gray Scale

To create grays using the CMYK model, set cyan, magenta, and yellow to zero and adjust the black component. For example, a cyan value of 0, a magenta value of 0, a yellow value of 0, and a black value of 51 create a middle gray.


To pick a palette color using the mouse

To pick a palette color numerically

To replace a palette color

To change the way Designer normalizes CMYK percentages


CMYK Black Component

Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Choosing HLS Colors

Choosing RGB Colors


CMYK Black Component

The K value (true black) in the CMYK model is added to compensate for ink impurities in process color printing. The percentage of black in a color is theoretically equivalent to the same percentage of cyan, magenta, and yellow.

By default, the Color Picker displays the black component slider to let you manually adjust the percentage of black in a color. You also can choose to let Designer normalize the CMYK percentages automatically. That is, the percentages for C, M, and Y are reduced or increased so that the percentage for black is as high as possible. This technique is known as undercolor removal (UCR).

If you are letting Designer normalize colors, then it will adjust the percentages of CMY components in the colors you create when you close the Color Picker dialog box. The resulting colors are the same, but you will see different CMY values if you reopen the Color Picker and look at the color values.

Note

The black component slider is hidden if you are letting Designer normalize CMYK colors. To display the black component slider, set undercolor removal to manual.


To change the way Designer normalizes CMYK percentages


Choosing CMYK Colors

Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model

Choosing HLS Colors

Choosing RGB Colors


To change the way Designer normalizes CMYK percentages

1	Open the Color Picker dialog box.

2	Click the CMYK tab.

3	Click Undercolor Removal [image]. The Undercolor Removal menu appears.

4	Select Manual Undercolor Removal if you do not want Designer to normalize the CMYK percentages.

or

Select a percentage if you want Designer to normalize the CMYK values. For example, click 100% for complete normalization, or 50% for half normalization.

Note

If you select a percentage in step 4, the black component slider on the CMYK tab disappears.


CMYK Black Component

Choosing CMYK Colors

Using the Color Picker

Using a Color Model


Color Matching Systems

Spot colors (also called custom colors or solid colors) are predefined colors from a system such as the PANTONE® MATCHING SYSTEM.

Color matching systems provide basic inks, color charts, and mixing formulas so that colors can be specified and reproduced accurately in conventional offset printing. Color matching systems include colors for both spot and process colors.

Designer includes a spot color palette file for the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, used by many conventional print shops. The spot colors are available on the Spot tab of the Color Picker dialog box. Check with your print shop ahead of time to verify that it uses this color matching system.

Tint

You can adjust the Tint slider on the Spot tab of the Color Picker dialog box to set a percentage tint value, which is useful to indicate a color to be screened as a halftone at color separation. The tint values range from 100% (solid color, no tint) to 0% (no color at all).

To make fine adjustments with the Tint slider, click the slider with the mouse and then use the arrow keys to move the slider. Using the arrow keys, you can increase or decrease the tint value by one percentage point.

Show Names

You can show the names of the spot colors by selecting the Show Names check box on the Spot tab.


To select spot colors


Using the Color Picker


To select spot colors

1	Open the Color Picker dialog box.

2	Click the Spot tab.

3	Click the colors you want to select.

Tip

To display the spot color names, select the Show Names check box.


Color Matching Systems

Using the Color Picker


Mixing Colors

In addition to choosing colors with a color model and selecting spot colors, Designer lets you choose two or four colors and mix them together as a painter mixes paints.

Tip

The Color Mixer remembers the colors you last used for 2-color and 4-color mixing.


To mix two colors with the Palette Manager

To mix four colors with the Palette Manager


Managing Palettes


To mix two colors with the Palette Manager

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Select the color palette you want to modify.

3	Click Color Mixer [image]. The Color Mixer dialog box opens.

4	Click Two Color [image]. The Color Mixer dialog box shows a Steps spin box and a scrollable color band with a color swatch at each end.

5	Click RGB or HLS to choose the color model to use as the mixing method.

6	Click the left color swatch, and choose a color from the palette that opens.

7	Click the right color swatch, and choose a color from the palette that opens.

8	Type a number from 3 to 99 in the Steps spin box, or click the arrows to select a Steps value. The shades of color in the color band change to reflect the new mix.

9	Click the color of your choice in the color band.

or

Drag the mouse to choose multiple colors.

10	Click Add to store the selected colors in the palette.

Tip

To replace a color in a palette with a mixed color, select the color before you open the Color Mixer dialog box. Then click Replace instead of Add at step 10.


Mixing Colors


To mix four colors with the Palette Manager

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Select the color palette you want to modify.

3	Click Color Mixer [image]. The Color Mixer dialog box opens.

4	Click Four Color [image]. The Color Mixer dialog box shows a mixing palette with a color swatch at each corner.

5	Click RGB or HLS to choose the color model to use as the mixing method.

6	Click the upper left color swatch, and choose a color from the palette that opens.

7	Repeat the color selection process for the other three color swatches. The shades of color change to reflect the new mix.

8	Click the color of your choice in the mixing palette.

or

Drag the mouse to choose multiple colors.

9	Click Add to store the selected colors in the palette.

Tip

To replace a color in a palette with a mixed color, select the color before you open the Color Mixer dialog box. Then click Replace instead of Add at step 9.


Mixing Colors


Finding an Object's Color Values

You can use the Line Fill and Interior Fill tabs of the Object Format dialog box to find the color values of an object.


To find the color values of an object

To add an object's colors to the Color Palette


Adding Object or Bitmap Colors to the Color Palette

Finding a Palette Color by Name

Converting Color Model Values


To find the color values of an object

1	Deselect all objects.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Solid. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Solid Interior Fill [image] to display the solid fill panel, if necessary.

4	Select an object. The color values for the interior fill of the selected object appear below the Fill Color box.

5	Click the Line Fill tab. The color values for the line fill of the selected object appear below the Fill Color box.

6	Repeat steps 3 through 5 to find the color values for other objects.

Notes

Color values are shown only for solid line and interior fills.

The color values are given in the color model used to create the color.


Finding an Object's Color Values

Adding Object or Bitmap Colors to the Color Palette

Finding a Palette Color by Name


Adding Object or Bitmap Colors to the Color Palette

If an object or bitmap image uses colors that are not available in the current palette, you can add those colors to the palette using the Add to Palette command on the Object menu. This command makes it easy to duplicate the colors used in objects or bitmap images you have pasted or imported into your drawings. After adding these colors to the Color Palette, you can easily apply them to other objects.

The Add to Palette options available depend upon whether you are adding colors from an object or a bitmap image.

For objects, you can add the foreground color, background color, line color, or all three colors to the palette.

For bitmap images, you can select specific colors to add to the palette, or you can add all of the colors in the bitmap image to the palette.

For more information on bitmap images, see What Is a Bitmap Image?


To add an object's colors to the Color Palette

To add a bitmap color to the Color Palette

To find the color values of an object


Finding an Object's Color Values

Finding a Palette Color by Name

Converting Color Model Values


To add an object's colors to the Color Palette

1	Select the object whose colors you want to add to the Color Palette.

2	On the Object menu, point to Add to Palette. The Add to Palette submenu appears.

3	Click Foreground Color to add the object's foreground color to the Color Palette.

or

Click Background Color to add the object's background color to the Color Palette.

or

Click Line Color to add the object's line color to the Color Palette.

or

Click All Colors to add the object's foreground, background, and line colors to the Color Palette.

Note

A palette cannot contain duplicate colors, so if the specified color is already in the Color Palette, it is not added again.

Tip

The Add to Palette command can also be used to add a bitmap image's colors to the Color Palette.


Adding Object or Bitmap Colors to the Color Palette

Finding an Object's Color Values

Finding a Palette Color by Name


To add a bitmap color to the Color Palette

1	Select the bitmap image whose colors you want to add to the Color Palette.

2	On the Object menu, point to Add to Palette. The Add to Palette submenu appears.

3	Click Select Colors. The pointer changes to an eyedropper pointer.

4	Point to the color in the bitmap image that you want to add, and click the left mouse button. The indicated color is added to the Color Palette.

5	Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add more colors to the Color Palette.

Note

A palette cannot contain duplicate colors, so if the specified color is already in the Color Palette, it is not added again.

Tips

To add all of the colors in a bitmap image to the Color Palette, choose All Colors from the submenu at step 3.

The Add to Palette command can also be used to add an object's colors to the Color Palette.


Adding Object or Bitmap Colors to the Color Palette

Finding a Palette Color by Name


Finding a Palette Color by Name

If you are looking for a specific color in the Color Palette, you can easily find it by searching the palette for the name of the color. This feature lets you accurately select a color when you know its name.

You can search the Color Palette whether it is docked on the workspace or floating.


To find a palette color by name


Finding an Object's Color Values

Adding Object or Bitmap Colors to the Color Palette

Converting Color Model Values


To find a color by name
To find a palette color by name

1	Deselect all objects.

2	Click the control button [image] on the title bar of the Color Palette. A menu appears.

3	Select Show Names. The Color Palette shows the names of the colors in the palette.

4	Click a color name in the palette.

5	Type the first character of the name you want to find. If necessary, press the letter again to display the next name beginning with that character.

Tips

For example, type L for Lime. If Lavender is displayed, press L again until the desired color is displayed. Type 2 for 25% Gray.

When you show names in the Color Palette, what you see depends on the width of the toolbar and whether the colors have been given names. If the colors are unnamed, only the numeric color values are displayed. If the colors are named, only the names display unless you resize the toolbar so that it is wide enough to display both the names and the numeric color values. You must undock the toolbar before you can resize it.


Finding a Palette Color by Name

Finding an Object's Color Values

Converting Color Model Values


Converting Color Model Values

Designer stores colors in the color model in which they are created.

To see the model and color values of a color in the Color Palette, point to the color with the mouse and watch the Hint toolbar. You can also see the model and color values by showing the names of the colors in the Color Palette. (You may have to widen the Color Palette toolbar to see this information.)

If you want to change the model defining a color, you can do so with the Convert Color button [image] on the Palette Manager dialog box.


To convert values to another color model


Finding an Object's Color Values

Adding Object or Bitmap Colors to the Color Palette

Finding a Palette Color by Name


To convert values to another color model

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click the color in the Colors box that you want to convert.

or

Drag the mouse in the Colors box to choose multiple colors.

3	Click the Covert Color [image]. A menu appears.

4	Click Convert Colors to RGB to convert the selected colors to RGB.

or

Click Convert Colors to CMYK to convert the selected colors to CMYK.

or

Click Convert Colors to HLS to convert the selected colors to HLS.


Converting Color Model Values

Finding a Palette Color by Name

Finding an Object's Color Values


Using the Color Palette

The Color Palette contains the colors you can apply to lines and objects. If the color you want is not in the currently selected palette, you can add the color, or switch to a palette containing the color. For information on selecting interior colors, see Selecting a Solid Color Fill. For information on selecting line colors, see Setting Line Color.

You can move, resize, reshape, and dock the Color Palette to keep it handy but out of your way. Colors in the current palette are always available, no matter which tool you select.


To open the Color Palette

To delete a color from a palette

To sort colors in the Color Palette


Color Palette Options

Managing Palettes


To open the Color Palette

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog box opens.

2	Select the Palette check box.

3	Click OK. The Color Palette opens.

4	Left-click a color in the Color Palette to select an interior fill color.

or

Right-click a color in the Color Palette to select a line color.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for showing and hiding the Color Palette is CTRL+F.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you show or hide the Color Palette, click any toolbar with the right mouse button.

To choose a palette, click the control button [image] on the title bar of the Color Palette, and then click the name of the palette that you want.


Using the Color Palette

Color Palette Options

Managing Palettes


To delete a color from a palette

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Select the color palette you want to modify.

3	Click the color in the Colors box that you want to delete.

or

Drag the mouse in the Colors box to choose multiple colors.

4	Click Delete. The colors you selected are removed from the palette.

Tips

You cannot delete colors from the Master Palette.

You cannot undo the deletion of a color.


Color Palette Options

The Palette Options dialog box lets you customize the appearance of the Color Palette.

Sorting Colors

You can often make it easier to choose colors by changing the order in which the colors are displayed in the Color Palette. For example, to group the yellows in the Color Palette, sort the palette by hue. When sorted by hue, all colors with similar hues (yellows, blues, and so on) are grouped together.

Designer sorts colors by the key you specify, in the direction you specify (descending or ascending). Every color is broken down into its component values and sorted accordingly. For example, sorting by blue does not mean that all the blue hues are together, but that all the colors comprised of 20% blue (such as purples and greens) are grouped together, all the colors comprised of 40% blue are grouped together, and so on.

You can choose more than one key to achieve the order you want. For example, you can sort by hue, then by saturation.

You can also specify whether the colors are ordered by row or column.

Cell Size

Depending upon your preference, you can choose small, medium, or large color cells. For quick access to more colors in a large palette, decrease the cell size of the colors.

Show Names

To display the names of colors in the Color Palette, select the Show Names check box. The Color Palette shows the color model, component values, and name (if any) of each color. You may have to widen the Color Palette toolbar to see all of these elements.


To sort colors in the Color Palette


Using the Color Palette

Managing Palettes


To sort colors in Color Palette
To sort colors in the Color Palette

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click Options. The Palette Options dialog box opens.

3	Click the component you want for the primary sort key in the Primary Key box. For example, click Hue to sort by hue.

4	Click the component you want for the secondary sort key In the Secondary Key box. For example, click Saturation to subsort by saturation.

5	Click Ascending or Descending to specify the sort direction.

6	Click Column Order or Row Order to specify the palette order.

Tip

You can also open the Palette Options dialog box by clicking the control button [image] on the title bar of the Color palette, and then clicking Palette Options.


Color Palette Options

Using the Color Palette

Managing Palettes


Managing Palettes

The Palette Manager lets you easily manage multiple color palettes. Using the Palette Manager, you can:

Choose the current palette

Rename a palette

Delete a palette

Merge (combine) palettes

Import and Export palettes

For information on importing and exporting palettes, see Importing and Exporting Palette Files.


To choose a color palette

To create a new palette

To rename a palette

To delete a palette

To merge two palettes

To import a palette file

To export a palette file


Using the Color Palette

Color Palette Options


To choose a color palette

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the name of the palette.

or

Click the round button in front of the palette's name.

Tips

The current palette is indicated by the dot.

Until you create additional palettes, the only palette choice is the Master Palette.

You can also choose a color palette by clicking the control button [image] on the title bar of the Color palette, and then clicking the name of a palette.


Managing Palettes

Using the Color Palette

Color Palette Options


To create a new palette

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click New. The Palette Name dialog box opens.

3	Type a new palette name, and press ENTER. The new palette becomes the current palette and is ready for you to add colors.

Tip

You can add the Master Palette colors to the new palette by merging the Master Palette with the new palette.


To rename a palette

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click the palette you want to rename.

3	Click Rename. The Palette Name dialog box opens.

4	Type the new name, and press ENTER. The palette is renamed with the new name.

Tip

Although you cannot rename the Master Palette, you can create a new palette containing the same colors as the Master Palette by selecting the Master Palette and clicking Rename.


To delete a palette

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click the palette you want to delete.

3	Click Delete. The palette is deleted.

Note

You cannot delete the Master Palette.


To merge two palettes

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click a palette name (other than the current palette). The palette's name is highlighted.

3	Click Merge. The highlighted palette is merged with the current palette.

Tip

You cannot merge another palette with the Master Palette, but you can merge the Master Palette with other palettes.


Importing and Exporting Palette Files

Color palettes are stored as a part of your profile, not as separate files. Using the Palette Manager, however, you can import and export color palettes as files.

The import feature lets you load previously exported palette files or palette files created by other Micrografx applications such as Picture Publisher.

The export feature lets you save Designer palettes to files.

Designer can import and export palette files in PL4 and PL3 formats.

The more advanced PL4 format stores colors in the color model (HLS, CMYK, or RGB) in which they were originally created, just as Designer stores them. You can export to the PL4 format if you want to share palettes with another user of Designer, who can in turn import the PL4 file.

The PL3 format stores colors as RGB values only. You can use it to export Designer palettes or to import palettes created in other Micrografx programs.

Designer does not import or export palette files in formats developed by other software companies.

Tip

RGB values in Picture Publisher, Designer 3.1, and other Micrografx applications range from 0% to 100%. Designer gives you increased precision with RGB values ranging from 0 to 255. If you import a palette file into Designer that was created and saved in a program that uses the 0% to 100% range, the RGB values convert automatically. For example, an orange color created in Picture Publisher with the RGB values 100, 50, 0 converts to 255, 128, and 0 when imported into Designer.


To import a palette file

To export a palette file


Managing Palettes

Storing Color Palette Information


To import a palette file

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click Import. The Import dialog box opens.

3	Change to the drive and folder you want.

4	Choose the type of file you want to import in the Files of Type list box.

5	Highlight the name of the file you want to import.

6	Click Open. The dialog box closes and the imported palette name appears in the Palettes box.


Importing and Exporting Palette Files

Managing Palettes


To export a palette file

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click the name of the palette you want to export.

3	Click Export. The Export dialog box opens.

4	Choose a drive and folder for the exported file’s destination, if necessary.

5	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

6	Choose the type of file you want to export in the Save as Type list box. Designer automatically adds the proper extension to the filename.

7	Click Save.


DIMENSNS.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Using Dimension Lines

Dimension lines show the size, length, distance, or other measurements related to objects in a drawing.

The Designer dimension features are powerful and easy-to-use. The dimension capabilities of Designer include:

Dimension lines can measure the aligned (diagonal), horizontal, or vertical distances between points.

Dimension lines are dynamic objects that automatically recalculate their measurements when scaled, moved, rotated, or skewed.

Dimension lines can be offset from their measured points to improve appearance and to aid clarity.

Dimension lines can have a variety of line ends, including arrowheads, bars, and boxes.

Dimension lines can indicate distance with inside or outside arrows.

You can position the dimension value above, on, or below a dimension line, and adjust its orientation.

You can position the dimension value anywhere along a dimension line, or extend the value beyond either end of the line.

You can set the degree of precision, font, and font size individually for each dimension line.

You can specify the units of measure, including custom units, for each dimension line. You can also set a scale to relate one unit of measure to another.

You can add text before and after the dimension value for a dimension line.

The dimension units that you use with a drawing are saved with the drawing so that you do not have to reset them each time you open the file.


Drawing Dimension Lines

Using Constraint Buttons

Reshaping Dimension Lines

Transforming Dimension Lines

Setting Dimension Precision and Units


Drawing Dimension Lines

The Dimension/Callout tool [image] is used to draw dimension lines.

To draw a dimension line, click Aligned [image], Horizontal [image], or Vertical [image] on the Dimension/Callout ribbon and then drag the line from one point to another to measure the distance. To offset the dimension line from the points measured, you drag the pointer away from the dimension line. Based upon the type of dimension line you have drawn, Designer calculates the distance between the points and displays it in the units you specify.

After drawing a dimension line, you can easily reshape it and edit its other attributes, including text alignment, line weight, and line ends.

The Aligned button [image] lets you draw dimension lines that measure the diagonal distance between two points.

The Horizontal button [image] lets you draw dimension lines that measure the horizontal distance between two points. If two points are diagonal to each other, a horizontal dimension line still measures the horizontal distance between the points.

The Vertical button [image] lets you draw dimension lines that measure the vertical distance between two points. If two points are diagonal to each other, a vertical dimension line still measures the vertical distance between the points.


To draw a dimension line


Using Dimension Lines

Using Constraint Buttons


To draw a dimension line

1	Click Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Aligned [image], Horizontal [image], or Vertical [image].

3	Move the pointer to the starting point of the line you want to measure, and press and hold the left mouse button.

4	Drag the pointer to the endpoint of the line you want to measure and release the mouse button. You can press SHIFT to constrain the angle to increments of 15 degrees. A dimension line appears between the two points.

The blue handle at the cursor location indicates the position of the dimension value.

5	Move the mouse in the appropriate direction to offset the dimension line and to adjust the location of the dimension value. You can press CTRL to force the dimension value to align to the center of the dimension line.

6	After positioning the dimension line and value, click the left mouse button to finish drawing the dimension line.

Tips

If you make a mistake while drawing a dimension line, you can press ESC to start over.

To make it easy to align dimension lines to the endpoints of objects, select the End Points option on the Snap tab of the Options dialog box. Then use snap points to force the mouse pointer to move precisely to an endpoint. To turn on the snap points, click Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar.


Drawing Dimension Lines

Using Constraint Buttons


Using Constraint Buttons

When drawing a dimension line, the Center Text button [image] on the Ribbon toolbar forces the dimension value to be centered between the dimension endpoints. Deselect the Center Text button to position the dimension value manually.

Press CTRL while drawing a dimension line to toggle the state of the Center Text button. For example, pressing CTRL when the Center Text button is deselected turns on the text centering constraint (while CTRL is pressed).

The Center Text button constrains text to the center only while you are drawing or reshaping a dimension line. Use the Force Center option on the Text Position tab of the Dimension dialog box to constrain text to the center permanently, even when transforming the dimension line.

The Angle Constraint button [image] on the Ribbon toolbar forces dimension and callout lines to draw only in 15-degree increments.

Press SHIFT while drawing a dimension or callout line to force the opposite state of the Angle Constraint button. For example, pressing SHIFT while the Angle Constraint button is selected turns off the constraint (while SHIFT is pressed).


Using Dimension Lines

Drawing Dimension Lines


Reshaping Dimension Lines

After drawing a dimension line, you can adjust the position of its endpoints and dimension value using the Edit tool [image].

For information on setting the end markers of dimension lines, see Setting Dimension/Callout Line Ends. For information on setting the text attributes of dimension lines, see Setting Dimension/Callout Text Attributes.

Note

If you convert a dimension line to a curve, you can no longer reshape it as a dimension line.


To reshape a dimension line


Transforming Dimension Lines

Setting Dimension Precision and Units


To reshape a dimension line

1	Select the dimension line you want to reshape.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Dimension Line option on the menu. Solid blue handles appear at the dimension line's endpoints and value location.

4	Drag the handles that you want to change to their new positions. You can press CTRL to force the dimension value to the center.

5	When you finish reshaping the dimension line, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Dimension Line Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tips

To enter the dimension reshape mode quickly, double-click a dimension line with the select pointer.

You can also reshape a dimension line by selecting the line, clicking Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox, and clicking Reshape [image] on the Ribbon toolbar.


Reshaping Dimension Lines

Transforming Dimension Lines

Setting Dimension/Callout Line Ends

Setting Dimension/Callout Text Attributes


Transforming Dimension Lines

Dimension lines are dynamic objects. This powerful feature means that no matter how you transform (move, scale, flip, rotate, or skew) a dimension line, Designer will accurately calculate its length.

Transforming a dimension line does not change the line's aligned, horizontal, or vertical definition. For example, a horizontal dimension line continues to measure the horizontal distance between its endpoints, even when rotated into a vertical position. (Of course, the horizontal distance between two vertically aligned points is zero.)


To rotate a drawing with dimension lines


Reshaping Dimension Lines

Setting Dimension Precision and Units


To rotate a drawing with dimension lines

1	Click Rotate/Skew [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the objects that you want to rotate, including the dimension lines.

3	Drag the pivot point to a new location, if applicable.

4	Drag the corner handles to rotate the drawing. To preview the current location of the rotated drawing, pause briefly while still holding down the left mouse button.

Tip

For details on rotating and skewing objects, see Rotating Manually, Rotating Numerically, Skewing Manually, and Skewing Numerically.


Transforming Dimension Lines

Reshaping Dimension Lines


Setting Dimension Precision and Units

The Displayed Precision list box shows the current decimal precision of the dimension value. You can change the number of decimal places shown by clicking the down arrow next to the box and choosing another setting.

The Units button [image] on the Dimension/Callout ribbon shows the dimension value units setting. When no dimension lines are selected, the Units button shows the default units setting; when a dimension line is selected, the Units button shows the units setting for the selection.


To apply a scale unit to a dimension line


Reshaping Dimension Lines

Transforming Dimension Lines


Using Callout Lines

Callout lines, also called leader lines, point to and identify parts of a drawing.

The callout capabilities of Designer include:

Callout lines can consist of one, two, or three segments.

Callout lines are easily reshaped.

Callout lines maintain their definition as callout lines when moved, resized, rotated, and skewed.

Callout lines can have a variety of line ends, including arrowheads, bars, and boxes.

Callout lines can contain an accent bar.

You can set the font and font size individually for each callout line.

You can put a border around callout text and adjust its size.

You can set the gap between the callout line and callout text.


Drawing Callout Lines

Editing Callout Lines

Callout Options

Setting Dimension/Callout Line Ends

Setting Dimension/Callout Text Attributes


Drawing Callout Lines

The Dimension/Callout tool [image] is used to draw callout lines.

To draw a callout line, click One-Segment Callout [image], Two-Segment Calliout [image], or Three-Segment Callout [image] on the Dimension/Callout ribbon, and then drag to draw the line. Designer automatically adjusts the callout line so that the callout text will be vertically aligned.

After drawing a callout line, you can easily reshape it and edit its other attributes, including accent bar, text border, and line end.


To draw a callout line


Using Callout Lines

Editing Callout Lines

Callout Options


To draw a callout line

1	Click Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click One-Segment Callout [image], Two-Segment Callout [image], or Three-Segment Callout [image].

3	Move the pointer to the starting point of the line and press and hold the left mouse button.

4	Drag the pointer to where you want the callout text to appear and release the mouse button. The text cursor is positioned so you can enter the callout text.

5	Type the callout text and press ESC.

Tips

To cancel a callout line before you type the callout text, press ESC. To delete a callout line after you have typed the callout text, select it and press DELETE.

While drawing a callout line, press SHIFT to constrain its angle to increments of 15 degrees.


Drawing Callout Lines

Editing Callout Lines


Editing Callout Lines

After drawing a callout line, you can reshape it and change its callout text using the Edit tool [image].

For information on setting the end marker of callout lines, see Setting Dimension/Callout Line Ends. For information on setting the text attributes of callout lines, see Setting Dimension/Callout Text Attributes.

Note

If you convert a callout line to a curve, you can no longer reshape it as a callout line.


To reshape a callout line

To edit callout text


Callout Options


To reshape a callout line

1	Select the callout line you want to reshape.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Callout Line option on the menu. Solid blue handles appear at the callouts line's endpoint, corners, and text location.

4	Drag the handles that you want to change to their new positions.

5	When you finish reshaping the callout line, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Callout Line Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

You can also reshape a callout line by selecting the line and clicking Reshape [image] on the dimension/callout ribbon.


Editing Callout Lines

Setting Dimension/Callout Line Ends

Setting Dimension/Callout Text Attributes


To edit callout text

1	Select the callout line you want to edit.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Edit Text option on the menu. The text cursor is positioned at the beginning of the callout text.

4	Make the editing changes that you want.

5	When you finish editing the callout text, press ESC or double-click away from the object.

Tip

To edit callout text quickly, double-click the callout line with the select pointer.


General Dimension Options

The General tab of the Dimensions dialog box lets you set options affecting a dimension line's appearance.

Dimension Text

The Show Dimension Text option determines whether the dimension value is shown or hidden. Select this option to show the value. Deselect this option to hide the value.

The Precision list box shows the current decimal precision of the dimension value. To change this setting, click the down arrow next to the box.

The Units button shows the currently selected units setting. Click this button to change this setting.

The Prefix and Suffix text boxes let you enter text to appear before and after the dimension value.

Extension Lines

The Show Extension Lines option determines whether extension lines are shown or hidden. Select this option to show extension lines. Deselect this option to hide extension lines.

The Gap box specifies the amount of space between the points measured by a dimension line and the start of its extension lines.

The Extension box specifies how far extension lines protrude beyond a dimension line.

Outside Arrows

The Use Outside Arrows option determines whether dimension lines show arrows pointing outwards or inwards.

The Arrow Length box specifies the length of outside arrows.


To add prefix and suffix text to a dimension line


Text Orientation Dimension Options

Text Position Dimension Options

Callout Options


To add prefix and suffix text to a dimension line

1	Click Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the dimension line you want to modify.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Dimension Options [image]. The Dimensions dialog box opens.

4	Click the General button to display the General tab, if necessary.

5	Click the Prefix text box and enter the text you want to appear before the dimension value.

or

Click the Suffix text box and enter the text you want to appear after the dimension value.

6	Click Apply to add the text to the dimension value.

Tip

To set option defaults so that they apply to all subsequent dimension lines that you draw, deselect all dimension lines, click the Dimension Options button, and then select the dimension options that you want.


General Dimension Options


Text Orientation Dimension Options

The Text Orientation tab of the Dimensions dialog box sets the orientation of the dimension value in relation to the dimension line.

Select Aligned Face Up to force the dimension value to display so that the base of the text is oriented along the dimension line, but the text is always upright in relation to the line.

Select Towards Object to force the dimension value to display so that the base of the text is oriented along the dimension line. For a horizontal dimension line in which the extensions are below the line, the dimension value is displayed upside down.

Select Horizontal to force the dimension value to display horizontally, even for vertical and aligned dimension lines.

Select Horizontal/Vertical to force the dimension value to display horizontally for horizontal and aligned dimension lines and vertically for vertical dimension lines.

Select Custom Angle to display the dimension value at a specific angle. To set the custom angle, you can either drag the red needle in the dial control or click in the angle box and enter a specific value.


To add prefix and suffix text to a dimension line

To set a custom angle

To display units above a dimension line


General Dimension Options

Text Position Dimension Options

Callout Options


To set a custom angle

1	Click Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the dimension line you want to modify.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Dimension Options [image]. The Dimensions dialog box opens.

4	Click the Text Orientation tab.

5	Click the Custom Angle option to select it.

6	Type a number in the angle box, or drag the red needle in the dial control to specify a custom angle.

7	Click Apply to display the dimension value at the custom angle.

Tip

To set option defaults so that they apply to all subsequent dimension lines that you draw, deselect all dimension lines, click the Dimension Options button, and then select the dimension options that you want.


Text Orientation Dimension Options


Text Position Dimension Options

The Text Position tab of the Dimensions dialog box sets the position of the dimension value in relation to the dimension line.

The Horizontal Text Position options determine whether the dimension value displays on the text point of the dimension line or is aligned left, center, or right.

The Vertical Text Position options determine whether the dimension value displays above, on, or below the dimension line.


To add prefix and suffix text to a dimension line

To set a custom angle

To display units above a dimension line


General Dimension Options

Text Orientation Dimension Options

Callout Options


To display units above a dimension line

1	Click Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the dimension line you want to modify.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Dimension Options [image]. The Dimensions dialog box opens.

4	Click the Text Position tab.

5	Click Above Line (under Vertical Text Position) to select this option.

6	Click Apply to reposition the dimension value.

Tip

To set option defaults so that they apply to all subsequent dimension lines that you draw, deselect all dimension lines, click the Dimension Options button, and then select the dimension options that you want.


Text Position Dimension Options


Callout Options

The Callout tab of the Dimensions dialog box lets you set options affecting a callout line's appearance.

The Show Accent Bar option determines whether the accent bar is shown or hidden. Select this option to show the accent bar. Deselect this option to hide the accent bar.

The Show Border option determines whether the callout text is bordered. Select this option to show this border. Deselect this option to get rid of the border.

The Inner Margin box specifies the amount of space between callout text and the border. Increase this value to place a larger border around the text.

The Outer Gap box specifies the amount of space between callout text and the callout line.

The Segment Style buttons let you select one, two, or three segment callout lines.


To set the outer gap of a callout line


General Dimension Options

Text Orientation Dimension Options

Text Position Dimension Options


To set the outer gap of a callout line

1	Click Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the callout line you want to modify.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Callout Options [image]. The Dimensions dialog box opens with the Callout tab displayed.

4	Type the desired distance in the Outer Gap spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select value.

5	Click Apply to apply the outer gap setting to the callout line.

Tip

To set option defaults so that they apply to all subsequent callout lines that you draw, deselect all callout lines, click the Callout Options button, and then select the callout options that you want.


Callout Options


Setting Dimension/Callout Line Ends

The Dimension Line Ends button [image] lets you set the line properties of a dimension or callout line. The options available include the following:

The type of line end marker. The predefined types include arrowheads, bars, squares, circles, and triangles. You can also define custom line ends.

For a dimension line, whether the same or different markers are used at each end of the line.

The size, placement, and angle of the line end marker.

The weight (thickness) of the line.

The style of the line (solid, dotted, or dashed).


To choose a dimension/callout line end


Setting Dimension/Callout Text Attributes


To choose a dimension/callout line end

1	Click Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the dimension or callout line you want to modify.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Dimension Line Ends [image]. The Dimension Line Ends menu opens.

4	Click the desired line end in the menu. To choose other line options, click Ends to open the Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box.

Tips

The Dimension Line Ends menu displays the most recently selected line ends.

For more information on setting the line style and weight, see Setting Line Styles and Setting Line Weight.


Setting Dimension/Callout Line Ends


Setting Dimension/Callout Text Attributes

To set the text attributes of a dimension or callout line, select the line and choose the text attributes you want using the Text ribbon or the Text tab of the Object Format dialog box.

For information on setting text attributes, see Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors.


To set dimension/callout font size

To set dimension/callout text color


Setting Dimenion/Callout Line Ends


To set dimension/callout font size

1	Select the dimension or callout line.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	Type the desired size in the Font Size box, or click the arrows beside the box to select value.

Tip

You can also set the font size using the Text tab of the Object Format dialog box.


Setting Dimension/Callout Text Attributes


To set dimension/callout text color

1	Select the dimension or callout line.

2	Click a color in the Color Palette.

Tips

To set dimension/callout line color, right-click a color in the Color Palette.

If you do not see the Color Palette, click Toolbars on the View menu, and then select Palette.


DRAWING.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


What is an Object?

An object is the basic element of a Designer drawing. Designer objects are vector-based; their shapes and positions are defined geometrically. Unlike bitmap objects, vector-based objects can be resized with no loss of image quality. They print at the resolution of the printer, and they are displayed at the resolution of the display device.

You create Designer drawings by creating, arranging, and editing objects.

You can manipulate Designer objects in a variety of ways to enhance and help organize your drawing. For example, objects can be colored, combined with other objects, duplicated, and resized.


To draw an object using a drawing tool


Basics of Drawing

Canceling and Redoing Actions

Choosing Drawing Shapes

Constraint Buttons

Simple-Line Drawing Buttons

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons

Rectangular Drawing Buttons

Drawing Regular Polygons

Drawing Elliptical Objects


Drawing Basics
Basics of Drawing

Drawing with Designer is easy. You select the shape you want to draw, and then drag the mouse to draw the object. Designer gives you the precision and flexibility you need to draw almost any shape imaginable.

Designer gives you three different methods for choosing the shape you want to draw.

Drawing Using the Drawing Tools

Clicking a drawing tool and a method button lets you see the type of object you will draw. Use this method if you are drawing with Designer for the first time.

Drawing Using a Shortcut Menu

Anytime a drawing tool is selected, you can select another drawing shape and method by clicking the right mouse button. On the shortcut menu that opens, point to the drawing shape and click the method you want to use.

Drawing Using the Last Drawing Method

When the pointer is a Select pointer [image], you can automatically return to the previous drawing shape and method. Point to an empty area and double-click the left mouse button.

For example, if you draw a jointed line, and then double-click the left mouse button to complete it, you can double-click again to draw another jointed line.


To draw an object using a drawing tool


Canceling and Redoing Actions

Choosing Drawing Shapes

Moving While Drawing


To draw an object using a drawing tool

1	Click the drawing tool that you want. For example, to draw a simple line, click the Simple Line tool [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click the button for the drawing method that you want. For example, click the Line Segment button [image] if you want to draw a straight line. The drawing-method buttons on the ribbon change to show variations you can choose for the selected drawing tool.

3	Move the pointer onto the drawing area and drag to draw the object.

Tip

If you do not see the Toolbox or the Ribbon, click Toolbars on the View menu, and then select the Toolbox and Ribbon items.


Basics of Drawing

Choosing Drawing Shapes

What Is an Object


Canceling and Redoing Actions

Sometimes you will want to stop an action that you have not yet finished, or undo the last change you made. If you change your mind after undoing an action, you can redo it.

You use the ESC key to cancel an action before you complete it.

Use Undo to reverse an action, or event, that you just completed. You can undo up to 100 of the last events, depending on the undo event limit setting. For information on setting the undo event limit, see General Options.

Use Redo to redo an action.

Tips

Undo and Redo affect only actions that have occurred since the last time you saved the drawing. For example, if you move an object and then save the drawing, you cannot undo the move.

Use the Reset Transform command on the Change menu to remove all transformations, such as movements or rotations, from selected objects. Resetting an object transformation:

Returns the object to its original position and restores its original size

Removes all skews and rotations that you have applied

Cancels flips

Removes warps

Returns the origin to the object's center

Note

Fills and reshaped points are not affected by Reset Transform.


To cancel an action before completing it

To undo an action

To redo an action

To change the undo event limit

To reset an object transformation


Basics of Drawing

Choosing Drawing Shapes

Moving While Drawing

General Options


To cancel an action before completing it

Press the ESC key before releasing the mouse button.

Tip

If you are drawing a line but decide you don't want to draw it after all, press ESC. If you are moving an object but decide to cancel the move, press ESC, and the object returns to its original position.


Canceling and Redoing Actions

General Options


To undo an action

On the Edit menu, click Undo (keyboard shortcut CTRL+Z).

Tip

You can change the undo event limit to increase the number of actions that you can undo.


To redo an action

On the Edit menu, click Redo (keyboard shortcut CTRL+SHIFT+Z).

Tip

You can change the undo event limit to increase the number of actions you can redo.


To change the undo event limit

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box opens.

2	Click the General tab, if necessary.

3	Type the desired value in the Undo Event Limit spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

Tip

Increase the Undo Event Limit when you are performing actions with many steps so that you can always reverse all steps in the action.


To reset an object transformation

1	Select the objects to reset.

2	On the Change menu, click Reset Transform.


Choosing Drawing Shapes

Use the drawing tools to draw almost any shape in Designer. When you click a drawing tool, the method buttons for that shape appear on the Ribbon toolbar. Select the drawing method you want by clicking the appropriate method button, if necessary.

For example, to draw a circle, click the Ellipse tool [image]. Now click a drawing-method button to choose how you want to draw the circle (by using three points or drawing its diameter, for example).

Designer remembers the last drawing method used for each drawing tool.

Use This Tool	To Draw
Simple Line	Line segments, parallel lines, perpendicular lines, quarter arcs, and parabolas.
Compound Line	Connected, multi-line objects ("W" shapes, for example); connected curves; B-splines (sine-wave shapes, for example); Bezier curves; freehand objects; and closed objects with jointed lines.
Rectangle	Rectangles and squares with or without rounded corners.
Polygon	Regular polygons (such as triangles and octagons), stars, megagons, and curvygons.
Ellipse	Ellipses, circles, arcs, and pie wedges.
Tip

If you do not see the Ribbon toolbar, click Toolbars on the View menu, and then select the Ribbon item.


To draw an object using a drawing tool


Basics of Drawing

Canceling and Redoing Actions

Moving While Drawing


Moving While Drawing

This useful feature lets you move an object before you finish drawing it.

To move an object while drawing, press and hold the right mouse button without releasing the left mouse button. Move the outline of the unfinished drawing to its new position. Release the right mouse button and continue drawing.

Begin Drawing Object	Hold Right Button to Move	Release Right Button to Resume Drawing


Basics of Drawing

Canceling and Redoing Actions

Choosing Drawing Shapes


Constraint Buttons

You can use the constraint buttons on the Ribbon toolbar to restrict how Designer draws an object. For example, selecting Proportional Constraint [image] forces Designer to draw a rectangle as a square. If you are drawing ellipses, the same button forces an ellipse to draw as a perfect circle.

A constraint button remains on until you click it again to turn it off.

Constraining with the Keyboard

You also can use keystrokes to temporarily activate constraints or to temporarily override a constraint button. Keystrokes activate a constraint only while the key is pressed.

For example, if you press and hold SHIFT while Angle Constraint [image] is selected, you temporarily turn off the constraint.

Constraining to a 15-Degree Angle

You can use Angle Constraint [image] to force lines to draw at angles that are multiples of 15 degrees. This constraint is useful for drawing lines (and object edges) that are perfectly horizontal or vertical.

This button also limits objects to horizontal and vertical movements and restricts rotations and skews to 15-degree increments.

Constraining to a Square or Circle

Use Proportional Constraint [image] (or press SHIFT) to force rectangular or elliptical shapes to draw as squares or circles, respectively.

Reversing the Drawing Direction

Use Reverse Direction [image] to reverse the direction. Designer normally draws objects created from a single side (for example, drawing a square from a single side). See the specific drawing method you are using for details.

From Center Constraint

Use From Center [image] (or press CTRL) to force Designer to draw the object from the center outward. Drawing from the center can be useful when you want the center of the object to be at a specific point.

Note

A constraint button is turned on when a green bar shows on the button.


Basics of Drawing

Drawing with Crosshairs

Changing the View


Drawing with Crosshairs

To set the pointer to full-screen horizontal and vertical crosshairs, point to Workspace on the View menu, and select Show Crosshairs. Deselect this option to turn off the crosshairs.

The crosshairs can help you visually draw, position, and align objects.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for turning the crosshairs on and off is CTRL+H.


Workspace Options

Changing the View


Changing the View

The View tool [image] in the Toolbox and the Zoom Control on the Standard toolbar let you set how large or small a document appears on the screen. Clicking the Zoom tool displays the following tools.

Zoom In

Zoom In [image] lets you see and edit objects in finer detail (a closer view). You define the area you want to zoom by dragging a rectangle around the area or by clicking the center of the area.

Zoom Out

Zoom Out [image] lets you see and edit objects at a more distant perspective. Each time you click Zoom Out, you zoom out the current view by a factor of two.

Previous View

Previous View [image] restores the view before the current view.

Actual Size

Actual Size [image] displays objects at the same size as they print.

Used Area

Used Area [image] displays the objects on the page so that they fit in the viewing window.

Full Page

Full Page [image] fits the entire page in the viewing window.

Full Screen

Full Screen [image] displays the current page without menus, title bar, or any other part of the Designer window. Press ESC or click the mouse button to return to the previous view.

Refresh

Refresh [image] redraws the current window. This lets you clear the screen of unwanted fragments that sometimes result from manipulating objects.

Zoom Control

The Zoom Control on the Standard toolbar lets you specify the size of the view as a percentage. Type 100% in the Zoom Control to display the view at actual size. To zoom in by a factor of 2, type 200% in the Zoom Control. To zoom out by a factor of 2, type 50% in the Zoom Control.


To zoom in

To zoom out


Drawing with Crosshairs

Using Snap Points


To zoom in

1	Click View [image] in the Toolbox. The view tool set opens.

2	Click Zoom In [image] in the tool set. The pointer changes to a magnifying glass.

3	Drag a rectangle around the area you want to zoom.

Tips

To magnify an area by a factor of two, click the center of the area with the magnifying glass pointer.

You can zoom in as many times as you need to get the view you want.

You can also zoom in by a factor of two by clicking the Zoom In icon [image] on the double-line status bar.


Changing the View


To zoom out

1	Click View [image] in the Toolbox. The view tool set opens.

2	Click Zoom Out [image] in the tool set. The view zooms out by a factor of two.

Tips

You can zoom out as many times as you need to get the view you want.

You can also zoom out by a factor of two by clicking the Zoom Out icon [image] on the double-line status bar.


Using Snap Points

You can use object snap to "snap," or attract, the end of a line to a point on an object. These points, or snap points, attract the ends of lines like a magnet when they are near.

Snap points appear as small red squares on an object. You can use snap points to draw a line or other object that perfectly touches the object. Snap points also can help show the symmetrical form of an object when you need to draw, for example, a line through the exact center of a circle. For text and warped objects, snap points appear only on the object's bounding box.

Snap points do not move when an object is moved or deleted.

Note

Snap points are not attached to an object. That's why they don't move when you move or delete the object. Snap points do not print.


To add snap points to an object

To remove snap points

To choose snap point placement

To change snap point sensitivity


Choosing Where Snap Points Appear on an Object

Changing Snap Point Sensitivity

Snap Options


To add snap points to an object

1	Select the objects you want to have snap points.

2	On the Standard toolbar, click Add Snap Points [image]. Snap points appear at the locations specified by the Snap tab of the Options dialog box.

Tip

You can also add snap points by pressing CTRL+F7.


Using Snap Points

Snap Options


To remove snap points

On the Standard toolbar, click Remove Snap Points [image]. All snap points are removed from the drawing area.

Tip

You can also remove snap points by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+F7.


Choosing Where Snap Points Appear on an Object

You can choose where Designer places snap points on an object using the Snap tab of the Options dialog box. For example, you might want snap points to appear only at corners (vertices). You can change where snap points appear at any time.


To choose snap point placement


Using Snap Points

Changing Snap Point Sensitivity

Snap Options


To choose snap point placement

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box opens.

2	Click the Snap tab.

3	In the Object Snap Points section, select where you want snap points to appear.

Tip

If you are only interested in snapping to the midpoints of objects, for example, clear the other snap point options.


Choosing Where Snap Points Appear on an Object

Snap Options

Using Snap Points


Changing Snap Point Sensitivity

You can increase or decrease the sensitivity of snap points by changing the handle size of objects. Choose a large handle size to increase the snap range; choose a smaller size to decrease the range.

For more information on setting the handle size of objects, see Display Options.


To change snap point sensitivity


Using Snap Points

Choosing Where Snap Points Appear on an Object

General Options

Snap Options


To change snap point sensitivity

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box opens.

2	On the Display tab, select a handle size. A large handle size increases the snap range; a smaller size decreases the range.


Changing Snap Point Sensitivity

General Options

Using Snap Points


Snapping to the Ruler

Snapping to the ruler causes objects to snap to the closest ruler division, indicated visually by the on-screen grid. The grid can be turned on and off using the Show Grid option of the Workspace command on the View menu.

The number of snaps per ruler unit is set by the Rulers tab of the Options dialog box.


To turn Snap to Rulers on or off

To change the number of snaps


Changing the Number of Snaps

Workspace Options

Ruler Options


To turn Snap to Rulers on or off

To turn on Snap to Rulers, open the Tools menu, point to Snap, and select Snap to Rulers.

To turn off Snap to Rulers, open the Tools menu, point to Snap, and deselect Snap to Rulers.

Tip

To display a shortcut menu that lets you set Snap to Rulers, click either ruler with the right mouse button.


Snapping to the Ruler

Changing the Number of Snaps

Ruler Options

Workspace Options


Changing the Number of Snaps

Snapping to the rulers is based on the number of snaps per ruler unit. If you change the number of snaps per ruler unit, you also change the number of ruler divisions and the appearance of the on-screen grid.

By default, the number of snaps per ruler unit is the same as the standard ruler divisions. For example, an inch has 16 snaps, and a centimeter has ten snaps.


To change the number of snaps

To turn Snap to Rulers on or off


Snapping to the Ruler

Ruler Options

Workspace Options


To change the number of snaps

1	On the Tools menu, click Options

2	Click the Rulers tab.

3	Change the number of snaps per ruler unit. The rulers redraw to correspond to the number of snaps per unit. For example, a centimeter with five snaps per unit displays five unit-marks on the ruler.

Tip

The snap locations are indicated visually by the on-screen grid. The grid can be turned on and off using the Workspace command on the View menu.


Changing the Number of Snaps

Snapping to the Ruler

Ruler Options

Workspace Options


Snapping to Guides

Guides are non-printing horizontal and vertical lines that provide an easy way to align objects.

By turning on Snap to Guides, you can make nearby guides attract points on an object as you draw or move it.

Tip

To avoid accidentally moving guides, lock them in place while you are manipulating objects.


To turn Snap to Guides on or off

To lock or unlock guides


Using Guides


To turn Snap to Guides on or off

On the Tools menu, point to Snap and select Snap to Guides.


Snapping to Guides

Using Guides


Using the Reference Point

The reference point is a fixed point that you can place anywhere within your workspace. Because its location does not change once it is placed, the reference point lets you draw and position objects exactly where you want them relative to the reference point.

The reference point is illustrated below.

The reference point is the red plus. The dotted red lines connecting the drawing pointer and the reference point are alignment aids.

The reference point offers the following advantages:

The red lines that connect the reference point and the pointer make visual alignment easy.

The position of the reference point is not affected by changing the ruler origin, so you can use it and the ruler coordinates independently.

The position of the reference point is not affected by changing the page size or adding pages of different sizes. This means you use the reference point to align objects across pages of different sizes in multiple page documents.

The reference point appears at the same fixed location in all open Designer documents. This means you use the reference point to align objects across documents.

The reference point can be hidden when not needed.

The Reference Point coordinates dialog box shows the X coordinate offset, Y coordinate offset, linear distance, and angle between the reference point and the pointer. These measurements let you precisely position and move the cursor as you draw.

The controls on the Reference Point toolbar let you constrain objects to the reference point in various ways. For information on using the reference point constraints, see Constraining Objects to the Reference Point.

Note

The reference point location is not saved with a document.


To place the reference point

To show or hide the reference point

To show or hide the reference point coordinates


Constraining Objects to the Reference Point

Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts


To place the reference point

1	On the Tools menu, click Reference Point.

or

Click Reference Point [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Reference Point toolbar appears.

3	On the Reference Point toolbar, click Place Reference Point [image].

4	Move the pointer where you want the reference point and click. The red plus reference point appears at that location.

Tip

To place the reference point using the keyboard, press PLUS on the numeric keypad. The reference point appears at the current pointer location.


Using the Reference Point

Constraining Objects to the Reference Point

Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts


To show or hide the reference point

1	On the Tools menu, click Reference Point.

or

Click Reference Point [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Reference Point toolbar appears.

3	On the Reference Point toolbar, click Show Reference Point [image] . The reference point is alternately shown and hidden by clicking this button.


To show or hide the Reference Point coordinates

1	On the Tools menu, click Reference Point.

or

Click Reference Point [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Reference Point toolbar appears.

3	On the Reference Point toolbar, click Reference Point Coordinates [image]. The Reference Point Coordinates dialog box is alternately shown and hidden by clicking this button.

Tip

To show or hide the Reference Point coordinates using the keyboard, hold down SHIFT and press PLUS on the numeric keypad. The coordinates dialog box alternately appears and disappears.


Constraining Objects to the Reference Point

The controls on the Reference Point toolbar let you constrain objects to the reference point in various ways. For example, using the X and Y offset constraints, you can restrict the movement of an object to a rectangular area around the reference point. The following constraints and combinations are available.

Constrain to X [image] Object drawing, reshaping, and moving are restricted to a specified X coordinate offset from the reference point.

Constrain to Y [image] Object drawing, reshaping, and moving are restricted to a specified Y coordinate offset from the reference point.

Constrain to X and Constrain to Y [image] Object drawing, reshaping, and moving are restricted to a rectangular area around the reference point defined by the specified X and Y coordinate offsets.

Constrain to Angle [image] Object drawing, reshaping, and moving are restricted to a specified angle from the reference point.

Constrain to X and Constrain to Angle [image] Object drawing, reshaping, and moving are restricted to an X coordinate offset and angle from the reference point.

Constrain to Y and Constrain to Angle [image] Object drawing, reshaping, and moving are restricted to a Y coordinate offset and angle from the reference point.

Constrain to X, Constrain to Y, and Constrain to Angle [image] Object drawing, reshaping, and moving are restricted to an X coordinate offset, Y coordinate offset, and angle from the reference point.

Constrain to Distance [image] Object drawing, reshaping, and moving are restricted to a specified linear distance from the reference point.

For closed objects, the reference point constraints use the center point of the object for calculating offsets, distances, and angles.

The constraint imposed on the movement of a star by a distance constraint of 2 inches is shown below. The center point of the star, marked by the black dot, must always remain 2 inches from the reference point, as indicated by the dotted red line.


To turn on the X reference point constraint

To turn on the Y reference point constraint

To turn on the angle reference point constraint

To turn on the distance reference point constraint


Using the Reference Point

Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts


To turn on the X reference point constraint

1	On the Reference Point toolbar, click Constrain to X [image]. The constraint is turned on when its button looks "depressed."

2	Type the X constraint value in the spin box beside the Constrain to X button, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

Tips

Clicking a constraint button alternately turns it on and off.

Hiding the reference point disables the constraint (while the reference point is hidden).

You can also turn reference point constraints on and off using keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts.


Constraining Objects to the Reference Point

Using the Reference Point

Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts


To turn on the Y reference point constraint

1	On the Reference Point toolbar, click Constrain to Y [image]. The constraint is turned on when its button looks "depressed."

2	Type the Y constraint value in the spin box beside the Constrain to Y button, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

Tips

Clicking a constraint button alternately turns it on and off.

Hiding the reference point disables the constraint (while the reference point is hidden).

You can also turn reference point constraints on and off using keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts.


To turn on the distance reference point constraint

1	On the Reference Point toolbar, click Constrain to Distance [image]. The constraint is turned on when its button looks "depressed."

2	Type the distance constraint value in the spin box beside the Constrain to Distance button, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

Tips

Clicking a constraint button alternately turns it on and off.

Hiding the reference point disables the constraint (while the reference point is hidden).

You can also turn reference point constraints on and off using keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts.


To turn on the angle reference point constraint

1	On the Reference Point toolbar, click Constrain to Angle [image]. The constraint is turned on when its button looks "depressed."

2	Type the angle constraint value in the spin box beside the Constrain to Angle button, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

Tips

Clicking a constraint button alternately turns it on and off.

Hiding the reference point disables the constraint (while the reference point is hidden).

You can also turn reference point constraints on and off using keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts.


Using the Reference Point Keyboard Shortcuts

The keyboard shortcuts listed in the table below provide quick access to the reference point features. The PLUS key referred to in the table is the plus key on the numeric keypad (on a standard keyboard, the keypad is the group of keys at the right side of the keyboard).

Keyboard Shortcut	Action

PLUS (keypad)	Places the reference point at the current pointer location.

SHIFT PLUS (keypad)	Shows or hides the Reference Point Coordinates dialog box.

3	Turns on the X constraint and sets the constraint value to the X coordinate offset between the reference point and the current pointer location.

4	Turns on the Y constraint and sets the constraint value to the Y coordinate offset between the reference point and the current pointer location.

5	Turns on the distance constraint and sets the constraint value to the distance between the reference point and the current pointer location.

6	Turns on the angle constraint and sets the constraint value to the angle between the reference point and the current pointer location.

7	Turns the X constraint on and off.

8	Turns the Y constraint on and off.

9	Turns the distance constraint on and off.

0 (zero)	Turns the angle constraint on and off.


Using the Reference Point

Constraining Objects to the Reference Point


Connect-A-Draw

Connect-A-Draw is a Designer feature that makes it easy to chain the ends of open objects as you draw them. You can use this method to create an object made of several different line types. For example, you can draw a straight line, then chain it to a curve, then chain it to a freehand object, and so on.


To chain lines while drawing

To chain an existing open object


Drawing Single Lines

Extending a Line


To chain lines while drawing

1	Draw a segment of the line.

2	Select a different drawing method, if you wish. Hollow boxes appear at both ends of the line.

3	Point to a hollow box at one end of the line and draw the next portion of the object.

4	Repeat steps 2 and 3 to chain more segments.


Connect-A-Draw


To chain an existing open object

1	Select the object you want to augment.

2	Click the drawing tool you want to use, if it is not already selected.

3	Select a drawing method. Hollow boxes appear at both ends of the line when an applicable method is selected.

4	Point to a box at one end of the line and draw the next portion of the object.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 to chain more segments.


Simple Line Drawing Buttons

The Simple Line tool [image] lets you draw several different types of linear objects. They are simple because they are made of only one line or curve.

The Simple Line tool displays buttons that let you draw single, parallel, and perpendicular lines, as well as arcs and parabolic lines.

To draw a simple line, click the Simple Line tool, click a drawing method button, and then drag to draw the line.


To draw a line segment

To draw a parallel or tangent line

To draw a perpendicular line

To extend a straight line

To draw a quarter arc

To draw a parabola


Drawing Single Lines

Drawing Parallel Lines

Drawing Perpendicular Lines

Extending a Line

Drawing Quarter Arcs

Drawing Parabolas


Drawing Single Lines

The Line Segment button [image] lets you draw single, straight lines.


Drawing Parallel Lines

Drawing Perpendicular Lines

Extending a Line

Drawing Quarter Arcs

Drawing Parabolas

Simple-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a line segment

1	Click Simple Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Line Segment [image].

3	Move the pointer to the drawing area.

4	Drag to draw the line.

5	Release the mouse button when you finish drawing the line.

Tip

To constrain the line to an angle that is a multiple of 15-degrees, use Angle Constraint [image]. To draw from the center outward, press and hold CTRL while drawing, or use From Center [image].


Drawing Single Lines

Drawing Parallel Lines

Drawing Perpendicular Lines

Extending a Line

Drawing Quarter Arcs

Drawing Parabolas

Simple-Line Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Drawing Parallel Lines

The Parallel Line button [image] lets you draw a line that is parallel or tangent to a line segment, arc, ellipse, or rectangle.


Drawing Single Lines

Drawing Perpendicular Lines

Extending a Line

Drawing Quarter Arcs

Drawing Parabolas

Simple-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a parallel or tangent line

1	Select the object with which you want the line to be parallel.

2	Click Simple Line [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Parallel Line [image].

4	Move the pointer near the object, and press and hold the left mouse button.

5	Drag the pointer the desired distance from the line or curve to draw the line.

6	Release the mouse button when you finish drawing the line.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for the Simple Line tool is CTRL+D.


Drawing Perpendicular Lines

The Perpendicular Line button [image] lets you draw a line that is perpendicular to a line segment, arc, ellipse, or rectangle.


Drawing Single Lines

Drawing Parallel Lines

Extending a Line

Drawing Quarter Arcs

Drawing Parabolas

Simple-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a perpendicular line

1	Select the object with which you want the line to be perpendicular.

2	Click Simple Line [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Perpendicular Line [image].

4	Move the pointer near the object, and press and hold the left mouse button.

5	Drag the pointer the desired distance from the line or curve to draw the line.

6	Release the mouse button when you finish drawing the line.

Tip

To draw from the center outward, press and hold CTRL while drawing, or use From Center [image].


Extending a Line

You can extend a straight line at the end of an open object. The added line maintains the slope of the original line, or is at a right angle to the original for Parallel and Perpendicular, respectively.


Drawing Single Lines

Drawing Parallel Lines

Drawing Perpendicular Lines

Drawing Quarter Arcs

Drawing Parabolas

Simple-Line Drawing Buttons


To extend a straight line

1	Double-click the line you want to extend.

2	Click Simple Line [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Parallel [image] or Perpendicular [image].

4	Point to the end of the line you want to extend, and drag the extended line.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for the Simple Line tool is CTRL+D.


Drawing Quarter Arcs

The Quarter Arc button [image] lets you draw one quarter of an ellipse.


Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Drawing Single Lines

Drawing Parallel Lines

Drawing Perpendicular Lines

Extending a Line

Drawing Parabolas

Simple-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a quarter arc

1	Click Simple Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Quarter Arc [image].

3	Drag to draw the arc. The arc appears on the screen and changes size and proportion as you drag the pointer.

4	Release the mouse button when you finish drawing the arc.

Tips

Use Proportional Constraint [image] to force Designer to draw radial arcs that are one-quarter of a perfect circle.

Use Reverse Direction [image] to control the bowing direction of the arc. When the constraint is not turned on (the default), the arc bows to the right as you draw upward and left as you draw downward. The opposite occurs when the constraint is turned on.


Drawing Parabolas

The Parabola button [image] lets you draw parabolic shapes. You create parabolas by drawing a line and then bowing the line outward [image] much like pulling an elastic string.


Drawing Single Lines

Drawing Parallel Lines

Drawing Perpendicular Lines

Extending a Line

Drawing Quarter Arcs

Simple-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a parabola

1	Click Simple Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Parabola [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the parabola.

4	Drag where you want to place the other end of the parabola. Release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer to where you want the highest point of the curve.

6	Click the mouse button to finish drawing the parabola.

Tips

To constrain the line in steps 3 and 4 to a 15-degree angle, use Angle Constraint [image].

To draw the line in steps 3 and 4 from the center outward, press and hold CTRL while drawing, or use From Center [image].


Compound Line Drawing Buttons

The Compound Line tool [image] lets you draw objects made of connected lines and curves.

The Compound Line tool [image] displays buttons that let you draw jointed lines, curves, B-splines, Bezier curves, freehand objects, and irregular closed polygons.


To prepare to draw a compound line

To draw a jointed line

To draw a curve

To draw a B-spline

To draw a Bezier curve

To draw a freehand object

To draw an irregular polygon


Drawing Jointed Lines

Drawing Curves

Drawing B-Splines

Drawing Bezier Curves

Drawing Freehand Objects

Drawing Irregular Polygons


To prepare to draw a compound line

1	Click Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click a drawing method button.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for the Compound Line tool is CTRL+SHIFT+W.


Drawing Jointed Lines

Drawing Curves

Drawing B-Splines

Drawing Bezier Curves

Drawing Freehand Objects

Drawing Irregular Polygons

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Drawing Jointed Lines

The Jointed Line button [image] lets you draw objects that are a "chain" of connected straight lines.

Jointed lines are open unless the last point is the same as the first; then Designer automatically closes the lines. If you want to close an open jointed line, select the object, click Combine on the Change menu, and click Connect Closed. The ends are connected with a straight line.

Use the Irregular Polygon button [image] to create closed objects with multiple sides. For more information on drawing irregular polygons, see Drawing Irregular Polygons.


To draw a jointed line

To prepare to draw a compound line


Drawing Curves

Drawing B-Splines

Drawing Bezier Curves

Drawing Freehand Objects

Drawing Irregular Polygons

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a jointed line

1	Click Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Jointed Line [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the jointed line.

4	Drag to draw the first line. Release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer to the endpoint for the second line, and press and hold the left mouse button. Designer draws the second line from the end of the first line to the pointer.

6	Drag the pointer (while still holding the left mouse button) to reposition the line endpoint, if necessary.

7	Release the mouse button when the line is where you want it.

8	Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each additional line.

9	Click the left mouse button or press ESC when you finish.

Tip

To constrain the line to an angle that is a multiple of 15-degrees, use Angle Constraint [image].


Drawing Jointed Lines

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Drawing Curves

The Curved Line button [image] lets you draw objects that are a "chain" of connected, curving (parabolic spline) lines.

Objects drawn with the Curved Line button [image] are open unless the last point is the same as the first; then Designer automatically closes it. If you want to close an open curve, select the object, click Combine on the Change menu, and click Connect Closed. The ends are connected with a straight line.


To draw a curve

To prepare to draw a compound line


Drawing Jointed Lines

Drawing B-Splines

Drawing Bezier Curves

Drawing Freehand Objects

Drawing Irregular Polygons

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a curve

1	Click Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Curved Line [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the curve.

4	Drag to draw a line.

5	Release the mouse button.

6	Drag the pointer. The line curves in the direction you move the pointer.

7	Release the mouse button when the curve is the shape and length you want.

8	Repeat steps 6 and 7 to add more curved segments.

9	Click the left mouse button or press ESC when you finish.

Tip

To constrain the line to angles that are multiples of 15 degrees, use Angle Constraint [image].


Drawing Curves

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Drawing B-Splines

The B-Spline button [image] lets you draw B-spline curves. B-splines are smooth curves based on at least three points. The curve touches the first and last points and is pulled by the middle point.

Objects drawn with the B-Spline button [image] are open unless the last point is the same as the first; then Designer automatically closes it. If you want to close an open curve, select the object, click Combine on the Change menu, and click Connect Closed. The ends are connected with a straight line.


To draw a B-spline

To prepare to draw a compound line


Drawing Jointed Lines

Drawing Curves

Drawing Bezier Curves

Drawing Freehand Objects

Drawing Irregular Polygons

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a B-spline

1	Click Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click B-Spline [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the curve.

4	Drag to draw the first line of the curve.

5	Release the mouse button.

6	Drag to draw the second line of the curve.

7	Repeat step 6 to draw additional (connected) curves.

8	Click the left mouse button or press ESC when you finish.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for the Compound Line tool is CTRL+SHIFT+W.


Drawing B-Splines

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Drawing Bezier Curves

The Bezier Curve button [image] lets you draw Bezier curves. After a little practice, you can use this tool to create smooth, curving objects in much less time than it takes using other tools.

Tip

Although drawing Bezier curves takes some practice, it's worth the effort. If you are new to Bezier curves, practice reshaping some curved objects before trying to draw with Bezier curves. For more information curve reshaping, see Curve Reshaping.


To draw a Bezier curve

To prepare to draw a compound line


Drawing Jointed Lines

Drawing Curves

Drawing B-Splines

Drawing Freehand Objects

Drawing Irregular Polygons

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a Bezier curve

1	Click Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Bezier Curve [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the curve.

4	Press the left mouse button for about one second, then release it.

5	Move the pointer where you want to place the second point. Press and hold the left mouse button until Designer connects the two endpoints.

6	Drag the pointer to change the curvature of the line. Release the mouse button when you have the curve that you want.

or

Release the mouse button without dragging to create a cusp (an angle).

7	Repeat steps 5 and 6 to draw more (connected) curves.

8	Click the left mouse button or press ESC when you finish.

Tips

When you draw Bezier curves, the first mouse press places the first anchor point; the second mouse press and drag places the second anchor point and changes that anchor's control points.

Be sure to press the left mouse button for longer than a "click" when placing the second and subsequent Bezier points. Pressing the mouse button for one second should be long enough. If you click the mouse button, you end the Bezier drawing action.

Objects drawn with Bezier Curve [image] are open unless the last point is the same as the first; then Designer automatically closes it. If you want to close an open curve, select the object, click Combine on the Change menu, and click Connect Closed. The ends are connected with a straight line.


Drawing Bezier Curves

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Drawing Freehand Objects

The Freehand button [image] lets you draw freeform objects as if you were drawing with pencil and paper.

This button is especially useful if you are using a digitizing pad and pen to trace drawings. When you finish drawing, Designer automatically smoothes the object and converts it to curves.


To draw a freehand object

To prepare to draw a compound line


Drawing Jointed Lines

Drawing Curves

Drawing B-Splines

Drawing Bezier Curves

Drawing Irregular Polygons

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw a freehand object

1	Click Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Freehand [image].

3	Point where you want to begin drawing.

4	Drag to draw the object.

5	Release the mouse button when you finish drawing.

Tip

Freehand objects are open unless the last point is the same as the first; then Designer automatically closes it. If you want to close an open freehand object, select it, click Combine on the Change menu, and click Connect Closed. The ends are connected with a straight line.


Drawing Freehand Objects

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Drawing Irregular Polygons

The Irregular Polygon button [image] lets you draw closed objects with multiple sides.

See Drawing Regular Polygons and Drawing Stars to draw polygons, such as triangles and stars, in which each side is the same length.


To draw an irregular polygon

To prepare to draw a compound line


Drawing Jointed Lines

Drawing Curves

Drawing B-Splines

Drawing Bezier Curves

Drawing Freehand Objects

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons


To draw an irregular polygon

1	Click Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Irregular Polygon [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the polygon.

4	Drag to draw the first side of the polygon. Release the mouse button when you have the first side drawn as you want it.

5	Move the pointer where you want to place the third point. Press the left mouse button until Designer connects the three endpoints.

6	Repeat step 5 to place more points, if you wish.

7	Click the left mouse button or press ESC when you finish.

Tip

Use Angle Constraint [image] to constrain the polygon side to an angle that is a multiple of 15-degrees.


Drawing Irregular Polygons

Compound-Line Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Rectangular Drawing Buttons

The Rectangle tool [image] lets you choose from several different methods for drawing rectangular shapes.

It displays buttons that let you draw a rectangle from opposite corners or from a single side. You can also draw a rectangle based on its height and width.

Note

Although "rectangle" refers to both squares and rectangles, "square" means only perfect square shapes.


To draw a rectangle or square using the Diagonal method

To draw a rectangle or parallelogram using the Height/Width method

To draw a rounded rectangle

To add rounded corners to an existing rectangle


Drawing a Rectangle or Square

Creating Rectangles with Rounded Corners

Rounding Existing Rectangles


Drawing a Rectangle or Square

Diagonal Method The Diagonal method [image] is one of the most intuitive ways to draw rectangles because you just drag diagonally to create the rectangle. Using Proportional Constraint [image] or pressing SHIFT forces a square.
Height/Width Method The Height/Width method [image] lets you draw rectangles and parallelograms by specifying the height and width. Pressing and holding SHIFT forces a rectangle.
Single Side Method The Single Side method [image] draws only squares. Drag to draw one edge of the square. Designer draws the rest of the square automatically when you release the mouse button.
Note

By default, squares draw down as you drag right, and up as you drag left. Use Reverse Direction [image] for the opposite effect.


Creating Rectangles with Rounded Corners

Rounding Existing Rectangles

Rectangular Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


To draw a rectangle or square using the Diagonal method

1	Click Rectangle [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Diagonal [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the rectangle and drag the pointer to the opposite corner.

Tip

 To force a square, press SHIFT while drawing the rectangle.


Drawing a Rectangle or Square

Creating Rectangles with Rounded Corners

Rounding Existing Rectangles

Rectangular Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


To draw a rectangle or parallelogram using the Height/Width method

1	Click Rectangle [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Height/Width [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the rectangle or parallelogram.

4	Drag to draw the first edge.

5	Release the mouse button.

6	Move the pointer to draw the rest of the object. To force a rectangle, press and hold SHIFT.

7	Click the right mouse button (and release SHIFT if you drew a rectangle) when you finish.


Creating Rectangles with Rounded Corners

The Rounded Rectangle button [image] lets you create rectangles and squares with rounded corners. You can increase or decrease the curve of the corner (before it is drawn) by increasing or decreasing the radius. A larger radius increases the curvature; a smaller radius decreases it.


To draw a rounded rectangle

To add rounded corners to an existing rectangle


Drawing a Rectangle or Square

Rounding Existing Rectangles

Rectangular Drawing Buttons


To draw a rounded rectangle

1	Click Rectangle [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Diagonal [image] or Single Side [image].

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Rounded Rectangle [image].

4	Change the radius in the Radius box, if you wish.

5	Drag to draw the rounded rectangle.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for the Rectangle tool is CTRL+SHIFT+X.


Creating Rectangles with Rounded Corners

Rounding Existing Rectangles

Drawing a Rectangle or Square

Rectangular Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


Rounding Existing Rectangles

You can round the corners of existing rectangles that have not been rotated, skewed, converted to curves, or warped. You cannot round the corners of squares drawn with Single Side [image]. Rectangles drawn with the Height/Width method must have been drawn at a 90-degree angle before you can round the corners.


To add rounded corners to an existing rectangle

To draw a rounded rectangle


Creating Rectangles with Rounded Corners

Drawing a Rectangle or Square

Rectangular Drawing Buttons

Constraint Buttons


To add rounded corners to an existing rectangle

1	Select the rectangle to round.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Rect option on the menu. A blue handle appears near the rectangle's upper left corner.

4	Drag the blue handle toward the center of the rectangle.

5	Release the mouse button when you finish rounding the corners.

Tips

To quickly select a rectangle for rounding, double-click it with the Select pointer.

You can round rectangles created with Height/Width [image] only if you constrained the rectangle while drawing it.


Rounding Existing Rectangles

Creating Rectangles with Rounded Corners

Rectangular Drawing Buttons

Drawing a Rectangle or Square

Constraint Buttons

Object-Specific Reshaping


Drawing Regular Polygons

Regular Polygon Drawing Buttons

The Polygon tool [image] lets you choose from several different methods for drawing regular shapes with multiple sides. It displays buttons that let you draw a regular polygon from center to corner, from center to side, and from just one side.

If you want to draw irregular polygons (polygons in which not all the sides are equal), use the Irregular Polygon button [image].

To Corner Method The To Corner method [image] lets you draw polygons from the center to a corner.
To Side Method The To Side method [image] lets you draw polygons from the center to a side.
Single Side Method The Single Side method [image] lets you create a polygon by drawing only one of its sides. Drag to draw one edge of the polygon. The rest of the polygon is drawn automatically when you release the mouse button.


To draw a polygon from center to a corner

To draw a polygon form the center to a side

To draw a star from center to a point

To draw a star from center to a side

To draw a star from a point to a point

To draw a megagon

To draw a curvygon


Drawing Stars

Drawing Megagons and Curvygons

Constraint Buttons


To draw a polygon from center to a corner

1	Click Polygon [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click To Corner [image].

3	Enter the number of sides for the polygon in the Number of Sides box (three or more).

4	Point where you want the center of the polygon.

5	Drag to draw the polygon.

6	Release the mouse button when the polygon is the size you want.

Tip

To constrain polygons to multiples of 15 degrees, use Angle Constraint [image].


Drawing Regular Polygons

Constraint Buttons


To draw a polygon from the center to a side

1	Click Polygon [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click To Side [image].

3	Enter the number of sides for the polygon in the Number of Sides box (three or more).

4	Point where you want the center of the polygon.

5	Drag to draw the polygon.

6	Release the mouse button when the polygon is the size you want.

Tips

To constrain polygons to a 15-degree angle, use Angle Constraint [image].

Press SHIFT to quickly switch to drawing from center to corner.


Drawing Stars

Designer lets you draw star shapes with any number of points. Drawing a star is a two-step process. First you drag the mouse to draw a polygon, which establishes the star's size, and then you drag the mouse to draw the star's points.

The Polygon tool [image] lets you choose from three different methods for drawing stars.

To Point Method The To Point method [image] lets you draw stars from the center to a point.
To Side Method The To Side method [image] lets you draw stars from the center to a side.
Point to Point Method The Point to Point method [image] lets you draw a star by drawing two of its points.


To draw a star from center to a point

To draw a star from center to a side

To draw a star from a point to a point


Drawing Regular Polygons

Drawing Megagons and Curvygons

Constraint Buttons


To draw a star from center to a point

1	Click Polygon [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click To Point [image].

3	Type the number of points for the star in the Number of Sides box, if you wish.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button and draw a polygon from center to a corner. Release the mouse button when you finish.

5	Move the pointer toward or away from the corner of the polygon to create the star's points.

6	Click the left mouse button or press ESC to complete the star.

Tip

To constrain the star to 15-degree angles, use Angle Constraint [image].


Drawing Stars

Drawing Regular Polygons

Constraint Buttons


To draw a star from center to a side

1	Click Polygon [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click To Side [image].

3	Type the number of points for the star in the Number of Sides box, if you wish.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button and draw a polygon from center to a side. Release the mouse button when you finish.

5	Move the pointer toward or away from the side of the polygon to create the star's points.

7	Click the left mouse button or press ESC to complete the star.

Tip

To constrain the star to 15-degree angles, use Angle Constraint [image].


To draw a star from a point to a point

1	Click Polygon [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Point to Point [image].

3	Type the number of points for the star in the Number of Sides box, if you wish.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button and draw a polygon from a corner to a corner. Release the mouse button when you finish.

5	Move the pointer toward or away from the corner of the polygon to create the star's points.

6	Click the left mouse button or press ESC to complete the star.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for the Polygon tool is CTRL+SHIFT+Y.


Drawing Megagons and Curvygons

The Polygon tool [image] lets you draw megagons and curvygons. Megagons and curvygons differ in that megagons have straight edges and curvygons have curved edges.

Megagon	Curvygon


To draw a megagon

To draw a curvygon


Drawing Regular Polygons

Drawing Stars

Constraint Buttons


To draw a megagon

1	Click Polygon [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Megagon [image].

3	Type the number of points for the megagon in the Number of Sides box, if you wish.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button and draw a polygon. Release the mouse button when you finish.

5	Click to establish a point and then drag the mouse to shape the megagon's edges.

6	Repeat step 5 as many times as you want to add more points to the megagon's edges.

7	Click the left mouse button or press ESC to complete the megagon.

Tip

To constrain the megagon to 15-degree angles, use Angle Constraint [image].


Drawing Megagons and Curvygons

Drawing Regular Polygons

Constraint Buttons


To draw a curvygon

1	Click Polygon [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Curvygon [image].

3	Type the number of points for the curvygon in the Number of Sides box, if you wish.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button and draw a polygon. Release the mouse button when you finish.

5	Click to establish a point and then drag the mouse to shape the curvygon's edges.

6	Repeat step 5 as many times as you want to add more points to the curvygon's edges.

7	Click the left mouse button or press ESC to complete the curvygon.

Tip

To constrain the curvygon to 15-degree angles, use Angle Constraint [image].


Drawing Elliptical Objects

The Ellipse tool [image] lets you choose from four different methods for drawing elliptical shapes: the Diagonal, Height/Width, Diameter, and 3-Point Circle methods. You can use the method that suits your needs and preferences.

Diagonal Method The Diagonal method [image] lets you draw an ellipse diagonally from one corner of its bounding box to the opposite.
Height/Width Method The Height/Width method [image] lets you draw an ellipse by specifying the height and width of its bounding box.
Diameter Method The Diameter method [image] lets you draw circles from one edge of the circle to the opposite edge. Drag to draw the circle.
3-Point Circle Method The 3-Point Circle method [image] lets you draw a circle by specifying three points on its edge.
Tips

"Ellipse" refers to both ellipses and circles, but "circle" describes only perfect circular shapes.

An ellipse drawn with the Height/Width method must be drawn at a 90-degree angle before you can reshape it into a wedge or an arc. For more information on reshaping an ellipse, see Object-Specific Reshaping.

There are three ways to draw a circle. You can use the Diameter method or the 3-Point Circle method, or you can choose one of the elliptical drawing methods and activate Proportional Constraint [image].


To draw and ellipse using the Diagonal method

To draw a circle using the 3-Point Circle method

To draw a 3-point elliptical arc

To draw an elliptical arc by tracing an ellipse

To edit an arc

To draw pie wedges

To convert an ellipse into a pie wedge

To convert an arc into a pie wedge


Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Editing an Arc

Drawing Pie Wedges


To draw an ellipse using the Diagonal method

1	Click Ellipse [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Diagonal [image].

3	Point where you want to begin the ellipse's (invisible) rectangular bounding box.

4	Drag diagonally to draw the ellipse.

5	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tip

Press SHIFT while drawing the ellipse to force a circle.


Drawing Elliptical Objects

Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Editing an Arc

Drawing Pie Wedges

Constraint Buttons


To draw a circle using the 3-Point Circle method

1	Click Ellipse [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click 3-Point Circle [image].

3	Point where you want to place the first point on the circle. Press and hold the left mouse button.

4	Drag the pointer where you want to place the second point. Release the mouse button.

5	Move the pointer where you want to place the third point. Click the left mouse button to draw the circle.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for the Ellipse tool is CTRL+SHIFT+Z.


Drawing Elliptical Arcs

An elliptical arc is a segment of an ellipse. There are two ways to draw an elliptical arc: the 3-Point Arc and the Trace an Ellipse methods.

3-Point Arc Method

The 3-Point Arc method lets you draw an arc by specifying three points on the arc.

Tip

You can draw quarter arcs using Quarter Arc [image]. With quarter arcs you don't first draw an ellipse, but you are limited to drawing only one quarter of an ellipse. For more information on drawing quarter arcs, see Drawing Quarter Arcs.


To draw a 3-point elliptical arc

To draw an elliptical arc by tracing an ellipse

To edit an arc

To convert an arc into a pie wedge


Drawing Elliptical Objects

Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Editing an Arc

Drawing Pie Wedges


To draw a 3-point elliptical arc

1	Click Ellipse [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click 3-Point Arc [image].

3	Drag the arc's diameter and release the mouse button.

4	Move the pointer to create the arc.

5	Click the left mouse button to draw the arc.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for the Ellipse tool is CTRL+SHIFT+Z.


Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Editing an Arc

Drawing Elliptical Objects


Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

You can use the edge of an existing ellipse to draw an elliptical arc if you have not rotated, skewed, or converted the ellipse to curves. The arc traces along the edge of the ellipse and replaces the ellipse.


To draw an elliptical arc by tracing an ellipse

To draw a 3-point elliptical arc

To edit an arc

To convert an arc into a pie wedge


Drawing Elliptical Objects

Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Editing an Arc

Drawing Pie Wedges


To draw an elliptical arc by tracing an ellipse

1	Draw the ellipse to use as a template for the arc.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Conic option on the menu. A blue handle appears at the top of the ellipse.

4	Position the pointer outside the ellipse.

5	Drag in a circular motion outside of the ellipse. (Dragging inside the ellipse creates a pie wedge instead of and arc.)

6	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tips

To quickly select an ellipse for converting to an arc or  wedge, double-click it with the Select pointer.

You can also create arcs from pie wedges as long as the wedges have not been skewed, rotated, or converted to curves.


Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Editing an Arc

Drawing Pie Wedges

Object-Specific Reshaping

Drawing Elliptical Objects


Editing an Arc

You can lengthen or shorten an arc by double-clicking the arc and dragging in a circular motion outside the object.


To edit an arc

To draw an elliptical arc by tracing an ellipse


Drawing Elliptical Objects

Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Drawing Pie Wedges


To edit an arc

1	Select the arc.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Conic option on the menu.  Blue handles appear at each end of the arc.

4	Position the pointer outside the arc at the end you want to edit.

5	Drag in a circular motion outside of the arc. (Dragging inside the arc creates a pie wedge instead of and arc.)

6	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tip

To quickly select an arc for editing, double-click it with the Select pointer.


Editing an Arc

Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Drawing Pie Wedges

Object-Specific Reshaping

Drawing Elliptical Objects


Drawing Pie Wedges

You use an existing ellipse to draw individual or multiple pie wedges. You can draw several pie wedges to create a circular pie, or you can create just a portion of the pie.

Each pie wedge is a closed object that you can select and edit individually. For example, you can create a chart in which each wedge of the pie is a different color.


To draw pie wedges

To convert an ellipse into a pie wedge

To convert an arc into a pie wedge


Drawing Elliptical Objects

Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Editing an Arc


To draw pie wedges

1	Draw an ellipse.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Pie [image].

3	Position the pointer near the ellipse and drag in a circular motion to create the first wedge.

4	Release the mouse button when the wedge is the size you want.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more adjacent wedges to the pie.

6	Press ESC or click outside the object when you finish.

Tip

You cannot create a pie from an ellipse (or elliptical arc) that has been converted to curves, rotated, or skewed.


Drawing Pie Wedges

Drawing Elliptical Arcs

Editing an Arc

Tracing an Ellipse's Edge

Object-Specific Reshaping

Drawing Elliptical Objects


Converting an Ellipse into a Pie Wedge
To convert an ellipse into a pie wedge

1	Select the ellipse.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Conic option on the menu. A blue handle appears at the top of the ellipse.

4	Drag the pointer in a circular motion inside the ellipse. (Dragging outside the ellipse creates an arc instead of a wedge.)

5	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tip

To quickly select an ellipse for converting to a wedge or arc, double-click it with the Select pointer.


Converting an arc into a Pie Wedge
To convert an arc into a pie wedge

1	Select the arc.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Conic option on the menu. Blue handles appear at each end of the arc.

4	Drag the pointer in a circular motion inside the arc. (Dragging outside the arc extends the arc instead of creating a wedge.)

5	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tip

To quickly select an arc for converting to a wedge (or for extending the arc), double-click it with the Select pointer.


OBJECTS.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Selecting Objects

Before you can apply any action to an object, you must select it. For example, to move an object, you select it and drag it using the mouse.

Designer offers you many ways to select an object.

Click the object with the Select pointer

Block selecting

Select All

Implied selection

Selecting by attribute or property

When you select an object, handles appear around the object, indicating that the object is selected. If you select the object in Select Mode (the Select tool [image] is active), the handles are blue boxes. If you select the object in Rotate/Skew Mode (the Rotate/Skew tool [image] is active), the handles are blue rotation and skew symbols.

Select Mode	Rotate/Skew Mode
Notes

For most actions, you can select an object in either Select or Rotate/Skew mode. For actions involving handles, however, the mode determines the way the handles perform.

After you draw an object, or if you click an object with a drawing pointer, the object is selected in a special mode known as implied selection. Implicitly selected closed objects have one hollow handle. Implicitly selected open objects have a hollow handle at each endpoint.

Tip

Watch the handles! They can help you determine if you've selected the correct object when there are many objects on the page. You also can use the status bar to help determine if you've selected the correct object. The status bar shows the shape selected, such as Rectangle, Line, Ellipse, Polygon, and so on.


To select an object by clicking it

To select an overlapping object

To block select objects

To deselect a selection

To deselect an object

To select objects by attribute based on an object

To select objects by attribute based on multiple objects

To select objects by attribute based on defaults

To select objects by property


Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects

Selecting Objects by Attributes

Selecting Objects by Property


Select Mode

Clicking Select [image] in the Toolbox displays the Select pointer [image] and puts Designer in Select mode. In Select mode, objects that you select are surrounded by eight blue handles. (If the object is a line, only two blue handles appear, one at either end.) If several objects are selected at once, the handles surround all of the selected objects.

Select mode lets you select objects for actions such as copying, cutting, moving, and editing. For example, to cut an object, select the object and then click Cut on the Edit menu.

Select mode lets you change the size and shape of a selected object by dragging its handles.

If you drag a corner handle, you enlarge or shrink the object while maintaining its original proportions.

If you drag a side handle, you stretch the object and change its proportions.

Tip

You can switch an already selected object from Select mode to Rotate/Skew mode, or from Rotate/Skew mode to Select mode, by clicking it again with the Select pointer.


To select an object by clicking it

To select an overlapping object

To block select objects

To deselect a selection

To deselect an object


Selecting Objects

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects


Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking Rotate/Skew [image] in the Toolbox displays the Select pointer [image] and puts Designer in Rotate/Skew mode. In Rotate/Skew mode, objects that you select show a center pivot point and are surrounded by rotation and skew handles. If several objects are selected at once, the surrounding handles enclose all of the selected objects.

Rotate/Skew mode, like Select mode, lets you select objects for actions such as copying, cutting, moving, and editing. For example, to move an object, select the object, place the pointer anywhere inside the handles, and then drag the object to the new position.

Rotate/Skew mode lets you rotate or skew a selected object by dragging its handles.

If you drag a corner handle in a circular motion, you rotate the object around its pivot point. To change the location of the pivot point, drag the point to the new location.

If you drag a side handle, you skew (slant) the object.

Tip

You can switch an already selected object from Select mode to Rotate/Skew mode, or from Rotate/Skew mode to Select mode, by clicking it again with the Select pointer.


To select an object by clicking it

To select an overlapping object

To block select objects

To deselect a selection

To deselect an object


Selecting Objects

Select Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects


Clicking to Select Objects

When you want to click to select objects, click the object with the Select pointer [image]. The Select pointer can be displayed in three ways.

Click Select [image] in the Toolbox.

Click Rotate/Skew [image] in the Toolbox.

If a drawing pointer is shown, double-click the left mouse button away from all objects. When you finish selecting, you can double-click again to return to the previous drawing mode.

Select Pointer	A Drawing Pointer


Selecting Objects

Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects


To select an object by clicking it

To select an object, point to it with the tip of the Select pointer [image] and click the left mouse button. Handles appear around the object, indicating it is selected.

Tips

You must point to an element of the object such as a line or color. For example, to select an unfilled circle, you point and click the edge of the circle, not the (transparent) interior. If the interior is filled, you can click anywhere in the interior to select the object.

If you are in a drawing mode, you can point to the object with a drawing pointer and double-click to select it.

Single-clicking an object in drawing mode results in implied selection of the object, indicated by a hollow selection handle.

To select additional objects, hold down SHIFT and click the other objects that you want to include.

Be careful not to move the pointer while clicking or you'll move the object.


Selecting an Object

Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects


Selecting Overlapping Objects

You can select overlapping objects by pressing ALT while clicking with the Select pointer. Each click selects an object deeper in the stack, starting with the object in front. (See Input Options for information on changing the left mouse button's function.)

Tip

Holding down ALT forces Designer to not switch to Rotate/Skew Mode when you click an already-selected object. It also lets you click anywhere inside an unfilled object to select it.


Selecting Objects

Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects


To select an overlapping object

While holding down ALT, click with the Select pointer until the object that you want is selected.

Each click selects an object deeper in the stack, starting with the object in front.

Tip

Holding down ALT forces Designer to not switch to Rotate/Skew mode when you click an already-selected object. It also lets you click anywhere inside an unfilled object to select it.


Other Clicking Actions

Clicking an already-selected object with the Select pointer switches the object from Select Mode to Rotate/Skew Mode mode, or from Rotate/Skew mode to Select mode.

Rotate/Skew selection is indicated by the appearance of the rotation/skew handles.

Double-clicking an object with the Select pointer puts the object in reshape mode. Different types of objects have different reshaping indicators. For more information on reshaping objects, see Introduction to Object Editing.

Tip

To be certain that you have the correct selection mode, check the status bar. If the object is selected in Select mode, the status bar shows Select Mode. If the object is selected in Rotate/Skew mode, the status bar shows Rotate and Skew Mode. If the object is selected for reshaping, the status bar shows the reshape mode.


Selecting Objects

Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects


Implied Selection

You can change an object's interior fill, line style, or other style attribute immediately after drawing it without explicitly selecting it. "Remembering" the last drawn object is called implied selection.

Implicitly selected closed objects have one hollow handle. Implicitly selected open objects have a hollow handle at each endpoint.

Tips

Single-clicking an object with a drawing pointer also implicitly selects the object.

Implicitly selected objects cannot be resized, rotated, or skewed without first selecting them for these actions. To switch an implicitly selected object to Select Mode, double-click the object with the Select pointer, or click Select [image] in the Toolbox. To switch an implicitly selected object to Rotate/Skew Mode, click Rotate/Skew [image] in the Toolbox.


Selecting Objects

Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects


Block-Selecting Objects
Block Selecting Objects

You can select objects by using the Select pointer to drag a blue bounding box around the objects you want to select. This selection method is called block selecting.

The objects must be fully enclosed within the bounding box to be selected. By holding down ALT while you drag the bounding box, however, you also select all objects that are partially enclosed within the bounding box.

You can block select objects in Select Mode or in Rotate/Skew Mode.


Selecting Objects

Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Selecting All Objects

Deselecting Objects


To block select objects

1	Position the Select pointer outside the objects you want to select.

2	Hold down the left mouse button and drag a rectangular bounding box around the objects you want to select.

Tips

Unless you hold down ALT, the entire object must be enclosed in the bounding box before that object is selected. By holding down ALT while you drag the bounding box, however, you also select all objects that are partially enclosed within the bounding box.

You can cancel a block selection by pressing ESC before releasing the mouse button.

Check the status bar to determine how many objects you have block selected. If you have selected 10 objects, for example, the status bar shows Objects (10).


Selecting All Objects

Use any of these methods to select all the objects on the page.

On the Edit menu, click Select All.

Press the keyboard shortcut CTRL+A or F2.

To select all objects except those currently selected, press CTRL+SHIFT+A or SHIFT+F2.

When multiple objects are selected, actions such as copying, moving, resizing, and filling apply to all of the selected objects.


Selecting Objects

Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Deselecting Objects


Deselecting Objects

Click the left mouse button anywhere away from all objects to deselect all selected objects.

If you want to deselect some objects, but not others, point to the object you want to deselect, hold down SHIFT, and click the left mouse button. Point to another object to deselect and click again. Release SHIFT when you finish.

You can also deselect all objects by choosing Deselect All on the Edit menu.


Selecting Objects

Select Mode

Rotate/Skew Mode

Clicking to Select Objects

Selecting Overlapping Objects

Other Clicking Actions

Implied Selection

Block Selecting Objects

Selecting All Objects


To deselect a selection

Click anywhere outside of the selected object or objects.

Tips

You can also deselect all objects by choosing Deselect All on the Edit menu.

The keyboard shortcut to deselect all objects is CTRL+F2.


To deselect an object

Hold down SHIFT and click the object you want to deselect.


Selecting Objects by Attributes

You can search for and select objects based on one or more of their attributes. For example, you can select all objects that have a red interior fill; or all objects that have a red interior fill, dashed lines, and a line weight of 2 points.

When selecting objects by attribute, you can base the selection on the attributes of a selected object, or on the default styles. You can restrict the selection to specific object types, such as Image (bitmap) Objects, OLE Objects, or Dimension Lines.

Attributes can also be used to deselect objects. For example, you can select all objects, and then deselect the objects with red interiors.

Note

Selection by attribute applies only to the current page. To apply selection by attribute to all layers on the current page, select Edit All Layers using the Layer Manager. For more information on using the Layers Manager, see Using the Layer Manager.


To select objects by attribute based on an object

To select objects by attribute based on multiple objects

To select objects by attribute based on defaults

To select objects by property


Selecting Objects

Selecting Objects by Property


To select objects by attribute based on an object

1	Select the object on which you want to base your selection. For example, to select objects with a certain interior fill, select an object with that fill.

2	On the Edit menu, click Select. The Select Object dialog box opens.

3	In the Type box, choose the type of object to which you want to restrict the selection. For example, choose Any Shape Object to restrict the selection to shapes only (squares, circles, stars, and so forth).

4	Select the attributes on which you want to base the selection. For example, if the selected object has a red interior and you choose Interior Fill Style, all objects with red interiors will be selected.

5	Click All Matching Objects.

or

Click Next Matching Object.

6	Click Select to make the selection.

Tips

You can select matching objects one at a time using the Next Matching Object option. Click Select to deselect the first object and select the next one.

To deselect objects that match the specified attributes, click Deselect All.

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Select Object dialog box is CTRL+SHIFT+F2.


Selecting Objects by Attributes

Selecting Objects by Property


To select objects by attribute based on multiple objects

1	Select the first object on which you want to base your selection. For example, to select objects with a certain interior fill, select an object with that fill.

2	On the Edit menu, click Select. The Select Object dialog box opens.

3	In the Type box, choose the type of object to which you want to restrict the selection. For example, choose Any Shape Object to restrict the selection to shapes only (squares, circles, stars, and so forth).

4	Select the attributes on which you want to base the selection. For example, if the selected object has a red interior and you choose Interior Fill Style, all objects with red interiors will be selected.

5	Click All Matching Objects.

or

Click Next Matching Object.

6	Click Select to make the selection.

7	Without closing the Select Object dialog box, select the second object on which you want to base your selection.

8	Repeat steps 3 through 6 for the second object.

9	Click Append. The new selection is added to the objects already selected.

Tips

You can select matching objects one at a time using the Next Matching Object option. Click Select to deselect the first object and select the next one.

To deselect objects that match the specified attributes, click Deselect All.

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Select Object dialog box is CTRL+SHIFT+F2.


To select objects by attribute based on defaults

1	Deselect all objects.

2	Set the default style on which you want to base the selection. For example, to select objects with a dashed line style, select that line style as the default.

3	On the Edit menu, click Select. The Select Object dialog box opens.

4	In the Type box, choose the type of object to which you want to restrict the selection. For example, choose Any Shape Object to restrict the selection to shapes only (squares, circles, stars, and so forth).

5	Select the attributes on which you want to base the selection. For example, select Line Style to select objects with the default line style.

6	Click All Matching Objects.

or

Click Next Matching Object.

7	Click Select to make the selection.

Tips

You can select matching objects one at a time using the Next Matching Object option. Click Select to deselect the first object and select the next one.

To add objects that match the specified attributes to any other objects already selected, click Append.

To deselect objects that match the specified attributes, click Deselect All.

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Select Object dialog box is CTRL+SHIFT+F2.


Selecting Objects by Property

You can search for and select objects based on a property value. For example, you can search for an object named Red Square. You can also search for attribute and property combinations such as all objects named Square with a red interior fill.

When specifying a property value to search for, you can use the "?" and "*" wildcard characters to search for partial matches.  Use "?" for single characters; use "*" for multiple characters. For example, if you have a series of objects named Bolt1, Bolt2, Bolt3, and so on, you can select all of these objects by specifying Bolt* as the Name value.

You can restrict the selection to specific object types, such as Image (bitmap) Objects or Dimension Lines.

Properties can also be used to deselect objects. For example, you can select all objects, and then deselect the objects with the Vendor Name ABC Supply.

Notes

Selection by property applies only to the current page. To apply selection by property to all layers on the current page, select Edit All Layers using the Layer Manager. For more information on using the Layers Manager, see Using the Layer Manager.

For information on assigning properties and values to objects, see Properties and Values.


To select objects by property

To select objects by attribute based on an object

To select objects by attribute based on multiple objects

To select objects by attribute based on defaults


Selecting Objects

Selecting Objects by Attributes


To select objects by property

1	On the Edit menu, click Select. The Select Object dialog box opens.

2	In the Type box, choose the type of object to which you want to restrict the selection. For example, choose Any Shape Object to restrict the selection to shapes only (squares, circles, stars, and so forth).

3	Under Attribute, select Property.

4	Choose the property you want to search for in the Field box.

5	Type the value of the property in the Value box. You can enter wildcard characters to search for partial matches.

6	Click All Matching Objects.

or

Click Next Matching Object.

7	Click Select to make the selection.

Tips

You can select matching objects one at a time using the Next Matching Object option. Click Select to deselect the first object and select the next one.

To add objects that match the specified property to any other objects already selected, click Append.

To deselect objects that match the specified property, click Deselect All.

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Select Object dialog box is CTRL+SHIFT+F2.


Selecting Objects by Property

Selecting Objects by Attributes


Moving Using the Mouse

To move an object using the mouse, select the object you want to move and drag it to the new position.

Dragging is the quickest and easiest way to move an object. If you want the object to align to grid locations as you move it, turn on snapping with the Snap to Rulers command before you drag the object.


To move an object using the mouse

To move an object using the arrow keys

To move an object while drawing

To move an object numerically


Constraining an Object’s Movement

Moving Using the Keyboard

Moving an Object While Drawing It

Moving Numerically

Showing Manual Movements in the Transform Dialog Box


To move an object using the mouse

1	Select one or more objects you want to move.

2	Position the pointer anywhere inside the object or group of objects (do not place the pointer on a handle).

3	Drag the object to the new position.

4	Release the mouse button.

Tips

Hold the mouse still for one second when moving an object to display a wireframe outline of the object to help you position it.

To constrain the direction that an object moves to angles that are increments of 15 degrees, press and hold SHIFT while moving the object.

To create a copy of an object, press and hold CTRL while dragging the object.

Use the coordinates displayed in the status bar to position objects precisely.

You can cancel a move by pressing ESC before releasing the left mouse button. The object returns to its original position.


Moving Using the Mouse

Constraining an Object’s Movement

Moving Using the Keyboard

Moving an Object While Drawing It


Constraining an Object's Movement

Hold down SHIFT while moving an object to snap to a path of movement that is in 15-degree increments from the original position. You can use this technique to constrain the object's movement to a perfectly vertical path (0 degrees or 180 degrees) or a perfectly horizontal path (90 degrees or 270 degrees). Using SHIFT in this way overrides the Snap to Rulers command on the Snap submenu of the Tools menu, if necessary, to constrain to the 15-degree angle.


Moving Using the Mouse

Moving Using the Keyboard

Moving an Object While Drawing It

Moving Numerically


Moving Using the Keyboard

You can move an object more precisely using the arrow keys. Use this method when you want to move an object in small increments.

Tip

To move in small increments, point to Snap on the Tools menu and then deselect Snap to Rulers.


Moving Using the Mouse

Constraining an Object’s Movement

Moving an Object While Drawing It

Moving Numerically


To move an object using the arrow keys

1	Select one or more objects you want to move.

2	Point anywhere inside the object or group of objects (do not point to a handle).

3	Hold down the SPACEBAR.

4	Press an ARROW KEY to move the object.

5	Release the SPACEBAR when you finish.


Moving an Object While Drawing It

You can use the right mouse button to move an object before you finish drawing it.


Moving Using the Mouse

Constraining an Object’s Movement

Moving Using the Keyboard

Moving Numerically

Showing Manual Movements in the Transform Dialog Box


To move an object while drawing

1	Start drawing.

2	Hold down the right mouse button without releasing the left mouse button.

3	Move the outline of the unfinished drawing to its new position.

4	Release the right mouse button and continue drawing.


Moving Numerically

You can use the Move tab of the Transform dialog box to precisely move an object to a specific place or a certain distance from its current position.

You numerically move an object by selecting an object and entering either the distance to move it, or the position to which you want to move it. Designer displays a preview of the movement as a rectangular outline.

To move an object a certain distance, select Move from Current Position and enter the distance in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. Enter positive numbers to move the object toward increasing ruler numbers; enter negative numbers to move toward decreasing ruler numbers.

With Move from Current Position selected, the Transform dialog box moves an object from its present position. For example, if you move a circle two inches and then type 2 to move it another two inches, the circle is moved an additional two inches.

To move an object to a ruler coordinate, select Move Along Ruler and type the ruler coordinates in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. The object's origin (chosen in the origin list box) is placed at the specified coordinates.

Note

Before you can transform an object imported as a WMF file, you must convert the object to curves.


Moving Using the Mouse

Constraining an Object’s Movement

Moving Using the Keyboard

Moving an Object While Drawing It

Showing Manual Movements in the Transform Dialog Box

Applying Multiple Transformations to an Object


Showing Manual Movements in the Transform Dialog Box

If you display the Transform dialog box using the Repeat Last command on the Transform submenu, the measurements of the last transformation appear in the Transform dialog box. For example, if you manually move an object two inches left and then display the dialog box, -2 appears in the Horizontal box.

A movement does not appear if you move an object while the Transform dialog box is open.

Changing the Units

You can change the units used to move an object. To change the units, click the Units button [image] and choose the new unit.

Changing the units only affects units used by the Transform dialog box; it does not affect the ruler or units used elsewhere.

Making Copies

You can create an array of duplicate objects that are equally spaced. Enter the number of copies you want to make. Click Apply to create the copies. Designer shows the first and last preview copy in red and other copies in blue. Only the first five and last five copies are previewed. (See also Duplicating Objects.)

In the example above, the object at right was moved 0.5 inches down and copied twice. To produce this action, the entries in the Move tab of the Transform dialog box were "Vertical 0.5, Move from Current Position, Copies 2."

Tip

You can also make a series of copies by dragging an object, Clicking Transform and Repeat Last on the Change menu, typing the number of additional copies to make in the Copies box, and clicking Apply.


Moving Using the Mouse

Constraining an Object’s Movement

Moving Using the Keyboard

Moving an Object While Drawing It

Moving Numerically


To move an object numerically

1	Select the object to move.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Move. The Move tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Select Move from Current Position to move the object a specified distance.

or

Select Move Along Ruler to move the object to a specific position.

4	Choose the object origin in the origin list box, if you are moving along the ruler.

5	Type numbers in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes, or click the arrows beside the boxes to select a value. A red outline of the object movement appears.

6	Type the number of copies you want to make, if any. Designer shows the first and last preview copy in red and other copies in blue. Only the first five and last five copies are previewed.

7	Click Apply to move the object.


Resizing Manually

You can change the size and shape of an object by selecting it in Select Mode and dragging one of its handles.

If you drag a corner handle, you enlarge or shrink the object while maintaining its original proportions.

If you drag a side handle, you stretch the object and change its proportions.


To resize an object manually

To resize an object numerically


Resizing Numerically

Showing Manual Scaling in the Transform Dialog Box

Making an Array of Copies


To resize an object manually

1	Click Select [image] in the Toolbox, if not in Select mode already.

2	Select the object to resize.

3	Move the pointer to one of the eight handles (or one of the end handles if the object is a line).

4	Drag the handle to resize the object.

5	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tips

Drag a corner handle to enlarge or shrink the object while maintaining its original proportions. Drag a side handle to resize the object non-proportionally.

To make the object’s height and width equal, hold down SHIFT while dragging a corner handle.

To change the height-to-width ratio of the object, hold down CTRL while dragging a corner handle.

To return the object to its original position, press ESC before releasing the mouse button in step 5.


Resizing Manually

Resizing Numerically

Showing Manual Scaling in the Transform Dialog Box

Making an Array of Copies


Resizing Numerically

You can use the Scale tab of the Transform dialog box to precisely resize an object.

Resizing an Object

You numerically resize an object by selecting an object and entering a percentage of the current size. The current size is 100%. A number below 100% decreases, and a number above 100% increases the size. Designer displays a preview of the resized object as a rectangular outline.

The horizontal number affects the side-to-side size; the vertical number affects the top-to-bottom size. The horizontal and vertical sizes are the same unless you deselect the Proportional Scale option.

The Scale tab of the Transform dialog box lets you resize an object based on its current size. For example, if you enlarge a circle to 200% and then type 200 to enlarge it to another 200%, the circle is enlarged an additional amount.

Note

Before you can transform an object imported as a WMF file, you must convert the object to curves.


Resizing Manually

Showing Manual Scaling in the Transform Dialog Box

Making an Array of Copies

Applying Multiple Transformations to an Object


To resize an object numerically

1	Select the object to scale.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Scale. The Scale tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Choose the origin of the resize in the origin list box, if you want.

4	Type numbers in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes, or click the arrows beside the boxes to select a value. A red outline of the resized object appears.

5	Type the number of copies you want to make, if any.

6	Click Apply to resize the object.


Showing Manual Scaling in the Transform Dialog Box

If you display the Transform dialog box using the Repeat Last command on the Transform submenu, the measurements of the last transformation appear in the Transform dialog box. For example, if you manually resize an object to 50% of its original size and use Repeat Last to open the Transform dialog box, 50 appears in the Scale tab.

A resize does not appear if you resize an object while the Transform dialog box is open.


Resizing Manually

Resizing Numerically

Making an Array of Copies


Making an Array of Copies

You can create an array of equally resized copies by using the Transform dialog box. Type the number of copies you want to make. The original object is not affected. Designer shows the first and last preview copy in red and other copies in blue. Only the first five and last five copies are previewed.


Duplicating Objects

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing

Making Copies with the Transform Dialog Box


Rotating Manually

The manual method lets you use the pointer to rotate an object. You manually rotate by dragging a corner handle in a circular motion around a pivot point.


To rotate an object manually

To change the rotation key setting

To change the Manual Rotation Increment

To rotate an object numerically


Changing the Pivot Point

Preset Rotation Key

Constraining Manual Rotation

Rotating Numerically

Rotation Options

Rotating and Skewing Text


To rotate an object manually

1	Click Rotate/Skew [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the object you want to rotate.

3	Drag the pivot point to a new location, even outside the object, if you wish.

4	Move the pointer to a corner handle.

5	Drag in a circular motion around the object.

6	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tips

You can switch an already selected object from Select mode to Rotate/Skew mode by clicking it again with the Select pointer.

Hold down SHIFT while dragging a corner handle to constrain the rotation of an object to 45-degree increments. Hold down CTRL while dragging a corner handle to rotate a copy of an object.

You can cancel a rotation by pressing ESC before releasing the left mouse button. The object returns to its original position.


Rotating Manually

Changing the Pivot Point

Preset Rotation Key

Constraining Manual Rotation

Rotating Numerically

Rotation Options


Changing the Pivot Point

The pivot point defaults to the center of the object, but you can drag it anywhere inside or outside the object. The pivot point defaults to the center the next time you select the object unless you permanently reposition it.

You can permanently reposition an object's pivot point by pressing SHIFT while dragging it to a new position.

To return the permanent pivot point to the center of the object, use a center snap point and then press SHIFT and drag the pivot point back to the center.

Note

Before you can transform an object imported as a WMF file, you must convert the object to curves.


Rotating Manually

Preset Rotation Key

Constraining Manual Rotation

Rotating Numerically

Rotation Options


Preset Rotation Key

You can rotate an object a preset amount by selecting the object and pressing F8. Each time you press F8, the object is rotated the preset amount. The initial setting for the F8 key is 45 degrees.

To create a copy of a selection and rotate it by the preset amount, press SHIFT+F8.


Rotating Manually

Changing the Pivot Point

Constraining Manual Rotation

Rotating Numerically

Rotation Options


To change the rotation key setting

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box opens.

2	Click the Rotation tab.

3	Type a value in the F8 Rotation Increment box.

or

Click the arrows beside the F8 Rotation Increment box.

or

Drag the red needle in the F8 Rotation Increment dial control.


Constraining Manual Rotation

You can constrain rotations to fixed increments by setting a Manual Rotation Increment value on the Rotation tab of the Options dialog box. For example, if the Manual Rotation Increment is set to 12 degrees, then an object rotates in 12-degree increments when you drag its corner handles.


Rotating Manually

Changing the Pivot Point

Preset Rotation Key

Rotating Numerically

Rotation Options


To change the Manual Rotation Increment

1	On the Tool menu, click Options.

2	Click the Rotation tab.

3	Enter the rotation amount in the Manual Rotation Increment box (or drag the red needle in the dial control).

Tip

To disable the manual rotation increment, enter zero in the Manual Rotation Increment box.


Rotating Numerically

You can use the Rotate tab of the Transform dialog box to precisely rotate an object by specifying the degree of rotation.

Rotating an Object

You numerically rotate an object by selecting an object and a rotation angle. There are two ways to specify the rotation angle: use the Angle box to specify the angle numerically, or drag the dial to adjust the angle graphically. Designer displays a preview of the rotation as a red box.

The Rotate tab lets you rotate an object based on its current position. For example, if you rotate a square 45 degrees and then type 45 to rotate it another 45 degrees, the object is rotated an additional 45 degrees.

Note

Before you can transform an object imported as a WMF file, you must convert the object to curves.

Showing Manual Rotations in the Transform Dialog Box

If you display the Transform dialog box using the Repeat Last command on the Transform submenu, the measurements of the last transformation appear in the Transform dialog box. For example, if you manually rotate an object 25 degrees and then use Repeat Last to open the dialog box, 25 appears in the Angle box.

A rotation does not appear if you rotate an object while the Transform dialog box is open.

Changing the Units

You can change the units to rotate an object in either degrees or radians. To change the units, click the Units button [image] and choose the new unit.

Changing the units only affects units used by the Transform dialog box; it does not affect units used elsewhere.

Changing the Pivot Point

You change the pivot point of the rotation in the origin list box. The default origin is the movable pivot point. For example, if you select the bottom left handle and rotate the object, the object rotates around the bottom left handle.


Rotating Manually

Changing the Pivot Point

Preset Rotation Key

Constraining Manual Rotation

Rotation Options

Applying Multiple Transformations to an Object


To rotate an object numerically

1	Select the object to rotate.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Rotate. The Rotate tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Type a number in the Angle box, or drag the dial to specify a rotation angle.

4	Select a new pivot point in the origin list box, if you wish.

5	Click Apply to rotate the object.


Skewing Manually

The manual method lets you use the pointer to skew (slant) an object. You manually skew by dragging a side handle.


To skew an object manually

To specify a degree of skew

To make intermediate copies of rotated or skewed objects


Skewing Numerically

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing

Rotating and Skewing Text


To skew an object manually

1	Click Rotate/Skew [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the object you want to skew.

3	Point to a side handle of the object.

4	Drag the handle to skew the object.

5	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tips

Hold down SHIFT while dragging a side handle to constrain the skewing of an object to 45-degree increments. Hold down CTRL while dragging a side handle to create a skewed copy of an object.

You can cancel a skew by pressing ESC before releasing the left mouse button. The object returns to its original position.


Skewing Manually

Skewing Numerically

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing


Skewing Numerically

You can use the Skew tab of the Transform dialog box to precisely skew an object by specifying the degree of skew.

Skewing an Object

The Skew tab lets you skew an object based on its current shape. For example, if you skew a square 45 degrees and then type 45 to skew it another 45 degrees, the object is skewed on additional 45 degrees.

Note

Before you can transform an object imported as a WMF file, you must convert the object to curves.


Skewing Manually

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing

Applying Multiple Transformations to an Object


To specify a degree of slant
To specify a degree of skew

1	Select the object you want to skew.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Skew. The Skew tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Type an angle from -89 to 89 in the Horizontal Angle box, or drag the dial to specify an angle.

4	Type an angle from -89 to 89 in the Vertical Angle box, or drag the dial to specify an angle.

5	Select a different pivot point for the slant in the origin list box, if you want.

6	Click Apply to skew the object.


Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing

You can create an array of rotated or skewed objects between the original object and its final position. Designer shows the first and last preview copy in red and other copies in blue. Only the first five and last five copies are previewed.


Skewing Manually

Skewing Numerically


To make intermediate copies of rotated or skewed objects

1	Select the object to rotate or skew.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Rotate or Skew. The Rotate or Skew tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Type the specifications you want.

4	Type the number of copies you want to create.

5	Click Apply to draw the copies.


Flipping Objects

Designer lets you flip an object across an imaginary axis so the new object is a mirror image of the original. You can flip an object manually or numerically.

Flipping Manually

To flip an object manually, drag a handle across the object’s opposite side. The action is similar to turning the page of a book.

Flipping Numerically

You can use the Flip tab of the Transform dialog box to flip an object at a specific angular value.

When you flip an object numerically, you specify an imaginary line that passes through or beside an object at any angle. The object behaves as though it is hinged to the line, and flips over it.

Changing the Flip Units

You can change the units used to flip an object. Changing the units affects only the units used by the Transform dialog box; it does not affect the units used elsewhere.


To flip an object manually

To flip an object horizontally or vertically

To flip an object at a specified angle

To make copies of an object while flipping it


Making an Array of Copies

Applying Multiple Transformations to an Object


To flip an object manually

Drag a handle across the object’s opposite side.

Tip

The action is similar to turning the page of a book.


Flipping Objects


To flip an object horizontally or vertically

1	Select the object you want to flip.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Flip. The Flip tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Click Flip Horizontally to flip the object horizontally (like a page in a book)

or

Click Flip Vertically.

4	Choose the location of the flip axis in the origin list box. For example, choose Top, Left Handle to flip the object at its top left handle.

5	Click Apply to flip the object.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for flipping horizontally is F7.

The keyboard shortcut for flipping vertically is SHIFT+F7.


Flipping Objects


To flip an object at a specified angle

1	Select the object you want to flip.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Flip. The Flip tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Type an angle from 0 to 179 in the Angle box, or drag the red needle to specify a flip angle.

4	Choose the location of the flip axis in the origin list box. For example, choose Pivot Point to flip the object at its pivot point.

5	Click Apply to flip the object.

Tip

You can place the imaginary axis at which flipping occurs at any of the ten object origin points. For example, select the center origin to flip an object around a central axis, or select the right middle origin to flip the object around its right side.


Flipping Objects


To make copies of an object while flipping it

1	Select the object you want to flip.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Flip. The Flip tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Type the number of copies in the Copies box. Designer repeats the flipping, placing the copies on top of one another.


Flipping Objects


Applying Multiple Transformations to an Object

You can use the Transform dialog box to make a series of transformations to an object by recording each individual transformation, then applying them all at the same time.

For example, after recording the transformations necessary to rotate an object by 180 degrees and to move it two inches to the right, you could apply these transformations to any objects that you wanted.

Multiple transformmations remain in the Transform dialog box until you close Designer or transform an object and reopen the Transform dialog box.

You can update a recorded transformation based on its current settings.


To apply multiple transformations to an object

To update a recorded transformation


Moving Numerically

Resizing Numerically

Rotating Numerically

Skewing Numerically

Flipping Objects


To apply multiple transformations to an object

1	On the Change menu, point to Transform and then click one of the submenu commands to display the Transform dialog box.

2	Click Details [image] to show the record multiple transformations list box.

3	Click a tab (Move, for example) and enter the desired transformation settings.

4	Click Add in the Multiple Transforms area. The transformation settings appear in the list box.

5	Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add more transformations to the list.

6	Select an object and click Apply to apply the multiple transformations.

Tips

To update a recorded transformation, highlight the transform and click Update.

To delete a recorded transformation, highlight the transform and click Delete.

To delete all recorded transformations, click Empty.


Applying Multiple Transformations to an Object


To update a recorded transformation

1	On the Change menu, point to Transform and then click one of the submenu commands to display the Transform dialog box.

2	Click Details [image] to show the record multiple transformations list box.

3	Highlight the recorded transformation you want to change. The dialog box displays the appropriate tab with the recorded settings.

4	Make the changes you want and click Modify. The new transformation settings appear in the list box.

Tips

To delete a recorded transformation, highlight the transform and click Delete.

To delete all recorded transformations, click Empty.


Duplicating Objects

There are four ways to duplicate an object.

Hold down CTRL and drag a copy.

or

Use the Duplicate command on the Edit menu.

or

Use the Clone command on the Edit menu.

or

Use the Copies option on the Transform dialog box.


To drag a copy

To duplicate an object

To clone an object


Using the Duplicate and Clone Commands

Making Copies with the Transform Dialog Box

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing


To drag a copy

1	Select the object you want to copy.

2	Hold down CTRL.

3	Drag the duplicate object to a new position.

4	Release the mouse button and then release CTRL.

Tip

To rotate or skew a copy of an object, hold down CTRL while rotating or skewing.


Duplicating Objects

Using the Duplicate and Clone Commands

Making Copies with the Transform Dialog Box

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing


Using the Duplicate and Clone Commands

Duplicate Command

The Duplicate command on the Edit menu creates a copy of an object that is offset from the original object. The amount of the offset is determined by the Offset for Duplicate settings on the General tab of the Options dialog box. For information on setting the duplicate offset, see General Options.

For convenience, the duplicated object is automatically selected.

Clone Command

The Clone command on the Edit menu creates a copy of an object that is positioned on top of the original object (no offset).

For convenience, the cloned object is automatically selected.


To duplicate an object

To clone an object

To drag a copy


Duplicating Objects

Making Copies with the Transform Dialog Box

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing


To duplicate an object

1	Select the object you want to duplicate.

2	On the Edit menu, click Duplicate. The object is duplicated at a predefined offset.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for duplicating an object is CTRL+SHIFT+D.

For information on setting the duplicate offset, see General Options.


Using the Duplicate and Clone Commands

Duplicating Objects

Making Copies with the Transform Dialog Box

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing


To clone an object

1	Select the object you want to clone.

2	On the Edit menu, click Clone. The object is duplicated on top of the original object.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for duplicating an object is CTRL+ADD (plus key on the numeric keypad).


Making Copies with the Transform Dialog Box

The Copies option at the bottom of the Transform dialog box lets you duplicate a transformation (move, scale, flip, rotate, skew) as many times as space allows.

You can make as many copies as will fit in the drawing area.


To drag a copy

To duplicate an object

To clone an object


Duplicating Objects

Using the Duplicate and Clone Commands

Making Copies while Rotating or Skewing


Changing the Order of Objects

As you draw objects, they are put in a stacking order. The last object you draw is always at the front of the stack.

When objects are positioned on top of each other, an object in front of another object obscures any portion of a back object that it covers. This obscuring effect is not visible, however, unless the objects contain an interior fill.

The Order command on the Change menu lets you change the stacking order of selected objects. You can bring the objects to the front of the stack, send them to the back of the stack, bring them one level toward the front of the stack, send them one level toward the back of the stack, or reverse their order in the stack.

You can only change the order of objects on the current layer. If you are using multiple layers, objects on upper layers always appear in front of objects on lower layers. For more information on using layers, see Benefits of Layers.


To bring an object to the front of the stack

To send an object to the back of the stack

To bring an object forward one level

To send an object back one level

To reverse the order of objects


Grouping Objects

Connecting Objects


To bring an object to the front of the stack

1	Select one or more objects.

2	On the Change menu, point to Order, and then click Bring to Front.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Bring to Front is F10.

You can only change the order of objects on the current layer.


Changing the Order of Objects


To send an object to the back of the stack

1	Select the object.

2	On the Change menu, point to Order, and then click Send to Back.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Send to Back is F9.

You can only change the order of objects on the current layer.


To bring an object forward one level

1	Select the object.

2	On the Change menu, point to Order, and then click Bring Forward.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Bring Forward is SHIFT+F10.

You can only change the order of objects on the current layer.


To send an object back one level

1	Select the object.

2	On the Change menu, point to Order, and then click Send Backward.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Send Backward is SHIFT+F9.

You can only change the order of objects on the current layer.


To reverse the order of objects

1	Select the objects you want to reverse.

2	On the Change menu, point to Order, and then click Reverse.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Reverse is CTRL+SHIFT+F9.

You can only change the order of objects on the current layer.


Grouping Objects

When you create a drawing with many objects, it is useful to group objects together to help organize your drawing. Grouping makes it easier to select objects, and makes it possible to manipulate several objects at once.

Group objects when you want to create a collection of individual objects. Grouping does not change an object's appearance.

Changing a style of an object group changes all objects in the group to the new style. For example, if you select a group of objects and change the interior fill color to red, all objects in the group become red.

You can return grouped objects to their original, ungrouped state using the Ungroup command.


To group objects

To ungroup objects

To edit an object without ungrouping it


Ungrouping Objects

Working with Grouped Objects


To group objects

1	Select the objects you want in the group (they don't have to be adjacent).

2	On the Change menu, point to Combine, and then click Group.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Group is F5.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you group objects, click one of the selected objects with the right mouse button.


Grouping Objects

Ungrouping Objects

Working with Grouped Objects


Ungrouping Objects

You can ungroup objects to return them to their original, ungrouped state.


To ungroup objects

To group objects

To edit an object without ungrouping it


Grouping Objects

Working with Grouped Objects


To ungroup objects

1	Select the group to break apart.

2	On the Change menu, point to Combine, and then click Ungroup.

Tips

If you have groups within groups, you need to use Ungroup more than once to break up all the groups.

The keyboard shortcut for Group is SHIFT+F5.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you group objects, click one of the selected objects with the right mouse button.


Ungrouping Objects

Grouping Objects

Working with Grouped Objects


Working with Grouped Objects

In many ways, grouped objects are similar to individual objects. For example, changing line and fill styles affects the whole group, and moving or resizing a group is like moving or resizing one object.

Editing an Object in a Group

Group editing lets you edit an object in a group without first ungrouping the objects. To enter the group edit mode, double-click any object in the group. A blue edit border appears around the group. You can now select individual objects in the group for moving, resizing, rotating, skewing, filling, and so forth.

Group Edit Mode	Selected Object in Group
Adding a New Object to a Group

While in group edit mode, any new objects that you draw are automatically added to the group.

Removing an Object from a Group

You can separate an object from its group without breaking apart the group. Double-click the group to enter group edit mode, select the object you want to remove, and click Cut on the Edit menu. Now double-click outside the group to cancel the group edit mode and paste the object where you want it.

You can also press DELETE to delete the object.


To edit an object without ungrouping it

To group objects

To ungroup objects


Grouping Objects

Ungrouping Objects


To edit an object without ungrouping it

1	Double-click any object in the group you want to edit. A blue edit border appears around the group.

2	Select the object to edit. Handles appear around the selected object. Edit or move it as you would any object.

3	Press ESC or double-click anywhere outside the group when you finish. The blue edit border goes away.

Note

Double-clicking a group that has been warped enters warp edit mode, not group edit mode.

Tips

To select additional objects within the group, hold down SHIFT and click the other objects that you want to select.

While in group edit mode, any new objects that you draw are automatically added to the group.

You also can edit objects that belong to groups within other groups. Point to the object or group you want to edit and continue double-clicking until the group you want to edit displays the edit border. When you finish, double-click outside the groups until the edit border disappears.


Working with Grouped Objects

Grouping Objects

Ungrouping Objects


Connecting Objects

The Connect commands on the Combine submenu of the Change menu let you join objects, making it easy to create complex shapes.

Note

You cannot connect text, grouped objects, or bitmaps.


To connect open

To connect closed

To disconnect connected objects


Connect Open

Connect Closed

Connect Closed when Objects Overlap

Disconnecting Objects


Connect Open

You can use the Connect Open command to combine two or more objects with open endpoints. The Connect Open command joins selected objects by drawing a line between the open endpoints, leaving the last side open.

Before Connect Open	After Connect Open
You can disconnect objects to return them to their original, disconnected shapes with the Disconnect command.


To connect open

To connect closed

To disconnect connected objects


Connecting Objects

Connect Closed

Connect Closed when Objects Overlap

Disconnecting Objects


To connect open

1	Select the objects you want to connect.

2	On the Change menu, point to Combine, and then click Connect Open.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Connect Open is CTRL+F11.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you connect objects, click one of the selected objects with the right mouse button.


Connect Open

Connecting Objects

Connect Closed

Connect Closed when Objects Overlap

Disconnecting Objects


Connect Closed

You can use the Connect Closed command to close open shapes, or to connect and fill closed shapes. You can use Connect Closed with one or more objects.

On selected objects with open endpoints, the Connect Closed command draws a line between all endpoints, creating a completely closed shape.

Before Connect Closed	After Connect Closed
On selected objects with no endpoints (already closed shapes), the Connect Closed command connects the objects and fills them with interior fill of the first drawn object (the object in back). Note that in this case no additional lines are drawn. For more information on using Connect Closed to fill multiple objects, see Filling Several Objects with a Continuous Fill.


To connect closed

To connect open

To disconnect connected objects


Connecting Objects

Connect Closed when Objects Overlap

Connect Open

Disconnecting Objects

Filling Several Objects with a Continuous Fill


Connect Closed when Objects Overlap

If you use Connect Closed on overlapping objects that are closed, the front object cuts or "punches" a hole in the underlying object.

Before Connect Closed	After Connect Closed
If the front object extends off the edge of the back object, the extending portion is filled. Use the Fill/Skip Overlaps button on the Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box to fill the overlapping portion also (that is, the hole in the back object is filled). For more information on filling overlaps, see Setting Fill Overlaps.

Before Connecting	Skip Overlaps	Fill Overlaps


To connect closed

To connect open

To disconnect connected objects


Connecting Objects

Connect Closed

Connect Open

Disconnecting Objects

Setting Fill Overlap


To connect closed

1	Select the objects you want to connect.

2	On the Change menu, point to Combine, and then click Connect Closed.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Connect Closed is F11.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you connect objects, click one of the selected objects with the right mouse button.


Connect Closed

Connect Closed when Objects Overlap

Connecting Objects

Connect Open

Disconnecting Objects


Disconnecting Objects

The Disconnect command disconnects an object to return it to its original, disconnected state.

Note

You cannot disconnect a closed object that was created by applying Connect Closed to a single open object.


To disconnect connected objects

To connect open

To connect closed


Connecting Objects

Connect Open

Connect Closed when Objects Overlap

Connect Closed


To disconnect connected objects

1	Select the connected object you want to disconnect.

2	On the Change menu, point to Combine, and then click Disconnect.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Disconnect is SHIFT+F11.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you disconnect objects, click the object with the right mouse button.


Disconnecting Objects

Connect Open

Connect Closed

Connecting Objects

Connect Closed when Objects Overlap


DS70.DOC

Note: Though included in this section's table of contents, the Office Compatibility topic resides in a separate OC_DS70.HLP help file (Microsoft requirement).

Done: Bitmaps, Blend, Color, Dimensions, Drawing, Extrude

Done: Files, Fillptrn, Gethelp, Lnstyles,

Done: Masking, Objects, Object_b, Organize

Done: Printing, Property, Reference, Reshape, Slideshow

Done: Styles, Text, Tutor, Units, Warping, Whatsnew

This document contains the Welcome section of Designer 7.0 Help.


Contents
Welcome to Micrografx® Designer [image] 7

Congratulations, and thank you for buying Designer!

Micrografx® Designer [image] 7 is an Office compatible illustration tool from Micrografx, with a next-generation interface that works the way you do. Designer anticipates your next move, using context sensitivity to give you the tools you need at the moment you need them.

Designer offers increased power and flexibility with reduced complexity. And Designer is extremely customizable.

Whether you need a simple circle, a series of rotated overlapping images, custom-warped text, or a complex technical illustration, you can do it with Designer. And the results will show in the highest resolution of your display, printer, or imaging device.

Designer 7 gives you a high level of accuracy and precision in your illustrations. It delivers sophisticated object-creation and editing features, impressive text handling, and more. Yet it’s all surprisingly easy to learn and use.


Designer Compatibility with Microsoft Office

Media Manager Support

Office Binder Support

Quick Viewer Support

Designer 7 Features


Media Manager Support

Designer 7 uses Media Manager instead of a built-in utility for managing Clip art and other graphic-image formats. When you use Media Manager to move Designer objects to other applications, all properties of the objects are retained.

To use Media Manager with Designer

On the Tools menu, click Clip Art.

or

Click Clip Art [image] on the Standard toolbar.


Welcome to Micrografx Designer 7

Designer Compatibility with Microsoft Office

Office Binder Support

Quick Viewer Support

Designer 7 Features


Office Binder Support
Microsoft Office Binder Support

Designer 7 supports Microsoft’s Office Binder. Office Binder uses the metaphor of a loose-leaf binder to let you combine documents from several different Office 95 applications into a single project.

For example, let's say that you have two Designer drawings, a three-page Word for Windows document, and a single-page Excel spreadsheet. You have been asked to create a book that contains a cover page and all of the documents, in the following order:

Page 1	The cover page

Page 2	The first Designer drawing

Pages 3-5	The Word for Windows document

Page 6	The second Designer drawing

Page 7	The Excel spreadsheet

Using Office Binder, you can build your book and print it with all the pages numbered sequentially.


To create a blank binder

To include a Designer document in a binder you are building


Welcome to Micrografx Designer 7

Designer Compatibility with Microsoft Office

Media Manager Support

Quick Viewer Support

Designer 7 Features


To create a blank binder

1	On the Windows Start menu, click New Office Document.

2	Double-click the Blank Binder icon.

Note

The New Office Document item is added to the Start menu when you install Office 95.


Office Binder Support


To include a Designer document in a binder
To include a Designer document in a binder you are building

1	Open the folder containing the Designer document.

2	Drag the document to the left edge of the binder. You can edit the document by double-clicking it in the binder.


Quick View Support
Quick Viewer Support

After installing Designer 7, you can use the Windows 95 Quick View feature to view Designer 7 documents contained in a folder or an Explorer window. You also can view QuickSilver QSF files and drawings made with earlier versions of Micrografx Designer.

Using the Designer 7 File Viewer, you can:

View drawings one at a time in a single window or view each drawing in a separate viewing window. Use the Replace Window command on the viewer's View menu to switch between these options.

Show or hide the viewer's toolbar. Use the Toolbar command on the viewer's View menu to show or hide the toolbar.

Open the currently displayed drawing in Designer so you can make changes. On the viewer's File menu, click Open As Designer File, or click the Open [image] button on the viewer's toolbar.

View multiple-page drawings. To move through the pages, click Previous Page [image] or Next Page [image] on the viewer's toolbar.

To View a Designer Drawing

1	Open the folder containing the Designer drawing.

2	Click the right mouse button on the icon of the drawing.

3	On the shortcut menu, click Quick View.

Tips

To select several drawings for viewing at the same time (each in a separate viewing window), hold down CTRL while clicking each document's icon.

While the Designer 7 File Viewer window is open, you can drag Designer drawings and drop them on the window to view them.


Welcome to Micrografx Designer 7

Designer Compatibility with Microsoft Office

Media Manager Support

Office Binder Support

Designer 7 Features


Designer's Features
Designer 7 Features

Designer 7 is a 32-bit program created for Windows 95 and Windows NT. It hosts a variety of changes from earlier versions.

Features New in Designer 7

Project Wizard [image] Lets you select a project to help you begin a drawing. A wide rage of projects are available, including banners, calendars, certificates, diagrams, forms, Web graphics, and signs.

Named Styles [image] Lets you assign names to combinations of object and text attributes. After naming a style, you can assign those attributes to another object by just applying the named style to it.

Modify Commands [image] Makes creating any shape imaginable easier. With these commands, you can Fragment, Intersect, Join, Punch, Slice (which works with bitmaps, too), Outline, and Contour objects.

Extrusion [image] Gives two-dimensional objects the appearance of a third dimension by adding projection lines to the object. Extruded objects look like they extend into the space above or behind the surface of the screen or the printed page. To accent the three-dimensional look of extruded objects, you can add lighting effects.

Dynamic Blending [image] Renders blend objects dynamically rather than storing multiple objects, permitting multiple blend nodes that automatically recalculate when the blend object is transformed.

Masking [image] New commands simplify the creation and editing of masks.

Conical Gradients [image] New conical gradient fill has been added to the linear, radial, and square gradient fills.

Megagons and Curvygons [image] Two exciting new shapes that you can draw and edit.

Overprinting [image] Line (stroke) and fill overprinting options make controlling trapping in color separations simple.

Improved text handling enables the Repel Text feature to work with grouped and metafile objects.

Predefined Warps [image] A gallery of 10 predefined warps makes warping easier.

Duplicate and Clone Commands [image] Makes it easier to create multiple and layered objects.

Callout Lines [image] Makes it easy to label drawings. Callout lines are dynamic and can be transformed, reshaped, and edited.

Reference Point [image] Lets you define limitations in angle or distance from a specific point for technical and relational illustrations.

Save as Template Command [image] Lets you create your own project templates, which can include master pages, clip art collections, and help files.

Guides Manager [image] Lets you place guides at specific locations and choose guide color.

Improved Image Handling [image] Lets you resize, rotate, skew, flip, and warp bitmap images.

EffectsBrowser [image] Lets you apply over 50 different visual effects to bitmap images. For example, you can add artistic effects, adjust color saturation and contrast, blur images in various ways, despeckle, and apply textures such as embossing, engraving, and splattering.

Convert to Image Command [image] Lets you convert vector objects to bitmap images.

Timed Backups [image] Lets you instruct Designer to make backups automatically, at specific time intervals.

Full Micrografx QuickSilver support, making it easy to create Web pages that contain QuickSilver objects and to optimize QuickSilver files for Web use.

Designer 7 can be launched from a network so multiple users can work from one installation.

You can paste Designer objects into Picture Publisher to create floating objects.

New tab interface for pages and layers provides one click access.

Smart Colorization [image] Lets you change the fill color of an object group and retain the hue, or color gradations, of the original fill color. Smart Colorization is especially useful when working with clip art, because it lets you change an object's color without loosing color shades.

Edit Tool [image] New interface lets you choose editing options from a menu, so you are never left wondering how to modify objects.

You can set preview attributes such as proof, draft, or wireframe on a layer basis.

Designer 7 uses an improved file compression method for storing Designer (DSF) files. This compression method decreases file size significantly, producing a 63% reduction in file size, on the average. File filters provided with Designer 7 ensure compatibility with all earlier versions of Designer, including Designer 6.0.

Other Designer Features

Takes advantage of Windows 95 improved multitasking performance. Designer’s Task Manager lets you monitor tasks in progress. To display the Task Manager, click Show Tasks on the View menu.

Connect-a-Draw [image] Designer’s easy method of connecting one object to another as you draw, without snap points.

Media Manager [image] A drag-and-drop image manager that makes it easy to view image files and exchange them among your Windows documents.

Dynamic Dimensioning [image] Designer’s powerful dimension lines measure vertically, horizontally, or diagonally.

New and improved filters for importing and exporting vector graphics files to and from AutoCAD (including layers) and other programs.

One-step placement of text on a path.

Ease of Learning [image] ToolTips tell you a tool or button’s name, and action hints are displayed in a Hint toolbar.

Lets you create and edit objects with one micron (25,400 dots per inch) precision.

Twenty-nine precise drawing methods, including direct coordinate-entry.

Multiple documents, multiple views.

Text-manipulation and page-layout features, with flowing text, text within a shape, spell checking, and a speedy text editor.

Layers make it easy to work on parts of a drawing without disturbing other parts.

Shortcut Menus [image] Click the right mouse button to pop up a context-sensitive menu for quick drawing and editing.

OLE 2.0 client and server capabilities, including drag-and-drop.

Offers a Color Separation option (in the Print Document dialog box) for Designer's PostScript output. You can use color-separation utilities with this output.


Welcome to Micrografx Designer 7

Designer Compatibility with Microsoft Office

Media Manager Support

Office Binder Support

Quick Viewer Support


EXTRUDE.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Extrusion Effects

Extrusion gives two-dimensional objects the appearance of a third dimension by adding projection lines to the object. Extruded objects look like they extend into the space above or behind the surface of the screen or the printed page.

Designer creates two types of extrusions:

An oblique extrusion simply extends the corners of the original object backwards.

An isometric extrusion changes the angle of the original object before applying the extrusion. This gives a more realistic view of the object in three dimensions.

To accent the three-dimensional look of extruded objects, you can add lighting effects.


To create an oblique extrusion

To create an isometric extrusion


Creating an Oblique Extrusion

Creating an Isometric Extrusion

Editing Extruded Objects

Changing the Resolution of Extruded Objects

Lighting Effects

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


Creating an Oblique Extrusion

Use the oblique extrusion method when you want the face (the original object) to remain stationary. For example, when extruding text, you might want to use an oblique extrusion to maintain the legibility of the text.

Oblique Extrusion


To create an oblique extrusion


Extrusion Effects

Creating an Isometric Extrusion

Editing Extruded Objects

Changing the Resolution of Extruded Objects

Lighting Effects

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


To create an oblique extrusion

1	Select the object to extrude.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Extrude option on the menu. The depth control and perspective handles appear.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Oblique [image].

4	Drag the depth control handle [image] to shorten or lengthen the extrusion.

5	Drag a blue perspective handle to adjust the object's perspective.

6	When you finish extruding the object, cancel the extrusion mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Extrude, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

As an alternative to steps 2 and 3, you can click Extrude on the Change menu, or right-click and choose Extrude from the shortcut menu.


Creating an Oblique Extrusion

Creating an Isometric Extrusion

Editing Extruded Objects

Changing the Resolution of Extruded Objects

Lighting Effects

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


Creating an Isometric Extrusion

Isometric extrusions create the most realistic three-dimensional looking objects. Isometric extrusions are more true-to-life because the face (the original object) is skewed 30 degrees before the extrusion is applied.

Designer provides four different isometric extrusion orientations:

The Right orientation extrudes an object so that it looks like it extends toward the right.

The Left orientation extrudes an object so that it looks like it extends toward the left.

The Down and Right orientation extrudes an object so that it looks like it extends downward and toward the right.

The Down and Left orientation extrudes an object so that it looks like it extends downward and toward the left.

The four extrusion orientations applied to a rectangle are illustrated below. The original rectangle is the lighter colored surface.

Right Extrusion	Left Extrusion
Down and Right Extrusion	Down and Left Extrusion


To create an isometric extrusion


Extrusion Effects

Creating an Oblique Extrusion

Editing Extruded Objects

Changing the Resolution of Extruded Objects

Lighting Effects

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


To create an isometric extrusion

1	Select the object to extrude.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Extrude option on the menu. The depth control and perspective handles appear.

4	Choose the isometric extrusion orientation by clicking the appropriate button on the Ribbon toolbar. The object face changes to the chosen angle and extrudes.

Click Isometric Right [image] to extrude the object to the right.

Click Isometric Left [image] to extrude the object to the left.

Click Isometric Down and Right [image] to extrude the object down and to the right.

Click Isometric Down and Left [image] to extrude the object down and to the left.

5	Drag the depth control handle [image] to shorten or lengthen the extrusion.

6	Drag a blue perspective handle to adjust the object's perspective.

7	When you finish extruding the object, cancel the extrusion mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Extrude, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

As an alternative to steps 2 and 3, you can click Extrude on the Change menu.


Creating an Isometric Extrusion

Creating an Oblique Extrusion

Editing Extruded Objects

Changing the Resolution of Extruded Objects

Lighting Effects

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


Editing Extruded Objects

You can use the Edit tool [image] or the Extrude command on the Change menu to modify an extruded object after you have created it or to remove the extrusion effect.

You can also manipulate extruded objects in many of the same ways you can manipulate standard objects. For example, you can move, resize, rotate, skew, flip, warp, and apply fills to extruded objects.

The following commands, however, cannot be used with an extruded object (unless it has first been converted to curves).

Reshape

Blend

Modify (Fragment, Intersect, Join, Punch, Trim, Slice, Outline, or Contour)

Note

After converting an extruded object to curves, you can no longer edit the object as an extruded object. You can, however, select the face and re-extrude that object.


To edit an extruded object

To remove an extrusion effect


Extrusion Effects

Changing the Resolution of Extruded Objects

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Light Reflectivity

Changing the Ambient Light


To edit an extruded object

1	Select the extruded object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Extrude option on the menu. The depth control and perspective handles appear.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click the extrusion method you want. The object changes to the chosen angle and extrudes.

5	Drag the depth control handle [image] to shorten or lengthen the extrusion.

6	Drag a blue perspective handle to adjust the object's perspective.

7	When you finish extruding the object, cancel the extrusion mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Extrude, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

As an alternative to steps 2 and 3, you can click Extrude on the Change menu.


Editing Extruded Objects


To remove an extrusion effect

1	Select the extruded object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Extrude option on the menu. The depth control and perspective handles appear.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Remove Extrusion [image] . The extrusion effect is removed and the object is restored to its original shape.

Note

After converting an extruded object to curves, you can no longer remove the extrusion effect.

Tip

As an alternative to steps 2 and 3, you can click Extrude on the Change menu.


Changing the Resolution of Extruded Objects

Extruded objects are composed of facets. Facets are small planes that fit together to create a three-dimensional look.

You can change the resolution of extruded objects by increasing or decreasing the number of facets. Increasing the number of facets creates smoother curves. Lowering the number of facets creates less rounded-looking extruded objects.

Coarse Resolution	Fine Resolution
Note

Changing the resolution of flat-sided extruded objects such as cubes and pyramids does not change their appearance.


To change the resolution of an extruded object


Lighting Effects


To change the resolution of an extruded object

1	Select the extruded object.

2	On the Change menu, click Extrusion Options. The Extrusion Options dialog box opens.

3	Set the resolution by dragging the Coarse/Fine slider under Attributes. The number of facets increases as you drag the slider toward the Fine setting.

4	Click Apply to apply the resolution setting to the object.

Note

The resolution attribute applies only to rounded objects such as cylinders. Changing the resolution of flat-sided extruded objects such as cubes and pyramids does not change their appearance.

Tip

Use the preview in the Sample box to determine whether you have the resolution you want.


Changing the Resolution of Extruded Objects


Lighting Effects

Lighting is one of the more important cues that an object is three-dimensional, not two-dimensional. For example, without lighting, a sphere looks like a two-dimensional circle.

Designer lets you set the following lighting attributes for extruded objects:

You can turn the lighting on or off.

You can change the position of the light source to shine anywhere on the object.

You can change the color of the light.

You can change the intensity of the light. This setting controls the strength of the light.

You can change the ambience of the light. This setting controls the amount of surrounding light.

You can change the reflectivity of the light. This setting controls the diffraction of the light on the object's surface.

Note

Lighting effects apply only to extruded objects. If you have multiple objects selected when you apply the lighting effects, the effects are applied only to the extruded objects in the selection.

Tip

To copy lighting effects from one extruded object to another, use Pick Up Object Format and Apply Object Format on the Format menu.


To turn extrusion lighting on and off

To change the position of the light source

To change the light intensity and color

To change the light reflectivity

To change the ambient light


Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Light Reflectivity

Changing the Ambient Light

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects

Picking Up and Applying Attributes


To turn extrusion lighting on and off

1	Select the extruded object.

2	On the Change menu, click Extrusion Options. The Extrusion Options dialog box opens.

3	To turn the lighting on, clear the No Shading check box.

or

To turn the lighting off, select the No Shading check box.

4	Click Apply to apply the shading setting to the object.


Lighting Effects

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Light Reflectivity

Changing the Ambient Light


Changing the Position of the Light Source

Think of the light source as a flashlight shining on an object. Changing the position of the light source lets you shine the flashlight from any position around the object. You can change the light source for one or more extruded objects. All selected extruded objects change to show the current settings and color.

Top Lighting	Bottom Lighting


To change the position of the light source


Lighting Effects

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Light Reflectivity

Changing the Ambient Light

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


To change the position of the light source

1	Select the extruded object.

2	On the Change menu, click Extrusion Options. The Extrusion Options dialog box opens.

3	Set the X,Y position of the light source by dragging the light bulb in the Sample box. As you drag the light bulb, you can see the lighting change on the sample object in the box.

4	Set the Z position of the light source by dragging the Back/Front slider.

5	Click Apply to apply the lighting setting to the object.

Tips

Use the preview in the Sample box to determine whether you have the light position you want.

To make the light source on different extruded objects match, select all of the objects before you set the light source.


Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Light Reflectivity

Changing the Ambient Light


Changing the Light Intensity and Intensity Color
Changing the Light Intensity and Color

You can change the amount of light that shines on an extruded object by adjusting the light intensity.

Low Intensity	High Intensity
You can also change the color of the light shining on an extruded object.


To change the light intensity and color


Lighting Effects

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Reflectivity

Changing the Ambient Light

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


To change the light intensity and intensity color
To change the light intensity and color

1	Select the extruded object.

2	On the Change menu, click Extrusion Options. The Extrusion Options dialog box opens.

3	Set the light intensity by dragging the Intensity slider. The light intensity (strength) increases as you drag the slider to the right.

4	Set the light color by clicking the Color button and choosing the desired color from the color palette.

5	Click Apply to apply the settings to the object.

Tip

Use the preview in the Sample box to determine whether you have the intensity and color you want.


Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Reflectivity

Changing the Ambient Light


Changing the Ambient Light

Surrounding or ambient light is the lighting surrounding an extruded object. For example, on a cloudy day, the ambient lighting is low.

Low Ambience	High Ambience


To change the ambience


Lighting Effects

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Light Reflectivity

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


To change the ambient light

1	Select the extruded object.

2	On the Change menu, click Extrusion Options. The Extrusion Options dialog box opens.

3	Set the amount of ambient light by dragging the Ambience slider. The amount of ambient light increases as you drag the slider to the right.

4	Click Apply to apply the settings to the object.

Tip

Use the preview in the Sample box to determine whether you have the ambient light you want.


Changing the Ambient Light

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Light Reflectivity


Changing the Light Reflectivity

The light reflectivity setting affects the shininess of an extruded object by increasing or decreasing the number of facets that receive a highlight. The greater the reflectivity, the shinier the surface of the object appears.

Dull Reflectivity	Shiny Reflectivity


To change the light reflectivity


Lighting Effects

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Ambient Light

Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


To change the light reflectivity

1	Select the extruded object.

2	On the Change menu, click Extrusion Options. The Extrusion Options dialog box opens.

3	Set the light reflectivity by dragging the Dull/Shiny slider under Attributes. The reflectivity increases as you drag the slider toward Shiny.

4	Click Apply to apply the settings to the object.

Tip

Use the preview in the Sample box to determine whether you have the reflectivity you want.


Changing the Light Reflectivity

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Ambient Light


Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects

To help you obtain the lighting effect that you want, you can choose from a variety of predefined lighting effects. If a predefined lighting effect is not exactly what you want, use it as a starting point in creating your own lighting effect.


To choose a predefined lighting effect


Lighting Effects

Changing the Position of the Light Source

Changing the Light Intensity and Color

Changing the Ambient Light

Changing the Light Reflectivity


To choose a predefined lighting effect

1	Select the extruded object.

2	On the Change menu, click Extrusion Options. The Extrusion Options dialog box opens.

3	Click the lighting effect that you want in the Predefined box. For example, to choose the Moonlit lighting effect, click Moonlit.

4	Click Apply to apply the settings to the object.

Tip

Use the preview in the Sample box to determine whether you have the setting you want.


Choosing Predefined Lighting Effects


FILES.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Working with Files

Multiple Documents and Views

Designer lets you have up to nine documents open at one time, each in its own drawing window. The title bar of a new window displays "Untitled1" until you save the file with a specific filename. If you have more than one unsaved document, they are named Untitled1, Untitled2, and so forth.

You can open multiple windows for the same document to view a different page in each window. You can even view the same page in two different windows.

After you minimize a window, you can select the Arrange Icons command on Designer’s Window menu to automatically space the minimized document windows evenly on your screen. You can select the Cascade and Tile commands to arrange multiple windows on your screen.

To switch from one document window to the next, press CTRL+F6.

Save Frequently

Make a habit of saving your work often. This helps to ensure that your files are saved in the event of a power interruption or a hardware or software problem.

The first time you save a new document file, you can name it and choose where you want to store it. Afterwards, each time you choose the Save command, any changes to the file are saved.

Designer 7 File Format

Designer 7 uses an improved file compression method for storing Designer DSF files. This compression method reduces file size significantly, producing a 63% decrease in file size, on the average.

If you want a Designer 7 file to be readable by Designer 6.0, then choose the Micrografx Designer 6.0 DSF file type when you save the file.

Import and Export

You can import and export image files in over 40 different file formats, and you can import and export color palettes.

When You Quit (Close) Designer

If you have made changes to any open document, you are prompted to save the document before Designer quits.


Using the Project Wizard

Creating a New Document

Opening a Document

Closing the Active Document

Closing All Documents

Saving a Document

Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving as a Template

Importing and Exporting Files

Quitting Designer


Using the Project Wizard

The Project Wizard lets you select a project to help you begin a drawing. A wide rage of projects are provided with Designer, including awards and certificates, calendars, diagrams, forms, signs, and Web graphics. Once you select a project, the Project Wizard guides you in creating the basic drawing. Of course, after completing the wizard, you can add to and edit the drawing, if desired.

When you start Designer, you have the option to begin with the Project Wizard, a blank page, or an existing file.

If you choose to begin with the Project Wizard, select a project from the list. After making the appropriate selections or entering the requested information on a wizard screen, click Next to continue. To go back to a previous screen, click Back. You can click Home to return to the opening screen of the Project Wizard, or click Cancel to exit the wizard.


Creating a New Document

Opening a Document

Saving a Document

Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving as a Template

Closing the Active Document


Creating a New Document

When you want to create a new drawing, use one of the following File menu commands.

The New command creates a new document by opening a new, blank window.

The New Project command displays the Micrografx Designer Projects dialog box, which lets you choose a project on which to base your drawing. Choosing a project starts the Project Wizard, which guides you in creating your drawing.

For most projects, the Project Wizard uses a template to start your drawing. A template is a predefined document that contains the basic layout and formatting for a specific type of drawing, such as a certificate or calendar. Almost all templates have an associated clip art subject, so when the Project Wizard loads a template, Designer also opens Media Manager with that clip art subject already selected. Templates make it easy to create new drawings, because you need to add only the text and clip art that are suitable to your current application.

When you start a new project with a template file, Designer loads a copy of the template, so any changes you make do not affect the template.

Designer lets you have multiple documents open at one time, each in its own window. You can have as many documents open as your memory allows. The title bar of a new window displays "Untitled1" until you save the document with a specific name. If you have more than one unsaved document, they are named Untitled1, Untitled2, and so forth.

In addition, you can open new windows for the same document to display different views of the document.


To create a new document

To create a new document starting with a project


Using the Project Wizard

Opening a Document

Closing the Active Document

Saving a Document

Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving as a Template


To create a new document

1	On the File menu, click New.

or

Click New [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	Designer opens a new window containing an untitled document.

Tips

To give the new document a name, click Save As on the File menu.

The keyboard shortcut for New is CTRL+N.


Creating a New Document


To create a new document starting with a project

1	On the File menu, click New Project. The Micrografx Designer Projects dialog box opens and displays folders for the different project categories.

2	Click the folder containing the project you want. A description of the folder appears in the Details box.

3	Click Next to display the folder's contents.

4	Click the project you want. A graphic preview of the project appears in the Details box.

5	Click Finish. Designer opens the project and starts the Project Wizard.

Note

When you open a project, you open a duplicate of the project template, not the original. This means you can make any changes you want to the document without altering the actual template.

Tip

To give the new document a name, click Save As on the File menu.


Creating a New Document

Using the Project Wizard


Opening a Document

To edit or view a Designer document, you must open the document. You are not restricted to a single open document, but can open multiple documents in Designer, up to the limits of your computer’s memory.

Besides opening files that are stored in Designer 7 DSF format, you can open files in other Micrografx formats. When you open a file in another Micrografx format, it is translated into Designer 7 format as it is loaded into memory. When you save the file, you have the option of specifying the Micrografx format in which you want the file saved.

Designer 7 can open files in the following formats.

Description	Extension

Micrografx Designer 7 File	DSF

Micrografx Designer 6.0 File	DSF

Micrografx Designer 4.x File	DS4

Micrografx Designer 4.x Clip Art	MGX

Micrografx QuickSilver File	QSF

Micrografx Template File	DST

Micrografx Drawing	DRW

In addition to these formats, Designer can import files in many standard formats. For information on importing files, see Importing a File.

Notes

The Open dialog box does not show a file preview for DRW files. When you open a DRW file, it is automatically converted to a DSF file and the extension is changed to DSF.

You can copy, rename, delete, and search for files from the Open dialog box.


To open a document

To make a copy of a file

To delete a file

To rename a file

To find a file


Opening DRW Documents with Multiple Pages

Recalling a Document

Using the Project Wizard

Creating a New Document

Closing the Active Document

Closing All Documents

Saving a Document

Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving as a Template


To open a document

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	If the Files of Type box does not list the format of the file you want to open, expand the box, and select the appropriate file type.

3	Locate the drive and folder containing the file you want to open.

4	Click the document filename. A preview of the document appears in the File Preview area, and a description of the file appears in the File Description box, if available.

5	Click Open. The document appears in the drawing area.

Tips

To scroll quickly to a specific filename in the Open dialog box, click the file list, and then type the first character of the filename. The list jumps to the first file beginning with that character.

You can also specify the file you want to open by typing its path and name in the File Name box. For example, type C:\DESIGNER\TUTORIAL in the File Name box to open the TUTORIAL document on drive C in the DESIGNER folder.

To open more than one document at a time, hold down CTRL and click each filename.

The keyboard shortcut for Open is CTRL+O.

You can also open a document by clicking Open [image] on the Standard toolbar.


Opening a Document


To make a copy of a file

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Click the right mouse button on the name of the file you want to copy.

3	On the shortcut menu, click Copy.

4	Double-click the folder where you want the copy to reside.

5	Click the right mouse button outside of any filenames, and click Paste.


Opening a Document


To rename a file

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Click the right mouse button on the name of the file you want to rename.

3	On the shortcut menu, click Rename.

4	Type the new filename and extension and press ENTER.

If you specify an existing name for the file, you are asked whether you want to replace the existing file. Click No to return to the Open dialog box. Click Yes to replace the file.


To delete a file

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Click the right mouse button on the name of the file you want to delete.

3	On the shortcut menu, click Delete.

4	Click Yes to delete the file.

or

Click No to cancel the deletion.

Note

Deleting may either delete the file or move the file to the Recycle Bin, depending on how you have set the properties of the Recycle Bin.


To find a file

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Click Find. The Find File dialog box opens.

3	Type the name of the file you want to search for.

4	Click the Path option and type a drive and folder.

or

Click the Selected Drives option and click Removable, Fixed, or Remote drives.

5	Click Search. Designer lists the names and locations of matching files.

6	Highlight one or more filenames from the search list.

7	Click Open. Each selected document opens in its own window.

Tips

You can use wild-card characters (for example, *.DSF) to find files of the same type or files with similar names.

If Designer lists multiple files found in a search, you can select the desired files from this list and then open all the files at once, even if the files are in different folders.


Opening DRW Documents with Multiple Pages

When you open a DRW document with multiple pages, you are asked how you want to open the document.

If each page in the original document contains a separate drawing, click Split Up Pages. Designer retains the contents on multiple pages as they were in the original DRW file.

If a large drawing spans several pages in the original document, click Enlarge Document. The entire drawing is loaded as a single-page drawing. The page size is enlarged to include all of the used pages of the original drawing.


To open a document


Opening a Document


Closing the Active Document

The Close command on the File menu lets you close the active document.

If the document contains changes that you have not saved, you are prompted to save the changes before the document is closed.

Note

All open documents are closed if you quit Designer.


To close the active document

To close all open documents


Closing All Documents


To close the active document

On the File menu, click Close.

If the document contains changes that you have not saved, you are prompted to save the changes.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Close is CTRL+F4.

To close all open documents, click Close All on the File menu.


Closing the Active Document

Closing All Documents


Closing All Documents

The Close All command on the File menu closes all open documents.

If a document contains changes that you have not saved, you are prompted to save the changes before the document closes.

Note

All open documents are closed if you quit Designer.


To close all open documents

To close the active document


Closing the Active Document


To close all open documents

On the File menu, click Close All.

If the document contains changes that you have not saved, you are prompted to save the changes.


Closing All Documents

Closing the Active Document


Saving a Document

After you save a document with the Save As command, save changes to it quickly during a drawing session with the Save command.

Make a habit of saving your work often. This helps to ensure that your files are saved in the event of a power interruption or a hardware or software problem.

Revert to Saved

The Revert to Saved command lets you quickly reload a previously saved version of a document. Use this command to undo all changes you have made to a document since the last save.


To save a document

To save a document with a different name or format

To name a document


Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving as a Template


To save a document

1	If you have more than one document open, select the window of the document you want to save.

2	On the File menu, click Save.

Note

If you are saving a document for the first time, the Save As dialog box opens so you can specify a filename.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Save is CTRL+S.

You can also save a document by clicking Save [image] on the Standard toolbar.


Saving a Document

Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving as a Template


To revert to a saved file

1	On the File menu, click Revert To Saved. Designer asks if you are sure you want to ignore all changes before it reverts to the previous version.

2	Click Yes to open the most recently saved version of the document, or click No to return to the current document.

Note

This command restores the document to the most recently saved version, undoing all changes made since you last saved the file.


Saving with a Different Name or Format

The Save As command lets you assign a name to a document or make a copy of an existing document by giving it a new name.

You can also use Save As to save a document in a different Micrografx format. For example, choose the QuickSilver file type to save a file for use with QuickSilver. For information on the QuickSilver file format, see Saving QuickSilver Files.

Designer 7 can save files in the following formats

Description	Extension

Micrografx Designer 7 File	DSF

Micrografx Designer 6.0 File	DSF

Micrografx Designer 4.x File	DS4

Micrografx Designer 4.x Clip Art	MGX

Micrografx QuickSilver File	QSF

Micrografx Template File	DST

Designer 7 File Format

The default format for Designer 7 files is Designer 7 DSF format. Only this file format supports all of the new Designer 7 features, so always use this file format for saving a master copy of your documents.

The Designer 7 DSF file format uses an improved file compression method that reduces file size significantly, producing a 63% decrease in file size, on the average.


To save a document with a different name or format

To name a document

To save a QuickSilver file


Saving a Document

Saving as a Template


To save a document with a different name or format

1	If you have more than one document open, select the window of the document you want to save.

2	On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.

3	Type the name you want in the File Name box.

4	Choose the drive and folder in which you want to save the file.

5	Choose a file format in the Save as Type box, if desired.

6	Click Save to save the file.

Notes

If you specify an existing name for the document, you are asked whether you want to replace the existing file. Click No to return to the Save As dialog box. Click Yes to replace the file.

The default file format is the Designer 7 DSF format.

Tips

Pressing a character key when a name is highlighted in the File Name box makes the name disappear. To edit the highlighted name, press the RIGHT ARROW key to remove the highlight. Then press the RIGHT ARROW or LEFT ARROW keys to move the cursor. To delete characters to the left of the cursor, press BACKSPACE. To delete characters to the right of the cursor, press DELETE.

To add a description to a file, type the description in the File Description box.

The keyboard shortcut for Save As is CTRL+SHIFT+S.


Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving a Document

Saving as a Template


To name a document

1	On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.

2	Type a name in the File Name box and press ENTER.

If you specify an existing name for the document, you are asked whether you want to replace the existing file. Click No to return to the Save As dialog box. Click Yes to replace the file.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for Save As is CTRL+SHIFT+S.


Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving a Document

Saving as a Template


Saving as a Template

You can create your own template files using the Save as Template command on the File menu.

A template is a predefined design document that contains the basic layout and formatting for a specific type of drawing, such as a certificate or calendar. You probably want to make a template for any drawing you create on a regular basis. Once you save a basic design as a template, you can create a new drawing quickly by simply adding the current text and clip art.

Templates can have an associated clip art subject or Project Help topic.

If you associate a clip art subject with a template, then the Media Manager displays that subject when you open the template.

If you associate a Project Help topic with a template, then Project Help displays that topic when you open the template.

When you save a document as a template, you specify a category for the template. The category determines the Projects folder in which the template appears. For example, the My Templates category saves the template in the Projects\MyTemps folder, the Forms category saves the template in the Projects\Forms folder, and the Calendar category saves the template in the Projects\Calendar folder. The Projects folder is located in the Designer folder on the drive where Designer is installed.

Modifying a Template

To modify an existing template, open the template file, make the changes that you want, and then save the modified document as a template to the same name and folder as the original template.


To save as a template


Saving a Document

Saving with a Different Name or Format


To save as a template

1	If you want a clip art subject associated with the template, open the Media Manager and display that subject. To open the Media Manager, click Clip Art [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	If you want a Project Help topic associated with the template, open Project Help and display that topic. To open Project Help, click Project Help on the Help menu.

3	On the File menu, click Save as Template. The Save as Template dialog box opens.

4	Type a name for your template in the name box.

5	Type a description of the template in the Description box, if desired.

6	Select Save Clip Art Subject if you want the displayed clip art subject associated with the template.

7	Select Save Project Help Topic if you want the displayed Project Help topic associated with the template.

8	Select the template category.

or

Click New Category and type a new category name.

9	Click OK to save the document as a template.

Tips

The category you select for your template determines the folder in which the template appears. For example, selecting Forms lists the templates in the Designer\Forms folder.

The files you save for each category are in the corresponding folder in the Designer\Projects folder. If you want to move a template to another category, use Explorer to move the template file to the desired folder. You can also use Explorer to delete template files you create. Designer templates have the file extension DST.

If you enter or select an existing template filename, you are asked if you want to replace the existing file. Click No to return to the Save as Template dialog box. Click Yes to replace the file.


Saving as a Template

Saving with a Different Name or Format

Saving a Document


Recalling a Document

The recall feature of the File menu lists the documents you have used most recently so you can access them quickly.

Notes

You can set the number of files shown on the recall list of the File menu using the General tab of the Options dialog box.

If a file is deleted or is on a drive that is not currently available, it may still appear on the File menu. When you choose one of these files, Designer displays a message stating that it cannot find the file.


To open a recently used document


Opening a Document


To open a recently used document

On the File menu, click the name of the document.

Tip

You can set the number of files on the recall list of the File menu using the General tab of the Options dialog box.


Recalling a Document


Sending a Document to Mail

The Send command on the File menu prepares the active document for mailing and opens your mail application.

Note

This command is unavailable if you do not have a mail application defined for Windows.


To send a document to mail


Working with Files


To send a document to mail

1	On the File menu, click Send. Your mail application opens.

2	Use your mail application to complete your mail message.


Sending a Document to Mail


Importing and Exporting Files

Designer uses Media Manager to import from and export to standard file-formats for vector graphics, bitmap graphics, and text. This feature lets you use and share files created or used by other applications.

Filters

The installation CD includes filters (sometimes known as converters or translators) for many different file formats. When you import a file, Media Manager uses a filter to convert the file created with another application into Designer’s format. When you export, a filter is used to convert the file into another application’s format.

When you use the Custom Installation option, the Micrografx Installer lets you install only the filters, fonts, and clip art that you need. If you need a filter that is not installed, run the Installer again, choose Custom Installation, and install it.

New filters are developed and added to Designer from time to time. For a current list of supported file formats, see Updated Import and Export Filters.

Note

If you do not have the filter for a specific format, that format will be missing in the Import/Export dialog boxes. Use the Windows Notepad to examine the file MGXXLATE.LOG in your Windows folder. That file contains a log of any import/export problems. You may need to reinstall Micrografx Graphics Suite 2 with a Custom installation, to make sure all the filters are installed.


To import a file

To export a file


Importing a File

Exporting a File

Importing a Bitmap Image

Exporting a Bitmap Image

Converting an Object to a Bitmap Image


Importing a File

The Import command on the File menu lets you import graphic and text files into Designer. Designer can import over 40 different file types.

Multiple Pages and Layers During Import

When you import a file with more than one page (such as DSF, DS4, DRW, or MGX), only the objects on the first page are imported. The imported objects are added to the current page and layer in Designer.

When you import a file with more than one layer (such as DS4, DRW, or MGX), all the objects on all the layers are imported. However, the imported objects are added to the current page and layer in Designer; the imported objects are no longer on separate layers.

Notes

Designer can open DSF, DS4 (Version 4.x), DRW (Designer versions prior to Version 4.0, Windows Draw versions after 3.0, and Charisma 2.1), GRF, and MGX (Designer 4.x) files. You also can import any of these file types.

Certain Windows Draw 5 features, such as borders, page background color, and shadows, are not supported by the Designer DRW import filter. When you import a DRW file containing any of these features, Designer imports only the features it supports.

Designer cannot import a Picture Publisher PPF file that is already open in Picture Publisher. To import the file into Designer, first close it in Picture Publisher.

If you import a document that contains a font that is not installed on your system, Designer substitutes a font that is available. If you edit the text, the original name of the font appears in the Font List box with a question mark beside it to remind you that Designer is substituting a different font. For more information, see Font Mapping.


To import a file


Importing and Exporting Files

Importing a Bitmap Image

Exporting a File


To import a file

1	On the File menu, click Import. The Import dialog box opens.

2	Change to the drive and folder you want.

3	Choose the type of file you want to import in the Files of Type list box.

4	Highlight the name of the file you want to import.

5	Click Setup if you want to change import settings (if available).

6	Click Import. The dialog box closes and the imported file appears in the drawing area.

Note

If you skip step 5, Designer uses the settings previously used when importing this file type. The available import settings vary depending on the file type you want to import.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Import is CTRL+1.

Files in the Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language (HPGL) format are sometimes named with a PLT (plotter) extension. Before importing a plotter file, make sure it has a PLT extension so that Designer will list it in the Import dialog box.


Importing a File

Importing a Bitmap Image

Importing and Exporting Files


Exporting a File

The Export command on the File menu lets you export Designer drawings for use in other applications. Designer can export in over 30 different file types.

You can export individual objects or all objects on a page.

To export individual objects, select those objects before exporting.

To export all objects on a page, deselect all objects before exporting. If a document has more than one page, only the objects on the current page are exported.

When you export a Designer drawing with more than one layer to the DSF, DS4, or DRW file type, selected objects (even those on multiple layers) are exported to one layer. If no objects are selected, all layers and objects are exported, and the multiple layers are retained.

When you export a Designer drawing to any file type other than DSF, DS4, or DRW, all objects on the current page are exported as one layer.

Notes

To select objects on multiple layers prior to export, open the Layers Manager, select Edit All Layers, close the Layer Manager, and then select the desired objects on the desired layers of the current page. For more information on the Layer Manager, see Using the Layer Manager.

Designer can save to DS4 (Version 4.x) and MGX (Micrografx clip art) files. You can also export to DSF if needed.

Encapsulated PostScript files can be exported in one of four ways: with no header or preview, with no preview, with a TIFF preview, or with a WMF preview. If you plan to export an EPS file and import it into a Macintosh application (which is typical when sending files to a service bureau), you should export with no header or preview.

The Windows Metafile (*.wmf) export filter does not support long filenames. If you enter a long filename when exporting a Windows Metafile, Designer exports the file using the appropriate DOS 8-character short filename.

Several settings in the Designer 7 registry entries control how Designer files are exported. For more information, refer to Key name: Translation in Designer 7 Registry Keys and Values.


To export a file

To export selected objects


Importing and Exporting Files

Exporting a Bitmap Image

Converting an Object to a Bitmap Image

Importing a File


To export a file

1	Select the objects you want to export.

or

Deselect all objects to export the entire page.

2	On the File menu, click Export. The Export dialog box opens.

3	Choose a drive and folder for the exported file’s destination, if necessary.

4	Type a name for the file in the File Name box.

5	Choose the type of file you want to export in the Save as Type list box. Designer automatically adds the proper extension to the filename.

6	Click Setup if you want to change export settings (if available).

7	Click Export. Designer exports the file in the chosen format.

Note

If you skip step 6, Designer uses the settings previously used when exporting this file type. The available export settings vary depending on the file type you want to export.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for Export is CTRL+2.


Exporting a File

Exporting a Bitmap Image

Converting an Object to a Bitmap Image

Importing and Exporting Files


To export selected objects

1	Select the objects you want to export.

2	On the File menu, click Export. The Export dialog box opens.

3	Choose a drive and folder for the exported file’s destination, if necessary.

4	Type a name for the file.

5	Choose the type of file you want to export in the Save as Type list box. Designer automatically adds the proper extension to the filename.

6	Click Setup if you want to change export settings (if available).

7	Click Export. Designer exports the file in the chosen format.

Note

If you skip step 6, Designer uses the settings previously used when exporting this file type. The available export settings vary depending on the file type you want to export.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for Export is CTRL+2.


Quitting Designer

The Exit command on the File menu lets you quit Designer.

If you have made changes to any open document, you are prompted to save the document before the application quits.


To quit Designer


Working with Files


To quit Designer

On the File menu, click Exit.

or

On Designer's title bar, click Close [image].

or

Press ALT+F4.


Quitting Designer


FILLPTRN.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Using Fills and Patterns

You can assign fills to both lines and the interiors of closed objects. You can also specify no fill for a line or interior. A line or interior set to no fill is transparent, so any objects behind the line or interior show through.

You can choose a fill for an object before or after you draw it.

The fill types are:

Solid colors

Gradient fills (gradual changes from one color to another)

Hatch patterns

Image (bitmap) patterns

Object fills (repetitions of another object)

Note

You can also add fills to text. For more information, see Adding Fills and Patterns to Text.


Using the Interior Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Smart Colorization

Selecting a Solid Color Fill

Adding Gradient Fills to Objects

Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects

Adding Image Patterns to Objects

Filling an Object with Other Objects

Adding Fills and Patterns to Text


Using the Interior Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box gives you access to all interior fills and interior fill options.

Lock/Unlock Button

Clicking the Lock/Unlock Fill Display button alternately locks and unlocks the Interior Fill tab.

 indicates the tab is unlocked. When unlocked, the Interior Fill tab tracks the interior fill of the objects you select. For example, if you select an object with a hatch interior fill, the Interior Fill tab shows the hatch interior fill panel. If you then select an object with a solid interior fill, the Interior Fill tab shows the solid interior fill panel.

 indicates the tab is locked. When locked, the tab does not track the interior fill of the objects you select. Instead, it shows the panel of the last interior fill that you applied to an object.

Fill Type Buttons

These buttons show the panels for the different types of interior fills.

Click Solid Interior Fill [image] to show the solid fill panel.

Click Gradient Interior Fill [image] to show the gradient fill panel.

Click Hatch Interior Fill [image] to show the hatch fill panel.

Click Image Interior Fill [image] to show the image fill panel.

Click Object Interior Fill [image] to show the object fill panel.

Click Remove Interior Fill [image] to choose no interior fill.

Fill Option Buttons

These buttons set interior fill options.

Click Fill/Skip Overlaps [image] to fill or skip overlap areas. For more information on this option, see Setting Fill Overlap.

Click Fill Before/After [image] to choose the fill line method. For more information on this option, see Setting Fill Line.

Click Transform Fill with Object [image] to turn fill transform on and off. For more information on this option, see Setting Fill Transform.

Click Overprint [image] to turn overprinting on and off. For more information on this option, see Setting Fill Overprint.

Preview Button

The Preview button lets you see the effect of an interior fill on a selected object. (This button has no effect if no object is selected.) You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

Apply and Close Buttons

As with many of the dialog boxes in Designer, the Object Format box stays open to let you apply changes to objects without having to open the dialog box repeatedly. You can click Apply each time you want to apply a change to a selected object. The dialog box does not close until you click Close.

Rolling Up the Dialog Box

By rolling up the Object Format dialog box, you can keep it accessible, but out of your way. Click [image] on the title bar to roll up the dialog box. Click [image] to unroll it.


Using Fills and Patterns

Smart Colorization

Selecting a Solid Color Fill

Adding Gradient Fills to Objects

Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects

Adding Image Patterns to Objects

Filling an Object with Other Objects


Smart Colorization

Smart colorization lets you change the fill color of an object group and retain the hue, or color gradations, of the original fill color. Smart colorization is especially useful when working with clip art, because it lets you change an object's color without losing color shades.

The following rules apply to this feature:

Smart colorization is performed only on object groups.

Only solid color and gradient fills are adjusted (to adjust a gradient fill, apply a solid color to it, not another gradient fill).

Black and white colors in the original object are unchanged.

Applying a gray color to an object group colors the object group shades of gray (grayscale).

Applying a color to an object group containing only black, white, and grayscale colors converts the grays to shades of the color.

The feature is cumulative. If you apply the same color again, the color may get darker or lighter.

Smart colorization is turned on and off by the Smart Colorization of Groups command on the Format menu or the Use Smart Colorization When Applying Fills to Groups option on the General tab of the Options dialog box.

Smart colorization for a solid fill is illustrated below.

When the car on the left, which consists of an object group, is colored blue, the hue is retained. Thus, dark red areas become dark blue and light red areas become light blue. When the car is colored gray, the dark red areas become dark gray and light red areas become light gray.

Note

If you have smart colorization turned on and want to bypass hue adjustment for an object group, then apply the color in group edit mode. To enter the group edit mode, double-click any object in the group. A blue edit border appears around the group. You can now select individual objects in the group by clicking them, or all objects in the group by pressing CTRL+A, and apply the fill color you want. No hue adjustment will be applied. Press ESC to exit the group edit mode when you are finished. For more information on group editing, see Working with Grouped Objects.


To fill an object with a solid color using the Color Palette

To fill an object with solid color using the Object Format dialog box


Selecting a Solid Color Fill

Using the Interior Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

General Options


Selecting a Solid Color Fill

You can fill a closed object with a solid color using any of the following.

Color Palette

Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box

Solid Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon

If an object is already selected, choosing a solid interior fill applies the fill to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a solid interior fill sets the default interior fill.


To fill an object with a solid color using the Color Palette

To fill an object with solid color using the Object Format dialog box

To fill an object with no fill


Using the Interior Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Smart Colorization

Dithered Colors


To fill an object with a solid color using the Color Palette

1	Select the object.

2	Click a color in the Color Palette. (This action has no effect on an open object.)

Tips

Click the swatch with the X in it to select no fill (invisible).

To set an object's line color, right-click a color in the Color Palette.

If no object is selected, you set a new default color. The next object you draw will have this color. To determine the current defaults, deselect all objects, and view the status bar.

If you do not see the Color Palette, click Toolbars on the View menu, and then select Palette.

You can also set an object's color using the Object Format dialog box or Solid Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.

To find a color's values and name (if any), point to the color in the palette, and check the Hint toolbar.


Selecting a Solid Color Fill

Smart Colorization

Dithered Colors


To fill an object with a solid color using the Object Format dialog box

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Solid. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Solid Interior Fill [image] to display the solid fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click the color that you want.

5	Click Apply.

Tips

Click Remove Interior Fill [image] to select no fill (invisible).

If no object is selected, you set a new default interior fill color.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also set an object's color using the Color Palette or Solid Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


To fill an object with a solid color using the Format ribbon

1	Select the object.

2	Click Format [image] in the toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Solid Interior Fill [image]. A color palette opens.

4	Click the color that you want.

Tips

If no object is selected, you set a new default interior fill color.

You can also set an object's color using the Color Palette or the Object Format dialog box.


To fill an object with no fill

1	Select the object you want to have no fill.

2	Click the X in the Color Palette. (This action has no effect on an open object.)

Tips

To set an object's line color to no fill (transparent), right-click the X in the Color Palette.

If no object is selected, you set the default interior fill to no fill.

The status bar shows an X to indicate no fill.

You can also fill an object with no fill by clicking Remove Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


Dithered Colors

Monitors and printers use a process called dithering to compensate for the inability to display some colors. Dithering simulates color by placing dots of different colors next to each other in a pattern. Thus, dithering lets you display on a screen, and print on some printers, colors that are actually not available.

If a color is available in your current graphics mode, it is displayed. If a color is not supported, it is changed to the closest color available on the graphics adapter. The color is changed to the closest color or dithered color available when printed or when displayed on another device.

The graphics mode can be changed in Windows, depending upon your monitor and video card.


Selecting a Solid Color Fill


Introduction to Gradient Fills

A gradient is a fill that makes a gradual transition between colors. Gradients can add more realistic depth to a drawing and provide a less mechanical feel to many illustrations.

You can create four types of gradients: linear, radial, square, and conical.

Linear gradients are the simplest of the four, with a gradual fade from one color to another in a specified direction within an object. Radial (circular), square, and conical gradients fade from one color in the inner part of the fill to another color in the outer part of the fill.

Linear	Radial	Square	Conical
A simple gradient fill fades from any one selected color to any other selected color. You can also create gradient fills made up of many colors. For example, you can easily create rainbow effects.


Adding Gradient Fills to Objects

Making Gradient Fills Draw Faster

Smart Colorization


Adding Gradient Fills to Objects

You add a gradient fill to an object by specifying a gradient type (linear, radial, square, or conical) and choosing the gradient's values and colors.

Linear Gradients

For linear gradients, you can set the Origin and Angle of the fill. The Origin sets the starting point of the fill. The Angle sets the degree of rotation of the fill.

Radial Gradients

For radial gradients, you can set the X Origin and Y Origin of the fill. These values set the center point of the fill. Setting the X Origin and Y Origin to 50 puts the center point of the gradient at the center of the object being filled.

To move the center point of the gradient to the right, use an X Origin value greater than 50. To move the center point to the left, use an X Origin value less than 50.

To move the center point of the gradient downward, use a Y Origin value greater than 50. To move the center point upward, use a Y Origin value less than 50.

X Origin = 60, Y Origin = 50	X Origin = 25, Y Origin = 25
Square and Conical Gradients

For square and conical gradients, you can set the X Origin, Y Origin, and Angle of the fill. The X and Y Origins set the center point of the fill (as explained above), and the Angle sets the degree of rotation of the fill.

Choosing Gradient Colors

The pointer controls above the color band let you choose the colors of a gradient.

To choose a gradient's starting color, click the 0 pointer, and then click the starting color you want in the color palette above the color band.

To choose a gradient's ending color, click the 100 pointer, and then click the ending color you want.

By clicking the color band, you can add more pointer controls. Each pointer control lets you add another color to a gradient.

Tip

In earlier versions of Designer, you could add custom gradients to the gradient gallery. In Designer 7, this is no longer possible. By using the named style feature of Designer, however, you can easily create your own gradient galleries. Simply assign a style name to any gradient that you expect to use in other drawings. When you want to apply that gradient to an object in a new drawing, import the named styles from the original document. Then apply the appropriate named style to the new object. For more information on importing named styles, see Importing Named Styles.


To fill an object with a linear gradient

To fill an object with a radial gradient

To fill an object with a square gradient

To fill an object with a conical gradient

To add colors to a gradient

To change how gradient fills draw


Introduction to Gradient Fills

Making Gradient Fills Draw Faster


To fill an object with a linear gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Gradient. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient Interior Fill [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Linear [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Type the desired value in the Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the desired value in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the Origin using the mouse, drag the square origin point in the gradient preview.

To set the Angle using the mouse, drag (in a circular motion) either end of the angle indicator in the gradient preview.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

After applying a gradient to an object, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object, and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


Adding Gradient Fills to Objects

Introduction to Gradient Fills


To fill an object with a radial gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Gradient. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient Interior Fill [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Radial [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Type the desired value in the X Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the desired value in the Y Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the X and Y Origins using the mouse, drag the square origin point in the gradient preview.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

After applying a gradient to an object, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object, and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


To fill an object with a square gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Gradient. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient Interior Fill [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Square [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Type the desired value in the X Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the desired value in the Y Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the desired value in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the X and Y Origins using the mouse, drag the square origin point in the gradient preview.

To set the Angle using the mouse, drag (in a circular motion) either end of the angle indicator in the gradient preview.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

After applying a gradient to an object, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object, and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


To fill an object with a conical gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Gradient. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient Interior Fill [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Conical [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Type the desired value in the X Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the desired value in the Y Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the desired value in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the X and Y Origins using the mouse, drag the square origin point in the gradient preview.

To set the Angle using the mouse, drag (in a circular motion) either end of the angle indicator in the gradient preview.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

After applying a gradient to an object, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object, and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


To add colors to a gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Gradient. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient Interior Fill [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Linear [image], Radial [image], Square [image], or Conical [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Click the color band. Another pointer control appears above where you clicked the band.

8	Drag the new pointer to adjust its position, if necessary.

9	Click the new pointer, and then click the color you want.

10	Repeat steps 7 through 9 to add more colors.

11	Set the other gradient values you want.

12	Click Apply.

Tips

To delete a pointer control, drag it past the 0 or 100 pointer, or select it and press DELETE.

After applying a gradient to an object, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object, and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


Making Gradient Fills Draw Faster

Because gradient fills take time to draw on your screen, you can speed them by choosing a different display option.

Smooth	Average	Coarse	None
Choosing Smooth produces the highest display quality on your screen but redraws more slowly, while Coarse produces the lowest display quality but redraws quickly. When None is selected, only the first color of the gradient is displayed.

Changing the way gradients display does not affect the contents of your drawing or alter the way gradients print.


To change how gradient fills draw


Introduction to Gradient Fills

Adding Gradient Fills to Objects


To change how gradient fills draw

On the View menu, point to Show Gradients. Then click Smooth, Average, Coarse, or None. All gradients in all documents draw using the options you choose.


Making Gradient Fills Draw Faster

Adding Gradient Fills to Objects

Introduction to Gradient Fills


Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects

You can fill objects with hatch patterns that are composed of vector-based lines.

You can choose from a broad range of predefined hatch patterns or define a custom hatch pattern.

Hatch patterns have two colors: a foreground color (the color of the hatch pattern) and a background color.

Dense patterns show less of the background color, and sparse patterns show more background color. By experimenting with different patterns and colors, you can produce interesting effects.

If an object is already selected, choosing a hatch fill applies the fill to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a hatch fill sets the default fill.

Making Hatch Fills Draw Faster

When working with other aspects of a drawing, you may want to turn off hatch fills. This enables objects containing hatch fills to redraw faster when being moved or resized, for example. The Show Hatch Fills command on the View menu lets you show or hide hatch fills in a drawing. For more information on setting view options, see View Options.


To fill an object with a hatch pattern

To change the line weight and spacing of hatch fills


Changing the Line Weight and Spacing of Hatch Fills


To fill an object with a hatch pattern

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Hatch. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Hatch Interior Fill [image] to display the hatch fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click the hatch pattern you want.

5	To change the foreground color, click Foreground, and then click the color you want.

6	To change the background color, click Background, and then click the color you want.

7	Click Apply. The object redraws with the new hatch pattern and colors.

Tips

As a shortcut, double-click a hatch pattern to apply it to the selection.

To see the effect of a hatch fill on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also choose a hatch fill by clicking Hatch Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.

After applying a hatch fill to an object, you can change its foreground and background colors using the Color Palette. To choose another foreground color, select the object, and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another background color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects

Changing the Line Weight and Spacing of Hatch Fills


Changing the Line Weight and Spacing of Hatch Fills

You can change the weight and spacing of lines in a hatch pattern, creating your own custom hatch patterns.

Weight

The hatch line weight can range from 1 to 100, where 1 represents a hairline and 100 represents approximately 10 points.

Spacing

The default value for the spacing between hatch lines is 100% (no change). Setting this value to 200% doubles the space between hatch lines; setting it to 50% cuts the space between hatch lines in half.


To change the line weight and spacing of hatch fills


Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects


To change the line weight and spacing of hatch fills

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Hatch. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Hatch Interior Fill [image] to display the hatch fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click the hatch pattern you want.

5	Enter new values for the line weight and spacing.

6	Click Apply. The object redraws with the new line weight and spacing for the hatch pattern.

Tip

To see the effect of the new hatch pattern on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.


Changing the Line Weight and Spacing of Hatch Fills

Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects


Adding Image Patterns to Objects

You can fill objects with bitmap image patterns.

Designer provides a broad range of predefined image patterns, but you are not limited to these patterns. You can add any bitmap image to Designer's gallery of images and fill an object with that pattern.

If the image fill pattern is all one color (monochrome), you can change the foreground and background colors after applying the fill to an object. To choose another foreground color, select the object, and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another background color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.

If an object is already selected, choosing an image fill applies the fill to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing an image fill sets the default fill.

Changing the Image Scale

You can change the scale of an image fill. The default value for the scale is 100%. Setting this value to 200% makes the image twice as large; setting it to 50% make the image half as large.

Making Image Fills Draw Faster

When working with other aspects of a drawing, you may want to turn off image fills. This enables objects containing image fills to redraw faster when being moved or resized, for example. The Show Image Fills command on the View menu lets you show or hide image fills in a drawing. For more information on setting view options, see View Options.


To fill an object with an image pattern

To create a custom image fill using the Clipboard

To create a custom image fill using drag and drop


Creating Custom Image Fills


To fill an object with an image pattern

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Image. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Image Interior Fill [image] to display the image fill panel, if necessary.

4	Choose a image category using the list box at the top of the tab.

5	Click the image fill that you want.

6	To change the image scale, type the desired value in the Scale spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Click Apply.

Tips

As a shortcut, double-click an image pattern to apply it to the selection.

Plotters and many film recorders do not support bitmap patterns or opaque backgrounds.

You can also choose an image fill by clicking Image Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


Adding Image Patterns to Objects

Creating Custom Image Fills


Creating Custom Image Fills

Designer provides a broad range of predefined image patterns, but you are not limited to these patterns. You can add any bitmap image to Designer's gallery of images and fill an object with that pattern.

You can remove any bitmap image in any image category.


To create a custom image fill using the Clipboard

To create a custom image fill using drag and drop


Adding Image Patterns to Objects


To create a custom image fill using the Clipboard

1	After creating the bitmap image, copy it to the Clipboard. You can create the bitmap image in Designer, Picture Publisher, or any bitmap editor.

2	Switch to Designer, if necessary.

3	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Image. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

4	Click Image Interior Fill [image] to display the image fill panel, if necessary.

5	Click Paste. The bitmap image appears in the preview box.

6	Choose an image category using the list box at the top of the tab.

7	Click Add. The bitmap image is added to the gallery in the specified category.

Tips

If necessary, the contents of the Clipboard are converted to a bitmap image before being pasted into the gallery.

To create a new category for a custom fill, click Category Options [image], and choose New. Then type a new category name and press ENTER.

To remove an image from the gallery, click the image, and then click Remove.


Creating Custom Image Fills

Adding Image Patterns to Objects


To create a custom image fill using drag and drop

1	Select the bitmap image you want to add to the gallery.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Image. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Image Interior Fill [image] to display the image fill panel, if necessary.

4	Choose an image category using the list box at the top of the tab.

5	Point to the selected bitmap image and hold down the left mouse button.

6	Drag the image onto the gallery and release the mouse button. The image is copied to the gallery.

or

Drag the image onto the preview box and release the mouse button. The image is copied to the preview box. After scaling the image (if you want), click Add to add it to the gallery.

Tips

To create a new category for a custom fill, click Category Options [image], and choose New. Then type a new category name and press ENTER.

To copy an image from the gallery to a Designer page, drag it from the gallery onto the page.

To remove an image from the gallery, click the image, and then click Remove.


Filling an Object with Other Objects

You can fill an object with a pattern made of other objects.

You can choose from a broad range of predefined object fills or define a custom object fill. You can also edit an object fill, changing how the objects in the fill are arranged, flipped, rotated, sized, and colored. Custom and edited object fills can be added to the object fill gallery.

If an object is already selected, choosing an object fill applies the fill to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing an object fill sets the default fill.

Making Object Fills Draw Faster

When working with other aspects of a drawing, you may want to turn off object fills. This enables objects containing object fills to redraw faster when being moved or resized, for example. The Show Object Fills command on the View menu lets you show or hide object fills in a drawing. For more information on setting view options, see View Options.


To fill an object with other objects

To create a custom object fill using the Clipboard

To create a custom object fill using drag and drop


Creating Custom Object Fills

Editing Object Fills

Arranging, Flipping, and Rotating Object Fills

Scaling and Positioning Object Fills

Changing the Color of Object Fills


To fill an object with other objects

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Object. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Object Interior Fill [image] to display the object fill panel, if necessary.

4	Choose an object category using the list box at the top of the tab.

5	Click the object fill that you want.

6	Click Apply.

Tips

As a shortcut, double-click an object fill to apply it to the selection.

To see the effect of the new object fill on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also choose an object fill by clicking Object Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.

If the object fill is all one color (monochrome), you can change the foreground and background colors after applying the fill to an object. To choose another foreground color, select the object, and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another background color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


Filling an Object with Other Objects

Creating Custom Object Fills


Creating Custom Object Fills

Designer provides a broad range of predefined object fills, but you are not limited to these objects. You can add any object to Designer's gallery of object fills and fill an object with a pattern of that object. You can even add objects containing image fills to the object fill gallery.

You can remove any object fill in any category.


To create a custom object fill using the Clipboard

To create a custom object fill using drag and drop


Filling an Object with Other Objects

Editing Object Fills

Arranging, Flipping, and Rotating Object Fills

Scaling and Positioning Object Fills

Changing the Color of Object Fills


To create a custom object fill using the Clipboard

1	Draw the object to be added to the gallery and select it. (You can also select a group of objects.)

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy to copy the object to the Clipboard.

3	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Object, The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

4	Click Object Interior Fill [image] to display the object fill panel, if necessary.

5	Click Paste. The object appears in the preview box.

6	Choose an object category using the list box at the top of the tab.

7	Click Add. The object is added to the gallery in the specified category.

Tips

You can add objects containing image fills to the object fill gallery.

To create a new category for a custom fill, click Category Options [image], and choose New. Then type a new category name and press ENTER.

To remove an object fill from the gallery, click the object fill, and then click Remove.


Creating Custom Object Fills

Filling an Object with Other Objects


To create a custom object fill using drag and drop

1	Select the object (or object group) you want to add to the gallery. You can add any Designer object to the object gallery.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Object, The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Object Interior Fill [image] to display the object fill panel, if necessary.

4	Choose an object category using the list box at the top of the tab.

5	Point to the object and hold down the left mouse button.

6	Drag the object onto the gallery and release the mouse button. The object is copied to the gallery.

or

Drag the object onto the preview box and release the mouse button. The object is copied to the preview box. After editing the object fill (if you want), click Add to add it to the gallery.

Tips

You can add objects containing image fills to the object fill gallery.

To create a new category for a custom fill, click Category Options [image], and choose New. Then type a new category name and press ENTER.

To copy a object from the gallery to a Designer page, drag it from the gallery onto the page.

To remove an object fill from the gallery, click the object fill, and then click Remove.


Editing Object Fills

An object fill is a pattern created by the repetition of an object. By editing an object fill, you can control how the object in the fill draws and is arranged.

Object fill editing lets you change the following:

The arrangement of the objects in the fill

The flip of the objects In the fill

The rotation of the objects in the fill

The scaling and positioning of the objects in the fill

The foreground and background colors of the objects in the fill

When you finish editing an object fill, you can add the fill to the gallery as a new object fill, or simply apply the edited object fill to a selection.

Previewing Editing Changes while Editing

The editing preview on the Edit Object Fill dialog box lets you see the effects of your changes. You can the zoom in and zoom out the preview to view the effects at the perspective you want.

The zoom ratio is displayed above the preview. A ratio of 1:1 is actual size (100%), a ratio of 2:1 is twice the actual size (200%), and so forth.


To edit an object fill


Arranging, Flipping, and Rotating Object Fills

Scaling and Positioning Object Fills

Changing the Color of Object Fills


To edit an object fill

1	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Object. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

2	Click Object Interior Fill [image] to display the object fill panel, if necessary.

3	Choose an object category using the list box at the top of the tab.

4	Click the object fill that you want to edit.

5	Click Edit. The Edit Object Fill dialog box opens.

6	Make your edits (arrangement, flip, rotate, and so forth) watching the preview to see the effects of your changes.

7	Click OK to close the Edit Object Fill dialog box.

8	Click Add to add the edited object fill to the gallery (you may want to change the category first).

or

Click Apply to apply the edited object fill to a selection.

Tip

If you want to edit a fill object using all of Designer's features, drag the object fill from the gallery onto a Designer page. After editing the object, you can copy it back to the gallery by dragging it from the page onto the gallery.


Editing Object Fills

Arranging, Flipping, and Rotating Object Fills

Scaling and Positioning Object Fills

Changing the Color of Object Fills

Filling an Object with Other Objects


Arranging Flipping and Rotating Object Fills
Arranging, Flipping, and Rotating Object Fills

You can control the arrangement, flip, and rotation of the objects in an object fill.

Arranging Objects in an Object Fill

The Arrangement options on the Edit Object Fill dialog box determine how the objects in an object fill are arranged.

Tile by Row [image] Select this option if you want the object repeated in a row pattern.

Tile by Column [image] Select this option if you want the object repeated in a column pattern.

Centered [image] Select this option if you want a single, centered occurrence of the object.

You must select a Flip option or change the value for Stagger % to see a difference between Tile by Row and Tile by Column.

Flipping Objects in an Object Fill

The Flip options on the Edit Object Fill dialog box determine whether and how the objects in an object fill are flipped.

None [image] Select this option if you do not want any of the objects flipped.

All [image] Select this option if you want all of the objects in the fill flipped.

Every Other [image] Select this option if you want every other object in the fill flipped.

Row or Column [image] Select this option if you want every other row or column flipped, depending upon your arrangement selection. (if the objects are arranged by row, every other row is flipped. If the objects are arranged by column, every other column is flipped.)

About X Axis [image] Select this check box if you want the flip to occur about the X axis.

About Y Axis [image] Select this check box if you want the flip to occur about the Y axis.

No flipping occurs until you select one or both of the axis check boxes.

Rotating Objects in an Object Fill

The Rotation options on the Edit Object Fill dialog box determine whether and how the objects in an object fill are rotated.

Pattern [image] Select this option if you want the entire object fill rotated.

Object [image] Select this option if you want the objects in the object fill rotated.

Angle [image] Adjust this control, or drag the red needle in the dial control, to specify the degree of rotation. Set the Angle value to zero for no rotation.


Editing Object Fills

Scaling and Positioning Object Fills

Changing the Color of Object Fills


Scaling and Positioning Object Fills

You can change the size and positioning of the objects in an object fill using the Position controls on the Edit Object Fill dialog box.

To change the size of the objects, adjust the value of Width % and Height %. The default values are 100%, which is the original size. Changing both of these values to 50% makes the object half the original size; changing the values to 200% makes the object twice the original size. To scale the object proportionally, change Width % and Height % the same amount.

To change the spacing of the objects, adjust the values for X Spacing % (height) and Y Spacing % (width). Entering a negative value causes the objects to overlap; entering a positive value creates space between the objects. A value of zero makes the bounding boxes of the objects flush with one another.

You can pan the entire object fill pattern within the filled object by adjusting the values for X Shift % (height) and Y Shift % (width). These values let you control how the fill pattern looks at the edges of the filled object.

Adjusting the Stagger % lets you stagger the position of every other row or column, depending upon whether the objects are arranged by row or column. The default value is zero (no stagger).


Editing Object Fills

Arranging, Flipping, and Rotating Object Fills

Changing the Color of Object Fills


Changing the Color of Object Fills

You can change the color of the object in an object fill using the Fill Color and Line Color options on the Edit Object Fill dialog box.

To retain the original colors of the object in an object fill, select Original under both Fill Color and Line Color.

To change the fill or line colors of the object in an object fill, click the color button under Fill Color or Line Color and choose the color you want.

To change the background color of the object in an object fill, click the Background button and choose the color you want.

When you change the fill color of an object fill, all components of the fill are changed to that color. Unless there is some background showing, the result will be a solid fill. To get the effect that you want, drag the object fill from the gallery onto the page, change the color with smart colorization turned on, and then drag the object fill back into the gallery. For more information on smart colorization, see Smart Colorization.

Notes

If the background color is set to no fill, then the background button shows No Background.

The background color is visible only if the object fill does not fill the entire fill area.


Editing Object Fills

Arranging, Flipping, and Rotating Object Fills

Scaling and Positioning Object Fills


Filling Several Objects with a Continuous Fill

You can create a continuous fill across several objects that do not touch. All types of fills can span objects, but gradients, object fills, and masked objects are the most interesting.

Not Connected	Connected
When you combine objects with Connect Closed, the objects fill with the current color and pattern. If you fill a set of connected objects with a gradient, object fill, or masked object, the fill spans the set of connected objects, even if the component objects of the overall connected object do not touch. The example above shows connected objects filled with a single diagonal gradient.

For more information on connecting objects, see Connect Closed. For more information on creating masks, see Creating a Mask.


Selecting a Solid Color Fill

Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects

Adding Image Patterns to Objects

Filling an Object with Other Objects

Connect Closed

Creating a Mask


Setting Fill Overlap

An overlap area is a bounded part of a closed object that overlaps another part of the object. You can create overlap areas by drawing or reshaping objects, or by connecting objects that overlap.

The Fill/Skip Overlaps button on the Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box lets you choose whether overlap areas in an object are filled or skipped. Click the button to switch between the two settings.

 chooses to fill overlap areas.

 chooses to skip overlap areas.

In the examples below, a megagon is drawn so that its points overlap other parts of the megagon.

Fill Overlaps	Skip Overlaps
In the examples below, two separately drawn objects have been connected, creating a single object with an overlapping area.

Fill Overlaps	Skip Overlaps
For more information on connecting overlapping objects, see Connect Closed when Objects Overlap.


To fill or skip overlaps using the Object Format dialog box

To fill or skip overlaps using the Format ribbon

To choose the fill line method using the Object Format dialog box

To choose the fill line method using the Format ribbon

To turn fill transform on or off

To turn interior fill overprint on or off


Setting Fill Line

Setting Fill Transform

Setting Fill Overprint


To fill or skip overlaps using the Object Format dialog box

1	Select the object containing the overlap areas.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click one of the submenu commands. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Fill/Skip Overlaps to select the setting you want.

 chooses to fill overlap areas.

 chooses to skip overlap areas.

4	Click Apply to apply the overlap setting to the selection.

Tips

The Fill/Skip Overlaps button is unavailable when this option does not apply.

You can also choose the overlap setting using the Fill Overlap Options button on the Format ribbon.


Setting Fill Overlap

Setting Fill Line

Setting Fill Transform

Setting Fill Overprint


To fill or skip overlaps using the Format Ribbon

1	Select the object containing the overlap areas.

2	Click Format [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Fill Overlap Options [image]. The overlaps menu appears.

4	Click Fill Overlap to fill the overlaps.

or

Click Skip Overlaps to skip the overlaps.

Tips

The Fill Overlap Options button is unavailable when this option does not apply.

You can also choose the overlap setting using the Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box.


Setting Fill Line

The Fill Before/After button on the Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box lets you choose whether an object is filled before or after its lines are drawn. Click the button to switch between the two settings.

 chooses to fill an object before its lines are drawn.

 chooses to fill an object after its lines are drawn.

Fill Before	Fill After
The Fill Before/After option does not apply to hairlines. If an object has both hairlines and weighted lines, only the weighted lines are affected.


To choose the fill line method using the Object Format dialog box

To choose the fill line method using the Format ribbon

To fill or skip overlaps using the Object Format dialog box

To fill or skip overlaps using the Format ribbon

To turn fill transform on or off

To turn interior fill overprint on or off


Setting Fill Overlap

Setting Fill Transform

Setting Fill Overprint


To choose the fill line method using the Object Format dialog box

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click one of the submenu commands. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Fill Before/After to select the setting you want.

 chooses to fill an object before its lines are drawn.

 chooses to fill an object after its lines are drawn.

4	Click Apply to apply the fill line setting to the selection.

Tips

The Fill Before/After button is unavailable when this option does not apply.

You can also choose the line fill method using the Fill Line Options button on the Format ribbon.


Setting Fill LIne

Setting Fill Overlap

Setting Fill Transform

Setting Fill Overprint


To choose the fill line method using the Format ribbon

1	Select the object.

2	Click Format [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Fill Line Options [image]. The fill line menu appears.

4	Click Fill Before Line to fill an object before drawing its lines.

or

Click Fill After Line to fill an object after drawing its lines.

Tips

The Fill Line Options button is unavailable when this option does not apply.

You can also choose the line fill method using the Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box.


Setting Fill Transform

The Transform Fill with Object button on the Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box lets you choose whether transforming (resizing, rotating, skewing, or flipping) an object also transforms its fill. For example, with fill transform turned on, resizing an object with an image fill resizes the image fill; with fill transform turned off, resizing the object does not resize the image fill. Click the button to switch between the two settings.

 sets the fill to not transform when you transform the object.

 sets the fill to transform when you transform the object.

Original Object	Resized Object with Fill Transform Off	Resized Object with Fill Transform On
Note

On the Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box, this button sets whether an object's lines scale when you resize the object. For information on setting line scaling, see Setting Line Scaling.


To turn fill transform on or off

To fill or skip overlaps using the Object Format dialog box

To fill or skip overlaps using the Format ribbon

To choose the fill line method using the Object Format dialog box

To choose the fill line method using the Format ribbon

To turn interior fill overprint on or off


Setting Fill Overlap

Setting Fill Line

Setting Fill Overprint


To turn fill transform on or off

1	Select the object containing the hatch, image, or object fill.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Hatch, Image, or Object. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click the Transform Fill with Object button to choose the transform method you want.

 turns off fill transform.

 turns on fill transform.

Tip

The Transform Fill with Object button is unavailable when this option does not apply.


Setting Fill Transform

Setting Fill Overlap

Setting Fill LIne

Setting Fill Overprint


Setting Fill Overprint

The Overprint button on Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box lets you turn interior fill overprinting on or off for a selected object. Click the button to switch between the two settings.

 turns fill overprint off for the object's interior fill.

 turns fill overprint on for the object's interior fill.

Note

On the Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box, this button sets line (stroke) overprinting. For information on setting line overprint, see Setting Line Overprint.


To turn interior fill overprint on or off

To fill or skip overlaps using the Object Format dialog box

To fill or skip overlaps using the Format ribbon

To choose the fill line method using the Object Format dialog box

To choose the fill line method using the Format ribbon

To turn fill transform on or off


Setting Fill Overlap

Setting Fill Line

Setting Fill Transform


To turn interior fill overprint on or off

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click one of the submenu commands. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click the Overprint button to choose the overprint setting you want.

 turns off overprinting.

 turns on overprinting.

Note

Overprinting affects only how color separations are made. Therefore, turning on overprint does not affect the appearance of an object on the screen or on a standard printout.

Tip

You can also turn interior fill overprint on and off using the Overprint Fill command on the Object menu.


Setting Fill Overprint

Setting Fill Overlap

Setting Fill Line

Setting Fill Transform


You do not need to close the dialog box to apply the changes.


GETHELP.DOC

Status: Done (GPF problem)

Index:  Done


Getting Assistance as You Work

If You Are New to Micrografx Designer

Open the View menu, click Toolbars, and make sure that the Show ToolTips option is checked and the Hints toolbar is turned on.

ToolTips, displayed near the mouse pointer when you pause on a tool or button, help you relate the tool's image to its name.

The Hint toolbar gives a brief description of the tool, button, or menu item you are pointing to. The Hint toolbar also displays "Action Hints" as you draw and edit objects. Action Hints guide you step-by-step through Designer procedures.

If you are not sure what your options are while editing an object, click the right mouse button. A shortcut menu appears containing commands that are available for the current object.

When You Want More Detailed Information

To see more information about a tool or button, point to it and press the Help key (F1). A popup message tells you how to use the tool or button. To close the message, click inside it or press the ESC key.

For quick information about a menu item, press the Help key (F1) while the item is highlighted. A popup message gives you assistance. To close the message, click inside it or press the ESC key.

When You Are Using a Dialog Box

Click the "?" button on the title bar of the dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. To close the message, click inside it or press the ESC key.

When a dialog box is active, pressing F1 displays help about the dialog box item that has the focus. To ensure that a specific item has the focus, use the Tab key.

If a dialog box doesn't have the "?" button, look for a Help button, or try pressing F1.

When You Are Viewing Designer's Help Windows

The large Designer 7 Help window (you're looking at it) contains two "browse" buttons ( [image] and [image]). Click those buttons to page backward or forward through a set of closely related topics. (If you prefer using the keyboard, press the < and > keys.)

The Designer Steps window appears on the right side of the screen. It displays numbered steps for a specific procedure. This window stays in front of other windows so you can perform each step without Designer's window covering up the remaining steps.

Tips

To copy the text from a Help window to the Clipboard, drag across the text, and then press CTRL+C.

To close any active Help window, press the ESC key.


Resolving Problems with Specific Printers

Gradient and Hatch Export Problems

Font Mapping

Updating Embedded Objects in PageMaker 5

Printing Embedded or Linked Objects in WordPerfect for Windows 5.2

3D Objects from Designer 4.0 Documents

Underlines Disappearing

Object Coordinates Dialog Box Will Not Open


Frequently Asked Questions

General  Bitmaps  Clip Art  Clipboard  Designer 3.1  Designer 4.0  Display  Import/Export  Objects  OLE  PageMaker  Palettes  Printing  Text

General

 Why does Designer 7 leave the file G3.DAT in my Windows temp directory?

 How do I set new defaults for my objects?

 I can't find the icon. How can I run the program?

 Why do I get an error message when I start Designer under Windows NT?

 Why does Designer stop responding when I switch to it from Office Binder after setting up the page for a Designer drawing?

 How can I select multiple documents to print?

 During reshaping, angle information in the status bar does not appear to be correct.

 I'd like to know more about PostScript, EPS, and AI.

 I want to know more about reducing points.

 Clicking the up arrow in the Vertical movement box of the Move tab of the Transform dialog box moves the object down.

 My mouse is unsteady. How can I move an object just a little?

 The Layer dialog box appears to change the wrong layer.

 When I transfer objects to Picture Publisher, I lose the foreground and background colors.

 Printer fonts are not WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get).

 Why is the estimated file size for a standalone slideshow so large?

Bitmaps

 Bitmaps or bitmap fills do not export properly to the Adobe Illustrator (AI) format.

 Exporting a bitmap-filled object results in a solid fill.

 Why do transparent bitmaps placed into PageMaker from Designer display incorrectly in Normal Graphics mode?

 Why don't bitmaps retain their original size when importing or exporting?

 Why do CGM files exported from Designer import into some other applications at a different size?

 Why do color bitmaps sometimes print incorrectly to PostScript?

 Bitmaps printed to the HP 550C printer do not print correctly.

 Bitmaps printed to the HP DeskJet printer repeat the image or are rotated incorrectly.

 Some objects filled with bitmap images are not clipping correctly when printed.

 When I transfer objects to Picture Publisher, I lose the foreground and background colors.

 Why are bitmaps not the same size in CorelDRAW as they were in Designer?

Clip Art

 Why don't thumbnails display in the Media Manager after performing a search?

 Why does the Reset Transform command move inserted clip art to the page origin?

Clipboard

 Sometimes I cannot ungroup objects pasted from the Clipboard.

Designer 3.1

 How do I add a point quickly while reshaping?

 Importing a Designer 3.1 PAL file results in multiple palettes being created.

 Why do text sizes differ in Designer 3.1 and Designer 7?

 After Connecting objects, both Disconnect and Ungroup are available.

 My printed bitmaps look worse than when I printed them using Designer 3.1.

 My text exports to DRW as individual lines.

 Why do weighted (non-hairline) lines export to DRW as polygons?

 My DRW files containing dashed lines with opaque backgrounds lose their opaque background when opened in Designer 7.

Designer 4.0

 Some Designer 4.0 drawings that have container text display differently in Designer 7.

 Why does the position of text along a curve change from Designer 4.0 to Designer 7?

 How can I merge a multi-page Designer 3.1 file into Designer 7?

Display

 Printer fonts are not WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get).

 My text displays incorrectly with my printer, an HP4.

 What is Direct X rendering and how can I turn it off?

Import/Export

 What happened to the tab settings in the RTF file I imported?

 Why do I get an error when I try to import certain WPG files?

 Why do my fonts change when I export to Adobe Illustrator (AI) format?

 I'd like to know more about PostScript, EPS, and AI.

 Why does importing an EPS file result in a gray box?

 I have an EPS file that I cannot import. What can I do?

 I cannot select any objects from a file that I imported. What's wrong?

 Bitmaps or bitmap-fills do not export properly to the Adobe Illustrator (AI) format.

 Why do weighted (non-hairline) lines export to DRW as polygons?

 My text exports to DRW as individual lines.

 Exporting a bitmap-filled object results in a solid fill.

 When I print to a Level 1 PostScript printer, a piece of one corner of a rectangle is missing.

 Polylines export with too many points.

 What is the limit on the size of a text file I can import?

 Why don't bitmaps retain their original size when importing or exporting?

 Why do CGM files exported from Designer import into some other applications at a different size?

 Why do color bitmaps sometimes print incorrectly to PostScript?

 Why do hairlines exported as HPGL appear to be thicker?

 Why are bitmaps not the same size in CorelDRAW as they were in Designer?

 Why do some images import at full-page size?

OLE

 Some OLE objects do not print to PostScript devices.

 I want to link a Designer object into Designer. Can I do this?

PageMaker

 Why are objects I've placed in PageMaker 5.0 cut off when printing to PostScript?

 Why do transparent bitmaps placed into PageMaker from Designer display incorrectly in Normal Graphics mode?

Palettes

 Importing a Designer 3.1 PAL file results in multiple palettes being created.

 How do I delete a palette when the Delete option is not available?

Printing

 I'd like to know more about PostScript, EPS, and AI.

 How can I select multiple documents to print?

 Should blank pages in my document print?

 Why are objects I've placed in PageMaker 5.0 cut off when printing to PostScript?

 Some OLE objects do not print to PostScript devices.

 When I print to a Level 1 PostScript printer, a piece of one corner of a rectangle is missing.

 Printing to an AutoGrafix device, there is a white line at the top of the 35 mm slide.

 Why do color bitmaps sometimes print incorrectly to PostScript?

 Bitmaps printed to the HP 550C printer do not print correctly.

 Bitmaps printed to the HP DeskJet printer repeat the image or are rotated incorrectly.

 When I print to the HP DeskJet, I get extra copies.

 When I print to HPPCL or HPPJ printers, sometimes bits of text appear through opaque objects.

 My path text does not print correctly to my printer, an HP LaserJet.

 My text displays incorrectly with my printer, an HP4.

 Gradient fills print incorrectly on my HP4si printer.

 Printer fonts are not WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get).

 Why does my color text print as black on my PCL printer?

 Why do gray hairlines print as black on my PCL printer?

 My printed bitmaps look worse than when I printed them using Designer 3.1.

 My Bitstream facelift fonts are not displaying or printing correctly.

 Some objects filled with bitmap images are not clipping correctly when printed.

 Why do hairlines exported as HPGL appear to be thicker?

 How do I get vector clipping in an HPGL file with no option in the export setup to do so?

 Why does it take so long to print a drawing containing blended objects with gradient fills on my PCL printer?

 Why do some objects containing gradient fills print slowly, or not print at all, on my GDI printer?

 Why does printing to my Roland Camm-1 plotter produce no output?

Objects

 How do I set new defaults for my objects?

 I want to know more about reducing points.

 During reshaping, angle information in the status bar does not appear to be correct.

 Why does the Reset Transform command move inserted clip art to the page origin?

 How is the number of points in the Reduce Points dialog box determined?

 Why does rotating a dimension line make the length smaller?

 Object fill sizing is inconsistent when applied to freeform text.

 After Connecting objects, both Disconnect and Ungroup are available.

 When I put text on a path, I lose my small capital letters, superscript, and subscript.

 When I transfer objects to Picture Publisher, I lose the foreground and background colors.

 When proportionally scaling, objects don't always snap to guides.

 Why do hairlines exported as HPGL appear to be thicker?

 Why can't I select object-filled objects using the Select Object dialog box in a file I have saved and reloaded?

 Why does converting a metafile to curves sometimes change the size?

 Clicking the up arrow in the Vertical movement box of the Move tab of the Transform dialog box moves the object down.

 My mouse is unsteady. How can I move an object just a little?

 How do I add a point quickly while reshaping?

 How can I move the pivot point and make it stay?

 How can I reset the pivot point to the default after I move it?

 How can I resize a hatch-filled object without affecting the fill?

 How can I get text to wrap on all four sides of a rectangle?

 How can I space text evenly along a path?

 Should aligning objects as group in the Align dialog box automatically group the objects?

 Sometimes I cannot ungroup objects pasted from the Clipboard.

 My DRW files containing dashed lines with opaque backgrounds lose their opaque background when opened in Designer 7.

 Why does Designer stop responding when I paste an object into a drawing as a Windows metafile and then convert it to curves?

Text

 What happened to the tab settings in the RTF file I imported?

 Why are my tab stops being ignored when I press the Tab key?

 Why do my fonts change when I export to Adobe Illustrator (AI) format?

 How can I get text to wrap on all four sides of a rectangle?

 How can I space text evenly along a path?

 Why do text sizes differ in Designer 3.1 and Designer 7?

 Some Designer 4.0 drawings that have container text display differently in Designer 7.

 Why does the position of text along a curve change from Designer 4.0 to Designer 7?

 Why does slanting underline text cause the underline to go away?

 What is the limit on the size of a text file I can import?

 When I put text on a path, I lose my small capital letters, superscript, and subscript.

 The Split Text command causes non-visible text in the container to be lost.

 When I flow text between containers, sometimes the text overwrites itself.

 Object fill sizing is inconsistent when applied to freeform text.

 When I print to HPPCL or HPPJ printers, sometimes bits of text appear through opaque objects.

 My Bitstream facelift fonts are not displaying or printing correctly.

 My path text does not print correctly to my printer, an HP LaserJet.

 My text displays incorrectly with my printer, an HP4.

 My text exports to DRW as individual lines.

 Should joining text change the size of the font?

 I reshaped my text and the "holes'" disappeared. How do I get them back?

 When I fit text to a path, it doesn't always exactly center the text.

 Can you change or delete redefined custom units?


Getting Assistance as You Work


How do I set defaults for new objects? For example, what if I want all my fill colors to be red and all my lines to be blue.

To set new defaults, first make sure nothing is selected (click away from all objects). Then set the defaults you want (fill color, line color, line style, line width, and so forth). The new defaults remain in effect until you change them. To change an individual object, select it, and then set its attributes.


Why do weighted (non-hairline) lines export to DRW as polygons?

Exporting objects that have weighted (non-hairline) lines to the "DRW -- Micrografx Drawing (mgx)" filter result in the lines being converted to polygons. Exporting to the "DRW -- Micrografx Drawing" filter correctly retains the weighted lines.


Why does importing an EPS file into Designer 7 result in a gray box?

EPS files contain PostScript data, which is not translatable by applications. EPS files may contain an optional TIFF or WMF header that can be used to view the content of the EPS file. Designer displays a gray box in place of the preview data when importing an EPS file that does not contain a preview image. If the EPS file contains a TIFF or WMF preview, then Designer displays that preview when the EPS file is imported. Designer imports and translates the Adobe Illustrator format of EPS so you can edit it in Designer. For more information, see the description of EPS and PostScript.


Bitmaps or bitmap fills do not export properly to the Adobe Illustrator (AI) format.

The "AI -- Adobe Illustrator (mgx)" filter does not support exporting bitmaps or bitmap-filled objects, including bitmaps that are used to represent hatched fills. Depending on the option selected in the Setup dialog box, bitmaps will be exported in one of three possible solid colors: the foreground color of the bitmap, the background color of the bitmap, or a blend of the foreground and background colors of the bitmap to create a new color.


Exporting a bitmap filled object results in a gray fill.
Exporting a bitmap-filled object results in a solid fill.

Many formats do not support, or do not support well, clipping of bitmap-filled objects. Designer must clip the image and reduce the clipped bitmap to a series of scan lines that represent the bitmap fill in order to reproduce the object as it appears in Designer. This process results in exported files that may be large and take a long time to process. Designer will substitute a solid fill for clipped bitmap fills in these situations.

An override exists if you want to let Designer generate the clipped bitmap fill as a series of scan lines. On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name ClipImageFill to the Translation key, and give it a numeric value of 1 to generate the scan-line fill. This process may take a long time and result in a large output file.


Registry Settings

Designer Registry Keys and Values


Printing to an AutoGrafix device, there is a white line at the top of the 35 mm slide.
When I print to an AutoGrafix device, there is a white line at the top of the 35 mm slide.

When printing to 35 mm slides, choose a page size of Use Printable rather than 35 mm in the Page Setup dialog box. Also, choose Center on Page in the Print Document dialog box.


Printing to a Level 1 PostScript printer, a piece of one corner of a rectangle is missing.
When I print to a Level 1 PostScript printer, a piece of one corner of a rectangle is missing.

This happens when you create an EPS file in Designer and put the EPS image into certain programs. To fix it, on the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name EnablePSAdapt to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 0. Then set the options of the printer driver to EPS. Print. Print to EPS and use the new file.


During reshape mode, angle information displayed in Designer's status bar does not appear to be correct.
During reshaping, angle information displayed in Designer's status bar does not appear to be correct.

Designer reports the current mouse position and the change of angle (relative to the original position). When reshaping, the status bar shows you how far you have moved the selected points and in what direction.


Bitmaps printed to the HP 550C printer are extremely dark and oversaturated, or do not print correctly.

Update to the latest version of the HP 550C driver.


Bitmaps printed to the HP DeskJet printer repeat the image or are rotated incorrectly.

Update to the latest version of the HP DeskJet driver.


I'd like to know more about PostScript, EPS, and AI.

What is PostScript? What is EPS and why do there seem to be so many variations? Why can my application edit some EPS files and not others? What's the difference between AI and EPS files? How does Designer work with EPS files?

These are just a few of the questions people ask when confronted with distinguishing between PostScript, AI, and EPS. The following descriptions help to explain the differences and how to decide which format is appropriate for which use.

PostScript

PostScript is a high level, device independent programming language that is used to describe the appearance of text, graphical shapes, and images on displayed or printed pages. Printing or displaying PostScript involves the use of a PostScript interpreter written for a specific output device. The interpreter executes the commands in the PostScript language and converts them to the low level operations understood by the device.

In Windows, a PostScript print stream can be generated by an application printing to a PostScript device driver. Either the application or the device driver may generate its own specialized definition of the output pages using PostScript commands. The PostScript commands, along with printer-specific information, make up the print stream. A PostScript print stream that is saved to a file is a PostScript file and typically has a PS file extension. A PostScript file is intended for output to a specific device and, as such, is not editable or suitable for use as a file transfer format.

PostScript File Support in Designer

Set the Target Printer to a PostScript device and print to a file. Designer uses its own internal PostScript Adaptation Layer to generate the PostScript, which may be disabled to allow the device driver to generate the PostScript.

Designer does not read or import a PostScript print file.

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a file containing PostScript commands that describe a single page. An EPS file does not contain printer-specific information. The typical purpose of an EPS file is to be included, or encapsulated, into another PostScript page description. Applications import the EPS data into a document, which is then output (the original document plus the included EPS data) to a PostScript device. EPS files are not editable after they are imported into a document. Applications may manipulate the whole EPS data, to some extent, including modifying the size, position, and rotation of the EPS data, but they cannot modify the EPS data directly.

Since the application cannot edit the EPS data, the format of the EPS file allows for the inclusion of a preview image that an application may use to display the representation of the EPS data. This preview image is usually either a Windows Metafile (WMF) or a TIFF bitmap. Applications that do not support Windows Metafile or TIFF images usually display a place holder that assists in the placement and manipulation of the EPS data.

In addition to being used to display the representation of the EPS data, the preview may also be used when a document is printed to a device that does not support PostScript. An application that creates a document containing EPS data and then prints the document to a PostScript device passes the EPS data to the PostScript device for printing. If the application prints the document to a device that does not support PostScript, it must print the preview instead. A TIFF or Windows Metafile preview will give a more accurate presentation than a place holder, although it is usually inferior to the results generated by the EPS data to a PostScript device.

Some PostScript device drivers let you create an EPS file of a PostScript print job. The PostScript driver supplied with Windows 95 has this feature. When the option is selected and an application prints to the driver, you are prompted for the file name to be used to create the EPS file.

EPS Support in Designer

Designer supports four types of EPS export. Select the desired type in the Export dialog box.

"EPS - Encapsulated PostScript, No Header or Preview" generates a minimum EPS file.

"EPS - Encapsulated PostScript, No Preview" generates an EPS file with a header but no preview.

"EPS - Encapsulated PostScript, TIFF Preview" generates an EPS file with a TIFF preview.

"EPS - Encapsulated PostScript, WMF Preview" generates an EPS file with a WMF preview.

Designer does not fully support importing EPS files. The preview data is imported, but the EPS data is ignored. Importing an EPS file that does not have a preview displays a gray-filled rectangle of the same size as the EPS data. Importing an EPS file with a TIFF or WMF header displays only the preview data. Select the "EPS - Adobe Illustrator EPS" filter in the Import dialog box to import an EPS file.

Adobe Illustrator

An Adobe Illustrator file (AI) is an EPS file that conforms to the language restrictions defined and published by Adobe for use as a file data transfer format. It is the native file format for Adobe Illustrator and has an AI file extension. Unlike other PostScript files that require device interpreters, the AI file does not contain custom extensions: It is a defined set of operators that can be translated into other page and graphical primitives. Applications can read and write the file format just like any other file data transfer format. Like other file formats, different release versions exist. Applications must ensure that they are compatible with the format version specified in the file.

Since it is an EPS file, an AI file also may contain the preview header. Applications that do not choose to support the AI file format primitives directly may elect to import the preview instead. Applications that do support the AI file format can edit the data that is contained in the file after it is imported.

AI files are sometimes called Adobe Illustrator EPS files, or AI/EPS files, and have an EPS extension. Most clip art packages that offer EPS files are AI files with TIFF previews and have the EPS extension. Applications can import and edit these EPS files, unlike other EPS files, because they conform to the AI language restrictions and can be parsed and translated. EPS files that do not conform to the AI language restrictions are not AI files and cannot be edited, only incorporated into a document.

AI Support in Designer

Designer supports importing and exporting the AI file format. Imported AI files are translated and the EPS data can be edited in Designer.

When importing files with the AI extension, select the "Adobe Illustrator AI" filter only if you need to edit the image. If you don’t need to edit the image, specify the "Adobe Illustrator EPS" filter. This gives you the highest compatibility with service bureaus that print PostScript documents.

When importing files with the EPS extension that you know are AI files, select the "Adobe Illustrator EPS" filter.

When exporting to an EPS file that will be printed by a service bureau, use one of the “Encapsulated PostScript” filters rather than the “Adobe Illustrator AI” or ”Adobe Illustrator EPS” filter.

Darkening or lightening printed RGB bitmaps

When you print to an EPS file from Designer, you can darken or lighten RGB bitmaps in the document by setting a key value in your registry.

To set the value from within Designer, on the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name EnableCMYKBlackOpt to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 0 or 1.

For lighter RGB bitmaps, set the value to 0.

For darker RGB bitmaps, set the value to 1.


Why does slanting underline text cause the underline to go away?

Some effects applied to text, such as slanting or warping, are too complicated to be rendered by Windows or ATM. Designer converts the text to curves before displaying it, causing the underline to be lost. Since Windows can only render TrueType and Type 1 fonts as solid single color, text that has an edge color different from the fill color and text that has a complex fill also are converted to curves.


Why is the estimated file size for a standalone slideshow so large?

The value shown is the uncompressed size and should be considered the maximum size required. The actual size will vary based on the content of the slides.


Why does the Reset Transform command move inserted clip art to the page origin?

The Reset Transform command removes all transformations applied to an object since its original defined location. When inserted, clip art is defined to be at the page origin and is translated to the location where you place it.


The Split Text command causes non-visible text in the container to be lost.

The Split Text command is intended to make generating individual text labels easy. In order to convert all text lines to labels, first resize the text container so that all text is visible.


How are the number of points in the Reduce Points dialog box determined?
How is the number of points in the Reduce Points dialog box determined?

In the Reduce Points dialog box, the number of points that may be removed from an object is based on a tolerance that varies based on the size of the object. For example, start with two identical objects and reduce the size of one of those objects. The number of points that can be removed from the reduced object is larger than that other object because the distance or tolerance between the points in the reduced object is smaller.


When I flow text between containers, sometimes the text overwrites itself.

The shape is only used as a template to create a text container. The text container and the shape are two different objects. To see this, draw two rectangles and select the first one as a container for text. Enter text until the text overflows, then press F2 to select everything. Notice that three items are selected; two rectangles and one text block. The rectangle is still a separate block so that when you reflow text it is again used as a template for the next block, drawing right in front of the first one.


Why does rotating a dimension line make the length smaller?

This is correct behavior for a dimensioning object. When you transform (move, scale, rotate, skew, and so forth) a dimensioning object, you are only transforming the points about which the dimensioning object is defined. Consequently, when you rotate the horizontal dimension line, you are, in effect, rotating the imaginary line measured. As you rotate this line, its horizontal component changes.


Can you change or delete redefined custom units?

Designer has a set of redefined custom unit that it places in every file it creates. These custom units can be changed and even deleted from both the file and Designer's profile. New files will, however, always contain the original custom units.


Importing a Designer 3.1 PAL file results in multiple palettes being created.

A Designer 3.1 palette file (PAL) can contain multiple palette definitions and is imported into separate Designer 7 palettes so you do not lose any of the colors in the original palette.


Object fill sizing is inconsistent when applied to freeform text.

To understand what is occurring it is necessary to look at how object fills work. Before displaying, an object fill is transformed using the same transform as the object being filled. This allows the object fill to maintain the same size relative to the filled object. For example, suppose you fill a square with the star object fill, and it takes only five stars to fill the square. If you resize the square, the object fill is also resized so that the same five stars fill the square. Filling freeform text with an object fill works exactly the same way. The difference is that the size of freeform text can be changed in two ways, one of which applies a transformation, and one that does not. Resizing the text by dragging one of its boundary handles causes a transformation to be applied to the text. In this case, the object fill is resized with the text object. Enlarging or reducing the font size using the font size spinner on the Text ribbon does not apply a transformation, so in that case the object fill does not change size. You can tell if a transformation has been applied to a selected object by looking for a T in a red box in the two-line status bar.


Printer fonts are not WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get).

Since a printer font may not have a close on-screen representation, all printer fonts are mapped to a single font for consistent on screen display. The default font used is Arial.

You can change the default by modifying an entry in your system registry. On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name DefaultFont to the Mgxgre key, and set its value to the name of the font you want to use (for example, Times New Roman).

Independent of the font selected for screen display, the text will print correctly if the target printer supports the fonts.


What is Direct X rendering and how can I turn it off?

Direct X is a technology supported by Microsoft and various vendors of graphics hardware which allows fast bitmap operations (among other things) on screen devices. If Direct X is installed on your system, Designer detects it and uses Direct X to display conical gradients.

If Direct X rendering is supported by your system or hardware, you can turn it off by modifying an entry in your system registry. On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, under Keys, click Mgxgre. Then select DisableDirectXRendering and set the value to 1. This disables all Direct X rendering by Designer. To enable Direct X rendering, set the value of this registry entry to zero.


Why do text sizes differ in Designer 3.1 and Designer 7?

The "dot" fonts used by earlier versions of Designer (such as Swiss) are no longer supported. TrueType and Type 1 equivalent fonts have been created for use in Designer 7. There are slight differences between Designer 3.1's rendering of dot fonts and that of Windows and ATM. To compensate for these differences, Designer uses a table located in the system registry. This table is used to slightly resize fonts when DRW files are read into Designer 7. All previous Designer file formats were tested and best fit values were created for use in converting Designer 3.x fonts to Type 1 and TrueType fonts.

To view or change the font adjustment values, click the Registry tab of the Options dialog box. Then click Mgx Font Adjust under Keys.


Some Designer 4.0 drawings that have container text display differently in Designer 7. What has changed?

In Designer 4.0, container text behaved differently from all other types of text when transformed (rotated, scaled, and so forth). The container was transformed and the text reflowed in the new container using the original point size. While this is a common implementation that is found in many page layout applications, many Designer users found this inconsistent and confusing. In Designer 7, all text types are transformed the same way. If text is flowed or entered into a transformed container, the text is also transformed. Note: If un-transformed text is desired, convert the container to curves to normalize the container's transformation before inserting text.


After Connecting closed two objects, both Disconnect and Ungroup are available in the Change menu. Are the objects grouped as
After Connecting closed two objects, both Disconnect and Ungroup are available in the Change menu.

Are the objects grouped as well as connected?

No. In Designer 3.1 the SHIFT+F5 shortcut chose the Break Apart menu command. This single command would both ungroup grouped objects and disconnect connected open or closed objects. This was added as a convenience for Designer 3.1 users.


When I print to HPPCL or HPPJ printers, sometimes bits of text appear through opaque objects. How can I get correct output?

For HPPCL printers select the Print TrueType as graphics option in the Options dialog box of the printer driver setup dialog box.


I want to link a Designer object into Designer. Can I do this?

No.


How can I merge a multi-page DS4 file into Designer 7?

Multi-page DS4 import is not supported. However, you can open both files and cut and paste objects from one file to another.


When I print to the HP DeskJet, I get extra copies.

Some printer drivers do not support the ExtDeviceMode command. If a driver does, and you requests multiple print copies, then Designer spools one copy and tells the driver to print multiple copies. If the driver does not support ExtDeviceMode, then Designer must print multiple copies itself, which takes longer.


When I put text on a path, I lose my small capital letters, superscript, and subscript.

Small caps, superscript, and subscript do not work with path text. They are changed to normal text.


My printed bitmaps look worse than when I printed them using Designer 3.1

You can use an entry in your system registry to fix the problem.

On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name UseGDIForBLTPrinting to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 1.

This setting causes the GDI to be used to dither printed images. The default value of 0 causes the internal bitmap code to do the dithering itself. GDI dithering produces the same results as Designer 3.1 bitmap printing. This setting only applies to bitmaps printed through GDI and does not affect either screen or Postscript output.

In Designer 4.0, bitmaps imported from Designer 3.1 could look quite bad on screen when running with a 256-color display. This was because bitmaps imported from DRW files came in as VBMs, one of Designer's bitmap formats. VBMs display poorly on palette-based 256-color devices. To remedy this problem, Designer now converts bitmaps coming from Designer 3.1 to Frames, another internal bitmap type.


My Bitstream facelift fonts are not displaying or printing correctly.

Bitstream Facelift is a font technology, like TrueType or ATM. While that technological difference may be irrelevant to some Windows applications, drawing programs such as Designer that manipulate fonts at a low level need to explicitly support the technology to work fully. Designer does not.

Facelift can be used in a limited way within Designer, though. On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name DontFilterDeviceFonts to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 1.

This setting causes Designer to bypass its usual checking of device fonts (and substitution of a default font, usually Arial) and select a font. With the option set to 1, Facelift fonts appear correctly on-screen and when printing. Any printer device fonts are mapped by Windows to a screen font, often an unattractive-when-resized bitmap one. It works pretty well if you set the option to 1 and stick to TrueType, ATM, and Facelift fonts.

The facelift fonts are still recognized as and treated like device fonts, though, so support for them is far from complete. Converting them to curves turns them into Arial. So does any implicit convert-to-curves, such as rendering with an edge or fill, some non-proportional resizing, and various other operations.

Another issue to worry about is Facelift's Printer Shell Drivers. To have the Facelift fonts available for a given printer, you set it up so that your normal printer drivers are replaced by SHELLPRT, Facelift's shell. The shell then passes printer commands to the actual driver. One side effect of this is that it defeats Designer's normal detection of whether a printer is Postscript. Therefore, Designer will not use its PostScript adaptation layer.


Some objects filled with bitmap images are not clipping correctly when printed.

This occurs when printing to the IBM/Lexmark WinWriter 600 using the Microsoft Windows Printing System. When an object containing an image is printed, the image prints beyond the object's borders. The Printer's driver appears to be reporting its capabilities incorrectly. Contact Lexmark for a fixed driver.


When I transfer objects from Designer to Picture Publisher using Copy and Paste, I lose the foreground and background colors.

The colors are not applied to the bitmap itself: They are saved as foreground and background attributes. The transition into Picture Publisher does take these attributes into account to some extent. If the foreground color is black, then the monochrome bitmap comes into Picture Publisher as black on white. If the foreground color is not black, then the monochrome bitmap comes into Picture Publisher inverted (white on black).


My path text does not print correctly to my printer, an HP LaserJet 4Si/4Si MX Driver - v.31.B1.40bs.
My path text does not print correctly to my printer, an HP LaserJet 4Si/4Si MX Driver.

The symptom is that some of the characters of a text-along-a-curve string are either too high or too low. Printing to Postscript, or using the "Print True Type as Graphics" driver option fixes it.


I want to know more about reducing points.

The algorithm works by specifying a tolerance with which to approximate the polyshape. When parts of the curve slip under that tolerance, then there will be fewer points in general, but sometimes lessening the tolerance actually adds a few points. The overall behavior is a reduction in points as the tolerance increases, but it is not a perfectly predictable or smooth process.


My text exports to DRW as individual lines.

A text block (container) exported to DRW -- or any other vector format -- exports as individual text lines, not as an entire text block.


My text displays incorrectly with my printer, an HP4.
Gradient fills print incorrectly on my HP4si printer.

Gradient fills can print incorrectly on the HP4si when you use the HP4si  PCL driver and a high resolution.

To solve the problem

Use the HP4si PostScript driver.

or

Switch to the HP3si PCL driver.


My text displays incorrectly with my printer, an HP4.

With the HP4 PCL driver set to 600 dpi, checking and unchecking the "Print TrueType as Graphics" option in the driver causes Designer to display text slightly misplaced. This effect is base on the text metrics returned from the printer driver and does not affect printing, only display.

Selecting the "Print TrueType as Graphics" option ensures that text displays and prints the same.

Note: The "Print TrueType as Graphics" option is in the printer driver's options dialog box and cannot be selected unless the "Graphics Mode" is set to "Raster."


When proportionally scaling, wide objects don't snap to horizontal guides and tall objects don't snap to vertical guides.

Proportional resize of tall objects only snaps to horizontal guides (the horizontal component of the object's size box is calculated based on the vertical size). Likewise, proportional resize of wide objects only snaps to vertical guides (the vertical component is calculated based on the horizontal size).


Polylines export with too many points.

You can change this behavior with an entry in your system registry.

The entry sets an abstract tolerance factor that removes excess points from a polyline based on the distance and colinearity between points. The default is 4. The larger the number, the more points are removed and the fewer points remain in the polyline.

On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name ExportPointReductionFactor to the Translation key, and give it a numeric value between 1 and 10.

Depending on the capabilities of the file format and/or filter, certain objects must be represented as polylines instead of Bezier curves. More points must be maintained for visual fidelity.


Why are the Designer objects that I've placed into PageMaker 5.0 getting cut off when printing to a PostScript device?

This problem only happens when you are using a full-page graphic. This is a known PageMaker 5.0 bug and occurs with any vector graphic imported into PageMaker, not just Designer's. The workaround suggested by Aldus Technical Support is:

1	Install a driver for a printer that is capable of printing at a resolution higher than 1500 dpi, such as the Linotronic 330 and connect it to the port to which your printer is connected.

2 	In the PageMaker Page Setup dialog box (File/Page Setup), choose this printer as the target printer and select a resolution higher than 1500 dpi.

3 	Print the page.

Limitations: This workaround limits the ability to choose different paper trays and other printer-specific options.

Another workaround is to use a PCL driver instead of PostScript if you are printing to an HP printer.


Why do transparent bitmaps placed into PageMaker from Designer display incorrectly in Normal Graphics mode?

In Normal Mode, PageMaker displays a metafile. Windows metafiles do not support transparent bitmaps. The workaround is to select High Graphics Mode in PageMaker preferences.


Why do hairlines exported as HPGL appear to be thicker?

This is because the default pen nib width for HPGL plotters is used for the hairline width. This is correct behavior.


What is the limit on the size of a text file I can import?

Importing text in a text block is limited to files that have less than 10,000 characters. Text is truncated after that.


Why don't thumbnails display in the ClipArt Manager after performing a search?
Why don't thumbnails display in the Media Manager after I perform a search?

Because the Search Results subject is created dynamically, thumbnails cannot be displayed.


How do I get vector clipping in an HPGL file when there is no option in the export setup to do so?

Load an HPGL driver and print to a file.


Why can't I select object-filled objects using the Select dialog box in a file I have saved and reloaded?
Why can't I select object-filled objects using the Select Object dialog box in a file I have saved and reloaded?

The Select by Interior Fill in the Select Object dialog box is valid for object-filled objects in the current Designer session only. After the file is reloaded, the object fills have moved in memory and are not selectable by the Interior Fill option.


Why does converting a metafile to curves sometimes change the size?

When Designer interprets a metafile and converts it to Designer objects, it uses the bounds stored in the metafile to determine the size of the objects. If the application that created the metafile incorrectly stored the bounds, the objects may change in size when they are converted to Designer objects (converted to curves).


Clicking the up arrow in the vertical movement field of the Transform-Move dialog box moves the object down. Why doesn't it go
Clicking the up arrow in the Vertical movement box of the Move tab of the Transform dialog box moves the object down. Why doesn't it go up?

An increasing value in the spinner matches increasing numbers down the ruler. The spinners do not transform the object up or down the page; they increase or decrease the number.


How can I select multiple documents to print?

In the Print Multiple Files dialog box, hold down CTRL as you click each document.

Note

Due to a current program limitation, files printed in this manner do not print their master page.


Why don't GIF, PCX, and TGA bitmaps retain their original size when importing or exporting?

The GIF, PCX, and TGA filters do not understand the concept of the DPI setting. To them a bit is just a little square with no specific size. That means that the bitmap will appear larger or smaller when displayed on a lower resolution device or a higher resolution device. Some programs, such as Picture Publisher, assume that these files were created at 75 dpi. When importing one of these files, Designer assumes that it was created at the current screen resolution and will resize the bitmap according to that assumption. For example, if you are running SuperVGA mode (800 x 600), Designer resizes the bitmap as though there were 96 pixels per inch.

When exporting to one of these formats, set the desired resolution, using the Setup dialog box. If another application reads GIF, PCX, and TGA files created by Designer and assumes that they were created at 75 dpi, then the bitmap may appear larger than it does in Designer.


Why are JPG bitmaps not the same size in CorelDRAW as they were in Designer?

CorelDRAW ignores the dpi field in the file when importing JPG.


Why do CGM files that were exported from Designer import into other applications at a different size?
Why do CGM files exported from Designer import into some other applications at a different size?

Designer exports metric, that is, with a scale factor. Some applications use an abstract scale.


Should blank pages in my document print?

No. Pages that do not contain objects should not print. Designer does not currently have any word processing features such as page numbers, headers, footers, and so forth, so you can just insert a blank piece of paper, if needed. Designer does print blank tiles that result from a tiling operation.

Note

When printing tiled output (Designer's page is larger than the printer's page), blank pages do print. That way you can paste all the pages together to create a single large document.


My mouse is unsteady. How can I move an object just a little?

There are some keyboard sequences you may find handy.

The SPACEBAR acts like the left mouse button. You can tap to click, hold to press, or tap twice quickly to double-click.

The ARROW KEYS move the cursor one dot at a time. Zoom in and out to have more or less precision.

The 2 key at the top of the keyboard opens the shortcut menu.

All the constraint keys (such as CTRL and SHIFT) can be used with these keys just as if you were using a mouse.


How do you add a point quickly in reshape mode? Shift+hold does not work as it did in Designer 3.1.
How do I add a point quickly while reshaping? Shift+hold does not work as it did in Designer 3.1.

SHIFT+click adds a point during point or curve reshaping.


How can I move the pivot point and make it stay?

Use SHIFT+drag to move the pivot point and make it stay.


How can I reset the pivot point to the default after I move it?

On the Snap tab of the Options dialog box, select Center snap points. Select the object. Turn on snap points (CTRL+F7). Hold SHIFT and drag the pivot point to the center.


How can I resize a hatch-filled object without affecting the fill?

Choose the Convert to Curves command after resizing the object. This can be done as many times as needed.


Should joining text change the size of the font?

When text is joined, all text objects joined will inherit the transformation, if any, of the first text object.


Why does text along a curve change when I save a Designer 4.0 file in Designer 7 and then open the file in Designer 4.0?

There were several problems with Designer 4.0's placement of text along a curve. In fact, saving and reopening a file in Designer 4.0 would sometimes cause the text to shift position. Attempts have been made to recreate the Designer 4.0 anomalies when Designer 7 saves Designer 4.0 compatible files. However, priority has been given to the display of Designer 4.0 files in Designer 7.


How can I get text to wrap on all four sides of a rectangle?

The basic implementation of text along a curve is to wrap text along each side of a polygon and to continue in a straight line after the polygon sides are exhausted. Text unwrapping from a rectangle is a side effect of that. If you move the alignment point to the top line of the rectangle (only a slight movement is required), the text should wrap correctly.


How can I space text evenly along a path?

Designer does not perform this operation. Text is a single object. In order to space it evenly, it is necessary to adjust the character and/or word spacing, or possibly the character widths.

Note

You can convert the text to curves and then use the Align To Path dialog box to space the characters evenly along a path. However, after converting the text to curves, you will no longer be able to edit the text (correct typographical errors, change fonts, and so forth).


Should aligning objects as group in the Align to Page dialog box automatically group the objects?
Should aligning objects as group in the Align dialog box automatically group the objects?

No. The purpose of the Align Objects as Group option is not to group the objects, but to treat them like a group during the alignment.


I reshaped my text and the "holes" disappeared. How do I get them back?

When a letter such as an A is reshaped, it is converted to curves and becomes two shapes. You can regain the original "holes" by Connecting Closed (F11) the two new shapes.


Sometimes I cannot ungroup objects pasted from the Clipboard. Why is this?

Check the two-line status bar to see what kind of object was pasted.

If the object is an OLE object, Designer cannot edit the object. Use Paste Special and choose Picture to paste an object Designer can edit.

The object may be a picture (Windows metafile). Metafiles pasted from the Clipboard must be decomposed by using the Convert to Curves command before you can edit the objects. Then they can be ungrouped and edited.


The Layer dialog box appears to change the wrong layer.

Note that Designer automatically names layers as they are added. Create a new drawing and add a few layers. Now go to the layers dialog and start moving the layers (using the up and down arrow keys). Notice that unnamed layers are renamed to reflect their new position when they are moved.


How do I delete a palette when the Delete option is not available?

Designer does not allow you to delete the current or active palette. Select another palette to make it active. Then you can delete the nonactive palette.


When I fit text to a path, it doesn't always exactly center the text.

The Change/Align/Text to Path command enters an interactive text placement mode. The text is initially placed on the curve centered about the point on the curve that is nearest the top middle selection handle. To automatically place the text, choose one of the predefined positions in the Text ribbon's Path Fit button.


Some OLE objects do not print to PostScript devices.

Designer 7 has certain restrictions processing files that contain embedded or linked OLE objects that were created in Designer 3.1, Windows Draw, and Charisma 2.1. Due to limitations in the implementation of these OLE objects, Designer 7 cannot print these objects to a PostScript device or export them to another file format. Designer 7 can print these objects to a PCL device. There are two workarounds for preserving the appearance of the OLE data and enabling Designer 7 to print to PostScript or export the data.

Copy the OLE object to the Clipboard from Designer 7. Select Paste Special and paste in as a DIB or bitmap.

or

Double-click the OLE object from Designer 7 to launch the original application. From that application, copy all the data to the Clipboard. Close the original application. Select Paste Special in Designer 7 and paste the data as a picture, DIB, or bitmap.


My DRW files containing dashed lines with opaque backgrounds lose their opaque background when opened in Designer
My DRW files containing dashed lines with opaque backgrounds lose their opaque background when opened in Designer.

Designer does not support opaque backgrounds for styled lines. Opening or importing a DRW file that contains styled lines with opaque backgrounds results in the loss of the background color. The styled lines are read correctly.


Why do color bitmaps sometimes print incorrectly to PostScript
Why do color bitmaps sometimes print incorrectly to PostScript?

There are two things to do if your color bitmaps don't print correctly to PostScript.

1	Use the PSCRIPT driver instead of the Adobe PostScript driver.

2	On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name PSBinaryBMP to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 1.


Why do weighted (non-hairline) lines export to DRW as polygons?

Exporting objects that have weighted (non-hairline) lines to the "DRW -- Micrografx Drawing (mgx)" filter result in the lines being converted to polygons. Exporting to the "DRW -- Micrografx Drawing" filter correctly retains the weighted lines.


Bitmaps or bitmap fills do not export properly to the Adobe Illustrator (AI) format.

The "AI -- Adobe Illustrator (mgx)" filter does not support exporting bitmaps or bitmap-filled objects, including bitmaps that are used to represent hatched fills. Depending on the option selected in the Setup dialog box, bitmaps will be exported in one of three possible solid colors: the foreground color of the bitmap, the background color of the bitmap, or a blend of the foreground and background colors of the bitmap to create a new color.


My text exports to DRW as individual lines.

A text block (container) exported to DRW [image] or any other vector format [image] exports as individual text lines, not as an entire text block.


Why do some images import at full-page size?

Any import that reports an abstract scale is scaled to fit the page. Images with a metric scale import at actual size.


I have an EPS file that I cannot import. What can I do?

The file might not be a "pure" EPS file. That is, it might contain binary characters instead of all text (ASCII) characters.

Try renaming the file so that its file extension is PS instead of EPS, and then import it using the PostScript filter.


I cannot select any objects from a file I imported. What's wrong?

If the objects show on the screen, but you cannot select them, the objects might be on a different layer than the current layer. For example, if all the objects were in Layer 2 when the file was saved, but Layer 1 is the current layer, you probably cannot select the objects.

To select objects that are not in the current layer

1	Click the current-layer button at the bottom of the document window, and click Layers on the menu that pops up.

2	In the Layers dialog box, click Edit All Layers. You should now be able to select the imported objects.


Why does my color text print as black on my PCL printer?

All colors of text print as black text on all PCL devices. Many Windows GDI printer drivers can only print color text in full intensity colors: white, black, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow. To print color text in grayscale or to print text in a color other than these eight colors, you must first convert the text to curves.

For printing from within Designer, you can create an entry in your system registry that tells Designer to convert all color text to curves during printing. This feature does not alter your document--only the output to the printer.

On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name PrintColorTextAsCurves to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 1. When you print from Designer, your color text will be converted to curves automatically. To disable the automatic conversion, change the value to 0.

If you want to paste the drawing into another program and print from that program, you must first convert the text to curves manually.

Note

This fix works only with TrueType and Adobe Type 1 fonts; it does not work with printer fonts.


Why do gray hairlines print as black on my PCL printer?

To print hairlines in grayscale on a PCL printer, you must first convert the lines to curves. For printing from within Designer, you can create an entry in your system registry that tells Designer to convert color text and grayscale hairlines to curves during printing. This feature does not alter your document--only the output to the printer.

On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name PrintColorTextAsCurves to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 1. When you print from Designer, your hairlines will be converted to curves automatically. To disable the automatic conversion, change the value to 0.

If you want to paste the drawing into another program and print from that program, you must first convert the hairlines to curves manually.


Why do I get an error message when I start Designer under Windows NT?

If you install Designer on a network for use with Windows 95 workstations and then run the network copy on Windows NT workstations, NT users may see an Entry Point not Found error message. The error occurs during Designer startup.

If only NT workstations need to use Designer from the network, you can eliminate the error message by deleting the two files ATM32.DLL and ATM16.DLL. These files reside in the same directory as the Designer .EXE file.

If a combination of Windows 95 and NT users run the network copy, the NT users must ignore the error message.


Why do my fonts change when I export to Adobe Illustrator (AI) format?

The export filter for AI files converts font names in your text objects according to a predefined set of font names. If you use a font that is not in the predefined set, the font name is converted.


Why are my tab stops being ignored when I press the Tab key
Why are my tab stops being ignored when I press the Tab key?

When a text block contains line wraps and only has a few tab stops set, it is possible to have tab stops that have a zero width.

To correct this problem

1	Select the block of text.

2	Note the width of the selected block (shown as W on the status bar).

3	On the Format menu, click Tab Stops.

4	Add a tab stop that is at least as wide as the text block.

5	Click Apply.


Why do I get an error when I try to import a WPG file?
Why do I get an error when I try to import certain WPG files?

Some WPG files cause the import filter to fail with the message "Unable to read import file." Try using the file in a different program to see if it has become corrupted.


What happened to the tab settings in the RTF file I imported?

The RTF import filter in Designer does not import all tab settings in an RTF file.

Make sure the container for the imported text is wide enough for the tabbed material. If the container is wide enough but the tab settings are missing or incorrect, highlight the text with the missing tab settings and use the Tab Stops panel of the Text tab of the Object Format dialog box to add the tab stops you need.


Why does Designer stop responding when I switch to it from Office Binder after setting up the page for a Designer drawing?

A bug in Office Binder for Office 95 when running under Windows 95 can cause Designer to stop responding when you switch to it after setting up a Designer page in Office Binder. This problem does not occur when running Office Binder for Office 95 on Windows NT 3.51, or when running Office Binder for Office 97 on either Window 95 or Windows NT 3.51.

The best fix for this problem is to upgrade to Office 97. If you are using Office 95 on Windows 95 and cannot upgrade to Office 97, then you can avoid this problem by setting up the page for a Designer drawing before you add it to Office Binder. After setting up the page, add the Designer drawing to Office Binder using the Add From File command.


Why does Designer stop responding when I paste an object into a drawing as a Windows metafile and then convert it to curves?

This problem is caused by an incompatibility in some early versions of the HP5SI print driver. To fix this problem, upgrade your HP5SI print driver to version 2.5 or later.


Why does it take so long to print a drawing containing blended objects with gradient fills on my PCL printer?

Printing blended objects containing gradient fills on a PCL printer can take as long as 20-30 minutes to print.


Why does printing to my Roland Camm-1 plotter produce no output?

To print to a Roland Camm-1 plotter, you must select both Collate and Vector Clipping on the Print Document dialog box.


Why do some objects containing gradient fills print slowly or not at all on my GDI printer?
Why do some objects containing gradient fills print slowly, or not print at all, on my GDI printer?

On a GDI printer, any gradient that has an angle that is not 0, 90, 180, or 360 degrees can take a long time to print, and therefore will occasionally time out the printer. This is a printer limitation, not a Designer problem.

To overcome this problem, you can adjust the number of gradient steps in a printout. On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, under Keys, click Process. Then select PrintGradientStep and set the value to 30 or 35. Although this will create gradients with larger steps, the gradients should print.


Why does Designer leave the file G3.DAT in my Windows temp directory?

G3.DAT is a data file used by Designer to perform import/export operations on certain bitmap file formats.

Although you can delete this file if you need disk  space, Designer will have to generate it again the next time you import or export a file.


Resolving Problems with Specific Printers

The most common cause of printer problems is outdated printer drivers. If you experience a problem with printing, the first step toward correcting the problem is to obtain the latest version of the print driver from your printer manufacturer.

Objects do not crop, TrueType fonts print with a square opaque white background, or lines show through text when printing to an HP PaintJet printer. Update to the latest version of the HP PaintJet driver.

Bitmaps printed to the HP DeskJet printer repeat the image or are rotated incorrectly. Update to the latest version of the HP DeskJet driver.

Bitmaps printed to the HP 550C printer are extremely dark and oversaturated, or do not print correctly. Update to the latest version of the HP 550C driver.

OLE objects from earlier versions of Micrografx products (Designer 3.1 and earlier, Charisma 2.1 and earlier, Draw 3.0 and earlier) do not print to a PostScript printer. Export the object from the earlier version of the Micrografx product, then import it into Designer 7.

Printing a Designer drawing to a Level 1 PostScript printer, a piece of one corner of a rectangle is missing. This happens when you create an EPS file in Designer and put the EPS image into certain programs. To fix it, on the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name EnablePSAdapt to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 0. Then set the options of the printer driver to EPS. Print. Print to EPS and use the new file.

Printing to an AutoGrafix device, there is a white line at the top of the 35 mm slide. When printing to 35 mm slides, choose a page size of Use Printable rather than 35mm in the Page Setup dialog box. Also, choose Center on Page in the Print Document dialog box.

Printing to a PCL printer, gray hairlines print as black. This happens when hairlines with a percent of black are positioned over a black. To fix it, on the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name PrintColorTextAsCurves to the Mgxgre key, and give it a numeric value of 1. This will convert the hairlines to curves.

Printing to a Roland Camm-1 plotter produces no output. To print a Designer document on a Roland Camm-1 plotter, you must select both Collate and Vector Clipping on the Print Document dialog box.

Printing to a GDI printer (Cannon BubbleJet, HP DeskJet, etc), some objects containing gradient fills take a long time to print, or do not print at all. On a GDI printer, any gradient that has an angle that is not 0, 90, 180, or 360 degrees can take a long time to print, and therefore will occasionally time out the printer. This is a printer limitation, not a Designer problem. To overcome this problem, you can adjust the number of gradient steps in a printout. On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, under Keys, click Process. Then select PrintGradientStep and set the value to 30 or 35. Although this will create gradients with larger steps, the gradients should print.


Registry Settings

Designer Registry Keys and Values

Getting Assistance as You Work


Gradient and Hatch Export Problems

If you experience problems exporting certain gradients to the DRW format:

On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name SimulateDRWGradient to the Translation key, and give it a numeric value of 1. Gradients will be simulated, which will take longer and result in a larger output file, but it will correct the appearance of any gradients that do not export properly.

If you experience problems exporting certain hatches to the WMF format:

On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name SimulateWMFHatch to the Translation key, and give it a numeric value of 1. Hatches will be simulated, which will take longer and result in a larger output file, but it will correct the appearance of any hatches that do not export properly.


Registry Settings

Designer Registry Keys and Values

Getting Assistance as You Work


Font Mapping

There are several instances where a font used in a document may not be available.

Documents might be opened or imported on a computer that does not have the fonts used in the document.

The current printer might not support the fonts used in the document.

Operations such as warping or changing fill and line styles might cause text to be converted to curves, but the font does not support curve manipulation.

Any time a font is not available or cannot be used, Designer substitutes Arial as the default font. If you edit the text, the original name of the font appears in the Font list box with a "?" beside it to remind you that Designer is substituting a different font.

You can change the default by modifying an entry in your system registry. On the Registry tab of the Options dialog box, add the Value Name DefaultFont to the Mgxgre key, and set its value to the name of the font you want to use (for example, Times New Roman).


Updating Embedded Objects in PageMaker 5

If you add fill colors or resize an embedded Designer OLE object in PageMaker 5, and then choose Update or Exit and Return, only the fill color is updated in PageMaker 5. This is only a problem with PageMaker 5.


Printing Embedded or Linked Objects in WordPerfect for Windows 5.2

Getting Assistance as You Work


Printing Embedded or Linked Objects in WordPerfect for Windows 5.2

You may experience printing problems in WordPerfect for Windows 5.2 if you are

Using the WordPerfect printer driver, and

Printing an embedded or linked Designer 4.x object with a solid color other than black, and

Using a 256-color video driver

You may be able to print the object using a standard VGA driver.


Updating Embedded Objects in PageMaker 5

Getting Assistance as You Work


3D Objects from Designer 4.0 Documents

Designer 7 displays a message when you open a Designer 4.0 file that contains one or more 3D objects. The 3D objects are changed into a 2D representation that Designer 7 can use. The 3D data is not retained in the Designer 7 file, but the appearance of the 3D objects is maintained by the representation. The title of the opened document in Designer 7 is changed to Untitled to prevent accidental erasure of the original Designer 4.0 file.


Getting Assistance as You Work


Underlines Disappearing

Text underlines may disappear if you apply some attributes, such as italic, or convert the text to curves, rotate it, or change the color of an edge.


Object Coordinates Dialog Box Will Not Open

A major compatibility problem with the Canon 3.64 printer driver can cause Designer to produce a system error when you attempt to open the Object Coordinates dialog box. To fix this problem, you must upgrade to the Canon printer driver version 3.70 or later. Please contact Canon or your printer vendor for information on how to obtain the updated printer driver.


OBJECT_B.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Aligning Objects to the Page

You can align one or more objects to several positions on the page.

In aligning objects to the page, Designer uses the page margins for the alignment. For example, the Center page alignment centers objects between the left and right margins, and the Middle page alignment centers objects between the top and bottom margins.

The keyboard shortcuts for aligning objects to the page are listed below.

Press	Action

CTRL+SHIFT+3	Align to page left

CTRL+SHIFT+5	Align to page center

CTRL+SHIFT+7	Align to page right

CTRL+SHIFT+9	Distribute (justify) horizontally

CTRL+SHIFT+4	Align to page top

CTRL+SHIFT+6	Align to page middle

CTRL+SHIFT+8	Align to page bottom

CTRL+SHIFT+0 (zero)	Distribute (justify) vertically

CTRL+SHIFT+F11	Align to page center and middle

ALT+2	Align to rulers


To align an object to the page

To align objects to each other

To distribute objects within the page margins

To distribute objects in relation to each other


Aligning Objects to Other Objects

Distributing Objects Evenly


To align an object to the page

1	Select the object you want to align.

2	On the Change menu, point to Align, and then click To Page. The Align dialog box opens, with the To Page option selected.

3	Click a button at the top of the preview box to set the horizontal page alignment. For example, click Left [image] to align the objects to the left margin.

4	Click a button at the side of the preview box to set the vertical page alignment. For example, click Top [image] to align the objects to the top margin.

5	Click Apply to align the object.

Tips

Watch the preview box for an example of your alignment settings.

To position the object in the exact center of the page, click both Center [image] and Middle [image].

Select Align Objects as a Group to align the selected objects to the page as a group. Align Objects as a Group treats the selected objects as a group only for page alignment purposes. It does not actually group the objects or affect the operation of other commands.


Aligning Objects to the Page

Aligning Objects to Other Objects

Distributing Objects Evenly


Aligning Objects to Other Objects

You can align objects to each other.

In aligning objects to each other, Designer uses the bounding box that surrounds the selected objects as the basis for the alignment. For example, if you select three objects and Top align them, they align to the top boundary of the surrounding bounding box.

The keyboard shortcuts for aligning objects to each other are listed below.

Press	Action

ALT+3	Align to left

ALT+5	Align to center

ALT+7	Align to right

ALT+9	Distribute (justify) horizontally

ALT+4	Align to top

ALT+6	Align to middle

ALT+8	Align to bottom

ALT+0 (zero)	Distribute (justify) vertically


To align objects to each other

To align an object to the page

To distribute objects within the page margins

To distribute objects in relation to each other


Aligning Objects to the Page

Distributing Objects Evenly


To align objects to each other

1	Select the objects you want to align.

2	On the Change menu, point to Align, and then click the object alignment you want.

To align the objects horizontally, click Align Left, Align Center, or Align Right.

To align the objects vertically, click Align Top, Align Middle, or Align Bottom.

Tips

To position objects in the exact center of the bounding box, align them using both Align Center and Align Middle.

You can also align objects to each other using the To Object option of the Align dialog box. The keyboard shortcut for opening the Align dialog box with the To Object option selected is ALT+1.


Aligning Objects to Other Objects

Aligning Objects to the Page

Distributing Objects Evenly


Distributing Objects Evenly

You can distribute objects evenly within page margins or in relation to each other. The objects can be spaced horizontally or vertically.

Distributing Objects within Page Margins


To distribute objects within the page margins

To distribute objects in relation to each other

To align an object to the page

To align objects to each other


Aligning Objects to the Page

Aligning Objects to Other Objects


To distribute objects within the page margins

1	Select the objects that you want to distribute.

2	On the Change menu, point to Align, and then click To Page. The Align dialog box opens with the To Page option selected.

3	Click Distribute Horizontally [image] to space the objects evenly horizontally.

Click Distribute Vertically [image] to space the objects evenly vertically.

4	Click Apply to distribute the objects on the page. The objects are distributed with a uniform amount of space between their center points.

Tips

Watch the preview box for an example of your alignment settings.

You may need to align the objects in several ways to get the arrangement you want.


Distributing Objects Evenly

Aligning Objects to the Page

Aligning Objects to Other Objects


To distribute objects in relation to each other

1	Select the objects that you want to distribute.

2	On the Change menu, point to Align, and then click the object distribution you want.

To distribute the objects horizontally, click Distribute Horizontally.

To distribute the objects vertically, click Distribute Vertically.

Tips

You may need to align the objects in several ways to get the arrangement you want.

You can also distribute objects in relation to each other using the To Object option of the Align dialog box. The keyboard shortcut for opening the Align dialog box with the To Object option selected is ALT+1.


Aligning Objects to a Path

You can align objects along the path of another object. For example, you can draw a curve and align a series of stars along it. Grouped and text objects cannot be used as a path (but you can align them to a path).

It is easy to get the alignment that you want because Designer previews on your page the effect of alignment settings as you choose them. When the alignment preview shows the arrangement that you want, you can apply the alignment.

The Align To Path dialog box is used to align objects to a path.

Notes

For details on aligning text to a path, see Fitting Text to a Path.

Designer removes warps, rotations, and skews of objects that are aligned to a path. Convert the objects to curves before aligning them if you want to keep their previous transformations.


To align objects to a path

To set the alignment point to a custom location


Selecting the Path Object

Changing the Alignment Justification

Changing the Alignment Pitch

Changing the Alignment Direction

Changing the Alignment Offset

Changing the Alignment Point


To align objects to a path

1	Select the objects you want to align, including the object you want to use as a path.

2	On the Change menu, point to Align, and then click To Path. The Align to Path dialog box opens.

3	If the Align To Path dialog box obscures the objects you want to align, drag it out of the way.

4	Choose the object to use as the path by clicking Previous [image] or Next [image] until the preview rectangles show along the desired path.

5	Choose the justification, direction, pitch, and offset settings that you want.

6	Choose the alignment point location that you want.

7	Click OK to align the objects.

Tips

To choose a custom alignment point location, click [image] and drag the red alignment point to the location that you want.

You can click Undo to return the objects to their unaligned positions.


Aligning Objects to a Path

Selecting the Path Object

Changing the Alignment Justification

Changing the Alignment Pitch

Changing the Alignment Direction

Changing the Alignment Offset

Changing the Alignment Point


Selecting the Path Object

The Select Path for Alignment buttons on the Align to Path dialog box select the object to use as a path for the other objects. The initial path selection is the object that provides the longest path. Each time you click a Select Path for Alignment button, the path object changes.

The Previous button [image] cycles through objects in the opposite order in which they were drawn.

The Next button [image] cycles through objects in the order in which they were drawn.


Aligning Objects to a Path

Changing the Alignment Justification

Changing the Alignment Pitch

Changing the Alignment Direction

Changing the Alignment Offset

Changing the Alignment Point


Changing the Alignment Justification

The Justification buttons on the Align to Path dialog box set the position of the aligned objects in relation to the alignment point.

The Left button [image] positions objects so the left edge of the left-most object aligns to the alignment point.

The Center button [image] centers objects around the alignment point.

The Right button [image] positions objects so the right edge of the right-most object aligns to the alignment point.

The Distribute Horizontally button [image] spaces objects evenly on the path.

Distributing Objects along a Path


Aligning Objects to a Path

Selecting the Path Object

Changing the Alignment Pitch

Changing the Alignment Direction

Changing the Alignment Offset

Changing the Alignment Point


Changing the Alignment Pitch

The Pitch buttons on the Align to Path dialog box set the orientation, or pitch, of the aligned objects in relation to the path.

The Rotate button [image] aligns the objects along a path by rotating, but not changing, the shapes.

The No Rotate button [image] places objects along a path without rotating the shapes.


Aligning Objects to a Path

Selecting the Path Object

Changing the Alignment Justification

Changing the Alignment Direction

Changing the Alignment Offset

Changing the Alignment Point


Changing the Alignment Direction

The Direction buttons on the Align to Path dialog box set the direction in which objects align along the path.

The Backward button [image] aligns objects in the opposite direction in which the path was drawn (the alignment direction is endpoint to origin).

The Forward button [image] aligns objects in the direction in which the path was drawn (the alignment direction is origin to endpoint).


Aligning Objects to a Path

Selecting the Path Object

Changing the Alignment Justification

Changing the Alignment Pitch

Changing the Alignment Offset

Changing the Alignment Point


Changing the Alignment Offset

The Offset % box on the Align to Path dialog box controls where objects vertically rest on a path.

An offset of 100 aligns the bottom of the objects to the path, an offset of 0 aligns the middle of the objects to the path, and an offset of -100 aligns the top of the objects to the path.

An offset greater than 100 (to the limit of 200) aligns the bottom of the objects above the path. An offset less than -100 (to the limit of -200) aligns the top of the objects below the path.


Aligning Objects to a Path

Selecting the Path Object

Changing the Alignment Justification

Changing the Alignment Pitch

Changing the Alignment Direction

Changing the Alignment Point


Changing the Alignment Point

The Alignment Point buttons set the location on the path of the point used to align the objects. The alignment point can be set to the fixed locations of left, center, and right for open paths or top, left, right, and bottom for closed paths.


To set the alignment point to a custom location

To align objects to a path


Aligning Objects to a Path

Selecting the Path Object

Changing the Alignment Justification

Changing the Alignment Pitch

Changing the Alignment Direction

Changing the Alignment Offset


To set the alignment point to a custom location

1	Select the objects you want to align, including the object you want to use as a path.

2	On the Change menu, point to Align, and then click To Path. The Align to Path dialog box opens.

3	If the Align To Path dialog box obscures the objects you want to align, drag it out of the way.

4	Choose the object to use as the path by clicking Previous [image] or Next [image] until the preview rectangles show along the desired path.

5	Change the justification, direction, pitch, and offset settings, if you want.

6	Click Choose Position [image]. The red alignment point appears on the preview.

7	Drag the red alignment point to the location that you want.

8	Click OK to align the objects.

Tip

You can click Undo to return the objects to their unaligned positions.


Changing the Alignment Point

Aligning Objects to a Path

Selecting the Path Object

Changing the Alignment Justification

Changing the Alignment Pitch

Changing the Alignment Direction

Changing the Alignment Offset


Copying and Pasting Objects

You can copy objects from a drawing to the Windows Clipboard and paste the object into another Designer drawing or another Windows program.

Copying and pasting to the Clipboard is an easy way to move objects from one Designer drawing to another. You can also move drawings and text from Designer to many other Windows programs, or from a Windows program to Designer.

Using the Clipboard is similar to importing or exporting drawings except it is temporary (the Clipboard is emptied when you close Windows), and the receiving program might convert the object into a format it recognizes. For example, if you copy from a program that doesn’t use Designer’s DSF file format, Designer converts the object to a format it recognizes before pasting.


To copy an object to the Clipboard

To cut an object to the Clipboard

To paste or embed an object from the Clipboard


Copying and Cutting Objects

Pasting Objects

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects


Copying and Cutting Objects

The Copy and Cut commands both move selected objects to the Clipboard.

Copy places a copy of the selection on the Clipboard.

Cut removes the original selection from the drawing and places it on the Clipboard.

Selections that you copy or cut remain on the Clipboard until you copy or cut something else. The Copy and Cut commands are unavailable if you have nothing selected.


Copying and Pasting Objects

Pasting Objects

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects


To copy an object to the Clipboard

1	Select the object you want to copy.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy.

Tips

To copy a selection using the keyboard, press CTRL+C or CTRL+INS.

You can also copy a selection by clicking Copy [image] on the Standard toolbar.


Copying and Pasting Objects

Copying and Cutting Objects

Pasting Objects

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects


To cut an object to the Clipboard

1	Select the object you want to cut.

2	On the Edit menu, click Cut.

Tips

To cut a selection using the keyboard, press CTRL+X or SHIFT+DEL.

You can also cut a selection by clicking Cut [image] on the Standard toolbar.


Pasting Objects

The Paste command retrieves objects from the Clipboard and places them in your drawing. Before you can paste, you must copy or cut an object to the Clipboard. You can repeatedly paste the same object from the Clipboard until you cut or copy a new object to the Clipboard.


To paste or embed an object from the Clipboard

To copy an object to the Clipboard

To cut an object to the Clipboard


Copying and Pasting Objects

Copying and Cutting Objects

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Managing OLE Links

Activating Linked Objects

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Pasting and Linking an Object

Replacing Objects


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

When you paste an object, you can establish a connection, or link, between the pasted object and its source. This connection is usually called "OLE" for Object Linking and Embedding.


To paste or embed an object from the Clipboard

To edit an embedded object using its associated program

To create an OLE object from a file saved by another program

To create a new OLE object with another program and insert it in your drawing

To link an object

To edit a linked object

To break the link between an object and its server

To change an OLE link


Pasting Objects

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Managing OLE Links

Activating Linked Objects

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Pasting and Linking an Object


Embedding OLE Objects

Whenever possible, Designer embeds an object while pasting it. Double-clicking an embedded object automatically opens the program in which the object was created so you can edit it. You can also select the object, click the right mouse button, and click Edit on the shortcut menu to edit the embedded object.

For example, you can create an image in Micrografx Picture Publisher, copy it to the Clipboard, and paste (embed) it into Designer. Double-click the image to open Picture Publisher and display the image. You now can edit the image in Picture Publisher. When you close Picture Publisher, you are asked if you want to update the image.

Not all programs permit embedding (or linking). Some programs are both client (receiver of the object) and server (originator of the object); others are just servers. Servers let you copy objects from them to embed into other programs, but they do not let you embed objects from other programs. (See the program’s documentation for more information.)

Designer automatically embeds the object if the object’s associated program is a registered OLE server. To find out if the object is an OLE object, select it and look at the status bar to see if OLE Object is displayed.

Tips

If you paste (embed) from a non-drawing program, such as Microsoft Word, the object is sometimes pasted as a picture (usually an icon). If you want to paste editable text, you must paste it without embedding or linking it. On the Edit menu, click Paste Special, select Text, and then click Paste.

Although you must have the embedded object’s associated program on your system, you don’t have to have the original file. This makes embedding useful for portable computers where disk space is at a premium.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Managing OLE Links

Activating Linked Objects

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Pasting and Linking an Object


To paste or embed an object from the Clipboard

On the Edit menu, click Paste.

The object is pasted in the center of the page.

Tips

To paste using the keyboard, press CTRL+V or SHIFT+INS.

You can also paste a selection by clicking Paste [image] on the Standard toolbar.

You can paste the contents of the Clipboard multiple times.


Copying and Pasting Objects

Copying and Cutting Objects

Pasting Objects

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Managing OLE Links

Activating Linked Objects


To edit an embedded object using its associated program

1	Double-click the object to edit. The program in which the object was created opens and displays the object.

2	Edit the object.

3	On the File menu, click Update to see the changes in Designer.

4	Close the server program when you finish editing.

5	Click Yes to apply the changes to the object in Designer

or

Click No to disregard any changes.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Managing OLE Links

Viewing an OLE Link

Updating an OLE Object

Breaking an OLE Link

Changing the Location of a Linked File

Activating Linked Objects


Inserting an Object from Another Program

Besides using Paste to embed objects from OLE-compatible programs, you can use Insert Object.

Insert Object lets you either:

Insert any file that is associated with a registered OLE server program on your computer. If you choose to link to the file, the inserted object reflects any changes you make to the file.

or

Open an OLE-compatible program, create a new object in the program, and insert the object into Designer. You don’t have to save the object as a file.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Linking OLE Objects

Managing OLE Links

Viewing an OLE Link

Updating an OLE Object

Breaking an OLE Link

Activating Linked Objects

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Pasting and Linking an Object


To insert an object from another program (without using Paste)
To create a new OLE object with another program and insert it in your drawing

1	On the Edit menu, click Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box opens.

2	Click Create New.

3	In the Object Type box, click the type of object that you want to create.

4	Click OK. The other program opens.

5	Use the program to create the object.

6	When you finish, press the ESC key. The object is inserted in the Designer drawing.

Tip

Only OLE-compatible-program objects are listed in the Insert Object dialog box.


To create an OLE object from a file saved by another program

1	On the Edit menu, click Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box opens.

2	Click Create from File.

3	Click the Link option if you want to link rather than embed the object.

4	Click Browse, locate the file, and click Open.

Tip

Only OLE-compatible-program objects are listed in the Insert Object dialog box.


Linking OLE Objects

Linking lets you maintain an invisible connection between an OLE object and its original (source) file. Linking is used with pasting and is sometimes called paste linking. When you paste link an object into Designer, you can make changes to the object’s original file. If you update the original file, the Designer document also updates.

For example, you can copy a Picture Publisher bitmap file, and then paste link it into Designer. If you make changes to the image in Picture Publisher, Designer also changes to reflect the change.

Designer must have access to the object’s original file before you can edit it. For example, if the file LINK.TIF is located on drive A, be sure the diskette containing LINK.TIF is inserted in the drive before you attempt to edit the linked object.

Tip

Linking is a way for more than one user to connect to the same file. For example, linking can be helpful on a network where several users are working with the same file. Users are linked to a master file so that whenever one user makes a change, the master and all linked files show the change.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Managing OLE Links

Viewing an OLE Link

Updating an OLE Object

Breaking an OLE Link

Activating Linked Objects

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Pasting and Linking an Object


To link an object

1	Create the object in its original program and save it as a file.

2	Copy the object you want to link to the Clipboard.

3	Close the original program if you want.

4	Open Designer, if necessary.

5	On Designer’s Edit menu, click Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens.

6	Click Paste Link.

7	Click OK. The object is pasted in the center of the page.

Tip

You must save the linked object as a file.


To edit a linked object

1	Double-click the object to edit. The program in which the object was created (the server) opens and displays the object.

2	Edit the object.

3	On the File menu, click Save to update the changes in Designer.

4	Close the server program when you finish editing.

5	Click Yes to save the linked file and update the object in Designer

or

Click No to disregard changes made since you last saved the linked file.


Managing OLE Links

You can use the Links dialog box to manage OLE links that you have created. To open the Links dialog box, click Links on the Edit menu.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Viewing an OLE Link

Updating an OLE Object

Breaking an OLE Link

Changing the Location of a Linked File

Activating Linked Objects

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Pasting and Linking an Object


Viewing an OLE Link

Links are displayed in the Links dialog box. A description of each link includes the name of the source application, the type of linked object (for example, picture or text), the filename, and whether the object updates automatically or manually.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Managing OLE Links

Updating an OLE Object

Breaking an OLE Link

Changing the Location of a Linked File

Activating Linked Objects


Updating an OLE Object

You can update objects automatically or manually by selecting Automatic or Manual on the Links dialog box. Automatic updates a linked object whenever you change it. Manual only updates the object when you click Update Now in the Links dialog box and when you click Yes whenever you are prompted to update links.

Tip

Some OLE programs don’t automatically update. In those cases, you must choose Save to update.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Viewing an OLE Link

Breaking an OLE Link

Managing OLE Links

Activating Linked Objects


Breaking an OLE Link

The Break Link button on the Links dialog box breaks the link between an object and its source program (server).


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Viewing an OLE Link

Updating an OLE Object

Managing OLE Links

Changing the Location of a Linked File

Activating Linked Objects


To break the link between an object and its server

1	Select the linked object in Designer.

2	On the Edit menu, click Links. The Links dialog box opens.

3	Click Break Link.

4	You are asked if you want to break the link permanently.

Click Yes to break the link permanently.

or

Click No to cancel and leave the link unbroken.


Changing the Location of a Linked File

When you establish a link, Designer "remembers" the location and name of the source file. If you move or rename the file, you must tell Designer the new location and filename in order to reestablish the link.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Managing OLE Links

Viewing an OLE Link

Updating an OLE Object

Breaking an OLE Link

Activating Linked Objects


To change an OLE link

1	Select the object in Designer.

2	On the Edit menu, click Links. The Links dialog box opens.

3	Click Change Source. The Change Source dialog box opens.

4	Change to the directory where the source file is located and select the new filename, if necessary.

5	Click OK. The link is reestablished.


Activating Linked Objects

You might want to play or activate certain types of objects instead of editing them. For example, you can play sound, music, or animation objects that you have linked in your drawing.

If you select a linked video clip, for example, the shortcut menu for the object displays the item Linked Video Clip Object. The menu subitems include a Play option. Non-action objects, such as pictures, can only be edited.


OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program

Linking OLE Objects

Viewing an OLE Link

Updating an OLE Object

Breaking an OLE Link

Managing OLE Links


Changing the Pasted Data Type

You can paste an object in a more generic form by changing the pasted data type using Paste Special on the Edit menu. By default, Designer pastes objects in their original format, if possible. You can select a different data type to paste the object as a different format.

Tip

The format of the original object is highlighted when the Paste Special dialog box opens. You must choose the highlighted data type if you want to paste link the object.


To use special pasting options


Copying and Pasting Objects

Copying and Cutting Objects

Pasting Objects

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Pasting and Linking an Object


To use special pasting options

1	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens.

2	Choose the paste options you want.


Changing the Pasted Data Type

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Pasting and Linking an Object


Pasting and Embedding an Object

Use Paste [image] on the Standard toolbar to paste and embed the object into your drawing. If the source program is OLE-compatible, the object is automatically embedded when it is pasted. The format of the original object is highlighted.


Copying and Pasting Objects

Copying and Cutting Objects

Embedding OLE Objects

Inserting an Object from Another Program


Pasting and Linking an Object

Use Paste Link on the Paste Special dialog box to simultaneously paste and link the object. This option is unavailable if the object comes from a program that cannot link to Designer, or if the file you want to link is not saved.


Copying and Pasting Objects

Copying and Cutting Objects

Pasting Objects

Changing the Pasted Data Type

Pasting and Embedding an Object

Linking OLE Objects


Replacing Objects

The Replace dialog box lets you replace objects in your document with objects from the Clipboard. Using the Replace dialog box, you can:

Replace an object with an object from the Clipboard.

Scale the Clipboard object so that it fits within the bounding box of the object being replaced.

Specify the Clipboard object's alignment. For more information, see Aligning while Replacing.

Replace multiple objects with a single object, or replace multiple objects with different objects. For more information, see Replacing with Multiple Objects.

Paste on top of an object.

Tip

The Replace dialog box is especially convenient for working with templates, because it lets you easily replace template clip art with the clip art you want.


To replace an object

To align a replacement object

To replace multiple objects


Aligning while Replacing

Replacing with Multiple Objects


To replace an object

1	Cut or copy the replacement object to the Clipboard.

2	Select the object to replace.

3	On the Object menu, click Replace. The Replace dialog box opens.

4	Choose the replacement options you want. For example, select Scale to Fit if you want the object on the Clipboard to be scaled to fit within the bounding box of the object being replaced.

5	Click Replace.

Tips

The Align To option lets you specify how the Clipboard object is aligned.

Select Leave Original if you want the Clipboard object pasted on top of the original object.

You can also cut, copy, and paste using the Replace dialog box. To cut a selection, click Cut [image]. To copy a selection, click Copy [image]. To paste the contents of the Clipboard, click Paste [image].


Replacing Objects

Aligning while Replacing

Replacing with Multiple Objects


Aligning while Replacing

The Align To option on the Replace dialog box lets you specify how a Clipboard object aligns to the bounding box of the object it replaces. This option does not change the object’s proportions.

You can use this option, for example, to align a Clipboard object to the bottom right handle of the object being replaced.


To align a replacement object

To replace an object

To replace multiple objects


Replacing Objects

Replacing with Multiple Objects


To align a replacement object

1	Cut or copy the replacement object to the Clipboard.

2	Select the object to replace.

3	On the Object menu, click Replace. The Replace dialog box opens.

4	Click Align To.

5	Choose the alignment that you want in the alignment list box.

6	Click Replace.

Tips

Select Leave Original if you want the Clipboard object pasted on top of the original object.

You can also cut, copy, and paste using the Replace dialog box. To cut a selection, click Cut [image]. To copy a selection, click Copy [image]. To paste the contents of the Clipboard, click Paste [image].


Aligning while Replacing

Replacing Objects

Replacing with Multiple Objects


Replacing with Multiple Objects

If you select several objects to replace, Designer distributes Clipboard objects to replace the selected objects. The first object in the Clipboard (from back to front if no reordering has taken place) replaces the first original object, the second Clipboard object replaces the second original object, and so forth.

Select the Group Clipboard Objects option on the Replace dialog box to replace each selected object with the entire contents of the Clipboard.

If you have several objects selected but only one object in the Clipboard, each selected object is replaced with the Clipboard object.


To replace multiple objects

To replace an object

To align a replacement object


Replacing Objects

Aligning while Replacing


To replace multiple objects

1	To replace multiple objects with one object, copy or cut that object to the Clipboard.

or

To replace multiple objects with different objects, select all of the replacement objects and copy or cut them to the Clipboard.

2	Select the objects to replace.

3	On the Object menu, click Replace. The Replace dialog box opens.

4	Choose the replacement options you want.

5	Click Replace. If the Clipboard contained one object, all of the selected objects are replaced with the Clipboard object. If the Clipboard contained multiple objects, each selected object is replaced with a different object from the Clipboard, in back to front order.

Tips

Select Scale to Fit to scale the Clipboard objects.

Select Leave Original if you want the Clipboard object pasted on top of the original object.


Replacing with Multiple Objects

Replacing Objects

Aligning while Replacing


Fragmenting Objects

The Fragment command lets you break the overlapping areas of closed objects into separate objects. The Fragment command is located on the Modify submenu of the Change menu.

Two Overlapping Objects	After Fragmenting
The result of the Fragment command is that each bounded or overlapped area in the original objects is converted to a separate object. The interior fill of the resulting objects is determined by blending the interior fill of the areas that produced the objects. The lines of all resulting objects are solid hairlines.

Note

Only overlapping closed objects can be fragmented.


To fragment an object


Creating Intersection Objects

Joining Objects

Punching "Holes" in Objects

Trimming Objects

Slicing Objects


To fragment an object

1	Select the objects you want to fragment. Only overlapping closed objects can be fragmented.

2	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Fragment. The original objects are replaced by separate objects for each overlapping or bounded area.

Tip

To fragment an extruded object, convert it to curves before performing the Fragment command.


Fragmenting Objects


Creating Intersection Objects

The Intersect command lets you create an object based on the intersection of two or more closed objects. The Intersect command is located on the Modify submenu of the Change menu.

Two Overlapping Objects	Intersection Object
The result of the Intersect command is a single object with the shape of the intersection, or overlap area, of the original objects. The intersection object has the interior fill and line attributes of the front (top) original object.

Note

Only overlapping closed objects can produce an intersection object.


To create an intersection object


Fragmenting Objects

Joining Objects

Punching "Holes" in Objects

Trimming Objects

Slicing Objects


To create an intersection object

1	Select the intersecting (overlapping) objects. Only overlapping closed objects can produce an intersection object.

2	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Intersect. The original objects are replaced by the intersection object.

Tip

To intersect an extruded object, convert it to curves before performing the Intersect command.


Creating Intersection Objects


Joining Objects

The Join command lets you join two or more closed objects. The Join command is located on the Modify submenu of the Change menu.

Two Overlapping Objects	Joined Object
The result of the Join command is a single object with the shape of the combined, original objects. The joined object has the interior fill and line attributes of the front (top) original object.

Note

Only overlapping closed objects can be joined.


To join objects


Fragmenting Objects

Creating Intersection Objects

Punching "Holes" in Objects

Trimming Objects

Slicing Objects


To join objects

1	Select the objects you want to join. Only overlapping closed objects can be joined.

2	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Join. The original objects are replaced by the joined object.

Tip

To join an extruded object, convert it to curves before performing the Join command.


Joining Objects


Punching Holes in Objects
Punching "Holes" in Objects

The Punch command lets you punch a closed object through one or more other closed objects. The Punch command is located on the Modify submenu of the Change menu.

Two Overlapping Objects	Punched Object
The result of the Punch command is an object with a "hole" in it that is the shape of the front (top) original object. The object used to punch the "hole" is deleted. (The Trim command performs the same action as the Punch command, except that the object used to punch the "hole" is not deleted.)

Note

The Punch command requires an overlapping closed object to define the punch "hole."


To punch an object


Fragmenting Objects

Creating Intersection Objects

Joining Objects

Trimming Objects

Slicing Objects


To punch an object

1	Select the object (or objects) to be punched and the object defining the punch "hole." Both objects must be closed objects.

2	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Punch. The original objects are replaced by the punched object.

Tip

To punch an extruded object, convert it to curves before performing the Punch command.


Punching "Holes" in Objects


Trimming Objects

The Trim command, like the Punch command, punches a closed object through one or more other closed objects. Unlike the Punch command, however, the Trim command does not delete the punching object. The Trim command is located on the Modify submenu of the Change menu.

Two Overlapping Objects	Trimmed Object with Punching Object Moved Aside
The result of the Trim command is two objects, the trimmed (punched) object and the punching object. The trimmed object has a "hole" in it that is the shape of the punching object.

Note

The Trim command requires an overlapping closed object to define the trim line.


To trim an object


Fragmenting Objects

Creating Intersection Objects

Joining Objects

Punching "Holes" in Objects

Slicing Objects


To trim an object

1	Select the object to be trimmed and the object defining the trim line. Both objects must be closed objects.

2	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Trim. The back object is trimmed by the front object.

Tips

To see the effect of the Trim command, move the object defining the trim line.

To trim an extruded object, convert it to curves before performing the Trim command.


Trimming Objects


Slicing Objects

The Slice command lets you cut a closed object into separate objects. The Slice command is located on the Modify submenu of the Change menu.

You draw a line through the object to indicate where you want the object sliced. This lets you position the slice location precisely, because you can reshape and move the line until you have it exactly where you want the slice to occur.

Before Slicing	After Slicing with Sliced Objects Moved Apart
After an object is sliced, you can select the separate objects and move them where you want them.

The Slice command also works with bitmap images. For more information on slicing bitmap images, see Slicing a Bitmap Image.


To slice an object


Fragmenting Objects

Creating Intersection Objects

Joining Objects

Punching "Holes" in Objects

Trimming Objects

Slicing a Bitmap Image


To slice an object

1	Draw a line through the object. The ends of the line must extend beyond the object. You can draw any type of line through the object, including arcs, Bezier curves, and freehand lines. Only closed objects can be sliced.

2	Select both the object and the line marking the slice location.

3	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Slice. The object is sliced along the line.

Tips

You can slice multiple objects by drawing the line through all of the objects you want to slice.

By drawing the line appropriately, you can slice an object into multiple objects.

To slice an extruded object, convert it to curves before performing the Slice command.

To slice text, convert it to curves and disconnect it before performing the Slice command.


Slicing Objects


Outlining Objects

The Outline command lets you outline one or more objects. The Outline command is located on the Modify submenu of the Change menu.

The Outline command traces the outside edges of the selected objects to produce an outline object that exactly corresponds to the outside edges. If you want to create outlines that are offset from the outside edges, use the Contour command.

Before Outlining	Outline Object
Following the creation of the outline, the outline is selected so you can easily move it or otherwise manipulate it.

The Outline command also works with bitmap images. When you outline a bitmap image, the entire image is outlined, including any transparent areas.

Note

If the objects being outlined do not overlap, then the objects are outlined separately.


To outline an object

To contour an object


Contouring Objects


To outline an object

1	Select the object you want outlined. You can outline both open and closed objects.

2	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Outline. The object is outlined and the outline object is selected.

Tips

You may not be able to see the outline object until you move it.

The outline object is drawn with a black hairline.

To outline an extruded object, convert it to curves before performing the Outline command.

To outline text, convert it to curves and disconnect it before performing the Outline command.


Outlining Objects

Contouring Objects


Contouring Objects

The Contour command lets you contour one or more objects. The Contour command is located on the Modify submenu of the Change menu.

The Contour command traces the outside edges of an open or closed object to produce an outline that is offset from the outside edges, called a contour. You can set the offset distance of the contour and the number of contours you want created. You can also set the weight, style, and color of the contour line.

Before Contouring	After Contouring
Following the creation of the contour, the contour is selected so you can easily move it or otherwise manipulate it.

The Contour command also works with bitmap images. When you contour a bitmap image, the entire image is contoured, including any transparent areas.

Note

If the objects being contoured do not overlap, then the objects are contoured separately.


To contour an object

To outline an object


Outlining Objects


To contour an object

1	Select the object you want contoured. You can contour both open and closed objects.

2	On the Change menu, point to Modify, and then click Contour. The Contour dialog box opens.

3	Type the distance that you want the contour to be offset from the outside edges in the Offset spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

4	Type the number of contours that you want in the Copies spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Set the contour line weight, style, and color. The preview box shows a sample of the contour line.

6	Click Apply.

Tips

You can create additional contours by clicking Apply again.

To delete the object being contoured, select Remove Original Objects before you click Apply.

To contour an extruded object, convert it to curves before performing the Contour command.

To contour text, convert it to curves and disconnect it before performing the Contour command.


Contouring Objects

Outlining Objects


ORGANIZE.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Setting Options

Designer lets you customize your working environment by setting your options for many aspects of Designer. Your options can be saved in a profile so that they apply every time you run Designer, or you can restrict options to your current work session by not saving them. If you want to maintain different sets of options, you can define two or more profiles. Certain options, such as ruler units, are saved with the document so that you do not have to reset them each time you open the document.

You can set options with the View menu and with the Options command on the Tools menu. The Options command lets you set many different categories of options, including general options, ruler and snap options, rotation options, input (primarily mouse) options, settings for the system registry, and changing your profile (a collection of your personal settings).


Workspace Options

Status Bar Options

View Options

Toolbar Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Workspace Options

The Workspace command on the View menu lets you configure your workspace in various ways. These options affect all open documents, not just the active window.

From the Workspace submenu, you can set the following options.

Show Grid. Select this option to show the grid; deselect it to hide the grid. To make objects snap to the grid, select Snap to Rulers. For information on setting the number of grid divisions per ruler unit, see Ruler Options.

Show Guides. Select this option to show the guides; deselect it to hide the guides. For information on using guides, see Using Guides.

Show Crosshairs. Select this option to show the mouse position crosshairs; deselect it to hide the crosshairs. See Drawing with Crosshairs.

Show Printer Page Tiles (non-printing guidelines that indicate that the page is larger than the target printer's paper size). Select this option to show the printer page tiles; deselect it to hide the printer page tiles.

Show Rulers. Select this option to show the vertical and horizontal rulers; deselect it to hide the rulers. For information on ruler options, see Ruler Options.

Show Ruler Position (the colored marks on the rulers that indicate the position of the mouse pointer). Select this option to show the mouse position marks on the rulers; deselect it to hide the position marks.

Reset Ruler Origin. Click this command to reset the ruler origin to the upper left corner of the page.

Lock Guides. Select this option to lock the guides; deselect it to unlock the guides.


Setting Options

Status Bar Options

View Options

Toolbar Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Status Bar Options

The status bar shows information about your drawing that lets you quickly determine current settings. The Status Bar command on the View menu lets you select single- or double line format. The double-line status bar displays more information.

The information displayed by the status bar includes:

The default line style, or the line style of the selected object. (If multiple objects are selected, or if an object group is selected, the status bar shows the line style of the object that was drawn first.)

The default interior fill, or the interior fill of the selected object. (If multiple objects are selected, or if an object group is selected, the status bar shows the interior fill of the object that was drawn first.)

The type or name of the selected object.

The current mode, such as Select, Rotate/Skew, or Text.

The location/scale coordinates of the selected object.

The size coordinates of the selected object.

The current zoom percentage and buttons for zooming out by a factor of 2, zooming in by a factor of 2, zooming to the page (on the double-line status bar only).

The status bar lets you change the line style and interior fill of objects by clicking the line style or interior fill settings.

Note

The status bar options on the View menu are available only when the status bar is visible. To show or hide the status bar, click Toolbars on the View menu.


Setting Options

Workspace Options

View Options

Toolbar Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


View Options

Designer lets you select more than one way to view various fills and patterns. Changing display options does not affect the contents of your drawing or the way it is printed. If you are working on a large, complex drawing, you might choose a draft or wireframe preview to speed redraw and simplify your work.

The Preview command on the View menu affects all fills and patterns (solid, gradient, image, object fill, and hatch fill). You can use the three options (Proof, Draft, or Wireframe) in the Preview submenu to control the display for all of these types of fills at once. If you set Preview to Proof, you can use the individual commands for gradient, image, object fill, and hatch fills to control their display individually.

Generally, the Preview command overrides your selections with the individual commands. For example, if you select Draft in the Preview submenu, gradients are automatically set to none, and other commands are grayed.

Command	Display

Preview Proof	Full Preview—all colors and fills are displayed; you can limit gradient, image, object, and hatch fills with individual commands.

Preview Draft	Solid fills are normal; gradients, hatch fills, and object fills are solid (first color only). Image fills and masked objects are solid; bitmap images are a rectangle with an X. All lines are displayed as hairlines.

Preview Wireframe	No fills or line ends are displayed; all lines are displayed as hairlines.

Show Gradients Smooth	Best gradient display, with all colors and smooth gradations from one color to the next.

Show Gradients Average	All colors are shown, but gradations are not as smooth.

Show Gradients Coarse	Fewer colors, with banding.

Show Gradients None	Only the first color is displayed.

Show Images (selected)	All colors and gray scales in the bitmap are displayed.

Show Images (deselected)	Rectangle with an X on it to show position only.

Show Object Fills (selected)	Object fills displayed.

Show Object Fills (deselected)	Only the foreground color is displayed.

Show Hatch Fills (selected) 	Hatch fills displayed.

Show Hatch Fills (deselected)	Only the foreground color is displayed.

Show Image Fills (selected)	Image fills displayed.

Show Image Fills (deselected)	Only the foreground color is displayed.

Note

The Preview Wireframe command turns the wireframe view on and off for the entire document. The Wireframe button [image] turns the wireframe view on and off only for an object that is being reshaped. If the Wireframe command is in effect, then the Wireframe button is ignored.


Setting Options

Workspace Options

Status Bar Options

Toolbar Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Toolbar Options

The Toolbars command on the View menu lets you specify which toolbars you want displayed on your workspace.

The toolbars contain buttons that give you quick access to Designer commands. For example, you can save a document by clicking Save [image] on the Standard toolbar.

You can configure your toolbars by choosing colored or uncolored buttons, or large or normal buttons. You can also choose whether buttons display ToolTips when you point to a button with the mouse, and whether the ToolTip shows the keyboard shortcut for the button (if any).

You can customize Designer toolbars by adding and removing buttons. You can also create, rename, and delete your own user-defined toolbars. A user-defined toolbar, by combining the commands you use most often in a single, easily accessed location, can greatly enhance your efficiency.

Once you display a toolbar, you can move it to any location on the screen that you want.

Your toolbar settings are saved in your current profile.


To show a toolbar

To hide a toolbar

To move a toolbar

To add buttons to a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To create a toolbar


Setting Options

Workspace Options

Status Bar Options

View Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


To show a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog box appears.

2	Select the toolbar you want to display.

Tips

Until you are familiar with the toolbars, use ToolTips to identify the buttons on the toolbar. When ToolTips are turned on, you can display the name of a button by simply pointing to the button with the mouse for about two seconds. To show the keyboard shortcut for a button (if any) in the ToolTip, select Display Shortcuts.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you show or hide any toolbar, click any toolbar with the right mouse button.


Toolbar Options


To hide a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog box appears.

2	Deselect the toolbar you want to hide.

Tips

You can hide a floating toolbar by clicking Close [image] on the toolbar.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you show or hide any toolbar, click any toolbar with the right mouse button.


Toolbar Options


To move a toolbar

Point at a spot on the toolbar that is not a button and drag the toolbar to the location you want.

As you drag the toolbar, Designer displays it as an outline.

If you drag the toolbar onto the active window, it becomes a floating toolbar. If you drag the toolbar onto the top or bottom borders of the workspace, the toolbar anchors itself to the border.


Toolbar Options


To add buttons to a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog box appears.

2	Click Customize. The Customize dialog box opens.

3	Click the category containing a button that you want to add to the toolbar.

4	Click a button to display its description.

5	Drag the button to the toolbar.

Note

You cannot add buttons to the Ribbon toolbar.

Tips

The buttons available in the Customize dialog box include buttons not on any of the built-in toolbars.

To drag a button from any toolbar except the Ribbon toolbar to another toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button with the mouse.

To rearrange the buttons on a toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button to its new location.

To delete a button from a toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button off the toolbar.


Toolbar Options


To reset a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog box appears.

2	Select the toolbar that you want to restore to its original configuration.

3	Click Reset.

Note

Resetting a toolbar restores all button deletions, deletes all button additions, and returns the toolbar to its original location.


Toolbar Options


To create a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog box appears.

2	Click New. The New Toolbar dialog box opens.

3	Type the name of the new toolbar and press ENTER. The new, empty toolbar appears in the workspace.

The Customize dialog box opens.

4	Click the category containing a button that you want to add to the toolbar.

5	Click a button to display its description.

6	Drag the button to the new toolbar.

Tips

The buttons available in the Customize dialog box include buttons not on any of the built-in toolbars.

To drag a button from any toolbar except the Ribbon toolbar to your new toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button with the mouse.

To rearrange the buttons on a toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button to its new location.

To delete a button from a toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button off the toolbar.

To delete a toolbar that you have created, select the toolbar and click Delete.


Toolbar Options


General Options

The General tab of the Options dialog box lets you set a variety of high-level options.

Recently Used File List

The Recently Used File List Entries box lets you specify how many files are listed on the File menu. If you set this value to 8, for example, the File menu lists your 8 most recently edited files. To open one of these files, you simply click its name on the File menu. The default setting for this option is 4.

Undo Event Limit

The Undo Event Limit box lets you specify how many actions you can Undo or Redo. The default setting for this value is 5, but you can specify up to 100. The higher the Undo Event Limit, the more memory required.

Auto Save Time Period

The auto save feature of Designer lets you protect your work automatically. At the specified time interval, Designer automatically saves all documents that have been changed since the last save. The auto save feature saves the documents in temporary files. If you have a power outage or some other event that causes your system to shut down without saving your work, then simply reopening Designer lets you recover the lost documents from the auto save files.

You set the time interval at which the auto save occurs in the Auto Save Time Period box. The range for this option is 1 to 120 minutes.

Make Backups on Save

Use this option to retain a copy of the previous version of all document files. Designer appends the extension BAK to the filename. When the Make Backups on Save option is selected, you have two copies of the document on disk, the current version and the previously saved version. The backup version is overwritten each time you save the document.

Output Only One Page to QSF

Select this option if you want only the first page of a document saved when you save the document in QuickSilver QSF format. Deselect this option if you want all pages in the document saved in QSF format.

Because QuickSilver recognizes only the first page of a QSF file, keeping more pages needlessly increases the size of the QSF file. For more information on saving documents in QuickSilver QSF format, see Saving QuickSilver Files.

Offset for Duplicate

The Offset for Duplicate boxes let you set the horizontal and vertical offset used by the Duplicate command on the Edit menu. These options let you control exactly where the duplicate object created by this command appears in relation to the original object.

Use Smart Colorization When Applying Fills to Groups

Select this option to turn on smart colorization for object groups. For more information on smart colorization, see Smart Colorization.


To change the undo event limit

To change snap point sensitivitys


Setting Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Display Options

The Display tab of the Options dialog box provides options affecting the display.

Auto Scroll

When selected, Auto Scroll causes the window to automatically scroll when you drag an object beyond the window borders. This is especially useful when you have zoomed in for close work.

Note

The window auto scrolls only when the cursor (the dragging point) is just outside of the drawing area. In other words, the window auto scrolls when the cursor is dragged onto the rulers at the top and left, the vertical scroll bar at the right, or the horizontal scroll bar/pages/layers tab bar as the bottom of the Designer window. Dragging beyond these narrow areas activates drag/drop and stops the auto scroll. Working with Designer in non-full screen view will make this behavior more apparent.

Display Startup Dialog

Deselect this option if you do not want Designer to begin with the Welcome to Micrografx Designer startup screen.

Suppress New On Startup

Select this option if you do not want Designer to create a new file when it opens. Not creating a new file enables Designer start faster, which can save you time when you plan to open an existing document rather than to create a new one.

Anti-Alias Exported Images

Anti-Aliasing is a technique for reducing the jagged-appearing boundary along the edges of different-colored shapes within a bitmap image. This process blends the boundaries between adjacent colors so that they appear smoother. As a general rule, printed images look better when anti-aliased, but many images designed just for display on the computer screen, such as images for the Web or toolbar buttons, look better when aliased.

Your setting for the Anti-Alias Exported Bitmap option determines whether the default setting for exporting bitmaps is aliased or anti-aliased. If you want the default setting to be anti-aliased, select this option. If you want the default setting to be aliased, deselect this option. For information on exporting bitmaps, see Exporting a Bitmap Image.

Anti-Alias Full Screen View

Select this option if you want bitmap images displayed in Full Screen View to be anti-aliased. For information on selecting the Full Screen View, see Changing the View.

Show Project Help on Start of New Project

Select this option if you want project help displayed when you start a new project.

Image Quality Output

This option controls how enlarged and reshaped bitmap images are rendered to the screen or printer. Select high to render the image at device resolution, medium to render the image at a maximum of four scan lines per image pixel, or low to render the image at a maximum of two scan lines per pixel. Selecting a lower output quality may degrade the appearance of the image, but can reduce display and print rendering times.

Handle Size

This option lets you select small, medium, or large handles for objects.

You can increase or decrease the sensitivity of snap points by changing the handle size. Choose a large handle size to increase the snap range; choose a smaller size to decrease the range.


Changing Snap Point Sensitivity

Setting Options

General Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Ruler Options

The Rulers tab of the Options dialog box provides options affecting the two rulers. The rulers are independent, so you can have different options for each. The ruler settings are saved with the document.

For each ruler, you can choose a unit of measure, the number of snap divisions for each ruler unit, and how the ruler is labeled.

Ruler Unit

You can change the measurement units setting for a ruler by clicking its Units button [image] and choosing the desired units.

Snaps per Unit

The Snaps per Unit value sets the number of divisions per unit. The number of unit divisions affects the number of grid dots that appear when the grid is displayed and how objects snap to the rulers if Snap to Rulers is selected. The grid appears as a pattern of dotted lines that corresponds to divisions in your ruler settings. You can use the grid as a guide for aligning objects or measuring distances. For more information, see Changing the Number of Snaps.

Tip

To prevent the drawing area from becoming too cluttered, Designer limits the number of grid dots and ruler divisions that appear.

Label Frequency

This value specifies how frequently a number appears to label the ruler's units. This option prevents overcrowding the ruler when it is set to small units. For example, when a ruler is set to inches, you might use a value of 1, but when a ruler is set to millimeters, you might prefer a value of 10.

Displayed Precision

The Displayed Precision value sets the decimal precision of the coordinates displayed on the status bar. The box in the Horizontal column sets the precision for the Horizontal and X coordinates. The box in the Vertical column sets the precision for the Vertical and Y coordinates.

Origin

The ruler origin is the point, on or off the page, where the two rulers intersect at zero. The default position for the ruler origin is at the upper left corner of the page. You can set the ruler origin using these boxes, or check them to determine the current position of the ruler origin.

Show Rulers

Select this option to show the rulers, deselect it to hide the rulers.

Show Ruler Position

Select this option to show the colored marks on the rulers that indicate the position of the mouse pointer. Deselect this option to turn off this feature.

Show Grid

Select this option to show the grid, deselect it to hide the grid.


To set the unit of measure for the rulers

To change the ruler origin


Changing the Ruler Origin

Changing the Number of Snaps

Setting Options

General Options

Display Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


To set the unit of measure for the rulers

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box appears.

2	Click the Rulers tab.

3	Click the units button for the ruler you want to change. The units menu appears.

4	Click the units you want, or click Custom Units to define your own unit of measure.

Tips

Setting the ruler units sets the default units for the drawing.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you change the unit of measure for the rulers, click either ruler with the right mouse button.


Ruler Options

Changing the Ruler Origin


Snap Options

The Snap tab of the Options dialog box provides options affecting snap features.

Snap to Ruler

Select this option to turn on snap to rulers. For more information, see Snapping to the Ruler.

Snap to Guides

Select this option to turn on snap to guides. For more information, see Snapping to Guides.

Dragging Snap

Select Dragging Snap to cause an object's bounding box, rather than the mouse pointer, to snap to the rulers or guides when you are dragging (moving) the object. When Dragging Snap is selected, the mouse pointer will continue to snap to rulers or guides when drawing an object.

Dragging Snap has no effect on object or mouse movement if Snap to Ruler and Snap to Guides are not selected.

Object Snap Points

These options determine where Designer places snap points on an object when you click Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar. The options include

Bounds	End Points

Center	Mid Points

Pivot	Control Points

Vertices	Intersection

For more information on using snap points, see Using Snap Points and Choosing Where Snap Points Appear on an Object.


To choose snap point placement


Using Snap Points

Choosing Where Snap Points Appear on an Object

Changing the Number of Snaps

Setting Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Rotation Options

The Rotation tab of the Options dialog box lets you set the rotation angle increment for the F8 key and constrain rotations to angle increments for manual rotation. To change the rotation units setting (degrees or radians), click the Units button [image].

F8 Rotation Increment

You can change the F8 rotation increment by clicking the arrows beside the F8 Rotation Increment box, entering a new value, or dragging the red needle in the dial control.

For details on using the F8 key, see Preset Rotation Key and Constraining Manual Rotation.

Manual Rotation Increment

Setting Manual Rotation Increment to a non-zero value constrains manual rotation to increments of the specified value. For example, if you set the rotation angle to 12 degrees, an object rotates in increments of 12 degrees when you drag its corner rotation handles. To change the Manual Rotation Increment, enter a new value or drag the red needle in the dial control.


Setting Options

Preset Rotation Key

Constraining Manual Rotation

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Input Options

The Input tab of the Options dialog box lets you set options for your mouse buttons and select Designer 3.x keyboard shortcuts.

Left Button Click

By default, if you point to an object in your document and double-click the left mouse button, you enter a reshape mode. (If you double-click a bitmap or an embedded OLE object, another program capable of editing the object is launched instead). If you press and hold the ALT key and then point and click the left mouse button, you can select overlapping objects in succession as in previous versions of Designer.

Function	Default setting

Pick or Edit Objects	Double-click

Pick Among Overlapping Objects	ALT+click

If you prefer, you can reverse the use of the ALT key by deselecting Pick or Edit Objects.

Function	Alternate setting

Pick or Edit Objects	ALT+double-click

Pick Among Overlapping Objects	Click

Mouse and Ctrl/Shift Combinations

By default, holding down CTRL as you drag an object drags a copy of the selected object. Holding down SHIFT constrains the dragging to specific angles (the Office compatible standard).

If you are accustomed to Designer 4.x, you may prefer holding SHIFT for copying and holding CTRL for constrained dragging. Select Designer 4.x to specify 4.x compatibility.

Right Button Click

The default setting of Designer is for a shortcut menu to open when you click the right mouse button and for a specific command to execute when you hold ALT and click the right mouse button. The command executed by ALT+right click is specified by the list box in the Right Button Click section. Click the down arrow to view the available commands.

Function	Default setting

Display shortcut menu	Click right mouse button

Assigned command	ALT+click right mouse button

If you prefer, you can reverse these actions by selecting the list box option.

Function	Alternate setting

Display shortcut menu	ALT+click right mouse button

Assigned command	Click right mouse button

IntelliMouse Wheel

These options let you configure the operation of the IntelliMouse in Designer.

Select Zoom if you want rotating the mouse wheel up or down to zoom the display (rotating up zooms in and rotating down zooms out).

Select Vertical Scroll if you want rotating the mouse wheel up or down to scroll the display vertically.

For either setting, holding down CTRL reverses the action of the wheel. For example, if you have Zoom selected, hold down CTRL and rotate the wheel up or down to scroll vertically.

Designer 3.x Keyboard Shortcuts

If you have used earlier versions of Designer and would like to continue to use the same keyboard shortcuts, select this option.


Setting Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Spelling Options

The Spelling tab of the Options dialog box lets you set various spelling options.

Suggest

The Suggest options let you control how Designer suggests corrections when it finds misspellings. Select Always Suggest if you want Designer to use all open dictionaries when suggesting a correction. Select From Main Dictionary Only if you want Designer to suggest a correction only if it is provided by the main dictionary.

Ignore

The Ignore options let you set Designer to ignore certain types of words when performing spell checking. Select Words in Uppercase if you want Designer to ignore words which are in all uppercase letters. Select Words with Numbers if you want Designer to ignore words containing digits.

Dictionary

The Dictionary options let you set Designer so it uses either the Micrografx or the MS Office dictionary (if available) as its main dictionary when performing spell checking.

Custom Dictionaries

The Custom Dictionaries list lets you select the custom dictionaries used for spell checking. To specify that a dictionary be used, select it in the list.

The New, Add, and Remove buttons let you create new custom dictionaries, add existing dictionaries to the Custom Dictionary list, and remove dictionaries from the list. For more information on using custom dictionaries, see Using Dictionaries.


To use a custom dictionary

To create a custom dictionary


Using Dictionaries

Checking Spelling

Setting Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Registry Settings

Profile Options


Registry Settings

Windows 95 programs save status and other information in a file called the system registry. Changes in the registry are detected by the Windows operating system and programs that monitor the registry.

Normally, you do not have to change registry entries directly. For example:

When you first install Designer, settings are automatically stored in the registry.

When you change a setting in the Windows Control Panel, the setting is automatically stored in the registry.

The registry entries for Designer customize Designer to meet your system's hardware and operating environment needs. Several entries are created by the Micrografx Installer when you install Designer. When necessary, you can use the Registry tab of the Options dialog box to edit those entries and to create new entries as needed. For more information, see Designer Registry Keys and Values.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


To change the value of a registry key

To add a new value to a registry key

To delete a value from a registry key


Designer Registry Keys and Values

Setting Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Profile Options


To change the value of a registry key

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Registry tab.

3	Choose the key name from the Keys list box.

4	In the Value Name list, click the name whose value you want to change.

5	Highlight the old value, type the new value over it, and press ENTER.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Registry Settings

Designer Registry Keys and Values


To add a new value to a registry key

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Registry tab.

3	Choose the key name from the Keys list box.

4	Click New and choose the value type. For example, if the value is numeric, click Numeric Value.

5	Type the name of the new value and press ENTER.

6	Type the new value and press ENTER.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Registry Settings

Designer Registry Keys and Values


To delete a value from a registry key

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Registry tab.

3	Choose the key name from the Keys list box.

4	Choose a name from the Value Name list box.

5	Click Delete.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Registry Settings

Designer Registry Keys and Values


Profile Options

The Profile tab of the Options dialog box lets you manage your profiles.

Profiles are PRO file types that contain all of your personal options. The default profile is called name.PRO, where name is your name. Designer also lets you save your options to other profiles. Unlike with INI files, when you change to a different profile, the changes take effect immediately.

Because profiles are a collection of options, you may want to use a different profile for different kinds of work (such as graphic design or technical illustration). You may want to change options for a particular session or project, and then return to your normal options. If more than one person is running Designer from a file server or sharing a computer, each person can save and use his or her own options.

In addition, you can share profiles with others. Systems administrators may want to use the same profiles for multiple computers to ensure consistency.

By default, your current option settings are saved automatically when you close Designer.


To change profiles

To create a new profile

To copy a profile

To delete a profile

To rename a profile

To update a profile


Setting Options

General Options

Display Options

Ruler Options

Snap Options

Rotation Options

Input Options

Spelling Options

Registry Settings


To change profiles

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Profile tab.

3	Choose a different PRO file from the Profile Document list box.

4	Select Save on Exit if you want Designer to use the new profile the next time Designer is opened.

or

Deselect Save on Exit if you want Designer to use the previous profile the next time Designer is opened.

Tip

Designer now uses the options in the profile to which you changed, and any changes to your options are stored there.


Profile Options


To create a new profile

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Profile tab.

3	Click File Options [image] and click New. The New Profile Document dialog box opens.

4	Type a filename for the new profile and press ENTER. The New Profile Document dialog box closes, and the new filename appears as the current Profile Document.


To copy a profile

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Profile tab.

3	Click File Options [image] and click Copy. The Copy Profile Document dialog box opens.

4	Type a new filename and press ENTER. The Copy Profile Document dialog box closes. The new filename is listed as an option in the Profile Document list box.


To delete a profile

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Profile tab.

3	Choose a file in the Profile Document list box that you want to delete.

4	Click File Options [image] and click Delete. You are asked to confirm that you want to delete the profile.

5	Click Yes to confirm the deletion.


To rename a profile

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Profile tab.

3	Click File Options [image] and click Rename. The Rename Profile Document dialog box opens.

4	Type a new filename and press ENTER. The Rename Profile Document dialog box closes, and the renamed profile appears as the current Profile Document.

Tip

If you want to update the profile manually, you can deselect the Save on Exit option and use the Update command.


To update a profile

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Profile tab.

3	Click File Options [image] and click Update. The current profile is updated with any options that have changed since the last time the profile was saved or updated.


Using the Object Format Dialog Box

The Object Format dialog box contains five tabs that provide easy access to all object and text attributes.

The Line Style tab lets you set the line attributes of objects. For information on using the Line Style tab, see Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box.

The Line Fill tab lets you set the line fill of objects. For information on using the Line Fill tab, see Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box.

The Interior Fill tab lets you set the interior fill of objects. For information on using the Interior Fill tab, see Using the Interior Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box.

The Text tab lets you set the attributes of text. For information on using the Text tab, see Using the Text Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box.

The General tab lets you set or check an object's name, layer, position, and size. You can also access the Coordinates and Properties dialog boxes from this tab. For information on using the General tab, see Using the General Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box.

If you want to keep the Object Format dialog box open, but out of your way, you can roll it up.


To roll up the Object Format dialog box


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Using the Interior Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Using the Text Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Using the General Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box


To roll up the Object Format dialog box

To roll up the Object Format dialog box, click [image] on the title bar.

To unroll the dialog box, click [image].


Using the Object Format Dialog Box


Using the General Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

The General tab of the Object Format dialog box lets you set or check an object's name, layer, position, and size. You can also access the Coordinates and Properties dialog boxes from this tab.

Name

The Name box shows an object's name, if any. You can also set or change an object's name using this box. For more information on naming objects, see Naming (or Renaming) an Object.

Layer

The Layer box shows and lets you change the layer on which an object is located. For more information on layers, see Benefits of Layers.

Position and Size Coordinates

These controls show and let you set an object's position and size. For more information on using coordinates, see Drawing with Coordinates.

Preview Button

The Preview button lets you see the effect of settings on an object. (This button has no effect if no object is selected.) You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

Apply and Close Buttons

As with many of the dialog boxes in Designer, the Object Format box stays open to let you apply changes to objects without having to open the dialog box repeatedly. You can click Apply each time you want to apply a change to a selected object. The dialog box does not close until you click Close.

Rolling Up the Dialog Box

By rolling up the Object Format dialog box, you can keep it accessible, but out of your way. Click [image] on the title bar to roll up the dialog box. Click [image] to unroll it.


To roll up the Object Format dialog box


Using the Object Format Dialog Box

Naming (or Renaming) an Object

Benefits of Layers

Drawing with Coordinates


Changing the Ruler Origin

The ruler origin is the point, on or off the page, where the two rulers intersect at zero. The default position for the ruler origin is at the upper left corner of the page. Using the mouse, you can easily change the placement of the ruler origin.


To change the ruler origin

To set the unit of measure for the rulers


Ruler Options


To change the ruler origin

1	If the rulers are not showing, open the View menu, point to Workspace, and click Show Rulers.

2	Point to the button at the upper left corner of the workspace where the two rulers intersect and press and hold the left mouse button.

3	Drag the mouse pointer to the desired ruler origin position.

4	Release the mouse button. The zero point on each ruler changes to reflect the new placement.

Tips

If you have selected Snap to Rulers on the Snap submenu of the Tools menu, the new ruler origin also snaps to the rulers. This ensures that your grid remains the same. If you have deselected Snap to Rulers, the new ruler origin is placed at the exact point where you "drop" it.

You can quickly reset the ruler origin to its default position at the corner of the page by double-clicking the left mouse button at the intersection of the two rulers.


Changing the Ruler Origin

Ruler Options


Using Guides

A guide is a non-printing line that provides an easy way to align objects. Guides can help organize the layout of your drawing by guiding the placement of your objects. You can use guides as visual cues for where to place objects, or you can snap objects to guides for more exact placement. For more information on snapping to guides, see Snapping to Guides.

Using the mouse, you can quickly add, move and delete guides. Using the Guides Manager, you can define precisely a guide's location, add multiple guides, and set the color of guides. To open the Guides Manager, click Guides Manager on the Tools menu.

You can lock guides to prevent them from being moved accidentally, and hide guides when you don't need to see them.

Guides appear on all pages and layers, and are saved with your document.


To add a guide using the mouse

To add a guide using the Guides Manager

To add multiple guides using the Guides Manager

To delete a guide

To lock or unlock guides

To change the color of guides

To turn Snap to Guides on or off


Snapping to Guides


To add a guide using the mouse

1	Move the Select pointer to the top or side ruler (for a horizontal or vertical guideline, respectively).

2	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a guide to the desired position in the drawing area.

3	Release the left mouse button.

Tips

You can add as many guides as you need.

If guides are not locked, you can move a guide by dragging it with the Select pointer.

To delete a guide, just drag and drop it onto the ruler with the Select pointer.


Using Guides

Snapping to Guides


To add a guide using the Guides Manager

1	On the Tools menu, click Guides Manager. The Guides Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click Horizontal or Vertical to choose the guide type.

3	Click Single.

4	Type the guide location in the position spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Click Add to add the guide. The new guide appears in the Guides List.

Tips

To replace a guide, select the guide in the Guides List, type the guide's new location in the position spin box, and click Replace.

To delete a guide, select the guide in the Guides List and click Delete.


To add multiple guides using the Guides Manager

1	On the Tools menu, click Guides Manager. The Guides Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click Horizontal or Vertical to choose the guide type.

3	Click Multiple.

4	Type the position of the first guide in the Starting Position spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Type the position of the last guide in the Ending Position spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

6	Type the distance between the guides in the Increment spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value. The Guide Count value shows the number of guides you have defined.

7	Click Add to add the guides. The new guides appear in the Guides List.

Tips

To replace a guide, select the guide in the Guides List, type the guide's new location in the position spin box, and click Replace.

To delete a guide, select the guide in the Guides List and click Delete.


To delete a guide

1	Make sure guides are unlocked. On the View menu, point to Workspace, and click Lock Guides to deselect it, if necessary.

2	Move the Select pointer to the guide you want to delete. The pointer changes to the guide pointer.

3	Drag the guide onto the ruler.

Tip

You can also delete a guide, or delete all guides, using the Guides Manager.


To lock or unlock guides

To lock guides, open the View menu, point to Workspace, and select Lock Guides.

To unlock guides, open the View menu, point to Workspace, and deselect Lock Guides.

Tip

You can also lock or unlock guides using the Guides Manager.


To change_the_color_of_guides
To change the color of guides

1	On the Tools menu, click Guides Manager. The Guides Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click Guides Color and choose the color you want.

Tip

To display a shortcut menu that lets you open the Guides Manager, click either ruler with the right mouse button.


Setting Up a Page

Use the Page Setup command on the File menu to change the size and orientation of the current page in the active window.

Page Setup displays a tabbed dialog box that lets you change the size, margins, and orientation of the active window's on-screen page. You can change page settings before, during, or after creating a drawing.

Tip

If you change the page setup and plan to print your work, you should change the printer setup to match. For information on changing the printer setup, see Selecting and Setting Up Your Printer.

New page settings are applied immediately to the current page in the active window.

Individual pages in your document can have different sizes, orientations, and page fills, if desired. To apply the same size, orientation, and page fill to all pages in the document, select Apply to All Pages. This option, like Use Master Page, forces all pages to be uniform.

Paper Size

Use the list box on the Paper Size tab to choose the size of the current page. You can choose from standard page sizes or create your own by adjusting the Width and Height measurements. If you enter dimensions for Width and Height that do not match one of the standard page sizes, the Page Size selection changes to Custom Size.

35 mm	Use this selection in the Page Size list box when preparing slides rather than paper documents. The page size is set to the proper proportions for slides.

Screen Size	Use this selection in the Page Size list box when preparing on-screen presentations (slideshows) using the Page Manager tool [image]. Choosing this option sets the page size to match the size, proportions, and resolution of your computer monitor.

Use Master Page	If you choose the Use Master Page option, the page matches the size, orientation, and page fill (if any) of the master page. For information on using the master page, see Using the Master Page.

Use Printable Area	Choose the Use Printable Area option to force the on-screen page to reflect your printer's page size and margins. For example, if your printer uses an 8.5" x 11" page with 1/2 inch margins, the on-screen page matches it.

Units	The Units button [image] shows the current page size measurement units. To change the units setting, click this button.

Width and Height	The Width and Height boxes show the measurements for the current page size. You can create a custom page size by changing these settings. Click the arrows to change its setting.

Page Orientation	The Page Orientation options determine the page layout. Select Portrait to layout the page so that the vertical dimension is longer than the horizontal dimension. Select Landscape to layout the page so that the horizontal dimension is longer than the vertical dimension.

Apply to All Pages	Select this option if you want to apply the settings to all pages in your document rather than only to the current page.

Margins

The Top, Bottom, Left, and Right boxes on the Margins tab let you set the page margins (border widths). You can use margins as boundary guides for creating drawings. Type the margins you want, or use the arrows to set the widths. The measurement unit for margins is displayed on the Units button (for example, inches or centimeters).

Most printers do not print to the edge of the paper. Margins include this non-printing area. For example, if your margin is 1/2 inch and the non-printing area is 1/4 inch, the margin is 1/2 inch from the edge.

Preview	The preview box shows the number of columns and rows of tiles used when the current page size is printed to the target printer. If the page size is set to use Printable Area and the Page Orientation matches the orientation of the target printer, no tiling is used, and the number for columns and rows are both set to 1.

If you enter new values for columns and rows, the page size changes to match. If you want to display tile lines on your screen as you work, click Workspace on the View menu, and then click Show Printer Page Tiles on the Workspace submenu.

Show Page Crop Marks	Select Show Page Crop Marks to display and print crop marks on the page. Crop marks are used by print shops to determine alignment and trim margins.

For example, suppose you set your page size to a custom size of 7 inches x 9 inches, set all four margins to zero, and you print to a printer with 8.5 x 11 inch paper. Your custom page is centered on the printer's paper. When you select Show Page Crop Marks, four sets of crop marks print at the corners of your custom page area.

Page Fill	Page Fill lets you choose a background for the entire page, such as a gradient fill for a slide or a solid color, to simulate printing on colored paper.

You can select or deselect Page Fill for individual pages in your document. When you click the Page Fill button, the Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens. You can apply any kind of fill or pattern to the overall page as a background for your drawings. For more information on fills, see Using Fills and Patterns.


To set up a page

To set up multiple pages

To set up and use the master page


Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using the Master Page

Using Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar

Sorting Pages


To set up a page

1	Choose the page you want to set up by clicking its tab on the Page Tab Bar.

2	On the File menu, click Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box opens.

3	Choose the page size, orientation, margins, and other options that you want.


Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using the Master Page

Using Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar

Sorting Pages


Setting Up Multiple Pages

You can use the Page Manager tool [image] to select any number of pages in your document and set them up with the same size, orientation, margins, page fill, and so forth.


To set up multiple pages

To set up a page

To set up and use the master page


Setting Up a Page

Using the Master Page

Using Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar

Sorting Pages


To set up multiple pages

1	Open a document with multiple pages.

2	Click Page Manager [image] in the toolbox. Thumbnail images are displayed for each page in the document.

3	Press and hold CTRL and click each page you want to setup.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Page Setup [image]. The Page Setup dialog box opens.

5	Choose the page size, orientation, margins, and other options that you want.


Setting Up Multiple Pages

Setting Up a Page

Using the Master Page

Using Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar

Sorting Pages


Using the Master Page

Every Designer document has a master page. You can use the master page to make all the pages in your document consistent in size, orientation, margins, and page fill. The size of the master page defaults to match the printable area of your target printer.

If you want certain graphic or text objects, such as a title or border, to appear on every page, you can place these objects on the master page. These repeated objects are called master items.


To set up and use the master page

To set up a page

To set up multiple pages


Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar

Sorting Pages


To set up and use the master page

1	Create a new document.

2	Click the Master Page tab on the Page Tab Bar at the bottom of the document. The master page displays.

3	On the File menu, click Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box opens.

4	Choose page size and orientation to match your target printer, and adjust the margins if necessary.

5	If you want a background color or fill, click Page Fill on the Margins tab.

6	Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

7	Place any items on the master page that you want to appear on all your pages.

8	Use the Master Page as the Page Size for all other pages in your document.

Tips

You can create and edit objects on the master page as with other pages by clicking the Master Page tab and making your changes. However, you cannot select or change master items unless the master page is the current page; this protects the master items from accidental changes.

If you have a page in the document that you want to be different from the rest, you can display that page, choose the Page Setup command, and change the Page Size in the Page Setup dialog box to something other than Use Master Page. You can then make any changes you want to orientation, margins, and other options. Master items do not appear on pages that are not set up to use the master page.


Using the Master Page

Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar

Sorting Pages


Using Multiple Pages

Designer lets you define as many pages as you want for your documents.

Individual pages in a document can be of different sizes and orientations (portrait, landscape). Each page can be set up differently if needed.

If you want to remove an object from a page temporarily, you can drag it off of the page onto the working area. The object remains there until you need it again. However, if you select another page, it is not visible.


To select multiple pages

To select multiple pages that are not next to each other


Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using the Master Page

Using the Page Tab Bar

Sorting Pages


To select multiple pages

1	Open a document with multiple pages.

2	Click Page Manager [image] in the Toolbox. The drawing area changes to Page Manager view.

3	Click the first page you want to select.

4	Press and hold SHIFT and click the last page you want to select. Designer selects every page between the two pages you selected.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Page Manager is CTRL+G.


Using Multiple Pages

Setting Up a Page

Using the Master Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar

Sorting Pages


To select multiple pages that are not next to each other

1	Open a document with multiple pages.

2	Click Page Manager [image] in the Toolbox. The drawing area changes to Page Manager view.

3	Click the first page you want to select.

4	Press and hold CTRL and click the other pages you want to select. Only the pages you click are selected.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Page Manager is CTRL+G.


Using the Page Tab Bar

At the bottom of each document is a Page Tab Bar that shows the Pages button [image], a Master Page tab, and a tab for each page defined for that document. The tabs show the names of the pages and the order in which the pages are arranged. The current page is indicated by a white tab.

The initial name of each page is Page 1, Page 2, Page 3, and so forth. Page 1 is the back page.

Scroll arrows appear on the Page Tab Bar when the tab bar contains more page tabs than can be shown at once.

Click Pages [image] to open the Pages dialog box. The Pages dialog box lets you add, delete, and rename pages while viewing a page list. Click the right mouse button on any page tab to open the Page menu. The Page menu lets you perform operations on the clicked page, add new pages, and open the Pages dialog box.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Pages dialog box is CTRL+F9.


To view a different page in the document

To add a page

To delete a page

To rename a page

To sort pages in a document


Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using the Master Page

Using Multiple Pages

Sorting Pages


To view a different page in the document

On the Page Tab Bar at the bottom of the document, click the tab of the page you want to work with.

You may need to scroll the Page Tab Bar to locate the tab.

Tips

You can easily move from page to page with the keyboard shortcuts CTRL+PAGE UP, CTRL+PAGE DOWN, CTRL+HOME, and CTRL+END. Press CTRL+PAGE UP to move to the next (higher-numbered) page. Press CTRL+PAGE DOWN to move to the previous (lower-numbered) page. Press CTRL+HOME to move to the first page. Press CTRL+END to move to the last page.

You can adjust the width of the Page Tab Bar by dragging the divider between the Page and Layer Tab Bars.


Using the Page Tab Bar

Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using the Master Page

Using Multiple Pages

Sorting Pages


To add a page

1	Click the right mouse button on any tab of the Page Tab Bar. The Page menu opens.

2	On the Page menu, click Add Page. The new page becomes the current page and is added to the Page Tab Bar as the front page.

Tip

You can also add pages using the Pages dialog box.


To delete a page

1	On the Page Tab Bar, right click the tab of the page you want to delete. The Page menu opens.

2	On the Page menu, click Delete Page.

Notes

You cannot delete the current page. To delete the current page, you must first make another page the current page.

When you delete a page, all objects on the page are deleted.

Tips

If you delete a page by mistake, use the Undo command to reverse the deletion.

You can also delete pages using the Pages dialog box.


To rename a page

1	On the Page Tab Bar, right click the tab of the page you want to rename. The Page menu opens.

2	On the Page menu, click Rename Page. The Page Name dialog box opens.

3	Type the new name and press ENTER.

Tips

It is a good idea to rename the pages you create. Until a page is renamed, it is named Page 1, Page 2, Page 3, and so forth. Renaming a page lets you easily identify its purpose and use, and track its position in the document.

You can also rename pages using the Pages dialog box.


Sorting Pages

You can easily sort or otherwise reorder pages in a document using the Page Manager tool [image].


To sort pages in a document


Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using the Master Page

Using Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar


To sort pages in a document

1	Open a document with multiple pages.

2	Click Page Manager [image] in the Toolbox. The drawing area changes to Page Manager view.

3	Select a page and drag it to the beginning, end, or middle of the sequence.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Page Manager is CTRL+G.

A vertical cursor bar displays as you drag the page to a different point in the sequence, indicating its position. As you sort pages, they are automatically renumbered.

If your document has more pages than fit on the screen, use the scroll bar to display the other pages.

To insert a page between two other pages, you can add a new page at the end of the document (in the normal single-page view) and then drag the new page into the correct sequence (in Page Manager view).


Sorting Pages

Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Using the Master Page

Using Multiple Pages

Using the Page Tab Bar


Benefits of Layers

Designer lets you create layers for each page of your document. This allows you to place some objects on one layer, others on another layer, and so forth, just as you might with several overhead transparencies. Layers help you:

Manage complex drawings with many overlapping objects

Categorize objects that logically belong together by layer

View certain objects in your drawing while hiding others

Easily select and edit objects

Protect objects from accidental changes

Trace from a template on another layer

Print certain objects only

Each page in a Designer drawing has one layer by default. Until renamed, the layers are identified as Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, and so forth. Layer 1 is the back layer. The number of layers you can use is virtually unlimited [image] 32,767. Layers always remain perfectly aligned with one another.

Designer lets you do the following with layers.

Rename the layers

Add and delete layers

Change the order of layers

Lock layers (so that objects cannot be changed)

Display or hide selected layers

Specify layers as printable or non-printable

Use one color (for easy identification) or multiple colors on a layer

Move objects from one layer to another

Edit all the layers or edit one layer at a time

Tip

Designer does not store a layer that has no objects on it unless you have renamed the layer.


To change to a different layer

To add a layer

To delete a layer

To rename a layer

To change the order of layers

To move an object to a different layer

To edit all layers

To show or hide layers

To make a layer printable or non-printable

To lock or unlock layers

To select multiple layers

To select multiple layers that are not next to each other

To change a layer to a single color layer

To hide or lock individual objects

To show or unlock all objects


Using the Layer Tab Bar

Showing and Hiding Layers

Printable Layers

Locking and Unlocking Layers

Using the Layer Manager

Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers

Hiding and Locking Individual Objects


Using the Layer Tab Bar

At the bottom of each page is a Layer Tab Bar that shows the Layers [image] button and a tab for each layer defined for that page. The tabs show the names of the layers and the order in which the layers are arranged. The current layer is indicated by a white tab. When a layer is hidden, the name on that tab is gray.

The initial name of each layer is Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, and so forth. Layer 1 is the back layer.

Scroll arrows appear on the Layer Tab Bar when the tab bar contains more layer tabs than can be shown at once.

Click Layers [image] to open the Layer Manager. The Layer Manager lets you perform operations on single or multiple layers. Click the right mouse button on any layer tab to open the Layer menu. The Layer menu lets you perform operations on the clicked layer, select or clear the Edit All Layers option, and open the Layer Manager.


To change to a different layer

To add a layer

To delete a layer

To rename a layer

To change the order of layers

To move an object to a different layer

To edit all layers

To show or hide layers

To make a layer printable or non-printable

To lock or unlock layers

To select multiple layers

To select multiple layers that are not next to each other

To change a layer to a single color layer

To hide or lock individual objects

To show or unlock all objects


Benefits of Layers

Showing and Hiding Layers

Printable Layers

Locking and Unlocking Layers

Using the Layer Manager

Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers

Hiding and Locking Individual Objects


To change to a different layer

On the Layer Tab Bar at the bottom of the page, click the tab of the layer you want to work with.

You may need to scroll the Layer Tab Bar to locate the tab.

Note

When a layer is hidden, the name of the layer on the tab is gray. You cannot switch to a hidden layer while it remains hidden. To make a layer visible, right click the layer's tab and select Visible.

Tip

You can easily move from layer to layer with the keyboard shortcuts SHIFT+PAGE UP and SHIFT+PAGE DOWN. Press SHIFT+PAGE UP to move to a higher-numbered layer. Press SHIFT+PAGE DOWN to move to a lower-numbered layer.


Benefits of Layers

Using the Layer Tab Bar

Showing and Hiding Layers

Printable Layers

Locking and Unlocking Layers

Using the Layer Manager

Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers

Hiding and Locking Individual Objects


To add a layer

1	Click the right mouse button on any tab of the Layer Tab Bar. The Layer menu opens.

2	On the Layer menu, click Add Layer. The new layer becomes the current layer and is added to the Layer Tab Bar as the front layer.

Tip

You can also add layers using the Layer Manager.


To delete a layer

1	On the Layer Tab Bar, right click the tab of the layer you want to delete. The Layer menu opens.

2	On the Layer menu, click Delete Layer.

Notes

You cannot delete the current layer. To delete the current layer, you must first make another layer the current layer.

When you delete a layer, all objects on the layer are deleted.

Tip

If you delete a layer by mistake, use the Undo command to reverse the deletion.


To rename a layer

1	On the Layer Tab Bar, right click the tab of the layer you want to rename. The Layer menu opens.

2	On the Layer menu, click Rename Layer. The Layer Name dialog box opens.

3	Type the new name and press ENTER.

Tip

It is a good idea to rename the layers you create. Until a layer is renamed, it is named Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, and so forth. Renaming a layer lets you easily identify its purpose and use, and track its position in the layer list.


To change the order of layers

1	On the Layer Tab Bar, right click the tab of the layer you want to reorder. The Layer menu opens.

2	To move the layer one level toward the back of the list, click Move Layer Up.

or

To move the layer one level toward the front of the list, click Move Layer Down.

Tip

To track the position of layers, you must rename them. If you keep the default layer names (Layer 1, Layer 2, and so forth), then the layer that was identified as Layer 3 will become Layer 2 when it is moved to the second layer position. The default names indicate only the relative position of the layers. When you rename a layer, that name becomes a property of the layer and moves with the layer when you reorder it.


To move an object to a different layer

1	Select the object you want to move to a different layer.

2	Click the right mouse button on any tab of the Layer Tab Bar. The Layer menu opens.

3	On the Layer menu, click Move to Layer. The Move to Layer dialog box opens.

4	Click the layer to which you want to move the object.

Note

When you move objects to another layer, you make that layer the current layer.


To edit all layers

1	Click the right mouse button on any tab of the Layer Tab Bar. The Layer menu opens.

2	On the Layer menu, select Edit All Layers.

Editing all layers lets you select, move, and edit all objects on the page, regardless of the layer on which they are located.

Clear the Edit All Layers option to return to single-layer selection and editing.

Tips

You cannot move an object on a lower layer in front of an object on a higher layer. You can, however, change the order of layers so that the entire layer and its contents move in front of another layer.

New objects are always placed on the current layer, even when you are editing all layers.


Showing and Hiding Layers

You cannot hide the current layer. If you make a hidden layer the current layer, it is no longer hidden.

Hidden layers are not printed, so you can hide layers not only in your display but also in your printout. If you want to print all of the layers in a drawing, be sure to make all layers visible before you print.


Benefits of Layers

Using the Layer Tab Bar

Printable Layers

Locking and Unlocking Layers

Using the Layer Manager

Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers

Hiding and Locking Individual Objects


To show or hide layers

1	On the Layer Tab Bar, right click the tab of the layer you want to show or hide. The Layer menu opens.

2	Select Visible to show the layer.

Clear Visible to hide the layer.

Tips

To speed up the redraw of complicated drawings, hide the layers that you are not working with currently.

You can show or hide multiple layers using the Layer Manager.


Printable Layers

You can make layers printable or non-printable. By default, all layers are printable.

Tip

Hidden layers cannot be set to printable.


Benefits of Layers

Using the Layer Tab Bar

Showing and Hiding Layers

Locking and Unlocking Layers

Using the Layer Manager

Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers

Hiding and Locking Individual Objects


To make a layer printable or non-printable

1	On the Layer Tab Bar, right click the tab of the layer you want to make printable or non-printable. The Layer menu opens.

2	Select Printable to make the layer printable.

Clear Printable to make the layer non-printable.

Tip

You can make multiple layers printable or non-printable using the Layer Manager.


Locking and Unlocking Layers

When a layer is locked, it can either be displayed or hidden, but it cannot be edited or deleted. You cannot lock the current layer.


Benefits of Layers

Using the Layer Tab Bar

Showing and Hiding Layers

Printable Layers

Using the Layer Manager

Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers

Hiding and Locking Individual Objects


To lock or unlock layers

1	On the Layer Tab Bar, right click the tab of the layer you want to lock or unlock. The Layer menu opens.

2	Select Locked to lock the layer.

Clear Locked to unlock the layer.

Tip

You can lock or unlock multiple layers using the Layer Manager.


Using the Layer Manager

The Layer Manager lists the layers defined for the current page and lets you perform layer operations on single or multiple layers. In the Layer Manger:

The name of the current layer is red. The current layer is the layer on which new objects are placed and the layer being edited, unless the Edit All Layers option is selected.

A visible layer is indicated by a lit bulb [image] beside the layer's name. A hidden layer is indicated by an unlit bulb [image] beside the layer's name.

A non-printable layer is indicated by the presence of a non-printable icon [image] beside the layer's name.

A locked layer is indicated by a locked icon [image] beside the layer's name.

A single-color layer is indicated by a swatch of the layer's color beside the layer's name.

In addition to letting you change the visible, print, lock, and color properties of layers, the Layer Manager lets you select the current layer; add, delete, and rename layers; change the order of layers; move objects to different layers; and specify whether you want to edit the current or all layers.


Benefits of Layers

Using the Layer Tab Bar

Showing and Hiding Layers

Printable Layers

Locking and Unlocking Layers

Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers

Hiding and Locking Individual Objects


To select multiple layers

1	Create or open a document with multiple layers.

2	Click Layers [image] on the Layer Tab Bar at the bottom of the active window. The Layer Manager opens.

3	Click the first layer you want to select.

4	Press and hold SHIFT and click the last layer you want to select. Every layer between the two layers is selected.

You can now perform a layer operation on the selected layers.

Tip

You can also open the Layer Manager by pressing CTRL+F10.


To select multiple layers that are not next to each other

1	Create or open a document with multiple layers.

2	Click Layers [image] on the Layer Tab Bar at the bottom of the active window. The Layer Manager opens.

3	Click the first layer you want to select.

4	Press and hold CTRL and click the other layers you want to select. Only the layers you click are selected.

You can now perform a layer operation on the selected layers.

Tip

You can also open the Layer Manager by pressing CTRL+F10.


Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers

You can make every object on a particular layer the same color. Using single-color layers can help you visually keep track of which objects are on which layer. Designer lets you mix single-color layers and multiple-color layers in the same drawing.

By default, a layer is multicolor. If you limit a particular layer to a single color, all existing objects and all subsequent objects are filled with the single color. You can use the current default layer color or click Single-Color Layer [image] on the Layers Manager to choose a different color.


Benefits of Layers

Using the Layer Tab Bar

Showing and Hiding Layers

Printable Layers

Locking and Unlocking Layers

Using the Layer Manager

Hiding and Locking Individual Objects


To change a layer to a single-color layer

1	Click Layers [image] on the Layer Tab Bar at the bottom of the active window. The Layer Manager opens.

2	Choose the layer that you want to make a single color.

3	Click Single Color [image]. A color swatch appears beside the layer name in the layers list box.

4	Click the color button and choose a color from the color palette.

Tips

If you skip step 4, the default layer color is applied.

To change a layer back to a multicolor layer, open the Layer Manager, select the layer, and click Multicolor [image]. The objects on the layer change back to their previous colors.

You can also open the Layer Manager by pressing CTRL+F10.


Hiding and Locking Individual Objects

In addition to letting you hide or lock all objects on a specified layer, Designer lets you hide or lock individual objects.

Temporarily hiding objects may speed screen redraw time, especially if the objects include gradient fills or bitmaps. Locking objects may be desirable if you want to ensure that you do not accidentally move or resize them.


Benefits of Layers

Using the Layer Tab Bar

Showing and Hiding Layers

Printable Layers

Locking and Unlocking Layers

Using the Layer Manager

Using Multicolor or Single-Color Layers


To hide or lock individual objects

1	Select one or more objects to hide or lock.

2	On the Object menu, click Hide or Lock.


To show or unlock all objects

On the Object menu, click Show All or Unlock All.


PRINTING.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Adding, Removing, and Connecting Printers

Windows uses a software program called a printer driver that communicates with your printer or other output device. Printer drivers are provided with Windows.

The Windows Control Panel lets you add, remove, and set up printer drivers. You can add multiple printer drivers if you use more than one type of printer.

If you want to use a printer that is not connected to your computer, you can force the driver to send its output directly to a file on disk by specifying FILE as the printer port. You then can take the disk to a computer that is connected to the desired printer and copy (using the COPY command in DOS) the output file to the printer.

See your Windows documentation for instructions on adding or removing a printer and connecting a printer to a port.


Selecting and Setting Up Your Printer

Using a Pen Plotter

Printing with Layers

Fonts and Printing

Printable and Non-Printable Areas

Tiling

Basic Printing Methods


Selecting and Setting Up Your Printer

After you add a printer, you can select and set up the target (default) printer with the Windows Control Panel, or you can select a printer and change the setup as needed in Designer. Setup choices vary from one printer to another, but common options include changing the orientation (portrait or landscape), paper size, and paper source.

Selecting the Target Printer

To change the target printer, click the printer name in the Print Setup dialog box. The box opens to show the list of installed printers. You can then choose a different target printer.

Setting the Printer’s Properties

To open the property sheet for the selected printer, click Properties in the Print Setup dialog box. You can make changes such as changing the orientation (portrait or landscape) and scaling the printout.


To select a target printer

To set up a target printer


Adding, Removing, and Connecting Printers

Setting Up a Page


To select a target printer

1	On the File menu, click Print Setup. The Print Setup dialog box opens.

2	Click the arrow beside the Name box and choose the printer you want to use.

Tip

If your printer is not listed in the Name box, open the Windows Control Panel and add it.


Selecting and Setting Up Your Printer


To set up a target printer

1	On the File menu, click Print Setup. The Print Setup dialog box opens.

2	Click the arrow beside the Name box and choose the printer you want.

3	Click Properties. The property sheet for the selected printer driver opens.

4	Select the options you want. Make sure the orientation (portrait or landscape) matches the on-screen orientation.

Tip

If your printer is not listed in the Name box, open the Windows Control Panel and add it.


Using a Pen Plotter

If you are using a pen plotter instead of a printer, you should be aware of a few differences.

Bitmaps and bitmap fill patterns do not plot.

To avoid plotter pen damage (due to staining), you may want to use the Vector Clipping option in the Print Document dialog box.

You should create a special color palette that matches the colors of the pens used by your plotter.


Adding, Removing, and Connecting Printers

Selecting and Setting Up Your Printer

Vector Clipping


Printing with Layers

If you have multiple layers in your drawing, you can make selected layers visible or invisible. You can also make selected layers printable or non-printable.

Only visible layers will print. To omit certain layers from a printout, you can either make them non-printable or make them invisible.


Benefits of Layers

Fonts and Printing

Printable and Non-Printable Areas

Tiling

Basic Printing Methods


Fonts and Printing

Using scalable fonts is the best way to avoid differences between displayed and printed text.

Scalable Fonts

Scalable fonts are fonts that can be sized or rotated as needed. TrueType fonts are an example of scalable fonts. They give you WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) printed output. Windows handles the tasks of displaying, scaling, and printing TrueType fonts so that separate screen fonts are not necessary.

Adobe Type Manager, if you have it installed, handles the display, scaling, and printing of Type 1 fonts and also ensures that these fonts are treated as scalable fonts and are not limited to PostScript printers.

If, however, you use non-scalable, device-dependent printer fonts (such as cartridge fonts with an HP LaserJet printer), you should read and understand the next section.

Device-Dependent Fonts

Device-dependent printer fonts, including cartridge fonts and soft fonts, are limited to the set of typefaces, point sizes, and styles supported by your printer. If you create a document with one printer specified, use its printer fonts, and then change to a different target printer, the fonts displayed in the document change. This may not be evident from the on-screen appearance.

For example, suppose you specify a PostScript printer and have 12-point Bookman text with 20-point Avant Garde headlines in your document. If you change to a printer that does not support these fonts, Designer chooses the closest available fonts, which will not display or print as you expect. You can either change back to a PostScript printer or change the fonts in the document to fonts supported by the new printer.

Designer also substitutes the closest available font when you use a device-dependent font and then rotate the text.


Installing Fonts

Printable and Non-Printable Areas

Tiling

Basic Printing Methods


Printable and Non-Printable Areas

Most printers do not print to the edge of the paper. Margins include this nonprinting area. For example, if your margin is 1/2 inch and the nonprinting area is 1/4 inch, the margin is 1/2 inch from the edge.

If part of your drawing extends into the nonprinting area, the portion in the nonprinting area is not printed.


Fonts and Printing

Tiling

Basic Printing Methods


Tiling

If the current page size is larger than the paper size of your printer or plotter, the entire drawing page is printed with as many printer pages as needed. This process is called tiling.

When the page size is larger than the printer’s paper size, the printer pages can be assembled like individual pieces of tile to compose the entire drawing.

Tiling lets you print proofs of a large drawing, such as a B size (11" x 17"), on a printer that uses a smaller paper size, such as A size (8.5" x 11"). Tiling also lets you print banners that are made up of multiple pages.

Designer automatically tiles to two printer pages when you print an 11" x 17" drawing page to a printer with 8.5" x 11" paper.

Page tiles are numbered top to bottom beginning at the top left of the drawing page.

You can print selected page tiles by entering page and tile numbers in the Page Range box in the Print Document dialog box.

You can show or hide tile lines on the current page by selecting or deselecting Show Printer Page Tiles in the Workspace submenu of the Display menu.


Setting Up a Page

Printable and Non-Printable Areas

Basic Printing Methods


Basic Printing Methods

You can use the Print Document dialog box to choose printing options. The Print Document dialog box lets you print the document in the active window. You can specify the current page, all pages, or selected pages from the document; the number of copies to be printed; whether to collate the copies; whether to include page labels; and whether to use vector clipping (for use with a pen plotter).

You also can print multiple documents.

To print crop marks, select Show Page Crop Marks on the Margins tab of the Page Setup dialog box.

You can use Current Page to print only the currently displayed page, no matter how many pages are in your document.

You can use Selection to print only the selected objects on the current page. Selected objects do not change in size or position in the printout.

You can use View to print an area that you define (by dragging a rectangle). The area is scaled to fit the printable area of the printer page.


To print the active document

To print the current page

To print a selection

To print a defined area

To create a separator-compatible EPS file


Printing Page Ranges

Collating Printed Pages

Printing Mirror Images

Vector Clipping

Output for Separator

Fitting a Document to the Page

Centering a Printout on the Page

Printing Multiple Documents


To print the current page

On the File menu, point to Print, and then click Current Page. All objects on the current page are printed.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for printing the current page is CTRL+P.


Basic Printing Methods


To print a selection

1	Select the objects on the current page you want to print.

2	On the File menu, point to Print, and then click Selection. All selected objects are printed.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for printing a selection is CTRL+SHIFT+P.


To print a defined area

1	On the File menu, point to Print, and then click View. The print view pointer appears.

2	Position the print view pointer at one corner of the area you want to print, and press and hold the left mouse button.

3	Drag a bounding box around the area you want to print. Release the mouse button. The defined area is printed.


To print the active document

1	On the File menu, point to Print, and then click Document. The Print Document dialog box opens.

2	Click the arrow beside the printer box and choose the printer you want.

3	Click All to print all pages.

4	Type the number of copies you want to print.

5	Choose the other options you want.

6	Click Print. The document is printed.


Printing Page Ranges

If desired, you can print only the pages or page tiles you need. For example, if you have a ten-page document, you can type 1,3-5,10 to print pages 1, 3, 4, 5, and 10.

In the Print Document dialog box, enter a page number separated by a comma to print a page; enter a range with the first and last pages separated by a hyphen to print a sequence of pages. To specify a page tile, enter a page number, a colon, and a tile number.

Type	To Print

1,2,6-9	Pages 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9

6-	Pages 6, 7, 8, to the end of the document

1:2	Page 1, tile 2

1:4, 2:6	Page 1, tile 4 and page 2, tile 6

3:8-4:5	Page 3, tile 8 through page 4, tile 5


Basic Printing Methods

Collating Printed Pages

Printing Mirror Images

Vector Clipping

Output for Separator

Fitting a Document to the Page

Centering a Printout on the Page

Printing Multiple Documents


Collating Printed Pages

The Collate option in the Print Document dialog box prints a complete copy of a document before printing the next copy. Collate is only available when you print more than one copy of a multiple-page document. Collating can slow the print speed on some printers.


Basic Printing Methods

Printing Page Ranges

Printing Mirror Images

Vector Clipping

Output for Separator

Fitting a Document to the Page

Centering a Printout on the Page

Printing Multiple Documents


Printing Mirror Images

The Mirror option in the Print Document dialog box flips a drawing so that it prints reversed (as if viewed in a mirror) and upside down. The Mirror option is available only with certain printer drivers. This option is gray if the printer driver does not support mirroring.


Basic Printing Methods

Printing Page Ranges

Collating Printed Pages

Vector Clipping

Output for Separator

Fitting a Document to the Page

Centering a Printout on the Page

Printing Multiple Documents


Vector Clipping

Vector clipping improves the output of drawings on pen plotters by causing the top object of overlapping drawings to completely cover the back object (this is done automatically with non-plotting printers).

Vector clipping also prevents the damage to plotter pens that can occur when different colors are drawn over each other. For example, a yellow line drawn over a black line can permanently stain the yellow pen.

The Vector Clipping option in the Print Document dialog box is available only when you are using a plotter. This option increases the time it takes to plot your drawing.


Basic Printing Methods

Printing Page Ranges

Collating Printed Pages

Printing Mirror Images

Output for Separator

Fitting a Document to the Page

Centering a Printout on the Page

Printing Multiple Documents

Using a Pen Plotter


Output for Separator

Designer does not produce color separations directly, but lets you create an EPS file that provides the following:

Color separator information

Spot color support

Overprint stroke (line) and fill information

Most service bureaus have software that can make color separations from this EPS file. You can also process this file and make color separations with programs such as Quark Express and Adobe PageMaker.

The target printer page size is used as boundaries for this EPS file. No preview is attached to the file.


To create a separator-compatible EPS file


Basic Printing Methods

Printing Page Ranges

Collating Printed Pages

Printing Mirror Images

Fitting a Document to the Page

Centering a Printout on the Page

Printing Multiple Documents

Using a Pen Plotter


To create a separator-compatible EPS file

1	On the File menu, point to Print, and then click Document. The Print Document dialog box opens.

2	Click the arrow beside the printer box and choose the printer you want.

3	Select Output to Separator.

4	Choose the other options you want.

5	Click Print. The Save As dialog box opens.

6	Type the name you want in the File Name box.

7	Click Save. The EPS file is created.


Output for Separator

Basic Printing Methods


Darkening or Lightening Printed RGB Bitmaps

When you print to an EPS file from Designer and select the Output for Separator printing option, you can darken or lighten RGB bitmaps in the EPS file by setting a key value in your system registry. For darker RGB bitmaps, set the MGXGRE key name EnableCMYKBlackOpt to a value of 1. For lighter RGB bitmaps, set the key name to a value of 0.

To set the value from within Designer.

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box opens.

2	Click the Registry tab.

3	In the Key list box, locate and select Mgxgre as the key.

4	Click New Value, and then enter EnableCMYKBlackOpt as the Value Name.

5	Click Numeric Value Type.

6.	Enter the value (0 or 1) and press ENTER.


Registry Settings

Designer Registry Keys and Values


Fitting a Document to the Page

If the page size is too large for the target printer’s paper size, Designer reduces the drawing proportionally so that all of it fits inside the printable area when Fit to Page in the Print Document dialog box is selected. If this option is not selected, the drawing is tiled on as many pages as necessary to print the drawing.


Basic Printing Methods

Printing Page Ranges

Collating Printed Pages

Printing Mirror Images

Vector Clipping

Output for Separator

Centering a Printout on the Page

Printing Multiple Documents


Centering a Printout on the Page

The Center on Page option causes the contents of each page in the document to be aligned to page center and page middle for this printout only. Center on Page in the Print Document dialog box is especially useful if your page size is smaller than your paper size; for example, an on-screen presentation that you want to print out on 8.5" x 11" paper.


Basic Printing Methods

Printing Page Ranges

Collating Printed Pages

Printing Mirror Images

Vector Clipping

Output for Separator

Fitting a Document to the Page

Printing Multiple Documents


Printing with the Page Manager

If you prefer to select pages for printing visually rather than by number, you can use the Page Manager. It, with its associated ribbon, lets you print selected pages, sort pages, set up selected pages, and create on-screen presentations.


To print selected pages with the Page Manager


Setting Up a Page

Setting Up Multiple Pages

Sorting Pages


To print selected pages with the Page Manager

1	Open a document.

2	Click Page Manager [image] in the Toolbox. Thumbnail images are displayed for each page in the document.

3	Select the thumbnail of each page you want to print. A rectangle appears around each selected page. Press and hold CTRL to select more than one page; press and hold SHIFT to select more than one consecutive page.

4	Click Print Document [image] on the ribbon. The Print Document dialog box opens. The range of pages you selected is automatically entered.

5	Type the number of copies you want to print.

6	Choose the other options you want.

7	Click Print. The selected pages are printed.


Printing with the Page Manager


Printing Multiple Documents

If you need to print more than one document, but you do not want to open all the document files at once, you can specify which documents to print.

When you print multiple documents, Designer prints one copy of all pages in each selected document. Designer handles mixed page orientations (portrait and landscape) automatically.


To print multiple documents

To remove files from the print queue


Basic Printing Methods

Printing Page Ranges

Collating Printed Pages

Printing Mirror Images

Vector Clipping

Fitting a Document to the Page

Centering a Printout on the Page


To print multiple documents

1	In the File menu, point to Print, and then click Multiple. The Print Multiple Files dialog box opens.

2	If necessary, change to the desired drive and directory.

3	Choose the name of a document you want to print.

4	Click Print. The selected document is sent to the printer.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have chosen all the documents you want to print.

Note

While you are printing multiple documents, all print commands are unavailable.


Printing Multiple Documents


To remove files from the print queue

1	On the View menu, click Show Tasks. The Task Manager dialog box opens.

2	Click the name of the file (or files) you want to remove from the queue.

3	Click Stop.

Note

You can use this method only if you are printing multiple files.


Printing Multiple Documents


REFERNCE.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Keyboard Shortcuts in Designer

Help	Context-sensitive help	F1
	Floating hint window	CTRL+F1
File Operations	Close drawing window	CTRL+F4
	Exit Designer	ALT+F4
	New document	CTRL+N
	Open document	CTRL+O
	Save	CTRL+S
	Save as	CTRL+SHIFT+S
	Import	CTRL+1
	Export	CTRL+2
	Print current page	CTRL+P
	Print selected objects	CTRL+SHIFT+P
Editing	Undo	CTRL+Z
	Redo	CTRL+Y
	Cut to Clipboard	CTRL+X or SHIFT+DELETE
	Copy to Clipboard	CTRL+C or CTRL+INSERT
	Paste from Clipboard	CTRL+V or SHIFT+INSERT
	Delete	DELETE
	Duplicate	CTRL+SHIFT+D
	Clone	CTLR+ADD (plus on numeric pad)
Selecting	Deselect all objects	CTRL+F2
	Select all objects (current page, unless Edit All Layers is turned on)	CTRL+A or F2
	Select all objects minus current selection	CTRL+SHIFT+A or SHIFT+F2
	Select back-most object in current selection	END
	Select front-most object in current selection	HOME
Ribbons	Bitmap ribbon	CTRL+W
	Compound Line ribbon	CTRL+SHIFT+W
	Dimension ribbon	CTRL+0 (zero)
	Ellipse ribbon	CTRL+SHIFT+Z
	Format ribbon	CTRL+L
	Image ribbon	CTRL+W
	Polygon ribbon	CTRL+SHIFT+Y
	Rectangle ribbon	CTRL+SHIFT+X
	Simple Line ribbon	CTRL+D
	Text ribbon	CTRL+T
Dialog boxes	Align dialog box	ALT+1
	Copy to HTML dialog box	ALT+CTRL+C
	Coordinates dialog box	CTRL+Q
	Floating Color Palette	CTRL+F
	Layers dialog box	CTRL+F10
	Object Properties dialog box	F12
	Pages dialog box	CTRL+G
	Select Object dialog box	CTRL+SHIFT+F2
	Text dialog box	CTRL+SHIFT+T
Alignment	Align bottom	ALT+8
	Align center horizontal	ALT+5
	Align left	ALT+3
	Align middle vertical	ALT+6
	Align right	ALT+7
	Align to rulers	ALT+2
	Align top	ALT+4
	Justify horizontally	ALT+9
	Justify vertically	ALT+0 (zero)
	Align to page center	CTRL+SHIFT+5
	Align to page center and middle	CTRL+SHIFT+F11
	Align to page middle	CTRL+SHIFT+6
	Align to page bottom	CTRL+SHIFT+8
	Align to page left	CTRL+SHIFT+3
	Align to page top	CTRL+SHIFT+4
	Align to page right	CTRL+SHIFT+7
	Justify to page horizontally	CTRL+SHIFT+9
	Justify to page vertically	CTRL+SHIFT+0 (zero)
Viewing	Add view	SHIFT+F4
	Crosshairs	CTRL+H
	Move down one layer	SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
	Move up one layer	SHIFT+PAGE UP
	Next drawing window	CTRL+F6
	Redraw the screen	F3
	Scroll 1 line down	ALT+PAGE DOWN
	Scroll 1 line up	ALT+PAGE UP
	Scroll down	PAGE DOWN
	Scroll up	PAGE UP
	View actual size	CTRL+F8
	View all pages (Page Manager)	CTRL+G
	View first page	CTRL+HOME
	View full screen	F4
	View last page	CTRL+END
	View next page	CTRL+PAGE UP
	View page	SHIFT+F6
	View previous	SHIFT+F3
	View previous page	CTRL+PAGE DOWN
	View used area	CTRL+SHIFT+F3
	Zoom in	F6
	Zoom out	CTRL+SHIFT+F6
Text	Align text to bottom	CTRL+SHIFT+B
	Align text to center	CTRL+SHIFT+C
	Align text to left	CTRL+SHIFT+L
	Align text to middle	CTRL+SHIFT+M
	Align text to right	CTRL+SHIFT+R
	Align text to top	CTRL+SHIFT+O
	Bold	CTRL+B
	Force justify text horizontally	CTRL+SHIFT+F
	Full justify text horizontally	CTRL+SHIFT+J
	Italics	CTRL+I
	Kern, decrease spacing	ALT+CTRL+LEFT ARROW
	Kern, increase spacing	ALT+CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
	Move to beginning of line	HOME
	Move to end of line	END
	Small caps	CTRL+M
	Subscript	CTRL+SHIFT+K
	Superscript	CTRL+K
	Text dialog box	CTRL+SHIFT+T
	Underline	CTRL+U
Object Options	Corner	CTRL+5
	Symmetrical curve	CTRL+7
	Unlocked cusp	CTRL+6
	Locked cusp	CTRL+4
	Convert to curves	CTRL+R
	Cusp	CTRL+6
	Connect closed	F11
	Connect open	CTRL+F11
	Disconnect closed	SHIFT+F11
	Flip horizontal	F7
	Flip vertical	SHIFT+F7
	Group objects	F5
	Move to bottom	F9
	Move to top	F10
	Reverse order	CTRL+SHIFT+F9
	Rotate preset amount	F8
	Copy and rotate preset amount	SHIFT+F8
	Snap points on	CTRL+F7
	Snap points off	CTRL+SHIFT+F7
	Step down	SHIFT+F9
	Step up	SHIFT+F10
	Toggle reference point	SHIFT+ADD (plus on numeric pad)
	Ungroup objects	SHIFT+F5
IntelliMouse	Zoom in	Mouse wheel up (see Note)
	Zoom out	Mouse wheel down
	Panning	Click and hold mouse wheel, then move mouse
	Scroll up	CTRL+mouse wheel up
	Scroll down	CTRL+mouse wheel down
Note

Designer can be configured so that the IntelliMouse wheel actions for zooming and scrolling are reversed. For details on configuring the IntelliMouse, see Input Options.


Glossary

To scroll quickly to a term in this glossary, click the applicable letter.

A

Active window

Aliasing

Anchor point

Anti-Aliasing

B

B-Spline

Backup

Bezier curve

Bitmap

Bleed

Blend

Block selecting

Block text

Bounding box

Byte

C

Callout

Cancel

Cartesian coordinates

Cascade windows

Chaining

Check box

Cicero

Click

Client application

Clip art

Clipboard

CMYK

Color correction

Color model

Color palette

Command

Conical gradient

Container

Continuous tone

Control menu

Control menu box

Control panel (Slideshow)

Control panel (Windows)

Control point

Copy

Crop

Crop marks

Cursor

Cusp

Cut

D

Default settings

Deselect

Dialog box

Didot point

Dimension line

Direction keys

Disabled

Dither

Dot gain

Double-click

DPI

Drag

Drawing pointers

Drawing tools

Drawing window

Dropout color

E

End style

F

Facet

File type

Font

Freeform text

G

Gradient

Gray value

Grayscale

Grid

Guides

H

Hairline

Halftone

Handles

Hatch pattern

Highlight

Hint toolbar

HLS

Hourglass cursor

Hue

I

Icon

Image

Implied selection

Interlace

Invisible fill

Irregular polygon

Isometric Extrusion

K

Kerning

Keyboard shortcuts

L

Layer

Leading

Lightness

Line cap

Line end

Line join

Line screen

Line style

Line weight

Linear gradient

List box

M

Map

Mask

Master page

Menu

Menu bar

Method buttons

Midtones

Minimize and maximize boxes

Monochrome

N

Named style

No fill

Node

Non-proportional resize

O

Oblique Extrusion

Origin

Original file

Outline fonts

Output device

Overprint

P

Page orientation

Palette

Paper size

Parallel

Paste

Paste link

Path object

Perpendicular

Pica

Pivot point

Pixel

Point size

Pointer

Polar coordinates

Polygon

Press

Print area

Print spooler

Process color

Profile

Property

Proportional resize

Proportional typeface

R

Radial gradient

Reference point

Refresh

Registry

Regular polygon

Repel text

Resize

Resolution

RGB

Ribbon

Rulers

S

Saturation

Scale

Scanner

Screen fonts

Scroll

Scroll bars and scroll arrows

Select

Shortcut menu

Simple line

Skew

Slider

Snap points

Snap to rulers

Spline

Spool

Square gradient

Status bar

Submenu

T

Tangent

Taskbar

Template

Text block

Text cursor

Text pointer

Threshold

Title bar

Toggle

Toolbox

ToolTip

Transparency

Trapping

TrueType font

Type 1 font

Type style

Typeface

U

Undercolor

V

Value

Vector-based drawing

W

Window

Wizard

WYSIWYG


Active window (definition)
Active window

The window in which you work is the active window. The active window receives the next action. Generally, the active window has a different title bar color than other windows. A window can be an application's main window, a dialog box, or a floating toolbar (like the Hint toolbar).


Aliasing (definition)
Aliasing

The jagged boundary along the edges of different-colored shapes within a bitmap image. This jaggedness is due to the square shape of the pixels that make a bitmap image.


Anchor Point (definition)
Anchor Point

A point through which a line or curve passes. Anchor points define the shape of an object. An anchor point can form a corner, a curve, or a cusp along the edge of an object. You can view and drag anchor points during Point or Curve Reshaping.


Anti-Aliasing (definition)
Anti-Aliasing

A technique for reducing the jagged-appearing boundary along the edges of different-colored shapes within a bitmap image. This process blends the boundaries between adjacent colors so that they appear smoother. As a general rule, printed bitmap images look better when anti-aliased, but many images designed just for display on the computer screen, such as images for the Web (Internet) or toolbar buttons, look better when aliased.


Back up (definition)
Backup

To make a duplicate of a file before saving it, ensuring that the previous version of the file is not overwritten by the newer version.


Bezier curve (definition)
Bezier curve

A curve that can be reshaped with control points.


Bitmap (definition)
Bitmap

An image composed of individual pixels (dots), rather than being vector-based, as are Designer objects. Bitmap images have a pre-defined resolution and look best when displayed or printed at that resolution. Enlarging a bitmap tends to make it look jagged. Shrinking a bitmap tends to make it look distorted.


Bleed (definition)
Bleed

An image that extends beyond the edge of the paper (bleeds off) after the final trim.


Blend (definition)
Blend

Transforming one object into another object by averaging the shapes, sizes, and colors of the two objects.


Block selecting (definition)
Block selecting

To select objects by dragging a bounding box around them with the Select pointer.

Unless you hold down ALT, the entire object must be enclosed in the bounding box before that object is selected. By holding down ALT, you also select all objects that are partially enclosed in the bounding box.


Block text (definition)
Block text

Text inside a container. The container, which is invisible except when editing the text, makes it possible to format the text with margins, indents, and word-wrap. Block text makes it easy to organize text into paragraphs, columns, and pages. See also Freeform text.


Bounding box (definition)
Bounding box

The invisible rectangle that encloses a selected object. When you move, resize, or duplicate an object, the bounding box appears as a dashed blue box around the object.


Byte (definition)
Byte

A common unit of computer measurement consisting of eight bits.


Callout (definition)
Callout line

A line used to point to and identify parts of a drawing. A callout line can consist of one, two, or three segments.

Also called leader lines.


Cancel (definition)
Cancel

A command button used to close a dialog box without making any changes. The Esc key also closes a dialog box.


Cartesian coordinates (definition)
Cartesian coordinates

A coordinate system based on the familiar vertical and horizontal axes. The vertical axis is Y, and the horizontal axis is X.


Cascade windows (definition)
Cascade windows

A command that diagonally stacks windows so that the title bars show.


Chaining (definition)
Chaining

Also called Connect-A-Draw. A drawing method that joins the ends of objects even if you choose another drawing method.

Chaining is also sometimes used to describe linked text containers through which text flows.


Check box (definition)
Check box

A square box in a dialog box that can be toggled on or off.


Cicero (definition)
Cicero

A typography measuring unit used mostly in non-English speaking countries. There are 12 didots per cicero. There are approximately 5.63 ciceros per inch and approximately 67.553 didots per inch.


Click (definition)
Click

To quickly press and release the left mouse button. When you click the mouse button, you should hear and feel a click.


Clip art (definition)
Clip art

A collection of already drawn objects. These objects are available using the Media Manager in Designer. You can also create objects and add them to new or existing catalogs in the Media Manager.


Clipboard (definition)
Clipboard

Designer uses the Windows clipboard, which is a storage area for objects that you cut or copy from Designer or another Windows application.


CMYK (definition)
CMYK

Cyan, magenta, yellow, black. See also Color model.


Color correction (definition)
Color correction

Any process that compensates for deficiencies in the color separation process and process inks.


Color model (definition)
Color model

A method of representing the color spectrum. Designer lets you choose colors using the HLS (hue, lightness, saturation), RGB (red, green, and blue) and CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) models.


Color palette (definition)
Color Palette

A collection of colors, similar to an artist's palette, that you can apply to objects.


Command (definition)
Command

A word or phrase usually found in a menu that opens a dialog box, enters a mode, or carries out an action.


Conical gradient (definition)
Conical gradient

A gradual fade or color transition in all directions, from a central point to the outer edges of an object. The result is a conical pattern.


Container (definition)
Container

An invisible boundary that surrounds container (block) text and text in an object.


Continuous tone (definition)
Continuous tone

Images, such as color or black-and-white photographs, where the colors and shades flow continuously from one to another. Continuous-tone images cannot be printed in the conventional offset printing process; they must first be converted to halftones or some other black-and-white format.


Control menu (definition)
Control menu

A menu common to most windows. You use the Control menu to resize, move, minimize, maximize, or close Designer's windows. Some of Designer's windows, such as the Color Palette have other commands in the Control menu.


Control menu box (definition)
Control menu box

The box, located in the upper left corner of a window, that opens the Control menu.


Control panel (Slideshow) (definition)
Control panel (Slideshow)

A panel you can display during a slideshow that allows you to jump to any page or change the slideshow options.


Control panel (Windows) (definition)
Control panel (Windows)

A Windows tool containing commands for installing printers and fonts, setting up printers and ports, and choosing program options.


Control point (definition)
Control points

Pairs of points attached to each anchor point along the edge of an object. Control points act like magnets, influencing the curve of the object’s edge where it passes through the anchor point. You can view and drag control points only during Curve Reshaping.


Copy (definition)
Copy

An Edit menu command that copies the selected objects to the Windows Clipboard. Copy does not change the appearance of the drawing.


Crop (definition)
Crop

To reduce the visible part of a bitmap image to just what you want displayed. The cropped parts of the image are hidden, but not deleted. Because the cropped parts are retained, you can uncrop them later.

Only the visible part of a cropped image prints.


Crop marks (definition)
Crop marks

Marks on film or paper that indicate the page size and trim boundaries to the printer. Also called trim marks.


Cursor (definition)
Cursor

The entry point for placing text. Sometimes used to describe any mouse pointer.


Cusp (definition)
Cusp

An anchor point where two Bezier curves intersect at different angles. The result is an elbow shape or corner.


Cut (definition)
Cut

A command in the Edit menu that removes a selected object and moves it to the Windows Clipboard.


Default settings (definition)
Default settings

The preset options built into a program. Use the Options command in the Tools menu to change many of Designer's default settings.


Deslect (definition)
Deselect

To remove the selection. For example, to deselect an object, click the left mouse button away from the object so that the surrounding handles disappear. Commands and tools no longer affect the object because it is not selected.


Dialog box (definition)
Dialog box

A window that appears when the program needs information from you before it can carry out an action.


Didot point (definition)
Didot point

A typography measuring unit used mostly in non-English speaking countries. There are 12 didots per cicero. There are approximately 5.63 ciceros per inch and approximately 67.553 didots per inch.


Dimension line (definition)
Dimension line

A line that measures the distance of an object or some part of the object. Dimension lines can be aligned to the object or can measure the horizontal or vertical component of the object.


Disabled (definition)
Disabled

An option or command that appears in gray type and is not available.


Direction keys (definition)
Direction keys

The Arrow keys (Up, Down, Right, and Left) and the Home, End, Page Up, and Page Down keys. When used alone, the arrow keys move the mouse pointer across the image on the screen in the direction indicated.


Dither (definition)
Dither

To create the illusion of a color by placing dots of other colors very close together.

Technically, on palette-based devices, such as 256-color displays, colors are dithered using a sweeping palette (a palette of colors evenly spaced through the color spectrum). Only colors that are in the sweeping palette are not dithered.


Dot gain (definition)
Dot gain

An increase in the size of halftone dots when they print. Dot gain produces unwanted shadows and colors.


Double click (definition)
Double-click

To rapidly press and release the mouse button twice without moving the mouse.


DPI (definition)
DPI

The number of dots (pixels) per inch on the display or hard copy. Most laser printers print at 300 dpi. High-resolution phototypesetters provide 1270 and 2540 dpi.


Drag (definition)
Drag

To point with the mouse, press and hold the left mouse button, and move the mouse. For example, you drag to move an object, select a range, and move clip art from the Media Manager into your document.


Driver (definition)
Driver

A program that translates data from software for use with a specific hardware device.


Drawing window (definition)
Drawing window

A window that displays your drawing. Drawing windows are displayed in the working area of the Designer window and can be manipulated like any window.


Drawing tools (definition)
Drawing tools

The Simple Line [image], Compound Line [image], Rectangle [image], Polygon [image], and Ellipse [image] tools.


Drawing pointers (definition)
Drawing pointer

Any of the pointers displayed by the drawing tools. The drawing pointers let you draw simple lines, compound lines, rectangles, polygons, and ellipses.


Dropout color (definition)
Dropout color

A color in a bitmap image that is transparent so that objects and text behind or in front of that part of the bitmap are not obscured by the bitmap.

Once a color is specified as a transparent color, all instances of that color in the bitmap, regardless of location, are transparent.


End style (definition)
End style

The marker at the ends of lines and open objects. For example, arrowheads and lines are end styles.


Extension (definition)
Extension

The period and one to three characters at the end of a filename that identify the kind of information in the file. For example, DS4 is the extension for Designer 4.0 drawing files.

Also, the lines in dimension lines that are drawn from the object being measured to the line showing the dimension.


Facet (definition)
Facet

Small planes that fit together to create a three-dimensional look for a curved, extruded surface. By adjusting the resolution of an extruded object with curved surfaces, you can increase or decrease the smooth appearance of the surfaces.


File type (definition)
File type

A format used to define an image file. Designer recognizes different file types such as text, Windows Metafile (WMF), Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM), TIFF, BMP, Targa (TGA), GIF, and EPS.


Font (definition)
Font

A specific set of characters in a specific typeface design.


Freeform text (definition)
Freeform text

Stand-alone text that is treated as an independent object by Designer. Freeform text has no container and does not use margins, word-wrap, or indents. Resizing a freeform text object changes the size of the text. See also Block text.


Gradient (definition)
Gradient

A gradual fade in color intensity or a gradual fade from one color to another.


Gray value (definition)
Gray value

The amount of gray in an image, where a gray value of 100% is black and a gray value of 0% is white.


Grayscale (definition)
Grayscale

An image having multiple shades of gray. Also, the ability of a scanner to capture more than just the values of white and black.


Grid (definition)
Grid

A series of horizontal and vertical dots that criss-cross the drawing area. You can snap objects to the grid for more exact placement.


Guides (definition)
Guides

Horizontal and vertical lines that display but do not print. You can use guides as cues for where to place objects, or you can snap objects to guides for more exact placement.

You can lock guides to prevent them from being moved accidentally, and hide guides when you don't need to see them.


Hairline (definition)
Hairline

A line with a weight of zero. A hairline is the thinnest line that can be displayed or printed.


Halftone (definition)
Halftone

An image made of tiny dots of different sizes (like a photograph in a newspaper). The dots in a halftone are equally spaced, so larger dots compose the shadows and smaller dots create the highlights. Halftones can be color or black and white.


Handles (definition)
Handles

Symbols that appear on objects when selected that let you manipulate the objects.

For example, when you select an ellipse, eight blue handles appear at the corners and sides of the bounding box of the object. Dragging these handles resizes the object.

Other examples of handles are the eight rotation/skew handles that appear around an object selected for rotating/skewing, and the depth control and perspective handles that appear on an object selected for extruding.


Hatch pattern (definition)
Hatch pattern

A fill pattern composed of lines occurring at regular intervals. Hatch patterns can be output to a plotter.


Highlight (definition)
Highlight

The brightest value in a continuous-tone or halftone image.


Hint toolbar (definition)
Hint toolbar

A toolbar that displays timely information about Designer tools and features as you use them.


HLS (definition)
HLS

Hue, lightness, saturation. See also Color model.


Hourglass cursor (definition)
Hourglass cursor

The pointer changes to an hourglass symbol to indicate that the program is performing an operation, such as saving a file. Sometimes Designer displays a compass with a spinning ball rather than the hourglass cursor. When the cursor returns to a pointer, you can continue working.


Hue (definition)
Hue

The quality of a color that makes it different from other colors. For example, an apple's hue is red even though its color value might not be 100% red. The color you use to describe an object is its hue. Lightness and saturation, the two other components of color, do not affect the hue. See also Lightness and Saturation.


Icon (definition)
Icon

A small graphic symbol that represents a software program. You open the program by double-clicking the icon.


Image (definition)
Image

Also called a bitmap or bitmap image. Images are composed of thousands of tiny dots called pixels. Picture Publisher edits and creates images.


Implied selection (definition)
Implied selection

A selection mode applied to objects you have just drawn, or to objects that you click with a drawing tool. Implied selection offers the following advantages:

You can choose a color, line style, or other attribute for the object you have just drawn without the extra step of selecting it first.

You can select an object without switching from your current drawing tool to the Select pointer.

Implicitly selected closed objects have one hollow handle. Implicitly selected open objects have a hollow handle at each endpoint.


Interlace (definition)
Interlace

A technique for storing information so that some parts of the information are interspersed between other parts. For graphic images, interlacing causes the image to appear first with poor resolution and then improve in resolution until the entire image is displayed. Interlacing is widely used with Web graphics, because it lets a viewer see what an image looks like before the entire image is downloaded by a browser.


Invisible fill (definition)
Invisible fill

See No fill.


Irregular polygon (definition)
Irregular polygon

A closed object composed of straight lines of different lengths.


Isometric extrusion (definition)
Isometric extrusion

An extrusion effect which changes the angle of the original object before applying the extrusion. An isometric extrusion gives a more realistic three-dimensional look than an oblique extrusion.


Kerning (definition)
Kerning

Adjusts the spacing between two consecutive text characters. For certain letter pairs, reducing the spacing between the letters improves their appearance when printed.


Keyboard shortcuts (definition)
Keyboard shortcuts

A function key or a mnemonic key, often used with Alt, Ctrl, or Shift, that executes a command quickly. Keyboard shortcuts appear in the Hint toolbar.


Layer (definition)
Layer

A plane of a drawing that can be stacked on other planes. A drawing with three layers is like three overhead transparencies stacked on one another.


Leading (definition)
Leading

The space between lines of text. The default leading is the current font size plus approximately 15% of the font size (the percent may vary from font to font). Also called line spacing.


Lightness (definition)
Lightness

The amount of white or black in a color. Lightness of 100% and 0% creates white and black, respectively. Lightness is one of the three components of perceived color. Hue and saturation are the others. See also Hue and Saturation.


Line art (definition)
Line art

Images with only two gray values: black and white. If you save a continuous-tone image as line art, the colors in the image are reduced to black and white.


Line cap (definition)
Line cap

Uses one of three ways to set the appearance of a line end that does not have an end marker.

The Flat Cap ends the line at the end point of the line.

The Round Cap places the center point of a circle at the end point of the line. The diameter of the circle matches the width and height of the line.

The Square Cap places the center point of a square at the end point of the line. The width and height of the square match the width and height of the line.


Line end (definition)
Line end

A marker at the end of a line. For example, an arrowhead is a line end.


Line join (definition)
Line join

Uses one of three ways to set the appearance of the corner intersection of lines that join.

The Mitre Join creates a pointed intersection that is the true intersection of two lines.

The Rounded Join places the center point of a circle at the vertex of two line ends. The diameter of the circle matches the width and height of the lines.

The Bevel Join averages the angles of the two lines, creating a blunt intersection.


Line screen (definition)
Line screen

Also known as screen ruling. This is a measure of the distance between the centers of halftone dots as they repeat along the screen angle. For example, in a 65-line screen at a 45° angle (a typical line screen, or screen ruling, for a black-and-white halftone in a newspaper), there are 65 halftone dots in an inch. Low (coarse) line screens, from 65 to 85, do not produce an illusion of grayscale as successfully as medium screens, from 100 to 120, or high screens, from 133 to 150.


Line style (definition)
Line style

The pattern used to draw a line. For example, solid and dashed.


Line weight (definition)
Line weight

The point size of a line. The line weight can range from 0 to 360. A line with a weight of 0 is a hairline. Also called line thickness.


Linear gradient (definition)
Linear gradient

A gradual fade or color transition in a single direction from one side of an object to the other side.


List box (definition)
List box

A box containing a list of names. List boxes usually appear in dialog boxes or windows within a program.


Map (definition)
Map

A graph representing the mapping of color values in an image. A map changes the input values to new output values. If unedited, the graph represents a mapping of 1:1 (an input of 50% gray is output at 50% gray, for example). You can alter values by manipulating points on the curve (so that an input of 50% gray is output at 75% gray, for example).


Mask (definition)
Mask

An object whose shape is used as a stencil to determine what parts of another object or bitmap image are displayed. Only the parts of the object or bitmap image that appear within the shape of the mask are visible.


Master page (definition)
Master page

A special page whose contents appear on every page of the document. Master page objects appear both on screen and when printed.


Menu (definition)
Menu

A list of commands organized under a title in the menu bar. For example, the Help menu lists commands that provide on-line help.


Menu bar (definition)
Menu bar

The bar at the top of the Designer window (under the title bar) containing menu titles.


Method buttons (definition)
Method buttons

The buttons that appear on the Ribbon toolbar when you click a drawing tool. For example, after clicking Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox, you can click B-Spline [image] on the Ribbon toolbar to select the B-Spline drawing method.


Midtones (definition)
Midtones

The middle values between the highlights and the shadows in an image.


Minimize and maximize boxes (definition)
Minimize and maximize boxes

The boxes located in the upper right corner of each window that are used to reduce or enlarge the window. The frame around the window also is used to resize the window.


Monochrome (definition)
Monochrome

A single color. Monochrome typically refers to the color black on a white background.


Named style (definition)
Named style

A specific combination of object and text attributes that you have given a name. Named styles are created, modified, applied, and removed using the Style toolbar.


No fill (definition)
No fill

The absence of any fill. Setting a line or the interior of an object to no fill makes the line or interior transparent, so any objects behind the line or interior show through. The no fill selection in the Color Palette is the swatch with the X.


Node (definition)
Node

One of the objects on which a blend is based. Initially, a blend is based on two nodes, the two objects selected to make the blend, but you can add nodes to create more complex blends.


Non-proportional resize (definition)
Non-proportional resize

To resize an object using the side handles so that the original proportions change.


Oblique extrusion (definition)
Oblique extrusion

An extrusion effect which extends the corners of an object backwards. Use the oblique extrusion method when you want the original object to remain stationary.


Origin (definition)
Origin

The point, on or off the page, where Designer's two rulers intersect at zero. The default position for the ruler origin is at the upper left corner of the page.

Designer's coordinates are based upon the position of the origin and the units settings of the rulers. See also rulers.


Original file (definition)
Original file

A file containing the source (original) object created with the server application. The original object can be linked to or embedded into a document.


Outline fonts (definition)
Outline fonts

Fonts that produce text on the screen as it appears when printed.


Output device (definition)
Output device

Any device that accepts a printed document from Designer. For example, a printer, plotter, and imagesetter.


Overprint (definition)
Overprint

A technique for preparing color separations that is designed to prevent gaps where two colors join. When separations use overprinting, adjoining colors are printed in such a way that one color overlaps another, rather than butting against it. See also Trapping.


Page orientation (definition)
Page orientation

The position of an image on paper. Portrait (vertical) orientation displays a page taller than it is wide. Landscape (horizontal) orientation displays a page wider than it is tall.


Palette (definition)
Palette

A collection of colors or patterns that you can apply to objects, such as the Color Palette.


Paper size (definition)
Paper size

The physical size of the paper in a printing device.


Parallel (definition)
Parallel

Two straight lines at the same angle that do not intersect.


Paste (definition)
Paste

A command in the Edit menu to insert an image stored in the Windows Clipboard into an image window.


Paste link (definition)
Paste link

A command used by the receiving program to paste and link an object at the same time.


Perpendicular (definition)
Perpendicular

Two lines that intersect at 90 degrees.


Pica (definition)
Pica

A measurement of line length. There are six picas in one inch.


Pivot point (definition)
Pivot point

The point around which an object is rotated. In Designer, the pivot point can be moved or changed.


Pixel (definition)
Pixel

A picture element. The smallest unit (dot) of a bitmapped image.


Point size (definition)
Point size

A measurement of the height of characters in a font. There are approximately 72 points in an inch.


Pointer (definition)
Pointer

A graphic symbol used to show the current screen location of the mouse. You move the pointer by moving the mouse. The pointer's appearance changes depending on the action being performed.


Polar coordinates (definition)
Polar coordinates

A coordinate system defining each point by its distance from the origin and its angle from the horizontal axis.


Polygon (definition)
Polygon

A closed object made of straight lines, such as a square, triangle, or star.


Press (definition)
Press

To press and hold the mouse button momentarily.


Print area (definition)
Print area

The area that can be printed.


Print spooler (definition)
Print spooler

A Windows accessory that creates a print file before printing begins.


Process color (definition)
Process color

Also called full color. The type of printing that uses four different printing plates (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) which, when combined, produce a color image.


Profile (definition)
Profile

A file containing customization settings for Designer. You can have multiple profiles to save different personal settings.


Property (definition)
Property

An attribute of objects such as size, color, or weight. You can assign any property you wish to objects. The default property is "Name." You can create other properties and assign values to them. See also Value.


Proportional resize (definition)
Proportional resize

To resize an object using the corner handles so that the object's proportions do not change.


Proportional typeface (definition)
Proportional typeface

A typeface in which the widths vary from character to character. For example, a w is wider than an l.


Radial gradient (definition)
Radial gradient

A gradual fade or color transition in all directions, from a central point to the outer edges of an object. The result is a concentric, circular pattern.


Reference point (definition)
Reference point

A fixed point within your workspace that you can use to align and control your drawing. The position of a reference point is not affected by changing the ruler origin or the page size.


Refresh (definition)
Refresh

To redraw the current page. This lets you clear the screen of unwanted fragments that can result from manipulating objects.


Registry (definition)
Registry

A Windows 95 system database that contains startup and configuration information. Under Windows 3.1, most of this information was kept in the WIN.INI and SYSTEM.INI files.


Regular polygon (definition)
Regular polygon

A closed object composed of straight lines of equal length.


Repel text (definition)
Repel Text

An object attribute that forces text to automatically warp around that object.


Resize (definition)
Resize

To change the size of an object. Dragging a corner handle changes the size proportionally, while dragging a side handle changes the size non-proportionally. Dragging a handle into an object makes it smaller; dragging a handle away from an object makes it larger.


Resolution (definition)
Resolution

A measurement of data for monitors (usually expressed as pixels per square inch) and printers (dots per square inch). As a general rule, the higher the resolution, the better the data looks.


RGB (definition)
RGB

Red, green, and blue. See also Color model.


Ribbon (definition)
Ribbon

The area at the top of the window that displays options associated with the current tool.


Rulers (definition)
Rulers

Measuring aids at the top and left of the Designer window that allow precise placement of objects. You can choose to show or hide the rulers.

Designer's coordinates are based upon the position of the ruler origin and the units settings of the rulers. See also origin.


Saturation (definition)
Saturation

The intensity or purity of a color. For example, a "reddish" apple is not as saturated as a "red" apple. Zero saturation means that the color has been replaced by its corresponding gray value (black-and-white television images are good examples of colors with zero saturation). Pure saturation (100%) means the color contains no gray. Saturation is one of the three components of color; hue and lightness are the others. See also Hue and Lightness.


Scale drawing (definition)
Scale drawing

A technique of representing images proportionally. A scale drawing uses scale units to show the ratio between a unit in the scale drawing and the thing being drawn. For example, a map may be drawn at a scale of one inch to the mile.


Scanner (definition)
Scanner

A device that transfers images from video or paper into the digital format used by computers.


Screen fonts (definition)
Screen fonts

Fonts specially created to appear correctly on screen.


Scroll (definition)
Scroll

To move the visible portion of the drawing area.


Scroll bars and scroll arrows (definition)
Scroll bars and scroll arrows

The bars and arrows at the right side and bottom of windows that allow you to travel vertically and horizontally across the window.


Select (definition)
Select

To choose an object. A selected object displays handles.


Shortcut menu (definition)
Shortcut menu

A menu that pops up when you click an object or screen element with the right mouse button. This menu contains commands that you can use on the item you clicked. For example, clicking a toolbar with the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu that lets you show or hide any toolbar.


Simple line (definition)
Simple line

A linear object made of only one line or curve.


Skew (definition)
Skew

To slant a selected object horizontally or vertically.


Snap points (definition)
Snap points

Non-printing points on an object that attract endpoints as you draw or move an object.


Snap to rulers (definition)
Snap to rulers

An option that causes the increments of the rulers to attract the mouse and the bounding box of selected objects that you drag close to the increment. The grid corresponds to these points. The bounding box is attracted to ruler increments only if you select Dragging Snap in the Options-Rulers/Snap dialog box.


Spline (definition)
Spline

A type of smooth curve based on at least three points. The curve touches the first and last points and is pulled by the middle point.


Slider (definition)
Slider

A bar in a dialog box that you can move to change an option.


Spool (definition)
Spool

To send a page to a file before printing. When spooling is complete, the page begins to print, and you may work in the image window again or select another print operation.


Square gradient (definition)
Square gradient

A gradual fade or color transition in all directions, from a specified central point to the object's outer edges. The result is a concentric, rectangular pattern.


Status bar (definition)
Status bar

Provides current information about your drawing and quick access to various commands such as line weight, object fill, and coordinates.

Choose Status Bar on the View menu, and choose Single to display the single-line Status bar. Choose Double from the Status Bar submenu to display the double-line status bar.


Submenu (definition)
Submenu

A submenu opens when you choose a command with an arrow opposite it. Submenus provide additional commands related to the desired task you want to accomplish.


Tangent (definition)
Tangent

A straight line that touches a curve at only one point and does not intersect the curve.


Taskbar (definition)
Taskbar

The bar on your screen that shows the Start button and the programs you are running currently. The taskbar is normally located at the bottom of the screen, but it can be dragged to a vertical position.


Template (definition)
Template

A predefined design document that contains the basic layout and formatting for a specific type of drawing, such as a business card or letterhead.


Text block (definition)
Text block

Text in a container or object.


Text cursor (definition)
Text cursor

A blinking vertical bar that indicates where to begin entering or editing text.


Text pointer (definition)
Text pointer

A pointer that is shaped like an I-beam. The text pointer is used for text actions such as positioning the text cursor and highlighting text.


Threshold (definition)
Threshold

The cutoff point at which the overall color values are either shown or deleted.


Title bar (definition)
Title bar

The bar across the top of a window that contains the program name (Designer) and the filename. The title bar also contains the window's Control menu box and maximize and minimize boxes.


Toggle (definition)
Toggle

To alternately turn a function on and off.


Toolbox (definition)
Toolbox

The toolbar containing the Designer tools: Select [image], Rotate/Skew [image], Edit [image], View [image], Simple Line [image], Compound Line [image], Rectangle [image], Polygon [image], Ellipse [image], Text [image], Dimension/Callout [image], Image [image], Format [image], and Page Manager [image].


ToolTip (definition)
ToolTip

When ToolTips are turned on, you can display the name of a button by pointing to the button with the mouse for about two seconds. If the Display Shortcuts option is turned on, the ToolTip also displays the keyboard shortcut for the button, if one is available.

The ToolTip and Display Shortcut options are turned on and off using the Toolbars command on the View menu.


Transparency (definition)
Transparency

A feature of some bitmap formats that makes specified colors in the bitmap invisible. This feature enables bitmaps, which are all rectangular in shape, to appear to be irregularly shaped. Objects and text placed behind the transparent portions of a bitmap show through those portions of the bitmap.

Transparency is achieved by specifying that certain colors, called dropout colors or background colors, are transparent. Once a color is specified as a transparent color, all instances of that color in the bitmap, regardless of location, are transparent.


Trapping (definition)
Trapping

The intentional overlapping of two adjoining colors to minimize the effects of poor registration and to cause inks to transfer properly to the paper in conventional offset printing. Evidence of poor trapping is a small margin of white space where one color ends and another begins. Techniques of trapping include overprinting, choking, and spreading.


TrueType font (definition)
TrueType font

An outline font that displays correctly and prints on almost any printer.


Type 1 font (definition)
Type 1 font

An outline font designed specifically for PostScript printers.


Type style (definition)
Type style

A standard variation within a typeface family. Common styles include roman (also called plain, normal, or regular), italic, bold, and bold italic. Each style within a typeface family is a unique typeface design of its own. See also Typeface.


Typeface (definition)
Typeface

The design of a set of characters. Bitstream Charter Roman and Bitstream Charter Italic are examples of typefaces. They share a common typeface family: Bitstream Charter; and they each have a particular style: roman (also called plain, normal, or regular) and italic. See also Type style.


Undercolor removal (definition)
Undercolor removal (UCR)

A technique for adjusting CMY color components so that the amount of black component in CMYK-defined colors is optimized. Undercolor removal makes colors look more intense, reduces the amount of ink used in printing, and increases details in shadows.


Value (definition)
Value

A word or number assigned to one of an object's properties. A value can be different for different properties. For example, a drawing of an elephant has the value "Elephant" when the property Name is selected; has the value "African" when the property Type is selected; and has the value "2500" when the property "Weight" is selected.


Vector-based drawing (definition)
Vector-based drawing

A type of drawing that uses lines and mathematical calculations to create drawings. Vector drawings are more precise, usually create smaller file sizes, and are generally better for computer-based drawing because they always appear (in print and on screen) at the highest possible resolution.


Window (definition)
Window

A rectangular area on the screen that displays the Designer program. The Designer window can contain several different drawing windows within its working area.


Wizard (definition)
Wizard

A feature that simplifies the use of a command by asking questions and using your answers to perform the command.


WYSIWYG (definition)
WYSIWYG

A close similarity between the screen image and the printed output of that image. WYSIWYG is an acronym for What You See Is What You Get.


Client application (definition)
Client application

An application capable of accepting objects from OLE-compatible server applications


Compound document (definition)
Compound document

A document containing multiple objects created with different OLE-compatible server applications


Embedded object (definition)
Embedded object

An object containing a graphic representation of the object and all the information required by the server application to re-create the original object


Linked object (definition)
Linked object

An object containing a graphic representation of the object and information identifying the original server data file and application


Server application (definition)
Server application

An application capable of copying OLE-compatible objects to the Clipboard.


Path object (definition)
Path object

An object (opened or closed) that has more than one line segment.


Designer Registry Keys and Values

Designer 7 lets you change these entries in the system registry.

Key name: Process

Registry location: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Micrografx\Designer\7.0

PrintingGradientStep=4

The lower the number, the smaller the gradient step becomes on output devices. The default is 4. You should consider the resolution of the output device. For example, with an output device with 2500 lines per inch and a PrintingGradientStep setting of 4, you get a large file with a very fine-resolution gradient. You should experiment with this setting to find an appropriate setting.

Key name: Preferences

Registry location: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Micrografx\Designer\7.0

InitialEmbeddedWidth=5080

InitialEmbeddedHeight=7620

Describes the default width and height of a new Designer 7 embedded OLE object. Specifically, these values govern the initial size of an object when you choose to Edit/Insert Object a “Micrografx Designer 7 Drawing” from another OLE container. These units are in HIMETRIC, where 1in=2540. Therefore, the default size is 2in x 3in.

Key name: MGX Font Adjust

Registry location: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Micrografx\Designer\7.0

ATF Century Schoolbook=1.13,0.0

The value is a width and height value for character spacing. The first value is inter-character spacing. The second value is paragraph/line spacing.

Key name: MGX Font Aliases

Registry location: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Micrografx\Designer\7.0

ATF Century Schoolbook=CenturySchbk SWA

The value is a font name to replace the MGX font name from Designer 3.x. If you prefer a different font than that supplied, you can change to a font already on your system. Generally, however, it is not advisable to use this option.

Key name: Mgxgre

Registry location: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Micrografx\Designer\7.0

EnablePSAdapt=1

With a value of 1, the default, Designer writes PostScript printer output directly.

With a value of 0, Designer uses the PostScript driver to generate the PostScript output.

PSBinaryBmp=0

This entry lets you create smaller PostScript files by using binary bitmaps. One-bit bitmaps and EPS files will always use HEX-ASCII.

With a value of 0, the default, Designer outputs all bitmaps as hexadecimal digits.

With a value of 1, Designer outputs 8, 24, or 32 bit bitmaps as binary.

PSBmpThreshold=635

The value can be any printer resolution, in dots per inch. Color bitmaps will be sent to monochrome printers with this dpi or higher. If you have a 300 dpi monochrome printer but want to send color bitmaps to it for color separations, set this value to 300. If you have an 800 dpi monochrome printer, you can set this value to 801 to force monochrome bitmaps to be sent to the printer instead of color. Color bitmaps are always sent to color printers and EPS files. The default value is 635.

UseGDIForBLTPrinting=1

This setting controls how images are printed to non-postscript printers. The default value is 1. A value of 0 will use an earlier method of dithering.

WMFGradientRes=40

Valid options are any desired gradient-step size. This option sets the gradient step size for metafiles like PrintingGradientStep does for print output. The default is 100.

WMFImageFill=1

This entry specifies whether image fills will be retained in metafiles. A value of 0 substitutes the image fill with a solid gray color. A value of 1, the default, retains bitmap fills in metafiles.

PCLBorderTextAsCurves=1

Value is 0 or 1. Most PCL printers will not clip text characters across a page border; if the character is partly off the page, it does not print at all. Therefore, Designer's default behavior is now to send lines of text that cross the physical page border to non-postscript printers as curves. Set this value to 0 if you are using a non-postscript printer that does not have this character-clipping problem, or if you are using your printer driver's "Print True Type as Graphics" option. This option, found on many drivers, solves the clipping problem for TrueType fonts and can produce slightly higher-quality output.

DoNotInvertMonoBmps=0

Certain PCL drivers erroneously invert monochrome bitmaps when they are printed from Designer. When Designer detects that the driver may not support the correct processing of foreground and background colors for monochrome bitmaps, it promotes the bitmap to a color bitmap, and its color table is adjusted so that the device can dither the desired foreground and background colors appropriately. This is the default behavior of Designer. Set the value to 1 to turn the modification off and obtain the old behavior.

PrintColorTextAsCurves=0

Many non-postscript printer drivers can only output text in pure colors: white, black, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow. Setting this value to 1 causes text which is not one of the above colors to be output to GDI devices as curves so that the correct color will be used. This functionality only works to GDI printers for non-printer fonts. Default to 0 (do not convert to curves in any case) for backwards compatibility.

EnableCMYKBlackOpt = 0

The RGB to CMYK color conversion model makes no use of the K component unless the color is a shade of gray. A setting of 1 causes K to be set to the minimum of C, M, & Y and the CMY values to be adjusted correspondingly. A setting of 1 should improve the quality of output to EPS and other CMYK devices.

The default is 0 (signifying no use of K component) for backwards compatibility.

CMYKUndercolor = -15

CMYKBlackGeneration = 25

You can now control the degree of undercolor removal and black generation performed as colors are converted from RGB to CMYK for Separator/EPS output. The basic formula for RGB to CMYK translation is:

        c = 1 - r;

        m = 1 - g;

        y = 1 - b;

        k = min(c,m,y);

Then, undercolor removal is performed to modify the amount of black subtracted from each of c, m & y:

        c = min (1, max (0, c - UCR(k));

        m = min (1, max (0, m - UCR(k));

        y = min (1, max (0, y - UCR(k));

Finally, the black component of the color is adjusted via a black generation function:

        k = min (1, max (0, BG(k));

Both the UCR(k) and the BG(k) functions are defined as user-supplied percentages of k.  You supply a percentage from -100 to 100 for both the CMYKUndercolorRemoval and CMYKBlackGeneration registry keys, and the functions are defined as:

        UCR(k) = k + ((CMYKUndercolorRemoval * k) / 100);

        BG(k) = k + ((CMYKBlackGeneration * k) / 100);

This allows you to modify the amount of black subtracted from the c, m, & y components and the amount of black assigned to the k component.

Positive CMYKUndercolor values increase the amount of black subtracted from the c, m, & y components, while negative values decrease the amount of black subtracted.  The default value for CMYKUndercolor is -15, to lessen the amount of black removed from the c, m, & y  components by 15%.

Positive CMYKBlackGeneration values increase the amount of black added to the k component, while negative values decrease the amount of black generated.  The default value for CMYKBlackGeneration is 25, to increase the amount of black added to the k component by 25%.

The defaults chosen were taken from PP and its interface to bitmap separation.  Both of these registry keys must be specified in the [Mgxgre] section of the registry.  In addition, EnableCMYKBlackOpt must be set to 1 for these two values to be used.

DisableDirectXRendering = 0

Direct X is a technology supported by Microsoft and various vendors of graphics hardware which allows fast bitmap operations (among other things) on screen devices. If Direct X is installed on your system, Designer detects it and uses Direct X to display conical gradients. If Direct X rendering is supported by your system or hardware, you can turn it off by setting this registry entry to 1.

With a value of 0, the default, Designer uses Direct X rendering to display conical gradients.

Key name: Translation

Registry location: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Micrografx\Designer\7.0

SimulateHatch=1

If set to 1 or the selected export filter is incapable of hatching, Designer hatch patterns are translated as lines in the exported file.

If set to 0 and the selected export filter is capable of hatching, Designer hatch patterns are translated to a hatch pattern that is native to the export format.

SimulateWMFHatch=1

Has the same effect as the SimulateHatch setting (above), but affects only Designer hatch patterns exported as WMF files.

GDIWMFFilter=1

This setting prevents the "Out of memory” error message in Word 7.0 when you export a bitmap image from Designer as a WMF (Windows metafile) and then insert the WMF file into a Word 7.0 document. Using this setting also takes away export setup options.

The default setting is 0, which turns this filter off.

ExportPageFill=0

If this entry is 1, then the page fill will be exported along with the other selected objects. The following file formats support page fill: Micrografx Drawing (*.drw), Encapsulated PostScript Tiff Preview (*.eps), and Encapsulated PostScript WMF Preview (*.eps).

The default is 0, which turns off page fill exporting.

GDSFDoIntercharSpacing=1

When exporting to a vector format such as AI or DRW, Designer, by default, outputs an intercharacter spacing attribute along with text. Setting this value to 0 turns off the output of the spacing attribute.

Key name: Import

Registry location: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Micrografx\Designer\7.0

CenterSymbols=1

If the option is set to 1, the default, all imported symbols are centered on the current page. If the imported file contains layers and CollapseLayers is set to 0, then this behavior is overridden, and the imported symbols retain their original positioning.

If the option is set to 0, the imported symbols appear at the origin for formats that do not save page information and are properly placed on the page for formats that do (such as DRW, DS4, and DSF).

CollapseLayers=0

If the option is set to 0, the default, Designer reacts according to the answer to the question, "Does the imported file contain only one layer?"

If the option is set to 1, then Designer 7 collapses all the layers and puts the symbols on the current layer.

If yes, Designer puts the symbols on the current layer, even if the current layer already contains symbols. If no, Designer appends the new layers following the existing layers.

Note that if the imported file is a DS4 file and the first page references a master page, then the master page is treated as a separate layer when importing the file.

The filters that support layers on import are IGS, DRW, DXF, DS4, and DSF.


To change the value of a registry key

To add a new value to a registry key

To delete a value from a registry key


Registry Settings


RESHAPE.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Introduction to Object Editing

The powerful editing features of Designer let you edit objects in various ways, depending upon the type of object you are editing. The object editing methods for most shapes are as follows:

Edit Method	Definition

Object-Specific Reshaping	Lets you reshape certain objects in specific ways. This type of editing is available for rectangles, ellipses, arcs, pie wedges, polygons, stars, megagons, and curvygons.

Reshape Points	Lets you reshape an object by moving its anchor points.

Reshape Curve	Lets you reshape an object by moving its control points and anchor points.

Warp	Lets you reshape an object by moving points on its warp envelope.

Extrude	Lets you extrude an object.

To edit an object, select the object, and click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. Then choose the editing method you want.

Object-specific reshaping lets you edit an object without changing its object type. Reshape Points and Reshape Curve editing automatically convert an object to curves. After an object is converted to curves, you can no longer edit it as an object type.

Tip

The Edit tool [image] also lets you edit text, bitmap images, dimension lines, and callout lines.


To select an object for point reshaping using the Edit tool

To select an object for point reshaping using the mouse

To select an object for point reshaping using the shortcut menu

To select an object for curve reshaping using the Edit tool

To select an object for curve reshaping using the mouse

To select an object for curve reshaping using the shortcut menu

To change the wireframe-reshape view setting


Wireframe-Reshape View

Object-Specific Reshaping

Converting Objects to Curves

Point Reshaping

Curve Reshaping

Reshaping Text

Reducing Points


Wireframe-Reshape View

The Wireframe button [image] on the Reshape ribbon turns the wireframe-reshape view on and off for the selection. This view shows only the outline of an object you are reshaping, not its fill or color. Using the wireframe-reshape view, the default setting, can speed the display of objects that have many anchor points.

Note

The Wireframe button turns the wireframe view on and off only for the object being reshaped. The Wireframe command on the Preview submenu of the View menu turns the wireframe view on and off for the entire document. If the Wireframe command is in effect, then the Wireframe button is ignored.


To change the wireframe-reshape view setting


Introduction to Object Editing

Object-Specific Reshaping

Point Reshaping

Curve Reshaping


To change the wireframe-reshape view setting

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the reshape option you want on the menu.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Wireframe [image]. Clicking the Wireframe button alternately turns the wireframe reshape view on and off.


Wireframe-Reshape View

Introduction to Object Editing


Object-Specific Reshaping

Object-specific reshaping lets you edit certain shapes in special ways. If you modify one of these objects so that it loses its original object type, then you can no longer perform object-specific reshaping on it. For example, if you convert a rectangle to curves, then you can no longer reshape the object as a rounded rectangle. (Editing an object in Reshape Points or Reshape Curve mode automatically converts the object to curves.)

The way in which you perform object-specific reshaping depends upon the object’s type.

The Reshape Rectangle editing mode lets you round or sharpen the corners of a rectangle by dragging the solid handle toward the center of the rectangle.

The Reshape Conic editing mode for ellipses lets you change an ellipse into a pie-shaped wedge or an arc. To change the ellipse into a pie-shaped wedge, drag the solid handle toward the center of the ellipse. To change the ellipse into an arc, drag the solid handle around the outside of the ellipse.

The Reshape Conic editing mode for arcs lets you reshape an arc or change it into a pie wedge. To reshape the arc, drag either solid handle outside of the arc. To change the arc into a pie wedge, drag either solid handle toward the inside of the arc.

The Reshape Conic editing mode for pie wedges lets you reshape the pie wedge or change it into an arc. To reshape the pie wedge, drag either solid handle inside the pie wedge. To change the pie wedge into an arc, drag either solid handle outside of the pie wedge.

The Reshape Polygon editing mode for polygons and stars lets you reshape a polygon or star by dragging its solid handles. You can also change the object's number of sides while editing it.

The Reshape Polygon editing mode for megagons and curvygons lets you reshape a megagon or curvygon by dragging its solid handles. You can also change the object's number of sides while editing it.

Tip

You can easily identify these editing modes because the objects always show solid handles while being edited.


To add rounded corners to an existing rectangle

To convert an ellipse into a pie wedge

To draw an elliptical arc by tracing an ellipse

To convert an arc into a pie wedge


Introduction to Object Editing

Wireframe-Reshape View

Converting Objects to Curves


Converting Objects to Curves

The Convert To Curves command on the Change menu converts an object such as text, a rectangle, or an ellipse into a conventional vector object. This lets you edit the object with anchor or control points. It also does the following:

Converts dimension lines to groups

Converts callout lines to groups

Converts extruded objects to groups

Converts blended objects to groups

Converts a Windows metafile to Designer objects

Converts text and other shapes to path objects and changes them so that Designer does not remember any previous transforms done to them

Note

You cannot convert an object back into its original object type, except by using Undo.


To convert an object to curves


Introduction to Object_Editing

Object-Specific Reshaping

Converting Text to Curves


To convert an object to curves

1	Select the object.

2	On the Change menu, click Convert to Curves. The object is converted to vector-based curves.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Convert to Curves is CTRL+R.

Reshape Points and Reshape Curve editing automatically convert non-text objects to curves.


Converting Objects to Curves

Converting Text to Curves


Point Reshaping

Point reshaping lets you edit an object by dragging its anchor points. Anchor points are mathematically-defined points that determine an object's edges.

If you drag an anchor point connected to a straight edge, the straightness of the edge is maintained.

If you drag an anchor point connected to a curved edge, the curve is maintained.

An object’s edge has just enough anchor points to retain its original shape. If you remove even one point, the shape changes. A simple shape such as a line has only two anchor points. More complicated shapes, such as text that has been converted to a curve, can have hundreds of points.

Point reshaping is available for all objects that are defined internally as vector-based curves. Performing point or curve reshaping on a shape such as a rectangle automatically converts the object to curves. After an object is converted to curves, it can no longer be edited as its original object type.

Tip

Use the wireframe view to speed up the redrawing of complex objects containing fills.


To select an object for point reshaping using the Edit tool

To select an object for point reshaping using the mouse

To select an object for point reshaping using the shortcut menu

To reshape by moving an anchor point

To move multiple anchorr points

To add a new anchor point to an object

To delete an anchor point


Introduction to Object Editing

Wireframe-Reshape View

Moving an Anchor Point

Moving Multiple Anchor Points

Adding and Deleting Anchor Points

Cutting an Edge

Joining Endpoints of an Open Object

Corner and Curve Anchor Points

Curve Reshaping

Reshaping a Text Container


To select an object for point reshaping using the Edit tool

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

Note

Point reshaping is not available for text containers. Use curve reshaping instead.


Point Reshaping

Curve Reshaping

Introduction to Object Editing


To select an object for point reshaping using the mouse

1	Select the object.

2	Double-click the object.

or

Hold down CTRL and click the object.

3	If the object shows a solid handle (indicating object-specific reshaping), click the right mouse button, and click To Curves. This converts the object to a curve and displays the object’s hollow anchor points.

Note

Point reshaping is not available for text containers. Use curve reshaping instead.

Tip

You can also select an object for point reshaping using Edit [image] in the Toolbox.


Point Reshaping

Curve Reshaping

Introduction to Object Editing


To select an object for point reshaping using the shortcut menu

1	Select the object.

2	Click the right mouse button and click Reshape Points.

Note

Point reshaping is not available for text containers. Use curve reshaping instead.

Tip

You can also select an object for point reshaping using Edit [image] in the Toolbox.


Moving an Anchor Point

Moving an anchor point is the simplest way to edit an object. As you move an anchor point, the lines connecting it to other points move with the point.

You can move anchor points in either Reshape Points or Reshape Curve editing modes.


To reshape by moving an anchor point

To move multiple anchorr points


Point Reshaping

Moving Multiple Anchor Points

Adding and Deleting Anchor Points


To reshape by moving an anchor point

1	Select the object you want to reshape.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Click an anchor point to select it. It turns solid.

5	Drag the anchor point to a new location. The object’s shape changes.

6	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tips

When you drag an anchor point, Designer shows a preview of the new shape of the object. Watch this preview and release the mouse button when you see the shape you want.

To create a copy of an anchor point, hold down SHIFT as you drag the point.

To constrain an anchor point’s angular movement to 15-degree increments, hold down CTRL as you drag the point.

To cancel a reshaping action, press ESC before releasing the mouse button.


Moving an Anchor Point

Moving Multiple Anchor Points

Adding and Deleting Anchor Points

Point Reshaping

Wireframe-Reshape View


Moving Multiple Anchor Points

You can simultaneously move more than one anchor point at a time by selecting the points and dragging one of them. To select multiple anchor points, hold down SHIFT and click each point, or drag a selection box around the anchor points you want selected.

You can move anchor points in either Reshape Points or Reshape Curve editing modes.


To move multiple anchor points

To reshape by moving an anchor point


Moving an Anchor Point

Point Reshaping

Adding and Deleting Anchor Points

Wireframe-Reshape View


To move multiple anchor points

1	Select the object you want to reshape.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Drag a selection box around the anchor points you want to select.

or

Click the first anchor point you want to select

5	Hold down SHIFT and click the other anchor points you want to select. Selected anchor points turn solid.

6	Point to any selected anchor point and drag the point. All selected points follow the movement.

7	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tips

To select all anchor points, press CTRL+A (or click Select All on the Edit menu).

To select all anchor points except the currently selected points, press CTRL+SHIFT+A (or hold down SHIFT and click Select All on the Edit menu.

To deselect an anchor point, hold down SHIFT and click the point.

If you start to drag a box around anchor points and then change your mind, press ESC to cancel the box.


Moving Multiple Anchor Points

Moving an Anchor Point

Adding and Deleting Anchor Points

Point Reshaping

Wireframe-Reshape View


Adding and Deleting Anchor Points

You can add new or delete existing anchor points to help in reshaping. Use Add Point [image] and Remove Point [image] on the Reshape ribbon to add and delete anchor points.

Anchor Point Deleted

You can add and delete anchor points in either Reshape Points or Reshape Curve editing modes.


To add a new anchor point to an object

To delete an anchor point

To create a corner

To create a cusp

To change the wireframe-reshape view setting


Point Reshaping

Moving an Anchor Point

Moving Multiple Anchor Points


To add a new anchor to an object
To add a new anchor point to an object

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Add Point [image].

5	Point where you want to add an anchor point and click the left mouse button. A new anchor point appears at that location.

6	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

You also can add anchor points to an object by pointing where you want an anchor point, holding down CTRL, and clicking the left mouse button.


Adding and Deleting Anchor Points

Point Reshaping

Moving an Anchor Point


To delete an anchor point

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Select the anchor point you want to delete.

5	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Remove Point [image]. Only the selected anchor points are deleted.

6	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

You can also delete an anchor point by selecting the point and pressing the DELETE key.


Adding and Deleting Anchor Points

Point Reshaping

Moving an Anchor Point


Cutting an Edge

Cutting an edge severs a line of an object. Cutting an edge opens a closed object and creates two endpoints where the cut occurs. You can cut only one edge at a time.

You can also cut an edge at an anchor point. After you cut the edge, the single anchor point becomes two anchor points that you can move separately.

You can cut an edge in either Reshape Points or Reshape Curve editing modes.


To cut an edge

To cut an edge at an anchor point


Joining Endpoints of an Open Object

Adding and Deleting Anchor Points

Point Reshaping


To cut an edge

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Cut at Point [image].

5	Click the edge where you want the cut. A solid anchor point appears at that location. (This is actually two anchor points, one for each new end.)

6	Drag the anchor point to move one endpoint. Moving one anchor point makes the other anchor point visible.

7	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Note

You can cut only one edge at a time. Make sure you click Cut at Point [image] before making each cut.


Cutting an Edge

Joining Endpoints of an Open Object


To cut an edge at an anchor point

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Click the anchor point you want to cut. It turns solid.

5	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Cut at Point [image]. The line is severed at the anchor point.

6	Drag the anchor point to move one endpoint. Moving one anchor point makes the other anchor point visible.

7	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.


Cutting an Edge

Joining Endpoints of an Open Object


Joining Endpoints of an Open Object

You can join the two endpoints of an open object using Join Points [image] on the Reshape ribbon. The two points are joined with a straight line.

You can join endpoints in either Reshape Points or Reshape Curve editing modes.


To join endpoints of an open object


Cutting an Edge

Point Reshaping


To join endpoints of an open object

1	Select the object you want to join.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Select one of the endpoints. It turns solid.

5	Hold down SHIFT and select the other endpoint. It turns solid.

6	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Join Points [image]. The object is closed and filled with the default interior fill.

7	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.


Joining Endpoints of an Open Object

Cutting an Edge


Corner and Curve Anchor Points

Converting a corner to a curve

You can produce symmetrical curves by converting an anchor point to a symmetrical curve point. After you convert an anchor point to a symmetrical curve point, dragging the anchor point reshapes the connected edges as curves.

Converting a curve to a corner

You can remove the curve from an object where it passes through an anchor point by converting the anchor point from a curve to a corner. The corner anchor point acts like a hinge.


To convert a corner to a symmetrical curve

To convert a curve to a corner


Point Reshapings

Curve Reshaping

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner

Creating a Cusp


To convert a corner to a symmetrical curve

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Click an anchor point to select it. It turns solid.

5	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Symmetrical Curve [image]. The lines touching the anchor point become symmetrical curves.


Corner and Curve Anchor Points

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner

Creating a Cusp


To convert a curve to a corner

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Points option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Select the anchor point.

5	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Corner [image]. The lines touching the anchor point become a corner.


Corner and Curve Anchor Points

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner

Creating a Cusp


Curve Reshaping

Curve reshaping lets you change the shape of an object by dragging its Bezier control points. Bezier control points are special points produced by defining the shape of an edge as a Bezier curve. When you reshape an edge by moving a control point, you change the shape of the edge, but not the location of its anchor points.

Curve reshaping always creates curved edges. The more you drag a control point, the more you curve an edge.

Before Curve Reshaping	After Curve Reshaping
Curve reshaping is available for all objects that are defined internally as vector-based curves. Performing curve reshaping on a shape such as a rectangle automatically converts the object to curves. After an object is converted to curves, it can no longer be edited as an object type (rectangle, blend object, dimension line, and so forth).

Take some time to practice curve reshaping. It is a skill that is worth learning if you plan to draw and edit curved objects.

Tip

You can also reshape text containers using curve reshaping. For more information, see Reshaping a Text Container.


To select an object for curve reshaping using the Edit tool

To select an object for curve reshaping using the mouse

To select an object for curve reshaping using the shortcut menu

To reshape a curve

To reshape a curve symmetrically

To create a corner

To create a cusp


Introduction to Object Editing

Wireframe-Reshape View

Using Control Points

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner

Creating a Cusp

Reducing Points

Point Reshaping

Reshaping a Text Container


To select an object for curve reshaping using the Edit tool

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Curve option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

Tips

Anchor points appear on an object when the object is in a reshape mode. If you are not certain which reshape mode the object is in, check the pointer. The pointer is shaped like an anchor point in Point Reshape mode and a control point in Curve Reshape mode.

You can also select an object for curve reshaping by clicking Curve Reshape [image] on the Drawing toolbar.


Curve Reshaping

Point Reshaping

Introduction to Object Editing


To select an object for curve reshaping using the mouse

1	Select the object.

2	Hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click the object.

Tip

You can also select an object for curve reshaping using Edit [image] in the Toolbox.


Curve Reshaping

Point Reshaping

Introduction to Object Editing


To select an object for curve reshaping using the shortcut menu

1	Select the object.

2	Click the right mouse button and click Reshape Curve.

Tip

You can also select an object for curve reshaping using Edit [image] in the Toolbox.


Introduction to Object Editing

Curve Reshaping

Point Reshaping


Using Control Points

Control points can be displayed only when curve reshaping.

To display an edge's control points, click one of the edge's anchor points. Because there are control points for each anchor point on an edge, you must decide which anchor’s control points you want to use to reshape the edge. After a little experience with control point reshaping, this choice is usually obvious.

Control points look like small checkerboards. Dragging a control point changes the shape of the edge associated with the point. Control points are always connected to anchor points. Think of a control point as a magnet that attracts the edge. When you drag a control point, the anchor point does not move [image] it anchors the control point to the object.

Control points control the angle of an edge as it leaves an anchor point. Control points affect both the direction and the distance that the edge travels to the next anchor point.

A control point usually appears above or below the edge it controls. Dragging the control point moves the edge toward the control point’s location.

Tip

When you move the mouse pointer over a control point, Designer draws a preview line between the control point and its anchor. This lets you quickly identify the anchor to which a control point is connected.


To reshape a curve

To reshape a curve symmetrically

To create a corner

To create a cusp


Curve Reshaping

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner

Creating a Cusp

Reducing Points


To reshape a curve

1	Select the object that you want to reshape.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Curve option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Select an anchor on the edge that you want to reshape. Checkerboard-shaped control points appear near the anchor.

5	Drag the control points to change the edge’s shape.

6	Repeat steps 4 and 5 to edit other edges of the object.

7	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tips

When you drag a control point, Designer shows a preview of the new shape of the edge. Watch this preview and release the mouse button when you see the shape you want.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you select curve reshaping, click the selection with the right mouse button.


Using Control Points

Curve Reshaping

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner

Creating a Cusp


Creating Symmetrical Curves

An anchor point on a curve has two control points. The Symmetrical Curve button [image] causes the second control point to mirror the movement of the first. You can use the Symmetrical Curve button to help maintain the curve of an object.


To reshape a curve symmetrically

To create a corner

To create a cusp


Curve Reshaping

Using Control Points

Creating a Corner

Creating a Cusp

Reducing Points


To reshape a curve symmetrically

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Curve option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Select an anchor point through which the curve passes.

5	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Symmetrical Curve [image].

6	Drag one of the control points. The other control point mirrors the movement.

7	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

You can also shape a curve symmetrically by selecting an anchor point and pressing CTRL+7.


Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner

Creating a Cusp


Creating a Corner

You can create a corner, or non-curving anchor point, at any point on a curve with the Corner button [image]. Lines that pass through non-curving anchor points lose their curvature.

You can also create a corner at the end of a line to remove a curve on a line.


To create a corner

To reshape a curve symmetrically

To create a cusp


Curve Reshaping

Using Control Points

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Cusp

Reducing Points


To create a corner

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Curve option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Select an anchor on the curve.

5	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Corner [image]. The lines touching the anchor point become straight so that a corner is formed at the anchor point.

6	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tips

You can also create a corner by selecting an anchor point and pressing CTRL+5.

To remove a curve at the end of a line, make the ending anchor point a corner.


Creating a Corner

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Cusp


Creating a Cusp

A cusp is an anchor point where two Bezier curves intersect at different angles, resulting in an elbow shape. Cusps are created by moving one control point independently of the second control point. You can unlock an anchor point’s control points so you can move them independently using the Unlocked Cusp button [image].

After creating the shape that you want by moving the control points independently, you can re-lock the control points using the Locked Cusp button [image]. Locking control points locks the angular relationship between the points so that when you drag one of the points, the opposite moves also as required to keep the angle between the two points the same. An anchor point’s control points are locked automatically by converting the anchor point to a symmetrical curve or corner.


To create a cusp

To reshape a curve symmetrically

To create a corner


Curve Reshaping

Using Control Points

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner

Reducing Points


To create a cusp

1	Select the object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Curve option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the selected object.

4	Select an anchor on the curve.

5	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Unlocked Cusp [image].

6	Drag one of the control points. Half of the cusp is formed.

7	Drag the second control point to create the second half of the cusp.

8	When you finish reshaping the object, cancel the reshaping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Reshape, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tips

To lock or unlock an individual control point, hold down SHIFT while dragging the control point. The locked or unlocked status of the point switches while the SHIFT key is pressed.

The keyboard shortcut for unlocking an anchor point's control points is CTRL+6.

The keyboard shortcut for locking an anchor point's control points is CTRL+4.


Creating a Cusp

Creating Symmetrical Curves

Creating a Corner


Reducing Points

Complex objects, such as those produced by tracing bitmap images, often have an undesirably large number of anchor points. By reducing the number of anchor points in a traced object, you may actually improve the object's appearance, because its edges are smoothed. In other cases, you may be able to reduce the number of anchor points in an object without changing its appearance substantially.

Reducing the number of anchor points in an object reduces the file size of the object and frequently improves its printing speed.

The Reduce Points command on the Change menu analyzes an object for excessive anchor points, makes a recommendation on the minimum number of points required to define the object, and lets you change the point count interactively.

To make it easy to see the effect of the point reduction, the Reduce Points dialog box shows both a "before" and "after" preview of the object. The "before" preview shows the original object with its point count unchanged. The "after" preview shows the object as it appears with reduced points.

When the Reduce Points dialog box opens, it shows the point count and tension (line smoothness) that Designer recommends. If you do not like the object's "after" appearance, you can adjust the point count and tension manually. The "after" preview changes automatically to show the effect of adjusting these settings.

The Audit Document Wizard also analyzes the point count of objects as part of its general audit. For information on using the Audit Document Wizard, see Using the Document Audit Wizard.

Notes

You can use Reduce Points to analyze the points of individual objects, multiple objects, or groups of objects.

The Reduce Points command is unavailable for shapes such as squares or circles for which there can be no point reduction without destroying the shape.


To reduce the number of anchor points in an object


Curve Reshaping

Using Control Points

Why Trace Bitmap Images?

Tips for Tracing


To reduce the number of anchor points in an object

1	Select the object you want to analyze.

2	On the Change menu, click Reduce Points. The Reduce Points dialog box opens.

The Original preview shows the object as currently defined (no point reduction). The original point count appears below the preview.

The Reduced preview shows the object as it appears after the recommended point reduction. The reduced point count appears below the preview.

3	To increase the number of points in the object, drag the Points slider toward More. To reduce the number of points in the object, drag the Points slider toward Less. The Reduced preview changes automatically to show the effect of the adjustment.

4	To increase the tension (line smoothness) in the object, drag the Tension slider toward More. To reduce the tension in the object, drag the Tension slider toward Less. The Reduced preview changes automatically to show the effect of the adjustment.

5	Click OK to replace the original object with the reduced object.

or

Click Cancel to cancel the point reduction and keep the original object.

Note

If the reduced point count does not change when you drag the sliders, then Designer cannot reduce the number of points in the object.

Tip

If you don’t like the effect of the point reduction, you can restore the original shape. On the Edit menu, click Undo Reduce Points.


Reducing Points

Curve Reshaping

Using Control Points


Reshaping Text

You can convert text to curves to reshape it like a vector-based object. For information on converting text to curves, see Converting Text to Curves.

Note

After you convert text to curves, you can change it back to text only with the Undo command.


Converting Text to Curves

Introduction to Object Editing

Curve Reshaping

Using Control Points

Reducing Points


TEXT.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Using Fonts

The text features of Designer are easy to use and give you a high degree of flexibility. For example, you can design brochures, logos, business cards, charts, slides, posters, banners, technical illustrations, scale drawings, product specs, schematics, blueprints, and even newsletters with Designer.

Designer uses scalable fonts. Scalable fonts are the highest-quality fonts available. They display as WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) and print exactly as they appear on the screen, regardless of the printer you use.

Fonts Defined

A font is a collection of letters, numerals, punctuation marks, and special characters that make up a complete character set of a given size and style of typeface.

For example, 10-point Garamond Bold is a font in which "10 point" is the size, "Garamond" is the typeface, and "Bold" is the type style. Ten-point Garamond Bold-Italic is considered a different font.

The type from a typewriter is a good example of a font. The letters, numbers, and symbols on a typewriter are one font.

A typeface is a collection of fonts of the same type. Traditionally, typefaces were available in sizes of 6 to 72 points. For example, the typeface "Garamond" might contain 12 fonts.

Conventions for Font and Typeface

Now that computers are commonly used for typesetting, the meaning of the words "font" and "typeface" has become so blurred that the words are now virtually interchangeable. For example, typefaces that accompany many computer applications are commonly called "fonts."


Installing Fonts

Types of Fonts

Typeface Tips

Using Special Characters

Special Text Effects

Using the Text Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Text Pointer and Text Cursor

Types of Text


Installing Fonts

Micrografx Graphics Suite 2 contains a font library of approximately 250 fonts. Unless you specify otherwise during installation, a standard set of these fonts is installed by the Micrografx Graphics Suite 2 Setup program. You can install additional Micrografx Graphics Suite 2 fonts by running the Micrografx Graphics Suite 2 Setup.

Designer recognizes fonts installed with the Micrografx Graphics Suite 2 Setup, fonts installed with Adobe Type Manager, and TrueType fonts installed with the Windows Control Panel.

In addition to being used by Designer, the fonts you add with any of these methods are used by other Windows applications such as Microsoft Word and Wordpad.

Adding many fonts gives you more choices, but large numbers of fonts use more memory and increase the time needed to load Designer and other Windows applications.

Using an Unavailable Font

If you open or import a document that contains a font that is not installed on your system, Designer substitutes a font that is available. If you edit the text, the original name of the font appears in the Font List box with a question mark beside it to remind you that Designer is substituting a different font. For more information on font substitution, see Font Mapping.


Using Fonts

Types of Fonts

Typeface Tips

Using Special Characters

Special Text Effects

Using the Text Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Text Pointer and Text Cursor

Types of Text

Font Mapping


Types of Fonts

Designer works with two types of fonts: scalable fonts and device fonts.

Scalable Fonts

Scalable fonts are drawn with curves like a vector-based object and can be modified to any shape or size. Scalable fonts are the highest-quality fonts available and print just as you see them on screen. The fonts included with Designer are all scalable fonts in TrueType format.

Scalable fonts print more slowly and require more memory than cartridge or device fonts.

Device Fonts

Device fonts are fonts stored in your printer’s memory or plug-in cartridge. They are very fast and sometimes scalable. Device fonts are loaded when you load the device driver. Device fonts always print correctly, but may appear different on screen.

If your printer does not support a font, Designer substitutes Arial for the font. You can change the font that is substituted for an unsupported font by modifying an entry in your system registry. For more information on font substitution, see Font Mapping.


Using Fonts

Installing Fonts

Typeface Tips

Using Special Characters

Special Text Effects

Using the Text Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Text Pointer and Text Cursor

Types of Text

Font Mapping


Typeface Tips

Choosing a typeface depends largely on the subject matter and your individual tastes. Here are a few basic principles for you to follow:

Don’t use too many typefaces and font sizes in a design. Three or four typefaces are enough.

Don’t use all capital letters for large blocks of text.

Never set black letters (Old English), scripts, or cursives in all capitals.

Use decorative fonts such as Marriage or Uncial to convey short, informal, or specialized messages. Use decorative fonts sparingly.

Use sans serif fonts such as Helvetica or Swiss for on-screen presentations.

Roman typefaces such as Times and Century Schoolbook suggest dignity and integrity.

Sans serif typefaces such as Optimum and Helvetica have a modern, contemporary flavor.


Using Fonts

Installing Fonts

Types of Fonts

Using Special Characters

Special Text Effects

Using the Text Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Text Pointer and Text Cursor

Types of Text


Using Special Characters

Special characters such as umlauts, trademark symbols, and fractions do not appear on most keyboards. When you want to use a special character, you must insert them by entering their code on the numeric keypad or by using the Character Map application that accompanies Windows.

Although most fonts contain a complete set of special characters, some fonts do not. For example, if you are using a font that does not have the trademark symbol, you must change to a font that does have it to insert that symbol.

Using the Keypad

Each character in a font is associated with a number. For example, "µ" has the number 0181, regardless of the font. The number is called an ANSI (American National Standards Institute) character code.

Dingbats

Text fonts use the standard ANSI character codes. Non-text fonts such as dingbats are assigned character codes, but there is no standard. You must use the keypad or the Character Map application to insert non-text characters.

Windows Character Map

The Character Map application is included with Windows, but it may not be installed by default on your system. If the Character Map application does not appear on the Accessories menu on your Start menu, then you can obtain it by reinstalling Windows and choosing the Character Map option. Consult your Windows documentation for more information.

Using the Character Map, you can copy and paste special characters into your Designer documents.


To insert a character with the keypad


Using Fonts

Installing Fonts

Types of Fonts

Typeface Tips

Special Text Effects

Using the Text Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Text Pointer and Text Cursor

Types of Text


To insert a character with the keypad

1	Select the font to use.

2	Place the text cursor where you want the special character.

3	Turn on NUM LOCK on the keypad, if necessary.

4	Hold down ALT and type 0 (zero) and the three-digit character code. For example, to insert the copyright symbol, hold down ALT and type 0169 on the numeric keypad.

5	Release ALT. The special character is inserted in the text.

Tip

You must use the numeric keypad in step 4. You cannot use the number keys on the top row of your keyboard.


Using Special Characters


Special Text Effects

Designer lets you create a variety of special text effects, including warping text, applying colors and fills to text, fitting text to a path, and reshaping text.


Warping Text

Setting Text Color

Adding Fills and Patterns to Text

Fitting Text to a Path

Reshaping Text


Using the Text Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box gives you access to all text attributes.

Text Attribute Buttons

These buttons show the panels for the different types of text attributes:

Click Font [image] to show the font panel.

Click Tab Stops [image] to show the tab stops panel.

Click Spacing [image] to show the spacing panel.

Preview Button

The Preview button lets you see the effect of text settings on a selection. (This button has no effect if no text is selected or highlighted.) You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

Apply and Close Buttons

As with many of the dialog boxes in Designer, the Object Format box stays open to let you apply changes to objects and text without having to open the dialog box repeatedly. You can click Apply each time you want to apply a change to a selection. The dialog box does not close until you click Close.

Rolling Up the Dialog Box

By rolling up the Object Format dialog box, you can keep it accessible, but out of your way. Click [image] on the title bar to roll up the dialog box. Click [image] to unroll it.


Using Fonts

Installing Fonts

Types of Fonts

Typeface Tips

Using Special Characters


Text Pointer and Text Cursor

The text pointer, which is shaped like an I-beam, is used for text actions such as positioning the text cursor, drawing a text container, and highlighting text.

When no objects are selected, simply clicking Text [image] in the Toolbox displays the text pointer.

When an object is selected, you must click the Text tool and then click Text Mode [image] on the Ribbon toolbar to display the text pointer.

The text cursor, which you use to enter and edit text, is a blinking vertical line. The text cursor is displayed by clicking in the drawing area with the text pointer.


Using Fonts

Installing Fonts

Types of Fonts

Typeface Tips

Using Special Characters

Types of Text


Types of Text

There are two types of text in Designer: freeform text and block text.

Freeform and block text let you create text objects (any object composed of text) in slightly different ways. Block text is created inside a container, while freeform text has no container.

Freeform Text

Use freeform text when you want to create titles, short sentences, or labels, for example.

Freeform text cannot flow from one text object to another, nor does it use margins, "word wrap," or indents. Resizing a freeform text object changes the size of the text. You cannot wrap freeform text around an object (repel text).

Block Text

Block text is useful when you want to organize text into paragraphs, columns, and pages.

You can connect text blocks so that the text flows from one container to another, and you can assign margins and indents to the text. Resizing block text changes the size of the container, but not the text. The container around block text is visible only when you are entering or editing the block text.


To enter freeform text

To enter block text


Entering Freeform Text

Entering Block Text

Text Editing Shortcuts

Text Pointer and Text Cursor

Converting between Block and Freeform Text


Entering Freeform Text

To enter freeform text, just click the drawing area with the text pointer. The text cursor appears and you can type the text. You can type text only when the text cursor is visible. The appearance of the text depends upon the font, font size, style, and text color settings.

If you make a typing mistake, use the arrow keys to move the text cursor to correct it. To delete the character before the text cursor, press BACKSPACE. To delete the character after the text cursor, press DELETE. For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for editing text, see Text Editing Shortcuts.


To enter freeform text

To enter block text


Types of Text

Entering Block Text

Text Editing Shortcuts

Text Pointer and Text Cursor


To enter freeform text

1	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Text Mode [image] to display the text pointer, if necessary.

3	Point where you want the text to begin. Click the left mouse button to display the text cursor.

4	Type the text. If you make a mistake, press BACKSPACE to erase it.

5	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the text when you finish entering the text.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for selecting the Text tool is CTRL+T.

The appearance of text depends upon its font, font size, style, and text color settings.

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for editing text, see Text Editing Shortcuts.


Entering Freeform Text

Entering Block Text

Types of Text

Text Editing Shortcuts


Entering Block Text

You enter block text by creating a container and typing text inside it. The size of the container determines how much of the block text is shown. If you type more text than fits in the container, the part of the text that extends beyond the container is invisible. To make all of the text visible, enlarge the container or flow the extra text to another container. For information on flowing text between containers, see Flowing Text. The appearance of the text depends upon the font, font size, style, and text color settings.

You can enter or edit block text only when the text cursor is visible. Zoom in to view and edit the characters, if necessary (or use the Edit Text window as described in Editing Text in a Window).

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for editing text, see Text Editing Shortcuts.


To enter block text

To enter freeform text


Types of Text

Entering Freeform Text

Text Editing Shortcuts

Text Pointer and Text Cursor


To enter block text

1	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Text Mode [image] to display the text pointer, if necessary.

3	Point where you want the text block to begin.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to create a box with dashed lines. The box is the text container.

5	Release the mouse button when you finish the box. The text cursor appears inside the container.

6	Type the text.

7	Press ESC when you finish entering the text.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for selecting the Text tool is CTRL+T.

The appearance of text depends upon its font, font size, style, and text color settings.

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for editing text, see Text Editing Shortcuts.


Entering Block Text

Entering Freeform Text

Types of Text

Text Editing Shortcuts


Text Editing Shortcuts

The keyboard shortcuts for moving the text cursor when editing (or entering) freeform and block text are listed below.

Press	Action

LEFT ARROW	Move the text cursor one character to the left

RIGHT ARROW	Move the text cursor one character to the right

UP ARROW	Move the text cursor up one line

DOWN ARROW	Move the text cursor down one line

HOME	Move the text cursor to the beginning of the line

END	Move the text cursor to the end of the line

CTRL+LEFT ARROW	Move the text cursor one word to the left

CTRL+RIGHT ARROW	Move the text cursor one word to the right

CTRL+UP ARROW	Move the text cursor up one paragraph

CTRL+DOWN ARROW	Move the text cursor down one paragraph

CTRL+HOME	Move the text cursor to the beginning of the text

CTRL+END	Move the text cursor to the end of the text

BACKSPACE	Delete the character to the left of the text cursor

DELETE	Delete the character to the right of the text cursor

CTRL+BACKSPACE	Delete the word to the left of the text cursor

CTRL+DELETE	Delete the word to the right of the text cursor

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for highlighting text, see Text Highlighting Shortcuts.


Entering Freeform Text

Entering Block Text

Text Highlighting Shortcuts

Text Pointer and Text Cursor


Selecting Text

Before you can change text, you must select it.

There are two ways to select text:

Select the text as an object.

Highlight a portion of the text.

When you select text as an object, you are dealing with all of the text in the selection. When you highlight a portion of text, you are dealing only with the portion of text that you highlighted.


To select a text object

To highlight text


Selecting a Text Object

Highlighting a Portion of Text


Selecting a Text Object

You can select both freeform and block text as an object by clicking it with the Select pointer. Eight blue handles appear around the text indicating that it is selected.

Before Selection	After Selection
Select text as an object when you want to change all of the text. For example, if you select a text object and click Bold [image] on the Text ribbon, all of the text is bolded.


To select a text object


Selecting Text

Highlighting a Portion of Text


To select a text object

Point to the text with the Select pointer and click. Handles appear around the text indicating that it is selected.

Tip

To select several text objects, hold down SHIFT, and click each text object you want to select.


Selecting a Text Object

Selecting Text

Highlighting a Portion of Text


Highlighting a Portion of Text

Highlight text when you want to change only part of the text in a text block. Only the highlighted text is affected so, for example, you can replace the highlighted text (by typing new text), delete the highlighted text, or italicize one word in a block.

You can highlight text and change its size, font, color, style (italics or bold, for example), alignment, or letter spacing.


To highlight text


Selecting Text

Selecting a Text Object

Text Highlighting Shortcuts


To highlight text

1	Select the text object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Edit Text option on the menu. The text cursor is positioned at the beginning of the text.

4	Point where you want to begin highlighting.

5	Press and hold the left mouse button and drag to the right (and down if you want to highlight text on another line). The text is highlighted as you drag.

6	Release the left mouse button.

7	Make the desired changes to the highlighted text or press DELETE to delete it.

8	Press ESC when you finish editing the text.

Tips

You can also double-click the text with the Select pointer to position the text cursor in the text.

To delete and replace a portion of text, highlight the text, and then type the new text.

To highlight all text in a block, position the text cursor in the block and press CTRL+A.

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for highlighting text, see Text Highlighting Shortcuts.


Highlighting a Portion of Text

Selecting a Text Object

Selecting Text

Text Highlighting Shortcuts


Text Highlighting Shortcuts

The keyboard shortcuts for highlighting text when editing freeform and block text are listed below.

Press	To Highlight

SHIFT+LEFT ARROW	To the left of the text cursor

SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW	To the right of the text cursor

SHIFT+UP ARROW	To the previous line

SHIFT+DOWN ARROW	To the next line

SHIFT+HOME	To the beginning of the line

SHIFT+END	To the end of the line

CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW	To the previous word

CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW	To the next word

CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW	To the beginning of the paragraph

CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN ARROW	To the end of the paragraph

CTRL+SHIFT+HOME	To the beginning of the text

CTRL+SHIFT+END	To the end of the text

CTRL+A	All of the text

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for editing text, see Text Editing Shortcuts.


Highlighting a Portion of Text

Text Editing Shortcuts


Resizing a Text Container

You can resize the text container around block text to change the text flow. Resizing a text container does not otherwise change the appearance of the text.

Dragging a container handle resizes the container. The text reflows to accommodate the new container size, but the text size and style attributes do not change.

Tip

You can also reshape the container to change the text flow. For information on reshaping the text container, see Reshaping a Text Container.


To resize a text container


Selecting Text

Selecting a Text Object

Reshaping a Text Container


To resize a text container

1	Select the text block.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Edit Text option on the menu. The text container appears.

4	Move the pointer to a container handle.

5	Drag the handle to a new position.

6	Release the mouse button.

7	Repeat steps 4 through 6 to adjust the other handle, if desired.

8	Press ESC when you finish resizing the container.

Tip

You can also display the text container by double-clicking the text block with the Select pointer or by clicking it with the text pointer.


Resizing a Text Container


Inserting and Deleting Text

Use the text cursor as a guide when inserting or deleting text. To position the text cursor, click the text where you want the cursor. You can reposition the cursor in the text by pressing the arrow keys or by clicking at another point in the text.

Tip

Press HOME to position the text cursor at the beginning of a line. Press END to position the text cursor at the end of a line.


To insert text

To delete text


Selecting Text

Selecting a Text Object


To insert text

1	Select the text object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Edit Text option on the menu. The text cursor is positioned at the beginning of the text.

4	Point where you want to insert text and click the left mouse button. The text cursor is positioned at location.

5	Type the new text.

6	Press ESC when you finish editing the text.

Tips

You can also display the text cursor by double-clicking the text object with the Select pointer or by clicking it with the text pointer.

To replace a portion of text, highlight the text, and then type the new text.

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for editing text, see Text Editing Shortcuts.


Inserting and Deleting Text


To delete text

1	Select the text object.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Edit Text option on the menu. The text cursor is positioned at the beginning of the text.

4	Point to the right of the text to delete and click the left mouse button. The text cursor is positioned at that location.

5	Press BACKSPACE to delete the text to the left of the text cursor.

6	Press ESC when you finish editing the text.

Tips

You can also display the text cursor by double-clicking the text object with the Select pointer or by clicking it with the text pointer.

You can press DELETE to delete text to the right of the text cursor.

To delete and replace a portion of text, highlight the text, then type the new text.

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for editing text, see Text Editing Shortcuts.


Editing Text in a Window

The Edit Text window provides a method of editing text that can be quicker and more convenient than editing text in the drawing area. The Edit Text window makes it easy to edit text to which you have applied graphic effects such as warping, because it displays the text without those effects. You can also use the Edit Text window to edit text that is too small to view without zooming in.

The Edit Text window shows text in the appropriate font and lets you apply style attributes such as bold and italic.

You can edit both freeform and block text in the Edit Text window. To open the Edit Text window for all text except warped text, press and hold SHIFT and click the text with the text pointer. To open the Edit Text window for warped text, just click the text with the text pointer (without pressing SHIFT).

Using the Edit Text Window

Use the text cursor as a guide when adding, changing, or deleting text in the Edit Text window. Position the cursor by pressing the HOME, END, and arrow keys or by clicking in the text where you want the cursor.

Highlight text in the Edit Text window as you would in the drawing area: position the text pointer at the beginning of the text and drag it over the text you want to highlight.


To open the Edit Text window

To apply style attributes to text in the Edit Text window


Text Editing Shortcuts

Text Highlighting Shortcuts


To open the Edit Text window

1	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Text Mode [image] to display the text pointer, if necessary.

3	Point to the text with the text pointer.

4	Press and hold SHIFT, and click with the left mouse button. The Edit Text window opens.

5	Edit the text in the window.

Tip

If the text cursor is positioned within text, press ESC before following the procedure given above.


Editing Text in a Window


To apply style attributes to text in the Edit Text window

1	Highlight the text you want to change.

2	Click the right mouse button. A shortcut menu appears.

3	Choose the desired style from the menu.


Editing Text in a Window


Importing Text

You can compose text in a word processing or other Windows application and import it into your Designer drawing.

There are two ways to bring text into Designer. You can paste text into Designer from the Clipboard, or you can import text as a plain (ASCII) or Rich Text Format (RTF) text file.

Text can be imported as freeform or block text. If you import ASCII text (for example, a TXT file), it appears in the current font and style. If you import RTF text, it appears in the font and style in which it was originally created.


To import text from a text file

To paste text as freeform text

To paste text as block text


Pasting Text

Pasting Text Inside an Object


To import text from a text file

1	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

2	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Text Mode [image] to display the text pointer, if necessary.

3	Click a text object to insert the text cursor.

or

Begin a new text object (click for freeform text, drag a container for block text).

4	On the File menu, click Import. The Import dialog box opens.

5	In the Files of Type box, choose ASCII Text (*.TXT) to import regular ASCII text or Rich Text Format (*.RTF) to import RTF text.

6	Highlight the file to import and click Import. The text appears.

7	Press ESC when you finish editing.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Import dialog box is CTRL+1.


Importing Text

Pasting Text


Pasting Text

You can copy text from another application and paste it into Designer as freeform or block text.


To paste text as freeform text

To paste text as block text

To paste text inside an object


Pasting Text Inside an Object

Converting between Block and Freeform Text

Importing Text


To paste text as freeform text

1	Copy or cut the text to the Clipboard.

2	Change to Designer, if necessary.

3	Press CTRL+V to paste the text into Designer

4	Press ESC when you finish editing the text.

Tip

To display a shortcut menu that lets you paste the text, click the drawing area with the right mouse button.


Pasting Text

Importing Text


To paste text as block text

1	Copy or cut the text to the Clipboard.

2	Change to Designer, if necessary.

3	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Text Mode [image] to display the text pointer, if necessary.

5	Point where you want the text to begin.

6	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to create a box with dashed lines. The box is the text container.

7	Release the mouse button when you finish the box. The text cursor appears inside the container.

8	Press CTRL+V to paste the text into Designer

9	Press ESC when you finish editing the text.

Tip

You can also paste the text by clicking Paste on the Edit menu.


Pasting Text Inside an Object

You can paste text inside a container that matches a closed object’s outline. For information on placing text inside an object, see Placing Text Inside an Object.


To paste text inside an object

To paste text as freeform text

To paste text as block text


Placing Text Inside an Object

Pasting Text

Importing Text


To paste text inside an object

1	Copy or cut the text to the Clipboard.

2	Select a closed object.

3	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Shape Text [image]. The text cursor appears inside the selected object.

5	On the Edit menu, click Paste.

6	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for pasting is CTRL+V.


Pasting Text Inside an Object

Placing Text Inside an Object

Pasting Text


Converting between Block and Freeform Text

You can use the Clipboard to convert block text to freeform text and freeform text to block text. Each paragraph of block text converts to a single line of freeform text.


To convert block text to freeform text

To convert freeform text to block text


Pasting Text

Types of Text


To convert block text to freeform text

1	Highlight the block text you want to convert.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy (or Cut) to copy the text to the Clipboard.

3	Double-click anywhere outside the text area to deselect all text.

4	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox to display the text pointer.

5	Move the text pointer where you want to place the freeform text, and click the left mouse button to place the text cursor.

6	On the Edit menu, click Paste. The text is pasted into the drawing as freeform text.

7	Press ESC when you finish editing.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for pasting is CTRL+V.


Converting between Block and Freeform Text


To convert freeform text to block text

1	Highlight the freeform text you want to convert.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy (or Cut) to copy the text to the Clipboard.

3	Double-click anywhere outside the text area to deselect all text.

4	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

5	Point where you want the text block to begin.

6	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to create a box with dashed lines. The box is the text container.

7	Release the mouse button when you finish the box. The text cursor appears inside the container.

8	On the Edit menu, click Paste. The text is pasted into the container.

9	Press ESC when you finish editing.

Tip

To display a shortcut menu that lets you paste the text, click the container with the right mouse button.


Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles and Colors
Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors

A text object can contain any combination of fonts, font sizes, styles, and colors.

You can set fonts, font sizes, and styles using the Text ribbon, the Object Format dialog box, shortcut keys, or the shortcut menu. You can set font colors using the Color Palette or the Object Format dialog box.

You can set type attributes before you enter text, or you can change them for existing text.


To choose a font

To set font size

To set font style

To set text color using the Color Palette

To set text color using the Object Format dialog box

To set text background color

To set text line color


Choosing Fonts

Setting Font Size

Setting Font Style

Setting Text Color

Adding Fills and Patterns to Text


Choosing Fonts

The fonts available in Designer are listed in the Font List box on the Text ribbon. The name of each font is shown in the font, so you know instantly what the font looks like. The icon preceding the font name identifies the type of font.

Icon	Type of font

TrueType font

Adobe Type 1 font

Printer (device) font

Note

If a blue question mark icon appears, it indicates that selected text saved in the document is in a font that is not currently installed on your computer.


To choose a font


Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors

Setting Font Size

Setting Font Style

Setting Text Color

Adding Fills and Patterns to Text


To choose a font

1	Select the text object.

or

Highlight the text.

2	On the Format menu, click Font. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Fonts [image] to display the font panel, if necessary.

4	Choose the font using the font box. To expand the font box, click the arrow beside the box.

5	Click Apply. The font is applied to the text.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Text tab of the Object Format dialog box is CTRL+SHIFT+T.

To locate a font in the font box quickly, click the box, and type the first letter of the font name.

You can also choose fonts using the Font List box on the Text ribbon.

Click Font Recall [image] on the Text ribbon to choose a font you have used previously.


Choosing Fonts

Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors


Setting Font Size

When setting the size of text, you can choose from a predefined range of 2 to 3,000 points, or specify a custom size (10.5, for example).

You can also change the font size of text by selecting it and dragging its handles. Use the corner handles to resize the text proportionally.


To set font size


Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors

Choosing Fonts

Setting Font Style

Setting Text Color

Adding Fills and Patterns to Text


To set font size

1	Select the text object.

or

Highlight the text.

2	On the Format menu, click Font. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Fonts [image] to display the font panel, if necessary.

4	Type the font size in the Size spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Click Apply. The font size is applied to the text.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Text tab of the Object Format dialog box is CTRL+SHIFT+T.

You can also choose the font size using the Font Size box on the Text ribbon.


Setting Font Size

Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors


Setting Font Style

The following font styles are available in Designer.

The keyboard shortcuts for applying font styles to selected and highlighted text are listed below.

Press	Action

CTRL+B	Applies or removes bold

CTRL+I	Applies or removes italic

CTRL+U	Applies or removes underline

CTRL+M	Applies or removes small caps

CTRL+K	Applies or removes superscript

CTRL+SHIFT+K	Applies or removes subscript

Press the keyboard shortcut once to apply the style. Press it again to remove the style.


To set font style


Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors

Choosing Fonts

Setting Font Size

Setting Text Color

Adding Fills and Patterns to Text


To set font style

1	Select the text object.

or

Highlight the text.

2	On the Format menu, click Font. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Font [image] to display the font panel, if necessary.

4	Click the style button under Attributes. For example, to apply bold to the selection, click Bold [image].

5	Click Apply. The font style is applied to the text.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Text tab of the Object Format dialog box is CTRL+SHIFT+T.

You can also apply font styles by clicking Bold [image], Italic [image], Underline [image], or Small Caps [image] on the Text ribbon.


Setting Font Style

Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors


Setting Text Color

You can set the following color attributes for text:

The color of the text (text color)

The color of the area behind the text (text background color)

The color of the line defining the text (text line color)

These attributes are illustrated below.

In the example on the left, the text color is blue, the text background color is yellow, and the text line color is no fill (invisible). In the example on the right, the text color is yellow, the text background color is no fill (invisible), and the text line color is blue.

The default setting for the text line color is no fill, and the default setting for text line weight is hairline. To emphasize the text line color in the example on the right, the text line weight has been set to 5 points. For information on setting line weight, see Setting Line Weight.


To set text color using the Color Palette

To set text color using the Object Format dialog box

To set text background color

To set text line color


Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors

Choosing Fonts

Setting Font Size

Setting Font Style

Adding Fills and Patterns to Text


To set text color using the Color Palette

1	Select or highlight the text you want to change.

2	Click a color in the Color Palette.

Tips

To set text line color, right-click a color in the Color Palette.

If you do not see the Color Palette, click Toolbars on the View menu, and then select Palette.

You can also set text color using the Object Format dialog box or Solid Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


Setting Text Color

Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors


To set text color using the Object Format dialog box

1	Select or highlight the text you want to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Font. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Font [image] to display the font panel, if necessary.

4	Click the Text Color button. A color palette appears.

5	Click the color that you want.

6	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the text background color, click the Text Background button.

To see the effect of a text color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also set text color using Solid Interior Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


To set text background color

1	Select or highlight the text you want to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Font. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Font [image] to display the font panel, if necessary.

4	Click the Text Background button. A color palette appears.

5	Click the color that you want.

6	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the text color, click the Text Color button.

To see the effect of a text background color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.


To set text line color

1	Select or highlight the text you want to change.

2	Using the right mouse button, click a color in the Color Palette.

Tips

Click the swatch with the X in it to select no fill (invisible).

To set text color, left-click a color in the Color Palette.

If you do not see the Color Palette, click Toolbars on the View menu, and then select Palette.

You can also set text line color using Solid Line Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


Adding Fills and Patterns to Text

You can add gradient, image, hatch, and object fills to text, just as you can for any closed object.

After applying a fill to text, you can change its foreground and background colors using the Color Palette. To choose another foreground color, select or highlight the text and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another background color, select or highlight the text, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


Using Fonts, Sizes, Styles, and Colors

Adding Gradient Fills to Objects

Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects

Adding Image Patterns to Objects

Filling an Object with Other Objects


Setting Margins and Indents

You can set right and left margins and first-line indents for block text.

The right and left margins determine the distance between the block text and the sides of its container.

The first-line indent moves the start of the first line of a paragraph to the left or right of the left margin.


To adjust text margins

To adjust text indents


Changing Line and Character Spacing


To adjust text margins

1	Select the block text.

or

Highlight the paragraph to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Tab Stops. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Tab Stops [image] to display the tab stops panel, if necessary.

4	Type the left margin value in the Left spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Type the right margin value in the Right spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

6	Click Apply. The text block changes to reflect the new margin settings.

Tips

You can set margins separately for each paragraph in a text block.

You do not need to close the dialog box to apply the changes.


Setting Margins and Indents


To adjust text indents

1	Select the block text.

or

Highlight the paragraph to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Tab Stops. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Tab Stops [image] to display the tab stops panel, if necessary.

4	Type the indent value in the First Line spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

Use a positive number to move the indent to the right of the left margin. Use a negative number to move the indent to the left of the left margin.

5	Click Apply. The text block changes to reflect the new indent setting.

Tip

You can set the indent separately for each paragraph in a text block.


Changing Line and Character Spacing

Each font in Designer has its own default line and character spacing. You can change the spacing between characters, words, lines, and paragraphs.


To change text leading (line spacing)

To change paragraph spacing

To change character spacing

To change word spacing

To kern text


Line Spacing

Paragraph Spacing

Character and Word Spacing

Kerning


Line Spacing

The space between lines of text is called leading. Leading is measured (in points) from baseline to baseline. The default is the current font size plus approximately 15% of the font size (the percent may vary from font to font). For example, if the current font is 10 points, then the default leading is approximately 11.5 points.

You can change the leading for existing block text, or specify leading for block text you are going to enter. If a block text selection contains different sizes of text, Designer displays leading for the largest font.

Note

You cannot change the leading of freeform text.


To change text leading (line spacing)


Changing Line and Character Spacing

Paragraph Spacing

Character and Word Spacing

Kerning


To change text leading (line spacing)

1	Select the block text.

or

Highlight the paragraph to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Font. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Font [image] to display the font panel, if necessary.

4	Click Default to select the default leading.

or

Type the leading value in the Leading spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Click Apply to change the leading.

Tips

To change the leading using the mouse, hold down SHIFT, and drag the bottom handle of the text container up or down.

You can set the leading separately for each paragraph in a text block.


Line Spacing

Changing Line and Character Spacing


Paragraph Spacing

Paragraph spacing determines the amount of space between paragraphs in block text and between lines in freeform text.

Note

If the before and after paragraph spacing is set to zero, Designer automatically uses the current leading for the paragraph, which results in no extra space before or after the paragraph.


To change paragraph spacing


Changing Line and Character Spacing

Line Spacing

Character and Word Spacing

Kerning


To change paragraph spacing

1	Select the text.

or

Highlight the paragraph to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Spacing. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Spacing [image] to display the spacing panel, if necessary.

4	Type the before paragraph spacing value in the Before spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Type the after paragraph spacing value in the After spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

6	Click Apply to change the paragraph spacing.

Tips

To change the paragraph spacing using the mouse, hold down CTRL, and drag the bottom handle of the text container up or down.

You can set the paragraph spacing separately for each line in freeform text and for each paragraph in a text block.


Paragraph Spacing

Changing Line and Character Spacing


Character and Word Spacing

You can increase or decrease the spacing between words and characters by changing the spacing percentage. The default setting for both words and characters is 100% spacing. Decreasing the percentage decreases the spacing between the characters or words; increasing the percentage increases the spacing.


To change character spacing

To change word spacing


Changing Line and Character Spacing

Line Spacing

Paragraph Spacing

Kerning


To change character spacing

1	Select the text.

or

Highlight the text to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Spacing. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Spacing [image] to display the spacing panel, if necessary.

4	Type the character spacing value in the Inter-Character spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Click Apply to change the character spacing.

Tips

To change the character spacing using the mouse, hold down SHIFT, and drag the side handle of the text container left or right.

You can set the character spacing for both freeform and block text.


Character and Word Spacing

Changing Line and Character Spacing


To change word spacing

1	Select the text.

or

Highlight the text to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Spacing. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Spacing [image] to display the spacing panel, if necessary.

4	Type the word spacing value in the Inter-Word spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Click Apply to change the word spacing.

Tips

To change the word spacing using the mouse, hold down CTRL, and drag the side handle of the text container left or right.

You can set the word spacing for both freeform and block text.


Kerning

Changing the spacing between certain pairs of characters is called kerning. Kerning adjusts the spacing between particular characters that look better when they are closer together. Some commonly kerned characters are shown below.


To kern text


Changing Line and Character Spacing

Line Spacing

Paragraph Spacing

Character and Word Spacing


To kern text

1	Position the text cursor between the characters you want to kern.

2	To increase the spacing, press ALT+CTRL+RIGHT ARROW.

To decrease the spacing, press ALT+CTRL+LEFT ARROW.

Tips

Use View [image] to zoom in text you want to kern. The closer you zoom, the easier it is to see the kerning effect.

You can kern both freeform and block text.


Kerning

Changing Line and Character Spacing


Using Automatic Hyphenation

Designer can automatically hyphenate words to help decrease the raggedness of left justified text and to help maintain character and word spacing in justified text.


To use automatic hyphenation


Changing Line and Character Spacing

Line Spacing

Paragraph Spacing

Character and Word Spacing

Kerning


To use automatic hyphenation

1	Select the text block.

or

Highlight the paragraph to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Spacing. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Spacing [image] to display the spacing panel, if necessary.

4	Select the Automatic Hyphenation option.

5	Click Apply to hyphenate the text.

Tip

You can hyphenate only block text.


Using Automatic Hyphenation


Setting Tabs

Tab stops are relative to the text object. For example, if the first tab stop is .5 picas, the first tab is .5 picas from the left margin. If the second tab stop is 1.0 picas, it is 1.0 picas from the left margin, and so on. Text objects maintain their original tab positions even if you move the object.


To set tab stops

To set leaders


Setting Leaders


To set tab stops

1	Select the text.

or

Highlight the paragraph to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Tab Stops. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Tab Stops [image] to display the tab stops panel, if necessary.

4	Click Empty to clear the tab stops already defined, if desired.

5	Type a position for the tab stop in the position spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

6	Expand the tab type list box and choose the type of tab stop you want.

Click [image] to choose a left tab.

Click [image] to choose a right tab.

Click [image] to choose a center tab.

Click [image] to choose a decimal tab.

7	Click Add Tab [image] to add a single tab stop, or click Repeat Tab [image] to add repeating tab stops. The new tab stop or stops appear in the Tabs list.

8	Click Apply to apply the tab stops to the selection.

Tips

To delete a tab stop, select the tab stop in the Tabs list, and click Delete.

Use the spin box beside Repeat Tab [image] to set the number of repeating tab stops.


Setting Tabs

Setting Leaders


Setting Leaders

Leaders are characters such as periods ( . ), hyphens ( - ), and underscores ( _ ) that appear to the left of tabulated text.


To set leaders

To set tab stops


Setting Tabs


To set leaders

1	Select the text.

or

Highlight the paragraph to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Tab Stops. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Tab Stops [image] to display the tab stops panel, if necessary.

4	Type the position of the tab stop to which you want to add leaders in the position spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select the value.

5	Expand the leaders list box and choose the type of leader you want. Choose None for no leaders.

6	Click Add Tab [image]. A message appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing tab.

7	Click Yes. The previous tab stop is replaced with the new tab stop.

8	Click Apply to apply the tab stops to the selection.

Tip

You do not need to close the dialog box to apply the changes.


Setting Leaders

Setting Tabs


Using Drop Caps

A drop cap is an enlarged first capital letter in a selection of text. A drop cap is created by lowering the baseline of the first character in a paragraph so that it aligns with the baseline of the last indented line.


To create an initial drop cap


Setting Tabs


To create an initial drop cap

1	Select the text block.

or

Position the text cursor following the character you want to make a drop cap.

2	On the Format menu, click Spacing. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Spacing [image] to display the spacing panel, if necessary.

4	Select the Drop Capital option.

5	Type the size percentage in the drop size spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

Use a value less than 100 to reduce the size of the drop cap. Use a value greater than 100 to increase the size of the drop cap.

6	Click Apply to create the drop cap.

Tip

You can create drop caps only for block text.


Using Drop Caps


Text Alignment Options

You can align text horizontally or vertically. Horizontal text alignment aligns text from left to right, and vertical alignment aligns text from top to bottom. You can align both freeform and block text.

Horizontal Alignment Options (Left Align, Right Align, Center Align, Full Justify)

Vertical Alignment Options (Align Top, Align Bottom, Align Middle, Full Justify)

Note

Vertically justified text ignores previous leading settings.


To align freeform text

To align block text


Aligning Freeform Text

Aligning Block Text

Text Alignment Shortcuts


Aligning Freeform Text

You can choose an alignment option before or after you enter freeform text. If you select an alignment option before entering text, the text is aligned to the text cursor’s position. For example, if the text is aligned at the right, the cursor does not move and text appears to the left of the cursor as you type.

If you select a freeform text object or highlight only the text you want to align, the alignment is based on the bounding box that surrounds the text. The bounding box is as wide as the longest line of text and as tall as the number of lines of text.

Note

Freeform text cannot be justified vertically or horizontally.


To align freeform text

To align block text


Text Alignment Options

Aligning Block Text

Text Alignment Shortcuts


To align freeform text

1	Select the freeform text.

2	On the Format menu, click Spacing. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Spacing [image] to display the spacing panel, if necessary.

4	Under Justification, click the horizontal or vertical alignment that you want. For example, click Right Align [image] to align the selection to the right edge of the bounding box.

5	Click Apply to apply the alignment.

Tips

Freeform text cannot be justified vertically or horizontally.

You can also align text using Horizontal Alignment [image] and Vertical Alignment [image] on the Text ribbon.

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for aligning text, see Text Alignment Shortcuts.


Aligning Freeform Text

Aligning Block Text

Text Alignment Options

Text Alignment Shortcuts


Aligning Block Text

You can choose an alignment option before or after you enter block text. Block text is aligned to the edges of the text container.

Text in a shape is aligned after it is pasted into the shape. The text is aligned within the edges of the shape.


To align block text

To align freeform text


Text Alignment Options

Aligning Freeform Text

Text Alignment Shortcuts


To align block text

1	Select the block text.

or

Highlight the paragraph to align.

2	On the Format menu, click Spacing. The Text tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Spacing [image] to display the spacing panel, if necessary.

4	Under Justification, click the horizontal or vertical alignment that you want. For example, click Right Align [image] to align the selection to the right edge of the container.

5	Click Apply to apply the alignment.

Tips

You can set the horizontal alignment separately for each paragraph in a text block.

Choose Force Justify [image] if you want to force the last line of a paragraph to justify.

You can also align text using Horizontal Alignment [image] and Vertical Alignment [image] on the Text ribbon.

For a list of the keyboard shortcuts for aligning text, see Text Alignment Shortcuts.


Aligning Block Text

Aligning Freeform Text

Text Alignment Options

Text Alignment Shortcuts


Text Alignment Shortcuts

The keyboard shortcuts for aligning freeform and block text are listed below.

Press	Action

CTRL+SHIFT+L	Align to left

CTRL+SHIFT+C	Align to center

CTRL+SHIFT+R	Align to right

CTRL+SHIFT+J	Justify horizontally

CTRL+SHIFT+F	Force justify horizontally

CTRL+SHIFT+O	Align to top

CTRL+SHIFT+M	Align to middle

CTRL+SHIFT+B	Align to bottom

Note

Freeform text cannot be justified vertically or horizontally.


Text Alignment Options

Aligning Freeform Text

Aligning Block Text


Fitting Text to a Path

Designer’s fit-to-path features let you align text to a path defined by any shape, including curves, circles, and angles. You can enter the text directly onto a path or fit existing freeform text to a path.

It is easy to get the text fit that you want because Designer previews on your page the effect of alignment settings as you choose or change them.

Because Designer remembers the path that you used to align the text, you can reshape the path object, or even delete it, without affecting the aligned text.

After fitting text to a path, you can edit the text just as you would any other text. For example, you can change the path alignment, color, font, or size of the text.


To fit freeform text to an object

To type text along a path

To change text alignment using the Path Fit palette


Typing Text along a Path

Using the Path Fit Palette

Using the Choose Position Ribbon


To fit freeform text to an object

1	Select both the freeform text and the object to which you want to align the text.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click the desired alignment button. The text is fit along the path defined by the selected object.

Tips

You can click Choose Position and specify a custom alignment.

Subscripts, superscripts, and small caps are not retained in text that is fit to a path.


Fitting Text to a Path

Typing Text along a Path

Using the Path Fit Palette


Typing Text along a Path

Path Text [image] on the Text ribbon lets you type text directly onto an object’s path. The text is fit to the path using the current path settings. After entering the text, you can easily change the path settings to get the text alignment that you want.


To type text along a path

To fit freeform text to an object

To change text alignment using the Path Fit palette


Fitting Text to a Path

Using the Path Fit Palette

Using the Choose Position Ribbon


To type text along a path

1	Select the object along which you want to place the text.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Text [image]. The text cursor appears on the path.

4	Type the text, which appears along the object as you type.

5	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tip

To edit path text in the Edit Text window, hold down SHIFT, and click the text with the text pointer.


Typing Text along a Path

Fitting Text to a Path

Using the Path Fit Palette


Using the Path Fit Palette

The Path Fit palette, displayed by clicking Path Fit [image] on the Text ribbon, makes it easy to produce the text effects that you want when aligning text to a path, or when editing the alignment of text already fit to a path. The Path Fit palette displays "quick choice" buttons that let you specify combinations of the following:

Text alignment: left, right, or center

Text position: above (outside) or below (inside) the path

Text direction: normal or upside down

If you are fitting freeform text to a path, you must select both the freeform text and the path object to enable the Path Fit button. If you are editing the alignment of text already fit to a path, you can enable the Path Fit button either by selecting the fitted text or by selecting the fitted text and the path object.

The quick choice buttons show a sample path and an arrow to indicate the text arrangement. The location of the arrow in relation to the sample path indicates the text alignment and position. The direction of the arrow indicates the text orientation (which side is up).


To change text alignment using the Path Fit palette


Fitting Text to a Path

Typing Text along a Path

Using the Choose Position Ribbon


To change text alignment using the Path Fit palette

1	Select the text that is aligned to the path.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click the desired alignment button. The text is realigned as specified.

5	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tip

You can click Choose Position and specify a custom alignment.


Using the Path Fit Palette

Fitting Text to a Path

Typing Text along a Path


Using the Choose Position Ribbon

If the Path Fit palette does not provide the text alignment that you want, you can custom align the text with the Choose Position ribbon. The buttons on the Choose Position ribbon let you separately set the alignment, position, offset, direction, and pitch of the text. This option also lets you manually adjust the alignment point by dragging it along the path.

Click Choose Position on the Path Fit palette to display the Choose Position ribbon. After creating the path fit that you want, double-click the left mouse button or press ESC to clear the Choose Position ribbon.


To set the alignment of text on a path

To set the position of text on a path

To change the offset of text on a path

To change the direction of text on a path

To change the orientation of text on a path

To reposition the alignment point of text on a path

To remove text from a path


Fitting Text to a Path

Typing Text along a Path

Using the Path Fit Palette


To set the alignment of text on a path

1	Select the text that is aligned to the path.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click Choose Position. The Choose Position ribbon appears.

5	Click an alignment button for the alignment you want.

6	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tips

Left Align [image] positions text so the left edge of the text aligns to the alignment point.

Center Align [image] centers text around the alignment point.

Right Align [image] positions text so the right edge of the text aligns to the alignment point.

Press TAB to cycle through the left, center, and right alignment settings.


Using the Choose Position Ribbon

Fitting Text to a Path

Typing Text along a Path

Using the Path Fit Palette


To set the position of text on a path

1	Select the text that is aligned to the path.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click Choose Position. The Choose Position ribbon appears.

5	Click Above Path [image] or Below Path [image] to specify the position for the text.

6	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tips

Above Path [image] positions the text above an open path object or outside of a closed path object.

Below Path [image] positions the text below an open path object or inside of a closed path object.


To change the offset of text on a path

1	Select the text that is aligned to the path.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click Choose Position. The Choose Position ribbon appears.

5	Type the offset value in the Offset Percentage spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

6	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tips

An offset of zero aligns the text on the path.

The alignment offset is relative to whether the text is positioned above or below the path. A positive offset shifts the text away from the path. A negative offset shifts the text past the path.


To change the direction of text on a path

1	Select the text that is aligned to the path.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click Choose Position. The Choose Position ribbon appears.

5	Click Reverse [image] or Forward [image] to set the direction you want.

6	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tips

Reverse [image] aligns text in a counter clockwise direction for most simple paths. This generally displays the text upside down in relation to the top of the path.

Forward [image] aligns text in a clockwise direction for most simple paths. This generally displays the text upright in relation to the top of the path.


To change the orientation of text on a path

1	Select the text that is aligned to the path.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click Choose Position. The Choose Position ribbon appears.

5	Click Text Orientation [image]. The Text Orientation menu appears.

6	Click the text orientation option you want.

7	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tips

The Rotate option aligns the text by rotating the characters along the path.

The Skew Vertically option aligns the text by skewing the characters vertically.

The Skew Horizontally option aligns the text by skewing the characters horizontally.

The Follow option aligns the text without skewing or rotating the characters. This produces the fastest redraw. Use Follow as a draft mode while you are modifying the alignment point. After the alignment point is set correctly, choose the text orientation you want.


To reposition the alignment point of text on a path

1	Select the text that is aligned to the path.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click Choose Position. The Choose Position ribbon appears.

5	Drag the alignment point to a new location, or click any point along the path.

6	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.


To remove text from a path

1	Select the text you want to remove from a path.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Path Fit [image]. The Path Fit palette appears.

4	Click Remove Curve. The text is removed from the path and converted to freeform text.

6	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.


Splitting and Joining Text

You can break multi-line text objects into individual objects or join multiple text objects into a single, multi-line object.

Splitting and joining text is useful when you want to quickly enter or import several lines of text and position them later. For example, if your drawing has a dozen labels, it is easier to enter the labels as a single text object and then split it into individual labels.

Splitting Text

Text blocks and freeform text that contain multiple lines can be broken into multiple text objects, each containing a single line.

Joining Text

Text blocks and freeform text can be joined into a single text object. When you join text blocks, all text conforms to the shape of the first selected text block (or the first created text block, if they are selected at the same time).


To split a multi-line text object

To join text objects


Rotating and Skewing Text


To split a multi-line text object

1	Select the text object you want to split.

2	On the Change menu, point to Text, and then click Split Text. Each line of text becomes a separate text object.

Tip

Freeform text is split into freeform text objects, and block text is split into block text objects.


Splitting and Joining Text


To join text objects

1	Select the text objects to join.

2	On the Change menu, point to Text, and then click Join Text. The text is combined into one object.


Rotating and Skewing Text

You can rotate and skew a text object as you would any other object. Rotating or skewing a text object does not change the text size or style.

Rotating Text

You manually rotate a text object by displaying the object’s rotation/skew handles and dragging a corner handle. For information on rotating objects numerically, see Rotating Numerically.

Skewing Text

You manually skew a text object by displaying the object’s rotation/skew handles and dragging a side handle. For information on skewing objects numerically, see Skewing Numerically.


To rotate a text object manually

To skew a text object manually


Rotating Manually

Rotating Numerically

Skewing Manually

Skewing Numerically


To rotate a text object manually

1	Click Rotate/Skew [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the text object you want to rotate.

3	Drag the pivot point to a new location, even outside the object, if you want.

4	Point to a corner handle of the text object.

5	Drag in a circular motion around the text object.

6	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tips

You can rotate both freeform and block text.

You can cancel a rotation by pressing ESC before releasing the left mouse button. The text object returns to its original position.

Hold down SHIFT while dragging a corner handle to constrain the rotation of a text object to 45-degree increments. Hold down CTRL while dragging a corner handle to rotate a copy of a text object.


Rotating and Skewing Text

Rotating Manually

Rotating Numerically


To skew a text object manually

1	Click Rotate/Skew [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Select the text object you want to skew.

3	Point to a side handle of the text object.

4	Drag the handle to skew the text object.

5	Release the mouse button when you finish.

Tip

You can rotate both freeform and block text.

You can cancel a skew by pressing ESC before releasing the left mouse button. The text object returns to its original position.

Hold down SHIFT while dragging a side handle to constrain the skewing of a text object to 45-degree increments. Hold down CTRL while dragging a side handle to skew a copy of a text object.


Rotating and Skewing Text

Skewing Manually

Skewing Numerically


Reshaping a Text Container

You can reshape a text container to change the flow of its text. The options available for reshaping a text container include adding and deleting anchor points, creating corners and symmetrical curves, and creating cusps.

Reshaping a text container does not change the size or style of the text in the container.


To reshape a text container


Curve Reshaping

Resizing a Text Container


To reshape a text container

1	Select the block text you want to reshape.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Curve Text option on the menu. Hollow anchor points appear on the text container.

4	Select an anchor on the edge that you want to reshape. Checkerboard-shaped control points appear near the anchor.

5	Drag the anchor point to move the edges connected to it.

or

Drag the control points to change the edge’s shape.

6	Release the mouse button when you finish. The text reflows to maintain its margins.

7	Click outside of the text container and repeat steps 4 through 6 to reshape another edge.

Tip

For more information on control points, see Curve Reshaping.


Reshaping a Text Container

Curve Reshaping


Flowing Text

Block text is always surrounded by an invisible box called a container. You can connect text containers so that block text flows from one container to another. You can flow text among any number of text containers (including text in objects). You can either connect existing text containers or create a new text container that flows from an existing one. Text flows from the first drawn container to the last drawn container. You cannot flow text to a different page.

Text overflows a container when there is more text than can fit into the container. When you edit text, an overflow handle (a small "+") appears at the bottom right corner of the container to show that it contains overflowing text.


To flow text into a new text container

To flow text from one container to another container


Flowing Text Between Existing Containers

Wrapping Text Around an Object (Repelling Text)


To flow text into a new text container

1	Select the block text object containing text you want to flow.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Edit Text option on the menu. The text container appears and the text cursor is positioned at the beginning of the text.

4	Click the overflow handle on the text container. The overflow handle is the small plus at the bottom right corner of the container.

A new text container of the same size as the original is created. The overflow text flows into the new container.

Tip

To position the new container as you create it, point to the overflow handle with the mouse and drag.


Flowing Text

Flowing Text Between Existing Containers


Flowing Text Between Existing Containers

If you have already created two or more text blocks, you can connect them so that text flows from one to the other. If you add or delete text in one container, the other text blocks also adjust.


To flow text from one container to another container

To flow text into a new text container


Flowing Text

Wrapping Text Around an Object (Repelling Text)


To flow text from one container to another container

1	Select the text containers to connect.

2	On the Change menu, point to Text, and then click Flow Text. The text containers are connected.

Tip

You can flow text through any number of text containers at the same time. Text flows from the back container (the one drawn first) to the front container.


Flowing Text Between Existing Containers

Flowing Text


Wrapping Text Around an Object
Wrapping Text Around an Object (Repelling Text)

You can force block text to automatically wrap around an object by setting the object to repel text.

Note

You cannot repel freeform text or text inside an object. Also, you cannot repel text from bitmap images.


To repel text


Flowing Text

Flowing Text Between Existing Containers

Placing Text Inside an Object


To repel text

1	Select the object for the text to wrap around.

2	On the Change menu, point to Text, and then click Repel Text. The object is set to repel text.

Tips

After setting an object to repel text, just move it over block text to see the repel effect (or move the object over the block text).

Objects repel text regardless of the layer. For example, an object on layer one repels text on layer two. Even objects on layers that are not visible repel text.

You cannot repel freeform text or text inside an object. Also, you cannot repel text from bitmap images.

To turn off repel text for an object, select the object and repeat step 2.


Wrapping Text Around an Object (Repelling Text)


Placing Text Inside an Object

Text inside of an object is a form of block text. A container is created that matches the edges of the object. You can specify margins based on the distance of the text from the container.

You can flow text inside of an object from one container to another. For example, you can flow a block of text inside an object to a block of text outside the object. For more information on flowing text, see Flowing Text.


To place text inside an object


Pasting Text Inside an Object

Wrapping Text Around an Object (Repelling Text)

Flowing Text


To place text inside an object

1	Select a closed object.

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Shape Text [image]. The text cursor appears inside the selected object.

4	Type, paste, or import the text.

6	Press ESC or double-click the left mouse button away from the object when you finish entering the text.

Tip

After you place text inside of an object, you can move or delete the object without affecting the text. To select the object, point inside the object, press ALT, and click the left mouse button until the status bar shows that the object (shape) is selected. The status bar shows Text Object when the text is selected.


Placing Text Inside an Object

Pasting Text Inside an Object


Warping Text

You can warp freeform text to manipulate the text graphically.

Notes

For more information on warping objects, see Warping Effects.

The redrawing of warped text can be slow. To speed up the redrawing of warped text while you work on other parts of a drawing, set the drawing mode to wireframe by pointing to Preview on the View menu and clicking Wireframe. As an alternative, you can cut the warped text and paste it back into your drawing as a Windows metafile (using Paste Special on the Edit menu). The metafile object will redraw faster that the warped text. If you want to use a metafile to speed up redrawing but still retain the warped text, copy the warped text, hide it using Hide on the Object menu, and then paste it into your drawing as a metafile. When you are finished with your drawing, delete the metafile and unhide the warped text.


To warp freeform text


Warping Effects

Predefined Warps

View Options


To warp freeform text

1	Select the freeform text object you want to warp.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Warp option on the menu. A blue warp envelope appears over the object.

4	Point to a handle and drag it to change the envelope.

or

Click a predefined warp button on the Ribbon toolbar.

5	When you finish warping the text object, cancel the warping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Warp, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

The easiest way to edit text you have warped is to use the Edit Text window. For information on using the Edit Text window, see Editing Text in a Window.


Warping Text

Predefined Warps

Editing Text in a Window


Converting Text to Curves

You can convert text into vector-based objects by converting the text to curves. This lets you reshape the text just as you would any other object. You can convert both freeform and block text to curves.

Text in any scalable font can be converted to curves. If you try to convert a non-scalable font to curves, Designer substitutes the default font before converting the text. You can change the default font by modifying an entry in your system registry. For more information on font substitution, see Font Mapping.

After you convert text to curves, the objects are no longer text objects. You cannot insert or delete text, check the spelling, change any of the paragraph options, or make any other text edits. Text converted to curves can be changed back to text only with the Undo command.


To convert text to curves


Reshaping Text

Types of Fonts

Font Mapping

Converting Objects to Curves


To convert text to curves

1	Select the text object to convert.

2	On the Change menu, click Convert to Curves. The text converts to a vector-based object.

3	On the Change menu, point to Combine, and then click Disconnect.

You can now click individual characters to select them.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for Convert to Curves is CTRL+R.

The keyboard shortcut for Disconnect is SHIFT+F11.

Text converted to curves can be changed back to text only with the Undo command.


Converting Text to Curves


Checking Spelling

You can check the spelling in all drawings and documents created in Designer.

Designer can check the spelling of all text in the document, or just the text that you highlight. For example, if you want to check one word, highlight the word, and click Spelling on the Tools menu.

Designer checks spelling by comparing words in your document with words in a dictionary. The default dictionary is a file containing thousands of words. If Designer finds a word in your drawing that is not in the dictionary, the word is displayed as a possible misspelling.

There are many types of words that are not in the dictionary. Proper names, words with numbers, foreign words, and some abbreviations are commonly displayed as possible misspellings. You can add a word that Designer considers misspelled to the dictionary so that it will not be considered a misspelling in the future.

Note

Designer checks the spelling of text objects only. Text that has been converted to curves is not checked.


To check the spelling of a document

To check the spelling of selected text


Using Dictionaries

Spelling Options


To check the spelling of a document

1	Deselect all objects, including text.

2	On the Tools menu, click Spelling. If a misspelled word is found, Designer opens the Spelling dialog box.

3	Type the correct spelling for the word in the Change To box and click Change.

or

Click Ignore or Ignore All to ignore the word or every instance of the word.

or

Select one of the words in the Suggestions box and click Change or Change All.

or

Click Add to add the word to the dictionary and continue.

or

Click Close to stop spell checking and close the Spelling dialog box.

Tip

You can also check the spelling by clicking Spelling [image] on the Standard toolbar.


Checking Spelling

Using Dictionaries

Spelling Options


To check the spelling of selected text

1	Select or highlight the text you want to check.

2	On the Tools menu, click Spelling. If a misspelled word is found, Designer opens the Spelling dialog box.

3	Type the correct spelling for the word in the Change To box and click Change.

or

Click Ignore or Ignore All to ignore the word or every instance of the word.

or

Select one of the words in the Suggestions box and click Change or Change All.

or

Click Add to add the word to the dictionary and continue.

or

Click Close to stop spell checking and close the Spelling dialog box.

Tips

To check the entire document, deselect all objects, including text.

You can also check the spelling by clicking Spelling [image] on the Standard toolbar.


Checking Spelling

Using Dictionaries

Spelling Options


Using Dictionaries

The default dictionary is called the main dictionary. You can enlarge the main dictionary by adding words to it.

You can create additional dictionaries, or custom dictionaries, to use with the main dictionary. For example, if you are working on a drawing containing chemical names and abbreviations, you can create a custom dictionary called CHEMICAL.DIC to use in addition to the main dictionary.


To use a custom dictionary

To create a custom dictionary


Checking Spelling

Spelling Options


To use a custom dictionary

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box opens.

2	Click the Spelling tab.

3	In the Custom Dictionaries list, select the dictionary you want to use.

Tip

Unless you have From Main Dictionary Only selected, Designer consults all dictionaries in the Custom Dictionaries list when it performs spell checking.


Using Dictionaries

Checking Spelling

Spelling Options


To create a custom dictionary

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box opens.

2	Click the Spelling tab.

3	Click New. The Save As dialog box opens.

4	Type a name for the dictionary.

5	Click Save. The new dictionary appears in the Custom Dictionaries list.

Note

Designer automatically adds the "dic" extension to your dictionary name, if you omit it.

Tip

If you have an existing custom dictionary that you want to use with Designer, you can add it using the Add button. Designer adds the dictionary to the list of Custom Dictionaries.


Using Dictionaries

Checking Spelling

Spelling Options


These topics are for Media View.


Text Cursor Defined
Text Cursor

A blinking vertical bar that indicates where to begin entering or editing text.


Text Pointer and Text Cursor


Text Pointer Defined
Text Pointer

A pointer that is shaped like an I-beam. The text pointer is used for text actions such as positioning the text cursor and highlighting text.


Text Pointer and Text Cursor


Container Defined
Container

An invisible boundary that surrounds container (block) text and text in an object.


Entering Block Text


WARPING.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Warping Effects

Warping lets you distort an object by changing the surface on which it was drawn. For example, if you write your name on a deflated balloon and then inflate the balloon, your name becomes warped.

You can use warping to create effects that are difficult to draw, such as a water droplet or a hilly surface. You can also use warping to create unusual text effects, such as text being pulled down a drain. A warped effect can be edited like any two-dimensional object. You can warp grouped or connected objects.

When you warp an object, Designer places a warp envelope over it. The envelope appears as a blue warping grid. As you change the envelope, the object changes underneath.

You can reshape the warp envelope with lines, curves, or Bezier control points. The default warp reshape method is the last one that was used.

You can add an unwarped, rectangular envelope to an object. The previous, warped envelope is replaced with a new envelope. The object underneath is unchanged.

You can use Remove Warp [image] to remove the last warp envelope you added. Removing a warp envelope restores the object underneath to its previous shape. If you have applied a series of warp envelopes to an object, you can remove them one at a time in reverse order with the Remove Warp button.

You can increase the number of horizontal and vertical lines in a warp envelope to give you more control over the warp.

Note

You cannot warp a bitmap, but you can produce warp-like effects for a bitmap by reshaping the bitmap. For information on reshaping a bitmap see Reshaping a Bitmap Image.


To warp an object

To apply a predefined warp

To reshape the warp envelope

To add a new warp envelope

To remove a warp envelope

To increase the density of a warp envelope


Predefined Warps

Warping Text


Predefined Warps

The 12 predefined warp buttons on the Ribbon toolbar let you quickly apply one of these warps to an object. The predefined warps range from oval to various types of directional and bowing warps. To apply a predefined warp, click the button showing the warp you want.

Applying a predefined warp replaces the current warp, if any. To keep the current warp, add a new warp envelope before you apply the predefined warp. After applying a predefined warp, you can continue to distort the warped object's shape by dragging any of the warp handles.

The illustration below shows the effect of applying the predefined warps to a rectangle.


To apply a predefined warp

To warp an object

To reshape the warp envelope

To add a new warp envelope

To remove a warp envelope

To increase the density of a warp envelope


Warping Effects


To warp an object

1	Select the object to warp.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Warp option on the menu. A blue warp envelope appears over the object.

4	Point to a handle and drag it to change the envelope.

5	Repeat step 4 to create the desired warp.

6	When you finish warping the object, cancel the warping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Warp, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

To apply one of the 12 predefined warps to the object, simply click the appropriate predefined warp button. Applying a predefined warp replaces the current warp, unless you add a new warp envelope before you apply the predefined warp.


Warping Effects

Predefined Warps


To apply a predefined warp

1	Select the object to warp.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Warp option on the menu. A blue warp envelope appears over the object.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click the button showing the predefined warp you want to apply. The predefined warps are the first 12 buttons on the Ribbon. For example, to apply an oval warp, click [image] or [image].

5	When you finish warping the object, cancel the warping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Warp, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

Applying a predefined warp replaces the current warp. To keep the current warp, add a new warp envelope before you apply the predefined warp.


Predefined Warps

Warping Effects


To reshape the warp envelope

1	Select the object to warp.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Warp option on the menu. A blue warp envelope appears over the object.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Warp Type [image], and choose how you want to reshape the warp envelope.

Click the Edit as Line option to reshape the envelope as straight lines.

or

Click the Edit as Curve option to reshape the envelope as curved lines.

or

Click the Edit as Bezier option to reshape the envelope with Bezier control points. You can use Unlocked Cusp [image], Locked Cusp [image], and Symmetrical Curve [image] to modify the way control points adjacent to an anchor point move in relation to each other. Note, however, that the Locked Cusp and Symmetrical Curve options are useful only if you add more anchor points by increasing the density of the envelope.

5	Point to a handle (or control point) and drag it to change the envelope.

6	Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create the desired warp.

7	When you finish warping the object, cancel the warping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Warp, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tips

Click Add Horizontal Lines [image] or Add Vertical Lines [image] to increase the density of the warp envelope.

For more information on point reshaping, see Point Reshaping. For more information on curve reshaping, see Curve Reshaping.


To add a new warp envelope

1	Select the object to warp.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Warp option on the menu. A blue warp envelope appears over the object.

4	Point to a handle and drag it to change the envelope.

5	Repeat step 4 to create the desired warp.

6	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Add Warp [image]. The previous, warped envelope is replaced with a new envelope. The object underneath is unchanged.

7	Repeat steps 4 through 5 to create the desired warp.

8	When you finish warping the object, cancel the warping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Warp, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

Applying a predefined warp replaces the current warp. To keep the current warp, add a new warp envelope before you apply the predefined warp.


To remove a warp envelope

1	Select the object to unwarp.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Warp option on the menu. A blue warp envelope appears over the object.

4	Click Remove Warp [image]. The warp effect of the envelope is removed.

5	When you finish, cancel the warping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Warp, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.

Tip

Removing all warp envelopes returns an object to its original, unwarped shape.


To increase the density of a warp envelope

1	Select the object to warp.

2	Click Edit [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Warp option on the menu. A blue warp envelope appears over the object.

4	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Add Horizontal Lines [image] to double the number of horizontal envelope grid lines.

or

Click Add Vertical Lines [image] to double the number of vertical grid lines.

5	When you finish warping the object, cancel the warping mode by pressing ESC, clicking Edit [image] and choosing End Warp, or double-clicking the left mouse button away from the object.


WHATSNEW.DOC

Note: Though included in this section's table of contents, the Updated Import and Export Filters topic is in the separate GS2.HLP help file, so it is available to other help files.

Status: Done

Index: Done


Interface Changes from Earlier Versions

The drawing tools have been moved to the Toolbox, making them readily available with a single mouse click.

All object and text formatting options are now in a single dialog box, the Object Format dialog box. Combining all formatting options in one dialog box makes finding an option easier and provides quicker access to multiple options.

For extra convenience, the Object Format dialog box can be rolled up. Rolling up the Object Format dialog box lets you keep it accessible, but out of your way.

The Format ribbon (previously Style ribbon) is more comprehensive, and includes interior and line fill recall buttons which let you quickly access the last 15 fills.

Named styles let you assign names to combinations of object and text attributes. After naming a style, you can assign those attributes to another object by just applying the named style to it. Named styles are saved with the document in which they were defined, but can be imported for access by other documents.

Wizards to help you start a new project, define a scale unit, or reduce the size of your document are provided. A wizard makes these tasks easy. You simply respond to the questions asked by the wizard, which performs or sets up the task for you automatically, based on your answers.

A new Properties toolbar makes it easier to view and change object properties and QuickSilver events.

Keyboard shortcuts can be shown in the ToolTips for faster learning and improved productivity.


Terminology Changes from Earlier Versions

Menu Changes from Earlier Versions

Keyboard Changes from Earlier Versions

Updated Import and Export Filters

New Color Separation Options for Postscript Printing


Terminology Changes from Earlier Versions

If You Were Previously Using Designer 6.0

The Bitmap tool is now Image tool. The Bitmap ribbon is now Image ribbon.

"Properties" now refers to the non-visual data values of objects.

"Format" now refers to the visual attributes of objects.

If You Were Previously Using Designer 4.0 or 4.1

Designer's Button Hints are now referred to as ToolTips.

"Preferences" are now referred to as "Options." (The Options dialog box is accessible from the Tools menu.)

The term "Symbol" is now "Object."

The Ribbon is now an Office-style toolbar. For brevity, Designer Help sometimes calls the Ribbon toolbar "the Ribbon."

The Toolbox is now an Office-style toolbar. Designer Help still calls it "the Toolbox."

The status bar is now an Office-style toolbar. Designer Help still calls it "the status bar."

The Hint line is now an Office-style toolbar (the Hint toolbar).


Interface Changes from Earlier Versions

Menu Changes from Earlier Versions

Keyboard Changes from Earlier Versions

Updated Import and Export Filters

New Color Separation Options for Postscript Printing


Menu Changes from Earlier Versions

If You Were Previously Using Designer 6.0

The Import and Export commands have been moved from the Tools menu to the File menu.

Printer Setup is now easily found on the File menu.

A Palette Manager command has been added to the Format menu.

If You Were Previously Using Designer 4.0 or 4.1

The Edit menu has new options for inserting, editing, and managing OLE objects.

The Display menu has been renamed as the View menu. The View menu contains some zoom options, and it lets you show or hide specific toolbars.

A new Format menu lets you change object attributes such as line weight and fill type.

The Symbol menu has been renamed as the Object menu.

A new Tools menu lets you check spelling, change option settings, customize toolbars, and manage clip art.

The Snap to Ruler and Snap to Guides commands have been moved from the View menu to the Tools menu.


Interface Changes from Earlier Versions

Terminology Changes from Earlier Versions

Keyboard Changes from Earlier Versions

Updated Import and Export Filters

New Color Separation Options for Postscript Printing


Keyboard Changes from Earlier Versions

If You Were Previously Using Designer 6.0

Holding down ALT when you drag a selection box (for block selecting) selects all objects that are enclosed or partially enclosed in the selection box. But don't confuse ALT+DRAG with ALT+CLICK [image] ALT+CLICK still selects objects deeper in the stack.

The keys for text editing and highlighting have been changed to comply with Microsoft Office standards. For a complete listing, see Text Editing Shortcuts and Text Highlighting Shortcuts.

Pressing ALT+PAGE UP scrolls the page up one line and pressing ALT+PAGE DOWN scrolls the page down one line.

If You Were Previously Using Designer 4.0 or 4.1

Selecting additional objects with the mouse has been changed from CTRL+CLICK to SHIFT+CLICK. This change was made to comply with Microsoft Office standards.

Duplication has been changed from SHIFT+DRAG to CTRL+DRAG, except when duplicating anchors.

Constraint has been changed from CTRL+DRAG to SHIFT+DRAG, except when constraining anchors.

Add Snap Points has been changed from CTRL+N to CTRL+F7.

Remove Snap Points has been changed from SHIFT+CTRL+N to CTRL+ SHIFT+F7.

The Redo command is now CTRL+Y.

Pressing CTRL+N opens a new document.


Interface Changes from Earlier Versions

Terminology Changes from Earlier Versions

Menu Changes from Earlier Versions

Updated Import and Export Filters

New Color Separation Options for Postscript Printing


New Color-Separation Options for PostScript Printing

Designer 7 provides an Output to Separator option (in the Print Document dialog box) that produces an EPS file that third-party utilities can process to create color separations. The target printer page size is used as boundaries for this EPS file. No preview is attached to the file. For more information, see Output for Separator.


Output for Separator

Interface Changes from Earlier Versions

Terminology Changes from Earlier Versions

Menu Changes from Earlier Versions

Keyboard Changes from Earlier Versions

Updated Import and Export Filters


SLIDSHOW.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Using Designer for Presentations

You can make any presentation an on-screen presentation or slideshow. Designer uses the full screen to display a slideshow.

You can assign different effects, called transitions, that control how one slide replaces another in the slideshow. You can run a slideshow within Designer, or you can create a standalone slideshow to run on any computer that has Windows installed.

The Page Manager ribbon provides the tools you need to modify and produce a slideshow.

When viewing a single page, you can click Page Manager [image] in the Toolbox to display reduced "thumbnail" images of all the pages in your document. From the reduced view, you can double-click on any page to display that page in the page view.

To create a presentation, you put all the pages, or slides, in one document and sort them into the correct order. Then you add transition effects and run the presentation.

To fill the screen with your slide, use the screen size as your page size (usually a landscape orientation). To make all the slides in your document a consistent size and orientation, use the Master Page.


To set up your document for an on-screen slideshow

To select a page in Page Manager

To select multiple pages in Page Manager

To select multiple pages that are not next to each other

To sort the pages in Page Manager


Setting Slideshow Options

Assigning Transition Effects to Slides

Using the Transition Effects Dialog Box

Setting the Duration of Slides

Running a Slideshow

Chalkboard Scribble Feature

Controlling a Slideshow

Using the Slideshow Control Panel

Creating a Standalone Slideshow

Copying a Standalone Slideshow to Diskettes


To set up your document for an on-screen slideshow

1	Create a new document.

2	Click the Master Page tab on the Page Tab Bar at the bottom of the document. The master page displays.

3	On the File menu, click Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box opens.

4	Click the Paper Size tab, and choose Screen Size in the list box at the top of the dialog box.

5	Click the Margins tab.

6	Adjust the margins using the Top, Bottom, Left and Right spin boxes, if desired.

7	If you want a background color or fill, click Page Fill [image], and choose a fill in the Object Format dialog box.

8	Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog box.

9	Place any items on the Master Page that you want repeated on every slide, such as a title, border, or logo.

10	When you finish defining the Master Page, click the Page 1 tab on the Page Tab Bar at the bottom of the document. You are now ready to build the slideshow. Place each drawing or image that you want to appear as a slide on a different page of the document.

Tip

After you have your slides defined, you can add transition effects and control the speed and direction of the transition for each slide. You also can choose whether the presentation advances manually or automatically.


Using Designer for Presentations


To select a page in Page Manager

Click the page you want to select.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Page Manager is CTRL+G.


Using Designer for Presentations


To select multiple pages in Page Manager

1	Click the first page you want to select.

2	Press and hold SHIFT and click the last page you want to select. Designer selects every page between the two pages you selected.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Page Manager is CTRL+G.


To select multiple pages that are not next to each other

1	Click the first page you want to select.

2	Press and hold CTRL and click the other pages you want to select. Only the pages you click are selected.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Page Manager is CTRL+G.

To deselect a page in Page Manager, press CTRL and click the page you want to deselect.


To sort the pages in Page Manager
To sort the pages in the Page Manager

Select and drag to move a page to the beginning, end, or middle of the sequence. A vertical cursor bar displays as you drag the page to a different point in the sequence, indicating the position to which it will be moved. As you sort slides, they are automatically renumbered.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Page Manager is CTRL+G.

If your document has more slides than fit on the Page Manager screen, use the scroll bar to display the other slides.

To insert a slide between two existing slides, you can add a new slide and then drag to move the new blank slide into the correct sequence.


Setting Slideshow Options

The Slideshow Options dialog box lets you set presentation options that affect all slides in a presentation. These options also apply to standalone slideshows.

Show Pointer

Shows or hides the pointer. You can choose from a large number of pointer images.

Next Slide Ready

Each time Designer displays a slide, it is preparing the next slide to display. If you have complex drawings on a slide, it may not be ready to display when you go to that slide.

Designer can alert you when the next slide is ready by displaying a small arrow in the lower right corner, by making an audible sound, or by giving both signals.

Automatic Advancement

While you are working on your slideshow, you can choose to always advance slides manually. Selecting Automatic Advancement overrides any automatic advance options you set in the Transition Effects dialog box.

Run Continuously

Select Run Continuously to set the slideshow so that it repeats until interrupted manually.

Change Transitions

If you are creating a standalone slideshow to take to another computer, you may want to adjust the transition speed for all the slides at once.

If you plan to create the slideshow on one computer and present it on another computer with performance that is much faster or slower, the transition speed may be too fast or too slow.


To select a slideshow pointer


Using Designer for Presentations

Assigning Transition Effects to Slides

Using the Transition Effects Dialog Box

Setting the Duration of Slides

Running a Slideshow

Chalkboard Scribble Feature

Controlling a Slideshow

Using the Slideshow Control Panel


To select a slideshow pointer

1	On the Page Manager ribbon, click Options [image]. The Slideshow Options dialog box opens.

2	Select Show Pointer.

3	Choose the pointer shape you want by clicking the arrows.

Tip

As you move the mouse during the slideshow, the pointer moves on the screen. You can use the mouse to point out key ideas to your audience.


Setting Slideshow Options


Assigning Transition Effects to Slides

Transition effects add energy and excitement to the way slides replace one another during a slideshow.

You can set transition effects using the Page Manager ribbon or by using the Transitions Effects dialog box. If you are unfamiliar with creating slideshows with Designer, use the Transition Effects dialog box to set transitions. The Transition Effects dialog box provides a preview window that shows how the transition looks.

Transition Effect

The Transition List box on the Page Manager ribbon shows the transition effect assigned to a selected slide. You can select one or more slides and then choose a different transition effect by clicking the arrow beside the list box and highlighting the new transition effect.

Transition Direction

The Directions button on the Page Manager ribbon shows the direction in which a selected transition moves. The direction is not relevant for some transition effects; in such cases, the button is not available.

Transition Speed

The Speed box on the Page Manager ribbon shows the speed of a transition effect. You can change the transition speed for selected slides by choosing the speed you want from this list box.


To set transition effects using the Page Manager ribbon

To open the Transition Effects dialog box

To assign a transition effect to selected slides

To assign a transition effect to all slides


Using the Transition Effects Dialog Box

Setting the Duration of Slides


To set transition effects using the Page Manager ribbon

1	Select the slide or slides to which you want an effect to apply

2	On the Page Manager ribbon, click the arrow beside the Transition List box, and choose the transition effect you want.

3	Click the Directions button and choose the direction you want. (The button is unavailable when the selected transition has no direction.)

4	Click the arrow beside the Speed box and choose the transition speed you want.

Tip

To find out what effect is already assigned to a slide, select the slide, and examine the settings on the ribbon.


Assigning Transition Effects to Slides

Using the Transition Effects Dialog Box


Using the Transition Effects Dialog Box

You also can apply transition effects with the Transition Effects dialog box. The dialog box lets you assign an effect to all slides, to selected slides, or to a specified group of slides. The preview window of the dialog box shows how the transition effect looks.


To open the Transition Effects dialog box

To assign a transition effect to selected slides

To assign a transition effect to all slides

To set transition effects using the Page Manager ribbon


Assigning Transition Effects to Slides

Setting the Duration of Slides


To open the Transition Effects dialog box

On the Page Manager ribbon, click Transition [image].

Tip

The list box at the bottom of the dialog box shows the sequence number, title of the slide (page name), and the assigned effect, including speed and duration.


Using the Transition Effects Dialog Box

Assigning Transition Effects to Slides


To assign a transition effect to selected slides

1	On the Page Manger ribbon, click Transition [image]. The Transition Effects dialog box opens.

2	In the slides list box, click the first slide you want to select.

3	Press and hold CTRL and click the other slides you want to select. Only the slides you click are selected.

4	Choose the transition settings that you want.

5	Click Apply to assign your transition choice to the selected slides.

Tips

The slides list box shows the sequence number, title of the slide (page name), and the assigned effect, including speed and duration.

The effect, direction, and speed you choose are demonstrated in the preview.


To assign a transition effect to all slides

1	Click Transition [image] on the ribbon. The Transition Effects dialog box opens.

2	Choose the transition settings that you want.

3	Select Apply to All.

4	Click Apply to assign your transition choice to the slides.

Tips

The slides list box shows the sequence number, title of the slide (page name), and the assigned effect, including speed and direction.

The effect, direction, and speed you choose are demonstrated in the preview.


Setting the Duration of Slides

Slide advancement can be manual or timed. If you are using timed advancement, you can set the time in seconds that a slide is displayed. Different slides can have different display (duration) times.


To set slide duration using the Page Manager ribbon


Assigning Transition Effects to Slides

Using the Transition Effects Dialog Box


To set slide duration using the Page Manager ribbon

1	Select the slide or slides to which you want a speed to apply

2	On the Page Manager ribbon, click Timed [image].

3	Type the duration in seconds in the Duration spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

Tips

To find out what duration is already assigned to a slide, select the slide, and examine the Duration box.

Click Manual [image] if you want to advance the slides manually.

You can also set the duration of a slide using the Transition Effects dialog box.


Setting the Duration of Slides


Running a Slideshow

You can view the sequence of slides and transition effects. After running the slideshow to view it, you can make changes to the order and to the transition effects and run it again to review the changes. To stop a running slideshow, press ESC.


To run a slideshow


Chalkboard Scribble Feature

Controlling a Slideshow

Using the Slideshow Control Panel


To run a slideshow

1	On the Page Manager ribbon, click Run Slideshow [image]. Designer runs a slideshow of the current document starting with the first slide (page).

2	To run the slides manually, press RIGHT ARROW, or click the right mouse button to advance forward; press LEFT ARROW, or click the left mouse button to move backward.

or

Let the slides run automatically based on their duration settings.

3	Press ESC to return to Page Manager.

Tips

Hold down SHIFT and click Run SlideShow [image] to start the slideshow from the currently selected slide.

To view only select slides, select the slides you want to view, and click Run SlideShow [image].


Running a Slideshow

Chalkboard Scribble Feature

Controlling a Slideshow

Using the Slideshow Control Panel


Chalkboard Scribble Feature

When a slideshow is running, you can use the mouse to paint freehand lines on the screen to highlight, underline, circle, or otherwise emphasize something in your presentation. Your scribbles appear in bright green.

The scribbles are temporary; they do not change your document. To erase the scribbles from the screen, press the DELETE key.


Running a Slideshow

Controlling a Slideshow

Using the Slideshow Control Panel


Controlling a Slideshow

You can use the following keys to control an on-screen slideshow.

To Do This	Press

Advance to the next slide	RIGHT ARROW or right mouse button

Return to the previous slide 	LEFT ARROW or left mouse button

Pause a slideshow	PAUSE (press again to resume)

Return to first slide	HOME

Advance to last slide	END

Stop a slideshow or close the Slideshow Control Panel	ESC

Open the Slideshow Control Panel	F1

Erase scribbles	DELETE

Tip

If you want to use these keys when the Slideshow Control Panel is open, click away from the Slideshow Control Panel to make it inactive.


Running a Slideshow

Chalkboard Scribble Feature

Using the Slideshow Control Panel


Using the Slideshow Control Panel

Whether you choose to run your slideshow with Run Slideshow [image] or as a standalone executable file, you can open the Slideshow Control Panel by pressing F1 while a slideshow is running. To close the Slideshow Control Panel, press ESC, or double-click the Control menu box.

You can use the following buttons in the Slideshow Control Panel to control a slideshow (if the title bar is highlighted to show that it is active).

Click	To Do This

 Home	Display the first slide

 Rewind	Display the previous slide with a single click, or rewind when you press and hold the left mouse button

 Fast Forward	Display the next slide with a single click, or fast forward when you press and hold the left mouse button

 End	Display the last slide

 Stop	Stop the slideshow

 Play (or ENTER)	Restart from the slide number and title displayed in the list box

 Pause	Pause a timed advanced slideshow (click again to resume)

The list box opens when you click the down arrow to show the titles and sequence numbers of the slides. You can display a different slide in the slideshow by choosing the title of the slide you want and pressing Play. The Slideshow Control Panel also shows the number of the current slide and the total number of slides in the slideshow.

Options

The Options button [image] on the Slideshow Control Panel works just like the Options button [image] on the Page Manager ribbon.


Running a Slideshow

Chalkboard Scribble Feature

Controlling a Slideshow


Creating a Standalone Slideshow

You can create a single executable file that contains your entire slideshow, complete with all options and transition effects. After this file is created, you can run your slideshow on any computer that has Windows installed, even if Designer is not installed on the computer.

When you create a standalone slideshow, all slides are converted to bitmap images. Bitmaps display faster and eliminate the potential problem of not having the required fonts on the target computer.

Standalone Setup

The Standalone Setup dialog box shows your computer’s number of colors and lets you set the screen resolution for the target computer (on which you will be playing the slideshow).

Designer creates standalone slideshows with the same number of colors as are currently displayed by your computer. If the target computer displays fewer colors, the slideshow colors are dithered.

The Standalone Setup dialog box lets you set the resolution for the target computer’s screen. Make sure the resolution you set is supported by the target computer.

If you create your standalone slideshow at a lower resolution than the target screen, the slideshow is automatically centered on the screen. If you do the opposite (for example, create the slideshow at 800x600 but play it at 640x480), the edges of your slides will be clipped.


To create a standalone slideshow

To copy a slideshow file to diskettes

To install a slideshow file from diskettes

To run a standalone slideshow


Copying a Standalone Slideshow to Diskettes


To create a standalone slideshow

1	On the Page Manager ribbon, click Options [image], if desired, to change the options for the standalone slideshow.

2	Click Setup [image]. The Standalone Setup dialog box opens.

3	Choose the number of colors and resolution of the target computer’s screen, and click OK.

4	Click Create Standalone [image]. The Create Standalone dialog box opens.

5	Type a filename for the standalone slideshow. The extension EXE is added to the filename.

6	Choose the drive and folder in which you want to store the file.

7	Click Save to create the standalone slideshow.


Creating a Standalone Slideshow

Copying a Standalone Slideshow to Diskettes


Copying a Standalone Slideshow to Diskettes

You can copy your standalone slideshow to diskettes so that you can easily carry a copy of the file with you and install it on another computer. If the file is too large to fit on just one diskette, Designer divides it among several diskettes.

Before copying a slideshow file to diskettes, you must create the slideshow file on your hard drive. Use the Windows Explorer to find out how large the executable file is so that you can have enough blank, formatted diskettes on hand.


To copy a slideshow file to diskettes

To install a slideshow file from diskettes

To run a standalone slideshow

To create a standalone slideshow


Creating a Standalone Slideshow


To copy a slideshow file to diskettes

1	On the Page Manager ribbon, click Copy to Diskette [image]. The Copy Standalone Slideshow to Diskette dialog box opens.

2	Highlight the EXE file that contains your standalone slideshow. Choose a different drive and directory if necessary.

3	Choose a target diskette drive to which you want to copy.

4	Click Copy to copy the slideshow to the diskette.

Tip

If more than one diskette is necessary, you are prompted to remove one diskette and insert another as needed. Designer copies a file called LOADSHOW.EXE to the first diskette, which installs the slideshow on the target computer for you.


Copying a Standalone Slideshow to Diskettes

Creating a Standalone Slideshow


To install a slideshow file from diskettes

1	Insert the first diskette with the file LOADSHOW.EXE.

2	On the Windows Start menu, click Run.

3	Type the name of the diskette drive followed by LOADSHOW.EXE. For example, A:\LOADSHOW.EXE or B:\LOADSHOW.EXE.

4	Click OK to run the installer program. Follow the instructions on the screen.


To run a standalone slideshow

1	On the Windows Start menu, click Run.

2	Type the path and the name of the slideshow file.

or

Click the Browse button. Locate the slideshow file and click OK.


TUTOR.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Getting Started

Each Designer tutorial contains several "mini" tutorials that you can work through at your own pace. Each tutorial takes less than five minutes to complete.

Before you start the tutorials, you should know how to open menus and choose commands with a mouse. Also, each tutorial lets you practice with an existing Designer file, so you should know how to open and close files in Designer. The tutorial files are installed in the TUTORIAL folder inside your Designer folder when you install Designer.

You can follow the tutorials from first to last, or you can skip to the ones that interest you the most. None of the tutorials assume that you have worked through any of the other tutorials. The procedures within each tutorial do, however, assume that you have worked the earlier procedures in that tutorial.

Tip

If your screen resolution is set to 640 x 480, you can set Designer’s zoom control so you can view the tutorial steps without covering part of the drawing. If the sample drawing is portrait, type 30 in the Zoom Control box on the Standard toolbar. If the sample drawing is landscape, type 35 in the Zoom Control box.


Using On-line Help
Using Online Help

Online help is the quickest way to find answers to your Designer questions. In this tutorial you learn how to get instant, context-sensitive help, and how to find a topic using the Index tab. You can get help for any button, tool, or command.


To get instant help for a tool

1	Click View [image] in the Toolbox. The View tool set opens.

2	Point to one of the View tools.

3	Press F1. The help message for the highlighted tool appears.

4	Click anywhere to close the help window.


To get instant help for a command

1	Open the File menu.

2	Point to the Save command.

3	Press F1. A help message for the Save command appears.

Tip

You can click Help [image] on the Standard toolbar and click a command on a menu or a button on the toolbar to display a help message for the command or button.


To search for a help topic

Searching for a help topic is like using a book’s index. Use the Index tab when you want to find a topic based on its name. For example, to find help for selecting objects, base your search on the word "select."

1	On the Help menu, click Designer Help to open the help window, if necessary.

2	Click the Index tab.

3	Type Select. The search list shows entries beginning with "select."

4	Click Select Mode to select that topic.

5	Click Display. A help message displays for Select Mode.

6	Close the help window by clicking the Close button [image] located in the top right corner of the help window.

Tip

You can also use the Find tab to search for a word or phrase located in any help topic.


To use the help Contents

The help Contents is similar to a book’s table of contents. You can click a button to look up Designer terms, learn about error messages, or review any of the other listed subjects.

1	On the Help menu, click Designer Help, and click the Contents tab.

2	Double-click Drawing Objects in Designer. A list of topics displays.

3	Double-click What is an Object? The What is an Object? topic opens.

4	Close the help window by clicking the Close button [image] located in the top right corner of the help window.


Selecting Objects

Designer lets you select individual objects (shapes) so you can work with them. In this tutorial, you use the mouse to select objects in different circumstances. For example, you select a stand-alone object, you select an object out of a stack, and you select an object out of a group.


To select a single object

You use the Select pointer to select objects. To display the Select pointer, double-click away from an object, or click the Select tool.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file SELECT.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder.

3	Click Select [image] in the Toolbox to display the Select pointer, if necessary.

4	Point to the red circle in area 1 and click the left mouse button. Small squares called "handles" appear around the object to show it is selected.

5	Point anywhere inside the circle and hold down the left mouse button.

6	Move the pointer to drag the object. Release the mouse button to drop the object.

7	Click anywhere outside the selected object to deselect it.


To select multiple objects

1	Using the Select pointer, click and hold the left mouse button on the x in the upper left corner of area 2.

2	Drag to the second x at the lower right corner of area 2. Notice a bounding box encompasses the square, circle, and star.

3	Release the mouse button. The objects are selected.

4	Point anywhere inside the handles and drag to move the objects.


To deselect an object from a selected stack

1	Point to the star in area 2.

2	Hold down SHIFT and click the left mouse button. The star shows its bounding box to indicate it has been deselected. Release SHIFT. The handles only appear around the square and circle.

3	Point anywhere inside the handles and drag to move the square and circle.


To select an object in a group (without ungrouping)

1	Drag a bounding box around all the objects in area 2.

2	On the Change menu, point to Combine, and then click Group.

3	Point anywhere inside the group and double-click. A border appears around the group.

4	Point to the star and click to select it. Handles appear around the star.

5	Drag the star to move it.

6	Press ESC to remove the border.


To select an object beneath another object

Designer objects can be drawn and stacked on top of one another. If you select an object in a stack, Designer automatically selects the top object. Hold down ALT while clicking the mouse button to select objects behind other objects. The status bar at the bottom of the Designer window describes the selected object.

1	On the View menu, point to Status Bar, and then click Single. The single-line status bar appears.

2	Hold down ALT and click near the center of the star in area 3. The star is selected ("Polygon" appears in the status bar).

3	Click again. The circle is selected.

4	Click again. The square is selected.

5	Release ALT, point anywhere inside the handles, and drag to move the square.

6	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Viewing, Moving, and Resizing Objects

Designer lets you see your work at several levels of magnification. You can also move objects within a drawing and resize them to correct proportions.

In this tutorial, you magnify an ocean scene, place a clipper ship in the scene, and resize the ship proportionally.


To magnify the view of an object

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file VIEW.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of an ocean scene and a clipper ship appears in the drawing area.

3	Click View [image] in the Toolbox and then click Zoom In [image]. The pointer changes to a magnifying glass.

4	Point to the upper left corner of the ocean scene.

5	Hold down the left mouse button and drag a bounding box to the bottom right corner of the scene.

6	Release the mouse button. The drawing is magnified in the window.


To resize an object

1	Click on one of the sails on the clipper ship. Handles appear around the ship.

2	Point to the upper left handle. The pointer becomes a double-headed arrow.

3	Drag the pointer down and to the right. The ship becomes smaller but maintains its original proportions.

4	Release the mouse button when the ship is about half its original size.


To move an object

1	Click on the ship, and drag the ship into the center of the ocean.

2	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.

Note

If you make a mistake while moving an object, press ESC before releasing the left mouse button to return the object to its original location. If you make a mistake after moving an object, open the Edit menu and click Undo, or press CTRL+Z.


Drawing Shapes and Lines

In this tutorial, you learn how to draw a circle, rectangle, and triangle by creating three road signs. You then use a line to draw a post for a sign.

To draw shapes or lines, click a drawing tool in the Toolbox. Then draw the object by dragging the pointer from a starting point to an ending point.


To draw a circle

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Double-click the file SHAPES.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A road with three signs appears in the drawing area.

3	Press CTRL+F to open the Color Palette, if it is not already open. (You may need to move this help procedure to see the Color Palette.)

4	Click the color red with the left mouse button. The color displays on the status bar on the lower left.

5	Click Ellipse [image] in the Toolbox.

6	Click Diameter [image] on the ribbon.

7	Click From Center [image] if it is not already selected. (When the button is selected, a green bar displays on the button.)

8	Point to the center of the circle in the drawing area.

9	Click and drag the pointer down and to the right until the circle covers the outline.

10	Click outside the circle to deselect it.

Note

Clicking a color in the palette with the left mouse button selects the interior fill color. Clicking a color in the palette with the right mouse button selects the line color.


To draw a rectangle

1	In the Color Palette, click the color white with the left mouse button, and then with the right mouse button.

2	Click Rectangle [image] in the Toolbox.

3	Click Diagonal [image] on the ribbon.

4	Click From Center [image] on the ribbon to deselect it.

5	Point to the upper left corner of the gray outline rectangle inside the circle.

6	Click and drag the pointer down and to the right until the rectangle covers the outline.

7	Click outside the rectangle to deselect it.

Note

Pressing SHIFT while drawing a rectangle creates a perfect square.


To draw a triangle

1	Click the color yellow with the left mouse button, and then click the color black with the right mouse button.

2	Click Polygon [image] in the Toolbox.

3	Click Single Side [image] on the ribbon.

4	Type 3 in the Number of Sides box.

5	Click Angle Constraint [image] and Reverse Direction [image] to select them.

6	Point to the lower left corner of the gray triangle outline and drag to the right until the triangle covers the gray outline.

7	Click outside the triangle to deselect it.

Tip

Press the right mouse button to move a object as you draw it. For example, as you draw a circle, hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse. The unfinished circle moves. Release the right mouse button (but keep the left mouse button pressed) to finish drawing the circle in its new location.


To draw a line

1	Click Format [image] in the Toolbox and click the Line Weight button [image] on the ribbon.

2	Click the 9 point line weight option.

3	Click Simple Line [image] in the Toolbox.

4	Click Line Segment [image] on the ribbon.

5	Point to the bottom center of the stop sign and hold down the left mouse button.

6	Drag the pointer to the blue dot in the ground below the stop sign to draw a stand for the sign.

7	Click Angle Constraint [image] on the ribbon to turn it off.

8	On the File menu, click Close. Do not save changes.


Using Color

The Color Palette lets you add and change colors of objects within your drawing.

In this tutorial, you open a palette and use its colors to change the color of a object and text in a drawing.


To open a color palette

You can create and use palettes for certain types of drawings. For this tutorial you use a palette set called "flowers." This palette set contains color palettes for different varieties of flowers.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file COLOR.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of a rose and the word "flowers" appears in six languages in the drawing area.

3	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

4	Click Import. The Import dialog box opens.

5	Double-click the file FLOWERS.PL4 in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. The Import dialog box closes and four flower palettes are listed in the Palette Manager.

6	Double-click the palette Red Roses to make it the current palette.

7	Click OK to close the Palette Manager. The colors in the Red Roses palette appear in the Color Palette.


To change the interior and line color of an object

1	Click the rose with the Select pointer. Handles appear around the object to indicate it is selected.

2	Click the left mouse button on a medium red in the Color Palette. The interior rose color changes to medium red.

3	Click the right mouse button on dark red in the Color Palette. The lines change to dark red.


To change the text color

1	Click on the word Flowers.

2	Click the left mouse button on dark red in the Color Palette. The text changes to dark red.


To close a color palette

Since you are finished with the flowers palette set, you can close the color palettes.

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Double-click Master Palette to make it the current palette.

3	Click the palette Red Roses, then hold down CTRL and click the palettes Blue Roses, Yellow Roses, and Pastel Roses.

4	Click Delete. The selected palettes are removed from the Palette Manager.

5	Click OK to close the Palette Manager.

6	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.

Note

Deleting a palette from the Palette Manager removes the palette from your Designer profile. Since you imported the palette from FLOWERS.PL4, the palette still exists in that file. If you want to save a palette before removing it from the Palette Manager, click Export to export the palette to a file.


Duplicating and Grouping Objects

Duplicating lets you quickly make a copy of an object. The Group command lets you combine two or more objects into a single block.

Grouping objects is a handy way to organize related objects. For example, you can group the parts of a face (such as the mouth, eyes, and nose) so that when you move the face, you do not accidentally leave a part behind.

In this tutorial, you group a row of windows of a building and duplicate the group five times. You then group all the windows and change the color to yellow.


To group objects

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file DUPLICAT.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of a building with one row of windows appears in the drawing area.

3	Click Select [image] in the Toolbox.

4	Move the pointer above and to the left of the left-most window.

5	Click and drag a bounding box to the lower right of the row of windows. Handles appear around the windows to indicate that all four windows are selected.

Notes

Be sure to include all four windows inside the bounding box.

If you’re having difficulty including all the windows, make the bounding box much larger than the row of windows.

6	On the Change menu, point to Combine, and then click Group.


To duplicate a group

You can duplicate individual objects or groups of objects. In this exercise, you use CTRL to duplicate objects and SHIFT to constrain to a vertical movement.

1	Click the group of windows.

2	Hold down SHIFT, CTRL, and the left mouse button.

3	Drag a copy of the window group and drop below the original.

4	Repeat steps 1 through 3 until there are six rows of windows.

5	Move the pointer above and to the left of the corner of the building.

6	Click and drag a bounding box around all the windows. Handles appear around all the windows.

7	Press F5 to group the windows.


To change the interior fill color of a group

You can quickly change the attributes of grouped objects. When you change the line weight, line style, or interior fill, all objects in the group display the new attribute.

1	Press CTRL+F to open the Color Palette, if it is not already open.

2	Click the color yellow. All of the windows change to yellow.

3	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Changing the Order of Objects

Designer lets you change the stacking order of objects so you can move objects on top of or behind other objects. Designer also lets you make repeated copies (arrays) of objects.

In this tutorial, you change the order of three playing cards and add an array effect to a single card, changing it into a deck of cards.

Objects appear in the order they are drawn. The last object drawn is always on top of any other objects. For example, if you draw a square and then a circle in the same place, the circle appears on top (in front) of the square.


To change the order of objects

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file ORDER.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of playing cards appears in the drawing area.

3	Select the Jack card. Handles appear around the Jack to indicate it is selected.

4	On the Change menu, point to Order, and then click Bring to Front. The Jack moves to the top of the stack.

5	Select the Ace of Spades.

6	On the Change menu, point to Order, and then click Bring Forward. The Ace of Spades moves up one level.


To add an array effect

An array is a repeating effect that lets you create perfectly spaced, duplicated objects. You can use arrays for special visual effects or to make duplication more accurate.

1	Click the single card lying face up.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Move. The Move tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Type [image].20 inch in the Vertical box.

4	Type 5 in the Copies box.

5	Click Apply. The array effect is applied to the single card.

6	Click Close to close the Transform dialog box.

7	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Aligning Objects

Designer lets you automatically reposition objects on the page in a variety of ways. For example, you can align an object exactly in the center of the page or in the center of another object.

In this tutorial, you align planets horizontally on the page and align text inside an object.


To align objects

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Double-click the file ALIGN.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of the solar system appears in the drawing area.

3	Press CTRL+A. All the planets are selected.

4	On the Change menu, point to Align, and then click To Object. The Align dialog box opens.

5	Click the Middle button [image]. The preview area shows horizontally aligned objects.

6	Click Apply. The planets are aligned to the middle.

7	Click Close to close the Align dialog box.

8	Click outside the planets to deselect them.

Note

You can align objects in relation to each other or in relation to the page. If you align objects to the center of the page, "Center" is the exact center of the page. If you center objects in relation to each other, objects redraw on top of each other, with their center points superimposed.


To align text inside an object

1	Press CTRL+F to open the Color Palette, if it is not already open.

2	Click the color black with both the left mouse button and the right mouse button.

3	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

4	In the Font box on the ribbon, click Arial.

5	Double-click the number in the Font Size box and type 36.

6	Click Horizontal Alignment [image] on the ribbon and click Align Center.

7	Click Vertical Alignment [image] on the ribbon and click Align Middle.

8	Drag a box around Jupiter (the fifth planet to the right of the sun) so that the four sides of the box touch the edge of the planet.

9	Type Jupiter and press ESC. Click away from the planets to deselect Jupiter.

10	Click Text Mode [image] and drag a box around Saturn (the planet to the right of Jupiter) so that the four sides of the box touch the edge of the planet.

11	Type Saturn and press ESC.

12	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Entering and Editing Freeform Text

You can add freeform text (text without margins) anywhere in your drawing. Freeform text is perfect for labels, short titles, or other short passages.

In this tutorial, you enter freeform text in the drawing area and edit it. You also change text attributes such as the typeface and point size.


To set the typeface and point size

These steps show how to select the characteristics of text before you begin entering it.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file FREEFORM.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing showing javelin gripping methods appears in the drawing area.

3	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

4	In the Font box on the ribbon, click Times New Roman.

5	Double-click the number in the Font Size box and type 40.

Tip

To quickly access a particular font from the Font list box, you can type the first letter of the font. For example, typing D highlights the first font that begins with the letter D.


To enter and center freeform text

These steps show how to enter freeform text and center it as a caption.

1	Move the pointer to the blue area under the top gripping method.

2	Click the left mouse button to insert the text cursor.

3	Type Finnish.

4	Press ESC to leave text edit mode. "Finnish" is selected.

5	Press CTRL+F to open the Color Palette, if it is not already open.

6	Click the color white with both the left and right mouse buttons to select the interior and exterior colors, respectively.

7	Press SHIFT and click the center of the Finnish gripping method graphic. Both the text and the graphic are selected.

Note

Both text and drawing should be selected. If not, select them both.

8	On the Change menu, point to Align, and then click To Object. The Align dialog box opens.

9	Click the Center button [image].

10	Click Apply. The text is centered below the drawing.

11	Click Close to close the Align dialog box.


To change the typeface and point size

You can change the characteristics of existing text by selecting or highlighting it, and then changing the settings on the ribbon.

1	Click the text "Javelin Gripping Methods."

2	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox, if necessary.

3	In the Font list box, click Times New Roman.

4	Double-click the number in the Font Size box and type 77.

5	Click Italics [image].

6	Click Horizontal Alignment [image] and click Align Center.

7	Click away from the text to deselect it.


To edit text

You can add text or make corrections by inserting the text cursor into the text.

1	Click Text Mode [image] on the ribbon.

2	Click the word Forke to insert the text cursor.

3	Press END. The text cursor moves to the right of the letter e.

4	Press BACKSPACE to delete the letter e.

5	Press ESC to leave text mode.

6	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Placing Text Along a Curving Path
Curving Text Along Path

Designer makes it easy for you to place text along a path. In this tutorial, you place text around a circle to display the name of a product.


To place text along a curving path

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file CURVETXT.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder.

3	Click the text SUN VALLEY’S to select it.

4	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

5	Hold down SHIFT and click the edge of the circle to select it also. Handles appear around the selected items.

6	Click Path Fit [image]. The text fitting palette opens.

7	Click the button at the top left of the palette [image]. The text is centered at the top of the circle.

The text fitting palette buttons use an arrow and a sample path to indicate text arrangement. The direction of the arrow indicates whether the text is upright or upside down. The position of the arrow indicates whether the text is below or above the path and whether the alignment is left, right, or center.


To position text on the path

You can adjust the distance between the text and the path by changing a percentage value in the Text ribbon.

1	Click Path Fit [image].

2	Click Choose Position. The Text ribbon changes to display various positioning options.

3	In the percentage box, click the up or down arrow to change the value in increments of 5%.

4	Experiment until you are satisfied with the distance between the text and the circle, and then press ESC.

5	Click outside the text to deselect it.


To remove the path

1	Click the circle to select it.

2	Press DELETE. The circle is deleted.

3	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Using Snap Points

Snap points let you automatically and precisely touch an end point of one object to a point on another. Snap points can also help you draw perfectly symmetrical shapes.

In this tutorial, you use snap points as guides as you draw a diamond and circle in two nautical flags.


To snap to end points

A snap point is like a magnet [image] when a line ends or begins near it, it automatically pulls, or snaps, the end to the point. This is useful when you want a line end to exactly touch an object at a certain point.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file SNAP.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of a ship and four nautical flags displays in the drawing area.

3	Press CTRL+F to open the Color Palette, if necessary.

4	Click the color white with the left mouse button.

5	Click the top flag to select it. Handles appear around the flag to indicate that it is selected.

6	Click Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar. Small squares appear on the flag as snap points.

7	Click Compound Line [image] in the Toolbox.

8	Click Jointed Line [image] on the ribbon.

9	Click the top middle snap point.

10	Drag the pointer to the right middle snap point. Release the mouse button.

11	Drag the pointer to the bottom middle snap point. Release the mouse button.

12	Drag the pointer to the left middle snap point. Release the mouse button.

13	Drag the pointer to the top middle snap point. Release the mouse button. The interior of the diamond becomes solid.

14	Double-click away from the objects to deselect the objects and return to the Select pointer.


To copy an object’s attributes

You can copy an object’s attributes such as color and line width and apply those attributes to other objects.

1	Click the red area of the bottom flag to select the red portion of the flag. (Watch the status bar at lower left. "Poly object" appears when the red portion is selected.)

2	On the Format menu, click Pick Up Object Format.

3	Click the diamond in the top flag.

4	On the Format menu, click Apply Object Format. The diamond changes to red.


To use a snap point as a guide

You can use snap points as guides when you want to draw perfectly symmetrical shapes. For example, snap points can show you the exact center of a circle or ellipse so you can draw a bisecting line.

1	Click the second flag to select it.

2	Click Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar. Small squares appear on the flag.

3	Click Ellipse [image] in the Toolbox.

4	Click Diagonal [image] on the ribbon.

5	Drag the pointer from the upper left snap point in the box to the lower right snap point. The square contains a perfect circle.

6	Click the color green in the Color Palette. The circle changes to green.

7	Click Remove Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar. All snap points disappear.

8	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Reshaping Objects

Designer lets you easily change lines and curves into the shapes you want. In reshape mode, an object’s anchor points appear. You can move, delete, duplicate, break apart, and insert anchor points to change the shape of an object.

In this tutorial, you reshape an arrow and a part on a blueprint.


To reshape a line

You change the shape of lines by dragging the anchor points to new positions.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file RESHAPE.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A blueprint showing a water valve appears in the drawing area.

3	Double-click arrow number three. Anchor points appear on the object.

4	Drag the middle anchor point up until the portion between the middle and right anchors is horizontal.

5	Press ESC to leave the reshape mode.


To reshape a curve

Curves have special properties that straight lines do not. With a line, you can change only its length and angle. With a curve, you can also change its curvature.

Designer has Bézier control points to give you extensive control over the shape of a curve. Control points radiate from selected anchor points. When you move a control point, the curve’s shape changes.

1	Click the edge of the object surrounding the circle at the upper right corner of the blueprint.

2	Click the Edit tool [image] in the Toolbox. The edit options menu appears.

3	Click the Reshape Curve option on the menu.

4	Click the anchor point at the bottom of the circle to select it. Checker-shaped control points appear on each side of the anchor point. (The left anchor point is much farther away than the right.)

5	Drag the left control point directly to the right until the shape is circular.

6	Press ESC to leave the reshape mode.

7	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.

Tip

Practice a little with reshaping curves. Since most shapes contain curves, you will find it is one of your most valuable tools.


Blending Two Objects

Designer lets you blend objects together to create interesting transforming effects.

In this tutorial, you blend a yellow crescent moon into a white full moon. Next, you blend the white full moon into a yellow crescent moon.


To blend objects

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Double-click the file BLEND.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of an evening sky appears in the drawing area.

3	Click the left crescent moon to select it. Handles appear around the moon.

4	Hold down SHIFT and click the full moon. The crescent and full moons are selected.

5	On the Change menu, click Blend. The Blend dialog box opens. Drag the box out of the way, if necessary, so you can see the selected objects.

6	Type 4 in the Steps box and click Apply. The crescent and full moons are blended together.

7	Click outside the objects to deselect them.

8	Click the full moon to select it.

9	Hold down SHIFT and click the right crescent moon. The full and crescent moons are now selected.

10	Click Apply in the Blend dialog box.

11	Click Close to close the Blend dialog box.

12	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.

Note

Do not confuse the Blend and Gradient commands. Blend creates multiple objects, while Gradient changes colors within an object.


Numerically Transforming Objects

You can move or resize an object precisely with the transform features in Designer’s Transform dialog box.

In this tutorial, you use the Transform dialog box to move a needle onto a compass and rotate the needle so that it points due west.


To move an object with numeric precision

Use the Move tab of the Transform dialog box when you want to move an object with the highest degree of accuracy.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file TRANSFRM.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of a compass appears in the drawing area.

3	Click View [image] and then click Used Area [image] to magnify the drawing.

4	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Move. The Move tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

5	Drag the dialog box out of the way.

6	Click the needle beside the compass with the Select pointer to select it.

7	In the Transform dialog box, click the up arrow by the Horizontal box until the number is 2.40. An outline of the object moves to the right.

8	Click the up arrow by the Vertical box until the number is .50. An outline of the object moves down.

9	Click Apply. The needle moves to the center of the compass.


To rotate an object with numeric precision

1	Click the Rotate tab of the Transform dialog box. The Rotate tab displays.

2	Type 107 in the Angle box.

3	Click Apply. The needle rotates to point due west.

4	Click Close to close the Transform dialog box.

5	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Using Text Containers

Designer lets you create text in containers to help you manage large blocks of text.

In this tutorial, you create a text container and import text into it. You then create a second container and connect it to the first. Finally, you select an object and make the text wrap around it.


To create a text container

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file BLOCK.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of an air museum’s visitor’s guide appears in the drawing area.

3	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

4	Press CTRL+F to open the Color Palette, if necessary.

5	Click the black in the Color Palette with the left and then the right mouse button.

6	In the Font box, click Arial.

7	Double-click the number in the Font Size box and type 13.5.

8	Hold the left mouse button and drag a text container from the upper left corner to the lower right corner of the top white box.

The text cursor should be at the upper left corner of the container. If it is not, click the Horizontal Alignment button and choose Align Left. Then click the Vertical Alignment button and choose Align Top.


To import text into a container

1	On the File menu, click Import. The Import dialog box opens.

2	In the Files of Type box, click ASCII Text.

4	Double-click the file MUSEUM.TXT in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. The text appears in the container.


To flow text from one container to another

1	Click on the text container.

2	Point to the overflow handle at the bottom right of the container. The pointer becomes a box.

3	Drag the box and place it in the upper left corner of the bottom white box.

4	Click the bottom text block to select it.

5	Drag the right handle to the right edge of the white area.

6	Drag the bottom handle up to the bottom edge of the white area.

7	Press ESC.


To wrap text around an object

1	Click the biplane to select it.

2	On the Change menu, point to Text, and then click Repel Text. The text in the upper white box wraps around the tail of the plane. Additional text flows into the lower white box.

3	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Adding Gradients

Gradients let you create color fills in which one color gradually fades into another. You can use gradients to give your drawings depth and interesting accents.

In this tutorial, you add a gradient to a torch to give it a shining, metallic appearance. You then apply a different gradient to the title of the drawing.


To open a color palette

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Double-click the file GRADIENT.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A drawing of a torch appears in the drawing area.

3	Press CTRL+F to open the Color Palette, if necessary.

4	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

5	Click Import. The Import dialog box opens.

6	Double-click the file GOLD.PL4 in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. The Import dialog box closes and the Gold palette is listed in the Palette Manager.

7	Double-click the palette Gold to make it the current palette.

8	Click OK to close the Palette Manager. The colors of the Gold palette appear in the Color Palette.


To add a linear gradient to the torch

1	Click the center section of the torch where there is no gradient.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Gradient. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Lock the Interior Fill tab by clicking the Lock/Unlock Fill Display button. The tab is locked when the button shows [image].

4	Click Linear [image].

5	Click 0 above the color band, and click the first color (dark gold or orange) in the color palette in the dialog box (not the floating Color Palette).

6	Click just above the color band to add another pointer control. Drag this control until its number reads 55.

7	Click the fourth color (light gold) in the palette.

8	Click just above the color band to add another pointer control. Drag this control until its number reads 85.

9	Click the third color (brown) in the palette.

10	Click 100 above the color band, and click the first color in the palette. The color band shows a four-color gradient.

11	Click Apply to apply the gradient fill to the selected section of the torch.


To add a radial gradient to the title

1	Drag the dialog box so you can see the title "Carpe Diem."

2	Click the title "Carpe Diem."

3	Click Radial [image].

4	Click 100 on the color band, and then click the color blue in the palette.

5	Drag the 55 percent marker away from the color band to remove it.

6	Drag the 85 percent marker to remove it. The color band shows a two-color gold-to-blue gradient.

7	Click Apply to apply the gradient fill to the text.

8	Click Close to close the Object Format dialog box.


To remove a color palette

1	On the Format menu, click Palette Manager. The Palette Manager dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the Master Palette to make it the current palette.

3	Click the Gold palette to select it.

4	Click Delete to remove the Gold palette from the Palette Manager.

5	Click OK to close the Palette Manager.

6	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Using Layers

Designer lets you create different levels, or layers, in your drawing. Layers help you organize a drawing by keeping similar objects on separate layers.

Think of layers as overhead transparency sheets; you can see them all when they’re stacked, but you can write only on the top transparency (the current layer). You draw portions of your drawing on different layers, and then you can display all the layers to give the appearance of a drawing created without layers.

You also can hide certain layers so they are not visible. For example, you can turn on only the layer in which you are working so that you don’t have to wait for other layers to redraw.

In this tutorial, you see how layers help you organize parts of a drawing.


To move to a layer

The current layer is the one on which you are drawing or editing. To draw or edit objects on a different layer, you must move to that layer.

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Double-click the file LAYERS.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. A map of Switzerland appears in the drawing area.

3	Click Country Names tab on the Layer Tab Bar at the bottom of the window. You are now on the Country Names layer.

4	Click the word "SWITZERLAND" at the upper left portion of the drawing area and drag it above the line near the center of the map.


To turn on a layer

When a layer is turned on, you can see it; when a layer is turned off, you cannot see it.

1	Click Layers [image] on the Layer Tab Bar at the bottom of the window. The Layers Manager opens.

2	Click the Lakes layer to select it. Hold down CTRL and click Legend and Cities to also select those layers.

3	Click the Show Layer button [image]. The lakes, cities, and the map legend appear in the drawing.

4	Click Close.


To create a new layer

In this section, you create a new layer called Map Title and move the title to this new layer.

1	Click Layers [image] on the Layer Tab Bar at the bottom of the window. The Layers Manager opens.

2	Click the Add Layer button. A new layer named Layer 7 appears in the layer list.

3	Click in the Layer Name box, type Map Title, and press ENTER.

4	Double-click Legend in the layer list to move to that layer.

5	Click the white box at the upper left of the map (you may need to move the Layer Manager). The title and box are selected.

6	Click the arrow beside the Move to Layer box and choose Map Title. The selection is moved to the Map Title layer, which becomes the current layer.

7	Click Close to close the Layer Manager dialog box.

8	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.

Note

When you create a new layer, Designer immediately moves you to that layer.


Tracing Bitmaps

Designer lets you automatically trace all or part of a bitmap image. The result of a trace is a vector object that you can edit like other Designer objects.

In this tutorial, you import the scanned image of a duck (a bitmap image). You then trace the bitmap image to create a vector object and add a gradient to the object.


To import a bitmap

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file BITMAP.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. An advertisement for "Duck Lake Resorts" appears in the drawing area.

3	On the File menu, click Import. The Import dialog box opens.

4	In the Files of Type box, click Tagged Image File Format.

5	Double-click the file DUCK.TIF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. The bitmap image appears in the drawing area.


To numerically resize a bitmap

1	Select the bitmap image of the duck.

2	On the Change menu, point to Transform, and then click Scale. The Scale tab of the Transform dialog box opens.

3	Be sure Proportional Scale is selected, and change the number in the Horizontal box to 165 (the number in the Vertical box changes automatically).

4	Click Apply. Designer enlarges the bitmap image.

5	Click Close to close the Transform dialog box.

6	Drag the bitmap image to the center of the page.


To trace a bitmap

1	Click Image [image] in the Toolbox.

2	Click Trace [image] on the ribbon.

3	Hold down SHIFT and click on the bitmap image.

4	Release the SHIFT key and click away from the bitmap image. Designer begins tracing the bitmap image.

5	When the trace indictor on the status bar stops, drag the traced object off the bitmap image.

6	Click the bitmap image to select it.

7	Press DELETE to delete the bitmap image.


To add a gradient

1	Click the traced object to select it. (The traced object is automatically grouped.)

2	On the Format menu, deselect Smart Colorization of Groups to turn this feature off.

3	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Gradient. The Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

4	Click Linear [image].

5	With the left mouse button, click dark blue in the dialog box color palette to set the starting color.

6	With the right mouse button, click light blue in the dialog box color palette to set the ending color.

7	Click Apply. The gradient is applied to the duck.

8	Click Close to close the Interior Fill-Gradient dialog box.

9	Drag the duck into the center of the illustration.

10	On the File menu, click Close when you finish. Do not save changes.


Using Master Pages

Use a master page to create several drawings that have a common element. For example, if you want to create ten drawings with exactly the same border, create the border on a master page, and use it for each of your drawings.

In this tutorial, you use a certificate of completion as a master page, and other pages use the certificate as a background template.


To add a drawing to the master page

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Double-click the file MASTER.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder. An empty file opens.

3	Click the Master Page tab on the Page Tab Bar at the bottom of the window. The Master Page displays.

4	On the File menu, click Import. The Import dialog box opens.

5	In the Files of Type box, click Micrografx Designer File (*.dsf).

6	Click the file CERTIF.DSF in Designer’s TUTORIAL folder, and then click Import. A drawing of a certificate is imported into the master page drawing area.


To use the master page as a template

All other pages in your document can use the master page settings and background drawing. In this exercise, you add a second page and use the master page as a template for both pages.

1	Click the Page 1 tab on the Page Tab Bar. Page 1 is displayed as the current page.

2	On the File menu, click Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box opens.

3	Click the Paper Size tab and click Use Master Page.

4	Select Apply to All Open Pages and click OK. The Page Setup dialog box closes.

5	Click the right mouse button on any tab of the Page Tab Bar. The Page menu opens.

6	On the Page menu, click Add Page. Page 2 appears on the Page Tab Bar.

7	Click the Page 1 tab to return to the first page.


To add a name to the certificate

1	Click Text [image] in the Toolbox.

2	In the Font box on the ribbon, click Arial.

3	Double-click the number in the Font Size box and type 26.

4	Click Horizontal Alignment [image], and click Align Left.

5	Click above the beginning of the line near the center of the certificate to insert the cursor.

6	Type your name.

7	Press ESC when you finish typing. You may need to move the text to center it on the line.

8	Click the Page 2 tab on the Page Tab Bar.

9	Click Text Mode [image].

10	Repeat steps 5 through 7 using another name.

11	On the File menu, click Close. Do not save changes.

Note

The certificate itself cannot be edited from page one. To edit it, you must return to the master page.


LNSTYLES.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Using Line Attributes

Lines define the shape of open objects and the borders of closed objects. You can choose a line attribute for an object before or after you draw it.

The line attributes are:

Line style (whether a line is invisible, solid, dotted, or dashed)

Line ends (for open objects)

Line weight (the point size or thickness of a line)

Line fill (color, gradient, hatch, image, or object)

Note

You can apply all fill types to lines of any weight, but gradient, hatch, image, and object fills are useful primarily for thick lines.


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Setting Line Weight

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines

Setting Line Fills


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box gives you access to all line end, style, and weight options.

Line Attribute Buttons

These buttons show the panels for the different types of line attributes.

Click Line Ends [image] to show the line end panel.

Click Line Style [image] to show the line style panel.

Click Line Weight [image] to show the line weight panel.

Line Option Buttons

These buttons set line options.

Click Fill Before/After [image] to choose the fill line method. For more information on this option, see Setting Fill Line.

Click Transform Fill with Object [image] to turn line scaling on and off. For more information on this option, see Setting Line Scaling.

Click Overprint [image] to turn stroke (line) overprinting on and off. For more information on this option, see Line (Stroke) Overprinting and Setting Line Overprint.

Preview Button

The Preview button lets you see the effect of line settings on a selected object. (This button has no effect if no object is selected.) You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

Apply and Close Buttons

As with many of the dialog boxes in Designer, the Object Format box stays open to let you apply changes to objects without having to open the dialog box repeatedly. You can click Apply each time you want to apply a change to a selected object. The dialog box does not close until you click Close.

Rolling Up the Dialog Box

By rolling up the Object Format dialog box, you can keep it accessible, but out of your way. Click [image] on the title bar to roll up the dialog box. Click [image] to unroll it.


Using Line Attributes

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Setting Line Weight

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines


Setting Line Styles

The line style determines whether a line is visible, solid, dotted, or dashed.

Line styles apply both to open objects such as straight lines and arcs, and to the borders of closed objects. You can apply a line style to a line of any thickness.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line style applies the style to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line style sets the default line style.


To set the style of a line using the Line Style button

To set the style of a line using the Object Format dialog box


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Ends

Editing Line Ends

Setting Line Weight

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines


To set the style of a line using the Line Style button

1	Select the object.

2	Click Format [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Line Style [image]. The Line Style menu opens.

4	Click the line style you want.

or

Click Invisible to make the line invisible.

or

Click Styles to set the line style using the Object Format dialog box.

Tips

To speed your work, the Line Style menu keeps track of the most recent line styles you have used.

You can also set the line style by clicking Line Style on the Format menu.


Setting Line Styles


To set the style of a line using the Object Format dialog box

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, click Line Style. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Line Style [image] to display the line style panel, if necessary.

4	Click the line style you want.

or

Select the None check box to make the line invisible.

5	Click Apply.

Tips

To see the effect of a line style on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also set the line style by clicking Line Style [image] on the Format ribbon.


Setting Line Ends

A line end is a marker that appears at the end of a line. The available line ends include arrowheads, lines, squares, circles, and triangles. You can also create custom line ends.

You set the two ends of a line separately. The ends of a line can have identical or different markers, or you can have a marker at only one end. For the purpose of specifying where a line end appears, each line has a starting and ending point, depending upon how the line was drawn.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line end applies the end to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line end sets the default line end.


To set line ends using the Line Ends button

To set line ends using the Object Format dialog box

To create a custom line end

To remove a custom line end

To edit line ends


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Editing Line Ends

Setting Line Weight

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines


To set line ends using the Line Ends button

1	Select the object.

2	Click Format [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Line Ends [image]. The Line Ends menu opens.

4	Click the line ends you want.

or

Click No Ends to remove all line ends.

or

Click Ends to set the line ends using the Object Format dialog box.

Tips

To speed your work, the Line Ends menu keeps track of the most recent line ends you have used.

You can also set line ends by clicking Line Ends on the Format menu.


Setting Line Ends

Editing Line Ends


To set line ends using the Object Format dialog box

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, click Line Ends. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Line Ends [image] to display the line end panel, if necessary.

4	Select the Same Type check box if you want both line ends to be the same.

or

Clear the Same Type check box if you want to set the line ends separately.

5	Choose line ends using the list boxes at the top of the Line Style tab. To expand a list box, click the arrow beside the box.

If you are setting both ends the same, you can choose the line ends using either list box.

If you are setting each line end separately, choose the starting line end using the left list box and the ending line end using the right list box.

6	Click Apply.

Tips

To set a line end to none, choose the line end with no end marker.

To see the effect of a line end on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also set line ends by clicking Line Ends [image] on the Format ribbon.


To create a custom line end

1	Draw the object to be used as a line end.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy to copy your line end to the Clipboard.

3	On the Format menu, click Line Ends. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

4	Click Line Ends [image] to display the line end panel, if necessary.

5	Click Paste. The new line end is added to the gallery of line ends.

Tip

You can remove line ends you have created, but not line ends originally included with Designer.


To remove a custom line end

1	On the Format menu, click Line Ends. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

2	Click Line Ends [image] to display the line end panel, if necessary.

3	Select the line end you want to remove in either list box. To expand a list box, click the arrow beside the box.

4	Click Remove. The line end is removed from the gallery.

Tip

You cannot remove line ends originally included with Designer.


Editing Line Ends

If you need to adjust the position or appearance of a line end, you can scale, move, rotate, or flip the line end relative to its line. You can use the preview feature to see the effect your adjustments have. Experiment with the controls to reach the result you want.

Scaling a Line End

Change the size of a line end by changing the value of Width and Height. The default values are 100%, which is the original size. Changing both these values to 50% makes the line end half the original size; changing the values to 200% makes the line end twice the original size. To scale the line end proportionally, change Width and Height the same amount.

Moving a Line End

You can move, or offset, a line end from its line by increasing or decreasing the values in the X or Y boxes. Zero is the default position.

Increasing the X value moves the line end away from the line. Decreasing the X value (using a negative value) moves the end toward the middle of the line.

Increasing the Y value moves the line end up. Decreasing the Y value (using a negative value) moves the line end down.

Rotating a Line End

You can rotate a line end relative to the line by changing the Rotation value. The default value (no rotation) is zero degrees.

Flipping a Line End

Click Flip U-D (up to down), Flip L-R (left to right), or both to flip a line end.

Style

Select Use Line Fill to apply the current line weight and fill attributes to the line end. If you want to retain the original weight and fill attributes of a custom line end, clear this option.


To edit line ends


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Setting Line Weight

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines


To edit line ends

1	Select the line with the ends you want to edit.

2	On the Format menu, click Line Ends. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Line Ends [image] to display the line end panel, if necessary.

4	Choose the settings you want to apply to the line ends.

Tips

To edit each line end separately, clear the Same Attribute check box.

To see the effect of a line end setting on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.


Editing Line Ends

Setting Line Ends


Setting Line Weight

The line weight sets the point size or thickness of a line. The line weight can range from 0 to 360 (5 inches). A line with a weight of 0 is a hairline. A hairline is the thinnest line that can be displayed or printed.

Line weight applies both to open objects, such as straight lines and arcs, and to the borders of closed objects.

For information on setting the join and cap options of weighted lines, see Setting Join and Cap Options. For information on creating calligraphic lines, see Creating Calligraphic Lines.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line weight applies the weight to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line weight sets the default line weight. The current line weight is shown on the status bar.

Note

Line weights in millimeters (mm) are rounded to one decimal place of precision. For example, a line weight of 1.23 mm is rounded to 1.2 mm before it is applied to the line (1.25 mm is rounded to 1.3 mm).


To set the weight of a line using the Line Weight button

To set the weight of a line using the Object Format dialog box


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Editing Line Ends

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines


To set the weight of a line using the Line Weight button

1	Select the object.

2	Click Format [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Line Weight [image]. The Line Weight menu opens.

4	Click the line weight you want.

or

Click Hairline for the thinnest line that can be displayed or printed.

or

Click Weight to set the line weight using the Object Format dialog box.

Tips

To speed your work, the Line Weight menu keeps track of the most recent line weights you have used.

You can also set the line weight by clicking Line Weight on the Format menu.


Setting Line Weight


To set the weight of a line using the Object Format dialog box

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, click Line Weight. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Line Weight [image] to display the line weight panel, if necessary.

4	Type the desired line weight in the Width spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

or

Select the None check box to make the line invisible.

5	Click Apply.

Tips

To see the effect of a line weight on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also set the line weight by clicking Line Weight [image] on the Format ribbon.

If Transform Fill with Object is turned on, the line weight increases or decreases when the object is resized. If Transform Fill with Object is turned off, the line weight remains the same when the object is resized.


Setting Join and Cap Options

You can set line join and line cap options for any line that is not a hairline.

Join Options

Line join options set the appearance of the corner intersection of lines that join.

The Round Join (the default) places the center point of a circle at the vertex of two line ends. The diameter of the circle matches the width and height of the lines.

The Bevel Join averages the angles of the two lines, creating a blunt intersection.

The Mitre Join creates a pointed intersection that is the true intersection of two lines.

Cap Options

Line cap options set the appearance of ends without line end markers.

The Round Cap (the default) places the center point of a circle at the end point of the line. The diameter of the circle matches the width and height of the line.

The Flat Cap ends the line at the end point of the line.

The Square Cap places the center point of a square at the end point of the line. The width and height of the square match the width and height of the line.


To set join and cap options


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Editing Line Ends

Setting Line Weight

Creating Calligraphic Lines


To set join and cap options

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, click Line Weight. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Line Weight [image] to display the line weight panel, if necessary.

4	Type the desired line weight in the Width spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

5	Click the Cap button until it shows the Cap option you want.

6	Click the Join button until it shows the Join option you want.

7	Click Apply.

Tips

The Cap and Join buttons appear when you enter a line weight greater than zero, or select Thick.

When you select the Mitre Join, any lines that meet at angles sharper than 11 degrees are drawn with beveled joins. This prevents objects from having extremely pointed joins.


Setting Join and Cap Options


Creating Calligraphic Lines

You can draw calligraphic lines with Designer. Calligraphic lines can add a more natural look to many drawings, especially when used with curved lines.

The primary way to create calligraphic lines is to adjust the width and height settings of the lines. The lines with the most "flair" are produced by choosing very different width and height settings. For example, a very thin but very tall setting will produce a calligraphic line even without adjusting the Pen angle setting.

Adjusting the Pen angle setting of a line can enhance the effects created by the Width and Height settings. In a calligraphic line, the Pen angle setting forces the pen tip to stay at the chosen angle, much as a calligraphic pen is held at particular angles to achieve certain effects.


To create calligraphic lines


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Editing Line Ends

Setting Line Weight

Setting Join and Cap Options


To create calligraphic lines

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, click Line Weight. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Line Weight [image] to display the line weight panel, if necessary.

4	Select Thick.

5	Select Calligraphic. A preview box and controls for Height and Pen appear.

6	Type the desired Width, Height, and Pen values, or click the arrows beside the boxes to select a value.

7	Click Apply.

Tips

The pen tip for the current settings is shown in the preview box.

You can also set the Pen angle by dragging the red needle in the preview box.

To get a feel for calligraphic lines, set the default line style to a calligraphic style. Then draw various shapes to see the effect of the calligraphic style.


Creating Calligraphic LInes


Setting Line Scaling

The Transform Fill with Object button on the Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box lets you choose whether an object's lines scale when you resize the object.

When this option is turned on, resizing an object also resizes the object's lines (if you increase the size of the object, the lines become proportionally thicker; if you decrease the size of the object, the lines become proportionally thinner.) When this option is turned off, resizing an object has no effect on the weight of the object's lines.

Click the button to switch between the two settings.

 sets the lines to not scale when you resize the object.

 sets the lines to scale when you resize the object.

Note

On the Interior Fill and Line Fill tabs of the Object Format dialog box, this button sets whether an object's interior or line fill transforms when you transform the object. For information on setting fill transform, see Setting Fill Transform.


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Editing Line Ends

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines

Line (Stroke) Overprinting

Setting Line Overprint


Line (Stroke) Overprinting

Conventional offset printing produces color artwork by separating the artwork into its component colors and printing each color separately. Because each color is printed by a different pass through the printing press, they may not align exactly. For example, there may be a tiny gap where two colors are supposed to join. The way in which adjoining colors print is called registration.

A common way to prevent registration problems is to use a technique called overprinting in preparing color separations. Overprinting, or trapping as it is also called, avoids registration gaps by creating a small overlap area where two colors join. For example, consider the color separations necessary to print the following two-color drawing. (The lines of the objects are set to the interior fill color.)

Without overprinting, the color separations for printing this drawing would appear as shown below. The separations are shown side-by-side, but would be printed so that the colors align like the original drawing. Notice that the under color (green square) has been "knocked out" or punched where the over color (yellow circle) will print. If the alignment of these color areas is not perfect during printing, there could be a small gap between the colors in the finished work.

To create a small area of overlap between the two colors, set the line of the circle to overprint (this is usually called stroke overprinting). Stroke overprinting stops "knock out" for a line, creating an overlap area that is as thick as the line's weight. After setting the circle's line to overprint, the separations would appear as shown below. For illustration purposes, the overprint area is set to dark green, but in the actual separation, it would be the same color as the square.

The Overprint button on the Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box lets you turn on overprinting for lines. For information on turning on overprint for fills, see Setting Fill Overprint.

When overprinting is turned on, the separations produced for a drawing use this technique. For information on creating an EPS file from which color separations can be made, see Output for Separator.

Notes

Overprinting affects only color separations. It does not affect an object's appearance on the screen or on a standard printout.

Turning on line overprinting for an object group causes all lines within the group to be output as overprint. The group setting overrides, but does not replace, the line overprint settings for objects within the group. This means that the viewed settings for objects in the group do not change as a result of the group overprint setting. Turning off overprinting for the group restores each object in the group to its previously defined overprint setting.


Using the Line Style Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Editing Line Ends

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines

Setting Line Scaling

Setting Line Overprint


Setting Line Overprint

The Overprint button on Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box lets you turn overprinting on or off for an object's lines. Click the button to switch between the two settings.

 turns line overprinting off.

 turns line overprinting on.

Note

On the Interior Fill and Line Fill tabs of the Object Format dialog box, this button sets interior or line fill overprinting. For information on setting fill overprint, see Setting Fill Overprint.


To turn line overprint on or off


Setting Line Fills

Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Styles

Setting Line Ends

Editing Line Ends

Setting Join and Cap Options

Creating Calligraphic Lines

Setting Line Scaling

Line (Stroke) Overprinting


To turn line overprint on or off

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, click Line Style. The Line Style tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click the Overprint button to choose the overprint setting you want.

 turns off line overprinting.

 turns on line overprinting.

Note

Overprinting affects only how color separations are made. Therefore, turning on overprint does not affect the appearance of an object on the screen or on a standard printout.

Tip

You can also turn line overprint on and off using the Overprint Stroke command on the Object menu.


Setting Line Overprint


Setting Line Fills

The fill of a line sets a line's appearance. You can apply the same types of fills to lines as you can to the interiors of closed objects, although gradient, hatch, image, and object fills are useful primarily for thick lines.

You can apply line fills both to open objects, such as straight lines and arcs, and to the borders of closed objects.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line fill applies the fill to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line fill sets the default line fill.


Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Color

Applying Gradient Line Fills

Applying Hatch Line Fills

Applying Image Line Fills

Applying Object Line Fills


Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box gives you access to all line fills and line fill options.

Lock/Unlock Button

Clicking the Lock/Unlock Fill Display button alternately locks and unlocks the Line Fill tab.

 indicates the tab is unlocked. When unlocked, the Line Fill tab tracks the line fill of the objects you select. For example, if you select an object with a hatch line fill, the Line Fill tab shows the hatch line fill panel. If you then select an object with a solid line fill, the Line Fill tab shows the solid line fill panel.

 indicates the tab is locked. When locked, the tab does not track the line fill of the objects you select. Instead, it shows the panel of the last line fill that you applied to an object.

Fill Type Buttons

These buttons show the panels for the different types of line fills.

Click Solid Line Fill [image] to show the solid fill panel.

Click Gradient Line Fill [image] to show the gradient fill panel.

Click Hatch Line Fill [image] to show the hatch fill panel.

Click Image Line Fill [image] to show the image fill panel.

Click Object Line Fill [image] to show the object fill panel.

Click Remove Line Fill [image] to choose no line fill.

Fill Option Buttons

These buttons set line fill options.

Click Fill Before/After [image] to choose the line fill method. For more information on this option, see Setting Fill Line.

Click Transform Fill with Object [image] to turn fill transform on and off. For more information on this option, see Setting Fill Transform.

Click Overprint [image] to turn overprinting on and off. For more information on this option, see Setting Fill Overprint.

Preview Button

The Preview button lets you see the effect of a line fill on a selected object. (This button has no effect if no object is selected.) You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

Apply and Close Buttons

As with many of the dialog boxes in Designer, the Object Format box stays open to let you apply changes to objects without having to open the dialog box repeatedly. You can click Apply each time you want to apply a change to a selected object. The dialog box does not close until you click Close.

Rolling Up the Dialog Box

By rolling up the Object Format dialog box, you can keep it accessible, but out of your way. Click [image] on the title bar to roll up the dialog box. Click [image] to unroll it.


Setting Line Fills

Applying Gradient Line Fills

Applying Hatch Line Fills

Applying Image Line Fills

Applying Object Line Fills


Setting Line Color

Line color applies both to open objects, such as straight lines and arcs, and to the borders of closed objects.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line color applies the color to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line color sets the default line color. The current line color is shown on the status bar.


To set line color using the Color Palette

To set line color using the Object Format dialog box

To set line color using the Format ribbon

To set line color to no fill (transparent)


Setting Line Fills

Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Applying Gradient Line Fills

Applying Hatch Line Fills

Applying Image Line Fills

Applying Object Line Fills


To set line color using the Color Palette

1	Select the object.

2	Using the right mouse button, click a color in the Color Palette.

Tips

Right-click the swatch with the X to select a transparent line.

To set an object's interior color, left-click a color in the Color Palette.

If no object is selected, you set a new default line color. The next object you draw will have this line color. To determine the current defaults, deselect all objects and view the status bar.

If you do not see the Color Palette, click Toolbars on the View menu, and then select Palette.

You can also set line color using the Object Format dialog box or Solid Line Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


Setting Line Color

Dithered Colors


To set line color using the Object Format dialog box

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Line Fill, and then click Solid. The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Solid [image] to display the solid fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click the color that you want.

5	Click Apply.

Tips

Click Remove Line Fill [image] to select no line fill (transparent).

If no object is selected, you set a new default line color.

To see the effect of a line color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also set line color using the Color Palette or Solid Line Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


To set line color using the Format ribbon

1	Select the object.

2	Click Format [image] in the toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Solid Line Fill [image]. A color palette opens.

4	Click the color that you want.

Tips

If no object is selected, you set a new default line color.

You can also set line color using the Color Palette or the Object Format dialog box.


To set line color to no fill (transparent)

1	Select the object.

2	Using the right mouse button, click the X in the Color Palette.

Tips

To set an object's interior fill to no fill (transparent), left-click the X in the Color Palette.

If no object is selected, you set the default line color to no fill.

The status bar shows an X to indicate no fill.

You can also set line color to transparent by clicking Remove Line Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


Applying Gradient Line Fills

A gradient is a fill that makes a gradual transition between colors. You can apply four types of gradients to a line: linear, radial, square ,and conical.

The process of applying a gradient line fill is identical to that of applying a gradient interior fill, except that the fill applies to an object's lines instead of its interior. For more information on gradient fills, see Introduction to Gradient Fills and Adding Gradient Fills to Objects.

Tip

Gradient line fills are useful primarily for thick lines.


To fill a line with a linear gradient

To fill a line with a radial gradient

To fill a line with a square gradient

To fill a line with a conical gradient

To add colors to a line fill gradient


Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Color

Applying Hatch Line Fills

Applying Image Line Fills

Applying Object Line Fills


To fill a line with a linear gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Line Fill, and then click Gradient. The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Linear [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Type the desired value in the Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the desired value in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the Origin using the mouse, drag the square origin point in the gradient preview.

To set the Angle using the mouse, drag (in a circular motion) either end of the angle indicator in the gradient preview.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

After applying a gradient to a line, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object and right-click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and right-click a color in the Color Palette.


Applying Gradient Line Fills

Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box


To fill a line with a radial gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Line Fill, and then click Gradient. The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Radial [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Type the desired value in the X Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the desired value in the Y Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the X and Y Origins using the mouse, drag the square origin point in the gradient preview.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

After applying a gradient to a line, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object and right-click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and right-click a color in the Color Palette.


To fill a line with a square gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Line Fill, and then click Gradient. The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Square [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Type the desired value in the X Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the desired value in the Y Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the desired value in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the X and Y Origins using the mouse, drag the square origin point in the gradient preview.

To set the Angle using the mouse, drag (in a circular motion) either end of the angle indicator in the gradient preview.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

After applying a gradient to a line, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object and right-click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and right-click a color in the Color Palette.


To fill a line with a conical gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Line Fill, and then click Gradient. The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Conical [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Type the desired value in the X Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the desired value in the Y Origin spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the desired value in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Click Apply.

Tips

To set the X and Y Origins using the mouse, drag the square origin point in the gradient preview.

To set the Angle using the mouse, drag (in a circular motion) either end of the angle indicator in the gradient preview.

To see the effect of a fill color on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

After applying a gradient to a line, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object and right-click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and right-click a color in the Color Palette.


To add colors to a line fill gradient

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Line Fill, and then click Gradient. The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Gradient [image] to display the gradient fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click Linear [image], Radial [image], Square [image], or Conical [image].

5	Click the 0 pointer control, and then click the starting color you want.

6	Click the 100 pointer control, and then click the ending color you want.

7	Click the color band. Another pointer control appears above where you clicked the band.

8	Drag the new pointer to adjust its position, if necessary.

9	Click the new pointer, and then click the color you want.

10	Repeat steps 7 through 9 to add more colors.

11	Set the other gradient values you want.

12	Click Apply.

Tips

To delete a pointer control, drag it past the 0 or 100 pointer, or select it and press DELETE.

After applying a gradient to a line, you can change its starting and ending colors using the Color Palette. To choose another starting color, select the object and right-click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another ending color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and right-click a color in the Color Palette.


Applying Hatch Line Fills

You can fill lines with hatch patterns that are composed of vector-based lines.

You can choose from a broad range of predefined hatch patterns, or define a custom hatch pattern.

The process of applying a hatch line fill is identical to that of applying a hatch interior fill, except that the fill applies to an object's lines instead of its interior. For more information on hatch fills, see Adding Hatch Patterns to Objects and Changing the Line Weight and Spacing of Hatch Fills.

Tip

Hatch line fills are useful primarily for thick lines.


To fill a line with a hatch pattern


Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Color

Applying Gradient Line Fills

Applying Image Line Fills

Applying Object Line Fills


To fill a line with a hatch pattern

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Interior Fill, and then click Hatch. The Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Hatch [image] to display the hatch fill panel, if necessary.

4	Click the hatch pattern you want.

6	To change the foreground color, click Foreground, and then click the color you want.

7	To change the background color, click Background, and then click the color you want.

8	Click Apply. The object redraws with the new hatch pattern and colors.

Tips

As a shortcut, double-click a hatch pattern to apply it to the selection.

To see the effect of a hatch fill on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also choose a hatch fill by clicking Hatch Line Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.

After applying a hatch fill to a line, you can change its foreground and background colors using the Color Palette. To choose another foreground color, select the object and click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another background color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and click a color in the Color Palette.


Applying Hatch Line Fills

Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box


Applying Image Line Fills

You can fill lines with bitmap image patterns.

Designer provides a broad range of predefined image patterns, but you are not limited to these patterns. You can add any bitmap image to Designer's gallery of images and fill a line with that pattern.

The process of applying an image line fill is identical to that of applying an image interior fill, except that the fill applies to an object's lines instead of its interior. For more information on image fills, see Adding Image Patterns to Objects and Creating Custom Image Fills.

Tip

Image line fills are useful primarily for thick lines.


To fill a line with an image pattern


Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Color

Applying Gradient Line Fills

Applying Hatch Line Fills

Applying Object Line Fills


To fill a line with an image pattern

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Line Fill, and then click Image. The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Image [image] to display the image fill panel, if necessary.

4	Choose an image category using the list box at the top of the tab.

5	Click the image fill that you want.

6	To change the image scale, type the desired value in the Scale spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Click Apply.

Tips

As a shortcut, double-click an image pattern to apply it to the selection.

You can also choose an image line fill by clicking Image Line Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.


Applying Image Line Fills

Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box


Applying Object Line Fills

You can fill a line with a pattern made of other objects.

You can choose from a broad range of predefined object fills, or define a custom object fill. You can also edit an object fill, changing how the objects in the fill are arranged, flipped, rotated, sized, and colored. Custom and edited object fills can be added to the object fill gallery.

The process of applying an object line fill is identical to that of applying an object interior fill, except that the fill applies to an object's lines instead of its interior. For more information on object fills, see Filling an Object with Other Objects, Creating Custom Object Fills, and Editing Object Fills.

Tip

Object line fills are useful primarily for thick lines.


To fill a line with an object fill


Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box

Setting Line Color

Applying Gradient Line Fills

Applying Hatch Line Fills

Applying Image Line Fills


To fill a line with an object fill

1	Select the object.

2	On the Format menu, point to Line Fill, and then click Object. The Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box opens.

3	Click Object [image] to display the object fill panel, if necessary.

4	Choose an object category using the list box at the top of the tab.

5	Click the object fill that you want.

6	Click Apply.

Tips

As a shortcut, double-click an object fill to apply it to the selection.

To see the effect of the new object fill on the selection, click Preview. You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.

You can also choose an object fill by clicking Object Line Fill [image] on the Format ribbon.

If the object fill is all one color (monochrome), you can change the foreground and background colors after applying the fill to a line. To choose another foreground color, select the object and right-click a color in the Color Palette. To choose another background color, select the object, hold down SHIFT, and right-click a color in the Color Palette.


Applying Object Line Fills

Using the Line Fill Tab of the Object Format Dialog Box


MASKING.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Creating a Mask

Masking lets you use the shape of one object to determine what parts of another object or bitmap image are displayed. The masking object, known as the mask, acts like a stencil. Only those parts of the masked object (or bitmap image) that appear within the mask can be seen.

Masked Object	Mask	After Masking
You can use any closed object, except an extruded object, as a mask. To use an extruded object as a mask, you must convert it to curves. If you use text as a mask, then Designer puts the masked object within each letter. To make the masked object appear as shown above (within all letters), convert the text to curves and combine the resulting objects with Connect Closed.

You can use multiple objects as a mask if you first combine them with Connect Closed.

For information on using Connect Closed, see Connect Closed. For more information using multiple objects as a mask, see Filling Several Objects with a Continuous Fill.


To create a mask

To copy the contents of a mask

To move the contents of a mask

To remove the contents of a mask


Editing a Mask

Connect Closed

Filling Several Objects with a Continuous Fill


To create a mask

1	Select the object (or bitmap image) that you want to show through the mask.

2	Copy or Cut the selection to the Clipboard.

3	Select the object that you want to use as the mask.

4	On the Object menu, point to Masking, and then click Paste Inside. A blue border appears showing the position within the mask of the object to be masked. A moment later a blue outline of the object to be masked appears.

5	Drag the blue outline to position the masked object within the mask.

6	Release the mouse button. After a moment, the masked object's outline reappears.

7	Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the masked object is positioned properly.

8	Double-click or press ESC to create the mask.

Note

If you are using an object for the mask contents, then the outline (steps 4 and 6) shows the shape of the object. If you are using a bitmap image for the mask contents, then the outline (steps 4 and 6) shows the outside edge of the bitmap image with an X in it.


Creating a Mask

Editing a Mask


Editing a Mask

After creating a mask, you can perform the following editing actions on the mask contents.

You can copy the contents of the mask for pasting elsewhere.

You can move the contents of the mask to change its visible parts.

You can remove the contents of the mask.

Resizing a mask resizes the contents of the mask. Rotating, skewing, flipping, or warping a mask rotates, skews, flips, or warps the contents of the mask.

You can change the shape of a mask by reshaping it.


To copy the contents of a mask

To move the contents of a mask

To remove the contents of a mask

To create a mask


Creating a Mask


To copy the contents of a mask

1	Select the mask.

2	On the Object menu, point to Masking, and then click Copy Contents. The masked object or bitmap image is copied to the Clipboard.

Note

Copy Contents copies the entire masked object or bitmap image to the Clipboard, not just the visible parts.


Editing a Mask

Creating a Mask


To move the contents of a mask

1	Select the mask.

2	On the Object menu, point to Masking, and then click Move Contents. A blue border appears. A moment later, a blue outline of the masked object appears within the border.

3	Drag the blue outline to move the masked object within the mask.

4	Release the mouse button. After a moment, the masked object's outline reappears.

5	Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the masked object is positioned properly.

6	Double-click or press ESC to accept the move action.

Note

If you are using an object for the mask contents, then the outline (steps 2 and 4) shows the shape of the object. If you are using a bitmap image for the mask contents, then the outline (steps 2 and 4) shows the outside edge of the bitmap image with an X in it.


To remove the contents of a mask

1	Select the mask.

2	On the Object menu, point to Masking, and then click Remove Contents. The masked object or bitmap image is deleted from the mask, copied to the Clipboard, and pasted into the drawing for editing.


STYLES.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Setting Default Attributes

The attributes applied to new objects and text is determined by your default attribute settings. Your default attribute settings are stored in your profile.

You can change your default attribute settings in several ways.

To change the default setting for a specific attribute, deselect all objects and text, and then choose the setting you want. Because there is no selection, the new setting becomes the default setting for that attribute. For example, to change the default color fill setting, deselect all objects, and then click the color you want in the Color Palette. To change the default font setting, make sure you are not in text edit mode, deselect all text, and then choose the font you want in the Font box on the Text ribbon.

To change your default settings to those of a selection, use the Set Default Format command on the Format menu. Set Default Format makes your default attribute settings match the attribute settings of a selected object or text block.

The status bar shows your default line and interior fill settings when no object is selected. The Font list box and the Font Size box on the Text ribbon show your default font and font size when no text block is selected.


To set default attributes based on an object

To copy attributes from one object to another


Picking Up and Applying Attributes

Using Named Styles


To set default attributes based on an object

1	Select the object with the style attributes you want as your defaults.

2	On the Format menu, click Set Default Format. The default attributes are changed to match the selection.

Tip

Don't forget that you can also use this command to make the default text attributes match a selected text block.


Setting Default Attributes

Picking Up and Applying Attributes


Picking Up and Applying Attributes

The Pick Up Object Format and Apply Object Format commands on the Format menu give you an easy way to copy attributes from one object to another.

The following attributes are copied and applied by these commands:

Line style (whether a line is invisible, solid, dotted, or dashed)

Line ends (for open objects)

Line weight (the point size or thickness of a line)

Line fill (color, gradient, hatch, image, or object)

Interior fill (color, gradient, hatch, image, or object)

Mask contents

Text attributes (font, size, leading, attributes, color, tabs and indents, justification, hyphenation, word and paragraph spacing, and drop caps)

Extrusion lighting effects (position, intensity, color, ambience, and reflectivity, but not resolution)

Notes

You cannot pick up the format of selected objects with different attributes.

Extrusion lighting attributes apply only to extruded objects. Picking up attributes from an extruded object and applying them to a non-extruded object does not extrude that object, but it does apply the extruded object's line and fill attributes to the non-extruded object.

The Pick Up Object Format and Apply Object Format commands do not copy any properties you have assigned to an object, such as name or category. For information on picking up and applying object properties, see Picking Up and Applying Object Properties.


To copy attributes from one object to another

To set default attributes based on an object


Setting Default Attributes

Using Named Styles


To copy attributes from one object to another

1	Select the object with the attributes you want to copy.

2	On the Format menu, click Pick Up Object Format.

3	Select the object to which you want to apply the attributes.

4	On the Format menu, click Apply Object Format. The attributes copied from the first object are applied to the second object.

Tips

Picking up and applying attributes is an easy and quick way to ensure that the attributes of two objects match exactly.

Don't forget that you can also copy text attributes from one block of text to another with these commands.


Picking Up and Applying Attributes

Setting Default Attributes


Using Named Styles

Although you can draw objects and set their attributes individually, you can generally save time and effort by using named styles. A named style is a specific combination of object and text attributes that you have given a name. After naming a style, you can assign those attributes to another object by just applying the named style to it.

The following attributes can be assigned to a named style:

Line style (whether a line is invisible, solid, dotted, or dashed)

Line ends (for open objects)

Line weight (the point size or thickness of a line)

Line fill (color, gradient, hatch, image, or object)

Interior fill (color, gradient, hatch, image, or object)

Mask contents

Text attributes (font, size, leading, attributes, color, tabs and indents, justification, hyphenation, word and paragraph spacing, and drop caps)

Object properties

Named styles are created, modified, applied, and removed using the Style toolbar.


Creating Named Styles

Applying Named Styles

Modifying Named Styles

Importing Named Styles


Creating Named Styles

You can create named styles in several ways:

You can format an object with the attributes you want and then name those attributes. This is generally the easiest way to create a named style, because it lets you base the style on what you see.

You can specify a new style name and assign it attributes.

You can assign the current defaults to a style name.

For any named style, you can exclude certain categories of attributes. For example, you can exclude line attributes if you do not want the style to set line attributes; or you can exclude text attributes if you do not intend to apply the style to text blocks.


To create a named style based on an object

To create a named style by definition

To create a named style based on defaults


Using Named Styles

Applying Named Styles

Modifying Named Styles

Importing Named Styles


To create a named style based on an object

1	Format an object (or text block) with the attributes that you want.

2	Select the object.

3	Click Add Style [image] on the Style toolbar. The Style dialog box opens with the words New Style highlighted.

4	Type a style name and press ENTER.

or

Press ESC to cancel the style definition.

Tips

Display the Style toolbar using the Toolbars command on the View menu or Show Styles Toolbar [image] on the Format ribbon, if necessary.

Deselect Fill Style, Line Style, Text Style, or Properties to exclude these from the style definition.


Creating Named Styles


To create a named style by definition

1	Click Style Options [image] on the Style toolbar. The Style dialog box opens.

2	Click Add. The words New Style appear in the name list box.

3	Type a style name and press ENTER.

4	Click the Fill Style button to assign an interior fill to the style.

or

Deselect Fill Style if you do not want the style to include interior fill.

5	Click the Line Style button to assign line attributes to the style.

or

Deselect Line Style if you do not want the style to include line attributes.

6	Click the Text Style button to assign text attributes to the style.

or

Deselect Text Style if you do not want the style to include text attributes.

7	Click the Properties button to assign properties to the style.

or

Deselect Properties if you do not want the style to include properties.

Tips

Display the Style toolbar using the Toolbars command on the View menu or Show Styles Toolbar [image] on the Format ribbon, if necessary.

Watch the preview box for an example of the style.

The Properties button is unavailable when no properties are defined for a document.


To create a named style based on defaults

1	Deselect all objects.

2	Click Add Style [image] on the Style toolbar. The Style dialog box opens with the word New Style highlighted.

3	Type a style name and press ENTER. The new style is assigned the default settings.

Tips

Display the Style toolbar using the Toolbars command on the View menu or Show Styles Toolbar [image] on the Format ribbon, if necessary.

Deselect Fill Style, Line Style, Text Style, or Properties to exclude these from the style definition.


Applying Named Styles

After defining a named style, you can apply it to any object or text block.

When you define a named style, you can exclude certain attributes. For example, you can exclude line attributes. If you apply a named style which excludes line attributes to an object, then the object retains its original line attributes.

If you apply a named style to a selection of multiple objects, then all objects in the selection receive the style attributes. If you apply a named style to an object group, then all objects in the group receive the style attributes.


To apply a named style to an object


Using Named Styles

Creating Named Styles

Modifying Named Styles

Importing Named Styles


To apply a named style to an object

1	Select the object.

2	Expand the list box on the Style toolbar by clicking the arrow beside the box.

3	Point to a named style and click. Watch the preview box to ensure that you have the named style that you want.

4	The attributes of the named style are applied to the selection.

Tips

If the named style that you want to apply to an object is already shown in the style list box, just click Apply Style [image].

Display the Style toolbar using the Toolbars command on the View menu or Show Styles Toolbar [image] on the Format ribbon, if necessary.


Applying Named Styles


Modifying Named Styles

After creating a named style, you can modify its definition. For example, you can change a named style's interior fill or line weight.

When you modify a named style, you change the style's definition, but you do not change the attributes of any objects to which you have applied the style. After modifying a style's definition, you must reapply the named style to an object to make that object match the new style definition.

You can also delete named styles. Deleting a named style does not change the attributes of any object to which you have applied the style.


To modify a named style

To delete a named style


Using Named Styles

Creating Named Styles

Applying Named Styles

Importing Named Styles


To modiify a named style
To modify a named style

1	Click Style Options [image] on the Style toolbar. The Style dialog box opens.

2	Click the name of the style you want to modify. The preview box shows an example of the style.

3	Click the Fill Style button to change the style's interior fill.

or

Deselect Fill Style if you do not want the style to include interior fill.

4	Click the Line Style button to change the style's line attributes.

or

Deselect Line Style if you do not want the style to include line attributes.

5	Click the Text Style button to change the style's text attributes.

or

Deselect Text Style if you do not want the style to include text attributes.

6	Click the Properties button to assign properties to the style.

or

Deselect Properties if you do not want the style to include properties.

Note

Changing a named style's definition does not change any objects to which you have assigned the style. To make those objects match the new style definition, reapply the style to the objects.

Tips

Display the Style toolbar using the Toolbars command on the View menu or Show Styles Toolbar [image] on the Format ribbon, if necessary.

The Properties button is unavailable when no properties are defined for a document.


Modifying Named Styles


To delete a named style

1	Click Style Options [image] on the Style toolbar. The Style dialog box opens.

2	Click the name of the style you want to delete. The preview box shows an example of the style.

3	Click Delete.

Tip

Display the Style toolbar using the Toolbars command on the View menu or Show Styles Toolbar [image] on the Format ribbon, if necessary.


Importing Named Styles

Named styles are saved with the document in which they are created. To use a named style with a different document, you can import it. Importing a named style into a different document creates a copy of the imported style in the document.

The Import button on the Style dialog box lets you import a named style from any open document or from any Designer 7 DSF file.


To import a named style from another open document

To import a named style from a file


Using Named Styles

Creating Named Styles

Applying Named Styles

Modifying Named Styles


To import a named style from another open document

1	Click Style Options [image] on the Style toolbar. The Style dialog box opens.

2	Click Import. The Import Styles dialog box opens. The current document's named styles appear in the large box at the top right of the dialog box.

3	Choose the open document using the Styles From list box. The document's named styles appear in the large box at the top left of the dialog box.

4	Click the name of the style that you want to import. An example of the style appears in the preview box.

5	Click Copy to copy the named style to the current document.

Tip

Display the Style toolbar using the Toolbars command on the View menu or Show Styles Toolbar [image] on the Format ribbon, if necessary.


Importing Named Styles


To import a named style from a file

1	Click Style Options [image] on the Style toolbar. The Style dialog box opens.

2	Click Import. The Import Styles dialog box opens. The current document's named styles appear in the large box at the top right of the dialog box.

3	Click Open File. The Open dialog box opens.

4	Locate the file that you want to import from and click Open. The file's named styles appear in the large box at the top left of the dialog box.

5	Click the name of the style that you want to import. An example of the style appears in the preview box.

6	Click Copy to copy the named style to the current document.

Tip

Display the Style toolbar using the Toolbars command on the View menu or Show Styles Toolbar [image] on the Format ribbon, if necessary.


UNITS.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Using Units of Measure

The measurement units in Designer are extremely flexible and can be set separately for every function. For example, you can specify different measurement units for rulers, page size, coordinates, line weight, and dimension lines. The current units setting for a function appears on the Units button [image] in the dialog box (or ribbon) for that function. For example, if the measurement unit for page size is centimeters, the Units button in the Page Setup dialog box reads "cm."

When specifying the measurement units, you can choose from a set of standard units, another set of predefined units, or create your own custom units. You can also set a scale to relate one unit of measure to another.

The units settings that you use with a drawing are saved with the drawing so that you do not have to reset them each time you open the file.

Standard Units

Units can be linear (to measure length) or radial (to measure angles). Linear units are used to measure spatial distances. Radial units are used to measure angular orientation or direction.

The standard linear units are inches, centimeters, millimeters, points, picas, picas and points, and ciceros. The standard radial units are degrees and radians.

Predefined Units

The predefined units include feet, feet and inches, kilometers, meters, miles, weeks and days, yards, and yards and feet.


To change the units setting for the page size

To set the default units for a drawing

To define a scale using the Custom Units dialog box

To define a scale using the Scale Drawing Wizard

To apply a scale unit to a dimension line


Changing a Units Setting

Defining Scale Units

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Defining Unscaled Units

Updating Unit Settings

Deleting a Defined Unit


Changing a Units Setting

The currently selected units setting for a function appears on the Units button [image] for that function. To change the units setting, click the Units button, and choose the desired units.


To change the units setting for the page size

To set the default units for a drawing


Using Units of Measure

Defining Scale Units

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Defining Unscaled Units

Updating Unit Settings

Deleting a Defined Unit


To change the units setting for the page size

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box opens.

2	Click the Paper Size tab.

3	Click the Units button [image] (marked with an abbreviation for a standard unit, such as "in" or "cm"). A menu opens.

4	Choose the desired units setting from the menu.

or

Click More Units and choose a setting in the Available Units dialog box.

5	The Units button changes to reflect the new setting, and the Width and Height boxes show the page size in the new units.

Tips

To change the units setting for any function, click the Units button for that function.

To change the default units setting for a drawing, use the Rulers tab of the Options dialog box.


Using Units of Measure

Changing a Units Setting


To set the default units for a drawing

1	On the Tools menu, click Options. The Options dialog box appears.

2	Click the Rulers tab.

3	Click the Units button for the ruler you want to change. The units menu appears.

4	Click the units you want, or click More Units to choose from the Available Units dialog box.

The selected units setting becomes the default units setting for the current drawing.

Tip

The default units setting is marked with an asterisk (*) in the Available Units dialog box.


Defining Scale Units

A scale unit is a ratio of one unit of measure to another. Using scale units lets you create drawings which are proportional to the item being drawing. These types of drawings are called scale drawings. For example, you could define a scale of 10 feet per inch and draw a landscape at that scale.

To show scale distances in a drawing, use dimension lines with the dimension units set to the scale units. In the following example, the dimension units are set to 5 meters per centimeter.

You can define scale units using the Custom Units dialog box or the Scale Drawing Wizard.

After defining a new scale unit, you can add it to your current profile or just save it to the current drawing. If you add it to your profile, the scale units are available for other drawings. New units that have been saved to a profile are designated by a plus sign in front of the unit's name in the Available Units dialog box. The current default unit is designated by an asterisk (*) in from of the unit's name in the Available Units dialog box. A dash (-) in front of a unit's name means that the unit is an unchangeable, true physical unit (for example, "-inch (in)" means that 1 inch in a drawing equals 1 inch when printed to paper.)


To define a scale using the Custom Units dialog box

To define a scale using the Scale Drawing Wizard

To apply a scale unit to a dimension line


Using Units of Measure

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Changing a Units Setting

Defining Unscaled Units

Updating Unit Settings

Deleting a Defined Unit

Using Dimension Lines


To define a scale using the Custom Units dialog box

This procedure illustrates the use of the Custom Units dialog box to define a scale of 5 meters per centimeter.

1	On the Tools menu, click Custom Units. The Custom Units dialog box opens.

2	Type METERS (SCALE 5) in the Units Name box. Adding SCALE 5 to the name makes it easy to identify the scale in the units list.

3	Under Primary Unit, type 5 in the Scale spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

4	Under Primary Unit, type m in the Label box.

5	Under Primary Unit, click the arrow beside the base unit list box, and choose centimeters.

6	Click Clear to clear the Secondary Unit definition.

7	Click Save to Drawing to save the scale to the current drawing. If you also want to save the scale to the current profile, click Save to Profile. Your scale (with abbreviated label) appears in the list of Defined Units.

Tips

The unit you entered above only defines a primary unit. If needed, you also can specify a secondary unit. Yards and feet, feet and inches, and weeks and days are all examples of definitions with primary and secondary units.

To make the scale the ruler unit and the default unit for the drawing, click Make Default.

To delete a scale, select the scale in the Defined Units list box, and click Delete.


Using Units of Measure

Defining Scale Units

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Defining Unscaled Units


To apply a scale unit to a dimension line

1	Select the dimension line.

2	Click Dimension/Callout [image] in the Toolbox.

3	On the Ribbon toolbar, click Units [image]. A menu opens.

4	Click More Units. The Available Units dialog box opens.

5	Choose the scale units you want to use.

6	Click OK. The scale units are applied to the dimension line.

Tip

You can also set the units of a dimension line using the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.


Using Units of Measure

Defining Scale Units

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Defining Unscaled Units

Setting Dimension Precision and Units


Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

The Scale Drawing Wizard makes defining a scale easy. You simply respond to the questions asked by the wizard, which creates the scale for you automatically, based on your answers.

The Scale Drawing Wizard includes instructions explaining its use and lets you cancel its operation at any time.

Scales defined with the Scale Drawing Wizard are automatically applied to the rulers and saved to the current drawing. If you want to save the scale to your profile so that it is permanently available as an option, you can do so using the Custom Units dialog box.


To define a scale using the Scale Drawing Wizard

To define a scale using the Custom Units dialog box

To apply a scale unit to a dimension line


Using Units of Measure

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Defining Scale Units


To define a scale using the Scale Drawing Wizard

This procedure illustrates the use of the Scale Drawing Wizard to define a scale of 50 meters per centimeter.

1	On the File menu, click Scale Setup. The Scale Drawing Wizard dialog box opens.

2	Click Metric to choose the Metric measurement system.

3	Click Next. The Set Up Metric Scale screen appears.

4	Choose Centimeter in the Base Unit list box.

5	Type 50 in the One Base Unit Equals spin box.

6	Type m (for meters) in the Unit Label box.

7	Click Next. The Select Drawing to Apply Scale To screen appears.

8	Click Current Drawing to apply the new scale to the current drawing.

9	Click Finish. The 50 meters to a centimeter scale is created. If the rulers are showing, they reflect the new scale.

Tips

Scales that you create using the Scale Drawing Wizard are added to the list of defined units in the Custom Units dialog box. For example, the scale defined above is shown as SCALE: 1:50.00 m (m).

To change your answer to a question on a previous screen, click Back.

You can also apply a scale to a drawing using the Make Defaults button on the Custom Units dialog box.


Using Units of Measure

Defining Scale Units

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard


Defining Unscaled Units

Besides defining scaled units, the Custom Units dialog box lets you define new unscaled units of measure. The procedure for defining unscaled units is identical to that for defining scaled units, except that you do not specify a scale ratio when you define the unit. Instead, you specify an accurate conversion ratio for the unit, such as 1000 meters per kilometer.


To define a scale using the Custom Units dialog box


Using Units of Measure

Changing a Units Setting

Defining Scale Units

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Updating Unit Settings

Deleting a Defined Unit


Updating Unit Settings

Changing a unit's values in the Custom Units dialog box changes the unit's definition, but does not change the units setting for any functions to which you applied the original definition. This protects you against accidentally changing settings you do not want to change.

If, after changing a unit's definition, you want the new definition to apply to a function, reselect the unit setting for that function.

For example, suppose that the rulers are set to a custom scale unit called Meters (Scaled), which defines a scale of 5 meters per centimeter. Using the Custom Units dialog box, you change the definition of this scale to 10 meters per centimeter. The ruler unit settings do not change. If you want the rulers to use the new definition of Meters (Scaled), select that units setting again for the rulers using the Rulers tab of the Options dialog box. Reselecting Meters (Scaled) applies the new definition to the rulers.


Using Units of Measure

Changing a Units Setting

Defining Scale Units

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Defining Unscaled Units

Deleting a Defined Unit


Deleting a Defined Unit

You can delete a defined unit from the list of available units by selecting it in the Defined Units list box and clicking Delete. The defined unit is not deleted from other drawings using that unit. The deleted unit remains in use where you have applied it already, but you can not choose that unit for future uses.


Using Units of Measure

Changing a Units Setting

Defining Scale Units

Using the Scale Drawing Wizard

Defining Unscaled Units

Updating Unit Settings


Displaying Coordinates

Designer uses coordinates for precise drawing and positioning. You can display coordinates to reference the current mouse position, the origin and size of a selected object, the origin and endpoint of a selected object, or the orientation and rate of expansion during transformations. Coordinates can also be used to draw, move, or resize an object.

Coordinates are displayed on the status bar. When no object is selected, the status bar shows the coordinates of the mouse pointer. When an object is selected, the status bar shows the coordinates of the selected object. During a transformation such as manually resizing an object, the status bar shows the coordinates of the transformation.

You can set the type of coordinates displayed for a selected object with the Coordinates menu. To set the coordinates type, click Coordinates [image] on the status bar and choose one of the following.

Choose	To display

Width/Height	The object's origin, width, and height.

Length/Angle	The object's origin, length, and angle.

Range	The object's origin and end point.


To choose a coordinate system


Choosing a Coordinate System


Choosing a Coordinate System

Designer can use Cartesian (rectangular) or polar (radial) coordinates. In the polar coordinate system, you can express angles in degrees or radians.

Cartesian Coordinates

Cartesian coordinates use the familiar vertical and horizontal axes. The vertical axis is called Y, and the horizontal axis is called X.

The X and Y axes correspond closely to the rulers in the Designer window. The ruler origin is the intersection of the two axes, where X=0, Y=0. If the origin is set at the top left of a page, the values for X go from left to right, and the values for Y go from top to bottom, just like the rulers.

If you drag the ruler origin to the center of the page, the axes and rulers are repositioned with respect to the page.

Polar Coordinates

Polar coordinates use a different method to reference each point on the page. Instead of having two straight axes, polar coordinates measure the distance from the center and the angle from the axis.

The distance from the center is called R (for radius). R is measured in inches, centimeters, or some other linear unit of measure. Angles are called A and are measured in degrees or radians.

To find a point where R equals 3 and A equals 45 degrees, find 3 at zero degrees and then move along that circle until you reach 45 degrees.

Angles can be measured in either degrees or radians. Degrees and radians are both radial, rather than linear, units of measure. One radian is equal to approximately 57.3 degrees.

The zero degree point of the polar coordinate system corresponds to Designer's horizontal ruler. The ruler origin is the center of the polar coordinate model. If the origin is set at the top left of a page, the relationship of the system to the page is as shown in the following diagram.

If you drag the ruler origin to the center of the page, the rulers and system are repositioned with respect to the page.


To choose a coordinate system


Displaying Coordinates

Changing the Ruler Origin


To choose a coordinate system

1	Click Coordinates [image] on the status bar. A menu appears.

2	Click Cartesian, Polar (Radians), or Polar (Degrees). The coordinates in the status bar appear in the new system.


Choosing a Coordinate System

Displaying Coordinates


Drawing with Coordinates

Coordinates give you a method of drawing objects that is more precise than using the mouse. For example, using coordinates, you can draw a rectangle that is exactly 5 x 9 centimeters in size, and position it at the exact center of the page. This high level of accuracy ensures that you can use Designer for precision drawings of all types.

You can draw the following shapes with coordinates: lines, squares, rectangles, circles, and ellipses. For each shape, you can choose from a variety of drawing methods. The availability of different drawing methods ensures that you can specify the position and dimensions of an object in the most convenient and appropriate way.


Drawing Lines with Coordinates

Drawing Squares and Rectangles with Coordinates

Drawing Circles and Ellipses with Coordinates


Drawing Lines with Coordinates

You can use coordinates to create lines, or to modify the shape of existing lines. Drawing a line with coordinates is more precise than drawing with a mouse, because coordinates let you specify the line's position and length exactly.

The methods available for drawing lines are:

Method	Description

Points	Draws a line using points.

Length/Angle	Draws a line using the starting point of the line, the length of the line, and the angle (in polar coordinates) of the line.

Range	Draws a line using the starting and ending points of the line.

Width/Height	Draws a line using a starting point, the relation of the starting point to the bounding box, and the width and height of the bounding box of the line.


To draw a line with coordinates using the points method

To draw a line with coordinates using the length/angle method


Drawing with Coordinates

Drawing Squares and Rectangles with Coordinates

Drawing Circles and Ellipses with Coordinates


To draw a line with coordinates using the points method

1	On the Object menu, click Coordinates.

or

Click Coordinates [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Object Coordinates dialog box opens.

3	Click Create a New.

4	Choose Jointed Line in the list box at the top of the dialog box. This specifies the type of object to create.

5	Choose Points in the list box under Method. The controls for the points drawing method appear.

6	Type the X coordinate of the first point in the X spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Type the Y coordinate of the first point in the Y spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Click Append to add the point to the list of line points.

9	Type the X coordinate of the next point in the X spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Type the Y coordinate of the next point in the Y spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

11	Click Append to add the point to the list of line points.

12	Repeat steps 9 through 11 to add additional points to the line.

13	Click Create. Designer draws the line as specified.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Coordinates dialog box is CTRL+Q.

To delete a point, click the point's number in the list, and then click Delete.

To replace a point, click the point's number in the list, type the new X and Y values for the point, and then click Replace.


Drawing Lines with Coordinates

Drawing with Coordinates


To draw a line with coordinates using the length/angle method

1	On the Object menu, click Coordinates.

or

Click Coordinates [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Object Coordinates dialog box opens.

3	Click Create a New.

4	Choose Jointed Line in the list box at the top of the dialog box. This specifies the type of object to create.

5	Choose Length/Angle in the list box under Method. The controls for the length/angle drawing method appear.

6	Type the X coordinate of the starting point of the line in the X spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Type the Y coordinate of the starting point of the line in the Y spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the length of the line in the Length spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the angle of the line (relative to the X axis) in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Click Create. Designer draws the line as specified.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Coordinates dialog box is CTRL+Q.

Click Units [image] to choose a different units setting for the coordinates.


Drawing Squares and Rectangles with Coordinates

You can use coordinates to create squares and rectangles or to modify the shape of existing rectangular objects (a square is a rectangle with equal sides). Drawing a rectangle with coordinates is more precise than drawing with a mouse, because coordinates let you specify the rectangle's position and dimensions exactly.

The methods available for drawing squares and rectangles are:

Method	Description

Square	Draws a square using the upper left corner of the bounding box of the square and the length of a side.

Length/Angle	Draws a rectangle or square using the upper left corner of the bounding box of the object, the length of a diagonal to the lower left corner of the bounding box, and the angle (in polar coordinates) of the diagonal.

Range	Draws a rectangle or square using the upper left and lower right corners of the bounding box of the object.

Width/Height	Draws a rectangle or square using a starting point, the relation of the starting point to the bounding box, and the width and height of the bounding box of the object.


To draw a square with coordinates using the square method

To draw a rectangle with coordinates using the width/height method

To draw a rectangle with coordinates using the range method


Drawing with Coordinates

Drawing Lines with Coordinates

Drawing Circles and Ellipses with Coordinates


To draw a square with coordinates using the square method

1	On the Object menu, click Coordinates.

or

Click Coordinates [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Object Coordinates dialog box opens.

3	Click Create a New.

4	Choose Square in the list box at the top of the dialog box. This specifies the type of object to create.

5	Choose Square in the list box under Method. The controls for the square drawing method appear.

6	Type the X coordinate of the center point in the X spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Type the Y coordinate of the center point in the Y spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the length of a side in the Side spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the angle of the top side (relative to the X axis) in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Click Create. Designer draws the square as specified.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Coordinates dialog box is CTRL+Q.

Click Units [image] to choose a different units setting for the coordinates.


Drawing Squares and Rectangles with Coordinates

Drawing with Coordinates


To draw a rectangle with coordinates using the width/height method

1	On the Object menu, click Coordinates.

or

Click Coordinates [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Object Coordinates dialog box opens.

3	Click Create a New.

4	Choose Rectangle in the list box at the top of the dialog box. This specifies the type of object to create.

5	Choose Width/Height in the list box under Method. The controls for the width/height drawing method appear.

6	Type the X coordinate of the starting point in the X spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Type the Y coordinate of the starting point in the Y spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Choose where the starting point appears on the bounding box of the rectangle using the From list box. For example, choose Bottom, Left Handle if you want the starting point to be the bottom left handle of the bounding box.

9	Type the width of the bounding box in the Width spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Type the height of the bounding box in the Height spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

11	Click Create. Designer draws the rectangle as specified.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Coordinates dialog box is CTRL+Q.

Click Units [image] to choose a different units setting for the coordinates.


To draw a rectangle with coordinates using the range method

1	On the Object menu, click Coordinates.

or

Click Coordinates [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Object Coordinates dialog box opens.

3	Click Create a New.

4	Choose Rectangle in the list box at the top of the dialog box. This specifies the type of object to create.

5	Choose Range in the list box under Method. The controls for the range drawing method appear.

6	Type the X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box in the X1 spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Type the Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box in the Y1 spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the X coordinate of the lower right corner of the bounding box in the X2 spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the Y coordinate of the lower right corner of the bounding box in the Y2 spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Click Create. Designer draws the rectangle as specified.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Coordinates dialog box is CTRL+Q.

Click Units [image] to choose a different units setting for the coordinates.


Drawing Circles and Ellipses with Coordinates

You can use coordinates to create circles and ellipses or to modify the shape of existing elliptical objects (a circle is an ellipse that is perfectly round). Drawing an ellipse with coordinates is more precise than drawing with a mouse, because coordinates let you specify the ellipse's position and dimensions exactly.

The methods available for drawing circles and ellipses are:

Method	Description

Circle	Draws a circle using a center point and radius.

Ellipse	Draws an ellipse or circle using a center point, the length of the major and minor axes of the object, and the angle (in polar coordinates) of the minor axis.

Length/Angle	Draws an ellipse or circle using the upper left corner of the bounding box of the object, the length of a diagonal to the lower left corner of the bounding box, and the angle (in polar coordinates) of the diagonal.

Range	Draws an ellipse or circle using the upper left and lower right corners of the bounding box of the object.

Width/Height	Draws an ellipse or circle using a starting point, the relation of the starting point to the bounding box, and the width and height of the bounding box of the object.


To draw a circle with coordinates using the circle method

To draw an ellipse with coordinates using the ellipse method

To draw an ellipse with coordinates using the length/angle method


Drawing with Coordinates

Drawing Lines with Coordinates

Drawing Squares and Rectangles with Coordinates


To draw a circle with coordinates using the circle method

1	On the Object menu, click Coordinates.

or

Click Coordinates [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Object Coordinates dialog box opens.

3	Click Create a New.

4	Choose Circle in the list box at the top of the dialog box. This specifies the type of object to create.

5	Choose Circle in the list box under Method. The controls for the circle drawing method appear.

6	Type the X coordinate of the center point in the X spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Type the Y coordinate of the center point in the Y spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the radius length in the Radius spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Click Create. Designer draws the circle as specified.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Coordinates dialog box is CTRL+Q.

Click Units [image] to choose a different units setting for the coordinates.


Drawing Circles and Ellipses with Coordinates

Drawing with Coordinates


To draw an ellipse with coordinates using the ellipse method

1	On the Object menu, click Coordinates.

or

Click Coordinates [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Object Coordinates dialog box opens.

3	Click Create a New.

4	Choose Ellipse in the list box at the top of the dialog box. This specifies the type of object to create.

5	Choose Ellipse in the list box under Method. The controls for the ellipse drawing method appear.

6	Type the X coordinate of the starting point in the X spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Type the Y coordinate of the starting point in the Y spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the major axis length in the Major spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the minor axis length in the Minor spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Type the angle of the minor axis (relative to the X axis) in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

11	Click Create. Designer draws the ellipse as specified.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Coordinates dialog box is CTRL+Q.

Click Units [image] to choose a different units setting for the coordinates.


To draw an ellipse with coordinates using the length/angle method

1	On the Object menu, click Coordinates.

or

Click Coordinates [image] on the Standard toolbar.

2	The Object Coordinates dialog box opens.

3	Click Create a New.

4	Choose Ellipse in the list box at the top of the dialog box. This specifies the type of object to create.

5	Choose Length/Angle in the list box under Method. The controls for the length/angle drawing method appear.

6	Type the X coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box in the X spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

7	Type the Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the bounding box in the Y spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

8	Type the length of the diagonal to the lower left corner of the bounding box in the Length spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

9	Type the angle of the diagonal (relative to the X axis) in the Angle spin box, or click the arrows beside the box to select a value.

10	Click Create. Designer draws the ellipse as specified.

Tips

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Coordinates dialog box is CTRL+Q.

Click Units [image] to choose a different units setting for the coordinates.


PROPERTY.DOC

Status: Done

Index: Done


Properties and Values

The properties feature of Designer lets you assign data to objects. Each data item you assign to an object is referred to as a property of the object. Designer provides a list of predefined properties from which you can choose. You can also define your own properties.

The predefined properties are:

Name

Commonly-used data such as Color, Cost, Description, Part Number, and Price

QuickSilver events (for information on defining QuickSilver events, see Defining QuickSilver Events)

Properties let you identify objects uniquely, as well as categorize objects in various ways. For example, assigning a Name to an object distinguishes it from another object that may be the same size and shape, whereas assigning the Color red to an object classifies it with other objects assigned that color, no matter what their shape.

Some examples of properties that might be used in an engineering drawing are shown below.

Property	Value

Name	Voltage Regulator

Cost	$1.75

Part Number	TL7770-5

Primary Source	United Semiconductors

Second Source	Hi-Tech Distributors

Notes

There is no correlation between properties such as Color and the visual appearance of an object.

In Designer 7, properties are document-specific, so listing properties (for example), lists only the properties defined for the current document. In earlier versions of Designer, properties were application-wide, so listing properties listed all properties defined for all open documents.


Naming (or Renaming) an Object

Assigning Values to Properties

Picking Up and Applying Object Properties

Getting Object Information

Listing Objects


Naming (or Renaming) an Object

Naming an object lets you identify an object. After assigning a name to an object, you can use it to select the object. For example, you can select all objects that have names beginning with an A. You can also create lists of object names that you can print, save to a file, and copy to the Clipboard.

For information on selecting objects based upon their names, see Selecting Objects by Property.

Note

In versions of Designer prior to 6.0, the Name property is called the Symbol ID property.


To name an object


Properties and Values

Assigning Values to Properties

Picking Up and Applying Object Properties

Getting Object Information

Listing Objects


To name an object

1	Select the object.

2	On the Objects menu, click Properties. The Object Properties dialog box opens.

3	Type a name in the Object Name box.

4	Click Close.

Tips

If an object already has a name, it appears in the Object Name box. To change the name, highlight it and type over it.

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Properties dialog box is F12.

You can also name an object using the Properties toolbar.


Naming (or Renaming) an Object


Assigning Values to Properties

If other properties (besides Name) have been created for a document, you can select an object, choose one of its properties, and then assign a new value to that property or find out what value has already been assigned.

After you have used the Properties dialog box to create the properties you want to use, you can access them quickly using the Properties toolbar or the Object Properties dialog box.


To assign a value to a predefined property

To assign a value to a new property

To delete a property


Properties and Values

Naming (or Renaming) an Object

Picking Up and Applying Object Properties

Getting Object Information

Listing Objects


To assign a value to a predefined property

1	Select the object.

2	On the Objects menu, click Properties. The Object Properties dialog box opens.

3	Click Fields. The Property Fields dialog box opens.

4	Select the check box for the predefined property that you want.

5	Click OK. The Property Fields dialog box closes and the selected property appears in the Field column of the Object Properties dialog box.

6	Click the Value column opposite the property name. A text box appears.

7	Type the property value and press ENTER.

8	Click Close.

Note

Although the Edit button lets you change a field name, such changes are not saved when you close the Object Properties dialog box. If you want to change a field name, add a new field with the name that you want, and then delete the old field name.

Tips

To change a property's value, click the value to highlight it, and then typing the new value.

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Properties dialog box is F12.

You can also assign properties and values using the Properties toolbar.


Assigning Values to Properties


To assign a value to a new property

1	Select the object.

2	On the Objects menu, click Properties. The Object Properties dialog box opens.

3	Click Add. A text box with the words New Field appears in the Field column.

4	Type a new property (for example, Date) and press ENTER. A text box appears in the Value column opposite the new property.

5	Type the property value (for example, 01/01/1997) and press ENTER.

6	Click Close.

Note

Although the Edit button lets you change a field name, such changes are not saved when you close the Object Properties dialog box. If you want to change a field name, add a new field with the name that you want, and then delete the old field name.

Tips

To change a property's value, click the value to highlight it, and then typing the new value.

The keyboard shortcut for opening the Object Properties dialog box is F12.

You can also assign properties and values using the Properties toolbar.


To delete a property

1	Select the object.

2	On the Objects menu, click Properties. The Object Properties dialog box opens.

3	Click the property that you want to delete.

4	Click Delete.

5	You are asked to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to delete the property. Click No to cancel the deletion.

Note

Although the Edit button lets you change a field name, such changes are not saved when you close the Object Properties dialog box. If you want to change a field name, add a new field with the name that you want, and then delete the old field name.

Tip

To clear the value of a property, select the property and click Clear. To clear the value of all properties, click Clear All.


Picking Up and Applying Object Properties

The Pick Up Object Properties and Apply Object Properties commands on the Object menu give you an easy way to copy object properties and QuickSilver events from one object to another.

Note

The Pick Up Object Properties and Apply Object Properties commands do not copy attributes assigned to an object, such as interior fill color or line weight. For information on picking up and applying object attributes, see Picking Up and Applying Attributes.


To copy properties from one object to another


Properties and Values

Naming (or Renaming) an Object

Assigning Values to Properties

Getting Object Information

Listing Objects


To copy properties from one object to another

1	Select the object with the properties you want to copy.

2	On the Object menu, click Pick Up Object Properties.

3	Select the object to which you want to apply the properties.

4	On the Object menu, click Apply Object Property. The properties copied from the first object are applied to the second object.

Tip

Copying properties is a good way to ensure that the QuickSilver events of two objects match exactly.


Picking Up and Applying Object Properties


Getting Object Information

Designer gives you two ways to access object properties and their values. The quick way is to display the Property toolbar. The other way is to open the Object Properties dialog box.


To show the Property toolbar


Properties and Values

Naming (or Renaming) an Object

Assigning Values to Properties

Picking Up and Applying Object Properties

Listing Objects


To show the Property toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars. The Toolbars dialog box opens.

2	Select the Property check box.

3	Click OK.

Tips

The Property toolbar shows two boxes, a name box and a value box. To choose a property in the name box, click the arrow to the right of the box. The value of the selected property, if any, appears in the value box.

To display a shortcut menu that lets you show or hide any toolbar, click any toolbar with the right mouse button.


Getting Object Information


Listing Objects

You can create a list of objects in your drawing. This lets you create a named parts list of all the pieces of your drawing, plus a list of other defined properties. Clip art files are a good example of files with named objects.

The List command on the Objects menu opens the Objects Properties List dialog box, which alphabetically lists the names and properties of objects.

If no objects are selected, the list contains the names for all the objects in the document; if any objects are selected, the list contains only those objects. Objects without names are listed as "unnamed."

Heading and Column Titles

You can change the heading and column titles used when the list is copied or printed.

Click Options, and the List Options dialog box opens. You can then enter different titles for the Output Heading, Name Column, and Quantity Column.

Copying Object Lists

Click Copy to copy the object list to the Clipboard. The list remains in the Clipboard after you close the List Objects dialog box. You can paste the data into the drawing area or into any Windows-compatible program.

The list is copied to the Clipboard in symbolic link format (SYLK), comma-separated format (CSV), data interchange format (DIF), and space delimited text format, which can be easily pasted into spreadsheets such as Excel.

Printing Object Lists

Click Print to print the object list.

Saving an Object List

Click Save As to save the object list as a file. Save the list as a TXT file, the default, to use in a word processor. Save the list as a DIF or SLK file to use in compatible applications, such as a spreadsheet or database program.


To list objects


Properties and Values

Naming (or Renaming) an Object

Assigning Values to Properties

Picking Up and Applying Object Properties

Getting Object Information


To list objects

1	Select the objects you want to list.

or

Deselect all objects to list all objects.

2	On the Object menu, click List. The Object Properties List dialog box opens.

Tip

Click Copy to copy the list to the Clipboard. Click Print to print the list. Click Save As to save the list as a file. Click Options to change the list titles.


Listing Objects


Micrografx QuickSilver

Micrografx QuickSilver is a plug-in that gives Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer the capability to display Designer-created vector graphics on the Web. Besides the numerous advantages that vector graphics have over the bitmap images used on most Web pages, vector objects are smaller and can be interactive.

Benefits of Using Designer Objects on Web Pages

Fast downloading. You do not have to limit the graphics on your Web pages to minimize the download time.

Enlarge or shrink objects without losing image quality.

The "hot" area of a Designer object conforms to the object's shape. You are not limited to predefined hotspot shapes such as rectangles and circles.

You can update the Designer objects on your Web pages in real time, on an object-by-object basis. Your users do not have to wait while the browser reloads the entire page.

For More Information

For more information on Micrografx QuickSilver, including download information, consult our Web site at www.micrografx.com.


QuickSilver Events

QuickSilver Verbs

More about QuickSilver Verbs

Using the urllink Property

Defining QuickSilver Events

Using the Document Audit Wizard

Saving QuickSilver Files

Estimating File Download Times

Adding Objects to Web Pages

Previewing QuickSilver Files


QuickSilver Events

There are six user-initiated events that an object can detect in QuickSilver. These events are listed below.

Event Name	Event Occurs When

OnDoubleClick	The user double-clicks the object with the left mouse button.

OnMouseEnter	The user moves the mouse pointer over the object.

OnMouseLeave	The user moves the pointer away from the object.

OnMouseDown	The user presses the left mouse button while over the object.

OnMouseUp	The user releases the left mouse button while over the object.

OnLoad	The browser loads the page containing the object.


Micrografx QuickSilver

QuickSilver Verbs

More about QuickSilver Verbs

Using the urllink Property

Defining QuickSilver Events


QuickSilver Verbs

The command verbs (actions) that can be assigned to QuickSilver events are listed below. A verb's parameters, if any, are shown in italic.

Verb	Parameter	Example
Jump	localURL	Jump http://www.micrografx.com/
InPlaceJump	URL string	InPlaceJump http://www.xyz.com/logo.qsf
TargetJump	targetwindow localURL	TargetJump 1 http://www.xyz.com/logo.qsf
StatusLine	text	StatusLine Welcome to our Web site!
CursorShape	shape	CursorShape hand
ObjectColor	color	ObjectColor gold
ObjectText	text	ObjectText Thanks for visiting! Come again!
MoveOver	objectname	MoveOver red square
HideObject		HideObject
ShowObject		ShowObject
HideLayer	layernumber	HideLayer 3
ShowLayer	layernumber	ShowLayer 3
OnlyShowLayer	layernumber	OnlyShowLayer 3
SoftReload		SoftReload
ResetDrawing	drawingfilename	ResetDrawing logo.qsf
BringObjectToFront		BringObjectToFront
BringObjectForward		BringObjectForward
SendObjectToBack		SendObjectToBack
SendObjectBackward		SendObjectBackward
FlashObject	flashrate count	FlashObject 1000 5
EndFlashObject		EndFlashObject
SpinObjectCW	steptime steps revolutions	SpinObjectCW 1000 8 -1
SpinObjectCCW	steptime steps revolutions	SpinObjectCCW 500 4 12
EndSpinObject		EndSpinObject
RotateObject	angle	RotateObject 900
Redraw	transition	Redraw WipeLeft
RedrawAll	transition	RedrawAll DissolvePixels
Beep	beeprate count	Beep 100 1
EndBeep		EndBeep
HideAllChildren		HideAllChildren
ShowAllChildren		ShowAllChildren
CycleObject	elapsetime count	CycleObject 250 5
BuildObject	elapsetime count	BuildObject 1000 -1
EndAnimation
Note

In some early versions of QuickSilver, the command verbs ObjectColor, ObjectText, HideObject, and ShowObject were named SymbolColor, SymbolText, HideSymbol, and ShowSymbol. You should use only the newer verbs; future versions of QuickSilver might not support the older verbs.


Micrografx QuickSilver

QuickSilver Events

More about QuickSilver Verbs

Using the urllink Property

Defining QuickSilver Events


More about QuickSilver Verbs

Specifying the Target of a Command Verb

Command verbs that change the state of an object (changing an object's color or text for example) normally act on the object whose event triggered the verb. For example, the verb ObjectColor red sets the triggering object's color to red.

If you want the event to make a different object red, insert the modifier "as object-name" in front of the verb ("as" stands for AffectSymbol). This causes the event to act on the object whose Name property matches object-name. This syntax is illustrated below.

as Warning_Light ObjectColor red

The example above sets the object named Warning_Light to red (not the object whose event triggered the verb).

Group-Relative Object Naming

You can create named groups of objects where mouse events are detectable by the individual objects within the group.

For example, assume you have a group named Eye made up of the three objects named Pupil, Iris, and EyeWhite. If you want an event triggered by Pupil to affect EyeWhite, use the following syntax:

.EyeWhite ObjectColor red

The . (period) identifies EyeWhite as a group-relative name (an object within the triggering object's group).

To name an individual object in a different group, use the group name, a period, and the individual object name. This syntax is illustrated below.

Eye.EyeWhite ObjectColor red

This example sets the object named EyeWhite in the group Eye to red.

To hide or show all objects within a group, use the verbs HideAllChildren and ShowAllChildren.

Note

Group-relative naming is available only in version 2.0 and 3.0 of QuickSilver.

Passing Text to Objects

You can pass text from an HTML page to a QuickSilver object, enabling text objects to be defined dynamically. The text is passed using variables added to the <embed> tag, as illustrated below.

<embed src=page1.qsf width=100 height=100 txt="Product Information">

The txt variable, which is not a standard parameter of the <embed> tab, specifies the text to be passed. (You can use any variable name that is not a <embed> parameter.) Quotes are necessary if you want to preserve spaces in the text being passed.

To assign the embedded text to a QuickSilver object, use % and the variable name, as illustrated below.

ObjectText %txt

This causes the object's text value to be set to Product Information when the page1.qsf drawing is displayed by QuickSilver.


Micrografx QuickSilver

QuickSilver Events

QuickSilver Verbs

Using the urllink Property

Defining QuickSilver Events


Using the urllink Property

In a browser, pointing at a link changes the mouse pointer to a hand and displays the link's URL (Uniform Resource Locator) on the browser's status bar. If you click the link, the browser jumps to the URL. Moving the mouse pointer away from the link changes the pointer back to its normal shape.

The urllink property lets a QuickSilver object provide this same feedback.

To use the urllink property, assign it to the object and give it an URL value, as illustrated below. The urllink property must be all lowercase.

rrllink www.micrografx.com

After defining this urllink property for an object, pointing at the object in QuickSilver changes the pointer to a hand and displays www.micrografx.com on the browser's status bar. Clicking the object jumps to the www.micrografx.com. Moving the pointer away from the object changes the pointer back to its normal shape.


Micrografx QuickSilver

QuickSilver Events

QuickSilver Verbs

More about QuickSilver Verbs

Defining QuickSilver Events


Defining QuickSilver Events

QuickSilver events are assigned to objects using the QuickSilver Events tab of the Object Properties dialog box.

A QuickSilver event consists of an event name, an object name (if required or desired), a command verb, and a parameter (if required). An example of a QuickSilver event is shown below.

OnDoubleClick as Large Square ObjectColor red

In this example, OnDoubleClick is the event name, Large Square is an object name, ObjectColor is the command verb, and red is the parameter of the verb. This event causes the object named Large Square to turn red when the user double-clicks the object for which this event is defined. For information on how to include QuickSilver objects on Web pages, see Adding Objects to Web Pages.

You can add more than one command verb to an event. For example, you can cause the double-click event defined above to also produce a beep, as illustrated below.

OnDoubleClick as Large Square ObjectColor red;Beep

If you add more than one command verb to an event, separate the additional verbs with a semicolon.


To define a QuickSilver event


Micrografx QuickSilver

QuickSilver Events

QuickSilver Verbs

More about QuickSilver Verbs

Using the urllink Property


To define a QuickSilver event

1	Select the object for which you want to define the event.

2	On the Object menu, click Properties. The Object Properties dialog box opens.

3	Click the QuickSilver Events tab.

4	Click the event name you want to define. For example, click OnDoubleClick to define this event.

5	Click the Action box to position the cursor for typing.

6	To add a target object name, type as (for AffectSymbol), a space, and the target object name. Type a space after the object name to separate the name and the verb.

Instead of typing the object name, you can click Paste Object Name to display a list of the object names in the document, and then click the name that you want.

7	Click Paste Verb. A list of command verbs appears.

8	Click the verb you want (for example, ObjectColor). The verb appears in the Action box.

9	Type a space and the verb parameter (for example, red). Not all verbs require parameters.

10	To add another command verb, type a semicolon and repeat steps 6 through 9.

11	Click Close.

Note

The QuickSilver Events tab is available only if you have installed QuickSilver.

Tips

To improve readability when using multiple commands, you can press ENTER after typing a semicolon to put the next command on a separate line.

To copy defined events from one object to another, use the Pick Up Object Properties and Apply Object Properties commands on the Object menu.


Defining QuickSilver Events


Using the Document Audit Wizard

After creating the objects that you want to display on a Web page, you should analyze the document using the Document Audit Wizard. The wizard can perform a Standard or Thorough audit.

The Standard audit checks for multiple pages, bitmap images with more than 256 colors, and point reductions of 25% or more in objects.

The Thorough audit performs the Standard audit, checks for point reductions of 10% or more in objects, and checks for object groups that would be smaller if converted to bitmap images.

Using the Document Audit Wizard is easy. You simply respond to the questions asked by the wizard, which optimizes the document for you automatically, based on your answers. At the end of the optimization process, you receive a report showing how much you have reduced the DSF and QSF file sizes of the document.

The Document Audit Wizard includes instructions explaining its use, and lets you cancel its operation at any time.


To analyze a document using the Document Audit Wizard


Micrografx QuickSilver

Saving QuickSilver Files

Estimating File Download Times

Adding Objects to Web Pages

Previewing QuickSilver Files

Reducing Points


To analyze a document using the Document Audit Wizard

1	Select the object you want to analyze.

or

Deselect all objects to analyze the entire document.

2	On the Tools menu, click Audit Document. The Document Audit Wizard dialog box opens.

3	Click Next. The Select Audit Type screen appears.

4	Select Standard to check for extra pages, images with more than 256 colors, and point reductions of 25% or more in objects.

or

Select Thorough to perform the Standard audit, to check for point reductions of 10% or more in objects, and to check whether object groups would be smaller if converted to bitmap images.

5	Click Next. The Reviewing Document screen appears.

6	Click Start Audit to begin the audit. The wizard begins reviewing.

7	The wizard checks the document for multiple pages.

If more than 1 page is found, you can choose to keep or to discard the additional pages when the document is saved as a QuickSilver QSF file. QuickSilver can only display the first page, so keeping more pages needlessly increases the size of the QSF file.

8	The wizard checks for objects or groups of objects with excessive anchor points.

For each object so identified, you can choose to reduce the points, or to skip the reduction. If you decide to reduce the points, the Wizard makes a point reduction recommendation, which you can change interactively. Because you can preview the effect of the point reduction on the object, you can easily choose the best setting.

9	The wizard checks for bitmap images containing more than 256 colors.

For each bitmap image so identified, you can choose to convert the image to 256 colors immediately, to convert it when the document is saved as a QuickSilver QSF file, or to skip the conversion.

10	The wizard checks for object groups that would take less file space if converted to bitmap images (Thorough audit only).

For each group so identified, you can choose to convert the objects, or to keep them as is.

11	When the audit review finishes, click Next. The Summary screen appears showing the result of the audit in reducing the DSF and QSF file sizes.

12	Click Download Times to display an estimate of the download times of the document in DSF, QSF, JPEG, and GIF format.

13	Click More Tips to see a list of other actions you can take to reduce a QuickSilver QSF file.

14	Click Finish to close the wizard.

Tips

To change your answer to a question on a previous screen, click Back. Click Cancel to exit the Document Audit Wizard.

If you have a large file, you may want to audit portions of the file rather than the entire file. This will help identify objects needing point reduction.

For more information on reducing the points of an object, see Reducing Points.

For more information on the QuickSilver QSF file format, see Saving QuickSilver Files.

For more information on download times, see Estimating File Download Times.


Using the Document Audit Wizard

Saving QuickSilver Files

Estimating File Download Times

Reducing Points


Saving QuickSilver Files

After creating the objects that you want to display on a Web page, including defining their QuickSilver events, you should save the document as a QuickSilver QSF file. This file format removes all extraneous information from the document and optimizes it for display by QuickSilver. It also compresses the file using Micrografx's new compression method that produces a 63% reduction in file size, on the average.

QuickSilver recognizes only the first page of a QSF file. Therefore, keeping more pages in a QSF file needlessly increases the size of the file. To set Designer so that it discards all pages except the first when you save a document in QSF format, select the Output Only One Page to QSF option on the General tab of the Options dialog box. For more information on setting this option, see Display Options.

QuickSilver QSF files can be opened and edited just like DSF files.

Tip

To ensure that your QSF file is reduced to the smallest possible size, run the Document Audit Wizard on your document before you save the file. For information on using the Document Audit Wizard, see Using the Document Audit Wizard.


To save a QuickSilver file


Micrografx QuickSilver

Using the Document Audit Wizard

Estimating File Download Times

Adding Objects to Web Pages

Previewing QuickSilver Files


To save a QuickSilver file

1	On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.

2	Type the name you want in the File Name box.

3	Choose the drive and folder in which you want to save the file.

4	Click the arrow beside the Save as Type box and choose Micrografx QuickSilver File (*.qsf) format.

5	Click Save to save the file.

Note

If you specify an existing name for the document, you are asked whether you want to replace the existing file. Click No to return to the Save As dialog box. Click Yes to replace the file.

Tip

The keyboard shortcut for Save As is CTRL+SHIFT+S.


Saving QuickSilver Files

Saving with a Different Name or Format


Estimating File Download Times

The Show Download Times on the Tools menu lets you obtain an estimate of the time it would take to download the current document in various file formats at various modem speeds. The Show Download Times dialog box shows the download times at 14400, 28800, and 33600 baud for the document in Designer 7 DSF format, QuickSilver QSF format, JPEG format, and GIF format. The JPEG and GIF formats are bitmap image formats.

Using this command, you can easily determine the best file format to use when putting the current document on a Web page.

Note

The file sizes for the JPEG and GIF file formats are based on the current export settings for these formats. By changing these export settings, you can change the file size, and thereby the download time. For example, decreasing the resolution for GIF files will reduce the download time for the GIF format. For information on setting export options, see Exporting a File.


To show file download times


Micrografx QuickSilver

Using the Document Audit Wizard

Saving QuickSilver Files

Adding Objects to Web Pages

Previewing QuickSilver Files


To show file download times

1	On the Tools menu, click Show Download Times.

2	Designer calculates the size of document when saved in DSF, QSF, JPEG, and GIF format, and displays the download times at 14400, 28800, and 33600 baud.

The format with the smallest file size is highlighted.

Tip

Click Audit Document to open the Document Audit Wizard. The Document Audit Wizard examines the document and makes recommendations on how to make the file more compact.


Estimating File Download Times


Adding Objects to Web Pages

To display an object on a Web page, you need to add the appropriate HTML tags to the HTML source file for the Web page. These tags instruct your browser where to find the file containing the object, its width and height, and other information needed by QuickSilver to activate the object.

The Copy to HTML command on the Edit menu makes it easy to add these tags to your Web page. Executing Copy to HTML opens the Copy to HTML dialog box, which shows the Width and Height of the object. Clicking OK on this dialog box copies the HTML tags that you need to Clipboard for easy pasting into your Web page HTML source file. An example of the tags created by this command is shown below.

  <!-- ------------------------------------------------------------------ -->

 <!-- Micrografx Designer  object for  use with  Micrografx QuickSilver. -->

 <!--  This HTML code  automatically  generated by  Micrografx Designer. -->

 <!--  Please visit http://www.micrografx.com  for the latest version of -->

 <!--  the Micrografx QuickSilver control and other Micrografx software. -->

 <!-- IMPORTANT:                                                         -->

 <!--  The specified Designer file MUST be kept in the same directory as -->

 <!--  this HTML file.                                                   -->

 <!-- ------------------------------------------------------------------ -->

<OBJECT

 ID=chess

 CLASSID="clsid:44AD7B44-A27F-11CF-B75B-0020AFDBE544"

 WIDTH=1098

 HEIGHT=900>

 <PARAM NAME=FileName VALUE="chess.dsf">

 <EMBED SRC="chess.dsf" WIDTH=1098 HEIGHT=900>

 <CODEBASE="http://www.micrografx.com/abcqs.cab">

</OBJECT>

Note

The HTML tags created by this command are appropriate for both Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer.


To copy HTML tags to the Clipboard


Micrografx QuickSilver

Using the Document Audit Wizard

Saving QuickSilver Files

Estimating File Download Times

Previewing QuickSilver Files


To copy HTML tags to the Clipboard

1	On the Edit menu, click Copy to HTML. The Copy to HTML dialog box opens.

2	The dialog box displays the Width and Height parameters of the objects in the document. You can change these to alter the displayed size of the objects on the Web page, if desired.

3	Click OK. The HTML tags for the object are copied to the Clipboard.

4	Switch to your HTML editor.

5	Paste the contents of the Clipboard into your Web page source code.

Tips

The Copy to HTML command is unavailable if there are no objects in the current document.

See the documentation provided with your browser for more information on HTML.


Adding Objects to Web Pages


Previewing QuickSilver Files

To preview what an object looks like on a Web page, or to test its interactivity, use the Preview as HTML command on the View menu. This command creates a temporary HTML file for the object, launches your browser, and loads the HTML file. You can then check the object's appearance and action in the browser.


To preview a QuickSilver file


Micrografx QuickSilver

Using the Document Audit Wizard

Saving QuickSilver Files

Estimating File Download Times

Adding Objects to Web Pages


To preview a QuickSilver file

1	On the View menu, click Preview as HTML.

2	Designer launches your browser with the current document loaded as an HTML file.

3	When you finish previewing the file, close the browser. The focus returns to Designer.


Previewing QuickSilver Files


Popups for Verb table


Jump (QuickSilver verb)
Jump localURL (QuickSilver Verb)

Instructs the browser to load and display the new URL localURL. localURL can be an absolute or relative URL reference. Since this closes the current page, and therefore the current plug-in, any additional commands for the event are ignored.


InPlaceJump (QuickSilver verb)
InPlaceJump URLstring (QuickSilver Verb)

Instructs the plug-in to discard its current contents and display the new drawing located at URLstring. URLstring must refer to a Designer drawing. The new drawing assumes the dimensions of the discarded drawing. Since the current file is discarded, any additional commands for the event are ignored.


StatusLine (QuickSilver verb)
StatusLine text (QuickSilver Verb)

Displays the text string text in the browser's status bar. To clear the status bar, omit the text parameter.

This command is available only for Netscape Navigator browsers.


CursorShape (QuickSilver verb)
CursorShape shape (QuickSilver Verb)

Sets the shape of the mouse pointer. A shape of "Link" or "Hand" displays the hand pointer. To restore the normal arrow pointer, use any other value for shape, or omit shape.


ObjectColor (QuickSilver verb)
ObjectColor color (QuickSilver Verb)

Sets an object's interior fill color to the value represented by color. The color parameter must be either a predefined Netscape color name or a Netscape-style "#rrggbb" color specification.


ObjectText (QuickSilver verb)
ObjectText text (QuickSilver Verb)

Sets a text object's text to text. To clear the text, omit the text parameter. This command works for block text only; it does not work for freeform text. To change the color of the text use the ObjectColor command.


MoveOver (QuickSilver verb)
MoveOver objectname (QuickSilver Verb)

Moves an object and centers it to the position of the object named objectname.


HideObject (QuickSilver Verb)

Hides the object. A hidden object does not detect events, but you can use another object's event to (reactivate) a hidden object.


ShowObject (QuickSilver Verb)

Shows the object.


FlashObject (QuickSilver verb)
FlashObject flashrate count (QuickSilver Verb)

Flashes an object, whether the object is hidden or not. Enter the flashrate in milliseconds. To flash once a second, use 1000. To flash every half-second, use 500. The maximum flashrate is 500 ms and the minimum flash rate is 30,000 ms. Enter the flash count to set how many times to flash the object. To flash until an EndFlashObject command is received, use -1 (infinite flashing). Separate the parameters with a space.


EndFlashObject (QuickSilver Verb)

Ends an object's flashing.


SpinObjectCW (QuickSilver verb)
SpinObjectCW steptime steps revolutions (QuickSilver Verb)

Spins an object about its center in a clockwise direction. Enter the steptime in milliseconds. To rotate an object one step every second, use 1000. You must set the steptime between 500 and 60,000 ms. Enter the number of rotation steps it takes to complete a revolution (360 degrees). For example, a value of 8 steps would cause the object to rotate 45 degrees every step. Enter the number of revolutions you want the object to make. To rotate until an EndSpinObject command is received, use -1 (infinite spinning). Separate the parameters with a space.


EndSpinObject (QuickSilver Verb)

Ends an object's spinning.


SpinObjectCCW (QuickSilver verb)
SpinObjectCCW steptime steps revolutions (QuickSilver Verb)

Spins an object about its center in a counterclockwise direction. The parameters are identical to the SpinObjectCW command.


Beep (QuickSilver verb)
Beep beeprate count (QuickSilver Verb)

Causes a system beep using the default sound. Enter the rate between beeps in milliseconds. To beep once a second use 1000. The maximum beeprate is 100 ms and minimum beeprate is 30,000 ms. Enter the beep count to set how many times to beep. To beep until an EndBeep command is received, use -1 (infinite beeping). Separate the parameters with a space.


EndBeep (QuickSilver Verb)

Ends an object's beeping.


BringObjectToFront (QuickSilver Verb)

Moves the object in front of all other objects on the current layer.


SendObjectToBack (QuickSilver Verb)

Moves the object behind all other objects on the current layer.


BringObjectForward (QuickSilver Verb)

Moves the object one level toward the front.


SendObjectBackward (QuickSilver Verb)

Moves the one level toward the back.


HideLayer (QuickSilver verb)
HideLayer layernumber (QuickSilver Verb)

Hides the drawing layer identified by layernumber and redraws the drawing. layernumber is a layer number greater than one.


ShowLayer (QuickSilver verb)
ShowLayer layernumber (QuickSilver Verb)

Shows the drawing layer identified by layernumber and redraws the drawing. layernumber is a layer number greater than one.


OnlyShowLayer (QuickSilver verb)
OnlyShowLayer layernumber (QuickSilver Verb)

Hides all drawing layers except the layer identified by layernumber and redraws the drawing. layernumber is a layer number greater than one.


TargetJump (QuickSilver verb)
TargetJump targetwindow localURL (QuickSilver Verb)

Instructs the browser to load the URL localURL and display it in the window identified by targetwindow (probably a frame element). localURL can be an absolute or relative URL reference.


RotateObject (QuickSilver verb)
RotateObject angle (QuickSilver Verb)

Rotates an object about its center by angle degrees. Enter angle in tenths of a degree, so to rotate an object 90 degrees clockwise, specify an angle of 900. To rotate an object counterclockwise, specify a negative angle.


SoftReload (QuickSilver Verb)

Triggers an OnLoad event for all top-level objects in the drawing. Child objects of grouped objects do not receive OnLoad events.


ResetDrawing (QuickSilver verb)
ResetDrawing drawingfilename (QuickSilver Verb)

Reloads the drawing identified by drawingfilename.


HideAllChildren (QuickSilver Verb)

Hides all children of a grouped object.


ShowAllChildren (QuickSilver Verb)

Shows all children of a grouped object.


CycleObject (QuickSilver verb)
CycleObject elapsetime count (QuickSilver Verb)

Displays each object in a grouped object one at a time for the amount of time specified by elapsetime. Enter the elapsetime in milliseconds. You must set the elapsetime between 500 and 1000. This time is approximate, and depends heavily on the speed at which objects can be redrawn. As the size and complexity of objects increase, you may find that faster rates are not possible. The count determines the number of times the entire cycle is performed. To cycle until an EndAnimation command is received, use -1 (infinite cycling). Separate the parameters with a space.


BuildObject (QuickSilver verb)
BuildObject elapsetime count (QuickSilver Verb)

Displays each object in a grouped object sequentially for the amount of time specified by elapsetime. Enter the elapsetime in milliseconds. You must set the elapsetime between 10 and 1000. This time is approximate, and depends heavily on the speed at which objects can be redrawn. As the size and complexity of objects increase, you may find that faster rates are not possible. The count determines the number of times the build sequence is performed. To build until an EndAnimation command is received, use -1 (infinite building). Separate the parameters with a space.


EndAnimation (QuickSilver Verb)

Ends an object's cycling or building.


Redraw (QuickSilver verb)
Redraw transition (QuickSilver Verb)

Redraws the object, using the specified transition, if any. The available transition effects are: WipeUpRight, WipeUpLeft, WipeDown, WipeUp, WipeLeft, WipeRight, WipeDownRight, WipeDownLeft, DissolvePixels, DissolveBits, BlindsHorz, BlindsVert, SlideTop, SlideBottom, SlideRight, and SlideLeft.


RedrawAll (QuickSilver verb)
RedrawAll transition (QuickSilver Verb)

Redraws all objects, using the specified transition, if any. The available transition effects are: WipeUpRight, WipeUpLeft, WipeDown, WipeUp, WipeLeft, WipeRight, WipeDownRight, WipeDownLeft, DissolvePixels, DissolveBits, BlindsHorz, BlindsVert, SlideTop, SlideBottom, SlideRight, and SlideLeft.


CSH_DB1.DOC - Context-Sensitive Help for Dialog Boxes

Generic DB Topics

File Menu	Edit Menu

3D Mapped to 2D db	Copy to HTML db

File Is Read Only db	Select Object db

File Already Open db	Select Object db

Unable to Read From File db	Task Manager db

File Close Confirmation db	Toolbars db

Find Files db	Customize Toolbars db

Files Found db	Rename Toolbar db

Save as Template db

Page Setup db

Invalid Page Definition db

Page Setup Default db

Print Document db

Target Printer db  Becomes Printer Setup

Various

Various Error Message Boxes

Quick View File Viewer


Generic dialog-box controls


No help topic is associated with this item.


No help topic is associated with this item.


Accepts the current choices and closes the dialog box.


Enter a name for the file you are creating, and then click OK.


Lets you change the measuring increment. By default, the units match the ruler.

To change the units, click this button. A menu opens, displaying the units available, along with the More Units command.


Applies the current settings in the dialog box.


Closes the dialog box without making further changes.


Closes the dialog box without applying any changed settings.


Click this button to find the file you want.


Displays a description of this dialog box with information about how to use it.


File menu dialog boxes


3D Will Be Mapped To 2D dialog box


Designer 7.0 displays this dialog box before opening a Designer 4.0 file that contains one or more 3D objects. Designer 7.0 converts each 3D object into a standard Designer two-dimensional object that has the appearance of the original 3D object. The 3D data is not retained in the Designer 7.0 file.

To help you preserve the Designer 4.0 file, Designer 7.0 automatically assigns the name Untitled to the drawing after opening it. When you save the Designer 7.0 file, be sure to choose a filename that does not overwrite the original 3D file.


The Find Files dialog box


Find Files dialog box

This dialog box lets you search drives and folders for a specific filename, or for all filenames that match a wildcard specification.


Type the name of the file you want to search for in this text box. You can use the wildcard character ? (question mark) as a substitute for an individual character and the wildcard character * (asterisk) as a substitute for any number of characters.


Select where you want to search. If the drive and folder you want to search is not shown in this box, click the Browse button to find it.


Select this option if you want to include all subfolders in the search.


Click this button to begin the search.


Click the name of the file in the names list that you want to open, and then click this button to open the file.

Tip

If Designer lists multiple files found in a search, you can use CTRL+click to select as many as nine files and then open all the files in one operation, even if the files are in different folders.


During the search, Designer lists the names and locations of files that match the entry in the Named box.


Save As Template dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGSAVEASTEMPLATE        25743   /template db


Save as Template dialog box

This dialog box lets you save the current document as a template file.

Templates can have an associated clip art subject or Project Help topic.

If you associate a clip art subject with a template, then the Media Manager displays that subject when you open the template. To associate a clip art subject with a template, open the Media Manager and display that subject. Then select the Save Clip Art Subject option before you save the template.

If you associate a Project Help topic with a template, then Project Help displays that topic when you open the template. To associate a Project Help topic with a template, open Project Help and display that topic. Then select the Save Project Help Topic option before you save the template.

When you save a document as a template, you specify a category for the template. The category determines the folder of the Project Wizard in which the template appears.


#define HLPTOP_TEMPLATENAME             25744   /template db


Specifies the name of the template.


#define HLPTOP_TEMPLATEDESCRIPTION      25745


Lets you provide a description of the template.


#define HLPTOP_SAVECLIPART              25746


Select this option to include the currently displayed clip art subject with the template.

If you include a clip art subject with a template, then Designer automatically opens the Media Manager with that subject selected when you open the template.


#define HLPTOP_SAVEHELPTOPIC            25747


Select this option to include the currently displayed Project Help topic with the template.

If you include a Project Help topic with a template, then Designer automatically displays that Project Help topic when you open the template.


#define HLPTOP_CATALOGLIST              25748


Lists the template category folders, and lets you choose the folder in which you want to save the template.

Click a folder to open it. Click Back to return to the previous category.


#define HLPTOP_NEWCATEGORY              25749


Click this button to create a new category.


#define HLPTOP_PREVCATEGORY             25750


Click this button to return to the previous category.


Page Setup dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGPGSETUP               18080


Page Setup dialog box

This dialog box lets you change the size, margins, and orientation of the active window's on-screen page. You can change page settings before, during, or after creating a drawing.

New page settings are applied immediately to the current page in the active window.

Individual pages in your document can have different sizes, orientations, and page fills, if desired. To apply the same size, orientation, and page fill to all pages in the document, select Apply to All Open Pages. This option, like Use Master Page, forces all pages to be uniform.

Tip

If you change the page setup, and you plan to print your work, you should change the printer setup to match.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETDEFAULT             20725   // change default page settings button


Displays a dialog box that lets you establish the current settings as the default settings for all new pages and documents.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETPAGESZ              19756   // page size combobox


Sets the size of the current page. You can choose from standard page sizes or choose Custom Size and create your own by adjusting the Width and Height measurements.

Tip

Use the Screen Size selection when preparing on-screen presentations (slideshows) to be used with the Page Manager tool. Choosing this option sets the page size to match the size, proportions, and resolution of your monitor.


#define HLPTOP_MASTERPAGE               19757   // master page radio button


Match the size, orientation, and page fill (if any) of the master page. To edit the master page, click Master Page on the Page Tab Bar at the bottom of the Designer window.


#define HLPTOP_PRINTABLEPAGE            19758   // printable area radio button


Forces the on-screen page to reflect your printer's page size and margins. For example, if your printer uses an 8.5" x 11" page with one-half inch margins, the on-screen page matches it.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETPAGEWIDTH           19759   // page width spinner


Changes the page size. Use the scroll arrows in the Height and Width list boxes.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETPAGEHEIGHT          19760   // page height spinner


Changes the page size. Use the scroll arrows in the Height and Width list boxes.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETTILECOL             19761   // tiled columns spinner


Shows the number of columns of tiles used when the current page size is printed to the target printer. If the page size is set to use the printable area and the page orientation matches the orientation of the target printer, no tiling is used, and the number of columns is set to 1.

If you enter a new value for columns, the page size changes to match the number of columns. To display tile lines on your screen as you work, open the View menu, point to Workspace, and then click Show Printer Page Tiles.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETTILEROW             19762   // tiled rows spinner


Shows the number of rows of tiles used when the current page size is printed to the target printer. If the page size is set to use the printable area and the page orientation matches the orientation of the target printer, no tiling is used, and the number of rows is set to 1.

If you enter a new value for rows, the page size changes to match the number of columns. To display tile lines on your screen as you work, open the View menu, point to Workspace, and then click Show Printer Page Tiles.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETPORTRAIT            19763   // portriat orientation


Lets you change the page's orientation to either portrait (tall) or landscape (wide).


#define HLPTOP_PGSETLANDSCAPE           19764   // landscape orientation


Lets you change the page's orientation to either portrait (tall) or landscape (wide).


#define HLPTOP_PGSETALLPG               19766   // apply to all checkbox


Applies all of the page setup options to all of the pages in the document.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETTOPMARG             19750   // top margin


Lets you choose page margins (border widths). You can use margins as boundary guides for creating drawings. Type the margins you want, or use the scroll arrows to change the widths.

Most printers do not print to the edge of the paper. Margins include this nonprinting area. For example, if your margin is 1/2 inch and the nonprinting area is 1/4 inch, the margin is 1/2 inch from the edge.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETBOTMARG             19751   // bottom margin


Lets you choose page margins (border widths). You can use margins as boundary guides for creating drawings. Type the margins you want, or use the scroll arrows to change the widths.

Most printers do not print to the edge of the paper. Margins include this nonprinting area. For example, if your margin is 1/2 inch and the nonprinting area is 1/4 inch, the margin is 1/2 inch from the edge.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETLEFTMARG            19752   // left margin


Lets you choose page margins (border widths). You can use margins as boundary guides for creating drawings. Type the margins you want, or use the scroll arrows to change the widths.

Most printers do not print to the edge of the paper. Margins include this nonprinting area. For example, if your margin is 1/2 inch and the nonprinting area is 1/4 inch, the margin is 1/2 inch from the edge.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETRTMARG              19753   // right margin


Lets you choose page margins (border widths). You can use margins as boundary guides for creating drawings. Type the margins you want, or use the scroll arrows to change the widths.

Most printers do not print to the edge of the paper. Margins include this nonprinting area. For example, if your margin is 1/2 inch and the nonprinting area is 1/4 inch, the margin is 1/2 inch from the edge.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETCROP                19754   // show crop marks


Prints crop marks on the paper.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETFILL                20564   // page fill


Select this option to fill the page with the page fill color.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETFILLSTYLE           19755   // set page fill


Opens a dialog box that lets you choose a color fill for the page.


#define HLPTOP_PGSETPREVIEW             19765   // page preview area


Previews the page and margins settings.


Invalid Page Definition dialog box


#define HLPERR_INVALIDPGSET             20070        //invalid page db


The current page definition contains an invalid setting (such as a margin that is larger than the paper size). Please check the Page Setup settings on both the Margins and the Paper Size tabs.


PageSetupDefault dialog box


Page Setup - Default dialog box

This dialog box lets you make the current Page Setup settings the default settings. Click Yes to make the current page and all new pages use these settings.


Print Document dialog box


#define HLPTOP_PRNDOCUMENT              18043 // Print Document dialog


Print Document dialog box

This dialog box lets you print the document in the active window. You can specify the current page, all pages, or selected pages from the document; the number of copies to be printed; whether to collate the copies; whether to include page labels; and whether to use vector clipping (for use with a pen plotter).

You also can print multiple documents.

If the current page size is larger than the paper size of your printer or plotter, the entire drawing page is printed with as many printer pages as needed. This process is called tiling.


#define HLPTOP_RANGE_CURR               20609   // current page option


Prints the currently displayed page. If more than one page is displayed, prints the last page to have an object selected.


#define HLPTOP_RANGE_ALL                20610   // all pages option


Prints every page of a document.


#define HLPTOP_RANGE_SPEC               20611   // range option


Lets you print specific pages in the document.

Examples:

Enter This	To Print Pages

1,2,6-9	1, 2, and 6 through 9

6-	6 to the end of the document

Note

If you choose the Fit To Page option and the page is tiled, all of the tiles are reduced to fit on a single page rather than the pages you specify.


#define HLPTOP_RANGE_EDIT               20612   // enter range


Type the page range in this box.

Examples:

Enter This	To Print Pages

1,2,6-9	1, 2, and 6 through 9

6-	6 to the end of the document

Note

If you choose the Fit To Page option and the page is tiled, all of the tiles are reduced to fit on a single page rather than the pages you specify.


#define HLPTOP_COPIES_NUMBER            20613   // number of copies control


Lets you choose the number of copies to print.


#define HLPTOP_COPIES_COLLATE           20614   // collate option


Prints a complete copy of a document before printing the next copy. This option is available only when you print more than one copy of a multiple-page document.

When Collate is not selected, Designer prints all copies of the first page, then all copies of the second page, and so forth.

Note

Collating can slow the print speed on some printers.


#define HLPTOP_LAYOUT_LABEL             20615   // page label option


Prints the document's file name, page number, and page name (if any) at the top of the page in the margin.


#define HLPTOP_MIRROR                   20616   // mirror option


Flips a drawing so that it prints reversed, just as though you were viewing it in a mirror. Use this option to print T-shirt transfers or other drawings that must be given to a print shop reversed.

This option is available only with certain printer drivers.


#define HLPTOP_VECTOR_CLIP              20617   // vector clipping option


Improves the output of drawings on plotters. This option does not allow plotted lines to cross, causing the top object of overlapping drawings to completely cover the bottom object (this is done automatically with non-plotting printers).

Vector Clipping also prevents the damage to plotter pens that can occur when different colors are drawn over each other. For example, a yellow line drawn over a black line can permanently stain the yellow pen.

The Vector Clipping option is available only when you are using a plotter. This option increases the time it takes to plot your drawing.


#define HLPTOP_COLORSEP                 20618   // color separation option


Lets you create an EPS file of your document (or specified pages) that includes the following:

Color separator information

Spot color support

Overprint stroke (line) and fill information

Most service bureaus have software that can make color separations from this EPS file.

The target printer page size is used as boundaries for this EPS file. No preview is attached to the file.


#define HLPTOP_DOWNLOADFONTS            20786  // Print Document dlg Download Fonts options


Clear this option only if all of the fonts in your document have been downloaded to your PostScript printer.

Bypassing font downloads can greatly reduce the size of a print job. It tells Designer that the printer has resident font descriptions for all the fonts in the current print job, and that it is not necessary to download the font description for any font encountered in the document.

This option is available only for PostScript printers where Designer handles the PostScript generation.


#define HLPTOP_PRINT_SETUP              18044


Displays the Windows property sheet for the current printer. You can use the property sheet to examine or change your printer setup before printing the Designer document.


#define HLPTOP_REDUCE_TO_FIT            19893   // reduce to fit option


Reduces or enlarges the drawing proportionately to fit the printout, if necessary. If this option is not selected, the drawing is tiled on as many pages as necessary.

Note

If you select this option, all pages are printed on a single page rather than only the pages you specify in the Range area.


#define HLPTOP_CENTERPAGE               20619   // center on page option


Centers the document page horizontally and vertically on the printer page. You use this option when you are printing a document page that is smaller than the printer page. If you do not choose this option, the page prints at the upper left of the paper.


Prints using the options you selected.


#define HLPTOP_PRINT_SETUP              18044

#define HLPTOP_PRNTARGETDLG             18056  // Target Printer dialog


The Target Printer dialog box

This has become Print Setup and is not working


Print Setup dialog box

This dialog box lets you choose which of your installed printers to use for printing your Designer documents.


Lists the currently installed Windows printer drivers. Click the name of the printer you want to be the currently active printer. You can choose any installed printer.


Displays the Windows property sheet for the printer. You can use the property sheet to examine or change your printer setup before printing the Designer document.


Edit menu dialog boxes


Copy to HTML dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGHTML                  25768


Copy to HTML dialog box

This dialog box lets you copy to the Clipboard the HTML tags needed by QuickSilver to display a QSF drawing. You can then paste these tags into an HTML source file.

These tags instruct your browser where to find the file containing the drawing, its width and height, and other information needed by QuickSilver to activate the drawing.


Sets the width of a Designer object on an HTML page.


Sets the height of a Designer object on an HTML page.


Select Object dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGSYMSELECT     17700


The Select Object dialog box lets you select or deselect objects based on their attributes and properties.

For example, you can use this command to select all objects with red interiors and blue edges. If you've named the objects in your drawing, you also can search for objects by name.


#define HLPTOP_SYMTYPES                 25582


Specifies the type of object that you want to select.


#define HLPTOP_ATTRLIST                 20665   // attribute list


Lists object attributes on which you can base your selection. Before you open the dialog box, select an object, then in the dialog box highlight the attributes you want to search for. Designer selects other objects on the page with matching attributes.


#define HLPTOP_PROPERTIES               20666   // property


Lists the properties assigned to all objects on the current layer and lets you choose one for selecting objects. Specify the property value using the Value box.

Tip

In most cases there is only one property: "Name." You can ignore this option if you have not assigned multiple properties.


#define HLPTOP_SYMPROPVALUE             20667   // property value


Specifies the value of a property. You can either select other objects with the same value or use wildcard characters to designate the portions of names to search for.

For example, if the value (name) of the object is "widget1," but you want to select all widgets, you can type "widget*" to select widget1, widget2, and so on.

Wildcard characters let you search for partial matches. Use "?" for single characters; use "*" for multiple characters.


#define HLPTOP_SELCRITERIA              20668   // select all or next


Selects all objects on the current page that match the selected properties and attributes, or selects the matching objects one at a time. Click the Select button to select the next matching object (and deselect the first).


#define HLPTOP_SELECTSYMS               20669   // select button


Selects the objects based on the attributes and property values you specified.


#define HLPTOP_APPENDSYMS               20670   // append button


Appends newly selected objects with those previously selected.

For example, suppose you have a red circle with a line weight of 2 points, a blue circle with a line weight of 2 points, and a yellow circle with a hairline. Change the default fill color to red. Open the Select Object dialog box, choose Interior Fill Style, and then choose Select. Designer selects the red circle. Choose Line Weight and then choose Append. Designer adds the blue circle to the selection because it has the same line weight as the red circle.


#define HLPTOP_RESETSEL                 20671   // reset button


Deselects the currently selected objects.


Insert Object dialog box - not working


Links dialog box - not working


Object dialog box - not working


View menu dialog boxes


Task Manager dialog box


#define HLPTOP_TASKSTOP                 20763


Cancels the selected task.


#define HLPTOP_TASKPAUSE                20764


Pauses the selected task until you click the Resume button [image] or the Cancel button [image].


#define HLPTOP_TASKRESUME               20765


Resumes a task that you have paused with the Pause button [image].


#define HLPTOP_TASKLIST                 25681


Lists the tasks currently in progress.

Select a task, and click Cancel [image] to cancel the task.

Select a task, and click Pause [image] to pause the task.

Select a task, and click Resume [image] to resume a paused task.


Toolbars dialog box


Toolbars dialog box - defined as menu item

This dialog box lets you choose which toolbars you want to view. You also can choose whether to view Tool Tips, color buttons, and large buttons.

You can create new toolbars and customize existing ones.


#define HLPTOP_TBARLIST                 25683


Lists the available toolbars, and lets you choose to show or hide a toolbar.

To show a toolbar, select its check box. To hide a toolbar, deselect its check box.


#define HLPTOP_TBARNEW                  25684


Lets you create and name a new, custom toolbar.


#define HLPTOP_TBARRENAME               25685


Lets you rename a custom toolbar. You cannot rename the toolbars provided initially with Designer.


#define HLPTOP_TBARDELETE               25686


If the currently selected toolbar is a custom toolbar, deletes the toolbar. If the currently selected toolbar is one of those provided initially with Designer, resets the toolbar to its initial settings.


Customize done as menu item


#define HLPTOP_COLORBUTTON              25687


Select this option to display color buttons on your toolbars.


#define HLPTOP_LARGEBUTTON              25688


Select this option to display large buttons on your toolbars.


#define HLPTOP_BALLONHINT               18366


Select this option to display ToolTips.

ToolTips, when enabled, show you the name of a tool or button when you pause the pointer on the button.


#define HLPTOP_TBARSHORTCUTS            25689


Select this option to display keyboard shortcuts with ToolTips.


Customize (Toolbars) dialog box


Customize dialog box

This dialog box lets you customize Designer toolbars by adding buttons. A customized toolbar, by combining the commands you use most often in a single, easily accessed location, can greatly enhance your efficiency.

Your toolbar settings are saved in your current profile.

Note

You cannot add buttons to the Ribbon toolbar.

Tips

The buttons available in the Customize dialog box include buttons not on any of the built-in toolbars.

To create a new toolbar, just drag a button from the Customize dialog box onto the drawing area.

To drag a button from any toolbar except the Ribbon toolbar to another toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button with the mouse.

To rearrange the buttons on a toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button to its new location.

To delete a button from a toolbar, hold ALT and drag the button off the toolbar.


#define HLPTOP_OCCAT                    25690


To display the button images associated with each category, click the category name.


#define HLPTOP_PREF_TOOLSAVAILABLE      25736


To display the description of a button in this list, click the button. To place the button on a toolbar, drag it to the toolbar and drop it.


Rename and New Toolbar dialog box


#define HLPTOP_TOOLNAME                 25692


This dialog box lets you name or rename a custom toolbar.


Various Error dialog boxes


Designer was unable to backup this file. You can save the file by clicking OK, but no backup of the previous version will be saved.


Designer has encountered an I/O error trying to access this file.


The document you are opening is a read-only file. You can open and edit it. However, if you want to save a copy with changes that you make, you must click Save As on the File menu and enter a different name or location for the copy.


The document name you clicked on the File menu is already open.

To open a copy of the document as a new, untitled document, click the Yes button. The original document is still available through the Window menu.

To cancel the command and close this dialog box, click the No button or the Cancel button.


Designer is not able to open the specified file. Try importing the file (use the File menu).


You are about to close a document that contains unsaved changes.

You can:

Save the changes, and then close the document. Click Yes.

Close the document without saving the changes. Click No.

Return to the document without closing it. Click Cancel, or press the ESC key.


Designer is unable to continue the bitmap image tracing.


Designer is unable to enter text with the current margin settings.


Designer is unable to write this file.


CD-ROM dialog box


Designer uses the path shown in the CD-ROM Path box to locate the Content CD-ROM clip art. If the indicated path is not correct, use the Browse button to find the correct path, and click OK.


Lets you specify the path to the CD-ROM drive. If the indicated path is not correct, use the Browse button to find the correct path, and click OK.


Help Topic for the Quick View File Viewer


Micrografx Designer 7 File Viewer

The Micrografx Designer 7 File Viewer lets you view Designer drawings without opening Designer.

Using the Micrografx Designer 7 File Viewer, you can:

View Designer 7 DSF files, QuickSilver QSF files, and drawings made with earlier versions of Micrografx Designer.

View drawings one at a time in a single window or view each drawing in a separate viewing window. Use the Replace Window command on the viewer's View menu to switch between these options.

Show or hide the viewer's toolbar. Use the Toolbar command on the viewer's View menu to show or hide the toolbar.

Open the currently displayed drawing in Designer so you can make changes. On the viewer's File menu, click Open As Designer File, or click Open [image] on the viewer's toolbar.

View multiple-page drawings. To move through the pages, click Previous Page [image] or Next Page [image] on the viewer's toolbar.

To View a Designer Drawing

1	Open the folder containing the Designer drawing.

2	Click the right mouse button on the icon of the drawing.

3	On the shortcut menu, click Quick View.

Tips

To select several drawings for viewing at the same time (each in a separate viewing window), hold down CTRL while clicking each document's icon.

While the Designer 7 File Viewer window is open, you can drag Designer drawings and drop them on the window to view them.


Displays or hides additional options for this dialog box.


The Files Found dialog box - gone away


Files Found dialog box

This dialog box shows the number of files that matched your search specifications. Click OK to return to the Find File dialog box.


File Is Read-Only dialog box – gone away


Opens the read-only file. You can edit the document, but you cannot save it under the original name.


FileCloseConfirmation dialog box – gone away


Closes this dialog box without closing the document or saving the changes.


Save As dialog box

The Save As dialog box lets you name a new document, save a document with a new name, or replace an existing document with the current document.

If you type a filename without an extension, DSF is used.

Alternatively, you can choose the file format you want (in the file type list box).

Tips

Pressing a character key when a filename is highlighted in the text box makes the name disappear. To edit the filename, press the RIGHT ARROW to remove the highlight. Then press the RIGHT or LEFT ARROW to move the cursor. To delete characters to the left of the cursor, press BACKSPACE.

If you enter or select an existing filename, Designer asks if you want to replace the existing file. Click No to return to the Save As dialog box. Click Yes to replace the file.


Open db Description

Lets you enter or edit a description of the file.

Note

The Open dialog box does not show a file preview for DRW files. When you open a DRW file, it is automatically converted to a DSF file, and the extension is changed to DSF.


Links db Links

Lists all the OLE objects in the current file. For each object, the list provides the object type, original file name, the type of link, and whether it is updated automatically or manually.


Links db Update options

Lets you choose to update the selected link either automatically each time you open the Designer file or manually when you open or save the Designer file.


Links db Update Now

Immediately updates the selected link.


Links db Cancel Link

Breaks the OLE link between an object and its original program (server).


Links db Change Link

Opens a dialog box that lets you select a new file path for the selected link. The new file can be identical to the old file, but can be in a different location or it may be a completely new file.


Links db Edit

Lets you edit the object selected in the Links list box. Designer launches the object's source application for you to edit the object.


Links db Activate

Plays the object (for example, sound).


Links db Done

Closes the dialog box.


Insert Object db Object Type list

Lists the types of OLE object you can insert. Designer uses the type you select to determine which application to launch.


Transform db Origin

Lets you place the line, or reflection axis, through any of the nine object origin points. For example, select the center origin to flip an object around a central axis, or select the right middle origin to reflect the object around its right side.


Horizontal Angle

Lets you change the angle that the object is skewed (you can also drag the red arrow).


Vertical Angle

Lets you change the angle that the object is skewed (you can also drag the red arrow).


CSH_DB2.DOC - Context-Sensitive Help for Dialog Boxes

Tools Menu	Change Menu

Spelling db	Blend db

Audit Wizard More Tips db	Contour db

Estimate Download Time db	Transform db

Guides Manager db	Extrusion Options

Options db	Reduce Points db

Convert to Image db

Align db

Align to Path db


Spelling dialog box


Spelling dialog box

This dialog box gives you options for handling a misspelled or unrecognized word in your text.


Displays possible correct spellings. You can edit the word in this box.


Displays the dictionaries being used to detect misspellings. Designer uses all the dictionaries here, but only adds words to the top dictionary.


Displays a list of words similar to the misspelled word from the currently used dictionary.


Lets you ask for a suggested change from the dictionary for the displayed word. This button is enabled only if you have turned off the Always Suggest option on the Spelling tab of the Options dialog box.


Skips the word in the Change To box without changing it.


Ignores the current word and all other occurrences of the word without prompting you.


Changes the highlighted word to the word in the Change To box.


Changes the highlighted word to the word in the Change To box and makes the same change to all subsequent occurrences of the word without prompting you.


Adds the word in the Change To box to the current dictionary. The current dictionary appears in the Add Words To list box.


Displays the Spelling tab of the Options dialog box, where you can specify which dictionary to use, whether to ignore words in all uppercase, and other settings.


Ends the spelling check without checking any more words. Keeps spelling corrections you have made.


Spell Check Rest Of Document dialog box - no longer has help


The spelling checker has checked the currently selected text. Click Yes if you want the spelling checker to check all text in the document. Click No if you want to exit the spelling checker.


Spelling Check Is Complete dialog box - no longer has help


The spelling checker has finished checking the spelling. Click OK to return to the document.


Audit Wizard More Tips dialog box


More Tips for Reducing File Size

After content and design, probably the most important factor in developing Web pages is to make Web files as small as possible. Using QuickSilver, you can greatly reduce file sizes because QuickSilver makes it possible to display vector graphics rather than bitmap graphics. Here are some additional actions you can take to decrease file size.

Use gradients sparingly, because the more gradients you add to a file, the larger it gets. A few gradients, used creatively, can add dimension to a graphic without substantially increasing the file size.

Another way you can reduce file size is by removing unneeded QuickSilver commands. For example, if you want Object A to flash when you move the mouse over Object B, then change your mind and delete Object A, the FlashObject command is still assigned to Object B. Remove the command because all it is doing now is making the file larger.

If you are using a bitmap image on your page, use Picture Publisher to decrease the color depth of the image before importing it into Designer. By working with an image in Picture Publisher, you can choose a color depth that reduces the file size but retains the look that you want.

If you are displaying text in an uncommon font, convert it to curves to avoid the possibility that a computer displaying your page will substitute a font that does not look as polished. Converting text to curves generally works best for small amounts of type (one to three words). Beyond that, the size of the file may be too large to be beneficial. If you do convert text to curves, reduce the number of points as much as possible.


Estimate Download Time dialog box


Estimate Download Time dialog box

This dialog box provides an estimate of the time it would take to download the current document in various file formats at various modem speeds.


Opens the Document Audit Wizard which analyzes your document for changes that can reduce its file size. The Document Audit Wizard can perform a Standard or Thorough audit.

Using the Document Audit Wizard is easy. You simply respond to the questions asked by the wizard, which optimizes the document for you automatically, based on your answers. At the end of the optimization process, you receive a report showing how much you have reduced the DSF and QSF file sizes of the document.


Guides Manager dialog box


Guides Manager dialog box

This dialog box lets you define precisely a guide's location, add multiple guides, and set the color of guides.

A guide is a non-printing line that provides an easy way to align objects. Guides can help organize the layout of your drawing by guiding the placement of your objects. You can use guides as visual cues for where to place objects, or you can snap objects to guides for more exact placement.

You can lock guides to prevent them from being moved accidentally, and hide guides when you don't need to see them.

Guides appear on all pages and layers, and are saved with your document.


Select this option to define a horizontal guide.


Select this option to define a vertical guide.


Select this option to define a single guide.


Sets the position of a single guide.


Select this option to define multiple guides.


Sets the position of the first guide when defining multiple guides.


Sets the position of the last guide when defining multiple guides.


Sets the distance between the guides when defining multiple guides.

The Guide Count value shows the number of guides you have defined.


Click this button to set the color of guides.


Adds the currently defined guide to your document.


Replaces the highlighted guide with the currently defined guide.


Deletes the highlighted guide.


Deletes all guides from your document.


Lists the guides defined for your document.


The Options dialog box


Options Dialog box

This dialog box has tabs that let you set many different categories of options. The categories include general options, display options, ruler options, snap options, rotation options, input (primarily mouse) options, spelling options, settings for the system registry, and changing your profile (a collection of your personal settings).


Options dialog box - General tab


Lets you specify the number of recently used files that Designer displays in the Files menu.


By default, the Undo and Redo commands in the Edit menu reverse (Undo) or repeat (Redo) the most recent five actions. However, Designer can remember from 0 to 100 undo and redo steps since the last save. Setting a higher number of steps gives you the freedom to try multiple changes and the capability to undo those changes if desired, but takes up memory.


Lets you specify the time period between automatic saves. Set this value to zero to disable automatic saves.

At the specified time interval, Designer automatically saves all documents that have been changed since the last save. The auto save feature saves the documents in temporary files. If you have a power outage or some other event that causes your system to shut down without saving your work, then simply reopening Designer lets you recover the lost documents from the auto save files.


Retains a copy of the previous version of all document files. Designer appends the extension BAK to the filename and saves the backup in the same folder as the original file. When the Make Backups option is selected, you have two copies of the document on disk, the current version and the previously saved version. The backup version is overwritten each time you save the document.


Select this option to turn on smart colorization for object groups.

Smart colorization lets you change the fill color of an object group and retain the hue, or color gradations, of the original fill color. Smart colorization is especially useful when working with clip art, because it lets you change an object's color without losing color shades.

The following rules apply to this feature:

Smart colorization is performed only on object groups.

Only solid color and gradient fills are adjusted (to adjust a gradient fill, apply a solid color to it, not another gradient fill).

Black and white colors in the original object are unchanged.

Applying a gray color to an object group colors the object group shades of gray (grayscale).

Applying a color to an object group containing only black, white, and grayscale colors converts the grays to shades of the color.

The feature is cumulative. If you apply the same color again, the color may get darker or lighter.


Select this option if you want Designer to output only the first page of a document when you save the document in QuickSilver QSF format.

Because QuickSilver recognizes only the first page of a QSF file, keeping more pages needlessly increases the size of the QSF file.


Sets the horizontal and vertical offset used by the Duplicate command on the Edit menu. These options let you control exactly where the duplicate object created by this command appears in relation to the original object.


Options dialog box - Display tab


Makes the window scroll automatically when you drag an object beyond the window borders. This is especially useful when you have zoomed in for close work.


Deselect this option if you do not want Designer to begin with the Welcome to Micrografx Designer startup screen.


Select this option if you do not want Designer to create a new file when it opens. Not creating a new file enables Designer start faster, which can save you time when you plan to open an existing document rather than create a new one.


Lets you set whether the default setting for exporting bitmaps is aliased or anti-aliased. If you want the default setting to be anti-aliased, select this option. If you want the default setting to be aliased, deselect this option.

Anti-aliasing is a technique for reducing the jagged-appearing boundary along the edges of different-colored shapes within a bitmap image.


Select this option if you want bitmap images displayed in Full Screen View to be anti-aliased.

Anti-aliasing is a technique for reducing the jagged-appearing boundary along the edges of different-colored shapes within a bitmap image.


Select this option if you want project help displayed when you start a new project.


Lets you control how enlarged and reshaped bitmap images are rendered to the screen or printer.

Select high to render the image at device resolution, medium to render the image at a maximum of four scan lines per image pixel, or low to render the image at a maximum of two scan lines per pixel.

Selecting a lower output quality may degrade the appearance of the image, but can reduce display and print rendering times.


Lets you select small, medium, or large handles to suit your preference.


Options dialog box - Rulers tab


Lets you choose the measurement units to be used in the rulers and grid. The grid appears as a pattern of dotted lines that corresponds to divisions in your ruler settings. You can use the grid as a guide for aligning objects or measuring distances. When you choose settings for the ruler units, all other measurements change as appropriate for your ruler measurements. If necessary, you can change each individual unit measurement to the units you prefer in the appropriate dialog box.


Lets you choose the measurement units to be used in the rulers and grid. The grid appears as a pattern of dotted lines that corresponds to divisions in your ruler settings. You can use the grid as a guide for aligning objects or measuring distances. When you choose settings for the ruler units, all other measurements change as appropriate for your ruler measurements. If necessary, you can change each individual unit measurement to the units you prefer in the appropriate dialog box.


Lets you change the number of snaps per unit used for the horizontal ruler. This setting sets the number of divisions per unit, which affects the number of grid dots that appear when the grid is displayed and also affects how objects snap to the ruler if Snap to Rulers is selected.

Note

To prevent the drawing area from becoming too cluttered, Designer limits the number of grid dots and ruler tick marks that appear at one time. For example, if you have a large number of snaps per unit such as 100 per inch, Designer displays only about 16 per inch at full-page view.


Lets you change the number of snaps per unit used for the vertical ruler. This setting sets the number of divisions per unit, which affects the number of grid dots that appear when the grid is displayed and also affects how objects snap to the ruler if Snap to Rulers is selected.

Note

To prevent the drawing area from becoming too cluttered, Designer limits the number of grid dots and ruler tick marks that appear at one time. For example, if you have a large number of snaps per unit such as 100 per inch, Designer displays only about 16 per inch at full-page view.


Specifies the number of units per division in the horizontal ruler, which controls how frequently a number appears to label the ruler's units. This option prevents overcrowding the ruler when it is set to small units. For example, when a ruler is set to inches, you might use a value of 1, but when a ruler is set to millimeters, you might prefer a value of 10.


Specifies the number of units per division in the vertical ruler, which controls how frequently a number appears to label the ruler's units. This option prevents overcrowding the ruler when it is set to small units. For example, when a ruler is set to inches, you might use a value of 1, but when a ruler is set to millimeters, you might prefer a value of 10.


Sets the decimal precision of the horizontal coordinate displayed in the status bar. To change a value, click the down arrow next to the box, and choose the desired setting.


Sets the decimal precision of the vertical coordinate displayed in the status bar. To change a value, click the down arrow next to the box, and choose the desired setting.


Sets the horizontal coordinate of the ruler origin.

The ruler origin is the point, on or off the page, where the two rulers intersect at zero. The default position for the ruler origin is at the upper left corner of the page.


Sets the vertical coordinate of the ruler origin.

The ruler origin is the point, on or off the page, where the two rulers intersect at zero. The default position for the ruler origin is at the upper left corner of the page.


Options dialog box - Snap tab


Ordinarily only the mouse pointer snaps to snap points. Select this option to add having the bounding box of an object snap to snap points as you drag the object.


If you select this option, clicking Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar places snap points at the four corners of an object’s bounding box (a rectangular area that completely encloses the object).


If you select this option, clicking Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar places snap points at the geometric center of an object.


If you select this option, clicking Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar places a snap point at the object’s pivot point.


If you select this option, clicking Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar places snap points at an object’s anchor points.


If you select this option, clicking Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar places snap points at an open object’s end points. No snap points are added for closed objects.


If you select this option, clicking Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar places a snap point at the middle of each line segment in the object. If the object has no line segments, no snap points are added.


If you select this option, clicking Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar places snap points at the control points of all curved anchors in the object.


If you select this option, clicking Add Snap Points [image] on the Standard toolbar places snap points where an object's lines intersection.


Options dialog box - Rotation tab


Lets you select a unit for rotations.


Lets you change the rotation angle applied to a selection when you press F8. You can click the arrows beside the box, enter a new value in the box, or drag the red needle in the dial control.


Lets you set the increment that Designer uses when you rotate by dragging. For example, if you set the rotation angle to 12 degrees, an object rotates in increments of 12 degrees. The minimum setting is 0.1 degrees.


Options dialog box - Input tab


Configures Designer so that repeated left mouse-button clicks alternate between selecting an object and placing the object in the rotate/skew mode.

To select an object from a stack of overlapping objects, use ALT+click.


Configures Designer so that repeated left mouse-button clicks select each object in turn from a stack of overlapping objects.


Uses SHIFT+DRAG for constrained mouse movement, and CTRL+DRAG for duplicating the dragged object.


Uses CTRL+DRAG for constrained mouse movement, and SHIFT+DRAG for duplicating the dragged object.


Configures Designer so that:

Clicking the right mouse button opens a shortcut menu tailored for the currently selected tool and editing mode.

Clicking ALT+right mouse button executes the command that you select from the command list.


Configures Designer so that:

Clicking the right mouse button executes the command that you select from the command list.

Clicking ALT+right mouse button opens a shortcut menu tailored for the currently selected tool and editing mode.


Lists the commands that you can assign to the right mouse button or to ALT+right mouse button.


Configures the operation of the IntelliMouse in Designer.

Select Zoom if you want rotating the mouse wheel up or down to zoom the display (rotating up zooms in and rotating down zooms out).

Select Vertical Scroll if you want rotating the mouse wheel up or down to scroll the display vertically.

For either setting, holding down CTRL reverses the action of the wheel. For example, if you have Zoom selected, hold down CTRL and rotate the wheel up or down to scroll vertically.


Configures the operation of the IntelliMouse in Designer.

Select Zoom if you want rotating the mouse wheel up or down to zoom the display (rotating up zooms in and rotating down zooms out).

Select Vertical Scroll if you want rotating the mouse wheel up or down to scroll the display vertically.

For either setting, holding down CTRL reverses the action of the wheel. For example, if you have Zoom selected, hold down CTRL and rotate the wheel up or down to scroll vertically.


Lets you use the keyboard shortcuts from Designer 3.x instead of the standard Designer 7.0 keyboard shortcuts.


Options dialog box - Spelling tab


Shows suggested spellings for misspelled words found during a spelling check.


During a spelling check, shows correct spellings suggested from the main dictionary, but not from any open custom dictionaries.


Ignores words in which all of the characters are uppercase letters.


Ignores words that contain numbers.


Uses the Microsoft Office dictionary for spelling checks.


Uses the Micrografx dictionary for spelling checks.


Shows the list of dictionaries you can use to check spelling. To add an existing dictionary, click Add. To create a new custom dictionary, click New.


Creates a new custom dictionary. You can add words to the dictionary during a spelling check.


Adds a custom dictionary to the list so that you can use it to check spelling.


Removes the selected dictionary from the Custom Dictionaries list.


Options dialog box - Registry tab


Select a Key from this list when you need to examine, change, or add a value.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Shows the current value of the selected Value Name. Also lets you modify the value.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Shows the name (or names) of values for the currently selected key. You can delete the name or add new names.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Lets you add a new value for the currently selected registry key.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Lets you delete the currently selected value name from the current registry key.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Accepts the data entered in the box to the left.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


The New (registry) Value dialog box - has gone away


New Value dialog box

This dialog box lets you add a new value to the currently selected registry key.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Enter the name of the new value you are adding to the current registry key.


Check this option only if the new value you are adding to the current registry key is numeric. Do not check this option if the new value is a text string.


The Delete (registry) Value dialog box - has gone away


This dialog box lets you delete the displayed value for the currently selected registry key. To delete the value, click Yes. To cancel without deleting the value, click No.

Note

You should not modify Designer registry entries unless you are instructed to do so by Micrografx.


Options dialog box - Profile tab


Lets you manage "option profiles" (which are PRO file types that contain all of your Designer option settings). When you change to a different profile, the changes take effect immediately.

You may want to change settings for one particular session or project, and then restore your normal settings. If more than one person is running Designer from a file server or sharing a computer, each person can save and use his or her own settings.

You can choose a different profile, save your settings when you close Designer, and enter or edit a description of a profile. You also can create a new profile, and you can copy, delete, rename, and update profiles.


Lists the .PRO files from which you can choose. To create a new .PRO file, or to delete, rename, or otherwise manage your profiles, click the File Options button [image].

When you select a profile, its settings take effect immediately.


Displays a menu for managing .PRO files. You can create, copy, delete, rename, and update .PRO files.


Displays a menu that lets you specify the folder where Designer should look for .PRO files. Also lets you copy the current .PRO file.


Shows the pathname of the folder where Designer looks for .PRO files. To change the pathname, click the button to the right, and click Open From.


Accepts the description you enter in the Description box to the left.


If you select this option, all your current Designer settings will be saved in the current .PRO file each time you exit Designer.


Displays a description of the selected .PRO file. When you create a new .PRO file, enter its description in this box. For example, you could enter "Ginger’s profile for technical illustrations" or "Jack’s profile for the Kremmins Project."


New Profile Document dialog box - no longer has help


New Profile Document dialog box

This dialog box lets you save the current Designer settings as a new profile document. To create a new profile, enter a filename for it, and then click OK. To close the dialog box without creating a new profile, click Cancel.


Copy Profile Document dialog box - no longer has help


Copy Profile Document dialog box

This dialog box lets you create a copy of the current Designer profile document. Enter a name for the copy that you want to create, and then click OK. To close the dialog box without copying, click Cancel.


Delete Profile Document dialog box


This dialog box lets you delete the current Designer profile document. To delete the file, click Yes. To close the dialog box without deleting, click No.


Rename Profile Document dialog box - no longer has help


Rename Profile Document dialog box

This dialog box lets you rename the current Designer profile document. To rename the file, enter the new filename, and then click OK. To close the dialog box without renaming, click Cancel.


Blend dialog box


Blend dialog box

This dialog box lets you create series of transformations that blend one object and color into another. Each transformation is changed slightly to look more like the second object.

You can specify the number of transformations, or steps, between the objects. The more steps you use, the closer (and smoother) the transforming objects are. You can use as many as 1000 steps.

If the objects have different interior fill patterns (for example, a hatch and a gradient), Designer places the pattern of the front object in all the transformations and blends the pattern color. Designer does not blend image or object fills.

Designer 7 blend objects are dynamic, so you can transform, reshape, or warp one of the objects being blended (called a node), and the blend object recalculates automatically. You can create complex blend objects by converting steps to nodes, adding new objects as nodes, and removing nodes.

Designer cannot blend grouped objects, extruded objects, bitmap images, OLE objects, Windows metafiles, or text objects. You can convert text and extruded objects to curves, and then blend them.


Specifies the number of transformations, or steps, between the objects you are blending. Each step is a different object slightly changed to look more like the second object. The more steps you use, the closer (and smoother) the transforming objects are. You can use as many as 1000 steps.

Notes

A large number of steps can slow redraw time.

Objects blend from the front to the back object (the front object is the one you drew last).


Lets you reverse the way Designer normally compares points if you don't like the results of a blend.

Objects are drawn either clockwise or counterclockwise from a starting point. For example, closed objects are drawn counterclockwise. When Designer blends objects, it matches corresponding points of the two objects so that the order the points were drawn determines the appearance of the blend.


Deselect this option if you do not want to create a dynamic blend object, but want a series of individual objects instead.


Designer blends a point on the first object to a corresponding point on the second object. Use this button to change the origins of objects before you blend them.


Lets you convert a step to a node. After clicking this button, click the step you want to convert to a node.

You can convert any of the transformation steps in a blend to a node. This creates additional nodes that you can use to manipulate the blend. For example, you can convert a blend's center step to a node, and then drag it to stretch the blend from its center.


Lets you remove a node from a blend containing three or more nodes. After clicking this button, click the node you want to remove.

Removing a node causes the blend object to recalculate automatically. If the node that is removed is an end node, the node object is deleted. If the node that is removed is between the end nodes, it is converted to a blend step.


Lets you remove a blend.


Contour dialog box


Contour dialog box

This dialog box lets you contour one or more objects.

Contouring traces the outside edges of an open or closed object to produce an outline that is offset from the outside edges, called a contour. You can set the offset distance of the contour and the number of contours you want created. You can also set the weight, style, and color of the contour line.


Lets you set the distance that the contour is offset from the outside edges.


Opens a menu that lets you change the measuring unit used for the contour offset.


Lets you set the number of contours created.


Lets you set the line weight of the contour. To make this box available, deselect Hairline.


Lets you set the contour line weight to hairline.


Lets you set the line style (solid, dotted, dashed, or invisible).


Lets you set the color of the contour.


Select this option to delete the object or objects being contoured, leaving only the contour.


Transform dialog box


Transform dialog box

This dialog box contains five tabs to let you move, scale, flip, rotate, or skew objects.

Tip

To leave a trail of copies of the transformed object, set the number of copies in the Copies box.


Lets you select the handle or point on the object where the transform originates. The default is the object's pivot point (usually at the center of the object’s bounding box).

For example, if you select Top, left handle and then Move the object to ruler coordinate 4 cm horizontal and 3 cm vertical, Designer positions the object so that its top, left handle is on (4,3).

Note

On the Move panel, this box is only available when you select the Move Along Ruler option.


Lets you enter the number of copies to make while transforming an object. If the number of copies is 0, then the original object is affected. Each copy is spaced or resized from the previous copy as defined by your settings.


Automatically groups all the copies after a transform, but not the original object.


Shows or hides the Multiple Transforms area.


Lists the multiple transforms.


Select this option to display a wireframe preview of a transformation.


This button is labeled either Add or Modify.

Add adds the current transformation to a list of remembered transforms. This lets you apply multiple transforms to an object.

Modify sets the selected remembered transform to the current settings. Choose the remembered transform you want to change, make the changes you want, and then click Modify. The new settings appear in the list.


Deletes the highlighted transform.


Deletes all remembered transforms.


Lets you select Cartesian coordinates.

Cartesian coordinates use the familiar vertical and horizontal axes. The vertical axis is called Y, and the horizontal axis is called X.


Lets you select polar coordinates.

Polar coordinates measure the distance from the center and the angle from the axis.


Lets you set the horizontal distance to move the object, or the ruler coordinate on which to place the object.


Lets you set the vertical distance to move the object, or the ruler coordinate on which to place the object.


Lets you set the distance to move the object.


Lets you set the angle to move the object. Type a value in the Angle box, or drag the red needle in the dial control.


Bases the object's movement on its present location. For example, you can move the object one centimeter up and two centimeters to the right.


Moves an object to a specific ruler coordinate.


Defines the percentage change in the current horizontal size of an object. The current size is 100%. A number below 100% decreases the object size, and a number above 100% increases the size.

The horizontal and vertical sizes are the same unless you deselect the Proportional Scale option.


Defines the percentage change in the current vertical size of an object. The current size is 100%. A number below 100% decreases the object size, and a number above 100% increases the size.

The horizontal and vertical sizes are the same unless you deselect the Proportional Scale option.


Lets you choose between proportional and nonproportional resizing. Proportional scale is selected by default. Deselect the Proportional Scale option to resize an object nonproportionally. For example, you can increase the vertical size without automatically increasing the horizontal size.


Select this option to flip horizontally.


Select this option to flip vertically.


Select this option to flip at a specific angle. Specify the angle using the dial control or the angle box.


Lets you set the angle of the line around which the object is flipped. Type an angle in the angle box, or drag the red needle in the dial control.


Enter the angle of rotation that you want, or drag the red needle in the dial control.


Lets you set the amount of horizontal skew. Type an angle in the Horizontal Angle box, or drag the red needle in the dial at the right.


Lets you set the amount of vertical skew. Type an angle in the Vertical Angle box, or drag the red needle in the dial at the right.


XXX defined above


Flips the object like a page in a book.


Creates a horizontal (0-degree) axis.


The Unable to Apply the Transform dialog box - these may have gone away


You are trying to apply a transformation that Designer does not support for the selected object or objects.

If you have selected multiple objects, try selecting each object separately, and check the object type displayed on the status bar.


You have specified a transformation value that would exceed the visible boundaries. Click OK, and then double-check your settings in the Transform dialog box.


Extrusion Options dialog box


Extrusion Options dialog box

This dialog box lets you set extrusion options such as whether an object is lighted, the position of a light source, the degree of front lighting, the light color and intensity, the amount of ambient light, the reflectivity of the light, and an object's resolution.

Note

Lighting effects apply only to extruded objects. If you have multiple objects selected when you apply the lighting effects, the effects are applied only to the extruded objects in the selection.


Shows a preview of your settings, and lets you change the position of the light source by dragging the light bulb.

Think of the light source as a flashlight shining on an object. Changing the position of the light source lets you shine the flashlight from any position around the object. You can change the light source for one or more extruded objects. All selected extruded objects change to show the current settings and color.


Select this option to turn off lighting effects.


Lets you set the color of light on the extruded object.


Lets you set the light intensity. The intensity controls the amount of light that shines on an extruded object.

Drag the slider to the right to increase the light intensity (strength).


Lets you set the amount of ambient (surrounding) light.

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of ambient light.


Lets you set the degree of back and front lighting.

Drag the slider toward Front to increase the amount of front lighting and decrease the amount of back lighting. Drag the slider toward Back to increase the amount of back lighting and decrease the amount of front lighting.


Lets you change the resolution of extruded objects. The resolution is determined by the amount of small planes, called facets, that fit together to create a three-dimensional look. Increasing the number of facets creates smoother curves. Lowering the number of facets creates less rounded-looking extruded objects.

Drag the slider toward Fine to increase the resolution.

Note

Changing the resolution of flat-sided extruded objects such as cubes and pyramids does not change their appearance.


Lets you set the reflectivity of the light. The amount of reflectivity affects the shininess of an extruded object by increasing or decreasing the number of facets that receive a highlight. The greater the reflectivity, the shinier the surface of the object appears.

Drag the slider toward Shiny to increase the amount of reflectivity.


Lets you select a predefined lighting effect.

If a predefined lighting effect is not exactly what you want, use it as a starting point in creating your own lighting effect.


Applies the current settings to a selection.


Reduce Points dialog box


Reduce Points dialog box

This dialog box lets you smooth an object's appearance by eliminating some of its anchor points.

Complex objects, such as those produced by tracing bitmap images, often have an undesirably large number of anchor points. By reducing the number of anchor points in a traced object, you may actually improve the object's appearance, because its edges are smoothed. In other cases, you may be able to reduce the number of anchor points in an object without changing its appearance substantially.

Reducing the number of anchor points in an object reduces the file size of the object and frequently improves its printing speed.

To make it easy to see the effect of the point reduction, the dialog box shows both a "before" and "after" preview of the object. The "before" preview shows the original object with its point count unchanged. The "after" preview shows the object as it appears with reduced points.

Note

You can reduce the points of individual objects, multiple objects, or groups of objects.


Adjusts the number of points in the object.

To increase the number of points in the object, drag the slider toward More. To reduce the number of points in the object, drag the slider toward Less. The Reduced preview changes automatically to show the effect of the adjustment.


Adjusts the tension (line smoothness) of the object.

To increase the tension in the object, drag the slider toward More. To reduce the tension in the object, drag the slider toward Less. The Reduced preview changes automatically to show the effect of the adjustment.


Convert to Image dialog box


Convert to Image dialog box

This dialog box lets you convert objects, including text, to bitmap images.

In converting an object to a bitmap image, you can specify the new bitmap image’s resolution and color depth. The resolution determines the number of pixels per inch in the image. The color depth determines the maximum number of colors in the image.

Bitmap images that are converted from objects are always square or rectangular. For example, if you convert an ellipse to a bitmap image, the resulting image is rectangular. The portion of the bitmap image that is not part of the original object is set to white. For an ellipse, this is the portion of the bitmap image that is outside the ellipse.

If you want the portions of the bitmap image that are not part of the original object to be transparent, select the Transparent check box. If you want the bitmap image to be anti-aliased, select the Anti-Alias check box.


Adjusts the resolution of the bitmap image. The resolution determines the number of pixels per inch in the image.

The higher the resolution and the greater the color depth, the larger the file size of a bitmap image.


Sets the color depth of the image. The color depth determines the maximum number of colors in the image.

The higher the resolution and the greater the color depth, the larger the file size of a bitmap image.


Select this option if you want the bitmap image anti-aliased.

Anti-Aliasing is a technique for reducing the jagged-appearing boundary along the edges of different-colored shapes within a bitmap image. This process blends the boundaries between adjacent colors so that they appear smoother. As a general rule, printed images look better when anti-aliased, but many images designed just for display on the computer screen, such as images for the Web or toolbar buttons, look better when aliased.


Select this option if you want the background of the bitmap image set to transparent. If you deselect this option, the background is set to white.


Align dialog box


Align dialog box

This dialog box lets you align objects to the page and to other objects.

In aligning objects to the page, Designer uses the page margins for the alignment. For example, the Center page alignment centers objects between the left and right margins, and the Middle page alignment centers objects between the top and bottom margins.

In aligning objects to each other, Designer uses the bounding box that surrounds the selected objects as the basis for the alignment. For example, if you select three objects and Top align them, they align to the top boundary of the surrounding bounding box.


Shows a preview of the alignment.


Select this option to align objects to the page.

In aligning objects to the page, Designer uses the page margins for the alignment. For example, the Center page alignment centers objects between the left and right margins, and the Middle page alignment centers objects between the top and bottom margins.


Select this option to align objects to other objects.

In aligning objects to each other, Designer uses the bounding box that surrounds the selected objects as the basis for the alignment. For example, if you select three objects and Top align them, they align to the top boundary of the surrounding bounding box.


Returns the objects to their original positions.


When Aligning Objects: Aligns all selected objects to the left of their bounding box.

When Aligning To Page: Aligns all selected objects to the left page margin.


When Aligning Objects: Aligns all selected objects to the horizontal center of their bounding box.

When Aligning To Page: Aligns all selected objects to the horizontal center of the page.


When Aligning Objects: Aligns all selected objects to the right edge of their bounding box.

When Aligning To Page: Aligns all selected objects to the right page margin.


When Aligning Objects: Distributes the selected objects horizontally within their bounding box so that they are equally spaced.

When Aligning To Page: Distributes the selected objects horizontally on the page so that they are equally spaced.


When Aligning Objects: Aligns all selected objects to the top edge of their bounding box.

When Aligning To Page: Aligns all selected objects to the top page margin.


When Aligning Objects: Aligns all selected objects to the vertical center of their bounding box.

When Aligning To Page: Aligns all selected objects to the vertical center of the page.


When Aligning Objects: Aligns all selected objects to the bottom edge of their bounding box.

When Aligning To Page: Aligns all selected objects to the bottom page margin.


When Aligning Objects: Distributes the selected objects vertically within their bounding box so that they are equally spaced.

When Aligning To Page: Distributes the selected objects vertically on the page so that they are equally spaced.


Select this option to align the selected objects to the page as a group.

Align Objects as a Group treats the selected objects as a group only for page alignment purposes. It does not actually group the objects or affect the operation of other commands.


Align to Path dialog box


Align to Path dialog box

This dialog box lets you align objects along the path of another object. For example, you can draw a curve and align a series of stars along it. Grouped and text objects cannot be used as a path (but you can align them to a path).

It is easy to get the alignment that you want because Designer previews on your page the effect of alignment settings as you choose them. When the alignment preview shows the arrangement that you want, you can apply the alignment.

Note

Designer removes warps, rotations, and skews of objects that are aligned to a path. Convert the objects to curves before aligning them if you want to keep their previous transformations.


Selects the previous object to use as a path for the other objects. The initial path selection is the object that provides the longest path.

The Previous button cycles through objects in the opposite order from the order in which they were drawn.


Selects the next object to use as a path for the other objects.

The Next button cycles through objects in the order in which they were drawn.


Positions objects so the left edge of each object aligns to the alignment point (the point on the object around which other objects align).


Centers objects horizontally around the alignment point (the point on the object around which other objects align).


Positions objects so the right edge of each object aligns to the alignment point (the point on the object around which other objects align).


Distributes objects evenly on the path (the object around which other objects align).


Aligns objects in the opposite direction in which the path was drawn (the alignment direction is endpoint to origin).


Aligns objects in the direction in which the path was drawn (the alignment direction is origin to endpoint).


Places objects along the path without skewing or rotating the shapes.


Aligns the objects along a path by rotating, but not changing the shapes.


Controls where the objects vertically rest on a path. An offset of 100 aligns the bottom of the objects to the path, an offset of 0 aligns the middle of the objects to the path, and an offset of -100 aligns the top of the objects to the path.

An offset greater than 100 (to the limit of 200) aligns the bottom of the objects above the path. An offset less than -100 (to the limit of -200) aligns the top of the objects below the path.


Lets you drag a red alignment point along the path object to specify the alignment location.

To accept the alignment point repositioning, click OK.


Sets the alignment point to the beginning of the (open) path you are using to align objects.

To set the alignment point to a custom location, click the Choose Position button.


Sets the alignment point to the middle of the (open) path you are using to align objects.

To set the alignment point to a custom location, click the Choose Position button.


Sets the alignment point to the end of the (open) path you are using to align objects.

To set the alignment point to a custom location, click the Choose Position button.


Sets the alignment point to the top edge of the (closed) path you are using to align objects.

To set the alignment point to a custom location, click the Choose Position button.


Sets the alignment point to the leftmost edge of the (closed) path you are using to align objects.

To set the alignment point to a custom location, click the Choose Position button.


Sets the alignment point to the rightmost edge of the (closed) path you are using to align objects.

To set the alignment point to a custom location, click the Choose Position button.


Sets the alignment point to the bottom edge of the (closed) path you are using to align objects.

To set the alignment point to a custom location, click the Choose Position button.


Unused controls


Uses the bounding box that surrounds all selected objects as the basis for alignment. For example, if you select three objects and align them at top left, they align to the top left corner of the surrounding bounding box.


Lets you use buttons to change the alignment of objects on the page. When you choose an alignment button, the preview box displays the object alignment.


Lets you align text and non-text objects along the path of other objects. For example, you can draw a curve and align other objects along it.

You also can change how text and shapes align to a path with the alignment orientation options.

Note

Text aligned to a curve is treated as a single object. To align individual characters to a path, use the Path Fit button [image].


Lets you set options for moving selected objects.


Lets you precisely resize a selected object. You can resize an object proportionally or nonproportionally.


Lets you numerically flip (reflect) selected objects. To numerically flip an object, you specify an imaginary line that passes through or beside an object at any angle. The object behaves as though it is hinged to the line and flips over it.


Precisely rotates an object. This method lets you specify the object's degree of rotation.


Lets you specify a degree of skew, or slant. You can specify a horizontal and vertical skew.


Open db Description

Lets you enter or edit a description of the file.

Note

The Open dialog box does not show a file preview for DRW files. When you open a DRW file, it is automatically converted to a DSF file, and the extension is changed to DSF.


Links db Links

Lists all the OLE objects in the current file. For each object, the list provides the object type, original file name, the type of link, and whether it is updated automatically or manually.


Links db Update options

Lets you choose to update the selected link either automatically each time you open the Designer file or manually when you open or save the Designer file.


Links db Update Now

Immediately updates the selected link.


Links db Cancel Link

Breaks the OLE link between an object and its original program (server).


Links db Change Link

Opens a dialog box that lets you select a new file path for the selected link. The new file can be identical to the old file, but can be in a different location or it may be a completely new file.


Links db Edit

Lets you edit the object selected in the Links list box. Designer launches the object's source application for you to edit the object.


Links db Activate

Plays the object (for example, sound).


Links db Done

Closes the dialog box.


Insert Object db Object Type list

Lists the types of OLE object you can insert. Designer uses the type you select to determine which application to launch.


Transform db Origin

Lets you place the line, or reflection axis, through any of the nine object origin points. For example, select the center origin to flip an object around a central axis, or select the right middle origin to reflect the object around its right side.


Horizontal Angle

Lets you change the angle that the object is skewed (you can also drag the red arrow).


Vertical Angle

Lets you change the angle that the object is skewed (you can also drag the red arrow).


CSH_FMT.DOC - Context-Sensitive Help for Dialog Boxes

Format Menu

Object Format db

Category Name db

Edit Object Fill db

Color Picker db

Palette Manager db

Color Name db

Color Mixer db

Palette Name db

Palette Options db


Generic Object Format buttons


#define HLPTOP_ACCESSCOLORPICKER        19870   // edit color button


Opens the Color Picker dialog box. The Color Picker dialog box lets you choose a color from the full range of possible colors and add it to the current palette.


#define HLPTOP_COLORMIXERDLG            25599


Opens the Color Mixer dialog box. The Color Mixer dialog box lets you choose a color by mixing two or four existing colors.


#define HLPTOP_PALLIST                  19033


Lets you choose a color palette.


#define HLPTOP_PALETTEOPTIONS           19019


Opens the Palette Options dialog box. This dialog box lets you customize the appearance of the Color Palette.


#define HLPTOP_FORMATPREVIEW            25693


Previews the effect of the current Object Format settings on a selection. (This button has no effect if nothing is selected.) You may have to move the dialog box to see the selection.


#define HLPTOP_COLORPALETTE             19910   // color palette


Displays the available colors.


Object Format dialog box


#define HLPTOP_OBJECTFORMATDLG          25694   //Object Format db


This dialog box contains five tabs that provide easy access to all object and text attributes.

The Line Style tab lets you set the line attributes of objects.

The Line Fill tab lets you set the line fill of objects.

The Interior Fill tab lets you set the interior fill of objects.

The Text tab lets you set the attributes of text.

The General tab lets you set or check an object's name, layer, position, and size. You can also access the Coordinates and Properties dialog boxes from this tab.

By rolling up the Object Format dialog box, you can keep it accessible, but out of your way. Click [image] on the title bar to roll up the dialog box. Click [image] to unroll it.


#define HLPTOP_FILL_LOCK                25696   //Object Format


Clicking this button alternately locks and unlocks this tab.

 indicates the tab is unlocked. When unlocked, the tab tracks the fill of the objects you select. For example, if you select an object with a hatch fill, the tab shows the hatch fill panel.

 indicates the tab is locked. When locked, the tab does not track the fill of the objects you select. Instead, it shows the panel of the last fill that you applied to an object.


#define HLPTOP_WINDALT                  25697   //Object Format


Lets you choose whether overlap areas in an object are filled or skipped. Click this button to switch between the two settings.

 chooses to fill overlap areas.

 chooses to skip overlap areas.

An overlap area is a bounded part of a closed object that overlaps another part of the object. You can create overlap areas by drawing or reshaping objects, or by connecting objects that overlap.


#define HLPTOP_FOREAFT                  25698   //Object Format


Lets you choose whether an object is filled before or after its lines are drawn. Click this button to switch between the two settings.

 chooses to fill an object before its lines are drawn.

 chooses to fill an object after its lines are drawn.

The Fill Before/After option does not apply to hairlines. If an object has both hairlines and weighted lines, only the weighted lines are affected.


#define HLPTOP_FILLSCALING              25699   //Object Format


Lets you choose whether an object's fill or lines transform when you transform the object. Click this button to switch between the two settings.

 turns off transform.

 turns on transform.


#define HLPTOP_OVERPRINT        17078   //Object Format


Lets you turn overprinting on or off for a selected object. Click this button to switch between the two settings.

 turns off overprinting.

 turns on overprinting.

Overprinting affects only color separations. It does not affect how an object displays or prints.


Object Format - Text Tab - Fonts panel

Done on Text toolbar: Bold, Italic, Underline, SmallCaps. Superscript, Subscript

Done on Text toolbar: Font List, Font Size


#define HLPTOP_FONTBTN          17401    // Font button


Displays options for selecting type attributes such as font, font size, style, leading, and font color.


#define HLPTOP_LEADINGCTL               20544   // leading


The space between lines of text is called leading. Leading is measured (in points) from baseline to baseline. The default is the current font size plus approximately 15% of the font size (the percent may vary from font to font). For example, if the current font is 10 points, then the default leading is approximately 11.5 points.

Note

Because each line in freeform text is treated as a separate paragraph, leading is unavailable for freeform text. To change the spacing between lines in freeform text, use the Paragraph Spacing options on the Spacing panel.

You can change the leading in selected block text or specify leading for block text you are going to enter. If a selected block text contains different sizes of text, Designer displays leading for the largest font.


#define HLPTOP_FOREGRNDTXTCOLOR         19748  //Text foreground color


Lets you set the text foreground color.


#define HLPTOP_BACKGRNDTXTCOLOR         19749  //Text background color


Lets you set the text background color.


Shows a sample of the font in the font box.


Object Format - Text Tab - Tab Stops panel


#define HLPTOP_TABSTOPBTN       17404    // Tab Stops button


Displays options for setting tab stops and indents.

Tab stops are measured from the left margin of the text object. For example, if the second tab stop is 1.0 picas, it is 1.0 picas from the left margin.


#define HLPTOP_TABLIST                  20552   // tab list


Displays the current tab stops and the type of tab stops.


#define HLPTOP_TABDELETE                20553   // delete button


Deletes the highlighted tab stop.


#define HLPTOP_TABCLEAR                 20554   // empty button


Deletes all tab stops.


#define HLPTOP_TABPOSITION              20559   // position control


Specifies the position of a tab stop.

To define a single tab, enter a tab position, choose a tab type, and then click the Add Tab button.

To repeat the tab stop at uniform intervals, click the Repeat Tab button.


#define HLPTOP_TABTYPE                  25680


Specifies the type of a tab.

Click [image] to choose a left tab.

Click [image] to choose a right tab.

Click [image] to choose a center tab.

Click [image] to choose a decimal tab.


#define HLPTOP_TABLEADERLIST            20562   // leader


Leaders are characters such as periods (...), hyphens (---), and underscores (_) that appear to the left of tabulated text. Choose None to specify no leaders.


#define HLPTOP_TABADD                   20560   // add tab button


Adds a single tab stop at the position entered in the position box.


Specifies the number of tabs created by the Repeat Tab button.


#define HLPTOP_TABREPEAT                20561   // repeat tab button


Creates tab stops at uniform intervals. The number of tab stops is specified in the box to the left of this button.


#define HLPTOP_MARGINDENT               20531   // indent


Moves the first line of each selected paragraph to the left or right of the left margin. If you select a text object, the first line of each paragraph separated by a carriage return (ENTER key) is indented. If you highlight a portion of one or more paragraphs, only the first lines of those paragraphs are indented.

A positive value moves the first line of text to the right of the left margin; a negative indent moves the text to the left of the left margin.


#define HLPTOP_LEFTMARG                 20532   // left margin


Defines the amount of space between the left edge of block text and its bounding box. You can highlight paragraphs to give different paragraphs in the same block different margins. The default left margin is none.


#define HLPTOP_RIGHTMARG                20533   // right margin


Defines the amount of space between the right edge of block text and its bounding box. You can highlight paragraphs to give different paragraphs in the same block different margins. The default right margin is none.


Object Format - Text Tab - Spacing panel


#define HLPTOP_SPACINGBTN       17403    // Spacing button


Displays options for setting the spacing between characters, words, lines, and paragraphs.


#define HLPTOP_LEFTALIGN                20534   // align left


Aligns each line of text in selected paragraphs to the left text margin.


#define HLPTOP_CENTERALIGN              20535   // align center


Centers each line of text in selected paragraphs between the left and right text margins.


#define HLPTOP_RIGHTALIGN               20536   // align right


Aligns each line of text in selected paragraphs to the right text margin.


#define HLPTOP_HORZJUSTIFY              20537   // justify horizontally


Adds space between words as necessary to align lines of text in selected paragraphs with both the right and the left text margins. The last line of the paragraph aligns to the left margin.


#define HLPTOP_FORCEJUSTIFY             20538   // force justify horizontally


Adds space between words as necessary to align lines of text in selected paragraphs with both the right and the left text margins. Unlike with the Justify alignment, Force Justify justifies the last line of the paragraph.


#define HLPTOP_TOPALIGN                 20539   // top align


Aligns text to the top margin of the text bounding box.


#define HLPTOP_MIDALIGN                 20540   // middle align


Aligns text between the top and middle margins.


#define HLPTOP_BOTALIGN                 20541   // bottom align


Aligns text to the bottom margin of the text bounding box.


#define HLPTOP_VERTJUSTIFY              20542   // justify vertically


Equally spaces lines of text between the top and bottom margins of the text bounding box.


#define HLPTOP_HYPHENATE                20550   // hyphenation


Designer can automatically hyphenate words to help decrease the amount of raggedness of left justified text, and to help maintain character and word spacing in left justified text. Select the Automatic Hyphenation option to automatically hyphenate words. You can manually add or remove hyphens later, if you want.


#define HLPTOP_WORDSPACECTL             20545   // inter-word spacing


Type a percentage to change the spacing between words. The default is 100% spacing. Decreasing this percentage decreases the spacing between words; increasing the percentage increases the spacing.


#define HLPTOP_CHARSPACECTL             20546   // inter-char spacing


Type a percentage to change the spacing between characters. A percentage below 100% decreases spacing; a percentage above 100% increases spacing.


#define HLPTOP_BEFOREPARAG              20547   // before paragraph


Use this box to change the default spacing above paragraphs. If this amount is set to zero (0), the current leading will be used as the spacing between paragraphs.


#define HLPTOP_AFTERPARAG               20548   // after paragraph


Use this box to change the default spacing below paragraphs. If this amount is set to zero (0), the current leading is used as the spacing between paragraphs.

Note

If you have amounts entered in both the Before and After boxes, Designer adds these amounts to determine the spacing between the selected paragraphs. For example, if you enter 40 for Before and 30 for After, Designer uses 70 for the spacing between the selected paragraphs.


#define HLPTOP_DROPCAP                  20805


 Select this option to make the first character of a selected paragraph lower and larger than other text in the paragraph.

Drop caps are typically used at the beginning of magazine articles and other places where you want to mark a change in the material without printing a new title.


#define HLPTOP_DROPCAPHT                20549   // drop cap height


Adjust the percentage in this box to change the size of the first letter as a percentage of its normal height (normal height is 100%). For example, 200% doubles the size of the first letter of the paragraph.


Object Format - Line Style tab - Line Ends panel


#define HLPTOP_LINEENDS                 18436


Displays options that let you set line ends.

The ends of a line can have identical or different markers, or you can have a marker at only one end. For the purpose of specifying where a line end appears, each line has a starting and ending point, depending upon how the line was drawn.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line end applies the end to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line end sets the default line end.


#define HLPTOP_ENDSELECTOR              19951   // end selector


Lets you choose line end settings. Click the arrow beside the box to see additional symbols.

To set line ends separately, deselect the Same Type option. Then set the starting line end using the left box and the ending line end using the right box.


#define HLPTOP_ENDPASTE                 19953   // paste button


Lets you paste any object from the Clipboard as a line end to be added to the available ends.


#define HLPTOP_ENDREMOVE                19954   // remove button


Lets you remove line ends from the list of available ends. You can only remove line ends that you have added.


#define HLPTOP_ENDSAMETYPE              19949   // same type option


Lets you choose to set both ends as the same symbol (such as arrow, square, or triangle).


#define HLPTOP_ENDSAMESIZE              19950   // same size option


Lets you choose to set both ends with the same attributes (such as angle and offset).


#define HLPTOP_ENDWIDTH                 19955   // width control


Adjusts the width of a line end to a percentage of its original width. Setting this value to 50% makes the line end width half the original size; changing the value to 200% makes the line end width twice the original size.


#define HLPTOP_ENDHEIGHT                19956   // height control


Adjusts the height of a line end to a percentage of its original height. Setting this value to 50% makes the line end height half the original size; changing the value to 200% makes the line end height twice the original size.

Tip

To resize the line end proportionally, set Width and Height to the same value.


#define HLPTOP_ENDXOFFSET               19957   // x offset control


Repositions the line end symbol along the line in either direction. Enter a positive value to move away from the center of the line. Enter a negative value to move toward the center of the line.


#define HLPTOP_ENDYOFFSET               19958   // y offset control


Repositions the line end symbol above or below the line. Enter a positive value to move above the line. Enter a negative value to move below the line.


#define HLPTOP_ENDHORZFLIP              19961   // horizontal flip option


Lets you flip the line end symbol horizontally.


Lets you flip the line end symbol vertically.


#define HLPTOP_ENDUSESTYLE              19962   // use line option


Sets the line end to the same as the line style. If this option is selected, the line end list box displays the line ends with the same attributes as the line. If this option is deselected, the line end list box displays the line ends with the original attributes of the line end.


#define HLPTOP_ENDANGLE                 19959   // angle control


Lets you rotate the line end symbol by a specific angle.


Object Format - Line Style Tab - Line Style panel


Need line style button


Displays options that let you set whether a line is visible, solid, dotted, or dashed.

Line styles apply both to open objects such as straight lines and arcs, and to the borders of closed objects. You can apply a line style to a line of any thickness.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line style applies the style to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line style sets the default line style.


#define HLPTOP_STYLEINVISIBLE           19963   // invisible option


Choose this option to make the line transparent (no fill).


#define HLPTOP_STYLEGALLERY             19964   // style gallery


Choose the line style that you want to apply.


Object Format - Line Style Tab - Line Weight panel


#define HLPTOP_LINEWEIGHT               18438


Displays options that let you set line weight (thickness), choose join and cap options, and define calligraphic lines.

Line weight applies both to open objects such as straight lines and arcs, and to the borders of closed objects.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line weight applies the weight to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line weight sets the default line weight. The current line weight is shown on the status bar.


None done on Line Style panel


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTHAIRLINE           19965   // hairline option


Makes the line weight (thickness) of selected lines a hairline, the narrowest line supported by the display screen or the printing device.


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTWEIGHTED           19966   // weighted option


Lets you specify a weight (thickness) for lines.

Cap, join, and calligraphic options are available only for weighted lines.


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTCALI               19967   // calligraphic option


Lets you create lines of varying thickness. You can set the angle and size of the calligraphic "brush." When you select this option, the dialog box shows a preview of the calligraphic pen according to the current settings. You can enter a new angle or drag the red line in the preview to change the angle.


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTWIDTH              19968   // width control


Lets you set the thickness of lines.


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTLUNITS             19969   // units button


Opens a menu to let you change the measuring units used for line weight.


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTHEIGHT             19970   // height control


Lets you set the height of lines.


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTANGLE              19971   // pen angle control


Lets you enhance the effects created with the Width and Height settings. In a calligraphic line, the Pen Angle setting forces the pen tip to stay at the chosen angle, much as a calligraphic pen is held at particular angles to achieve lines of varying thickness.


Shows a sample of the pen, and lets you set the angle by dragging the red needle.


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTCAP                19974   // cap button


Sets the appearance of line ends without line end markers. Click this button to cycle through the three options: Round, Flat, and Square.

The Round Cap (the default) places the center point of a circle at the end point of the line. The diameter of the circle matches the width and height of the line.

The Flat Cap ends the line at the end point of the line.

The Square Cap places the center point of a square at the end point of the line. The width and height of the square match the width and height of the line.

Tip

To achieve a dotted (rather than dashed) line style, experiment with a round cap and a line style of short dashes.


#define HLPTOP_WEIGHTJOIN               19975   // join button


Sets the appearance of the corner intersection of lines that join. Click this button to cycle through the three options: Round, Bevel, and Mitre.

The Round option (the default) places the center point of a circle at the vertex of two line ends. (The diameter of the circle matches the width of the lines.)

The Bevel option averages the angles of the two lines, creating a blunt intersection.

The Mitre option creates a pointed intersection that is the true intersection of two lines.

Note

When you select Mitre, lines that meet at angles sharper than 11 degrees are drawn with beveled joins. This prevents objects from having extremely pointed joins.


Object Format - Line Fill tab - Solid panel


Displays options that let you set line color.

Line color applies both to open objects, such as straight lines and arcs, and to the borders of closed objects.

If an object is already selected, choosing a line color applies the color to the selected object. If no object is selected, choosing a line color sets the default line color. The current line color is shown on the status bar.


Other panel buttons in tools


Object Format - Line Fill tab - Gradient panel


Lets you set a gradient color and adjust its position in the gradient. To set a gradient color, click a pointer and then click a color in the color palette. To change how the color graduates from one color to another, drag the pointer. To add a new pointer, click the gradient color band. To delete a pointer, select the pointer and press DELETE.


Displays the gradient. To add a new pointer, click this color band.


#define HLPTOP_LINEARGRAD               19919   // linear gradient option


Click this button to define a linear gradient.


#define HLPTOP_RADIALGRAD               19920   // radial gradient option


Click this button to define a radial gradient.


#define HLPTOP_SQUAREGRAD               19921   // square gradient option


Click this button to define a square gradient.


#define HLPTOP_CONICALGRAD              25701


Click the button to define a conical gradient.


#define HLPTOP_GRADCTL                  25702


Drag the indicator in this box to set gradient values using the mouse.


#define HLPTOP_GRADXORIGIN              19923   // gradient x origin


Adjusts the x-axis of a gradient. A setting of less than 50 moves the center of the gradient to the left of the center of the object. A setting of more than 50 moves the center of the gradient to the right of the center of the object.


#define HLPTOP_GRADYORIGIN              19924   // gradient y origin


Adjusts the y-axis of a gradient. A setting of less than 50 moves the center of the gradient above the center of the object. A setting of more than 50 moves the center of the gradient below the object.


#define HLPTOP_GRADANGLE                19925   // gradient angle


Adjusts the angle of a gradient.


Object Format - Line Fill Tab - Hatch panel


#define HLPTOP_FILLGALLERY              25705


Displays the available patterns. Click a pattern to select it.


#define HLPTOP_HATCHWEIGHT              19853   // hatch weight control


Lets you change the line weight (thickness) of hatch fills. The default value is 100%. Changing this value to 200% makes the lines twice as heavy; setting it to 50% makes the lines half as heavy.


#define HLPTOP_HATCHSPACING             19854   // hatch spacing control


Lets you change the spacing between hatch lines. The default value is 100% (no change). Setting this value to 200% doubles the space between lines; setting it to 50% cuts the space in half.


#define HLPTOP_HATCHFORE                19856   // hatch foreground


Sets the foreground color of the hatch pattern.


#define HLPTOP_HATCHBACK                19857   // hatch background


Sets the color behind the hatch pattern.

Note

To make a hatch pattern's background transparent (no fill), select the X color swatch.


Object Format - Line Fill Tab - Image panel


#define HLPTOP_FILLCATEGORY             25703


Lets you choose a fill category.


#define HLPTOP_FILLCATEGORY_OPS         25704


Displays a menu of category options.


#define HLPTOP_PASTE            17032


Adds the contents of the Clipboard to the gallery as a new fill.


#define HLPTOP_FILLREMOVE               25708


Removes the selected fill from the gallery.


#define HLPTOP_BMPSCALE                 19992   // scale control


The default value for Image Scale is 100%. Setting this value to 200% makes the image twice as large; setting it to 50% makes the image half as large.


Copies an edited fill to the gallery as a new fill.


Replaces the selected fill with the edited fill.


Object Format - Line Fill Tab - Object panel


#define HLPTOP_FILLEDIT                 25709


Opens the Edit Object Fill dialog box which lets you change the arrangement, flip characteristics, rotation, size, and spacing of an object fill.


Object Format - General tab


Name box defined in Object Properties db


Layer box defined in Layers db


Coordinates button defined on Ribbon toolbar


Properties button defined on Object menu


X position box defined on Object Coordinates db


Y position box defined on Object Coordinates db


From box defined on Object Coordinates db


Width box defined on Object Coordinates db


Height box defined on Object Coordinates db


Category Name dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGPALETTENAME   17478    //palette name


Category Name dialog box

This dialog box lets you name (or rename) a category. Type a name for the category, and then click OK.


#define HLPTOP_PALETTENAME              20526   // palette name dialog


Type the name that you want to use for the category.


Edit Object Fill dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGSYMFILL               18401   // Symbol fill Edit


Edit Object Fill dialog box

This dialog box lets you change the arrangement, flip characteristics, rotation, size, and spacing of an object fill. You can add a new object fill pattern or replace a pattern you previously added with a new one. You can even use multiple objects of different shapes.


#define HLPTOP_TILESYMBYROW             20636   // tile by row


Forms the object pattern by repeating the fill object horizontally as a series of rows.


#define HLPTOP_TILESYMBYCOL             20637   // tile by column


Forms the object pattern by repeating the fill object vertically as a series of columns.


#define HLPTOP_CENTERSYM                20635   // center


Uses a single, centered copy of the fill object rather than a pattern.


#define HLPTOP_NOFLIPSYM                20638   // flip - none


To flip objects within an object fill pattern, you can choose from the following.

Setting	Effect

None	No flip.

All	Flip all the objects in the fill.

Every Other	Flip every other object.

Row or Column	Flip every other row or column.

You must select About X (vertical) or About Y (horizontal) to flip objects. This specifies the coordinate axis about which the objects are flipped.


#define HLPTOP_FLIPSYMALL               20639   // flip - all


To flip objects within an object fill pattern, you can choose from the following.

Setting	Effect

None	No flip.

All	Flip all the objects in the fill.

Every Other	Flip every other object.

Row or Column	Flip every other row or column.

You must select About X (vertical) or About Y (horizontal) to flip objects. This specifies the coordinate axis about which the objects are flipped.


#define HLPTOP_FLIPSYMALT               20640   // flip - every other


To flip objects within an object fill pattern, you can choose from the following.

Setting	Effect

None	No flip.

All	Flip all the objects in the fill.

Every Other	Flip every other object.

Row or Column	Flip every other row or column.

You must select About X (vertical) or About Y (horizontal) to flip objects. This specifies the coordinate axis about which the objects are flipped.


#define HLPTOP_FLIPSYMROW               20641   // flip - row or column


To flip objects within an object fill pattern, you can choose from the following.

Setting	Effect

None	No flip.

All	Flip all the objects in the fill.

Every Other	Flip every other object.

Row or Column	Flip every other row or column.

You must select About X (vertical) or About Y (horizontal) to flip objects. This specifies the coordinate axis about which the objects are flipped.


#define HLPTOP_FLIPSYMABOUTX            20642   // flip - about x


To flip objects within an object fill pattern, you can choose from the following.

Setting	Effect

None	No flip.

All	Flip all the objects in the fill.

Every Other	Flip every other object.

Row or Column	Flip every other row or column.

You must select About X (vertical) or About Y (horizontal) to flip objects. This specifies the coordinate axis about which the objects are flipped.


#define HLPTOP_FLIPSYMABOUTY            20643   // flip - about y


To flip objects within an object fill pattern, you can choose from the following.

Setting	Effect

None	No flip.

All	Flip all the objects in the fill.

Every Other	Flip every other object.

Row or Column	Flip every other row or column.

You must select About X (vertical) or About Y (horizontal) to flip objects. This specifies the coordinate axis about which the objects are flipped.


#define HLPTOP_PRVWZOOMIN               20645   // zoom in button


Click this button to zoom in on the object fill. Each click on the Zoom In button changes the view to the next higher 100% view (200%, 300%, and so forth).

The current zoom factor is displayed above the button.


#define HLPTOP_PRVWZOOMOUT              20646   // zoom out button


Click this button to see more of the object fill. Above 100%, each click on the Zoom Out button changes the view to the next lower 100% view (300%, 200%, and so forth). Below 100%, each click on the Zoom Out button changes to the next fractional view (1/2, 1/3, 1/4, and so forth).

The current zoom factor is displayed above the button.


Need preview area box


#define HLPTOP_ROTATESYMPAT             20649   // rotate pattern


Rotates the whole object fill pattern.


#define HLPTOP_ROTATESYM                20650   // rotate object


Rotates each individual object in the object fill.


#define HLPTOP_ROTATESYMANGLE           20652   // rotate angle control


Lets you set the angle of rotation. You can enter a value directly in this box or drag the red dial.


#define HLPTOP_ROTATESYMDIAL            20651   // rotate dial


Lets you set the angle of rotation. You can enter a value directly in the Angle box or drag the red dial.


#define HLPTOP_SYMWIDTH                 20653   // width


Lets you change the width of the object by a percentage of its original width.

The default value is 100%. Changing the value to 50% makes the object half the original width; changing the value to 200% makes the object twice the original width. To scale the object proportionally, change Width % and Height % the same amount.


#define HLPTOP_SYMHEIGHT                20654   // height


Lets you change the height of the object by a percentage of its original height.

The default value is 100%. Changing the value to 50% makes the object half the original height; changing the value to 200% makes the object twice the original height. To scale the object proportionally, change Width % and Height % the same amount.


#define HLPTOP_SYMXSPACING              20655   // x spacing


Lets you adjust the horizontal spacing between tiled objects. Entering a negative value causes objects to overlap; entering a positive value creates space between objects. A value of zero makes the bounding boxes of the objects flush with one another.


#define HLPTOP_SYMYSPACING              20656   // y spacing


Lets you adjust the vertical spacing between tiled objects. Entering a negative value causes objects to overlap; entering a positive value creates space between objects. A value of zero makes the bounding boxes of the objects flush with one another.


#define HLPTOP_SYMXSHIFT                20657   // x shift


Shifts the entire object fill pattern horizontally within the containing object. This lets you control how the fill pattern looks at the left and right edges of the containing object.

A positive value shifts the pattern to the right; a negative value shifts the pattern to the left.


#define HLPTOP_SYMYSHIFT                20658   // y shift


Shifts the entire object fill pattern vertically within the containing object. This lets you control how the fill pattern looks at the top and bottom edges of the containing object.

A positive value shifts the pattern down; a negative value shifts the pattern up.


#define HLPTOP_SYMSTAGGER               20659   // stagger


Lets you stagger the position of every other row or column. For example, to illustrate a brick wall, you could tile a brick-shaped object by row and then set the Stagger to 50%.


#define HLPTOP_FOREGROUND               25706   //edit object db


Sets the foreground color of the object fill.


#define HLPTOP_BACKGROUND               25707   //edit object db


Set the color of the area around the fill object.

Note

To make an object fill's background transparent (no fill), select the X color swatch.


#define HLPTOP_ORIG_FILL                25710   //edit object db


Select this option to retain the fill object's original interior fill color.

Note

If you want to retain all of the original colors of an object you are adding to the gallery, select Original for both Fill Color and Line Color.


#define HLPTOP_FG_FILL                  25711   //edit object db


Select this option to change the fill object's interior fill color to the foreground color.

Note

If you want to change all of the colors of an object you are adding to the gallery, select Foreground for both Fill Color and Line Color.


#define HLPTOP_ORIG_LINE                25712   //edit object db


Select this option to retain the fill object's original line color.

Note

If you want to retain all of the original colors of an object you are adding to the gallery, select Original for both Fill Color and Line Color.


#define HLPTOP_FG_LINE                  25713   //edit object db


Select this option to change the fill object's line color to the foreground color.

Note

If you want to change all of the colors of an object you are adding to the gallery, select Foreground for both Fill Color and Line Color.


Palette dialog box


Palette dialog box

This dialog box lets you specify the name of a new palette.

To create a new palette containing the Master Palette colors, type a new palette name, select Copy the Colors in the Master Palette to the New Palette, and click OK.

To create a new, empty palette, type a new palette name, select Create the New Palette without Colors, and click OK.

To cancel the palette action, click Cancel.


Type the name that you want to use for the palette.


Select this option to copy the colors from the Master Palette to the new palette.


Select this option to create a new, empty palette.


Color Picker dialog box


HLS tab of Color Picker dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGCOLOR                 18370   // Color Picker dialog


Color Picker dialog box

This dialog box lets you choose a color from the full range of possible colors and add it to the Color Palette.

Click the HLS tab to select the HLS color model.

Click the RGB tab to select the RGB color model.

Click the CMYK tab to select the CMYK color model.

Click the Spot tab to select a color from the PANTONE® MATCHING SYSTEM.

The HLS model defines a color by setting its hue, lightness, and saturation attributes. The RGB model defines a color by the amount of red, green, and blue in it. The CMYK model defines a color by the percentage of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black in it.

You can use whichever color model you prefer for choosing colors. After picking a color in one model, click the tab of any other model to see the values for the color in that model.

The underlying model that represents the full range of colors is a three-dimensional cube. The color refiner box shows two of these dimensions, while the slider below the color refiner box shows the third dimension.

The list box lets you choose two of the components of the selected color model. These two components are illustrated as width and height in the color refiner box. The third component of the color model (depth in the cubical color model) is controlled by the horizontal slider.

For example, if you select the HLS color model and select Hue-Lightness in the list box, hue is width (left and right), lightness is height (up and down), and saturation is depth (the slider).

If you choose the CMYK model, an additional slider lets you choose the amount of black (K) to be included in the color if you choose manual black component.


#define HLPTOP_COLORSPACEVIEW           25604   //color picker?


Lets you choose the components for the color refiner box.


#define HLPTOP_GRID_SIZE                25596  //color picker


Adjusts the increment used by spin boxes. Move the Grid slider to the plus sign to set the increment to 10, so each click of an arrow changes the color value by 10 units. Move the slider to the minus sign if you want the grid increment to be 1.


#define HLPTOP_RESOLUTION               25597  //color picker


Sets the resolution of the color refiner and slider. Move the Resolution slider toward the plus sign to increase the resolution, toward the minus sign to decrease the resolution. Decreasing the resolution speeds up the color display.


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPH               20794


Shows the hue of the current color in a numeric range of 0 through 360. The value 0 is red, 120 is green, 240 is blue, and 360 cycles back to red.


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPL               20795


Shows the amount of lightness of the current color. The range is 0 (black) through 100 (white).


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPS               20796


Shows the amount of saturation of the current color. The range is 0 (no saturation) through 100 (maximum saturation).


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPR               20797


Shows the amount of red in the current color. The range is 0 through 255.


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPG               20798


Shows the amount of green in the current color. The range is 0 through 255.


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPB               20799


Shows the amount of blue in the current color. The range is 0 through 255.


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPC               20800


Shows the amount of cyan in the current color. The range is 0 through 100.


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPM               20801


Shows the amount of magenta in the current color. The range is 0 through 100.


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPY               20802


Shows the amount of yellow in the current color. The range is 0 through 100.


#define HLPTOP_COLORCOMPK               20803


Shows the amount of black in the current color. The range is 0 through 100.


#define HLPTOP_UNDERCOLOR               25788


Opens a menu that lets you set the black component. Choose Manual Undercolor Removal to set the black component manually. Choose a percentage if you want Designer to set the black component automatically.


Shows the original color.


Shows the currently defined color.


#define HLPTOP_TINT                     25598


Sets a percentage tint value, which is used to indicate a color to be screened as a halftone at color separation. The tint values range from 100% (solid color, no tint) to 0% (no color at all).

To make fine adjustments with the Tint slider, use the arrow keys. The Tint value decreases or increases by one percentage point.


Lets you choose a color system.


Shows the spot colors.


Need Show Names option

Add button same as on Color Mixer


Need Replace button


Palette Manager dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGPALETTE       17450   //  Palette dialog hints.


Palette Manager dialog box

This dialog box helps you manage color palettes in many ways, including choosing a palette or set of palettes, creating a new palette, and deleting, renaming, recalling, and merging palettes.


#define HLPTOP_PALMGRLIST               20504   // palette list box


Lists the available palettes. To display a specific palette, click the circle in front of its name.


#define HLPTOP_CURRENTPAL               20512   // color palette


Shows the current palette. To display a color's component values, point to it with the mouse.


#define HLPTOP_COLORMODEL               20513   // model button


Opens a menu that lets you change the color model for a selected color.


#define HLPTOP_NEWPAL                   20502   // new button


Opens the Palette Name dialog box, and lets you create a new palette to store new colors.


#define HLPTOP_RENAMEPAL                20503   // rename button


Lets you rename a palette. Click the name of the palette in the list, and then click the Rename button.


#define HLPTOP_DELETEPAL                20505   // delete button


Deletes the highlighted palette.


#define HLPTOP_MERGEPAL                 20506   // merge button


Merges a selected palette with the current palette.


#define HLPTOP_IMPORTPAL                20507   // import button


Lets you import palette files for use with Designer.


#define HLPTOP_EXPORTPAL                20508   // export button


Lets you export Designer palette files to share with other Designer users or for use in Picture Publisher, PhotoMagic, or other Micrografx programs.


#define HLPTOP_CURCLRNAME               20509   // color name


Lets you name or rename a color.


#define HLPTOP_DELETE_COLOR             19025  //palette manager


Deletes the selected color.


Color Name dialog box


Color Name dialog box general topic


Color Name dialog box color name box


Color Mixer dialog box


#define HLPTOP_COLORMIXERDLG            25599


Color Mixer dialog box

This dialog box lets you create new colors by mixing two or four existing colors.


#define HLPTOP_COLORS                   25600  //color mixer


Shows the mixed colors based on the colors that you select.


#define HLPTOP_MIXSPINNER               20518   // 2 color mixing spinner


Sets the number of colors in the two-color mixing area.


#define HLPTOP_COLORMIX                 20514   // 2 or 4 color button


Lets you choose to mix either two colors or four colors.


#define HLPTOP_MIXSWATCH4               20516   // 4 corner swatches


Click this button to choose a mixing color.


#define HLPTOP_MIXMODE                  20515   // mix mode button


Lets you choose how the colors are mixed. You can mix colors using the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) or HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation) model.


#define HLPTOP_ADDCOLOR                 19819   // add button


Adds the new color to the palette.


#define HLPTOP_COLOR_REPLACE            25601


Replaces a color in the palette with the new color.


Palette Name dialog box


#define HLPTOP_DLGPALETTENAME   17478    //palette name


Palette Name dialog box

This dialog box lets you name (or rename) a palette. Type a name for the palette, and then click OK.


#define HLPTOP_PALETTENAME              20526   // palette name dialog


Type the name that you want to use for the color palette.


Palette Options dialog box


Palette Options dialog box

This dialog box lets you customize the Color Palette by setting palette options such as sort order and cell size.

You can often make it easier to choose colors by changing the order in which the colors are displayed in the Color Palette. For example, to group the yellows in the Color Palette, sort the palette by hue. When sorted by hue, all colors with similar hues (yellows, blues, and so on) are grouped together.


#define HLPTOP_SORTCOLOR                20511   // sort button


Sets this sort key.


Sets the secondary sort key.


#define HLPTOP_ASCSORT          17494


Sets ascending sort order.


#define HLPTOP_DESCSORT         17493


Sets descending sort order.


#define HLPTOP_COLMAJOR                 19913   // arrange by columns


Displays the colors in column order.


#define HLPTOP_ROWMAJOR                 19912   // arrange by rows


Displays the colors in row order.


#define HLPTOP_SMALLCELLS               19914   // small cell size


Sets the color cell size to small.


#define HLPTOP_MEDIUMCELLS              19915   // medium cell size


Sets the color cell size to medium.


#define HLPTOP_LARGECELLS               19916   // large cell size


Sets the color cell size to large.


Shows the color names.


These have gone away


Fill - Invisible panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the line or interior of a selected object or group of objects with a transparent (invisible) color.

Tips

To see the outline of an object that has invisible fill for both its line and its interior, point to Preview on the View menu, and click Wireframe.

If you want a solid fill for either the line or interior of an object, click the Solid Fill button to turn it on.


Interior Fill - Solid panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the interior of a selected object or group of objects with a solid color.

You can use any of these methods to choose the solid color:

Click a color on the current color palette at the bottom of this panel.

Use the Mixing Palette on the upper part of this panel to mix any four colors from the current color palette. You can then choose your solid-fill color from the Mixing Palette.

Click the Edit Color button to specify a custom color.

Tips

If you want a transparent (invisible) fill, click the Solid Fill button to turn it off.

You can apply the color to the selected object either by clicking the color and then clicking Apply or by double-clicking the color.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Line Fill - Solid panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the line of a selected object or group of objects with a solid color.

You can use any of these methods to choose the solid color:

Click a color on the current color palette at the bottom of this panel.

Use the Mixing Palette on the upper part of this panel to mix any four colors from the current color palette. You can then choose your solid-fill color from the Mixing Palette.

Click the Edit Color button to specify a custom color.

Tips

If you want a transparent (invisible) fill, click the Solid Fill button to turn it off.

You can apply the color to the selected object either by clicking the color and then clicking Apply or by double-clicking the color.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Line Fill Tab - Gradient panel


Interior Fill - Gradient panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the interior of a selected object or group of objects with a color gradient.

Click the left mouse button on a color to make it the starting color for the gradient. Click the right mouse button on a color to make it the ending color.

You can:

Click colors on the current color palette at the bottom of this panel.

Use the Mixing Palette on the upper part of this panel to mix any four colors from the current color palette. You can then choose your starting and ending color from the Mixing Palette.

Click the Edit Color button to specify a custom color.

You can set up multiple gradients by clicking above the preview bar.

Tips

To apply the color to the selected object, click Apply.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Line Fill - Gradient panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the line of a selected object or group of objects with a color gradient.

Click the left mouse button on a color to make it the starting color for the gradient. Click the right mouse button on a color to make it the ending color.

You can:

Click colors on the current color palette at the bottom of this panel.

Use the Mixing Palette on the upper part of this panel to mix any four colors from the current color palette. You can then choose your starting and ending color from the Mixing Palette.

Click the Edit Color button to specify a custom color.

You can set up multiple gradients by clicking above the preview bar.

Tips

To apply the color to the selected object, click Apply.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Interior Fill - Hatch panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the interior of a selected object or group of objects with a two-color hatch pattern.

You choose the hatch pattern from the gallery of predefined patterns. You can change the foreground and background color, and you can vary the line thickness and spacing in the pattern.

Tips

To apply the hatch pattern to the selected object, click Apply or double-click the pattern.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Line Fill - Hatch panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the line of a selected object or group of objects with a two-color hatch pattern.

You choose the hatch pattern from the gallery of predefined patterns. You can change the foreground and background color, and you can vary the line thickness and spacing in the pattern.

Tips

To apply the hatch pattern to the selected object, click Apply or double-click the pattern.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Interior Fill - Image panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the interior of a selected object or group of objects with a two-color or multicolor bitmap image.

You can either choose the image from the gallery of predefined images or create your own fill images using the Clipboard. For two-color images, you can change the foreground and background color.

Tips

To apply the image fill to the selected object, click Apply or double-click the pattern.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Line Fill - Image panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the line of a selected object or group of objects with a two-color or multicolor bitmap image.

You can either choose the image from the gallery of predefined images or create your own fill images using the Clipboard. For two-color images, you can change the foreground and background color.

Tips

To apply the image fill to the selected object, click Apply or double-click the pattern.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Interior Fill - Object panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the interior of a selected object or group of objects with another object. You can fill with a single instance of the fill object or with repeating rows and columns of the fill object.

You can either choose the fill object from the gallery of predefined objects or create your own fill objects using the Clipboard. For two-color fill objects, you can change the foreground and background color.

Tips

To apply the object fill to the selected object, click Apply or double-click the fill object.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Line Fill - Object panel

This panel of the Fill dialog box lets you fill the line of a selected object or group of objects with another object. You can fill with a single instance of the fill object or with repeating rows and columns of the fill object.

You can either choose the fill object from the gallery of predefined objects or create your own fill objects using the Clipboard. For two-color fill objects, you can change the foreground and background color.

Tips

To apply the object fill to the selected object, click Apply or double-click the fill object.

You can leave the Fill dialog box open while you select or edit objects in your drawing.


Image Information dialog box


Image Information dialog box

The Image Information dialog box displays information about the open image. The information includes format (such as 24-bit True Color), cropped width and height, total width and height, and size.


GONE AWAY—For Sure!


Displays options for setting margins, first-line indents, and alignment for block text in the Margins tab of the Text dialog box.


The Position list box lets you choose the position of type: Normal, Superscript (CTRL+K), or Subscript (CTRL+SHIFT+K).


Causes the selected object’s line weight to increase or decrease proportionally if the object is resized. If you do not select this option, the line weight remains the same when the object is resized.


Displays the gradient patterns available in Designer. XXX gone away


Opens the Gradient-Edit dialog box. XXX goes away


Deletes the selected gradient. You cannot remove any of the gradient patterns originally included with Designer. XXX goes away


Adds the gradient to the Fill-Gradient dialog box. XXX goes away

Note

You cannot add a particular gradient pattern if an identical pattern is in the dialog box.


Removes the gradient from the Fill-Gradient dialog box. You cannot replace any of the original gradient patterns included with Designer. XXX goes away


Gradient-Edit dialog box

XXX goes away This dialog box lets you change the angle and origin of linear and square gradients and the center point of radial gradients. You also can add a new gradient pattern or replace a gradient you previously added with a new one. You can add a gradient or replace an existing one with a gradient you have created. The Gradient-Edit dialog box can contain a maximum of 63 gradient fills.


Makes the background portions of the hatch pattern transparent. The background is opaque by default. XXX goes away


Makes the area around the fill object transparent. This area is opaque by default. XXX goes away

Note

If you have pasted a bitmap image as the fill object, this option does not make any part of the bitmap transparent.


Copies the selected object to the Clipboard and automatically paste it into your document. XXX gone away


Updates the Preview window to show the effects of your settings. XXX goes away


Color Picker dialog box buttons


Displays controls that let you define a color in terms of its Hue, Lightness, and Saturation. XXX goes away


Displays controls that let you define a color in terms of its Red, Green, and Blue content.


Displays controls that let you define a color in terms of its Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black content.


Displays controls that let you select a color by its Pantone spot-color name or process-color name. Color swatches are available that show the pantone colors exactly as they will print.


Lets you show the names of the colors rather than color swatches. This command is only available if the Spot Color button is selected. XXX gone away


Lets you select a named palette as the currently selected palette. XXX gone away


Lets you create a new color.

If the current palette is the Master Palette, choosing the New button opens the Palette Name dialog box.

If you have already created a new palette, choosing the New button opens the Color Picker dialog box. XXX goes away


Displays the sort menu to let you sort the colors in the palette. XXX goes away


Adds all the colors in the mixing area to the palette on the right. XXX gone away


Import Palette dialog box


Import Palette dialog box

The Import Palette dialog box lets you import color-palette files for use with Designer. XXX gone


Erases all of your current palettes and replaces them with all the palettes in the imported file.


Export Palette dialog box


Export Palette dialog box

The Export Palette dialog box lets you export Designer color-palette files for use with other programs. XXX gone


Text Tab XXX

This dialog box contains panels for setting font attributes (such as typeface, color, and size), text margins and alignment options, text spacing options, and tab-stop settings. XXX gone away


Lets you use the TAB key in your text to align text to the left of the tab stop. XXX Gone?


Lets you use the TAB key in your text to align text to the center of the tab stop. XXX Gone?


Lets you use the TAB key in your text to align text to the right of the tab stop. XXX Gone?


Lets you use the TAB key to align decimal points in your text to the tab stop. XXX Gone?


Line Style Tab XXX

This panel lets you select from a list of dotted and dashed line styles for the currently selected object. You also can choose to make the object's line invisible.


Lists the available symbols you can use as line ends. Use the scroll arrows at the right to see additional symbols. XXX gone away


Lists the three types of gradients available in Designer: Linear, Radial, and Square. Click a gradient type, then adjust the gradient using the appropriate options. XXX gone away


Displays the image patterns available in Designer. XXX goes away same as hatch


Displays the image patterns available in Designer. XXX same as hatch


Adds an object pattern that you have created. XXX same


Remove a selected pattern from the Object Pattern gallery. You can only remove the image patterns that you create. XXX same


Sets the interior color of the object to the current foreground color for object fills. XXX goes away

Note

If you want to retain all the original colors of an object you are adding to the gallery, deselect both Modify Fill Color and Modify Line Color.


Sets the line color of the object to the current line color for object fills. XXX goes away

Note

If you want to retain all the original colors of an object you are adding to the gallery, deselect both Modify Fill Color and Modify Line Color.


GONE AWAY??


You can use the four color swatches on the four corners of the Mixing Palette to create a customized palette. Click a color in the Color Palette, then click a color swatch beside the Mixing Palette to add that color to the Mixing Palette.


Opens a menu that lets you manage Designer's colors and palettes.


Shows the colors available in the current color palette. You can resize the palette by dragging its bottom edge. Drag it out to show more colors; drag it in to show fewer colors. If all the colors in the palette cannot be displayed at once, a scroll bar appears at the right to give you access to all the colors.


You have requested a palette-modifying operation while Designer’s Master Palette is the current palette. Although you cannot modify the Master Palette, Designer can make a copy of it that you can modify.

To create a copy of the Master Palette, click Yes. A dialog box opens to let you name the copy. The copy then becomes the current palette.

To cancel the operation, click No.


Displays options for filling the line of an object. XXX gone away?


Displays options for filling the interior of an object.XXX gone away?


Displays options for filling the interior or line of an object with a solid color.XXX gone away?


Displays options for filling the interior or line of an object with a color gradient.XXX gone away?


Displays options for filling the interior or line of an object with a hatch pattern.XXX gone away?


Displays options for filling the interior or line of an object with a bitmap image.XXX gone away?


Displays options for filling the interior or line of an object with another object.XXX gone away?


This option is available only if the CMYK color model is selected.  XXX gone away?


DONE ELSEWHERE


The typeface list box contains the available fonts in Designer. Click the down arrow to open the list box, then click the font you want.


You can select a type size from a list of two to 3000 points, or you can type a custom size (10.5, for example).


Lets you change the measuring increment for type. When you click this button, a menu opens, displaying the units available, including points, inches, centimeters, millimeters, picas, picas and points, and ciceros. You also can select More Units.


The Attributes area contains the attributes buttons: Bold, Italic, Underline, and Small Caps. Click a button to select it to be applied to the selected text.


CSH_DB4.DOC - Context-Sensitive Help for Dialog Boxes

Object Menu	Tools Menu

Custom Units db

Available Units

Properties db	Other Dialog Boxes

Object Properties List db	Edit Text db

List Options db	Dimensions db

Replace db	SlideShow Options db

Object Coordinates db	Standalone Setup db

Pages db	Transition Effects db

Layers db	Style db

Import Style db


Custom Units dialog box


Custom Units dialog box

This dialog box lets you define a custom unit and set a scale for it. You also can define a secondary unit that is measured by your primary custom unit.


Sets the current unit as the new default unit for the drawing. Pressing this button saves the unit definition (if it hasn't already been saved) and applies the unit to the rulers.


Lists pre-defined units. You can create custom units and add them to this list. Pre-defined units include feet, feet and inches, kilometers, meters, miles, weeks and days, and yards and feet. You can set a different unit of measure for an individual dialog box, such as the Page Setup dialog box, Text Attributes dialog box, or the Line Weight dialog box. Changing this setting does not change other settings or affect the rulers or grid until you select the unit definition in that setting's Unit button.

Units preceded with a plus sign (+) are definitions saved to the PRO file for use in all drawings. All others will be saved with the current drawing.


Saves the changes made in the dialog box to the current drawing. For example, you can edit the name or label of a defined unit by choosing it from the Defined Units list, making your changes, and then clicking this button. If this button is gray, then the definition has already been saved to the drawing.


Saves the changes made in the dialog box to the PRO file for use in all drawings. For example, you can edit the name or label of a defined unit by choosing it from the Defined Units list, making your changes, and clicking the Save to profile button. If this button is gray, then the definition has already been saved to the profile.


Removes the highlighted unit from the profile or drawing, consequently removing it from Defined Units list box.

Note

Deleting custom units only affects the current file. However, if you delete something with a + sign, then it affects all files because it deletes it from the profile.


Type a name for the custom unit in this text box. If you also are defining secondary units for this unit, type a comma and the name of the secondary units.


Type the label that you want Designer to display for dimension lines measured in your custom unit.


Select the actual unit by which your custom unit is to be measured, and enter values that define the ratio of the custom unit to the actual unit.

For example, suppose you are creating a timing diagram in which you want to define a custom unit "milliseconds," where every 2 inches of your diagram represents 50 milliseconds. You would enter:

Scale    50     per    2         INCH.


Select the actual unit by which your custom unit is to be measured, and enter values that define the ratio of the custom unit to the actual unit.

For example, suppose you are creating a timing diagram in which you want to define a custom unit "milliseconds," where every 2 inches of your diagram represents 50 milliseconds. You would enter:

Scale    50     per    2         INCH.


Select the actual unit by which your custom unit is to be measured, and enter values that define the ratio of the custom unit to the actual unit.

For example, suppose you are creating a timing diagram in which you want to define a custom unit "milliseconds," where every 2 inches of your diagram represents 50 milliseconds. You would enter:

Scale    50     per    2         INCH.


Type the label that you want Designer to display for dimension lines measured in the secondary custom unit.


Type a value for the scale of the secondary custom unit, if any. The secondary unit is measured by the primary unit.

For example, suppose you are creating a timing diagram in which you want to define a custom unit "milliseconds" and the secondary unit "microseconds," where every 2 inches of your diagram represents 50 milliseconds, and 1000 microseconds = 1 millisecond. You would enter:

Scale    50         per   2         INCH       for the primary unit, and

Scale    1000    per Primary Unit          for the secondary unit


Click the down arrow to the right of this box, and choose the displayed precision for the custom unit you are defining.


Click this button to clear the secondary unit Scale and Label boxes.


Add to List of Defined Units dialog box - seems to have gone away


Click the Yes button to add your custom unit to Designer's list of defined units. Click No or Cancel if you don't want to add the custom unit.


Save Changes to Custom Unit dialog box - no CS now


You have changed a value that defines the named custom unit. To save the change, click Yes. To return to the Custom Units dialog box without saving, click Cancel. To return to the Designer drawing without saving, click No.


Available Units dialog box


Available Units dialog box

This dialog box Lets you choose units of measure.

The standard linear units are inches, centimeters, millimeters, points, picas and points, and ciceros. The standard radial units are degrees and radians. Standard units are used for the actual dimensions of objects on a page or the page size.


Lists all the defined units, including built-in and custom units.


Opens the Custom Units dialog box to let you define your own units of measurement.


Properties dialog box


Properties dialog box

This dialog box lets you assign data to objects. Each data item you assign to an object is referred to as a property of the object. Designer provides a list of predefined properties from which you can choose. You can also define your own properties.

The predefined properties are:

Name

Commonly-used data such as Color, Cost, Description, Part Number, and Price

QuickSilver events

Properties let you identify objects uniquely, as well as categorize objects in various ways. For example, assigning a Name to an object distinguishes it from another object that may be the same size and shape, whereas assigning the Color red to an object classifies it with other objects assigned that color, no matter what their shape.

Note

There is no correlation between properties such as Color and the visual appearance of an object.


Lets you enter the Name of an object.


Lists all of the properties defined for the document. The name of a property appears in the Field column and its value in the Value column.

If an object is selected, then the properties assigned to that object show values.

To assign an exiting property to a selection, click the Value column opposite the property name, type the property's  value, and press ENTER.

To assign a predefined property to a selection, click Fields, select the check box for property you want, and click OK. The property name appears in the Fields column with the appropriate position in the value column highlighted. Type the value for the property, and press ENTER.

To assign a new property to a selection, click Add. The words "New Field" appear in the Field column. Type the new property name, and press ENTER. The appropriate position in the Value column highlights. Type the property's value, and press ENTER.


Lets you add a new property.

Clicking this button displays "New Field" in the property list box. Type the new property's name and press ENTER. The appropriate position in the Value column highlights. Type the property's value, and press ENTER.

Press ESC to cancel the action.


Deletes the highlighted property from the document.


Lets you change a property's name. Select the property you want to change, and click this button. Then type a new name.


Opens the Property Fields dialog box which lists the predefined properties.


Clears a highlighted property's value. This clears the value of the property for the current selection only; it does not clear any values assigned to the property for other objects in the document.


Clears all property values for the current selection.


Lists the QuickSilver events. To assign an action to an event, click the event, and then click the Action box.


Lists the actions assigned to the highlighted QuickSilver event.


Lists the QuickSilver verbs, and lets you paste them into the Action box.


Lists the names of all objects in the current document and lets you paste them into the Action box.


Property Fields dialog box


Property Fields dialog box

This dialog box lists the predefined properties. To add a predefined property, select its check box.


Lists the predefined properties. To add a predefined property, select its check box.


Object Properties List dialog box


Object Properties List dialog box

This dialog box lists the properties and values assigned to objects.

If no objects are selected, the list contains the names for all the objects in the document; if any objects are selected, the list contains only those objects. Objects without names are listed as "unnamed."

The objects are listed alphabetically by object name.


Lists the properties and values assigned to objects.

If no objects are selected, the list contains the names for all the objects in the document; if any objects are selected, the list contains only those objects. Objects without names are listed as "unnamed."

The objects are listed alphabetically by object name.


Copies the list to the Clipboard. From the Clipboard, you can paste the data into the drawing area or into any Windows-compatible program.

The list is copied to the Clipboard in symbolic link (SYLK), comma-expanded format which can be easily pasted into spreadsheets such as Excel.


Prints the list.


Opens the Save As dialog box. You can save the list as a text (TXT), DIF, or SYLK (SLK) file.


Opens the List Options dialog box.

This dialog box lets you enter your own titles for the list (when copied, printed, or saved). You can enter titles for the output heading (main heading), name column, and quantity column.


List Options dialog box


List Options dialog box

This dialog box lets you enter your own titles for the object properties list. You can also set whether object details are included with the list.


Lets you enter a main title for the object properties list. You can see a title only when you print an object list, save it to a file, or view it in the Clipboard Viewer.


Lets you enter a title for the property name column.


Lets you enter a title for the quantity column.


Select this option if you want the list to include object details.


Replace dialog box


Replace dialog box

This dialog box lets you replace objects in your document with objects from the Clipboard. Using the Replace dialog box, you can:

Replace an object with an object from the Clipboard.

Scale the Clipboard object so that it fits within the bounding box of the object being replaced.

Specify the Clipboard object's alignment.

Replace multiple objects with a single object, or replace multiple objects with different objects.

Paste on top of an object.

Tip

The Replace dialog box is especially convenient for working with templates, because it lets you easily replace template clip art with the clip art you want.


Forces a Clipboard object to scale up or down to completely fill the bounding area of the object it replaces.


Lets you lets you specify how a Clipboard object aligns to the bounding box of the object it replaces. This option does not change the Clipboard object’s proportions.

Use the list box to select a handle on the original object to which Designer can align the Clipboard replacement.


Lets you select the handle on the original object to which the Clipboard object aligns.


Lets you choose one of two ways to replace multiple selected objects with the contents of the Clipboard.

Select this option if you have several objects selected but only one in the Clipboard. Each selected object is replaced with a copy of the Clipboard object.

Deselect this option if you have several objects selected and several in the Clipboard. The first object (from left to right) in the Clipboard replaces the first original object, the second Clipboard object replaces the second original object, and so on.


Pastes the Clipboard's contents on top of the original object.


Cuts the selection to the Clipboard.


Copies the selection to the Clipboard


Pastes the Clipboard contents into your drawing.


Object Coordinates dialog box


Object Coordinates dialog box

This dialog box gives you a method of drawing objects that is more precise than using the mouse. For example, using coordinates, you can draw a rectangle that is exactly 5 x 9 centimeters in size, and position it at the exact center of the page. This high level of accuracy ensures that you can use Designer for precision drawings of all types.

You can draw the following shapes with coordinates: lines, squares, rectangles, circles, and ellipses. For each shape, you can choose from a variety of drawing methods. The availability of different drawing methods ensures that you can specify the position and dimensions of an object in the most convenient and appropriate way.


Select this option to modify an existing (selected) object.


Select this option to create a new object.


Specifies the type of object you are drawing.


Specifies the method to use for drawing an object. The methods available depend on the type of object you are drawing.


Sets the origin of the object. For example, choose Bottom, Left Handle if you want the origin to be the bottom left handle of the bounding box.


Lists the points defined for the object.


Select this option if you want the object kept proportional.


Replaces the highlighted point with the X and Y values.


Adds the X and Y values to the point list.


Deletes the highlighted point.


Type a measurement in one of these boxes, or use the up or down scroll arrows to change the measurement. The boxes available depend on the drawing method.


Type a measurement in one of these boxes, or use the up or down scroll arrows to change the measurement. The boxes available depend on the drawing method.


Type a measurement in one of these boxes, or use the up or down scroll arrows to change the measurement. The boxes available depend on the drawing method.


Type a measurement in one of these boxes, or use the up or down scroll arrows to change the measurement. The boxes available depend on the drawing method.


Opens a menu to let you change the measuring increment. The menu displays the units available, including points, inches, centimeters, millimeters, picas, cicero, and didot, along with the More Units and Custom Units commands.


Pages dialog box


Pages dialog box

This dialog box lets you choose which page of the document you want to view. You also can add, delete, and name pages.

Note

If you want to rearrange the pages in a document, click Page Manager [image] in the Toolbox and drag the thumbnail view of each page to its new position.


Shows the name of the currently selected page, if you have named the page.

To name (or rename) a page, enter the name in this box and then click the [image] button. You cannot rename the Master Page.


Accepts the page name you have entered in the box to the left.


Lists the pages in the current document. To go to a page, click its name and then click the Select button.


Adds a new page to the end of your document.


Deletes the currently selected page. You cannot delete the Master Page or the last page in the document.


The Layers dialog box


Layers dialog box

This dialog box lets you manage layers in your document. You can:

Name the layers

Add and remove layers

Change the order of layers

Lock layers (so that objects cannot be changed)

Display or hide selected layers

Specify layers as printable or non-printable

Use one color (for easy identification) or multiple colors on a layer

Move objects from one layer to another

Edit all the layers or edit one layer at a time

Each page in a Designer drawing has one layer by default. Until renamed, the layers are identified as Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, and so forth. Layer 1 is the back layer. The number of layers you can use is virtually unlimited [image] 32,767. Layers always remain perfectly aligned with one another.

Tip

Designer does not store a layer that has no objects on it unless you have renamed the layer.


Shows the numbers and names of all layers in the document. The current layer is shown in red.

Tip

Clicking a layer in this list only selects that layer for moving, hiding, locking, renaming, and so forth. It does not make that layer the current layer. To make a layer the current layer, double-click it, or highlight it and click Set Selected Layer to Current.


Adds a new layer behind all other layers in the document.


Deletes the layer highlighted in the list. When you delete a layer, all objects in that layer are also deleted. You cannot delete the currently selected layer.


Moves the layer highlighted in the list forward.


Moves the layer highlighted in the list backward.


Locks the layer highlighted in the list. You cannot select or edit objects in a locked layer, even by making it the current layer or clicking the Edit All Layers option.


Unlocks the layer highlighted in the list. Before you can select or edit objects in the layer, you must either make it the current layer or select the Edit All Layers option.


Hides all objects in the layer highlighted in the list.


Shows all objects in the layer highlighted in the list. Useful if you have previously hidden that layer.


Marks all objects in the layer highlighted in the list as non-printable.


Marks all objects in the layer highlighted in the list as printable. Useful if you have previously marked the layer as non-printable.


Shows all objects in the layer highlighted in the list using one color. Select the color using the color button.


Shows all objects in the layer highlighted in the list using their normal colors. Useful if you have previously marked the layer as a single-color layer.


Displays a color palette. Use the palette to select a color for a single-color layer.


Sets the highlighted layer to the current layer. This button is unavailable if the highlighted layer is already the current layer.


Lets you edit all objects, regardless of which layer they belong to.


Shows and lets you change the name of the highlighted layer.


Accepts the name you enter in the Name box to the left.


Shows the number and name of the current layer.

This box also lets you move selected objects to a different layer. Select the objects you want to move, click this button, and then select the destination layer from the list. The items are moved to that layer, which is also made the current layer.


Edit Text dialog box


Edit Text dialog box

This dialog box provides a method of editing text that can be quicker and more convenient than editing text in the drawing area. The Edit Text window makes it easy to edit text to which you have applied graphic effects such as warping, because it displays the text without those effects. You can also use the Edit Text window to edit text that is too small to view without zooming in.

The Edit Text window shows text in the appropriate font and lets you apply style attributes such as bold and italic.

You can edit both freeform and block text in the Edit Text window. To open the Edit Text window for all text except warped text, press and hold SHIFT and click the text with the text pointer. To open the Edit Text window for warped text, just click the text with the text pointer (without pressing SHIFT).


Dimensions dialog box


Dimensions dialog box

This dialog box lets you set options and defaults for dimension and callout lines.

If a dimension or callout line is selected when you click Apply, your changes are applied to the selection. If no dimension or callout lines are selected, your choices become the defaults for new dimension or callout lines you draw.


Controls whether the dimension text is shown or hidden.


Lets you select the unit of measure used by a dimension line.


Lets you enter text to appear before the units of a dimension line.


Lets you enter text to appear after the units of a dimension line.


Controls whether extension lines are shown or hidden.


Specifies the amount of space between an offset dimension line and the start of its extension lines.


Specifies how far extension lines protrude beyond a dimension line.


Determines whether dimension lines show arrows pointing inwards.


Specifies the length of outside arrows.


Forces the dimension text to aligned with the dimension. However, the text is always rotated so that it faces up or to the right.


Forces the dimension text to display so that the text is oriented along the dimension line. The text always faces the line being measured.


Forces the dimension text to display horizontally, even for vertical and aligned (diagonal) dimension lines.


Forces the dimension text to display horizontally for horizontal and aligned (diagonal) lines, and vertically for vertical lines.


Displays the dimension text at a specific angle. To set the custom angle, you can either drag the red needle in the dial control or double-click in the Angle text box and enter a specific value.


Displays the dimension text at a specific angle. To set the custom angle, you can either drag the red needle in the dial control or double-click in the Angle text box and enter a specific value.


Places the dimension text on the text point.


Places the dimension text even with the left edge of the line.


Places the dimension text in the center of the line.


Places the dimension text even with the right edge of the line.


Places the dimension text above the line.


Places the dimension text on the line.


Places the dimension text below the line.


Determines whether the accent bar is shown or hidden.


Determines whether the callout text is bordered.


Sets the amount of space between callout text and the border.


Sets the amount of space between callout text and the callout line.


Sets the segment style of the callout line.


Style dialog box


Style dialog box

This dialog box lets you add, change, delete, and import named styles.

To add a new named style, click Add.

To change a named style, click its name in the list box, and then click the button for the attributes you want to change.

To delete a named style, click its name in the list box, and then click Delete.

To import named styles from another Designer document, click Import.

For any named style, you can exclude certain categories of attributes. For example, you can exclude line attributes if you do not want the style to set line attributes; or you can exclude text attributes if you do not intend to apply the style to text blocks.


Lists the named styles defined for the current document. To select a named style for changing or deleting, or to display a sample of the style in the Preview box, click it.


Shows a sample of the highlighted named style.


Select this option to include interior fill in the named style; deselect this option to exclude interior fill from the named style.

If you apply a named style which excludes interior fill to an object, then the object retains its original interior fill.


Lets you set interior fill for the highlighted named style.


Select this option to include line attributes in the named style; deselect this option to exclude line attributes from the named style.

If you apply a named style which excludes line attributes to an object, then the object retains its original line attributes.


Lets you set line attributes for the highlighted named style.


Select this option to include text attributes in the named style; deselect this option to exclude text attributes from the named style.

If you apply a named style which excludes text attributes to an object, then the object retains its original text attributes (if any).


Lets you set text attributes for the highlighted named style.


Select this option to include properties in the named style; deselect this option to exclude properties from the named style.

If you apply a named style which excludes properties to an object, then the object retains its original properties.

Note

The Properties option is available only if properties are defined for one or more objects in the current document.


Lets you define properties for the highlighted named style.


Lets you add a new named style.


Deletes the highlighted named style.


Lets you import named styles from another Designer document.


Import Style dialog box


Import Style dialog box

This dialog box lets you import a named style from any open document, or from any Designer 7 DSF file.

Named styles are saved with the document in which they are created. To use a named style with a different document, you can import it. Importing a named style into a different document creates a copy of the imported style in the document.


Lists the named styles defined for the document from which you are importing (the document shown in the Styles From box).


Lists the named styles defined for the current document (the document into which you are importing).


Shows the document from which you are importing named styles. To choose another document, click the arrow beside the box.


Copies the highlighted named style to the current document.


Lets you rename the highlighted named style.


Lets you open a document for importing named styles.


Replace Style error box


You are importing a style that has the same name as an already defined style.

Click Yes to replace the current style with the imported style.

Click No to give the imported style a new name.

Click Cancel to cancel importing.


SlideShow Options dialog box


SlideShow Options dialog box

This dialog box sets various slideshow options.


Standalone Setup dialog box


Standalone Setup dialog box

This dialog box lets you select from available screen color and resolution options for your standalone slideshow. To see the options and select one, click the Number of Colors and Target Screen boxes.


Choose the number of colors you want in the standalone presentation. Currently, your only choice is the number of colors on the computer you are using.

Remember that a higher number of colors requires more disk space. A lower number of colors uses less disk space.


Choose the resolution of the monitor that will be used for the standalone presentation.


Transition Effects dialog box


Transition Effects dialog box

This dialog box lets you control special effects (wipes) that Designer uses to replace one screen with the next during your slideshow. You can choose from special-effect transitions such as spiral and rain, and you can set the speed and direction of the transition.

Transition effects add energy and excitement to the way slides replace one another during a slideshow.


Lets you set the transition effect assigned to slides.

To assign a transition effect to a single slide, click the slide in the list, choose the transition effect from this box, and click Apply.

To assign a transition effect to multiple slides, click the first slide in the list, hold down ctrl and click the other slides you want to select, choose the transition effect from this box, and click Apply.


Select this option to apply the highlighted effect to all slides.


Lets you set the direction in which a selected transition moves. The direction is not relevant for some transition effects.


Lets you set the speed of a transition effect.


Shows a preview of the transition effect.


Lists the slides and their transition effects.


The split-pages-or-enlarge-drawing dialog box


The document you are opening consists of multiple pages. You can either retain the page divisions (click Split Up Pages) or combine the pages into a single, large drawing (click Enlarge Document).


Unused controls


Save As dialog box

The Save As dialog box lets you name a new document, save a document with a new name, or replace an existing document with the current document.

If you type a filename without an extension, DSF is used.

Alternatively, you can choose the file format you want (in the file type list box).

Tips

Pressing a character key when a filename is highlighted in the text box makes the name disappear. To edit the filename, press the RIGHT ARROW to remove the highlight. Then press the RIGHT or LEFT ARROW to move the cursor. To delete characters to the left of the cursor, press BACKSPACE.

If you enter or select an existing filename, Designer asks if you want to replace the existing file. Click No to return to the Save As dialog box. Click Yes to replace the file.


Line Length Options dialog box

This dialog box lets you specify options for dimension line-length text. You can specify a text prefix and suffix, as well as horizontal and vertical position for the text.


You can enter a prefix for the dimension line-length text in this box. For example, if you would like to display the date before the line length of a selected line, you can enter the date.


You can enter a suffix for the dimension line-length text in this box. For example, if you would like to display the date after the line length of a selected line, you can enter the date.


Lets you change the measuring increment used in dimension line-length text.

To change the units, click the Units button. A menu opens, displaying the units available, including inches, centimeters, millimeters, points, picas, and ciceros, along with the More Units and Custom Units commands.


Shows choices for the precision of the displayed line-length value. Click the precision you prefer.


Click a horizontal option and a vertical option to align the dimension line-length text in relation to the line.


Lets you move currently selected objects to a specific layer. Select the objects you want to move, click this button, and then select the destination layer in the Current Layer list. The items are moved to the selected layer.


Closes the Pages dialog box and goes to the selected page.


Closes the Pages dialog box without changing to a different page.


Lets you add a button to a toolbar to display this dialog box.  XXX gone away


Opens a menu that lets you choose a coordinate system.

You can choose

Cartesian (rectangular) coordinates.

Polar coordinates with angles measured in radians.

Polar coordinates with angles measured in degrees.


Open db Description

Lets you enter or edit a description of the file.

Note

The Open dialog box does not show a file preview for DRW files. When you open a DRW file, it is automatically converted to a DSF file, and the extension is changed to DSF.


Links db Links

Lists all the OLE objects in the current file. For each object, the list provides the object type, original file name, the type of link, and whether it is updated automatically or manually.


Links db Update options

Lets you choose to update the selected link either automatically each time you open the Designer file or manually when you open or save the Designer file.


Links db Update Now

Immediately updates the selected link.


Links db Cancel Link

Breaks the OLE link between an object and its original program (server).


Links db Change Link

Opens a dialog box that lets you select a new file path for the selected link. The new file can be identical to the old file, but can be in a different location or it may be a completely new file.


Links db Edit

Lets you edit the object selected in the Links list box. Designer launches the object's source application for you to edit the object.


Links db Activate

Plays the object (for example, sound).


Links db Done

Closes the dialog box.


Insert Object db Object Type list

Lists the types of OLE object you can insert. Designer uses the type you select to determine which application to launch.


Transform db Origin

Lets you place the line, or reflection axis, through any of the nine object origin points. For example, select the center origin to flip an object around a central axis, or select the right middle origin to reflect the object around its right side.


CSH_MENU.DOC - Context Sensitive Help for Menus

For testing, make topic headings visible and red. For final release, use a macro to change red Heading 2 text to blue and hidden, and delete the paragraph mark that separates the heading from the text of the topic. Footnote markers must always be visible and black (the default for Heading 2 text).


File menu


Creates a new, empty Designer document. The new document is untitled until you save it.


Lets you choose a project on which to base your drawing. Choosing a project starts the Project Wizard, which guides you in creating your drawing.


Displays the File Open dialog box, which lets you open a previously saved Designer document. The folder shown is the last folder in which a Designer document was opened.

Tip

On the dialog box, you can open more than one document as a time by holding down the CTRL key as you click each filename.


Closes the active Designer document. If you have made changes that you have not saved, Close prompts you to save the changes.


Closes all open Designer documents.


Saves the document on which you are working. If this is the first time you have saved the document, Save displays the Save As dialog box to let you give the document a file name.


Opens a dialog box that lets you assign a file name to the current document or make a copy of the document under another file name.

If the current document was opened from a file, the Save As dialog box opens to the document's directory. Otherwise, it opens to last directory in which you saved a file using Save As.


Opens a dialog box that lets you save the current document as a template.

When you save a document as a template, you specify a category for the template. The category determines the folder of the Project Wizard in which the template appears.


Restores the document to the most recently saved version, discarding all changes made since you last saved the file.


Lets you import files into Designer that were created by other programs.


Lets you export Designer files for use in other programs.


Displays the Page Setup dialog box to let you set the size, margins, and orientation of the active window's on-screen page. You can change page settings before, during, or after creating a drawing.

Note

If you change the page setup, and you plan to print your work, you should change the printer setup to match the page.


Opens the Scale Drawing Wizard, which guides you in creating a scale for your drawing.

The Scale Drawing Wizard includes instructions explaining its use, and lets you cancel its operation at any time.


Lets you print the current page, selected objects, a specific area or view, the entire document, or multiple files, and lets you change the target printer.


Lets you select a target printer from a list of your installed printing devices. You also can change the printer’s properties as needed.

Properties vary from one printer to another, but common options include changing the orientation (portrait or landscape), paper size, and paper source.


Displays a dialog box to let you send the current Designer document as mail, using MS Mail.


Lists the four most recently used Designer documents so you can quickly open them without using the File Open dialog box.


Closes all open documents and then closes Designer.

If you have made changes to any documents, Designer prompts you to save the changes before the window closes.


File/Print submenus


Immediately prints the currently displayed page.


Lets you print an area that you define (by dragging a rectangle). If necesssary, Designer scales the area to fit the printable area of the printer page.


Prints only the selected objects from the current page. Does not resize the objects.


Displays the Print Document dialog box to let you print the current document.


Lets you print multiple documents without opening each one. When you print multiple documents, Designer prints one copy of all pages in each selected document.

Designer handles mixed page orientations (portrait and landscape) automatically.


Edit menu


Reverses the last edit or change to an object.

To set the number of events that Designer remembers:

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	On the General tab, enter the number of events in the Undo Event Limit box.


Lets you redo the last undo you made to an object.


Cuts the selected object(s) to the Clipboard.


Copies the selected object(s) to the Clipboard.


Opens a dialog box that lets you copy to the Clipboard the HTML tags needed by QuickSilver to display a QSF drawing. You can then paste these tags into an HTML source file.

These tags instruct your browser where to find the file containing the drawing, its width and height, and other information needed by QuickSilver to activate the drawing.


Inserts a copy of the contents of the Clipboard.


Lets you choose how you want to paste objects from the Clipboard.


Deletes the selected objects.


Creates a copy of the selected object that is offset from the original object. The amount of the offset is determined by the Offset for Duplicate settings on the General tab of the Options dialog box.


Creates a copy of the selected object that is positioned on top of the original object (no offset).

For convenience, the cloned object is automatically selected.


Deselects all objects.


Selects all objects on the current layer of the current page. If Edit All Layers is selected in the Layers dialog box, Select All selects all objects on all layers of the current page.


Opens a dialog box that lets you select objects based on specific attributes and properties.


Opens the Insert Object dialog box, which lets you insert an OLE object into the current Designer document.

You can:

Create the OLE object from an existing file.

Open an OLE compatible program, create the object in the program, then close the program and automatically insert the object into Designer.

Note

If you want to insert an OLE object that you have copied to the Clipboard, use Paste Special from the Edit menu.


Opens a dialog box that lets you manage linked OLE objects contained in the current document.

You can

Manually update an object to reflect recent changes made to its source file.

Set an object to update automatically when the object’s source file has changed.

Break the link between an object and its source file. The object remains in the Designer document, but can no longer be updated.

Note

This item is dimmed if the current document does not contain any linked OLE objects.


Displays a submenu that lets you edit the currently selected OLE object, using its associated program. You also can convert some type of objects so that you can edit them using a program that you select.


View menu


Lets you show or hide various display workspace items such as guides, crosshairs, and rulers.


Displays options for viewing the status bar as a single line or two lines.


Lets you preview what a Designer object looks like on a Web page. This command creates a temporary HTML file for the object, launches your browser, and loads the HTML file. You can then check the object's appearance and action in the browser.

Note

To display a Designer object on a Web page, you need to have QuickSilver installed. QuickSilver is a plug-in that gives Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer the capability to display Designer-created vector graphics on the Web.


Displays the Task Manager dialog box, which lets you monitor and control Designer’s background tasks.


Lets you choose proof, draft, or wireframe viewing. The view does not affect how the document is printed.


Lets you choose how gradients are displayed.


Lets you show or hide bitmap images.


Lets you show or hide object fills.


Lets you show or hide hatch fills.


Lets you show or hide image fills.


Lets you select which toolbars are displayed, and lets you choose other toolbar-related options.


View/Workspace submenu


Turns the grid on and off. Use the grid as a guide for aligning symbols or measuring distances. The grid appears as a pattern of dots that correspond to divisions in your ruler settings.


Turns guides on and off. A guide is a horizontal or vertical line you can use for alignment or visual reference. Guides can help organize the layout of your drawing by guiding the placement of your symbols. You can use guides as visual cues for where to place symbols, or you can snap symbols to guides for more exact placement. Guides appear on screen but do not print.


Turns the crosshairs pointer on and off.


Displays non-printing guidelines that show the target printer's current page size and orientation.


Turns on the rulers. When the rulers are on, you can change the ruler origin by dragging from the ruler origin. The ruler origin is the point, on or off the page, where the two rulers intersect at zero. The default position for the ruler origin is at the upper left corner of the page.


Turns the ruler position indicators on and off. The ruler position indicators are blue and yellow lines in the ruler. The blue lines show the position of your ruler. The yellow lines show the position of symbols as you drag them.


Sets the ruler origin to the upper left corner of the page. The ruler origin is the point, on or off the page, where the two rulers intersect at zero.


Locks and unlocks guides. By locking guides, you can prevent them from being moved accidentally.


View/Status Bar submenu


Displays Designer’s status bar information in a single line. The single status bar shows less information than the double status bar, but it occupies less space.


Displays Designer’s status bar information in a double line. The double status bar occupies more space than the single status bar, but it shows more information.


View/Preview submenu


Shows all colors and fills.


Sets the following view settings for the current document.

Type of Fill	Shown As
Solid Fills	Normal
Gradient Fills	Coarse
Image Fills	Draft
Symbol and Hatch Flls	Not Shown


No fills or line ends are displayed; all lines are displayed as hairlines.


View/Show Gradients submenu


Best gradient display, with all colors and smooth gradations from one color to the next.


All colors are shown, but gradations are not as smooth.


All colors are shown, but there are few gradations.


Fastest gradient display. Shows only the first color of the gradient.


Format menu


Displays options for setting the line fill of selected objects


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the Line Style options displayed. You can use these options to change the lines of selected objects to dashed, dotted, and other patterns.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the Line Weight options displayed. You can use these options to change the thickness of lines of selected objects.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the Line Ends options displayed. You can use these options to change the symbols attached to the ends of lines of open objects.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the Font options displayed. You can use these options to change various attributes (such as point size, bold, italic, foreground and background color) of selected text.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the Spacing options displayed. You can use these options to change the horizontal alignment, vertical alignment, and word, character, line, and paragraph spacing of selected text. You also can set the first character in a paragraph as a drop cap (an enlarged letter that is top-aligned with the paragraph’s first line).


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the Tab Stop options displayed. You can use these options to set the positions of tab stops for the selected text. You also change the indent and margins of text.


Copies the attributes of the selected object. You can then apply these attributes to other objects or make them the default attributes for all new objects.


Applies to selected objects the attributes that you copied with Pick Up Object Format.


Sets the defaults to the attributes of the currently selected object. New objects you draw will use the new defaults.


Lets you turn smart colorization on and off.

Smart colorization lets you change the fill color of an object group and retain the hue, or color gradations, of the original fill color. Smart colorization is especially useful when working with clip art, because it lets you change an object's color without loosing color shades.


Format/Line Fill submenu


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the solid line fill options displayed. You can use these options to set the color of the line fill for the selected objects.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the gradient line fill options displayed. You can use these options to fill the lines of selected objects with a color gradient.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the hatch line fill options displayed. You can use these options to fill the lines of selected objects with a hatch pattern.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the image line fill options displayed. You can use these options to fill the lines of selected objects with a bitmap image.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the object line fill options displayed. You can use these options to fill the lines of selected objects with a Designer object.


Format/Interior Fill submenu


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the solid interior fill options displayed. You can use these options to set the color of the interior fill for the selected objects.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the gradient interior fill options displayed. You can use these options to fill the interior of selected objects with a color gradient.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the hatch interior fill options displayed. You can use these options to fill the interiors of selected objects with a hatch pattern.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the image interior fill options displayed. You can use these options to fill the interiors of selected objects with a bitmap image.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the object interior fill options displayed. You can use these options to fill the interiors of selected objects with a Designer object.


Tools menu


Checks the spelling of selected text (or the entire document if no text is selected). Opens a dialog box if a misspelling is found.


Opens the Document Audit Wizard which analyzes your document for changes that can reduce its file size. The Document Audit Wizard can perform a Standard or Thorough audit.

Using the Document Audit Wizard is easy. You simply respond to the questions asked by the wizard, which optimizes the document for you automatically, based on your answers. At the end of the optimization process, you receive a report showing how much you have reduced the DSF and QSF file sizes of the document.


Lets you obtain an estimate of the time it would take to download the current document in various file formats at various modem speeds.


Lets you create custom units for your rulers and measurements.


Shows or hides the Reference Point toolbar.

The reference point is a fixed point that you can place anywhere within your workspace. Because its location does not change once it is placed, the reference point lets you draw and position objects exactly where you want them relative to the reference point.


Starts Media Manager, which lets you easily locate, access, and organize clip art items.


Displays the Customize dialog box to let you add and remove tools on Designer’s toolbars


Opens a dialog box that lets you define precisely a guide's location, add multiple guides, and set the color of guides.

A guide is a non-printing line that provides an easy way to align objects. Guides can help organize the layout of your drawing by guiding the placement of your objects. You can use guides as visual cues for where to place objects, or you can snap objects to guides for more exact placement.


Lets you customize your working environment. You can set options for many aspects of Designer, and you can set and save options in a profile file.


Lets you turn on and off the Snap to Guides and Snap to Rulers options.


Tools/Snap submenu


Causes the closest ruler mark to attract the cursor. Snapping is based on the ruler units: if you change the number of snaps per ruler unit, you also change the number of snap points and the appearance of the on-screen grid.


Makes a nearby guideline attract the mouse pointer. If you want guidelines to attract points on a symbol, you must select the Dragging Snap option on Rulers/Snap tab of the Options dialog box.


Change menu


Lets you reshape certain objects in specific ways. This type of editing is available for rectangles, ellipses, and arcs.


Displays an object’s anchor points and puts the object in Point Reshape mode. In point reshape mode, you can reshape the object by dragging its anchor points.


Lets you extrude an object. Extruding gives two-dimensional objects the appearance of a third dimension by adding projection lines to the object. Extruded objects look like they extend into the space above or behind the surface of the screen or the printed page.


Lets you blend objects. Designer displays a different transformation at each step of the blend.


Lets you move, scale, reflect, rotate, and skew selected objects, and remove transformations.


Reverses all transformations you applied.


Lets you group and ungroup objects, and connect and disconnect objects.


Gives you options for arranging the stacking order of objects by moving them to the front or back, reversing their order, and stepping them forward or backward.


Opens the Extrusion Options dialog box. This dialog box lets you set extrusion options such as whether an object is lighted, the position of a light source, the degree of front lighting, the light color and intensity, the amount of ambient light, the reflectivity of the light, and an object's resolution.


Opens a dialog box that lets you convert an object to a bitmap image.


Converts an object such as text, a rectangle, or an ellipse into a conventional object. This lets you edit the object with reshape points.


Lets you smooth the shape of an object by eliminating some of its anchors.


Change/Modify submenu


Breaks the overlapping areas of closed objects into separate objects.


Creates an object based on the intersection of two or more closed objects.


Joins two or more closed objects.


Punches a closed object through one or more other closed objects. The punching object is deleted.


Punches a closed object through one or more other closed objects. Unlike the Punch command, however, the Trim command does not delete the punching object.


Slices a closed object or bitmap image into separate objects.


Outlines one or more closed objects.


Opens a dialog box that lets you contour one or more objects.


Change/Align submenu


Opens the Align dialog box with To Object selected. You can use the dialog box to align several selected objects to the left, right, top, bottom, or center of one of the objects.


Opens the Align dialog box with the To Page selected. You can use the dialog box to align several selected objects to the left margin, right margin, top margin, bottom margin, horizontal center, or vertical center of the page.


Opens the Align to Path dialog box. You can use the dialog box to align several selected objects to the path formed by one of the objects.


Displays the Choose Position ribbon. You use the ribbon to specify how you want to align text to an object's path if the quick choice buttons do not provide the text alignment that you want.


Change/Transform submenu


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Move tab selected. You can use the dialog box to move selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you move.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Scale tab selected. You can use the dialog box to resize selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you scale the objects.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Flip tab selected. You can use the dialog box to flip selected objects horizontally, vertically, or at a specified angle.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Rotate tab selected. You can use the dialog box to rotate selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you rotate.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Skew tab selected. You can use the dialog box to slant selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you slant the objects.


Displays the Transform dialog box showing the transformation that you last applied, so you can apply it to the selected objects. You apply a transformation either by using the dialog box or by moving, rotating, or otherwise transforming an object.


Change/Combine submenu


Gathers separate objects together. Use the Group command when you want to create a collection of individual objects. Grouping does not change an object's appearance.


Breaks objects apart from the group and returns them to their original, ungrouped state.


Closes completely open shapes or connects and fills already closed shapes.


Combines objects with open endpoints by drawing a line between open endpoints, leaving the last side open.


Returns an object to its original, disconnected state.


Change/Order submenu


Moves the currently selected object one level toward the front.


Moves the currently selected object one level toward the back.


Moves the currently selected object to the front of all objects on the layer.


Moves the currently selected object to the back of all objects on the layer.


Reverses the stacking order of the selected objects. For example, the order 1, 2, 3, 4 becomes 4, 3, 2, 1.


Change/Text submenu


Lets you join text blocks and freeform text into a single text object. When you join text blocks, all text conforms to the font and size of the first selected text block (or the first created text block, if they are selected at the same time).


Lets you enter several lines of text and position them later. For example, if your drawing has a dozen labels, it is easier to enter the labels as a single object, and then split it and move the labels individually.


Flows text between two text blocks or between a text block and a shape.


Forces text to automatically wrap around selected objects.


Object menu


Gives you choices for adding the current object’s color attributes to the color palette.


Lets you assign names, costs, and other properties to objects.


Displays a list of objects in your drawing. You can copy, print, or save a named parts list of all the pieces of your drawing, plus lists of other defined properties.


Copies the properties of the selected object. You can then apply these properties to other objects.


Applies to selected objects the properties that you copied with Pick Up Object Properties.


Opens the EffectsBrowser, which lets you apply more than 50 different visual effects to bitmap images.


Opens the Replace dialog box which lets you replace objects in your document with objects from the Clipboard.


Lets you mask an object or create blocks of text in unusual shapes.


Lets you copy the contents of a mask for pasting elsewhere.


Lets you move the contents of a mask to change its visible parts.


Lets you remove the contents of a mask.


Hides selected objects until you use Show All to show them.


Shows objects that you have hidden with the Hide command.


Locks selected objects until you use Unlock All to unlock them. Lock objects that you want to avoid accidentally moving or resizing.


Unlocks all locked objects so you can move or edit them.


Lets you turn fill overprinting on and off. Overprinting affects only color separations. It does not affect how an object displays or prints.


Lets you turn stroke (line) overprinting on and off. Overprinting affects only color separations. It does not affect how an object displays or prints.


Opens the Object Coordinates dialog box, which gives you a method of modifying and drawing objects that is more precise than using the mouse.


Object/Add to Palette submenu


Adds the currently selected object's foreground color to the color palette.


Adds the currently selected object's background color to the color palette.


Adds the currently selected object's line color to the color palette.


Adds the currently selected object's foreground, background, and line colors to the color palette.


Lets you select specific colors in a bitmap image to add to the color palette.


Window menu


Opens another window for the current document, so that you can have an additional view of the drawing. You can use the additional view to see two different zoom levels at once or to view two different pages at once.


Arranges all open windows so that the title bar of each document is visible.


Arranges all open windows so that a view of each document is visible.


Aligns all of the icons of minimized documents in the Designer window.


This list gives you a quick way to display a specific document when you have several documents open.


Help menu


Displays a list of help topics for Designer 7.


Displays project help.


Displays a help topic that describes Designer’s compatibility with the Microsoft Office standard.


Displays the Tip of the Day.


Shows the version number, version date, and other information about your copy of Designer.


Pop-down menu items


Makes the line of selected objects a hairline.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the Line Weight options displayed. You can use these options to change the thickness of lines of selected objects.


Makes the line of selected objects invisible.

Tip

To see the outline of an object whose line and interior fill are both invisible, point to Preview on the View menu, and click Wireframe.


Opens a dialog box that lets you set line style (solid or dashed, for example), line weight (thickness), and line ends.


XXX may match galleries


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Line Fill - Solid panel selected. You can use the panel to set the line color, change the type of line fill (to gradient or image fill, for example), or set the interior fill of selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Line Fill - Gradient panel selected. You can use the panel to set the color gradient used for filling the line, change the type of line fill (to solid or image fill, for example), or set the interior fill of selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Line Fill - Hatch panel selected. You can use the panel to set the hatch pattern used for filling the line, change the type of line fill (to solid or image fill, for example), or set the interior fill of selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Line Fill - Image panel selected. You can use the panel to set the bitmap image used for filling the line, change the type of line fill (to solid or gradient fill, for example), or set the interior fill of selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Line Fill - Object panel selected. You can use the panel to set the object used for filling the line, change the type of line fill (to solid or image fill, for example), or set the interior fill of selected objects.


Makes the interior of selected objects invisible.

Tip

To see the outline of an object whose line and interior fill are both invisible, point to Preview on the View menu, and click Wireframe.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Interior Fill - Solid panel selected. You can use the panel to set the interior fill color, change the type of fill (to gradient or image fill, for example), or set the line fill of selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Interior Fill - Gradient panel selected. You can use the panel to set the colors used for filling the interior, change the type of fill (to solid or image fill, for example), or set the line fill of selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Interior Fill - Hatch panel selected. You can use the panel to set the hatch pattern used for filling the interior, change the type of fill (to solid or image fill, for example), or set the line fill of selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Interior Fill - Image panel selected. You can use the panel to set the bitmap image used for filling the interior, change the type of fill (to solid or gradient fill, for example), or set the line fill of selected objects.


Opens the Fill dialog box with the Interior Fill - Object panel selected. You can use the panel to set the object used for filling the interior, change the type of fill (to solid or image fill, for example), or set the line fill of selected objects.


Removes line-ends from the selected objects.


Opens the Object Format dialog box with the Line Ends options displayed. You can use these options to change the symbols attached to the ends of lines of open objects.


Shortcut menu items


Lets you use straight edges to edit a warp envelope.


Lets you use curves to edit a warp envelope.


Lets you use curves and control points to edit a warp envelope.


Traces the entire bitmap image. If you prefer to trace only a portion of the image, drag to define the area.


Leaves the bitmap image visible after it is traced.


Hides the bitmap image after it is traced so that only the traced objects appear.


Sets the trace quality to fine.


Sets the trace quality to average.


Sets the trace quality to coarse.


Tells Designer to use lines, not curves, to create the tracing.


Tells Designer to use curves, not lines, to create the tracing.


Makes white areas of a monochrome bitmap-image transparent.


Makes white areas of a monochrome bitmap-image opaque.


Palette menu (pops up from several places)


Opens the Color Picker dialog box.


Sets whether the color palette shows color swatches or names.


Lets you choose whether or not you want Designer to sort the color swatches in the current palette as you edit, add, or delete colors.


Sorts the color swatches in the current palette according to the criterion that you click. If you choose Descending, the color with the greatest value of the selected criterion is listed first. If you choose Ascending, the color with the greatest value is listed last.


Lets you choose from available palettes.


Opens a dialog box that lets you manage Designer's palettes in many ways, including choosing a palette or set of palettes, creating a new palette, and deleting, renaming, recalling, and merging palettes.


Coordinates menu (pops up from the coordinates button on the status bar)


Displays the value of the symbol's width and height. The values display in the status bar next to the Coordinates button.


Displays the value of the symbol's length and angle. The values display in the status bar next to the Coordinates button.


Displays the coordinates of two points of a selected symbol: the symbol origin, and the symbol end. The coordinates display in the status bar to the right of the Coordinates button.


Displays Cartesian coordinates in the status bar. Cartesian coordinates use the familiar vertical and horizontal axes. The vertical axis is called Y and the horizontal axis is called X.

You can quickly reset the ruler origin to its default position at the corner of the page by double-clicking the button at the intersection of the two rulers.


Displays polar coordinates in the status bar, with angles measured in radians. Polar coordinates measure the distance from the center, and the angle from the axis.


Displays polar coordinates in the status bar, with angles measured in degrees. Polar coordinates measure the distance from the center, and the angle from the axis.


Line Length menu (pulls down from a button on the Drawing ribbon)


Displays the length of the selected line, using current line-length viewing options. You can set these options by clicking the Line Length button and then clicking Options.


Hides the length of the selected line.


Displays a dialog box that lets you specify how you want the line length of an object displayed.


Fill Options menu (pulls down from a button on the Style ribbon) - gone away


Fills overlapping areas in a selected object.

Fill overlaps	Skip overlaps


Skips overlapping areas when filling a selected object.

Fill overlaps	Skip overlaps


Fills the interior of the selected object, and then draws the object's line. Does not apply to objects with hairlines.

Fill Before	Fill After


Draws the object's line, and then fills the object's interior. Does not apply to objects with hairlines.

Fill Before	Fill After


Profile menu (pulls down from a button on the Profile tab of the Options dialog box)


Lets you create a new file to store the current Designer settings. Displays a dialog box in which you enter the name of the new profile.


Lets you copy the current Designer profile to a new file. Displays a dialog box in which you enter the name of the new file.


Lets you delete the current Designer profile document. Displays a dialog box that asks for confirmation before deleting the file.


Lets you rename the current Designer profile document. Displays a dialog box in which you enter the new filename.


Applies the settings of the current Designer profile document.


System menus (both for the Designer window and any child window)


Restores the window to its previous size and location.


Lets you use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the window.


Lets you use the arrow keys on the keyboard to change the size of the window.


Reduces the window to a button on the taskbar.


Enlarges the window to fill the screen.


Closes the Designer window or the active Designer document. If you have made changes that you have not saved, Close prompts you to save the changes.


Displays the next open document.


CSH_TOOL.DOC - Context Sensitive for Tools and Buttons


Permanent buttons


Rulers help you to position and size objects precisely. Also, if you turn on Snap to Rulers on the Tools menu, objects are automatically attracted to the ruler divisions as you move and size the objects.


Rulers help you to position and size objects precisely. Also, if you turn on Snap to Rulers on the Tools menu, objects are automatically attracted to the ruler divisions as you move and size the objects.


When the rulers are on, you can change the ruler origin by dragging from this corner. The ruler origin is the point, on or off the page, where the two rulers intersect at zero.

The default position for the ruler origin is at the upper left corner of the page. You can quickly reset the origin to its default position by double-clicking this corner.


Opens the Page menu. Use this menu to add pages, update the master page, move to a different page, or open the Pages dialog box to name, add, and delete pages.


Opens the Layer menu. Use this menu to add layers, move to a different layer, or open the Layers dialog box to name, add, delete, rearrange, color, hide or unhide, and lock or unlock layers.


Miscellaneous buttons


For help, click this button and then click any tool, button, or menu item.


Displays a help topic that describes Designer’s compatibility with the Microsoft Office standard.


Lets you create custom units for your rulers and measurements.


Opens FlowCharter.


Opens Picture Publisher.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Move tab selected. You can use the dialog box to move selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you move.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Scale tab selected. You can use the dialog box to resize selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you scale.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Flip tab selected. You can use the dialog box to flip selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you flip.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Rotate tab selected. You can use the dialog box to rotate selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you rotate.


Opens the Transform dialog box with the Skew tab selected. You can use the dialog box to skew selected objects with a high degree of precision. You can leave a specified number of evenly spaced copies as you skew.


Flips an object horizontally.


Flips an object vertically.


Opens the Extrusion Options dialog box.


Opens a dialog box to let you send the current Designer document as mail, using MS Mail.


Estimates the time it would take to download the current document in various file formats at various modem speeds.


Locks and unlock guides.


Lets you choose whether the text is rotated, skewed, or follows the path.


Status Bar Help


The status bar shows current information about your drawing and gives you quick access to various commands such as line weight, object fill, and coordinates.

Choose Status Bar on the View menu and choose Single to display the single-line status bar. Choose Double from the Status Bar submenu to display the double-line status bar.

Note

The Status Bar options on the View menu are available only when the status bar is visible.


Status Bar buttons and indicators - XXX need to check when working


Indicates that the selected object has had one or more transformations applied.

To remove all transformations and restore the original, untransformed object, click Reset Transform on the Change menu.


Shows the line style and weight of the currently selected object. If no object is selected, the default line style and weight is shown.

Click this button to open the Line Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box.

Note

If multiple objects are selected, or if an object group is selected, this button shows the line style of the object that was drawn first.


Shows the interior fill of the currently selected object. If no object is selected, the default interior fill is shown.

Click this button to open the Interior Fill tab of the Object Format dialog box.

Note

If multiple objects are selected, or if an object group is selected, this button shows the interior fill of the object that was drawn first.


Adds or removes snap points for the selected object. This button is visible only when the status bar is displayed. The keyboard shortcut for adding snap points is CTRL+F7. The keyboard shortcut for removing snap points is CTRL+SHIFT+F7.

Note

Snap points are not attached to an object. That's why they don't move when you move or delete the object. Snap points do not print.


Turns snap-to-rulers/guides on and off. This button shows only when the status bar is displayed.


Opens a menu that lets you change the coordinate system. You can also open a dialog box that lets you use numeric coordinates to control editing and drawing actions that usually require the mouse. This button shows only when the status bar is displayed. (CTRL+Q)


Designer displays this indicator while redrawing the screen.


Shows the current zoom level as a percent of actual size.


Fits the current page in the window. This button shows only when a double line status bar is displayed. (SHIFT+F6)


Magnifies the view by a factor of two. This button shows only when a double line status bar is displayed. (F6)


Shrinks the view by a factor of two. This button shows only when a double line status bar is displayed. (CTRL+SHIFT+F6)


Indicates that Designer is tracing a bitmap image.

Tracing a complex bitmap image, especially a multicolor image, can take several minutes. Tracing is implemented as a threaded action, so you can continue to work while a bitmap image is being traced. Press ESC to stop the tracing before it is completed.


Toolbox


Displays the Select pointer and switches to select mode. (CTRL+E)


Displays the Select pointer and switches to rotate/skew mode.


Lets you edit a selection. The edit methods that are available depend upon the type of object selected.


Lets you change your view of a drawing. The View tool set opens when you click this tool.


Lets you draw basic linear and curving shapes. The Simple Line ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+D)


Lets you draw linear and curving shapes that contain multiple points. The Compound Line ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+SHIFT+W)


Lets you draw rectangles, squares, and rounded rectangles. The Rectangle ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+SHIFT+X)


Lets you draw polygons, stars, megagons, and curvygons. The Polygon ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+SHIFT+Y)


Lets you draw ellipses, circles, arcs, and pies. The Ellipse ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+SHIFT+Z)


Lets you enter and edit text. The Text ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+T)


Lets you draw dimension and callout lines. The Dimension/Callout ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+ZERO)


Lets you edit bitmap images. The Image ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+W)


Lets you select interior fills, line fills, line weights, line styles, text colors, and other attributes for objects. The Format ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+L)


Lets you view, move, and print pages in Designer. It also lets you create slideshows using each page as a slide. The Page Manager ribbon appears when you click this tool. (CTRL+G)


Standard Toolbar


Adds snap points to selected objects. (CTRL+F7)


Removes all snap points from the drawing area. (CTRL+SHIFT+F7)


Shows or hides the Color Palette toolbar.


Shows or hides the Drawing toolbar.


Shows the current magnification as a percentage of actual size. You can enter a value in the range 1 through 25400, or you can click the arrow next to the value and choose a zoom level from the menu.


General Ribbon Buttons


Forces objects to draw only in 15-degree increments.

This button remains on until you click it again to turn it off. You cannot use angle constraint for rotating and skewing.


Forces rectangles to draw as squares and ellipses to draw as circles.

This button remains on until you click it again to turn it off.


Reverses the direction that Designer normally draws those objects that are drawn from a single side.


Forces an object to draw from the center outward.


Simple Line Ribbon


Lets you draw straight line segments.


Lets you draw lines that are parallel to line segments, or tangent to arcs and ellipses.


Lets you draw lines that are at right angles to line segments, arcs, and ellipses.


Lets you draw an arc that is one quarter of an ellipse.


Lets you draw parabolic shapes.


Compound Line Ribbon


Lets you draw shapes that are a "chain" of connected straight lines.


Lets you draw objects that are a "chain" of connected, curved lines.


Lets you draw Bezier spline curves. A B-Spline is a curve drawn inside a wedge created by two construction lines. For example, "V" shaped construction lines would create a "U" shaped object.


Lets you draw Bezier curves.


Lets you draw freeform objects.


Lets you draw closed objects with multiple sides.


Rectangle Ribbon


Lets you draw rectangles by dragging from one corner to its opposite.


Lets you draw squares by dragging only one side.


Lets you draw rectangles by drawing the height and then the width.


Lets you draw rectangles with rounded corners. The rounding radius is determined by the setting in the Rounding box.


Shows the current curvature radius. You can click the box and type a value, or use the arrows next to the box to select a value. A larger radius increases the curvature, a smaller radius decreases it.


Polygon Ribbon


Lets you draw a polygon from the center to a corner.


Lets you draw a polygon from the center of the polygon to the middle of a side.


Lets you draw a polygon by drawing just one side.


Lets you draw a star from the center to a point.


Lets you draw a star from the center to a side.


Lets you draw a star by drawing two of its points.


Lets you draw a megagon.


Lets you draw a curvygon.


Lets you set the number of sides for a polygon, or the number of points for a star, megagon, or curvygon.


Ellipse Ribbon


Lets you draw ellipses by dragging from one corner of the bounding box to its opposite.


Lets you draw ellipses by dragging the height and then the width of the bounding box.


Lets you draw a circle by dragging its diameter.


Lets you draw a circle by specifying three points of its edge.


Lets you draw an arc by specifying two end points and an arching point.


Lets you draw pies by modifying an existing ellipse.


Text Ribbon


Lets you enter and edit text. You can click in the drawing area and enter freeform text, or you can drag a container and enter block text.


Lets you enter text along the edge of a selected object.


Lets you fit freeform text to a path or edit the arrangement of text already fit to a path. The Path Fit button displays a palette of "quick choice" text alignment buttons, and the Choose Position and Remove Curve buttons.


Lets you enter text inside of a selected (closed) object.


Lets you select from the last ten fonts used.


Displays the name of the current font or the font of the text that contains the text cursor. Use the down arrow next to the Font list box to display a list of available fonts and to choose a font.


Shows the current point size or the point size of the text that contains the text cursor.

To change the font size, you can either use the arrows next to the Font Size box or you can enter a size in the range of 2 to 3000 points (10.5, for example).


Converts selected text to bold. (CTRL+B)


Converts selected text to italic. (CTRL+I)

Note

Text underlines may disappear if you apply italic.


Converts selected text to underlined. (CTRL+U)

Note

Text underlines may disappear if you apply some attributes, such as italic, or convert the text to curves, rotate it, or change the color of an edge.


Converts selected text to small capital letters. (CTRL+M)


Lets you change the horizontal alignment of selected text. When you align freeform text, the text is aligned based on the point where you originally placed the text. For example, if you are aligning to the right and click to enter freeform text, the text extends to the left as you type.


Lets you change the vertical alignment of selected text. When you align freeform text, the text is aligned based on the point where you originally placed the text.


Text Ribbon - Quick Choice Buttons


Displays the Choose Position ribbon, which lets you separately set the alignment, position, offset, direction, and pitch of the text.


Positions text so the left edge of the text aligns to the alignment point.


Centers text around the alignment point.


Positions text so the right edge of the text aligns to the alignment point.


Positions the text above an open path object or outside of a closed path object.


Positions the text below an open path object or inside of a closed path object.


Controls the distance between the text and the path.


Aligns text in a counter clockwise direction. This generally displays the text upside down in relation to the top of the path.


Aligns text in a clockwise direction. This generally displays the text rightside up in relation to the top of the path.


Aligns the text by rotating the characters along the path.


Aligns the text by skewing the text characters vertically.


Aligns the text by skewing the text characters horizontally.


Aligns the text without skewing or rotating the text characters.


Removes text from a path.


Dimension/Callout Ribbon


Lets you draw dimension lines to show the diagonal distance between two points.


Lets you draw dimension lines to show the horizontal distance between two points.


Lets you draw dimension lines to show the vertical distance between two points.


Lets you set dimension (and callout) options.


Lets you draw one-segment callout lines.


Lets you draw two-segment callout lines.


Lets you draw three-segment callout lines.


Lets you set callout (and dimension) options.


Displays a dimension or callout line’s handles. You can reshape the line by dragging its handles.


Shows the current decimal precision of the dimension units of measure. You can use the down arrow next to the list box to select a new precision level.


Forces dimension units of measure to center align between dimension line endpoints.


Image Ribbon


Opens Picture Publisher so you can edit the selected bitmap image.

Tip

To return the image to Designer after you finish editing it, press ESC.


Lets you crop a bitmap image.


Removes all cropping from a bitmap image.


Lets you select a bitmap image color to make transparent.


Removes all transparency from a bitmap image.


Opens a palette from which you can choose the foreground color for a monochrome bitmap image.


Opens a palette from which you can choose the background color for a monochrome bitmap image.


Displays information about a selected bitmap image.


Lets you trace a bitmap image, creating a vector object.


Opens a menu that lets you adjust how accurately and smoothly Designer traces a bitmap image.


Opens a menu that lets you choose whether Designer uses lines or curves to create the tracing.


Lets you restrict the number of colors in the result of a trace. Choose the maximum number of colors that you want the trace to have.


Helps eliminate stray pixels introduced by a poor-quality image. You can enter a value ranging from 1 through 100. Larger numbers exclude larger groups of stray pixels.


Format Ribbon


Lets you choose a solid interior fill.


Sets the interior fill to no fill (transparent).


Lets you select from the last 15 interior fills applied by the Object Format dialog box.


Displays a menu of options for the type and placement of line ends. You can choose from a variety of arrows, triangles, and other line-end symbols.


Displays a menu of options for setting the style of lines (for example, dashed, or invisible).


Displays a menu of options for setting the thickness of lines.


Lets you choose a solid line fill.


Sets the line fill to no fill (transparent).


Lets you select from the last 15 line fills applied by the Object Format dialog box.


Lets you choose whether overlap areas in an object are filled or skipped.

Fill Overlaps	Skip Overlaps
An overlap area is a bounded part of a closed object that overlaps another part of the object. You can create overlap areas by drawing or reshaping objects, or by connecting objects that overlap.


Lets you choose whether an object is filled before or after its lines are drawn.

Fill Before Line	Fill After Line
This option does not apply to hairlines. If an object has both hairlines and weighted lines, only the weighted lines are affected.


Shows or hides the Style toolbar.

The Style toolbar lets you assign names to combinations of object and text attributes. After naming a style, you can assign those attributes to another object by just applying the named style to it.


Page Manager Ribbon


Lets you save the presentation as an executable program (EXE) that runs when you double click it in Explorer.


Lets you copy a standalone slideshow to one or more diskettes.


Lets you set transition options for your slideshow. Also lets you show or hide the mouse pointer during a slideshow.


Applies only to creating a standalone slideshow. Lets you select the number of colors and screen size of the computer that will run the slideshow.


Runs the slideshow, consisting of all slides in the document or only a selected range of slides.


Opens a dialog box that lets you select the pages to print along with other printing options.


Displays the Page Setup dialog box to let you set the size, margins, and orientation of the active window's on-screen page. You can change page settings before, during, or after creating a drawing.

Note

If you change the page setup, and you plan to print your work, you should change the printer setup to match the page.


Selects all pages in the document.


Deselects all selected pages in the document.


Opens a dialog box that lets you choose transition effects and advancement for slides.


Lets you choose a transition for selected slides.


Lets you change the direction of the selected transition (available when the transition direction can be changed). The appearance of this button changes to reflect the selected direction.


Lets you change the transition speed for the selected slide. Because a Replace transition is instantaneous, you cannot select this button when the transition is set to Replace.


Lets you choose to advance to the next slide with the mouse or keyboard.


Lets you choose to advance automatically to the next slide at a timed interval.


Lets you enter a duration in seconds for selected slides. The Duration box is available when the Timed button is selected.


Warp Ribbon


Applies the predefined warp shown on the button.


Lets you choose the warp type (line, curve, or Bezier).


Replaces an edited warp envelope with a new one. The object shape does not change under the new envelope.


Removes the last warp envelope and replaces it with the previous one. The object shape changes to reflect the previous envelope.


Doubles the number of vertical lines in the warp envelope grid.


Doubles the number of horizontal lines in the warp envelope grid.


Reshape Ribbon


Converts an object such as text, a rectangle, or an ellipse into a conventional object. This lets you reshape the object by dragging its anchor points. It also converts dimension and callout lines to groups, converts a Windows metafile to Designer objects, and converts other shapes to path objects and changes them so that Designer does not remember any previous transformations done to them. (CTRL+R)


Toggles between editing the object with and without fills. Editing with a fill shows the exact results, but editing without a fill is faster.


Places an anchor point where you click on an object.


Removes highlighted anchor points.


Connects two highlighted anchor points with a straight line.


Cuts through a line creating two separate anchor points with a small empty space between them.


Converts the lines connected to a selected anchor point into straight lines. If applied to two selected anchor points that are adjacent, the Corner button converts  the line between the two points into a straight line. (CTRL+5)


Converts lines connected to selected anchor points into symmetrically curved lines. (CTRL+7)


Unlocks the control points of a warp envelope so you can move the points independently. (CTRL+6)


Locks the angular relationship between opposing control points of a warp envelope so that when you drag one of the points, the opposite moves as required to keep the angle between the two points the same. (CTRL+4)


Extrude Ribbon


Lets you extrude an object so that it looks like it extends toward the right.


Lets you extrude an object so that it looks like it extends toward the left.


Lets you extrude an object so that it looks like it extends downward and toward the right.


Lets you extrude an object so that it looks like it extends downward and toward the left.


Lets you extrude an object while keeping the face (the original object) stationary.


Removes an object's extrusion.


Style Toolbar


Applies the named style shown in the list box to a selection.


Uses the attributes of a selection to redefine the named style shown in the list box.


Lets you add a new named style.


Opens the Style dialog box. Using the Style dialog box, you can add, delete, modify, and import named styles.


Shows the name of the current style. To apply a style to an object using this box, select the object, click the arrow beside the box, and click the style you want to apply.


Reference Point Toolbar


Shows or hides the reference point.


Lets you position the reference point.


Shows or hides the reference point coordinates.


Shows and lets you set the X coordinate position of the reference point.


Shows and lets you set the Y coordinate position of the reference point.


Lets you constrain object drawing, reshaping, and moving to a specified X coordinate offset from the reference point. Click this button to turn the constraint on and off. Set the offset using the spin box beside the button.


Lets you constrain object drawing, reshaping, and moving to a specified Y coordinate offset from the reference point. Click this button to turn the constraint on and off. Set the offset using the spin box beside the button.


Lets you constrain object drawing, reshaping, and moving to a specified angle from the reference point. Click this button to turn the constraint on and off. Set the angle using the spin box beside the button.


Lets you constrain object drawing, reshaping, and moving to a specified distance from the reference point. Click this button to turn the constraint on and off. Set the distance using the spin box beside the button.


Drawing Toolbar


Displays an object’s anchor points and puts the object in Point Reshape mode. In point reshape mode, you can reshape the object by dragging its anchor points.


Displays an object’s anchor points and puts the object in Curve Reshape mode. In Curve Reshape mode, you can click an anchor point to display its control points. To reshape the object, drag the control points.


Opens a menu of alignment options.


Lets you warp selected objects.


Locks the angular relationship between opposing control points of a warp envelope so that when you drag one of the points, the opposite moves as required to keep the angle between the two points the same. (CTRL+4)


Places Designer in “duplicate” mode so that every object you move or resize creates a duplicate. This button remains on until you turn it off.


Shows the property, such as a name, assigned to selected objects and lets you enter other properties to be assigned to the objects.


Opens a menu that lets you show the length of line segments. Click Options in this menu to open a dialog box that lets you change the placement, format, and units of the line lengths.


Increases the size of selected text by two point sizes.


Reduces the size of selected text by two point sizes.


Superscripts the selected text.


Subscripts the selected text.


Aligns text to the left text margin. This is the default setting. (CTRL+SHIFT+L)


Centers text between the left and right text margins. (CTRL+SHIFT+C)


Aligns text to the right text margin. (CTRL+SHIFT+R)


Aligns text to the left and right margins. The last line in a paragraph aligns to the left margin. (CTRL+SHIFT+J)


Aligns text, including the last line in a paragraph, to the left and right margins. (CTRL+SHIFT+F)


Aligns text to the top margin. This is the default setting. (CTRL+SHIFT+O)


Aligns text between the top and bottom margins. (CTRL+SHIFT+M)


Aligns text to the bottom margin. (CTRL+SHIFT+B)


Equally spaces lines of text between the top and bottom margins.


Opens the Text Attributes dialog box. This dialog box lets you change fonts, margins, spacing, and tab settings. (CTRL+SHIFT+T)


Checks the spelling of selected text (or the entire document if no text is selected). Opens a dialog box if a misspelling is found.


Lets you hide the bitmap image after it is traced so that only the traced objects appear.


Lets you make the white areas of a monochrome bitmap-image transparent.


Lets you choose a line fill. You can fill a line with a solid color, gradient, hatch, image, or object. The appearance of this button changes to reflect the current line fill, weight, and style.


Lets you choose how to fill an object that has been folded onto itself. The Fill Options button also lets you choose whether to display an object’s lines in front of, or behind the interior fill.


Lets you choose an interior fill. You can fill an object with a solid color, gradient, hatch, image, or object. The appearance of this button changes to reflect the current interior fill.


Opens a menu that lets you manage Designer’s colors and palettes.


View toolset


Lets you see and edit objects in fine detail. Drag a rectangle to define the area you want to magnify or click the left mouse button to magnify the view by two times. (F6)

Note

After selecting Zoom In, you can switch the tool to Zoom Out by holding down the SHIFT key. Releasing the SHIFT key switches the tool back to Zoom In.


Returns to the view used just prior to the current view. (SHIFT+F3)


Zooms in on the portion of the current page that contains objects. (CTRL+SHIFT+F3)


Lets you view just your work, without menus, title bar, or any other part of the Designer window. Press ESC or click the mouse button to return to the previous view. (F4)


Enlarges the viewing area by a factor of two. (CTRL+SHIFT+F6)


Displays objects at the same size they print.


Fits the current page in the window. This is the default view.


Redraws the drawing. This lets you clear the screen of unwanted fragments that sometimes result from manipulating objects. The double line status bar shows the redraw indicator [image] while redrawing is in progress.


Shows or hides the Reference Point toolbar.


Lets you draw a polygon and convert it to a star.


Shows the number of sides on the next polygon that you draw. You can click the box and type a value, or use the arrows next to the box to select a value.